Translated from the French.

If any misunderstanding or
misinterpretation arise herefrom, the original French text alone is valid.
In case the CD Rom content differs from the printed text,
the printed text alone is valid.

SECTION II
Design and Construction Rules for Mechanical
Components of PWR Nuclear Islands
Z I SUBSECTIONS A - GENERAL RULES

MATERIAL
Z - TECHNICAL ANNEXES

2012 Edition afcen

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum SECTION II - Part 1

SECTION II

MATERIALS

Part 1

Pages

M 000 GENERAL

M 100 GENERAL PROVISIONS ................................................................................................. M000/1

M 110 GENERAL ORGANISATION AND SCOPE OF SECTION II .................................... /1

M 120 ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL PROVISIONS ............................... /4

M 130 RESIDUAL ELEMENTS ........................................................................................................ /4a

M 140 PRODUCT AND SHOP QUALIFICATION ...................................................................... /4b

M 150 HEAT TREATMENT ............................................................................................................... /12

M 160 PROTOTYPE PARTS ............................................................................................................ /13

M 170 PROTOTYPE SERIES OF HEAT EXCHANGER TUBES .......................................... /17

M 200 STEELS AND ALLOYS..................................................................................................... M000/21

M 220 AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEELS ................................................................................. /21

M 300 PRODUCTS AND PARTS................................................................................................ M000/25

M 310 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................... /25

M 320 FORGED OR ROLLED BARS ............................................................................................ /25

M 330 PLATE ......................................................................................................................................... /30

M 340 PIPES AND TUBES ...................................................................................................... /34

M 350 FORGINGS ................................................................................................................................ /39

M 360 CASTINGS ................................................................................................................................. /45

M 370 BASE METAL TEST COUPONS ....................................................................................... /53

M 380 FORGING RATIO .................................................................................................................... /57

 n° 140-2013 M / 1
RCC-M - 2012 Edition SECTION II - Part 1

M 1000 CARBON STEELS .................................................................................................... M1000/0

M 1110 CASTINGS

M 1111 Carbon steel channel head castings for PWR steam generators ....................................... /1
M 1112 Class 1, 2 and 3 pressure retaining carbon steel castings .................................................. /21
M 1114 Cast carbon steel steam solution valve bodies .................................................................... /41
M 1115 Carbon or alloy steel motor support stand castings for PWR coolant pumps ................ /55

M 1120 FORGINGS

M 1121 Carbon steel forgings for class 2 and 3 tube plates ............................................................ /71
M 1122 Class 1, 2 and 3 carbon steel forgings .................................................................................. /81
M 1122 bis Class 1, 2 and 3 carbon steel drop forgings......................................................................... /87
M 1123 Carbon steel forgings for class 2 and 3 auxiliary pump shafts ......................................... /93
M 1124 Type P280 GH carbon steel rolled or forged parts............................................................. /103
M 1125 Forged die-formed elbows made from type P 280 GH carbon steel................................ /113

M 1130 PLATES

M 1131 Class 1, 2 and 3 carbon steel plates ...................................................................................... /123

M 1132 Class 1, 2 and 3 dished parts made from carbon steel ....................................................... /129
M 1133 Hot or cold worked carbon steel fittings welded with the
addition of filler metal for use in class 2 and 3 auxiliary piping ...................................... /135
M 1134 Class S1 and S2 steel plates beams and commercial grade bars
for general structural use........................................................................................................ /143

M 1140 PIPES AND TUBES

M 1141 Class 2 seamless pipe made from type TU 42 C and TU 48 C

carbon steel .............................................................................................................................. /145
M 1142 Type P 235 GH and P 265 GH, rolled carbon steel pipes welded
without the addition of filler metal for use in class 2 and 3 piping ................................. /157
M 1143 Class 2 and 3 P235GH and P265GH carbon steel seamless tubes ................................... /163
M 1143 Bis Class 2 P 355 NH steel seamless tubes ........................................................................ /167
M 1144 Type P280 GH seamless forged carbon steel pipes .......................................................... /171
M 1145 Hot or cold rolled carbon steel pipe welded with the addition of
filler metal for use in class 2 and 3 auxiliary piping .......................................................... /181
M 1146 Carbon steel seamless tubes for class S1 and S2 supports ................................................ /189
M 1147 Seamless drawn carbon steel tubes for class 2 and 3 heat exchangers ............................ /191
M 1148 Type TS 42 C and TS 48 C hot or cold rolled carbon steel pipes welded
without the addition of filler metal for use in class 2 piping ............................................ /199
M 1149 Hot or cold worked carbon steel weld fittings for use in
secondary and auxiliary piping ............................................................................................. /211

M 1150 PIPES AND TUBES (cont.)

M 1151 Hot or cold worked carbon steel weld fittings for use in
class 3 piping ........................................................................................................................... /219
M 1152 Type P280 GH seamless carbon steel pipes ........................................................................ /221

M / 2  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition SECTION II - Part 1

M 2000 ALLOY STEELS ........................................................................................................ M2000/0

M 2100 MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM STEELS

M 2110 FORGINGS

M 2111 Forgings for PWR shells in the beltline region .................................................................. /1

M 2111 Bis Forgings for PWR shells in the beltline region obtained from hollow ingots ............... /17
M 2112 Forgings for PWR shells outside the beltline region ........................................................ /33
M 2112 Bis Forgings for PWR shells outside the beltline region obtained
from hollow ingots ................................................................................................................. /49
M 2113 Forgings for transition rings and flanges of PWR vessels ............................................... /65
M 2114 Forgings for PWR vessel nozzles ........................................................................................ /83
M 2115 18 MND 5 steel forgings for PWR steam generator tube plates ..................................... /97
M 2115 Bis 20 MND 5 steel forgings for PWR steam generator tube plates ..................................... /111
M 2116 Forgings for PWR steam generator support rings ............................................................. /125
M 2117 Main flange forgings for PWR coolant pumps .................................................................. /139
M 2119 18 MND 5 steel forgings for PWR components ................................................................ /149
M 2119 Bis 20 MND 5 steel forgings for PWR components ................................................................ /163

M 2120 PLATES

M 2121 Heavy alloy steel plates for PWR vessels........................................................................... /177

M 2122 Dished heads for PWR vessels ............................................................................................. /189
M 2125 18 MND 5 steel plates 30 to 110 mm thick for PWR pressurizer
and steam generator supports ............................................................................................... /205
M 2126 18 MND 5 steel plates for PWR pressure - Retaining boundaries .................................. /217
M 2126 Bis 20 MND 5 steel plates for PWR pressure - Retaining boundaries .................................. /233
M 2127 18 MND 5 steel hot-formed weldless heads
for PWR pressure-retaining boundaries .............................................................................. /249
M 2128 Heads obtained by hot forming of two welded half-plates made of
18 MND 5 steel for PWR pressure retaining boundaries ................................................. /263

M 2130 FORGINGS (CONTINUATION OF M 2110)

M 2131 Forgings for pressurizer heads and reactor vessel heads .................................................. /277
M 2131 Bis 20 MND 5 steel forgings for pressurizer heads ................................................................. /293
M 2132 Forgings for PWR reactor coolant pump shaft assemblies .............................................. /307
M 2133 18 MND 5 steel forgings for steam generator shells and pressurizer shells .................. /317
M 2133 Bis 20 MND 5 steel forgings for steam generator shells and pressurizer shells .................. /331
M 2134 18 MND 5 steel ellipsoidal domes for steam generator.................................................... /345
M 2134 bis 20 MND 5 steel ellipsoidal domes for steam generator.................................................... /361
M 2135 Forgings for pressurized water nuclear reactor shells with integrated flanges.............. /377

 n° 137-2012 M / 3
RCC-M - 2012 Edition SECTION II - Part 1

M 2140 MISCELLANEOUS

M 2141 Heavy steel plates for PWR steam generator channel head forgings ............................. /395
M 2142 PWR steam generator channel head forgings made from dished,
pierced steel plate .................................................................................................................... /399
M 2143 18 MND 5 steel forgings for PWR steam generator
channel heads........................................................................................................................... /413
M 2143 Bis 20 MND 5 steel forgings for PWR steam generator
channel heads........................................................................................................................... /427

M 2300 NICKEL-CHROMIUM-MOLYBDENUM STEELS

M 2310 BOLTING

M 2311 Forged steel bars for use in making PWR vessel studs ..................................................... /441
M 2312 Hot-worked steel bars with or without vanadium, used in making bolts
for PWR vessels and coolant pumps .................................................................................... /451

M 2320 PLATES

M 2321 PWR reactor coolant pump disk flywheels made from

nickel-chromium-molybdenum alloy steel plate ................................................................ /463

THE FOLLOWING CHAPTERS ARE GIVEN IN SECTION II

PART 2

M 3000 STAINLESS STEELS

M 4000 SPECIAL ALLOYS

M 5000 MISCELLANEOUS

M 6000 CASTINGS

M / 4  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition SECTION II - Part 2

SECTION II

MATERIALS
PART 2

Pages

M 3000 STAINLESS STEELS ........................................................................................... M3000/0

M 3200 MARTENSITIC STAINLESS STEELS

M 3201 Steel castings for non-pressure-retaining internal,
category A, B and C parts of pumps ................................................................................... /1
M 3202 Rolled or forged parts for class 2 and 3
auxiliary pump drive shafts .................................................................................................. /19
M 3203 13% chromium plates for use in making
PWR steam generator support plates .................................................................................. /31
M 3204 Class 2 and 3 forgings........................................................................................................... /41
M 3205 Grade Z12 CN 13 forgings used for internal hold down springs ................................... /51
M 3206 Rolled or forged bars for use in manufacturing class 2 and 3
control valve blanks or cages ............................................................................................... /61
M 3207 Seamless pipes made from steel with chromium for the control rod
of PWR reactor control rod drive mechanisms ................................................................. /71
M 3208 Class 1, 2 and 3 pressure-retaining castings ..................................................................... /79

M 3300 AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEELS

M 3301 Class 1, 2 and 3 forgings and drop forgings ...................................................................... /97
M 3302 Forged disks made from grade Z3 CN 18-10 controlled nitrogen content
used in the manufacture of PWR core supports and upper support plates .................... /109
M 3303 Cold finished seamless tubes for class 1, 2 and 3 heat exchangers ................................ /119
M 3304 Class 1, 2 and 3 pipes and tubes
(not intended for use in heat exchangers) .......................................................................... /131
M 3305 Not use
M 3306 Class 1, 2 and 3 rolled or forged bars and semi-finished products................................. /143
M 3307 Class 1, 2 and 3 plates........................................................................................................... /155
M 3308 Strain hardened hot worked rolled or forged bars  50 mm
in diameter used for the fabrication of bolting material
for reactor internals ............................................................................................................... /167
M 3309 Niobium stabilized steel forgings for the manufacture
of shafts for PWR reactor coolant pumps .......................................................................... /175

 n° 137-2012 M / 1
RCC-M - 2012 Edition SECTION II – Part 2

M 3310 Grade Z2 CN 19-10 controlled nitrogen content steel plates from 10 mm

to 100 mm thick used for the manufacture of PWR reactor internals............................ /183
M 3311 Forgings for class 2 and 3 tubes plates ............................................................................... /191
M 3312 Class 1, 2 and 3 dished parts................................................................................................ /201
M 3313 No use
M 3314 Cold-rolled pipe welded with the addition of filler metal
for use in class 1, 2 and 3 auxiliary piping ........................................................................ /207
M 3315 Fittings welded with the addition of filler metal for use
in class 1, 2 and 3 auxiliary piping ..................................................................................... /213
M 3316 Class S1 and S2 plate, sheet and strip ................................................................................ /219
M 3317 Weld fittings for use in class 1, 2 and 3 piping ................................................................. /221
M 3318 No use
M 3319 Rolled tubes welded without the addition of filler metal and
subsequently drawn for use in class 1, 2 and 3 heat exchangers .................................... /229
M 3320 Class 1, 2 and 3 rolled pipes and tubes welded without the addition of filler metal
and subsequently drawn (not intended for use in heat exchangers) ............................... /241
M 3321 Forged tubes and elbows made from grade X2 CrNi 19.10 controlled nitrogen
content and X2 CrNiMo 18.12 controlled nitrogen content austenitic
stainless steel for reactor coolant piping ............................................................................ /253

M 3400 AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC STAINLESS STEELS

M 3401 Castings for PWR reactor coolant pump casings.............................................................. /266
M 3402 Class 1, 2 and 3 pressure-retaining castings ...................................................................... /279
M 3403 Cast inclined elbows and nozzles for reactor coolant system piping ............................. /297
M 3404 No use
M 3405 Non-pressure-retaining category A, B and C cast internal pump parts ......................... /311
M 3406 Centrifugally cast pipes for pwr reactor coolant system piping ..................................... /329
M 3407 Non-pressure-retaining category A, B and C
cast internal pump parts in class 3 ..................................................................................... /341

M 4000 SPECIAL ALLOYS.................................................................................................. M 4000/0

M 4100 NICKEL-CHROMIUM-IRON ALLOYS

M 4102 Forged or rolled class 1, 2 and 3 parts................................................................................ /1
M 4103 Hot rolled nickel-chromium-iron alloy plates for class 1, 2 and 3 components ........... /11
M 4104 Grade NC 15 Fe TNb A rolled bars used for the fabrication of
bolting material for internals support pins and bolting .................................................... /19
M 4105 Nickel-chromium-iron (NC 30 Fe) alloy seamless pipes for PWR
steam generator tube bundles............................................................................................... /27
M 4106 NC 30 Fe forged or rolled class 1, 2 and 3 parts (to be issued later) ............................. /41
M 4107 Hot rolled NC 30 Fe plates .................................................................................................. /43
M 4108 Hot extruded NC 30 Fe tubes .............................................................................................. /51
M 4109 Hot rolled or extruded NC 30 Fe bars ................................................................................ /59

M / 2  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum SECTION II - Part 2

M 4300 COPPER-ALUMINIUM ALLOYS

M 4301 Class 3 for PWR auxiliary system pumps and valves .................................................... /67

M 4400 TITANIUM AND TITANIUM ALLOYS

M 4401 Titanium plate for use in the fabrication of class 3

plate heat exchangers ............................................................................................................ /81

M 5000 MISCELLANEOUS.................................................................................................. M 5000/0

M 5110 ROLLED OR FORGED BARS FOR BOLTING, VALVE STEMS

AND OTHER PARTS, FOR CLASS 1, 2 AND 3 ............................................................. /1

M 5120 ROLLED OR FORGED BARS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF CLASS 1,

2 AND 3 NUTS ...................................................................................................................... /27

M 5130 CARBON STEEL PLATE CLAD WITH AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL

USED FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF CLASS 2 AND 3 COMPONENTS................. /41

M 5131 Dished heads manufactured from class 2 clad plate ......................................................... /45

M 5140 CLASS 1, 2 AND 3 STUDS, SCREWS, THREADED RODS AND NUTS

FOR COMPONENTS OF PRESSURIZED WATER REACTORS................................. /51

M 5150 ROLLED OR FORGED BARS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF CLASS S1

AND S2 SHAFTS, TIE-RODS AND SUPPORT BOLTS ................................................ /61

M 5160 BEARING CHROMIUM STEEL BARS FOR USE IN MAKING BALL

BUSHING JOINTS FOR STEAM GENERATOR AND REACTOR
COOLANT PUMP SNUBBERS .......................................................................................... /75

M 5170 ALLOY FORGINGS OR DROP FORGINGS FOR USE IN REACTOR

COOLANT SYSTEM SUPPORTS...................................................................................... /77

M 5180 12 MDV6 STEEL CASTINGS FOR USE IN THE FABRICATION

OF SUPPORTS ..................................................................................................................... /91

M 5190 HOT OR COLD FORMED SPRINGS FOR CLASS 1,

2 AND 3 SAFETY VALVES................................................................................................. /107

M 6000 IRON CASTINGS...................................................................................................... M 6000/0

M 6100 LAMELLAR IRON CASTINGS

M 6200 IRON CASTINGS DUCTILE IRON CASTINGS

M 6201 Class 2 and 3 type EN-GJS-350-22U-RT and FGS Ni 20 Cr 2

unalloyed and alloyed ductile iron castings ....................................................................... /1

 n° 140-2013 M / 3
RCC-M - 2012 Edition SECTION II – Part 2

M / 4  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 100

M 100

GENERAL PROVISIONS

M 110 GENERAL ORGANIZATION AND SCOPE OF SECTION II

SECTION II is basically divided into two parts:
- chapters M 200 and M 300 cover general provisions applicable to, firstly, steel and alloys and
secondly, parts and products,
- specifications providing the requirements for procurement of a given part or product. When a
part or product is covered by a procurement specification, the requirements given in chapters
M 200 and M 300 shall be applicable, unless special provisions are contained in this
specification.
Chapters 2000 entitled "MATERIALS" in the subsections of SECTION I, which may be
supplemented by requirements given in the equipment specification, specify how the requirements
of SECTION II are to be applied to components subject to the RCC-M.
These chapters specify whether a part of product procurement specification is applicable or whether
the general provisions only are applicable.

M 111 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN THE PURCHASE ORDER

M 111.1 General case
Purchase orders for foundry products (bars, plate, forgings, castings, pipes and tubes) must:
- refer to a part or product procurement specification or where there is no procurement
specification to a special procurement specification,
- include a technical appendix providing the following supplementary information :
. quantity ordered,
. form of the product,
. nominal dimensions,
. tolerances for size or weight,

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 1
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 100

. grade,
. when necessary, requirements specifically stipulated by the procurement specification or the
standard.
- include, if necessary, a second annex consisting of the special procurement specification.

M 111.2 Procurement from "RCC-M stocks"

Part or product stock procurement as per the RCC-M is authorized, and the product manufacturer
may procure materials through stock sampling.

Suppliers may constitute “RCC-M stocks” of parts which are subject to the provisions of M160
(with the exception of those mentioned in M140) on condition that a prototype part has already been
validated and that the parts held in stock were manufactured within the range of validity of the
prototype part.

Similarly, suppliers may constitute "RCC-M stocks" of tubes which are subject to the provisions of
M 170 (with the exception of those mentioned in M 140) on condition that a prototype series has
already been validated and that the tubes held in stock were manufactured within the range of
validity of the prototype series.

Suppliers are not permitted to constitute "RCC-M stocks" of parts which are subject to qualification
according to M 140.

Suppliers are not permitted to constitute "RCC-M stocks" of products for which procurement is
subject to the requirements of M 111.3.
The company accumulating the stock shall manufacture his parts or products in accordance with the
applicable procurement specifications and shall apply the provisions of M 111.1 when processing
purchase orders.
The company shall dispose of a stock management system enabling it to provide customers with a
reproduction of records corresponding to the procurement of products from stock, and indicating the
edition of the RCC-M applied (see A 2300 for a definition of this edition).
Companies building up such stocks shall advise the Contractor or its official representative of their
composition (type of parts or products, available forms). The duties of Inspectors responsible for the
surveillance of these stocks shall be drawn up by contract, as specified in the definition of the term
"Inspector" in A 2120.

M 111.3 Procurement of small quantities of products

When a product is not available in the RCC-M stock or is not in the catalogue, the Manufacturer
may, on an exceptional basis, procure small quantities of products in accordance with French or
foreign standards, except those subject to M 140, M 160 or M 170.
Before using the product, the Manufacturer shall draw up a record indicating conformity with the
technical requirements of the purchase order, comprising:
- details of what is not available in the RCC-M stock,
- reference to the designated standard with its date of edition,
- grade (standard designation)

M 000 / 2  n° 144-2014
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 100

- type of products (tube, plate, bars, etc.),

- quantities of products to be procured,
- results of tests performed in accordance with the designated standard and with the purchase
order,
- results of additional tests not indicated in the standard but required by the order,
- the acceptance certificate, the indications of which correspond at least to those required in a
type 3.1 specific inspection certificate according to standard NF EN 10204.
This product shall not be used until the Contractor's representative has approved this record.
Any change of grade, type of product, sampling method (localisation, orientation) or non destructive
examination procedure requires an equivalence file to be drawn up and subjected to the Contractor's
approval.

 n° 144-2014 M 000 / 2 a
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 100

M 000 / 2 b  n° 144-2014
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 100

M 112 PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATIONS

Part procurement specifications provide requirements applicable to the procurement of a given part
for a specific item of equipment. There is a limited number of specifications of this type and they
are also used to specify the way in which these parts must be manufactured.
Product procurement specifications provide requirements for the procurement of products within the
limits specified at the beginning of the specification in the paragraph entitled "SCOPE". Product
procurement specifications are applicable to various items of equipment.
For the procurement of parts covered by a part procurement specification, the Manufacturer must
refer to the part procurement specification and not to a product procurement specification whose
scope may also include these parts.

M 113 INTRODUCTION OF A NEW PART MANUFACTURING PROCESS

New part manufacturing process or technological improvements to existing manufacturing
processes not covered in RCC-M Reference Procurement Specifications may be envisaged. In such
cases it will be necessary to propose adaptation of an existing Reference Procurement Specification
or propose a new one for eventual introduction into the code. This specification will need to be
validated on the basis of a report built up in the same way as for qualification according to M 140.
The procedure is as follows:
a) The Manufacturer shall first of all establish a procurement specification. This will usually be an
existing Reference Procurement Specification which is similar in nature, or a compatible
standard, stipulating systematically the options retained
b) The first part manufactured shall be qualified as per M 140 principles.
c) The Reference Procurement Specification shall be established together with the materials
supplier, the Manufacturer and AFCEN on the basis of the procurement specification mentioned
in a) above and following the results of qualification mentioned in b).

M 114 INTRODUCTION OF A NEW MATERIAL GRADE INTO THE RCC-M

If procurement of a part or product involving a new material grade using a manufacturing process
already covered by the RCCM is being considered, then the Manufacturer must first provide:
a) A justification file supporting the use of this grade for the type of considered application. The file
shall, as per a minimum, contain:
- References to existing standards and technical specifications
- Description of the metallurgical properties as well as the applied thermal and
thermomechanical heat treatments,
- The data needed for design
- The evidence that the material is suitable for use
- Its performance under service operation for the types of envisioned application,
- Feedback experience: metallurgical properties generally obtained, assessment of use for
similar applications.

 n° 140-2013 M 000 / 3
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 100

b) A Reference Procurement Specification for introduction into the RCC-M, based on the same
structure as a Reference Procurement Specification for a similar part or product.
The new grade of material may also be added to an existing Reference Procurement
Specification.
Both the file and draft Reference Procurement Specification (or modification of an existing
Reference Procurement Specification) shall be submitted to AFCEN for instruction.

M 115 EXCEPTIONAL USE OF AN UNREFERENCED MATERIAL

FOR A GIVEN APPLICATION
For specific application, the Manufacturer may propose the exceptional use of materials not
mentioned in the lists of Reference Procurement Specifications in Tables B, C, D, and G 2200
Under these conditions, a justification file supporting the use of these materials and their
procurement conditions shall be submitted for approval to the Contractor prior to any procurement
of such materials.
The justification file shall, as per a minimum, contain the following:
- References to existing standards and technical specifications.
- The data needed for design.
- The evidence that the material is suitable for the envisioned application.
- Its performance under service operation for the envisioned application.
- Feedback experience: assessment of use for similar applications.
The procurement specification shall be based on the same structure as a Reference Procurement
Specification for a similar part or product.

M 120 ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL PROVISIONS

M 121 NOT USED

M 122 STEELS SUBJECTED TO STRESS RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT

When the general provisions of chapter M 300 or the requirements of the procurement specification
include acceptance which takes into account the heat treatments to which the part is subjected
during manufacture, the Manufacturer may, in certain cases and for parts and products made from
class 2 and 3 materials, only verify the mechanical properties subsequent to heat treatment for
mechanical properties. The position of the Manufacturer must be supported by a report justifying the
lowered mechanical strength due to the specified stress relieving heat treatment. The report must
demonstrate that this reduction has been taken into account when the permissible stress values were
determined.

M 000 / 4  n° 140-2013
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 100

M 123 KEEPING OF TEST SAMPLES

The remainder of test coupons and specimens used for acceptance shall be kept by the Supplier for a
period of at least 12 months starting from the date of acceptance of the part. These provisions apply
to parts covered by a part procurement specification, and are recommended for others covered by a
product procurement specification.

M 130 RESIDUAL ELEMENTS

When a supplementary chemical analysis is performed and this analysis is more complete than the
analysis used to check the content of required elements, the results must show that the sample
contains only the usual content of residual elements other than those specified.
The elements particulary targeted are as follows:
1) for materials in contact with the reactor coolant:
- lead, mercury, sulphur, phosphorus, zinc, cadmium, tin, antimony, bismuth, arsenic, copper,
rare earths (cerium, lanthanum),
2) for materials in contact with the secondary system:
- elements with a low melting-point and their compounds, in particular : lead, mercury, arsenic,
sulphur.
Normally, there shall be no boron added to austenitic stainless steels since boron adversely affects
weldability. Consequently, the boron content of products to be welded shall not exceed 0.0018%,
for heat and product analysis.
In all cases, the boron content must be reported in the chemical analysis reports even if the boron
content is not specified in the procurement specification.

M 140 PRODUCT AND SHOP QUALIFICATION

M 141 SCOPE
The provisions of M 140 shall apply to all the following parts:
- Reactor Vessel
. upper head,
. upper head flange,
. vessel flange,
. nozzle shell course,
. core shell,
. transition zone,
. lower head,
. inlet nozzle,
. outlet nozzle.

 n° 140-2013 M 000 / 4 a
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 100

M 000 / 4 b  n° 140-2013
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 100

- Steam Generator
. ellipsoidal head,
. cylindrical shell,
. conical shell,
. tube plate,
. steam generator tubes
. channel head,
. supporting ring,
. partition plate.

- Pressurizer
. upper head,
. cylindrical shell,
. lower head,

- Reactor coolant pump set

. casing,
. main flange,
. motor stand, if within pressure retaining boundary,
. pump shaft,
. motor coupling sleeve,
. spool piece,
. motor shaft,
. flywheel.

- Primary coolant piping

. tube,
. elbow,
. safety injection oblique connection.

- Pressurizer surge line

. tube,
. elbow.

- Valves
. class 1 stamped or forged valve bodies with a nominal diameter  200 mm,
. steam shut off valve bodies,
. normal steam generator feedwater line check valve bodies.

- Reactor Internals
. core support,
. closure head ring,
. upper support plate.

- Main steam supply system

. Seamless pipe.

 n° 144-2014 M 000 / 5
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 100

M 142 GENERAL
Use of a product manufactured in accordance with a given manufacturing process in a given shop
must be preceded by the following qualification:
- product qualification,
- shop qualification.
Product qualification is performed in accordance with the requirements of M 143 to ensure that it is
fit for its intended use and that the acceptance operations and criteria are representative: products
are then procured on the basis of a series of tests known as "acceptance tests" specified in the
procurement specification.
A change of shop within the same company need not invalidate product qualification provided that
the requirements of M 144 are met.

M 143 PRODUCT OR PART QUALIFICATION

M 143.1 Scope
This qualification is used to check that a product or part, manufactured in accordance with a
specified programme, will respond satisfactorily to fabrication operations and service conditions;
product qualification is the time when the characteristics of the product may be determined,
particularly singularities and testability.

M 143.2 Qualification report

The parts or products covered by M 141 shall be the object, prior to procurement, of a qualification
report specifying all of the elements and information requested below. This report shall be drawn up
by the Supplier of the product, and shall comprise the following documents:
- the manufacturing programme (see M 143.5),
- the programme of tests to check the properties of the product or part (see M 143.6),
- the results of these tests.
Note: For a Supplier experienced in the production of similar parts obtained by following a comparable
manufacturing programme, the programme of tests for verification of properties may be scaled down and the
qualification report supplemented by a file summarizing previous manufacturing operations.

M 143.3 Validity of qualification

The information given below must be specified in the product qualification report. The Supplier
must be informed of any change to a factor or parameter which is considered to affect qualification,
and the consequences of this modification must be evaluated.
As a result of this evaluation the following may ensue:
- qualification shall be extended,
- qualification shall be extended on condition that supplementary examinations are performed,
- the product or part must be qualified or requalified.

M 000 / 6  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 100

M 143.4 Grade
The Contractor or the Manufacturer generally specifies the grade on the basis of the design criteria,
which take into account sizing, fabrication (weldability) and service conditions (corrosion,
irradiation, etc.).

M 143.5 Manufacturing programme

Parameters which the Supplier considers to be "major parameters" since they directly affect product
quality, as stipulated by the Contractor, shall be specified and listed in a manufacturing programme.
The points which must, at least, be taken into consideration are described below in paragraphs a), b),
c), d), and e).
In certain special cases difficulty may be encountered in applying these requirements: they should
be notified and the manufacturing programme modified accordingly.
In addition, the Supplier may find it necessary in his manufacturing programme to define special
requirements (examination and/or control procedures) taken to ensure suitability for use or the
quality of the product, notably for guaranteeing the absence of such defects as cracks, segregation
cracks, etc.
a) Forgings
- raw materials,
- melting process,
- chemical composition aimed at,
- weight (and type) of ingot,
- minimum top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of part(s) in ingot,
- manufacturing operations in chronological order:
. melting process,
. forging,
. machining,
. heat treatment,
. sampling,
. non-destructive examination,
- dimensional sketch of part subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and overall
ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of the part showing the rough forging profile, the profile for heat treatment and the
as-delivered profile,
- intermediate heat treatment and final heat treatment (for mechanical properties),
- position in the part of test samples for acceptance tests,
- drawing showing position of test specimens within test samples.

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 7
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 100

b) Castings
- raw materials and sand,
- melting process,
- chemical composition aimed at,
- casting process,
- method of removing samples and orientation of test specimens for acceptance tests,
- manufacturing operations in chronological order:
. mould baking process, melting process,
. pouring and mould removal,
. repairs,
. machining,
. heat treatment,
. removal of test samples,
. non-destructive examination,
- drawings of the part showing the rough casting profile, the profile for heat treatment and the
as-delivered profile,
- intermediate heat treatment and final heat treatment (for mechanical properties),
- drawing showing position of test samples within test samples.

c) Plate
- raw materials,
- melting process,
- chemical composition aimed at,
- weight (and type) of ingot,
- minimum top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position and orientation of the plate within the ingot, particularly the final rolling direction
with respect to the ingot axis,
- manufacturing operations in chronological order:
. melting process,
. cropping,
. rolling,
. heat treatment,
. sampling,
. non-destructive examination,
- indication of the direction of maximum extension,

M 000 / 8  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 100

- intermediate and final heat treatment (for mechanical properties),

- position of samples for acceptance tests,
- drawing showing position of test specimens within test samples.

d) Pipes and tubes

- raw materials,
- melting process,
- chemical composition aimed at,
- weight (and type) of ingot,
- (minimum) top and bottom end discard percentages,
- manufacturing operations in chronological order:
. melting process (remelting, if any, with ingot characteristics),
. forging or hot rolling, descaling of bars,
. machining,
. piercing, (if any),
. extrusion (if any),
. rolling or cold working,
. heat treatment,
. removal of test samples,
. finishing (dressing, bending, cutting, grinding, polishing, cleaning),
. non-destructive examinations,
- intermediate and final heat treatment (for mechanical properties),
- drawing for the removal of test samples and specimens.

e) Other types of product: rounds and flats

Paragraphs a), b) c) or d) shall be used in accordance with the fabrication process.

M 143.6 Verification of product properties

It may be necessary to perform examinations and tests, on the basis of the elements given above in
order to:
- check the internal soundness of the product,
- evaluate the homogeneity of the chemical analysis and the mechanical properties of the product,
- study in greater detail singularities identified by the manufacturing programme and, when
necessary, obtain valid data on material behaviour in these zones,

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 9
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 100

- ensure that acceptance tests are representative (with respect to parts) and that the non-destructive
examinations are suitable for the shape of the part and the type of defects associated with the
fabrication process.
- ensure non-susceptibility to intergranular corrosion, preferably on product or part.

Note : a) Evaluation of product workability is covered by other sections of the RCC-M:

- weldability, see SECTION IV S 1200 - S 3000,
- forming, see SECTION V F 4120.
Industrial references and references relative to utilization applicable to other products of the same type may
be used as supporting data for this kind of verification in which case the validity of the substitution must be
demonstrated.
b) For castings, the prototype part (see M 160) is one of the elements used for qualification. This part may be
used for verification of product properties.
c) For heat exchanger tubes of steam generators, the prototype series of heat exchanger tubes (see M 170) is
one of the qualification elements. The prototype series may be used for characterising the product
properties.

M 143.7 Acceptance tests

Once the data has been collected, it must be possible to establish the following:
- acceptance test examinations used to verify that product quality is uniform,
- examination criteria which take into account manufacturing contingencies, substantiation
requirements and the need for maximum economic efficiency.
The link between product qualification and acceptance requirements must be properly appreciated.
Examination of the qualification may necessitate different acceptance tests from those initially
stipulated in the procurement specification.

M 144 SHOP QUALIFICATION

M 144.1 Scope
The purpose of this qualification is to check that a Supplier is capable of successfully, fabricating
(and when necessary satisfactorily qualifying his process) a satisfactory product within an adequate
margin, whilst meeting the requirements of the equipment specification and the criteria of the
acceptance tests.

M 144.2 Qualification report

A qualification report must be made for shops manufacturing parts of products covered by M 141
prior to procurement. This report shall be provided by the part or product Supplier and shall provide
details of the following data or information.

M 144.3 Validity of qualification

The scope and contents of the following subheadings must be discussed in the Supplier's
qualification/report. Changes to or modification of any of the factors considered to affect the
qualification or modification of the product covered by this qualification shall be accompanied by an
evaluation of the possible consequences.

M 000 / 10  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 100

The discussion in the Supplier's report shall result in one of the following:
- qualification shall be renewed or extended,
- qualification shall be renewed or extended on condition that supplementary examinations are
performed,
- the shop must be qualified or requalified.

M 144.4 Facilities
Shops shall be equipped with suitable facilities.
A description of the following must be provided (including details of geographical location):
- major items of equipment used for steelmaking and forming,
- heat treatment facilities,
- destructive and non-destructive examination facilities,
- major facilities for chemical analysis and metallurgical research.
If the Supplier's shops are not equipped with adequate heat treatment or examination facilities the
Supplier shall state in the qualification report the conditions under which these activities are
subcontracted and shall provide the pertinent data for the operations involved.

M 144.5 Personnel and management

All personnel shall possess the requisite qualifications and competence. Personnel shall generally be
employed by the shop.

M 144.6 Industrial experience

a) Production
The following information shall be provided for each melting process and product working
operation:
- tonnage supplied of each type of grade (or category of steel),
- outside and/or permitted dimensions of products (weight, thickness, length, etc.),
- major clients and major use of new products,
- type of specifications (specifications, standards, codes, etc), commonly used.
An attempt shall be made to compare the products manufactured by the Supplier (and qualified,
as the case may be) to the Supplier's overall production, and to products of the same type (grade,
dimensions, forming process).

b) Development facilities
Current or future development which affects the supply must be reported in the following form:
- summary description of development facilities,
- research and development of grades,

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 11
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 100

- publications,

Note : For welding operations refer to SECTION IV S 6000 for qualification requirements.

M 150 HEAT TREATMENT

Heat treatment shall be performed in accordance with F 8000.

Note : If the procurement specification stipulates that thermocouples shall be placed on the product or component, the
only circumstances under which this regulation may not be applied are if the procurement specification stipulates
that F 8140 be applied.

M 151 SIMULATED HEAT TREATMENTS

Where the procurement specification specifies that the acceptance procedure shall take into account
the heat treatment(s) to which the part will be subjected during subsequent working, the test coupon
produced from the part following heat treatment for mechanical properties shall be subjected to a
simulated heat treatment.
If the procedures for carrying out simulated heat treatments are not defined in the procurement
specification, the Contractor shall supply them to the product or part Supplier. They shall be
mentioned in the manufacturing programme, when one is required.
In the case of simulated heat treatment for mechanical properties or stress relieving heat treatment,
the following requirements shall also be satisfied:

M 151.1 Simulated heat treatment

Where simulated heat treatment specified in the equipment specification comprises tempering, the
minimum holding temperature must be accurate to ± 5° C.

M 151.2 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment

Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment shall take into account all the stress-relieving heat
treatment to which the part will effectively be subjected during subsequent working.
This treatment is defined, in particular, by the following:
- The nominal holding temperature (accurate to ± 5° C), which must be set in such a way that the
corresponding temperature range coincides with the maximum range authorized during
manufacture.
- The hold time, which must be at least 80% of the sum of the hold time for the individual heat
treatments to be effectively performed during working. This hold time shall allow for incidents
during manufacture which may give rise to additional heat treatments.
Heating and cooling rates at temperatures above 400°C shall comply with the requirements
of S 7544 d 2.

M 000 / 12  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 100

M 160 PROTOTYPE PARTS

M 161 PURPOSE AND DEFINITION
The basic purpose of the prototype part is to test the manufacturing method chosen for the
production of a series of castings of a given design.
Consequently, this prototype part is subjected to:
- non-destructive examinations and eventually destructive tests, allowing the entire volume of the
part to be examined to ensure that there are no unacceptable defects,
- surface examinations (visual, liquid penetrant or magnetic particle testing) as required by the
applicable Technical Procurement Specification.
The first part manufactured by the Supplier in accordance with a given manufacturing process
(see M 164 below), if he has never manufactured the part concerned before, is considered as the
prototype part.
A Supplier may propose not producing a prototype part if he collects the results obtained in his
workshop, at the time of previous fabrication of identical parts, manufactured in accordance with the
same method as that proposed, for which non-destructive examinations or destructive tests provided
satisfactory results for the entire volume of the part.
For a limited order of castings not subjected to M 140, the Supplier may not produce a prototype
part, provided a 100% radiographic examination of the subject parts (following M 163 criteria) is
performed at the contractual acceptance stage in addition to the examinations called for by the
Technical Procurement Specification.

M 162 APPLICABILITY
- A prototype part shall be required for the fabrication of castings procured in accordance with a
product procurement specification.
- For procurement in accordance with a part procurement specification, the first part manufactured
is considered as a prototype part. This prototype part constitutes one of the qualification elements
(see M 140).
Mass production of parts shall not be started until the Manufacturer of the material, as a general rule
and also the Contractor, for parts relating to M 140 have analyzed the examination results for the
prototype part.

M 163 CONDITIONS OF EXAMINATION OF THE PROTOTYPE PART

M 163.1 Volumetric examination
Non-destructive examinations are performed before any weld repair campaign.
The basic volumetric examination consists of radiographic examination.
Prior to this examination, casting features meant to improve part soundness (e.g. feed strips, solid
hubs...) and reinforcements may be removed in accordance with the as-delivered profile.

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 13
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 100

In addition, all the areas of the prototype part that will be machined at the Manufacturer plant, at the
last stage, shall be rough machined at the foundry to dimensions as closed as possible to the final
dimensions, in agreement with the Manufacturer.
Defects detected by surface examination may be removed.
In this case, the depth of the cavity shall be limited to 5% of wall thickness at the cavity, and shall
not exceed 10 mm, even if it has not been possible to completely remove the defect.
However, the reduction in thickness due to the cavity may attain a maximum of:
- 3 mm for wall thicknesses of between 20 and 60 mm,
- 2 mm for wall thicknesses of 20 mm or less.
The cavity must blend smoothly into the surrounding surface in order not to hinder the interpretation
of the radiographic examination.
Where the entire volume of the part cannot be examined by the radiographic method, the minimum
zones to be radiographed are shown diagrammatically in MC 3240. In such cases, a supplementary
examination by the ultrasonic method may be envisaged. These examinations are, in theory,
performed in accordance with the requirements of chapters MC 3000 and MC 2000. However, the
Supplier may adopt other provisions with a view to increasing the extent of the zones examined.
Where the entire volume has not been able to be examined satisfactorily by a non-destructive
examination method, or where these examinations do not provide conclusive proof as to the
soundness of the prototype part, destructive tests may be used.
A drawing of the part, specifying the various examinations performed, shall be prepared and kept at
the disposal of the Manufacturer of the part and the Contractor.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

a) Radiographic examination
Defects such as hot tears, cracks, chaplets and chill remnants shall be unacceptable.
The applicable acceptance criteria specified by standard NF EN 12681, Annex A, are as follows
for the other types of defects:
- for weld edges: severity level 1,
- for the remainder of the part:
. class 1: severity level 2,
. class 2: severity level 2 for ends and severity level 3 for the remainder of the part,
. class 3: severity level 3.

M 000 / 14  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 100

- Special case of castings, with wall thickness lower or equal to 25.4 mm, made by the lost
wax process:
Table I gives the applicable criteria and reference radiographs as defined in ASTM E 192
standard, as a function of severity levels mentioned above.

b) Ultrasonic examination
The following shall be considered as recordable conditions:
- any indication whose amplitude is  50% of the reference curve,
- any zone for which the loss in back echo amplitude is greater than 18 dB.
Defects shall be unacceptable if their echo amplitude is higher the reference level and their
surface area totals 1000 mm2 or more.

c) Decision for the prototype part (defect detected by volumetric examination)

1) When the defects exceeding imposed criteria are in limited number in a random fashion
(e.g. sand entrainment), this will not therefore invalidate the casting method.
2) When defects exceeding imposed criteria are in very limited number and directly connected
with the casting method (e.g. shrinkage cavity due to incorrect feed and/or solidification
crack, etc.), the casting method shall be improved and validated using a new prototype part
that will be examined in all its areas concerned by the modifications.
If the examination results are satisfactory, the prototype part record shall notably include the
examination results of the first prototype part and those of the second prototype part; if not, a
new prototype part will be required.
3) In the case of numerous defects exceeding imposed criteria (random and/or connected with
the casting method), important alterations of the casting method shall be envisaged. This will
lead to the elaboration of a new prototype part (with 100% volumetric examination), this
operation being repeated as many times as necessary.
The results of the examinations performed on prototype parts shall be entered in a record to
be drawn up by the Supplier and kept at the disposal of the Manufacturer of the part and the
Contractor. This record, which comprises, in particular, a drawing of the radiographic
examination specifying the position of sources and films, serves as a reference for the
examination of production parts.

M 163.2 Surface examinations

(visual, liquid penetrant or magnetic particle testing)
After volumetric examination the Foundry may propose to the Manufacturer of the part that the
prototype parts be considered as production parts after any repairs, if required. (In this case, the
prototype part is repaired and examined according to the requirements of the procurement
contractual document of the production part).
a) Stage, scope, examination conditions and criteria
See the Technical Procurement Specification (or M 360), paragraph : "Surface examination -
surface defects".

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 15
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 100

TABLE I

M 000 / 16  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 100

b) Decision for the prototype part

If surface examination reveals defects resulting in major repair for return to conformance, this
will be reported in the prototype part record.
Several major repairs can invalidate the prototype part following the surface examination.

M 164 AREA OF VALIDITY

The minimum essential variables which condition the area of validity of the prototype part are:
- a drawing of the as-cast part,
- the Foundry,
- material grade,
- steelmaking process,
- casting process defined, in particular, by the feedhead diagram,
- type of contact sands.

If any of these parameters is modified during the course of procurement, or in the event of a new
procurement, the file shall be re-examined, as a general rule, by the part Manufacturer. For parts
governed by M 140, it shall also be re-examined by the Contractor. A new prototype part may have
to be produced.
For production parts, any deviation affecting a complete heat (unacceptable defects following
surface and volume examinations) shall be the subject of detailed analysis that may invalidate the
prototype part.
In this case the Manufacturer (or the Contractor for parts governed by M 140) shall reexamine the
prototype part record and the examination conditions of the production parts. This may result for
instance in:
- invalidation of the fabrication method,
- set-up of additional non destructive examinations to the applicable technical procurement
specification and if applicable to the prototype part record.

M 170 PROTOTYPE SERIES OF HEAT EXCHANGER TUBES

M 170.1 Definition and purpose
The prototype series comprises an intentionally limited quantity of tubes fabricated under identical
conditions to those used for the industrial fabrication of tubes.
Production of this limited quantity of tubes should make it possible:
- to specify real manufacturing conditions and parameters, establish non-destructive examination
methods required in the prototype series programme (see M 170.5), and observe any difficulties
encountered in achieving the required quality level,

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 17
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 100

- to evaluate the types of defects that are specifically due to the manufacturing procedure, the
nature of the material, or the dimensional characteristics of the product, with a view to starting a
defect catalogue (M 170.6),
- to establish the final manufacturing programme for the industrial series of tubes on the basis of
the above results (M 170.5).

M 170.2 Characterisation report for prototype series

Prior to procurement, a characterisation report for prototype series of tubes as defined in M 170
must be established comprising:
- the manufacturing programme (see M 170.5),
- the defect catalogue (see M 170.6).
The characterisation report for prototype series and related documents shall be established by the
Supplier.
Modification of any one major parameter in the manufacturing programme shall necessitate the
Contractor's approval in the report for prototype.
The manufacture of a series of tubes (covered by a purchase order) shall not be started until the
characterisation report for prototype series has been approved by the Manufacturer and the
Contractor's local representative in the general case and by the Contractor for tubes as defined
in M 140.

M 170.3 Scope
The execution of a prototype series is mandatory in the following cases:
- the first time the Supplier manufactures the type of product concerned in accordance with the
rules of the RCC-M,
- the Supplier intends to modify one of the major parameters of the manufacturing programme
used previously for industrial fabrication.
The Supplier may be exempted from manufacturing of a prototype series as such if he is able to
provide the characterisation report of a previous prototype series, or the test results for the previous
manufacture of identical products, provided that all satisfactory tests and results mentioned satisfy
the requirements of the manufacturing programme, and that this report is accompanied by the
corresponding manufacturing programme.

M 170.4 Conditions of execution of the prototype series

Before execution of the prototype series, the Supplier shall draw up :
- the manufacturing programme in accordance with M 170.5,
- the procurement specifications for the semi-finished product,
- the non-destructive examination documents.
Not less than 50 tubes shall be manufactured for the prototype series.

M 000 / 18  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 100

After execution of a prototype series of tubes, first lot acceptance tests, in accordance with the
related technical specification shall be performed on all the tubes of the prototype series.

M 170.5 Manufacturing programme

Prior to manufacture, the Supplier shall draw up a manufacturing programme mentioning the
following major parameters:
- melting process,
- weight and type of ingot used,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- the different stages of transformation (note diameter and thickness) in chronological order,
- heat treatments (including pre-cleaning),
- finishing (dressing, bending, grinding, polishing, degreasing, cleaning, etc.),
- position on the part of the test sample for acceptance tests,
- sampling,
- non-destructive examinations and with the related test procedure selected, adjustments and
thresholds adopted.
Heat treatment, test samples and non destructive examinations are in chronological order.

M 170.6 Defect catalogue

Defects found on tubes during surface examinations or non-destructive examinations (visual,
ultrasonic, eddy current, etc.) shall be subjected to laboratory examination to define their nature and
dimensions.
This applies to the following, in particular:
- surface defects detected during visual examination. Each type of defect shall be subjected to at
least one detailed examination,
- defects detected during ultrasonic or eddy current examination. Examination shall cover both:
. defects which give a response just within the acceptance criteria,
. defects which give a response just greater than the acceptance criteria.
Examination results shall be recorded in a "defect catalogue", containing for each defect:
- a photograph of visible defects,

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 19
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 100

- the type of examination having revealed the defect together with calibration conditions and
recording of the corresponding signal, in the case of ultrasonic or eddy current examination,
- the corresponding macrographic or micrographic section with indication of magnification,
- the length of the defect,
- the nature of the defect.

Examination of this catalogue should make it possible to:

- demonstrate that the examination methods and settings used allow detection of defects of
orientation, shape and size, corresponding to defects deemed unacceptable with respect to chosen
quality criteria, and in particular, defects whose depth is in excess of 10% of thickness but not
more than 0.20 mm,
- fix the criteria on which selection of ultrasonic examination or eddy current examination is based
for mass-production.
For defects detected during visual examination which are subjected to the analysis described above,
the Supplier shall prepare samples of the tube sections which contain both defects acceptable as is
and defects requiring repair, if authorized, with a view to establishing a concrete basis for judgement
for examination of fabrication tubes.
Both the defect catalogue and the tube samples shall be added progressively during the course of
production by examining defects other than those revealed during examination of the prototype
series, and which present a signal or appearance close to the criteria for rejection.

M 170.7 Area of validity of a prototype series

The minimum essential variables which condition the area of validity of a prototype series are as
follows:
- the grade of the material,
- tube diameter and thickness,
- Final heat treatments execution parameters,
- Parameters used to define the manufacturing programme and which are considered to be essential
with respect to mechanical properties and compactness,
- the non destructive examination parameters.
For prototype tubes, any deviation concerning the overall order (unacceptable defects after surface
or volumetric examinations), shall be the object of a detailed analysis which may compromise the
validity of the characterisation report for prototype series.
If this is the case, the Manufacturer (or the Contractor where steam generator heat exchanger tubes
are concerned) shall double check the characterisation report for prototype series and the conditions
in which the prototype series tubes were examined. For example, this may lead to the revision of the
manufacturing programme.

M 000 / 20  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 200

M 200

STEELS AND ALLOYS

M 220 AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEELS

The provisions of this chapter are implicitly applicable to parts or products unless special
requirements are stipulated in the individual procurement specifications.

M 221 GRADES - CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

M 221.1 Steels are specified on the basis of their chemical composition in the procurement
specifications or in the materials standards.

M 221.2
- For all parts that come into contact with reactor coolant, cobalt content shall be :
Co  0.20 %

- Normally, the addition of boron shall not be acceptable since this element may adversely affect
weldability. However, if the steelmaker wished to add boron in order to improve hot working, the
boron content must not exceed 0.0018% and the boron content determined must be specified in
the test reports.

M 221.3 Required percentage values for chemical composition shall be applicable to product
analysis. Nevertheless, it shall be permissible to verify that these requirements are met by ladle
analysis only, except for the following percentage contents which shall be verified by product
analysis:
- maximum carbon content,
- minimum chromium, nickel and molybdenum content,
- minimum and maximum titanium, niobium or niobium and tantalum content,
- maximum cobalt content,
- maximum boron content.

 n° 140-2013 M 000 / 21
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 200

M 221.4 When resistance to corrosion (1) is a prime consideration, the following more
stringent requirements may be specified in the equipment specification:
- maximum sulphur content S  0.020 %
- maximum phosphorous content P  0.030 %
- for type 18-10 steels without molybdenum,
minimum chromium content Cr  18.00 %
- for 18-10 steels containing 2.5% molybdenum,
minimum chromium content Cr  17.00 %
(1) Resistance to corrosion is not to be confused with non-susceptibility to intergranular corrosion.

M 222 MELTING PROCESS - PRODUCT TREATMENT

M 222.1 Unless otherwise stated, an electric arc furnace or induction furnace shall be used to
produce the austenitic stainless steels covered by this chapter.

M 222.2 At the end of manufacturing, products shall be subjected to solution heat treatment at
1050° C to 1150° C. This is the usual delivery condition of the steel unless otherwise stipulated.
If the specification so stipulates, bars and shapes may, in addition, be strain hardened.

M 222.3 Where non strain hardened steel plates ≤ 3 mm thick are not intended to be hot
formed, the preferred finished condition shall be that obtained by cold rolling, solution heat
treatment, descaling, passivating and cold skin rolling.

M 223 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

The steelmaker shall provide a certificate specifying the chemical composition of the steel as
determined by ladle analysis.
Product chemical composition is usually specified in the purchase order. It is mandatory for class 1
components. Its main function is to check that the requirements given in M 221.3 and 221.4 are
observed.

M 224 ACCELERATED INTERGRANULAR CORROSION TEST

M 224.1 Whenever an accelerated intergranular corrosion test is specified, it shall be carried
out according to the conditions stipulated in chapter MC 1310.
It shall be performed when the carbon content as determined by the ladle analysis is:
- above 0.030% for austenitic stainless steels,
- above 0.035% for controlled nitrogen austenitic stainless steels,
- above 0.040% for cast austenitic-ferritic stainless steels.

M 000 / 22  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 200

M 224.2 Requirements for sensitizing heat treatment, given notably in the afore-mentioned
specifications are as follows:
- for 18-10 very low-carbon steels (carbon content ≤ 0.035% for rolled and forged parts and
< 0.040% cast parts) and for 18-10 steels stabilized with titanium or niobium: category B heat
treatment, heating the test specimen to 700°C and slow cooling,

- for 18-10 very low-carbon steels containing molybdenum (carbon content ≤ 0.035% for rolled
and forged parts and < 0.040% cast parts) and for 18-10 steels containing molybdenum stabilized
with titanium or niobium: category B heat treatment, heating the test specimen to 725°C and
slow cooling,
- for Z5 CN 18-10 steel : sensitizing heat treatment A at 650° C for 10 minutes,
- for Z5 CND 17-12 steel : sensitizing heat treatment A at 675° C for 10 minutes.

M 224.3 Sensitizing heat treatment A may be replaced by treatment C (welding operation) for
plates, sheet, and strip with a maximum thickness of 3 mm, when the accelerated intergranular
corrosion test covers weldability only and there is no subsequent heat treatment (cf. M 225 below).

M 225 WELDABILITY
M 225.1 18-8 austenitic or austenitic-ferritic stainless steels, with or without molybdenum
have good weldability. Because welding temperature may make the steel susceptible to intergranular
corrosion, ordinary 18-10 steels other than those stated in M 225.2 must subsequently be solution
heat treated when the nature of the fluid or fluids coming into contact with the welded zone is such
that this risk must be taken into consideration.

M 225.2 Taking into account intergranular corrosion, the following steels, irrespective of
thickness, are considered to be weldable without postweld heat treatment:
- 18-10 low-carbon steels (carbon content ≤ 0.035% for rolled and forged parts and ≤ 0.040% for
cast parts),
- 18-10 steels stabilized with titanium or niobium.
Compliance with requirements for carbon, titanium, niobium and minimum chromium content, as
given M 221, and a satisfactory accelerated intergranular corrosion test followed by slow sensitizing
heat treatment (treatment B), act as a safeguard against the metal becoming susceptible to
intergranular corrosion during welding.

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 23
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 200

M 225.3 Taking into account intergranular corrosion, 18-10 steels (carbon content > 0.035%
for rolled and forged parts and > 0.040% for cast parts) are considered to be weldable, without the
need for subsequent heat treatment, under the following conditions:
- using resistance welding (spot welding, socket welding, etc.),
- when welding plates, sheets or pipes with a maximum thickness of 3 mm:
. using gas tungsten arc welding (TIG) or gas metal arc welding (MIG) with or without the
addition of filler metal,
. using shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) and a maximum of one pass (a maximum of two
passes may intersect but there shall be absolutely no build-up of weld metal).
Compliance with requirements for carbon and minimum chromium content, as given in paragraph
M 221, acts as a safeguard against the metal becoming susceptible to intergranular corrosion during
welding carried out under the afore-mentioned conditions. Furthermore, a satisfactory accelerated
intergranular corrosion test may be required with short sensitizing heat treatment (treatment A) or
possibly C (welding operation) for products with a maximum thickness of 3 mm (see M 1310).

M 225.4 All thicknesses of type 18-10 steels (carbon content > 0.035% for rolled and forged
parts and > 0.040% for cast parts) of over 3 mm that have not undergone subsequent heat treatment
are considered non-weldable, because of their susceptibility to intergranular corrosion, whenever the
nature of the fluid or fluids likely to come in contact with the welded zone requires that this factor
be taken into consideration.

M 226 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

M 226.1 General
M 226.1.1 The procurement specifications stipulate the required mechanical properties at ambient
and high temperatures and the methods of taking test specimens.

M 226.1.2 After solution heat treatment, austenitic stainless steels have the mechanical
properties corresponding to the maximum softening (high elongation after fracture and energy
absorbed by breakage, minimum yield strength). Annealing such as long annealing at approximately
850° C may, for stabilized stainless steels, improve mechanical strength. When using these heat
treatments, it shall be noted that the micrographic structure of steels of this type usually contains a
certain amount of ferrite. Consequently, where these steels are held at temperatures ranging from
800°C to 950°C, they are susceptible to embrittlement due to a structural phenomenon known as the
"Sigma phase". If this is the case, impact tests shall always be carried out.

M 000 / 24  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

M 300

PRODUCTS AND PARTS

M 310 INTRODUCTION
Chapter 300 covers general requirements for products.
The requirements of this chapter are only applicable when specifically referred to in table 2200 of
subsections B, C and D of SECTION I.
Chapter 300 is divided into paragraphs covering the following products:
M 320 : rolled or forged bars,
M 330 : plates,
M 340 : pipes and tubes,
M 350 : steel forgings,
M 360 : steel castings,
M 370 : base metal test coupons,
M 380 : forging ratio.

M 320 FORGED OR ROLLED BARS*

The provisions of this chapter are implicitly applicable to a part or product, unless special
requirements are stipulated in individual procurement specifications.

GENERAL PROVISIONS
Melting process
Generally, the steel shall be made by the electric arc furnace process.
However, the steelmaker may use another process provided that the steel produced has equivalent
mechanical properties.

* This paragraph is also applicable to flats.

M 321 INGOT DISCARD

There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 25
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

M 322 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. A product analysis may also be stipulated in the procurement specification. Analyses
shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.
Acceptable steel grades
Bars shall meet the requirements for chemical composition given in Standards NF EN 10083-2,
NF EN 10083-3, NF A 35-557, NF EN 10269 + A1, NF EN 10088-3 for rolled products, and
NF EN 10222-2 for forgings.

When a standard other than those afore-mentioned is used, the provisions of this chapter shall be
applicable and the Contractor must be informed.

M 323 RATIO OF REDUCTION

The ratio of reduction as specified in M 380 shall be greater than 3.

M 324 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The bars are supplied in the heat-treated condition. During heat treatment for mechanical properties,
the diameter of the bars is as close as possible to their as-delivered diameter.
Exceptionally bars may be delivered in a different condition, in which case the supplier of the bars
must justify that the bars meet the stipulated requirements in their final condition.
Heat treatments and heat treatment procedures are specified in the standards given in M 322.
As a general rule, a record shall be kept of the thermal cycles to which the bars are subjected. The
steelmaker shall draw up a certificate which states that the bars have been heat treated and which
specifies the temperature at which they were treated.
All straightening operations shall be followed by stress relieving heat treatment at a temperature
less than that for tempering. The difference between these two temperatures shall be at least 20°C
and at most 50°C.

M 325 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

M 325.1 Required values
Values to be obtained are as follows:
- either the minimum value or the minimum and maximum value for tensile strength at room
temperature,
- minimum value for yield strength at room temperature,
- minimum value for percentage elongation after fracture at room temperature,
- minimum value for tensile strength at a temperature of 300 or 350°C, when measurement of this
value is stipulated in the purchase order,

M 000 / 26  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

- minimum value for yield strength at a temperature of 300 or 350°C, when measurement of this
value is stipulated in the purchase order,
- minimum and maximum hardness values when acceptance tests are only hardness testing,
- minimum energy absorbed by breakage, KV, at + 20°C, 0°C and in certain cases
– 20°C, i.e:
. average impact energy absorption of three test specimens,
. individual impact bending rupture energy of the three specimens (only one value may be less
than the minimum value specified for the average),

Note: For bars less than 50 mm in diameter covered by AFNOR Standards given in paragraph M 322 for chemical
composition and heat treatment, mechanical properties values specified in the above standards shall be met.

M 325.2 Sampling and test specimens

Samples shall be taken from prolongations or parts integral with the bars until the samples are
removed. Samples shall be removed subsequent to heat treatment, including stabilizing heat
treatment, if any.
If, during fabrication, the bars are subjected to stress relieving heat treatment or any other treatment
which might modify their mechanical properties, tests shall be performed using specimens taken
from samples which have been subjected to simulated heat treatment, unless the provisions of
M 122 have been applied.
The size of test samples shall be sufficient to provide all the specimens required for retests.
Test specimens shall be oriented longitudinally. The axis of the specimens with respect to the
surface shall be as follows:
- for bars whose smallest dimension does not exceed 25 mm: coincident with the bar axis,
- for bars whose smallest dimension is between 25 and 50 mm: 12.5 mm from the skin,
- for bars whose smallest dimension is equal to or greater than 50 mm: at mid-radius of the
bar (1).
The test pertient area of specimens shall be located at a distance from the end of the product at least
equal to bar thickness or bar diameter for cylindrical bars.

(1) At quarter thickness and mid-width for a flat.

M 325.3 Tests
Tests shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.
The number and content of tests shall be stipulated in the procurement specification.

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 27
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

DEFINITION OF A LOT
The term "lot" applies to bars of the same diameter or similar cross-sections (as defined below)
from the same heat, subjected to the same manufacturing cycle and heat treated in the same furnace
load, or if a batch furnace is used subjected to the same series of heat treatments.
 max
 1.1
 min

e max S max
 1.1 and  1.25
e min S min

SAMPLING
The hardness of all bars in the lot shall be measured. Samples for tests shall be taken from 4% of
the bars (minimum 2 bars): 2% shall be taken from the end of bars with the highest hardness value
and 2% from the ends of bars with the lowest hardness value.

A series of tests consists of the following tests:

- tension test at room temperature; the yield strength, tensile strength and percentage elongation
after fracture shall be measured,
- tension test at a temperature of 300 or 350°C when the design temperature is sufficiently high
for sizing to be determined by the mechanical properties at this temperature. Yield strength at
0.2% offset, tensile strength and elongation after fracture shall be measured,
- KV impact tests: a test shall include the fracture of 3 test specimens,

M 326 SURFACE EXAMINATION

All surfaces shall be carefully examined during fabrication to verify that the metal is sound.
Bars shall be visually examined during descaling and final machining.
Parts shall be sound and free from strings, cracks, nicks or any other injurious defect.
Magnetic particle examination (MC 5000) or liquid penetrant examination (MC 4000) may be
performed on surfaces in an-delivered condition of bars of diameter  25 mm or with a cross-
section of not less than 500 mm2. In cases where these examinations are prescribed on the finished
part (case of threaded parts such as screws and studs), it is possible not to perform them on bars.
Scope and severity of examinations on finished parts are then determined in M 5140.

CRITERIA
Indications with one dimension greater than 1 mm shall be considered.

M 000 / 28  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION

The following shall not be acceptable:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- three or more aligned indications less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge) or extending over more
than 15 mm if the distance edge to edge is from 3 to 6 mm.
Two separate indications shall be considered to be a single indication if the distance between them
is less than twice the length of the smallest indication. The cumulative length of the indication shall
be equal to the sum of the lengths of the indications plus the distance between them.

LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION

The following shall not be acceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- three or more aligned indications less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge),
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2 whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.
If defects are detected by the above examination, the bar may not be accepted as-is and the
requirements of paragraph M 328 shall be applicable.

M 327 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION

M 327.1 Examinations
Class 1 and 2 bars with diameter greater than or equal to 50 mm shall be examined.
All parts in the lot shall be ultrasonically examined in the heat-treated condition and after they have
been machined to the as-delivered profile in accordance with MC 2300.
Ultrasonic examination shall meet the requirements of MC 2300:
a) Bars the smallest dimension of which is from 50 to 100 mm.
- Round
Longitudinal wave examination shall be performed radially from the cylindrical surface,
covering the entire surface as per standard NF EN 10228 parts 3 or 4 or as per standard
NF EN 10308.
If the examination cannot be performed by rotation it shall be performed on a grid layout as per
paragraph 12.3 of standards NF EN 10228-3 or 4 or as per paragraph 13.2 of standard
NF EN 10308.

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 29
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

- Shape and flats

Longitudinal wave examination shall be performed radially from at least 2 sides to ensure that
the entire volume of the bar is examined, as per standard NF EN 10228 parts 3 or 4.

b) Bars the smallest dimension of which is higher or equal than 100 mm.
- Shape and flats
The radial examination of bars the diameter of which is less than 100 mm may be followed by
axial examination from each end of the bar.

M 327.2 Acceptance criteria

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of standards NF EN 10308 or
NF EN 10228-3 in the case of ferritic and martensitic steels and of standard NF EN 10228-4 in the
case of austenitic and austenitic-ferritic steels.
The quality classes shall be stipulated in the procurement specifications.

M 328 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS

The rolling mill shop or the forging shop may eliminate surface defects by grinding as long as
tolerance requirements are met on the as-delivered parts.
The excavation cavity shall blend smoothly into the adjacent surface.
After grinding, magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination shall be performed in accordance
with the requirements of MC 5000 or MC 4000.
Applicable criteria shall be those given in M 326.

M 330 PLATE
The requirements set forth in this chapter are implicitly applicable to parts or products, unless
special requirements are stipulated in individual procurement specifications.

GENERAL PROVISIONS
Melting process
Steel shall generally be produced by the electric furnace process. However, Manufacturers may use
other processes which provide steels having the same properties.

M 331 INGOT DISCARD

There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.

M 000 / 30  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

M 332 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. Where steel is taken from stock, and no ladle analysis is possible, a product analysis
shall be performed. Both analyses shall be conducted in accordance with MC 1000.
Chemical composition shall meet the requirements set forth in the AFNOR standards listed below.

Acceptable steel grades

Plates shall meet one of the following standards, depending on their object and scope:
NF EN 10025-1 : hot rolled products of structural steels, general technical delivery conditions
NF EN 10025-2 : hot rolled products of structural steels, technical delivery conditions for non-
alloy quality steels, grades and qualities, only for qualities J0, J2 and K2,
NF EN 10028-1 : flat products for boilers and pressure vessels, general requirements.
NF EN 10028-2 : flat products for boilers and pressure vessels, alloyed steels with specified high
temperature requirements.
NF EN 10028-7 : flat products for boilers and pressure vessels, austenitic, austenitic
molybdenum and stabilized steels with or without molybdenum only, insofar as
the requirements of this standard do not go against those of M 220.
Where an intergranular corrosion test is specified, it shall be carried out in
conformity with the provisions of M 224.
NF EN 10164 : building steels with improved deformation properties in the direction
perpendicular to the product surface.
Requirements set under this chapter shall also apply to steels selected on the basis of other
standards; the Contractor shall be informed of all such cases.

M 333 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Plates shall be delivered "as-treated". However, carbon steel plates need not be normalized,
provided they are subjected in the forming process to a treatment of the same type as specified in
the product standard.
The number of heat treatment cycles to which the plate is subjected shall usually be recorded.
The rolling mill shall draw up a certificate of heat treatment for the plate in which the heat
treatment temperature is specified.

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 31
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

M 334 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

M 334.1 Required values
Required values shall be as follows:
- either minimum or minimum and maximum ultimate tensile strength at room temperature,
- minimum yield strength at room temperature,
- minimum percentage elongation after fracture at room temperature,
- minimum yield strength and tensile strength values at a temperature of 300 or 350°C, where
these values are measured,
- minimum impact energy absorption, KV, at +20°C, 0°C and in certain cases, 20°C, i.e.:
. minimum average impact energy absorption for 3 specimens,
. individual impact energy absorption values for each of these specimens (only one of which
may be less than the specified minimum average),
- for bend strength test, the external face of the bend shall show no cracking, tearing or blistering.

M 334.2 Samples and specimens

Samples shall be taken from plate as delivered by the Supplier (i.e. after heat treatment for
mechanical properties - see M 333 - except for the special case of carbon steel plates which are
delivered without having been normalized).
A check must be made that plates subjected during manufacture to heat treatments which may alter
their mechanical properties, are still consistent with requirements for as-delivered plates, except
where M 122 applies.
The size of test samples shall be such that they can provide enough specimens for all tests
and retests.
Specimens for tests described in M 334.3 shall be cut from samples taken as specified above,
without further heat treatment. An exception shall be made, however, for samples procured from
non-normalized carbon steel plates, which shall be subjected to a simulated normalizing treatment.
Samples and specimens shall be taken as required by the standards listed in M 332.
Specimens shall be located at a distance at least equal to the thickness of the plate, but no more than
50 mm from the latter's heat-treated edge.

M 000 / 32  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 300

M 334.3 Testing
Tests shall be performed and results evaluated in accordance with conditions set forth in MC 1000
and in this paragraph (M 334.3).
a) Tension test at room temperature
This shall be performed to determine yield strength, tensile strength and percentage elongation
after fracture.

b) Tension tests at high temperature

Position and orientation as well as geometry of specimen shall be the same as for the tension test
at room temperature.
Yield strength at 0.2%, tensile strength and elongation after fracture shall be determined at a
temperature of 300 or 350°C when the design temperature is sufficiently high for sizing to be
determined by the mechanical properties at this temperature.

c) KV impact tests
Longitudinal axes of specimens shall be parallel to the skin of the rolled plate and perpendicular
to the final rolling direction.
Impact test notch roots shall be perpendicular to the skin of the rolled plate.
Three specimens shall be broken for each test.

d) Bend tests
Longitudinal axes of specimens shall be perpendicular to final rolling direction. The specimen
shall have the same thickness as the plate.
For the bending test, the test specimen shall have the dimensions specified in MC 1262.

M 335 DEFECT DETECTION

All plates surfaces shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final stage in accordance with
MC 7100. Their surface shall be flat, uniform, free of ripples, scratches, overlaps, tears, surface
cracks or any other injurious defects.
Once the plate has been cut to delivery dimensions its edges shall be visually examined to ensure
that there is no cleavage.
If the results of this examination are not conclusive, the plate shall be subjected to liquid penetrant
or magnetic particle examination in accordance with MC 4000 and MC 5000.
If the procurement specification calls for use of ultrasonic examination in detecting internal defects,
the said examination shall be conducted in accordance with requirements of standards
NF EN 10160 and NF EN 10307, completed, in the case of ferritic steel, austenitic stainless steel
and austenitic alloy plates, by those of MC 2400.

The criteria to be satisfied are those of Standards NF EN 10160 and NF EN 10307,

classes S2 and E3.

 n° 144-2014 M 000 / 33
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR SURFACE DEFECTS

Any indication with one dimension of more than 1 mm shall be recorded.

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION

All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- three or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge) or extending over more
than 15 mm, if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Furthermore, two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is
less than twice the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall
be equal to the sum of the lengths of the two component indications, plus the distance
between them.

LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION

All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- three or more indications aligned less than 2 mm apart (edge to edge),
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2 whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

M 336 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS

Insignificant surface defects may be removed by grinding or chipping, provided that the thickness
of the repair area remains within the dimensional tolerances for the part.
Once the defect has been removed, the repair area shall always be subjected to magnetic particle
(see MC 5000) or liquid penetrant examination (see MC 4000).
As a general rule, the rolling mill shop shall not be authorized to repair defects by welding.

M 340 PIPES AND TUBES

The provisions of this chapter are implicitly applicable to pipes and tubes unless special
requirements are stipulated in individual procurement specifications.

M 000 / 34  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

GENERAL PROVISIONS

M 340.1 The provisions of this chapter are applicable to steel pipe with a circular cross-
section fabricated by one of the following processes:
- hot rolled pipe, as-rolled or cold finished to schedule,
- hot rolled pipe, finished by cold drawing or cold rolling,
- hot drawn pipe, cold finished to schedule,

- hot drawn pipe, finished by cold drawing or cold rolling,

- pipe which is "rolled, welded but not subsequently drawn", fabricated from rolled strip and
welded longitudinally by resistance welding, electric arc or induction welding, with or without
the addition of filler metal, and cold finished to schedule after welding,
- pipe which is "rolled, welded and subsequently drawn", fabricated as above but finished by cold
drawing,
- rolled, welded pipes finished by hot reduction which may be followed by cold profiling,
- rolled pipe welded without the addition of filler metal followed by cold working of the
weld bead.

M 340.2 Forged pipe

Pipes fabricated by forging and then piercing a bar or by forging on a mandrel are considered to be
forgings and as such are covered by the provisions of M 350.
Pipes with a wall thickness greater than 50 mm fabricated by rolling, drawing on a mandrel or
extrusion are similarly considered to be forgings.

M 340.3 Centrifugally cast steel pipes

Centrifugally cast steel pipes shall be considered to be castings manufactured by a special process
and the requirements of M 360 shall be applicable subject to modification of certain requirements
for mechanical tests.

M 340.4 Large diameter pipes

Pipes subjected to pressure which are fabricated by forming one or two plates to form a shell which
is then longitudinally welded according to one line or two diametrically opposed lines, respectively,
shall be considered to be welded pressure-retaining components and the provisions of M 330 and
SECTION IV shall be applicable.

M 340.5 Melting process

Generally, the steel shell shall be made in an electric furnace. However, the steelmaker may use
another process provided that the steel produced has the same mechanical properties.

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 35
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

M 341 INGOT DISCARD

There shall be sufficent discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.

M 342 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
A product analysis shall be performed on pipe taken from stock if a ladle analysis cannot be
supplied.
Analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

Acceptable steel grades

As a general rule, unless special provisions are provided, pipes and tubes shall meet the
requirements of one of the following standards according to scope and applicability:

Seamless tubes made from ferritic and austenitic stainless steels.

NF EN 10216-5 : Seamless austenitic steel tubes,

NF A 49-214 : Seamless austenitic steel tubes for use at high temperatures.

Seamless non alloy steel tubes

NF EN 10216-2 : Seamless non alloy and alloy steel tubes with specified elevated temperature
properties

NF EN 10216-1 : Seamless non-alloy steel tubes with specified room temperature properties

NF EN 10217-1 : Non-alloy steel tubes welded without addition of filler metal with specified room
temperature properties,

NF EN 10217-2 : Alloy and non-alloy steel tubes welded without addition of filler metal with
specified elevated temperature properties

NF EN 10217-7 : Welded stainless steel tubes.

M 343 HEAT TREATMENT

Heat treatments and heat treatment procedure shall comply with the reference standards given
in M 342.
Generally, a record shall be made of the thermal cycles to which the pipes are subjected.
The pipemaker shall draw up a certificate which states that the pipes have been heat treated and
which specifies the temperature at which they were treated.

M 000 / 36  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

M 344 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

M 344.1 Required values
Required values are as follows:
- either the minimum value or the minimum and maximum value for tensile strength at room
temperature,
- minimum value for yield strength at room temperature,
- minimum value for percentage elongation after fracture at room temperature,
- minimum value for tensile strength at a temperature of 300 or 350°C, when measurement of this
value is stipulated in the purchase order,
- minimum value for yield strength at a temperature of 300 or 350°C, when measurement of this
value is stipulated in the purchase order,
- the minimum impact energy absorption, KV, at +20°C, 0°C, i.e.:
. the average minimum impact energy absorption for 3 specimens,
. individual impact energy absorption of the three specimens (only one value may be less than
the minimum value specified for the average),

M 344.2 Sampling and test specimens

The size of test samples shall be sufficient to provide all the specimens required for tests and
retests.
Generally, samples shall be removed from one end of pipes in the as-delivered condition.
If, during fabrication, the pipes are subjected to stress relieving heat treatment or any other
treatment which might modify their mechanical properties, tests shall be performed using
specimens which have been subjected to simulated heat treatment, unless the provisions of M 122
have been applied.
Heat treatments and heat treatment procedure shall be specified in the procurement specification
and the manufacturing programme.

M 344.3 Tests
Tests shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000 and the present paragraph M 344.3.
Depending on the type of test, tests shall be performed:
- per heat,
- per lot,
- per test unit,
- per pipe or tube.

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 37
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

The type of test, test temperatures, position of specimens in test samples and the number of
specimens per test shall be stipulated in the procurement specification.
Generally, the following Standards shall be complied with:
- to standard NF EN 10216 for seamless tubes used at elevated temperatures,
- to standard NF EN 10217 for rolled tubes welded without addition of filler metal and used at
elevated temperatures,
- to standard NF A 49-214 for seamless stainless steel tubes.
Impact tests shall be performed, provided that the test specimens may be machined to standard
dimensions. Impact test specimen notch axes shall be perpendicular to the skin after rolling.
For pipes whose wall thickness is more than 20 mm and less than 50 mm, the following properties,
for which required values are applicable, shall be determined on transverse test specimens:
- tensile strength at room temperature,
- tensile strength at a temperature of 300 or 350 °C when the design temperature is sufficiently
high for sizing to be determined by the mechanical properties at this temperature,
- the impact energy absorption, KV, at +20°C or 0°C.
Hydrostatic test: pipes or tubes subjected to internal pressure from a fluid shall be hydrostatically
tested in accordance with the provisions of the purchase order. Pipes subjected to a hydrostatic test
shall be free from rust and must not be given a protective coating prior to the test. The procurement
specification shall stipulate the test pressure, holding time at pressure and the characteristics of
the test medium.

M 345 PREPARATION AND EXAMINATION OF SEMI-FINISHED PRODUCTS

The precautions to be taken to eliminate surface defects from rounds used for the fabrication of
pipes and to ensure that there are no internal defects shall be stipulated in the procurement
specification.

M 346 SURFACE EXAMINATION

All accessible surfaces of pipes shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final stage in
accordance with MC 7100. Surfaces shall be free from rolling or drawing marks, longitudinal
grooves, strings, blisters, blowholes, ripples or any other injurious defect.
Requirements for surface condition shall be stipulated in the procurement specification, if
necessary.

M 347 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION

If ultrasonic examination is stipulated in the procurement specification, such examination shall be
performed in accordance with MC 2500.

M 000 / 38  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

Only defects whose screen height is less than the height of echoes from notches in the reference
pipe shall be acceptable.
The procurement specification may specify eddy current examination for rolled welded pipes of
small diameter. Moreover, the specification must indicate the procedure to be followed in detail.
Eddy current examination shall meet the requirements of MC 6000.
For carbon steel pipes, eddy current examination may be replaced by measurement of magnetic
leakage rate.
As a general rule, the welding of rolled welded pipes of substantial thickness shall be
radiographically examined in accordance with the requirements of S 7700.

M 348 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS

Surface defects may be removed by grinding, provided that, subsequent to grinding, the pipe meets
tolerance requirements and that grinding procedure is respected.
The pipemaker is not allowed to make weld repairs.

M 350 FORGINGS
The requirements set forth in this chapter are implicitly applicable to parts or products, unless
special requirements are stipulated in individual procurement specifications.

GENERAL PROVISIONS
Melting process
Steel shall generally be produced by the electric furnace process.
However, the steelmaker may use other processes which produce steels having the same
characteristics.

Profile of part prior to heat treatment

The profile of the part at the time of heat treatment shall be as close as possible to its as-delivered
profile.

M 351 INGOT DISCARD

There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.

M 352 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS

The steelmaker shall always supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly
accredited representative. The procurement specification may also call for a product analysis.
These analyses shall be carried out in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 39
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

Acceptable steel grades

Parts must fulfil only those requirements set in standards NF EN 10222-2, NF A 36-605 and
NF A 36-606 which apply to grades of austenitic steels, austenitic molybdenum steels and
stabilized austenitic steel with/without molybdenum, insofar as the requirements of these standards
do not go against those of M 220.
Requirements given in this chapter shall also apply to steels selected on the basis of standards other
than those listed above: the Contractor shall be informed of all such cases.

M 353 RATIO OF REDUCTION

Generally, the overall ratio of reduction as determined in M 380 shall be greater than 3.

M 354 HEAT TREATMENT

The parts are supplied in the heat-treated condition.
Solution heat treatment of austenitic stainless steels shall be carried out at a temperature ranging
from 1050°C to 1150°C.
The number of thermal cycles to which the part is subjected shall be recorded. The forging mill
shall draw up a certificate of heat treatment for the part, in which heat treatment temperature
is specified.

M 355 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

M 355.1 Required values
Required values shall be as follows:
- either minimum or minimum and maximum ultimate tensile strengths at room temperature,
- minimum yield strength at room temperature,
- minimum percentage elongation after fracture at room temperature,
- minimum yield strength and tensile strength values at 300 or 350°C, when measurement of these
values are stipulated in the purchase order,
- the minimum impact energy absorption, KV, at +20°C, 0°C and in certain cases, - 20°C, i.e.:
. the average minimum impact energy absorption for 3 specimens,
. individual impact energy absorption values for each of these specimens (only one of which
may be less than the specified minimum average).

M 000 / 40  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

M 355.2 Samples and specimens

Samples shall be taken from prolongations or extra thicknesses provided on the rough forging and
remaining on that forging until completion of the heat treatments. These discards shall be located in
such a way as to constitute the smallest possible thermal buffer during heat treatments.

M 355.3 Testing of samples which were not subjected to heat treatments

after sampling
These tests shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000 and with M 355.3.
A - IMPORTANT OR LARGE-SIZED PARTS
Large parts (as-delivered weight exceeding 250 kg) and parts with important functions shall be
subjected to all of the following tests.
a) Tension test at room temperature
One tension test at room temperature shall be conducted on a specimen whose axis lies parallel
to the main forging direction of the part.
The following values shall be recorded:
- 0.2% offset yield strength, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

b) Tension test at high temperature

Position and orientation as well as geometry of specimen shall be the same as for tension testing
at room temperature.
Yield strength at 0.2%, tensile strength and elongation after fracture shall be determined at a
temperature of 300 or 350 °C when the design temperature is sufficiently high for sizing to be
determined by the mechanical properties at this temperature.
Design temperature shall be specified by the equipment specification or other relevant
contractual documents.

c) KV impact test
Three specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations for each test.
Impact tests shall be performed using specimens whose axes are perpendicular to the main
direction of forging.

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 41
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

Samples must be taken:

- for parts which will be subjected to welding: on completion of heat treatment for mechanical
properties,
- for parts which will not subsequently be welded: usually after completion of all heat
treatments, including any stabilizing treatment. However, if a prolongation or extra
thickness is to be removed before the beginning of the last thermal cycle, this is the stage at
which the sample shall be taken.

The size of test samples shall be such that they can provide enough specimens for all tests
and retests.
Specimens for the tests described in M 355.3 shall be cut from samples taken as specified above,
without further heat treatment. Specimens for tests under M 355.4 shall be taken from samples
obtained in the same manner, except that the latter shall have undergone a heat treatment which is
representative of the treatments applied to the part between the time of sampling and part
completion. This simulated heat treatment must be described in the manufacturing programme.
Samples from which the specimens are taken shall be located 30 mm from a skin and 60 mm from
all other treated surfaces.
Where this is not possible (specially, where the part is too thin, i.e. less than 60 mm thick),
specimens shall be removed in such a way that their axes are at midthickness and their test-pertinent
areas at a distance greater than or equal to the thickness of the part from all other surfaces.
The surfaces referred to here are those of the part treated for mechanical properties.
Impact test notches shall be oriented perpendicular to the main surfaces of the part.
A diagram showing the position of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing with the location
of specimens on the samples shall be appended to the manufacturing programme.

B - OTHER PARTS
The other parts shall be classified by lot. A lot shall include parts coming from the same heat of
steel, which have undergone the same manufacturing cycle and have been heat treated in the same
furnace charge.
All parts except those made from austenitic stainless steel shall be subjected to a BRINELL
hardness test.
In addition, a number of units from each lot shall be subjected to the mechanical strength tests
specified in section A above.
This sampling shall include the two units which had the highest and lowest BRINELL hardness
values respectively. However, for lots of less than 10 units, the tests shall be performed only on the
units with the lowest Brinell hardness value.

M 000 / 42  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

The number of parts per lot and the number of parts subjected to mechanical examination as well as
the exact type of mechanical tests performed must be specified.

M 355.4 Testing of samples subjected to simulated heat treatment

For parts that will be submitted during manufacturing, and after removal of samples subjected to
tests defined in M 355.3, to heat treatment likely to modify their mechanical properties, it is
necessary to ensure that said properties are still consistent with the dimensioning requirements of
the associated equipment. When necessary, tests will have to be conducted after a simulated
stabilizing or stress relieving heat treatment.
Requirements described in M 352 and M 355.3 chapters are applicable to these tests, providing
samples have been sumitted to a prior simulated heat treatment.

M 356 SURFACE EXAMINATION

Surface shall be examined thoroughly at the various stages of manufacture to ensure that the
metal is sound.
Parts which are not machined shall be examined after cleaning, and machined parts after both the
rough and final machining phases. The Manufacturer must make sure that metal shavings from
lathe-machined parts do not always break off at the same point on the surface of the metal,
particularly in areas where there are segregation lines. If this occurs, additional examinations
(micrographic, liquid penetrant, ultrasonic, etc.) shall need to be performed.
Parts must be sound and free from strings, tears, grooves, nicks or other injurious defects.
All accessible surfaces of parts shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final stage in
accordance with MC 7100.
If the results of this examination are not conclusive, the part is subjected to magnetic particle or
liquid penetrant examination in accordance with MC 4000 and MC 5000.
The following acceptance criteria shall apply for liquid penetrant examination:
- any indication with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be recorded,
- all defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
. linear indications,
. rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
. three or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge),
. 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2 whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications
being evaluated.

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 43
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

For magnetic particle examination, the criteria shall be as follows:

- any indication with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be recorded,
- all defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
. linear indications,
. non-linear indications with one dimension of more than 3 mm,
. three or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge) or extending over more
than 15 mm, if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.

Two separate indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller.
The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the sum of the lengths of the two
component indications, plus the distance between them.
Austenitic stainless steels shall be subjected only to liquid penetrant examination.
If on examination, a part is found to have unacceptable defects, it cannot be accepted as is and
M 358 of this specification shall apply.

M 357 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION

M 357.1 Type of examination
Parts shall be subjected to ultrasonic examination in rough forged, treated condition.
Parts which are machined after having been subjected to ultrasonic examination at the semi-finished
stage, may be exempted from final ultrasonic examination.
The examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 2300.

M 357.2 Acceptance criteria

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of standard NF EN 10228-3 in the
case of ferritic and martensitic steels and of standard NF EN 10228-4 in the case of austenitic and
austenitic-ferritic steels.
The quality classes shall be stipulated in the procurement specifications.

M 358 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS

Surface defects may be removed provided this does not prevent the part from meeting the stipulated
mechanical strength requirements. Once the defect has been removed, the repair area shall be
subjected to magnetic particle (see MC 5000) or liquid penetrant examination (see MC 4000).
The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.

M 000 / 44  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

M 360 CASTINGS (other than class 1)

The requirements set forth in this chapter are implicitly applicable to parts or products, unless
special requirements are stipulated in the individual procurement specifications.

GENERAL PROVISIONS
General
The part purchaser is advised to follow the guidelines set by the Centre Technique de la Fonderie
for layout of parts (1).
Generally, choice of melting, molding, annealing, cooling methods, etc., shall be left to the foundry.
The part purchaser shall designate the areas on the part which have an important function and the
foundry shall take special care to ensure that all areas are sound.
For parts which are not subjected to a radiographic examination of their entire volume, the areas to
be radiographed shall be selected on the basis of the final part drawing.

(1) "Guide pratique du tracé des pièces en acier moulé", published by the Centre Technique des Industries de la
Fonderie (A practical guide for layout of parts).

Melting process
Steel shall generally be produced by the electric furnace process. However, Manufacturers may use
other processes which produce steels having the same characteristics.

Prototypes parts
The fabrication method shall be validated using a prototype part as defined in chapter M 160.

M 361 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS

The foundry shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. If the part is made with metals originating from different heats, a ladle analysis shall
be supplied by the foundry for each of them. These analyses are performed in accordance
with MC 1000.
Chemical composition shall meet the requirements set forth in the procurement specifications or in
the materials standards.
Requirements given in this chapter shall also apply when other standards are used: the Contractor
shall be informed of all such cases.

M 362 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The parts are supplied in the heat-treated condition.
Generally, solution heat treatment of austenitic and austenitic-ferritic steels shall be carried out
prior to any weld repairs. This treatment shall not be required following such repairs, unless
otherwise specified.

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 45
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

The number of thermal cycles to which the part is subjected shall be recorded. The foundry shall
make an evaluation of recorded heat treatment data and describe the results of this evaluation in a
heat treatment report.

M 363 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

M 363.1 Required values
Required values shall be as follows:
- either minimum or minimum and maximum tensile strength at room temperature,
- minimum yield strength at room temperature,
- minimum percentage elongation after fracture at room temperature,
- minimum yield strength and tensile strength values at 300 or 350°C, when measurement of these
values are stipulated in the purchase order,
- the minimum impact energy absorption, KV, at 0°C (or at +20°C, where tests are to be made at
these temperatures) i.e.:
. the average minimum impact energy absorption for 3 specimens,
. individual impact energy absorption values for each of these specimens (only one of which
may be less than the specified minimum average value),

M 363.2 Samples and specimens

Test samples shall consist of test ingots integral with the part or cast separately and attached to the
part before heat treatment. The size of test samples shall be such that they can provide enough
specimens for all tests and retests. The smallest dimension of the sample must be equal to the
thickest section of the part wall (this does not apply to flanges and hubs) but no less than 28 mm
thick. Axes of specimens taken from this sample must be located at a distance at least equal to one-
fourth the maximum thickness of the part and no less than 14 mm; however no more than 60 mm
are necessary. Sample ingot dimensions and drawings of specimen position on the ingots must
appear in the manufacturing programme.

M 363.3 Testing of samples which were not subjected to heat treatment

after sampling (1)
These tests shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000 and with M 363.3.

A - IMPORTANT OR LARGE-SIZED PARTS

Large parts (as-delivered weight exceeding 1000 kg) or parts which have an important function
shall be subjected to all of the following tests:

________________
(1) i.e. after they are completely separated from the part.

M 000 / 46  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

a) Tension test at room temperature

A tension test shall be performed at room temperature.

b) Tension test at high temperature

Position and orientation as well as geometry of specimen shall be the same as for tension testing
at room temperature.
Yield strength at 0.2%, tensile strength and elongation after fracture shall be determined at a
temperature of 300 or 350°C when the design temperature is sufficiently high for sizing to be
determined by the mechanical properties at this temperature.

c) KV impact test
Three sample specimens are broken for each test.

B - OTHER PARTS
Other parts shall be classified by lot. A lot shall include parts coming from the same heat of steel,
which have undergone the same manufacturing cycle and have been heat-treated in the same
furnace charge or during the same heat-treatment operation. A lot may not weigh more than
5000 kg.
All parts and all test samples, except those made from austenitic or austenitic-ferritic steels, shall be
subjected to a Brinell hardness test.
The mechanical tests described under "A" shall be performed on representative samples from
each lot.
The number of parts, the number of mechanical test samples and the exact type of mechanical tests
performed must be specified in the relevant procurement specification.

M 363.4 Testing of samples subjected to simulated heat treatment

Where heat treatments performed during manufacture or after removal of samples are likely to
affect the steel's mechanical properties, tests shall be performed, in accordance with M 363.1 to
ensure that said properties are still consistent with sizing requirements set forth in the procurement
specification.

Such tests shall be conducted in accordance with M 363.3 on condition that:

- test samples shall have been subjected beforehand to a simulated heat treatment representative of
the treatments which the part undergoes during manufacture; this simulated heat treatment shall
be defined in the manufacturing programme.

M 364 SURFACE EXAMINATION

Final surface examination by magnetic particle or liquid penetrant methods shall be performed
following completion of all heat treatments.

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 47
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

M 364.1 Examination conditions

Parts shall be thoroughly sandblasted and deburred. Risers, cores, vent scrap, parting lines and
runners shall be removed.
Parts shall be subjected to comprehensive visual examination during the machining phase to ensure
that their metal is sound.
Parts must be sound and free of porosities, shrinkage cavities, cracks, and inclusions or other
injurious defects.

M 364.2 Degree of examination

Carbon and low alloy steels shall be subjected to magnetic particle examination in accordance with
MC 5000. Stainless steels shall be subjected to liquid penetrant examination in accordance
with MC 4000.
The scope of these examinations is defined in the following table:

AT THE FOUNDRY AT THE MANUFACTURER'S

For valves: For valves:

- all accessible machined surfaces - all accessible machined and/or
- after careful grinding, all crotch ground surfaces
regions of external surfaces
CLASS 2
PARTS For other parts: For other parts:
- mating surfaces - mating surfaces
- edges to be welded - edges to be welded
- all connection zones of external
surfaces

CLASS 3
Not required On O-ring seal zones (1)
PARTS

(1) Magnetic particle examination may be replaced by liquid penetrant examination

M 364.3 Recordable condition and acceptance criteria

Any indication with one dimension greater than 2 mm shall be recorded.

Magnetic particle examination

All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension of more than 5 mm,
- three or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge) or extending over more
than 20 mm, if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.

M 000 / 48  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

Moreover, two separate indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less
than twice the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be
equal to the sum of the lengths of the two component indications, plus the distance between them.
A supplementary liquid penetrant examination shall be conducted where magnetic particle
examination produces non-linear indications with dimensions of 2 to 5 mm. The following
indications shall then be unacceptable:
- rounded indications with dia.  5 mm,
- linear indications with L  2 mm.

Liquid penetrant examination

All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension more than 5 mm,
- three or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge),
- 10 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.
For liquid penetrant examination of bearing surfaces of O-rings, the recordable condition shall be
0.3 mm and all defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or
repaired:
- any indication with one dimension of more than 1 mm.
No aligned or clustered indications of the type described above shall be acceptable.

M 365 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION

Unless otherwise specified, parts shall be subjected after heat treatment to radiographic examination
in accordance with MC 3200.
However, where stress relieving heat treatment is involved, this examination may be carried out
prior to heat treatment.

M 365.1 Zones examined

Zones to be radiographed shall be selected on completion of final part drawings and after
examination of prototypes.

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 49
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

A - CLASS 2 PARTS
a) For valves with nominal diameters of more than 100 mm:
- welding surfaces, weld ends, critical zones (stress concentration, particularities produced by
casting), heavily machined zones.

b) For class 2 valves with nominal diameters of 100 mm or less:

- weld ends.
Radiographic examination of class 2 valves with nominal diameters of 50 mm or less may be
replaced by liquid penetrant examination of body ends.

c) Other parts:
- connection regions on outer surfaces, mating surfaces and weld edges.

B - CLASS 3 PARTS
a) Valves with nominal diameters of more than 80 mm
- welding surfaces and body ends.

b) Valves with nominal diameters of 80 mm or less

- no radiographic examination shall be required.

c) Other parts
- weld edges.

M 365.2 Radiographic examination conditions and acceptance criteria

a) Radiographic examinations shall be performed in accordance with MC 3200 and with the
following conditions:
- length of the area to be examined on valve body ends shall be equal to at least 3 times the part
wall thickness based on its final profiles (no more than 75 mm shall be mandatory),
- it is recommended that post-examination machining be minimized by finishing the part, as
much as possible at the foundry.
Special conditions applicable to valves
In certain cases, the width of the area to be examined on valve body ends may be less than
3 times the part wall thickness or 75 mm.
For example, test areas for valves with blind flanges shall extend from the edge of the body and
the surface of the flange (on the side to be welded) without exceeding three times the nominal
thickness of the branch pipe or 75 mm, (based on the part's final profile).

M 000 / 50  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

b) Acceptance criteria set in the procurement specifications must be based on instructions given by
standard NF EN 12681, Annex A.
These shall be as follows:
- for all weld edges: severity level 1,
- for all valve body ends: severity level 2,
- for all other parts: severity level 3.
Regardless of the applicable severity level, defects such as tears, cracks and chaplet and chill
remnants shall be unacceptable.

M 366 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF DEFECTS

M 366.1 Removal of defects without repair welding
Surface imperfections detected by surface, magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination may
be eliminated by grinding, provided that the thickness of the ground areas, remains within the
tolerances given on the drawing and that the repair cavity does not affect the usefulness of the area
in which it is located. Where this is not the case, weld metal shall be deposited (see paragraph
M 366.2).
Overheating of the ground surface must be avoided during removal:
- depressions must blend gradually into surrounding areas,
- repair cavities shall be subjected to magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination.
Acceptance criteria shall be those set forth in paragraph M 364.3 of this specification.

M 366.2 Removal of defects with repair welding

A - REMOVAL OF DEFECTS
Areas with unacceptable defects detected by magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination as
specified in M 364 and 365 shall be removed by grinding or chipping or carbon arc cutting plus
grinding (carbon and low alloy steel parts shall be preheated for carbon arc cutting to a temperature
of about 120°C).
Excavation cavities shall be subjected to magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination. Where
doubt exists as to whether a radiographically detected defect has been completely removed by
excavation, particularly if there are two defects, one below the other, in the same cross section, a
new radiograph should be made of the cavity (requirements set in MC 3200 do not need to be met
in this case).
Excavation shall continue until defects which are unacceptable for surface of finished parts have
been eliminated.

B - REPAIR WELDING
Repairs shall be made by welding in accordance with requirements given under SECTION IV of
the RCC-M.

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 51
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

C - POST-WELD HEAT TREATMENT

Weld repair operations shall be followed by a heat treatment. This may be either a heat treatment
for mechanical properties or a stress relieving heat treatment.

Stainless steels may be heat treated for mechanical properties prior to repair welding. No stress
relieving heat treatment is required after repair welding.
Carbon and low alloy steels shall be subjected to a stress relieving heat treatment which entails:
- placing them in a furnace at less than 300°C,
- heating them to 610°C at a maximum rate of 55°C/h,

- holding it at 610  C 15

10C
C

Minimum holding time is dependent on the size of the repairs, but shall never be less than two
hours. The number of stress relieving heat treatments shall be such that their total duration does not
exceed 20 hours.

M 366.3 Examination of weld repairs

The following non-destructive examinations shall be made on completion of weld repairs:

A - EXAMINATION OF REPAIR AREAS IN GENERAL

- surface examination,
- magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination. Examination procedures and criteria shall
comply with requirements set in M 364 of this specification.

B - RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION OF MAJOR REPAIRS

The terms "major" and "minor excavation cavities" are defined in figures M 366.3 a) and
M 366.3 b).
Cavities are classified by depth or by surface area.
Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with requirements set in M 365 of this
specification.
A repair chart showing the exact location and dimensions of major repairs shall be drawn up.
Moreover, on examination of the films, it shall be ensured that weld repairs do not exhibit residual
defects likely to disqualify them. Special attention should therefore be paid to detecting those
defects which may be produced by welding. Indications produced by defects such as tears, cracks
and incomplete fusion or penetration shall be unacceptable.
Where such defects are detected, they must be removed and the part repaired in compliance
with M 366.2.

M 000 / 52  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

M 370 BASE METAL TEST COUPONS

Coupons taken from excess metal left after taking acceptance test samples from parts or plates listed
in table I shall be preserved and stored until the date that the end-of-manufacturing report is
submitted.
Test coupons shall be as follows:
- for forgings: excess metal removed under the same conditions as the metal for acceptance
testing,
- castings: one or more prolongation of the same size as the prolongation for acceptance testing,
- for plate: remaining base metal located in the band used for acceptance testing.
It must be possible to remove test specimens under the same conditions as those for acceptance
testing or, for plate, from a position located as close as possible to the quarter width.
The identification, orientation, coupon size and location with respect to the acceptance test coupon
shall be recorded.
When there is sufficient excess metal, these coupons are able to provide enough specimens for
acceptance testing, they must be representative of the metal subsequent to heat treatment for
mechanical properties of the part or plate.

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 53
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

FIGURE M 336.3 a)

M 000 / 54  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

FIGURE M 366.3 b)
EXCAVATION CAVITIES - SURFACE TO BE MACHINED

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 55
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

FIGURE M 366.3 b) (cont.)

EXCAVATION CAVITIES - UNMACHINED SURFACE

M 000 / 56  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

TABLE I

REACTOR VESSEL

flanges
core shells
nozzle shell
nozzles
transition ring
calottesheads

STEAM GENERATOR

channel head
support ring
ellipsoidal domes
cylindrical shells
conical shells
tube plates
feedwater nozzle
steam outlet nozzles
manway

PRESSURIZER

top and bottom heads

plates for shells
surge line and spray nozzles
manway

M 380 FORGING RATIO

M 381 DEFINITIONS
The forging direction is the direction in each portion of the part in which the forging operation
produces maximum elongation.
The part is said to be forged either in a longitudinal or transverse direction depending upon whether
this direction is parallel or perpendicular to the ingot axis.
As a rule, the forging ratio represents for each portion of the part the ratio between the lengths of an
element of the metal measured parallel to the forging direction after and before the forging
operation.
The following forging ratios correspond to major forging processes:

M 381.1 Drawing ratio

Ratio of the cross section of the ingot or blank prior to drawing, to the cross section after the
drawing operation.

 n° 137-2012 M 000 / 57
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 300

M 381.2 Ring forging ratio

Ratio of the average diameter of the part after forging to the average diameter before forging.

M 381.3 Forging ratio for mandrel forging

Ratio between the transverse cross section of the forging before and after mandrel forging.

M 381.4 Extrusion ratio

Ratio between the lengths of the forging after and before extrusion.

M 381.5 Forging ratio for plate

Longitudinal reduction ratio: ratio between the length of the blank after and before each forging
operation producing longitudinal reduction.
Transverse reduction ratio: ratio between the width of the blank after and before each forging
operation producing transverse reduction.

M 382 OVERALL RATIO OF REDUCTION

The longitudinal reduction ratio of the part is equal to the product of the longitudinal reduction
ratios for each successive forging operation.

The transverse reduction ratio is either the ratio defined in M 381.2, for ring forging for the
transverse reduction ratio defined in M 381.5, for plate.
The overall ratio of reduction is equal to the product of the longitudinal reduction ratio and the
transverse reduction ratio.
For plate, this ratio is equal to the ratio between the thickness of the ingot and the final thickness of
the plate.

M 383 PARTS FABRICATED BY UPSETTING OR FLATTENING

The reduction ratio for upsetting or flattening by application of a load parallel to the axis of the
ingot, is equal to the ratio between the cross section of the forging after and before the upsetting or
flattening operation, or to the ratio between the height of the forging before and after the upsetting
or flattening operation. .
By convention, the overall ratio of reduction of a part is the product of the individual reduction ratio
and the square root of the longitudinal reduction ratio of the forging prior to upsetting or flattening

Note: If the forging is subjected to an intermediate upsetting operation, the reduction ratio for the upsetting operation
shall not be included in the overall reduction ratio (see paragraphs 382 and 383 above).

M 000 / 58  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1111

M 1111
PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CARBON STEEL CHANNEL HEAD CASTINGS

FOR PWR STEAM GENERATORS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable carbon steel channel head castings for pressurized water reactor
steam generators.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I below.
TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 20 MN 5 M

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Max Carbon pref. max 0.23 0.25

Max Silicon 0.55
Max Manganese 1.20
Max Sulphur 0.012 0.015
Max Phosphorus 0.015 0.020
Max Copper 0.25
Max Nickel 0.50 0.50
Max Chromium 0.25 0.25
Max Molybdenum 0.25 0.25
Max Vanadium 0.02

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 1
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1111

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. In addition, the foundry shall provide two product analyses.
The latter may be performed on metal discard from mechanical test specimens, one of which is
removed from the outer edge of the lip, the other from a nozzle.
These analyses shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
If a more complete material analysis is made, it shall only indicate the usual percentages of residual
elements other than those specified in table I.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the foundry shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- identification of casting method,
- channel head procurement drawing with positions of any samples which are integrally attached
or adjacent to the part,
- heat treatment conditions,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling, non-destructive testing and repair welding operations shall be
presented in chronological order.

PROTOTYPE PART
The manufacturing method shall be tested using a prototype part produced in accordance with the
requirements of M 160.

3.2 CASTING
The choice of casting method shall be left to the foundry. This method shall be identified in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

3.3 MACHINING
Channel heads shall be machined as indicated on the procurement drawing.

M 1000 / 2  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1111

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Channel heads shall be delivered as treated, with weld-on lifting lugs and identification plates.
Heat treatment for mechanical properties shall consist of normalizing, followed by austenitizing and
water quenching. Normalizing and austenitizing temperatures shall be set by the foundry in order to
fulfil the requirements given in paragraph 4 of this specification.
This treatment shall be followed by tempering at a nominal temperature ranging from 640°C to
670°C and by air cooling. Heat treatment conditions shall be specified in the manufacturing
programme (1).
Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. Maximum
permissible deviation from specified holding temperatures for the entire part shall be ± 20°C for
values above 850°C and ± 15°C for values of 850°C or lower. Thermocouple locations are specified
in the manufacturing programme. If, after heat treatment, the channel head does not exhibit the
required characteristics, it may be retreated (see paragraph 4.4).
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
(1) The term "conditions" refers to heating rate, holding temperature, holding time and cooling rate.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

4.2 SAMPLING
X samples (from the outer edge of the lip) and Y samples (from nozzles) shall be taken after heat
treatment of the channel head for mechanical properties.
The minimum number of "X " and "Y" samples and their uses shall be as follows:

"X" SAMPLES
- one for acceptance tests,
- two for any post-retreatment tests,
- one as a production coupon.

"Y" SAMPLES
- one for acceptance tests,
- one for any post-retreatment tests.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 3
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1111

The size of test samples shall be such that they can provide enough specimens for all tests and
retests.
Sampling conditions shall be as follows:

"X" SAMPLES
Sample faces shall be located at least 60 mm from the skins of the prolongations from which they
are removed. Test specimens shall be taken from these samples as specified on the procurement
drawing.

"Y" SAMPLES
These samples shall be taken at the ends of the two nozzles and shall have a thickness of at least
110 mm in the direction of the nozzle axis. Test pertinent areas shall be located at 55 mm from the
inner and outer surface of the test ring and midway between top and bottom.
Drawings showing the positions of samples on the part and of specimens on the samples shall be
attached to the manufacturing programme.

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
The number and content of tests are shown in table III.
Test specimens shall be taken after the sample has been subjected to simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment according to the requirements of M 151. Nominal holding temperature shall be 615°C.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A -TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens dimensions shall be as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

M 1000 / 4  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1111

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted ; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. Test temperatures shall be + 20°C,
0°C and - 20°C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table II must
be fulfilled.

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure: 2 sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens
shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three
test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be
rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Tests at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part shall
be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 5
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1111

If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required in
paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for three tests performed at + 40°C. If the
requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the part shall be rejected (see
paragraph 4.4).

C- BEND TESTS
a) Test specimen
A test specimen 12.5 mm x 25 mm x 200 mm shall be used.

b) Test method
The bend test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000. Mandrel diameter shall be
25 mm. Bend angle shall be 90°.

c) Results
No superficial tears, cracks or blisters shall be accepted. Indications due to casting defects whose
largest dimension is less than 5 mm shall be accepted.
If this is not the case, the procedures given under 4.3.2.A "Results" shall be followed.

4.3.3 Base material test coupons

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be treated.
Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2.
The tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

M 1000 / 6  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1111

TABLE II

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 7
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1111

TABLE III

M 1000 / 8  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1111

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Sand shall be carefully removed from the parts, which shall then be trimmed to eliminate risers and
vent scrap, parting lines and runners.
Surface condition shall then be determined in accordance with MC 7200.
Surface roughness (Ra) shall not exceed 12.5 µm . For surfaces which are liquid penetrant tested or
machined, this roughness (Ra) shall not exceed 6.3 µm .

5.1 VISUAL EXAMINATION

Parts shall be subjected to a complete visual examination in accordance with MC 7100. All surfaces
shall be examined at the machining stage to ensure that the metal is sound.
A final examination is performed on the part when it is ready for delivery.

RESULTS
Parts shall be free from defects such as scale, cracks, porosities, sand inclusions or other injurious
defects.

5.2 MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION

All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to magnetic particle examination by passing a current
through the part after all stress-relieving heat treatment and final machining operations have been
completed. Contact point locations shall be checked by inducing a magnetic field in the part.
Test procedures shall be as specified in MC 5000.
The various phases of magnetic particle examination and the methods used (current, field) shall be
specified in the manufacturing programme. Where no clear interpretation of results is possible, a
more comprehensive examination shall be conducted.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any defect with one dimension of 2 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition. All
defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 5 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart end to end or extending over more than
20 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 9
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1111

In addition, liquid penetrant examinations shall be performed on all surfaces for which magnetic
particle examination generated non-linear indications with dimensions of 2 to 5 mm. The following
shall be considered unacceptable:
- rounded indications with a dia. > 4 mm,
- linear indications with a length > 2 mm.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
6.1 ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION
Ultrasonic examination shall also be performed in accordance with MC 2200 on areas which are
subject to in-service surveillance.
During this examination, indications whose amplitude is greater than 50% of reference level and
areas for which loss of back echo amplitude is more than 18 dB shall be recorded.

6.2 RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION

The entire part shall be subjected to radiographic examination.
This examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 3200. In addition;
- Weld edges shall be subjected to radiographic examination over a width of:
. for nozzles: 80 mm
. for the weld lip of the channel heat : 150 mm
from the final profile of the part in order to ensure that the metal exhibits no homogeneity defects
where cracks could form during welding.
Radiographic image qualities shall comply with standards set in MC 3200:
- It is recommended that the part be machined at the foundry to as close a finished form as possible
in order to cut down on post-examination machining operations.
The various phases of examination are specified in the manufacturing programme.

ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
The first 150 mm starting from the weld lip of the channel head and the first 80 mm of nozzle end
shall be subject to severity level 1 standards as set by ASTM E 446, except for "significant"
category C defects and category D, E, F and G defects, which are unacceptable. A category C defect
is considered significant if it cannot be contained within a circle 4 mm in diameter.
In all other areas, severity level 2 standards set by ASTM E 186 for thicknesses of 51 to 144 mm
and by ASTM E 280 for thicknesses greater than 114 mm must be met. This is not applicable to
category D, E, F and G defects, which are unacceptable.

M 1000 / 10  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1111

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

7.1 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITHOUT REPAIR WELDING
Defects detected by surface examination or magnetic particle examination may be eliminated by
grinding, provided the thickness of the ground areas remains within the tolerances specified on the
drawing and that the resulting cavities are not injurious to the areas around them.
Where this is not the case, the requirements of paragraph 7.2 shall apply.
Overheating of the ground surface must be avoided during removal:
- cavities must blend smoothly into surrounding areas,
- cavities shall be subjected to magnetic particle examination in accordance with the procedures
and criteria described in paragraph 5.2 of this specification.

7.2 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITH REPAIR WELDING

7.2.1 Removal of defects
Areas whose defects do not meet the acceptability criteria defined in paragraphs 5.1, 5.2, 6.1 and 6.2
shall be excavated by grinding or chipping or carbon arc cutting plus grinding (in the case of carbon
arc cutting, the part is preheated to a temperature of about 120°C).
Excavation cavities shall be subjected to magnetic particle examination in accordance with the
procedures and criteria described in paragraph 5.2. of this specification. Where doubt exists as to
whether a radiographically detected defect has been completely removed by excavation, particularly
if there are two defects, one below the other, in the same cross section, a new radiographic
examination may be made of the excavated area.
Excavation shall continue until surface defects which are unacceptable for finished parts have been
eliminated.

7.2.2 Repair welding

Repairs shall be made by welding in accordance with requirements of SECTION IV of this Code.

7.2.3 Post weld heat treatment

7.2.3.1 Stress-relieving heat treatment
On completion of weld repairs, and after welding of channel head accessories, the part shall be
subjected to a stress-relieving heat treatment entailing:

- holding it at 610  C  15
10C
C

Minimum holding time depends on the size of repairs and the thickness of attachment weldments,
but shall never be less than two hours.
The number of stress-relieving treatments shall be such that their total duration does not exceed
20 hours.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 11
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1111

7.2.3.2 Postheating treatment

Small repairs (see definition below) may be heated at 250°C/300°C for a minimum of three hours in
place of the stress-relieving treatment described in 7.2.3.1.
Small repairs are those made by depositing weld metal in cavities less than 10 mm deep and less
than 25 cm2 in area.
The entire part shall contain less than 20 such weld-repaired cavities and their total volume shall be
less than 150 cm3.
A test report stating the number, dimensions, location and volume of weld repairs shall be provided.

7.3 EXAMINATION OF WELD REPAIRS

The following non-destructive examinations shall be made on completion of weld repairs:

A - MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION

- Examination of the entire channel head following stress-relieving heat treatment.
- Examination of small weld repairs (see 7.2.3.2) and of adjacent areas (located within an area of
25 mm around the repair), following postheating treatment.
Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 5.2 of this
specification.

B - RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION OF MAJOR REPAIRS

The terms "major" and "minor" excavation cavities are defined in an annex to this specification.
Cavities are classified according to depth or surface area.
Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraph 6.2
of this specification.
Moreover, on examination of the films, it shall be ensured that weld repairs do not exhibit residual
defects likely to disqualify them. Special attention should therefore be paid to detecting those
defects which may be produced by welding. Defects such as tears, cracks and incomplete fusion and
lack of penetration shall be unacceptable.
Slag inclusions shall be repaired where indications exceed the following lengths:
- 20 mm for the first 80 mm of nozzle end and the first 150 mm of weld lip,
- 30 mm for all other areas.

M 1000 / 12  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1111

These indications are classified "type B" on the applicable reference radiographs. The total surface
area of all inclusions, including those produced by welding, shall not exceed the security level
conditions set by the reference radiographs.
No distinction shall be made between porosities produced by welding and those inherent in the
casting.
The foundry shall prepare a drawing or a sketch which clearly shows the location and dimensions of
major repairs. Conditions for carrying out the repairs shall be appended to this repair chart.

C - ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF MAJOR REPAIRS

This check supplements the radiographic examination of major repairs whose excavation depth
exceeds 10 mm.
The examination shall be performed in compliance with MC 2600, on the one hand using straight
longitudinal waves from surfaces on the repaired area, and on the other using transverse waves with
an refraction angle chosen so that examination of the melted area is optimized along the excavation
edges and with the following orientations:
- along the excavation edges, for a given orientation, the probe shall be placed so that the beam is
oriented appreciably perpendicular to the excavation edges,
- for the rest of the repaired area, with the same refraction angle as that defined above and with
8 orientations from the weld surface.

This examination concerns 100% of the deposited repair metal and the adjacent area over at least 10
min in relation to the excavation.
The examination criteria are those defined in S 7714.4.1.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensional characteristics of the channel head after final machining shall comply with the
procurement drawing. The reference axes for the dimensional check shall be indicated on plates
attached to the channel head.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 13
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1111

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data: for parts which have been retreated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- charts of major repairs and repairs with only one postheating treatment,
- for all repairs by welding (major and minor):
. production weld data sheets,
. welding procedure data sheets and filler materials acceptance reports quoted in production
weld data sheets,
. welding procedure qualification reports used (these documents may be subjected to generic
distribution),
- dimensional checks,
- heat treatment (temperature ranges and holding times).

These reports shall include:

- heat number and channel head reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 1000 / 14  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1111

ANNEX TO SPECIFICATION M 1111

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed where required by equipment specifications or other
relevant contractual documents.
Determination of RTNDT temperature.
RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact tests.
The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.
Location and orientation of test specimens

Pellini drop weight test specimens: there are no orientation requirements, but orientation shall be
noted in acceptance reports.
KV impact test specimens: KV impact test specimens shall be oriented in the same manner as the
test specimens listed in table III.

"X" SAMPLES
The longitudinal axis of the test specimen shall be at least 60 mm from a heat-treated edge, with one
of its ends positioned 45 mm from a heat-treated edge and the other 60 mm from a second edge.

"Y" SAMPLES
The longitudinal axis of the test specimen shall be at least 55 mm from the end of the heat treated
nozzle and midway between the inner surface and the outer surface of said nozzle.
Two specimens, one from an "X" sample and the other from a "Y" sample, shall be tested. The
number of test specimens and their test temperatures are shown in table A.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of these
specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.
Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations on the "X" sample and
from diametrically opposed locations on the "Y" sample. The shape and dimensions of test
specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT shall not be higher than - 12 °C.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 15
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1111

TABLE A

CONDITION OF TEST NUMBER OF SPECIMENS

NAME
TEST TEMPERATURE
OF TEST "X" SAMPLES "Y" SAMPLES
SPECIMEN IN °C
RTNDT

HTMP + SSRHT (1) 2 2

 Pellini
 drop
 weight

 HTMP + SSRHT (1) 3 3
KV
 impact

Key :
HTMP : Heat treatment for mechanical properties
SSRHT : Simulated stress relieving heat treatment

(1)Test temperatures are given in MC 1000.

Note : Where samples required here are the same and are heat treated in the same manner as those specified in
table III, tests do not need to be repeated.

M 1000 / 16  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1111

ANNEX 1

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 17
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1111

ANNEX 2

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
SURFACE TO BE MACHINED

M 1000 / 18  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1111

ANNEX 2 (cont.)

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
UNMACHINED SURFACE

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 19
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1111

M 1000 / 20  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1112

M 1112

PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CLASS 1, 2 AND 3 PRESSURE RETAINING

CARBON STEEL CASTINGS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers pressure-retaining castings fabricated from welding carbon steel.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
For class 1 materials, a product analysis shall be performed on one part per lot. The percentages of
elements listed in table I shall be determined. This analysis may be performed on metal discard from
mechanical test specimens.
If a more complete material analysis is made, it shall only indicate the usual percentages of residual
elements other than those specified in table I.
These analyses shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 21
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1112

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 20 MN 5 M 20 M 5 M

LADLE PART LADLE PART

ELEMENT
in % in % in % in %

Maximum Carbon 0.22 0.25 0.22 0.25

Maximum Silicon 0.55 0.60 0.40 0.50

Maximum Manganese 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20

Maximum Sulphur 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020

Maximum Phosphorus 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020

Maximum Copper  0.50 – – –


Maximum Nickel  0.50 – – –

Maximum Chromium  (1) 0.40 – – –

Maximum Molybdenum  0.25 – – –

MaximumVanadium  0.03 – – –

(1) The total content of these five residual elements, as determined by ladle analysis, shall be  1 %.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the foundry shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- identification of casting method,
- part procurement drawing with positions of any samples which are integrally attached or adjacent
to the part,
- heat treatment conditions,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling, non-destructive testing and repair welding operations shall be
presented in chronological order.

PROTOTYPE PART
The manufacturing method shall be tested using a prototype part produced in accordance with the
requirements of M 160.

M 1000 / 22  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1112

3.2 CASTING
The choice of casting method shall be left to the foundry. This method shall be identified in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

3.3 MACHINING
Parts shall be machined as indicated on the procurement drawing.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Parts shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. Heat treatment for mechanical properties shall
consist of normalizing or quenching followed by tempering. Austenitizing temperatures prior to
quenching and tempering temperatures shall be set by the foundry in order to fulfil the requirements
give in paragraph 4 of this specification. Heat treatment conditions (1) shall be specified in the
manufacturing programme.
If, after heat treatment, the parts do not exhibit the required characteristics, they may be retreated
(see paragraph 4.4).
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
(1) The term "conditions" refers to heating rate, holding temperature, holding time and cooling rate.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II below.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall consist of attachments integral with the part or from ingots cast integrally with
the part or separately. In all cases, ingots shall be attached to the part prior to heat treatment for
mechanical properties.
The samples shall be of sufficient size to ensure that the necessary number of test specimens may be
taken for the tests prescribed and for any retests required. The smallest dimension of the test ingot or
attachment cross section shall be representative of the standard section of the pressure vessel
(excluding flanges and knuckles), but shall not be less than 28 mm. and not more than 240 mm. The
samples shall be taken so that the axes of the attachments or ingots are located at least one quarter of
their thickness from the skins, at a minimum distance of 14 mm.
In the case of parts whose standard thickness is less than 28 mm, the smallest dimension of the test
sample cross section may be equal to this thickness provided it remains greater than 14 mm, the test
specimen axis being at midthickness.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 23
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1112

The size of the attachments ingots and the orientation and location of the test specimens within the
ingots shall be specified in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).
TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED VALUE

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE 20 MN 5 M 20 M 5 M

Tension Room Rp0,2 minimum value 275 MPa 235 MPa

Rm minimum value 485 MPa 470 MPa
A % 5d minimum value 20 20
Z % minimum value 35 35

300°C Rtp0,2 minimum value 210 MPa 185 MPa

Rm minimum value 435 MPa 425 MPa

KV Impact(2) 0° Minimum average value 56 J 56 J

Minimum individual value (1) 40 J 40 J

KV Impact(3) 0° Minimum average value 40 J 40 J

Minimum individual value (1) 28 J 28 J
(1) In each series of 3 tests, only one value less than the required average value shall be accepted.
(2) Class 1 components
(3) Class2 and 3 components

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
The series of tests to be performed on each lot is given in table III below.
Test specimens shall be taken:
- after heat treatment for mechanical properties if repair by welding is performed before heat
treatment and if the part is not subjected to subsequent stress relieving heat treatment,
- after the sample has undergone the following simulated stress relieving heat treatment according
to the requirements of M 151. Nominal holding temperature shall be 610 °C.
Yield strength and tensile strength shall be determined at the temperature specified in table III when
stipulated in the equipment specification or other relevant contractual documents.

DEFINITION OF A LOT
The term lot applies to a number of parts from the same heat which are part of the same furnace
charge. The lot shall be limited to 5000 kg. For valve bodies, the lot shall comprise parts with a
maximum thickness of up to 35 mm, between 35 and 65 mm or over 65 mm.

M 1000 / 24  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1112

TABLE III

NUMBER OF
CONDITION OF TEST
NAME OF TEST SPECIMENS PER
TEST SPECIMEN TEMPERATURE
TYPE OF TEST

Tension HTMP or HTMP + SSRHT Room 1

Tension HTMP or HTMP + SSRHT 300°C 1
KV Impact HTMP or HTMP + SSRHT 0°C 3
HTMP : Heat treatment for mechanical properties.
SSRHT : Simulated stress relieving heat treatment.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens dimensions shall be as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted, if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 25
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1112

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. Test temperature shall be 0°C.

b) Results
The impact energy absorption requirements at 0°C shown in table II must be fulfilled.
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens
shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three
test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be
rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2.
The tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be carefully examined during all phases of fabrication to verify the metal soundness.
All surfaces of the part which are accessible at the final stage shall be subjected to a visual
examination in accordance with MC 7100.
The final inspection for surface defects shall be performed after completion of all heat treatments.
Parts shall be thoroughly deburred and free of adhering sand. Risers, cores, vent scrap, parting lines
and runners shall be removed.
Parts shall be free from defects such as scale, cracks, porosities, sand inclusions, or other injurious
defects.

M 1000 / 26  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1112

A magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000.

In the case of small parts cast using special methods (investment casting, ceramic moulds, etc),
magnetic particle examination may be replaced with liquid penetrant examination in accordance
with the requirements of paragraph 5.2.

5.1 MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION

The scope of the magnetic particle examination is defined in the following table:

AT THE FOUNDRY AT THE MANUFACTURER'S (2)

CLASS 1 On all accessible machined and/or ground
PARTS
On all accessible surfaces
surfaces
For:
CLASS 2 - all accessible machined surfaces For all accessible machined and/or
PARTS (1) - after careful grinding, all crotch regions ground surfaces
of external surfaces
CLASS 3
Not required On O-ring seal zones
PARTS
(1) For castings subject to pressure in Main Secondary Circuit components, as defined in paragraph C4440 of the
RCC-M, the scope required is the same as for Class 1 parts.

(2) At the Manufacturer's, the magnetic particle examination may be replaced by liquid penetrant examination in
accordance with the requirements of paragraph 5.2.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any defect with one dimension of 2 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition. All
defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 5 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
20 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.
In addition, liquid penetrant examinations shall be performed on all surfaces for which magnetic
particle examination generated non-linear indications with dimensions of 2 to 5 mm. The following
shall be considered unacceptable:
- rounded indications with a dia. > 4 mm,
- linear indications with a length > 2 mm.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 27
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1112

WELD EDGES
The criteria to be respected are given in B 4000 for class 1 parts and in C 4000 for class 2 parts.

5.2 LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION

Liquid penetrant examination shall be performed in the areas specified in paragraph 5.1 to
supplement magnetic particle examination or when it is not possible to perform magnetic particle
examination.
The examination shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of MC 4000.
In all cases, liquid penetrant examination shall be performed on O-ring bearing surfaces.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any indications with one dimension of 2 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indications shall be detected and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 5 mm,
- 3 or more indications in a line separated by less then 3 mm (edge to edge),
- 5 or more grouped indications for class 1 components, 10 for classes 2 and 3, within an area of
100 cm2, whose greatest dimension shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable
location relative to the indications being evaluated.
Weld edges: applicable criteria are given in chapter B 4000 for class 1 components and in chapter
C 4000 for class 2.
When liquid penetrant examination is performed on O-ring bearing surfaces, any indication with one
dimension greater than 0.3 mm shall be considered a recordable condition. All defects which
produce the following indications shall be detected and repaired:
- indications with one dimension greater than 1 mm.
No aligned or grouped indications corresponding to the definitions given above shall be acceptable.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Unless otherwise indicated, all examinations shall be performed after the part has been heat-treated.
A radiographic examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 3200.

6.1 ZONES EXAMINED

The zones to be radiographed shall be selected after the final part drawing has been drafted and the
prototype parts have been examined.

M 1000 / 28  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1112

The Manufacturer shall define the following for the Supplier:

- weld zones,
- zones considered critical on account of the applied loads,
- deep machining zones,
- weld edges,
The zones to be examined are:

6.1.1 Class 1 parts

a) For valves with nominal diameters of more than 50 mm and for Main Secondary System valves
defined in A 4222: the entire part shall be examined.

b) Valves with a nominal diameter less than or equal to 50 mm: on welds zones and ends body.

c) Where possible, all other parts shall be 100% radiographically examined; the minimum zones to
be radiographed are specified in MC 3200.

6.1.2 Class 2 parts for systems stipulated in A 4222

Valves: on the whole part.

6.1.3 Class 2 parts for systems other than those stipulated in A 4222
a) For valves with a nominal diameter greater than 100 mm, the following zones shall be examined:
weld zones, ends, zones considered critical on account of the loadings they must support and the
casting method used, and zones which shall be subjected to deep machining.

b) Valves with a nominal diameter less than or equal to 100 mm: on welds zones and body ends.
For valves with a nominal diameter less than or equal to 50 mm, radiography may be replaced by
liquid penetrant examination.

c) For other parts, areas 3 and 5 shown on the diagrams in annex 1 to this specification shall be
examined together with the weld edges.

6.1.4 Class 3 parts

a) For valves with a nominal diameter greater than 80 mm, weld zones and ends shall be examined.

b) Radiographic examination shall not be required for valves whose nominal diameter does not
exceed 80 mm.

c) For other parts, only the weld edges shall be examined.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 29
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1112

6.1.5 Class 1 and 2 parts not subjected to pressure

On weld zones, on zones considered critical on account of the applied loads or the casting method
used, and zones which have to be deep machined.

6.2 DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

6.2.1 Valves
Body ends shall be measured from the edge of the nozzle to be welded to the piping and the crotch
region of the valve body, before the part is machined. There shall not be more than 5 mm extra
length on a valve body end or nozzle. When the final profile is shown on the radiographic film, no
requirements shall be applicable to the extra length, and the length of the zone examined hereafter
shall be measured from the final profile.
The length of the weld zone on the body end shall be measured from the final profile of the end; it
shall be equal to at least 3 times the nominal thickness of the pipe to which it is connected. There is
no requirement for this length to exceed 75 mm.
When a blind flange is fitted to the valve body end, the weld zone shall be located between the weld
edge on the body end or nozzle and the face of the blind flange on the weld edge side of the end.
However, the length of the zone shall not exceed 3 times the nominal thickness of the pipe to which
the end is connected, measured from the final profile, or a distance of 75 mm.

6.2.2 Other parts

The length of the zone examined on weld edges shall be measured from the final profile and shall be
equal to at least 3 times the thickness of the wall. There is no requirement for this length to exceed
75 mm.

6.3 CRITERIA
For all severity levels, the following defects shall be unacceptable:
- cracks,
- chaplets,
- chill remnants,
are unacceptable. The applicable acceptance criteria specified by standard NF EN 12681, Annex A,
are as follows:

6.3.1 Class 1 parts

a) Valves
- Weld body ends: severity level 1.
- Nozzle or body end and remainder of part: severity level 2.

M 1000 / 30  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1112

b) Other parts
- Weld body ends: severity level 1.
- Other portions: severity level 2.

6.3.2 Class 2 parts

a) Valves
- Weld body ends: severity level 1.
- Nozzles or body ends: severity level 2.
- Other portions: severity level 3.

b) Other parts
- Weld edges: severity level 1.
- Other portions: severity level 3.

6.3.3 Class 3 parts

a) Valves
- Weld body ends: severity level 1.
- Nozzle or body ends: severity level 2.
- Other portions: severity level 3.

b) Other parts
- Weld edges: severity level 1.

6.3.4 Special case of castings, with wall thickness lower or equal to

25.4 mm, made by the lost wax process:
Table IV, gives the applicable criteria and reference radiographs as defined in ASTM E 192
standard, as a function of severity levels called in para. 6.3.1, 6.3.2 and 6.3.3.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 31
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1112

TABLE IV

M 1000 / 32  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1112

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

7.1 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITHOUT REPAIR WELDING
Defects detected by surface examination or magnetic particle examination may be eliminated by
grinding, provided the thickness of the ground areas remains within the tolerances specified on the
drawing and that the resulting cavities are not injurious to the areas around them.
Where this is not the case, the requirements of paragraph 7.2 shall apply.
Overheating of the ground surface must be avoided during removal:
- cavities must blend smoothly into surrounding areas,
- cavities shall be subjected to magnetic particle examination in accordance with the procedures
and criteria described in paragraph 5.1 of this specification.

7.2 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITH REPAIR WELDING

7.2.1 Removal of defects
Areas whose defects do not meet the acceptability criteria defined in paragraphs 5 and 6 shall be
excavated by grinding or chipping or carbon arc cutting plus grinding (in the case of carbon arc
cutting, the part shall be preheated to a temperature of about 120°C).
Excavation cavities shall be subjected to magnetic particle examination in accordance with the
procedures and criteria described in paragraph 5.1 of this specification. Where doubt exists as to
whether a radiographically detected defect has been completely removed by excavation, particularly
if there are two defects, one below the other, in the same cross section, a new radiographic
examination may be made of the excavated area (in which case the requirements of MC 3200 shall
not be applicable).
Excavation shall continue until surface defects which are unacceptable for finished parts have been
eliminated, in accordance with the criteria given in paragraphs 5.1 or 5.2.

7.2.2 Repair welding

Repairs shall be made by welding in accordance with the requirements of SECTION IV of
this Code.

7.2.3 Stress-relieving heat treatment

On completion of weld repairs, the part shall be subjected to a stress-relieving heat treatment
entailing:

- holding it at 610  C  15
10C
C

Minimum holding time depends on the size and thickness of repairs, but shall never be less than
two hours.
The number of stress-relieving heat treatments shall be such that their total duration does not exceed
20 hours.
Where it is not possible to carry out postweld heat treatment, the provisions of S 7620 shall apply.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 33
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1112

In the case of small parts for which heat treatment for mechanical properties is performed after
repair by welding, the stress relieving heat treatment defined above shall not be performed.

7.3 EXAMINATION OF WELD REPAIRS

The following non-destructive examinations shall be made on completion of weld repairs.

A - EXAMINATION OF ALL AREAS REPAIRED

- Visual examination.
- Magnetic particle examination or liquid penetrant examination of all repair areas. Examination
procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 5 of this specification.

B - RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION OF MAJOR REPAIRS

The terms "major" and "minor" excavation cavities are defined in annexes 2 and 3 of this
specification.
Cavities are classified according to depth or surface area.
Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraph 6 of
this specification. For repairs in zones where volumetric examination is not specified in
paragraph 6.1 above, major repairs shall be radiographically examined as prescribed in MC 3240,
unless the zone is not readily accessible for radiographic examination. Severity level 3 shall be
applicable. Interpretation of radiographs shall meet the requirements of MC 3250.
Charts showing the exact location and dimensions of major repairs shall be prepared.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensional characteristics of parts after final machining shall comply with the procurement
drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B, C
and D 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

M 1000 / 34  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1112

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data,
- charts of major repairs,
- for all repairs by welding (major and minor):
. production weld data sheets,
. welding procedure data sheets and filler materials acceptance reports quoted in production
weld data sheets,
. in addition, for class 1 parts only, welding procedure qualification reports used (these
documents may be subjected to generic distribution),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional checks,
- heat treatment (temperature ranges and holding times).

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 35
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1112

ANNEX 1

PUMP CASING

M 1000 / 36  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1112

ANNEX 2

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 37
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1112

ANNEX 3

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
SURFACE TO BE MACHINED

M 1000 / 38  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1112

ANNEX 3 (cont.)

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
UNMACHINED SURFACE

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 39
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1112

M 1000 / 40  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1114

M 1114
PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CAST CARBON STEEL

STEAM ISOLATION VALVE BODIES FOR
PRESSURIZED WATER NUCLEAR REACTORS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers cast steam isolation valve bodies made from weldable carbon steel for
PWR nuclear power plants.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. In addition, the foundry shall provide a product analysis.
This analysis may be performed on metal discard from mechanical test specimens.
These analyses shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
If a more complete material analysis is made, it shall only indicate the usual percentages of residual
elements other than those specified in table I.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 41
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1114

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 20 MN 5 M
ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Maximum Carbon 0.22 0.25

Maximum Silicon 0.55 0.60
Maximum Manganese 1.20 1.20
Maximum Sulphur 0.020 0.020
Maximum Phosphorus 0.020 0.020
Maximum Copper 0.50 0.50
Maximum Nickel  0.50 0.50

Maximum Chromium  (1) 0.40 0.40
Maximum Molybdenum 
 0.25 0.25
Maximum Vanadium 0.03 0.03

(1) Total content of these three elements shall be less than 1% either in ladle or product analysis.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the foundry shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- identification of casting method,
- part procurement drawing with positions of any samples which are integrally attached or adjacent
to the part,
- heat treatment conditions,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling, non-destructive testing and repair welding operations shall be
presented in chronological order.

PROTOTYPE PART
The manufacturing method shall be tested using a prototype part produced in accordance with the
requirements of M 160.

3.2 CASTING
The choice of casting method shall be left to the foundry. This method shall be identified in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

M 1000 / 42  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1114

3.3 MACHINING
Valve bodies shall be machined as indicated on the procurement drawing.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The valve body shall be delivered in the as-treated condition.
Heat treatment for mechanical properties shall consist of quenching or normalizing, followed by
tempering. Austenitizing temperatures prior to quenching and tempering temperatures shall be set
by the foundry in order to meet the requirements given in paragraph 4 of this specification. Heat
treatment conditions (1) shall be specified in the manufacturing programme.
Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. Thermocouple
locations are specified in the manufacturing programme. If, after heat treatment, the part does not
exhibit the required characteristics, it may be retreated (see paragraph 4.4).
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

(1) The term "conditions" refers to: heating rate, holding temperature, holding time and cooling rate.

3.5 HYDROSTATIC TEST

If required and specified in the purchase order.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II below.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall consist ingots integral with the part or from separately cast ingots attached to the
part prior to heat treatment. The samples shall be of sufficient size to ensure that the necessary
number of test specimens may be taken for the tests prescribed and for any retests required. The
smallest dimension of the sample cross section shall be representative of the normal pressure-
retaining part (excluding flanges and crotch regions). In this sample, the axes of the test specimens
shall be at a distance from the heat treatment skins at least equal to one quarter of the thickness in
relation to the closest skin and at least one half thickness in relation to the other skins, without,
however, exceeding 60 mm. In all cases, the end of the test specimen shall be at least 40 mm from
the end of the sample. The dimensions of the ingot, as well as the dimensioned drawing of the
location of the test specimens within the ingot, shall be specified in the manufacturing programme
(see paragraph 3.1).

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 43
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1114

TABLE II

NAME TEST
PROPERTIES REQUIRED VALUE
OF TEST TEMPERATURE

Tension Room Rp0,2 minimum value 275 MPa

Rm minimum value 485 MPa
A % 5d minimum value 20
Z % minimum value 35

300°C Rtp0,2 minimum value 180 MPa

Rm minimum value 435 MPa

KV Impact 0°C Minimum average value 56 J

(1)
Minimum individual value 40 J
(1) No more than one result below the average required value shall be acceptable per series of three tests.

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
The mechanical properties of each part shall be determined.
The number and content of tests to be performed are shown in the following table.

NUMBER OF
CONDITION OF TEST
NAME OF TEST SPECIMENS PER
TEST SPECIMEN TEMPERATURE
TYPE OF TEST

Tension HTMP + SSRHT Room 1

Tension HTMP + SSRHT 300°C 1
KV Impact HTMP + SSRHT 0°C 3
HTMP : Heat treatment for mechanical properties.
SSRHT : Simulated stress relieving heat treatment.

Test specimens shall be taken after the sample has been subjected to simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment according to the requirements of M 151. Nominal holding temperature shall be the lower
of the following two temperatures:
- 610 °C,
- the temperature at which tempering is performed during heat treatment for mechanical properties
less 25 °C.
Holding temperature shall be 8 hours minimum.

M 1000 / 44  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1114

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE

a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall be as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS

a) Test specimens and test method

KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. Test temperature shall be 0°C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at 0°C shown in table II must be met.
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 45
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1114

However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no more
than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with the
following procedure; two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall
be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test
specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2.
The tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Sand shall be carefully removed from the parts, which shall then be trimmed to eliminate risers and
vent scrap, parting lines and runners.
Surface condition shall then be determined in accordance with MC 7200.
Surface roughness (Ra) shall not exceed 12.5 µm . For surfaces which are liquid penetrant tested or
machined, this roughness (Ra) shall not exceed 6.3 µm .

5.1 VISUAL EXAMINATION

Parts shall be subjected to a complete visual examination in accordance with MC 7100. All surfaces
shall be examined at the machining stage to ensure that the metal is sound.
A final examination is performed on the part when it is ready for delivery.

RESULTS

Parts shall be free from defects such as scale, cracks, porosities, sand inclusions or other injurious
defects.

5.2 MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION

All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to magnetic particle examination by passing a current
through the part after all stress-relieving heat treatment and final machining operations have been
completed.

M 1000 / 46  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1114

Test procedures shall be as specified in MC 5000.

The various phases of magnetic particle examination and the methods used (current, field) shall be
specified in the manufacturing programme. Where no clear interpretation of results is possible, a
more comprehensive examination shall be conducted.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any defect with one dimension of 2 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition. All
defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 5 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
20 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.
In addition, liquid penetrant examinations shall be performed on all surfaces for which magnetic
particle examination generated non-linear indications with dimensions of 2 to 5 mm. The following
shall be considered unacceptable:
- rounded indications with a dia. > 4 mm,
- linear indications with length > 2 mm.

5.3 LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION

The machined surfaces of the body ends shall be examined.
The examination shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of MC 4000.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any indications with one dimension of 2 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indications shall be detected and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 5 mm,
- 3 or more indications in a line separated by less than 3 mm (edge to edge),
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 47
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1114

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Unless otherwise indicated, all examinations shall be performed after the part has been heat-treated.
The entire examinable volume of the part shall be radiographed.
The radiographic examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 3200. For zones which
cannot be examined by radiographic examination, ultrasonic examination shall be performed in
accordance with MC 2200.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION
Defects such as hot tears, cracks, chaplets and chill remnants shall be unacceptable.
The applicable acceptance criteria specified by standard NF EN 12681, Annex A, are as follows:
- for ends which are to be welded over a width equal to at least 3 times the wall thickness
measured from the final profile of the part and at most equal to 75 mm: severity level 1,
- for other portions of the part: severity level 2.

ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION
The following shall be considered recordable conditions:
- any indication whose amplitude is  50% of reference level,
- any area for which loss of back echo amplitude is more than 18 dB,
- defects shall be unacceptable if their echo amplitude is higher than the reference level and their
surface area totals 1000 mm2 or more.

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

7.1 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITHOUT REPAIR WELDING
Defects detected by surface examination or magnetic particle examination may be eliminated by
grinding, provided the thickness of the ground areas remains within the tolerances specified on the
drawing and that the resulting cavities are not injurious to the areas around them.
Where this is not the case, the requirements of paragraph 7.2 shall apply.
Overheating of the ground surface must be avoided during removal:
- cavities must blend smoothly into surrounding areas,
- cavities shall be subjected to magnetic particle examination in accordance with the procedures
and criteria described in paragraph 5.2 of this specification.

M 1000 / 48  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1114

7.2 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITH REPAIR WELDING

7.2.1 Removal of defects
Areas whose defects do not meet the acceptability criteria defined in paragraphs 5.1, 5.2 and 6.1
shall be excavated by grinding or chipping or carbon arc cutting plus grinding (in the case of carbon
arc cutting, the part shall be preheated to a temperature of about 120°C).
Excavation cavities shall be subjected to magnetic particle examination in accordance with the
procedures and criteria in paragraph 5.2 of this specification. Where doubt exists as to whether a
radiographically detected defect has been completely removed by excavation, particularly if there
are two defects, one below the other, in the same cross section, a new radiographic examination may
be made of the excavated area (in which case the requirements of MC 3200 shall not be applicable).
Excavation shall continue until surface defects which are unacceptable for finished parts have been
eliminated.

7.2.2 Repairs
Repairs shall be made by welding in accordance with the requirements of SECTION IV of
this Code.

7.2.3 Stress-relieving heat treatment

On completion of weld repairs, the part shall be subjected to a stress-relieving heat treatment
entailing:
 10C
- holding it at 610  C  15C

Minimum holding time depends on the size and thickness of repairs, but shall never be less than two
hours.
The number of stress-relieving treatments shall be such that their total duration does not exceed
20 hours.

7.3 EXAMINATION OF WELD REPAIRS

The following non-destructive examinations shall be made on completion of weld repairs:

A - MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION OR LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION

OF ALL REPAIR AREAS
Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements of paragraphs 5.2 and 5.3
of this specification.

B - RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION OF MAJOR REPAIRS

The terms "major" and "minor" excavation cavities are defined in annexes 1 and 2.
Cavities are classified according to depth or surface area.
Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraph 6 of
this specification.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 49
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1114

Charts showing the exact location and dimensions of major repairs shall be prepared.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensional characteristics of parts after final machining shall comply with the procurement
drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B
and C 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data: for parts which have been retreated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments,
- charts of major repairs,
- for all repairs by welding (major and minor):
. production weld data sheets,
. welding procedure data sheets and filler materials acceptance reports quoted in production
weld data sheets,
. welding procedure qualification reports used (these documents may be subjected to generic
distribution),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional checks,
- heat treatment (temperature ranges and holding times).

M 1000 / 50  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1114

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 51
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1114

ANNEX 1

M 1000 / 52  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1114

ANNEX 2

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
SURFACE TO BE MACHINED

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 53
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1114

ANNEX 2 (cont.)

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
UNMACHINED SURFACE

M 1000 / 54  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1115

M 1115
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CARBON OR ALLOY STEEL MOTOR SUPPORT

STAND CASTINGS FOR PRESSURIZED WATER
REACTOR COOLANT PUMPS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers carbon or alloy weldable steel motor support castings for pressurized water
reactor coolant pumps.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. When the part is obtained from several separate melts, the foundry shall provide the
chemical analysis of each melt.
In addition, the foundry shall provide a product analysis.
This analysis may be performed on metal discard from mechanical test specimens.
These analyses shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
If a more complete material analysis is made, it shall only indicate the usual percentages of residual
elements other than those specified in table I.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 55
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1115

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 23 M 5 M 20 CD 4 M
ELEMENT LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Carbon 0.20 - 0.25 0.18 - 0.22

Maximum Silicon 0.60 0.20 - 0.40
Manganese 1.00 - 1.50 0.80 - 1.20
Maximum Sulphur 0.020 0.020
Maximum Phosphorus 0.020 0.020
Maximum Chromium 0.30 1.00 - 1.30
Maximum Nickel 0.50 –
Molybdenum  0.25 0.40 - 0.60
Aluminium – 0.020 - 0.040

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the foundry shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- identification of casting method,
- part procurement drawing with positions of any samples which are integrally attached or adjacent
to the part,
- heat treatment conditions,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling, non-destructive testing and repair welding operations shall be
presented in chronological order.

PROTOTYPE PART
The manufacturing method shall be tested using a prototype part produced in accordance with the
requirements of M 160.

3.2 CASTING
The choice of casting method shall be left to the foundry. This method shall be identified in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

M 1000 / 56  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1115

3.3 MACHINING
The part shall be machined as indicated on the procurement drawing.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The part shall be delivered in the as-treated condition.
Heat treatment for mechanical properties shall consist of homogenizing, austenitizing and water
quenching, followed by tempering. Homogenizing and austenitizing temperatures shall be set by the
foundry in order to meet the requirements given in paragraph 4 of this specification.
Minimum temperatures for tempering shall be:
- 625°C for grade 23 M 5 M steels,
- 665°C for grade 20 CD 4M steels.
Heat treatment conditions (1) shall be specified in the manufacturing programme.
Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. Thermocouple
locations are specified in the manufacturing programme. If, after heat treatment, the part does not
exhibit the required characteristics, it may be retreated (see paragraph 4.4).
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

(1) The term "conditions" refers to:

- heating rate,
- holding temperature,
- holding time, and
- cooling rate.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II below.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test specimens should preferably be taken from one or more small sample ingots attached to the
thickest section of each part.
These ingots may be cast separately, provided they are typical of the part being tested, especially in
terms of maximum thickness. They are then welded on to the corresponding part and remain so
throughout all of the heat treatments, except the stress-relieving operation described in
paragraph 7.2.3.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 57
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1115

Test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their centrelines are located at least 50 mm from
the nearest skin of the face of the sample ingot and their test pertinent areas are located not less than
75 mm from its other faces.
Drawings showing the positions of samples on the part and of specimens on the sample shall be
appended to the manufacturing programme.
TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE VALUE

Tension room Rm minimum value 550 MPa

Rp0.2 minimum value 345 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value (1) 18
Z % minimum value 35

KV Impact 0°C (2) Minimum average value 56 J

Minimum individual value 40 J

+ 40°C Minimum individual value 68 J

Minimum lateral expansion value 0.90 mm

Pellini (3) + 15°C No fracture ductile (4)

drop weight

(1) For motor supports whose main flanges are considered as pressure retaining parts, the minimum
value of A% is 20.
(2) Values guaranteed for motor supports whose main flanges are considered as pressure retaining parts,
otherwise the test done for information purposes.

(3) Test to be conducted in compliance with MC 1000.

(4) This test is made to check that the metal is ductile at + 15 °C and not to determine its NDT
temperature.

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
The number and content of tests to be performed are shown in table III.
TABLE III

TEST NUMBER OF SPECIMENS

NAME OF TEST
TEMPERATURE PER TYPE OF TEST

Tension Room 2
KV Impact 0°C 3
KV Impact + 40°C 3
Pellini drop weight + 15°C 2

M 1000 / 58  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1115

A more complete set of tests shall be performed on the first production part and in cases where a
significant change in chemical composition, particularly molybdenum content, has occurred with
relation to specified values.
This more complete set of tests shall include:
- 2 tension tests at room temperature,
- 3 KV impact tests at 0°C,
- determination of RTNDT temperature as per MC 1000 (temperature not to exceed + 10°C).
All test specimens shall be taken from samples which have undergone stress-relieving treatment
according to the requirements of M 151.

Holding temperature shall be maintained as follows (stress-relieving temperature must be at least

25°C lower than that of tempering):
- for grade 23 M 5 M steels: 600°C minimum for a minimum of 10 hours,
- for grade 20 CD 4 M steels: 640°C minimum for a minimum of 10 hours.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A -TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall have a circular section. Their normal diameter shall be 10 mm and their
dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 59
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1115

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion values recorded for information purposes. Test temperatures shall be 0°C
and + 40°C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at 0°C and + 40°C shown in table II must
be met.

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure.
Two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall be tested at the
same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do
not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.2, the part shall be rejected (see
paragraph 4.4).

d) Tests at + 40°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).

C - PELLINI DROP WEIGHT TESTS

a) Test specimens and test method
Test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shapes and dimensions of these
specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Two test specimens shall be broken for each test series.
b) Results
Pellini test requirements are given in table III and in paragraph 4.3.

M 1000 / 60  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1115

c) Acceptance criteria
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2.
The tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Sand shall be carefully removed from the parts, which shall then be trimmed to eliminate risers and
vent scrap, parting lines and runners.
Surface condition shall then be determined in accordance with MC 7200.
Surface roughness (Ra) shall not exceed 12.5 µm . For surfaces which are liquid penetrant tested or
machined, this roughness (Ra) shall not exceed 6.3 µm .

5.1 VISUAL EXAMINATION

Parts shall be subjected to a complete visual examination in accordance with MC 7100. All surfaces
shall be examined at the machining stage to ensure that the metal is sound.
A final examination is performed on the part when it is ready for delivery.

RESULTS
Parts shall be free from defects such as scale, cracks, porosities, sand inclusions or other
injurious defects.

5.2 MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION

All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to magnetic particle examination after all heat treatments
have been completed.
Test procedures shall be as specified in MC 5000.
The various phases of magnetic particle examination and the methods used (current, field) shall be
specified in the manufacturing programme. Where no clear interpretation of results is possible, a
more comprehensive examination shall be conducted.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 61
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1115

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any defect with one dimension of 2 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition. All
defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 5 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
20 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.
An additional liquid penetrant examination shall be performed on all surfaces for which magnetic
particle examination generated non-linear indications with dimensions of 2 to 5 mm. The following
shall be considered unacceptable:
- rounded indications with a dia. > 4 mm,
- linear indications with a length > 2 mm.

5.3 LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION

Surfaces repaired by machining or grinding at the Manufacturer's shall be subjected to liquid
penetrant examination after final machining.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any defect with one dimension of 2 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition. All
defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 5 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
The various phases of examination are specified in the manufacturing programme.

M 1000 / 62  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1115

6.1 ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION

All surfaces of the motor support, with the exception of its main flange when the latter is considered
as a pressure-retaining part, shall be subjected to longitudinal wave ultrasonic examination.
This shall be done in accordance with MC 2200.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

The following shall be considered recordable conditions:
- any indication whose amplitude is  50% of reference level,
- any area for which loss of back echo amplitude is more than 18 dB.
Defects shall be unacceptable if their echo amplitude is higher than the reference level and their
surface area totals 1000 mm2 or more.
Where no clear interpretation of results is possible, a radiographic examination shall be performed
as per paragraph 6.2.

6.2 RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION

In cases where the main flange of the motor support is a pressure-retaining part, its entire volume
shall be subjected to radiographic examination.
This examination shall be conducted in accordance with MC 3000.

ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
Defects such as hot tears, cracks, chaplets and chill remnants shall be unacceptable.
Acceptance criteria specified by standard NF EN 12681, Annex A, correspond to severity level 2.
Where no clear interpretation of ultrasonic test results is possible for the rest of the part or for main
flanges which are not considered as pressure-retaining parts, a supplementary radiographic
examination shall be performed using severity level 3 criteria.

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

7.1 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITHOUT REPAIR WELDING
Defects detected by surface examination or magnetic particle examination may be eliminated by
grinding, provided the thickness of the ground areas remains within the tolerances specified on the
drawing and that the resulting cavities are not injurious to the areas around them.
Where this is not the case, the requirements of paragraph 7.2 shall apply.
Overheating of the ground surface must be avoided during removal:
- cavities must blend smoothly into surrounding areas,

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 63
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1115

- cavities shall be subjected to magnetic particle examination in accordance with the procedures
and criteria described in paragraph 5.2 of this specification.

7.2 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITH REPAIR WELDING

7.2.1 Removal of defects
Areas whose defects do not meet the acceptability criteria defined in paragraphs 5 and 6 shall be
excavated by grinding or chipping or carbon arc cutting plus grinding (in the case of carbon arc
cutting, the part shall be preheated to a temperature of about 120°C).
Excavation cavities shall be subjected to magnetic particle examination in accordance with the
procedures and criteria described in paragraph 5.2 of this specification. Where doubt exists as to
whether a radiographically detected defect has been completely removed by excavation, particularly
if there are two defects, one below the other, in the same cross section, a new radiographic
examination may be made of the excavated area.
Excavation shall continue until surface defects which are unacceptable for finished parts have
been eliminated.

7.2.2 Repairs
Repairs shall be made by welding in accordance with the requirements of SECTION IV of this
Code.

7.2.3 Stress-relieving heat treatment

On completion of weld repairs, the part shall be subjected to a stress-relieving heat treatment
entailing:
- holding it at a minimum 600 °C for grade 23 M 5 M steels and 640 °C for grade 20 CD 4 M,
- holding time shall be based on the size of repairs, but shall never be less than 2 hours.

7.3 EXAMINATION OF WELD REPAIRS

The following non-destructive examinations shall be made on completion of weld repairs:
A - SURFACE EXAMINATION

B - MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION

Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 5.2 of this
specification.

C - VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION OF MAJOR REPAIRS

The terms "major" and "minor" excavation cavities are defined in annexes 1 and 2 of this
specification. Cavities are classified according to depth of surface area.
Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraph 6 of
this specification.

M 1000 / 64  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1115

Major repairs made to a main flange considered as a pressure-retaining part shall be subjected to
radiographic examination; those made to other areas shall be subjected either to ultrasonic or to
radiographic examination.
Charts showing the exact location and dimensions of major repairs shall be prepared.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensional characteristics of parts after final machining shall comply with the procurement
drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data: for parts which have been retreated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional checks,
- heat treatment (temperature ranges and holding times),
- charts of major repairs,
- for all repairs by welding (major and minor):
. production weld data sheets,

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 65
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1115

welding procedure data sheets and filler materials acceptance reports quoted in production
weld data sheets,
. welding procedure qualification reports used (these documents may be subjected to generic
distribution).

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,

- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,

- test and retest results together with required values.

M 1000 / 66  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1115

ANNEX 1

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 67
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1115

ANNEX 2
EXCAVATION CAVITIES
SURFACE TO BE MACHINED

M 1000 / 68  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1115

ANNEX 2 (cont.)
EXCAVATION CAVITIES
UNMACHINED SURFACE

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 69
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1115

M 1000 / 70  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1121

M 1121
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION
CARBON STEEL FORGINGS FOR
CLASS 2 AND 3 TUBE PLATES

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable carbon steel for heat exchanger tube plates from 40 to 250 mm
thick for use in auxiliary system heat exchangers for pressurized water reactors.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
He shall also provide a product analysis. This analysis may be performed on metal discard from
mechanical test specimens.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 71
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1121

TABLE I

AFNOR A 42 A 48
GRADE LADLE PRODUCT LADLE PRODUCT
ELEMENT % % % %
Maximum Carbon 0.18 0.20 0.20 0.22
Maximum Silicon 0.30 0.35 0.50 0.55
Minimum Manganese 0.60 0.60 1.00 1.00
Maximum Manganese – – 1.60 1.60
Maximum Sulphur 0.015 0.018 0.015 0.018
Maximum Phosphorus 0.025 0.030 0.025 0.030

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations for class 2 tube plates and class 3 tube plates
greater than 80 mm in thickness, the forging mill shall draw up a manufacturing programme which
shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of the part in the ingot: for clad parts, the face on which cladding is to be deposited shall
at all times be located at the bottom end of the ingot (only when the axis of the ingot is parallel to
the axis of the tube plate),
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A
record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance Agents.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

M 1000 / 72  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1121

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (paragraph 3.1).
Note: Machining may be omitted if the as-forged profile is sufficiently close to the as-delivered profile.

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic examination.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The part shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, shall consist of normalizing
which shall include austenitizing (at a temperature between 850°C and 950°C, followed by air
cooling).
For tube plates weighing more than 5 tonnes, at least one thermocouple shall be located on the part
in such a way as to provide an accurate reading at this location.
Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part.
Thermocouple locations shall be specified in the manufacturing programme.
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instruction as above.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II below.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from a test ring consisting of a prolongation to the diameter of the part.
Samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been heat treated for mechanical properties: they
shall be clearly identified and their orientation in relation to the tube plate shall be indicated.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 73
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1121

The axis of test specimens removed shall be tangential to the ring, and the test sample shall be
located more than 40 mm from the circular profile of the test ring and more than 20 mm from the
plane profile of the ring. These profiles represent the profiles of the part during normalizing heat
treatment.
The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be axial (perpendicular to the skins of the test ring).
A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme (see
paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling (see paragraph 4.5).

TABLE II

REQUIRED VALUE
NAME TEST
PROPERTIES GRADE GRADE
OF TEST TEMPERATURE
A 42 A 48

Tension Room Rp0,2 minimum value 215 MPa 255 MPa

Rm minimum value 410 - 490 MPa 470 - 550 MPa
A % 5d minimum value 24 21

300°C Rtp0,2 minimum value 157 MPa 196 MPa

Rm minimum value 369 MPa 423 MPa

KV Impact 0°C Minimum average value (1) 32 J 40 J

Minimum individual value 22 J 28 J
(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value shall be acceptable per series of three test specimens.

4.3.1 Definition of a lot

A lot shall consist of one part for class 2 parts.
For class 3 parts with a unit weight equal to or less than 500 kg and less than 80 mm thick,
acceptance testing may be performed per lot: a lot shall consist of a number of parts of
approximately the same thickness (e max./e min.  1.1) from the same heat, having undergone the
same manufacturing cycle and the same heat treatment in the same furnace charge. The lot shall be
limited to 3000 kg.

M 1000 / 74  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1121

4.3.2 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown
in table III.
Two series of tests on diametrically opposite test samples shall be performed on parts weighing
more than 5 tonnes.

4.3.3 Test procedure

A -TENSION TESTING AT ROOM AND HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall be as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.
TABLE III

NAME ORIENTATION NUMBER OF TEST

TEST
OF OF TEST SPECIMENS PER
TEMPERATURE
TEST SPECIMEN TYPE OF TEST

Tension tangential Room 1

tangential 300°C 1
KV Impact tangential 0°C 3

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 75
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1121

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected.

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion values recorded for information purposes. Test temperature shall be 0°C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at 0°C shown in table II must be met.
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements.
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure: Two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens
shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three
test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall
be rejected.

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED STRESS-

RELIEVING TREATMENT
The acceptance test shall take into account all heat treatments to which the part is subjected during
manufacture. If the Manufacturer does not request application of M 122, acceptance tests shall
comply with the requirements of this paragraph. In such cases, no as delivered tests shall be
performed.

M 1000 / 76  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1121

4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment

This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The number of tests, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet the requirements
specified in table III for tests performed on as delivered parts.
Samples for these tests shall be taken from the test ring (see paragraph 4.2) after the part has
undergone normalizing heat treatment. Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described
in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results
shall be the same as for samples subjected to normalizing heat treatment only (see paragraph 4.3).

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed on weld edges
and surfaces to be clad. Requirements for this examination are given in MC 5000.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 77
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1121

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination is performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with MC 2300.

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed after final machining of the part or at as advanced a stage as
possible for portions which cannot be examined in finished form.

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe frequency shall normally be 4 MHz.

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
The scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 2.
As a deviation from standard NF EN 10228-3, both side walls are examined.

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.
After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000. The
criteria for this examination are given in paragraph 6.

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
After heat treatment.

M 1000 / 78  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1121

The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on
the drawing.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with C
and D 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (this includes recordings of all heat treatments),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 79
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1121

M 1000 / 80  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1122

M 1122

PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CLASS 1, 2 AND 3
CARBON STEEL FORGINGS

0 SCOPE
This specification concerns class 1, 2 and 3 weldable carbon steel forgings.

1 GENERAL AND PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS

The grades adopted correspond to grades P245GH, P265GH, P280GH, and P295GH as defined by
standards NF EN 10222-2.
The requirements of standards NF EN 10222-1 and 2 relating to forgings shall be extended or
modified by the following clarifications to paragraphs in Parts 1 and 2 of the standard.

Para 5 of NF EN 10222-1 "INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE PURCHASER"

Setting up a manufacturing program as indicated in M 350 of the RCC-M is not required.

Para 7 of NF EN 10222-1 "PRODUCT MANUFACTURE"

There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregations.

Para 7.2 of NF EN 10222-1 "FORGING"

As a general rule, the forging ratio as calculated according to M 380 of the RCC-M shall be at
least 3.

Para 7.3 of NF EN 10222-1 "HEAT TREATMENT"

For Class 1 components, records of cycles corresponding to heat treatment for mechanical properties
shall be kept and held at the disposal of the Surveillance Agents.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 81
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1122

Para 8.1 of NF EN 10222-1 "SURFACE CONDITION AND INTERNAL SOUNDNESS -

GENERAL"
A - SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS
All surfaces of the part which are accessible at the final stage shall be subjected to a visual
examination in accordance with MC 7100. The surface examination performed on all parts may be
supplemented by a liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination if so specified in the
equipment specification or other relevant contractual documents.

Liquid penetrant examination

The inspection procedures are given in MC 4000.

Criteria
Any defect with one dimension exceeding 1 mm shall be considered a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired :
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge),
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

Magnetic particle examination

The examination procedures are given in MC 5000.

Criteria
Any defect with one dimension exceeding 1 mm shall be considered a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indication shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,

- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.

B - VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination is performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with MC 2300.

M 1000 / 82  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1122

Time of examination
The examination shall be performed when the profile of the part permits satisfactory test
performance. It shall be performed in the following order of preference:
- after final machining,
- after heat treatment for mechanical properties, whether followed by machining or not.
However, parts or portions of parts which cannot be examined after heat treatment due to the
geometry of the part, shall be examined at the latest intermediate stage possible.
In the case of small formed parts, the examination may be performed on semi-finished products.

Procedures
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Angle beam examination shall be performed in accordance with one of the two methods proposed
(DAC or DGS)
Probe frequency shall normally be 4 MHz.

Scanning plan and degree of examination

Ultrasonic examination is performed on class 1 and 2 parts and on class 3 parts weighting more
than 500 kg.
The entire volume of the parts shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
The examination shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard
NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 1, 2, 3 or 4.

Evaluation of indications
Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

Recordable conditions and examination criteria

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION (1)
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of standard NF EN 10228-3:
- for type 1 parts: quality class 3,
- for type 2, 3 and 4 parts: quality class 2.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION (1)

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of standard NF EN 10228-3:
- for the DGS method: quality class 2,
- for the DAC method: quality class 3.

(1) For class 3 parts, recordable indication range is not considered.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 83
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1122

Para 8.2 of NF EN 10222-1 "REMOVAL OF SURFACE DEFECTS"

The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.
After repair, a magnetic particule examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000. The
criteria are identical to those defined in para. 8.1 - A.

Para 9 of NF EN 10222-1 "CHEMICAL COMPOSITION"

For sulphur and phosphorous, the chemical composition determined by ladle analysis and product
analysis (where required) shall satisfy the following additional criteria:

ELEMENT LADLE PRODUCT

S% 0.015 0.020
P% 0.025 0.030

For Class 1 components, the steelmaker shall provide one product analysis per control unit.

Para 10 of NF EN 10222-1 "MECHANICAL PROPERTIES AT AMBIENT

AND LOW TEMPERATURES"
Acceptance shall take into account the stress relieving heat treatment (option A14) to which the part
is subjected during manufacture working.
The acceptance tests shall take into account all heat treatments to which the part is subjected during
manufacture. Where the Manufacturer does not require paragraph M 122 to be applied, acceptance
tests shall comply with the requirements of this paragraph. In such cases, no as-delivered tests shall
be performed. However the samples shall be subjected separately to simulated stress relieving heat
treatment in a laboratory furnace.
The procedures for simulated stress-relieving heat treatment shall be as defined in M 151.
The sampling and testing conditions and the results required shall be identical to those for samples
having been subjected only to delivery heat treatment.
The energy absorbed by breakage shall be determined at 0°C (option A16).
The required energy absorbed by KV impact breakage values are given in the Part 2 of
NF EN 10222.
However, for the Class 1 and Class 2 main secondary system parts defined in C 4440, the minimum
energy absorbed by breakage values shall be 60 Joules on average and 40 Joules for
individual cases.

M 1000 / 84  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 1122

Para 11 of NF EN 10222-1 "MECHANICAL PROPERTIES AT HIGH TEMPERATURES"

One tensile test at 300°C per control unit shall be performed, as follows:
- for class 1 parts in all cases,
- for class 2 and 3 parts if specified in the equipment specification or other relevant contractual
documents,
The required values are given in the Part 2 of NF EN 10222. In addition, the following minimum
values for the tensile test at 300°C shall apply:
- 369 MPa for grades P245GH, P265GH,
- 423 MPa for grades P280GH, P295GH

The elongation after rupture values obtained during the high temperature tensile test shall be
recorded for information purposes.

Para 12 of NF EN 10222-1 "SAMPLING AND PREPARATION OF TEST PIECES"

Para 12.2.3, FORGINGS OF MASS  1000 KG (LENGTH  5 M)
Paragraph 12.2.1 a) is not applicable.

Para 12.2.5, FORGINGS OF MASS > 4000 KG OR LENGTH > 5 M

Paragraph 12.2.1 c) is not applicable.

Para 13 of NF EN 10222-1 "MECHANICAL TEST METHODS"

Test samples and test methods shall be in accordance with MC 1000.

Para 15 of NF EN 10222-1 "INSPECTION"

A type 3.1 acceptance certificate is required.
In addition, the Supplier shall provide the following reports:
- For class 1 parts, chemical product analysis and evaluation of recorded heat treatment data,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,

 n° 144-2014 M 1000 / 85
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1122

- purchase order number,

- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

Para 16 of NF EN 10222-1 "MARKING"

For class 1 parts, paragraph 16.4 is not applicable.

M 1000 / 86  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1122 Bis

M 1122 Bis

PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CLASS 1, 2 AND 3 CARBON STEEL
DROP FORGINGS

0 SCOPE
This specification concerns class 1, 2 and 3 weldable carbon steel drop forgings.

1 GENERAL AND PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS

The grades adopted correspond to grades A 42 AP and A 48 AP as defined by standard
NF A 36-605.
The requirements of standard NF A 36-605 for drop forgings shall be applied in full. Furthermore,
the following requirements shall be added to the following paragraphs of these standards:

Para. 2.1 of NF A 36-605 "COMMON PROPERTIES"

For sulphur and phosphorous, the chemical composition determined by ladle analysis and product
analysis (where required) shall satisfy the following additional criteria:

ELEMENT LADLE PRODUCT

S% 0.015 0.020
P% 0.025 0.030

The minimum tensile strength values required at 300 °C are:

- 369 MPa for A 42 AP grade
- 423 MPa for A 48 AP grade
The elongation after fracture values for tensile test at high temperature are recorded for information
purposes

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 87
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1122 Bis

Para. 2.2 of NF A 36-605 "PARTICULAR PROPERTIES"

The required energy absorbed by KV impact breakage values are given in the table 6 of the
Standard.
For class 1 and class 2 parts of the MSS defined in A 4220, the minimum required impact strength
rupture energy values are: 60 Joules average and 40 Joules individual.
For class 2 parts of grade A 42 AP other than those defined in A 4220, and class 3 parts, the
minimum impact strength rupture energy values are: 27 Joules average and 19 Joules individual.

Para. 3.3.1 of NF A 36-605 "FABRICATION"

Setting up a manufacturing program as indicated in M 350 of the RCC-M is not required.

Para. 3.3.2 of NF A 36-605 "DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT"

The cycles corresponding to heat treatment for mechanical properties for class 1 parts shall be
recorded and the records kept at the disposal of Surveillance Agents.

Para. 3.5 of NF A 36-605." SURFACE DEFECTS – REPAIR"

A magnetic particle examination in accordance with MC 5000 shall be conducted following repair
by grinding. The criteria are identical to those defined in para 6.1.2.

Para. 4.1.2 of NF A 36-605 "PROPERTIES CHECKED IN ALL CASES"

The following shall be performed:
- a tensile test at 300°C per control unit:
. for class 1 parts in all cases,
. for class 2 and 3 parts if specified in the equipment specification or other relevant contractual
documents,
- energy absorbed by breakage shall be determined at 0°C.

Para. 4.1.3.2 of NF A 36-605 "PRODUCT ANALYSIS"

The steelmaker shall supply a product analysis for class 1 parts, per control unit.

Para. 4.3.2 of NF A 36-605 "TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT"
The acceptance tests shall take into account all heat treatments to which the part is subjected during
manufacture.

M 1000 / 88  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1122 Bis

If the Contractor does not request application of paragraph M 122, acceptance of the part shall
comply with the requirements of this paragraph. In this case, no as-delivered tests shall be
performed. However, samples shall be subjected to separate simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment in a laboratory furnace.
Instructions for the performance of simulated stress-relieving heat treatment shall follow the
requirements of M 151.

Sampling conditions, test conditions and required results are the same as those required for samples
which have only been subjected to delivery heat treatment.

Para. 4.4 of NF A 36-605 "TYPE OF TEST SPECIMENS - THE TEST METHODS"

The type of test specimens and the test methods used shall comply with MC 1000.

Para 6 of NF A 36-605 "NON-DESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION"

Para 6.1 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS
All surfaces of the part which are accessible at the final stage shall be subjected to a visual
examination in accordance with MC 7100. The surface examination performed on all parts may be
supplemented by a liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination if so specified in the
equipment specification or other relevant contractual documents. When a surface examination is
required, and whenever possible the part shall be examined by magnetic particule examinations. If
it is not possible a liquid penetrant examination is permissible.

Para 6.1.1 Liquid penetrant examination

The inspection procedures are given in MC 4000.

CRITERIA
Any defect with one dimension exceeding 1 mm shall be considered a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge),
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 89
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1122 Bis

Para 6.1.2 Magnetic particle examination

The examination procedures are given in MC 5000.

CRITERIA
Any defect with one dimension exceeding 1 mm shall be considered a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.

Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.
If the examinations described above indicate the presence of unacceptable defects on the part, the
instructions given in paragraph 3.5 of this specification shall be applied.

Para 6.2 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION

Volumetric examination is performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with MC 2300.

Para 6.2.1 Time of examination

The examination shall be performed when the profile of the part permits satisfactory test
performance. It shall be performed in the following order of preference:
- after final machining,
- after heat treatment for mechanical properties, whether followed by machining or not.
However, parts or portions of parts which cannot be examined after heat treatment due to the
geometry of the part, shall be examined at the latest intermediate stage possible.
In the case of small formed parts, the examination may be performed on semi-finished products.

Para 6.2.2 Procedures

Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe frequency shall normally be 4 MHz.

M 1000 / 90  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1122 Bis

Para 6.2.3 Scanning plan and degree of examination

Ultrasonic examination is performed on class 1 and 2 parts and on class 3 parts weighting more
than 500 kg.
The entire volume of the parts shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
The examination shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard
NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 1, 2, 3 or 4.

Para 6.2.4 Evaluation of indications

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

Para 6.2.5 Recordable conditions and examination criteria

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION (1)
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of standard NF EN 10228-3:
- for type 1 parts: quality class 3,
- for type 2, 3 and 4 parts: quality class 2.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION (1)

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of standard NF EN 10228-3:
- for the DGS method: quality class 2,
- for the DAC method: quality class 3.

(1)For class 3 parts, recordable indication range is not considered.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 91
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1122 Bis

M 1000 / 92  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1123

M 1123

PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CARBON STEEL FORGINGS

FOR USE IN THE MANUFACTURE OF
CLASS 2 AND 3 AUXILIARY PUMP SHAFTS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers carbon steel forgings corresponding to AFNOR grades A 48 and A 42, for
use in the manufacture of auxiliary pump shafts.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. He shall also provide a product analysis performed on one part per heat. This
analysis may be performed on metal discard from mechanical test specimens.
These analyses shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 93
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1123

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE A 42 A 48

Ladle Product Ladle Product

ELEMENT
analysis % analysis % analysis % analysis %
Max. Carbon 0.18 0.20 0.20 0.22
Max Silicon 0.30 0.35 0.50 0.55
Manganese min. 0.60 0.60 1.00 1.00
Manganese max. – – 1.60 1.60
Max. Sulphur 0.015 0.018 0.015 0.018
Max. Phosphorus 0.025 0.030 0.025 0.030

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,

- position of the part in the ingot,

- a sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation giving the partial and overall ratios of
reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A
record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance Agents.
The same applies to the overall ratio of reduction, which shall be greater than 3.

M 1000 / 94  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1123

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the shaft shall be rough-machined to a profile as
close as possible to the as-delivered profile. This profile shall be given in the manufacturing
programme (paragraph 3.1).
Note: Machining may be omitted if the as-forged profile is sufficiently close to the as-delivered profile.

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

After heat treatment, the part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic
examination.
Obtained surface conditions shall provide meaningful non-destructive examination results.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Shafts shall be delivered in the as-treated condition.
Heat treatment for mechanical properties shall consist of:
- either normalizing, which shall include austenitizing at between 850°C and 950°C, followed by
air cooling,
- or quenching in water, at a temperature of between 850°C and 950°C, followed by tempering at
over 600°C.
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall consist of prolongations at the end with the largest diameter.
The prolongation, equivalent in diameter to the corresponding journal, shall be removed after the
part or rough forging has been subjected to all heat treatments.
The size of the prolongations shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
Tension and impact test specimens shall be taken longitudinally at mid-radius.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 95
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1123

Test-pertinent areas shall be located at a distance from the treated end of the prolongation at least
equal to the radius of the journal.
Impact test specimen notch roots shall be radially orientated.

TABLE II

NAME OF TEST MECHANICAL REQUIRED VALUE

TEST TEMPERATURE PROPERTIES A 42 A 48

Tension Room Rp0.2 215 MPa 255 MPa

Rm 410-490 MPa 470-550 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 24 % 21 %

0°C Minimum average value 56 J 56 J

KV Impact
Minimum individual value 40 J 40 J

Brinell Room 110 – 160 130 - 180

hardness

4.3 TESTING OF SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, the orientation of test specimens and test temperatures, are given
in table III.
TABLE III

ORIENTATION NUMBER OF
TEST
NAME OF TEST OF TEST SPECIMENS PER
TEMPERATURE
SPECIMEN TYPE OF TEST

Tension longitudinal Room 1

KV Impact longitudinal 0°C 3
Hardness Room see 4.3.2.c

Table IV shows the number of test series to be carried out depending on:
- the weight of the rough forging,
- the number of shafts per rough forging.

M 1000 / 96  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1123

TABLE IV

No. of shafts Number

Weight
per rough of test Location of test samples
in kg
forging series

1 1 one end of rough forging

2 1 one end of rough forging
3 2 both ends of rough forging
4 2 both ends of rough forging
M  3000
5 3 both ends and at mid-length of rough
forging
6 3 both ends and at mid-length of rough
forging
1 1 one end of rough forging
3000< M  5000
2 2 both ends of rough forging
1 1 one end of rough forging
M > 5000
2 2 both ends of rough forging

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall have a circular section. Their normal diameter shall be 10 mm and their
dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II. If this is not the case and the test
specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the usefulness of the product) or if
unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the specimen or a testing machine
malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If the results of the second test
are satisfactory, the part or rough forging shall be accepted; if not, the following paragraph
shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part or rough forging shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see
paragraph 4.4).

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 97
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1123

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000 for tests at 0°C.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each series of tests at 0°C.
Percent shear fracture shall be recorded.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at 0°C shown in table II must be met.
The part or rough forging shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of the requirements.
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value, retests may be performed in accordance with the following procedure:
two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall be tested at the same
temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do not
comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part or rough forging shall be rejected
and the requirements of paragraph 4.4 "Retreatment" shall apply.

C - HARDNESS TESTS
Hardness tests shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. An indentation shall be made along
four 90° axes, in three different planes, located at both ends and in the middle of the shaft or rough
forging.
These tests serve to establish whether uniform hardness has been obtained and whether or not test
samples are representative.

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts or rough forgings rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical
tests may be retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.

In such cases, test specimens shall be taken under the same conditions as specified in paragraph 4.2.
The tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.1. No more than two
retreatments shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects.

M 1000 / 98  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1123

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination is performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with MC 2300.

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed in heat treated condition when the part has been machined to
its as-delivery profile.

6.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe frequency shall normally be 2 MHz.

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
The examination shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 1a.
In addition to standard NF EN 10228-3 prescriptions, for parts with diameter higher than 100 mm,
and issued from rough forgings with diameter variations dia.max/dia.min > 1.5, an examination shall
be performed in the axial direction, from both ends over half the length of the part plus 10%.

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with the paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of standard NF EN 10228-3 :
- radial direction : quality class 3,
- axial direction : quality class 2.

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 4000. The
following criteria shall apply:
- any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition,

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 99
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1123

- all defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
. linear indications,
. non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
. 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge),
. 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications
being evaluated.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
After heat treatment, the dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the
procurement drawings with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and
the profile of the finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with C 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- heat treatments,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

M 1000 / 100  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1123

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 101

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1123

M 1000 / 102  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1124

M 1124
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION
TYPE P280 GH CARBON STEEL
ROLLED OR FORGED PARTS

0 SCOPE
This specification deals with weldable type P 280 GH carbon steel rolled or forged parts for use in
steam generator main steam systems, feedwater flow control systems, auxiliary feedwater systems
and turbine bypass systems.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
He shall also provide a product analysis. This analysis may be performed on metal discard from
mechanical test specimens. An analysis shall be made of one test specimen discard per lot.
The analyses shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 103

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1124

TABLE I

CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS IN % FOR LADLE

AND TUBE ANALYSES

LADLE OR
AFNOR max. max. max. max max max. max max max
PRODUCT Si Mn A
GRADE C S P Cu. Sn. Ni Cr(2) Mo. Ceq(1)
ANALYSIS
0.10/ 0.80/ 0.020/
Ladle 0.20 0.015 0.020 0.25 0.030 0.50 0.25 0.10 0.48
P 280 0.35 1.60 0.050
GH 0.10/ 0.80/ 0.020/
Product 0.22 0.020 0.025 0.25 0.030 0.50 0.25 0.10 0.48
0.40 1.60 0.050
(1) Ceq = C + Mn/6 + (Cr + Mo + V) / 5 + (Ni + Cu) / 15
(2) The maximum imposition for feedwater flow control system is replaced by a minimum imposition of 0.15%

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations the mill manager shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process.
- ingot weight and type.
- top and bottom end discard percentages.
- drawings of part after each forging operation with forging ratio and overall ratio of reduction
defined in accordance with M 380.
- drawing of the part before heat treatments and in delivery condition.
- conditions for heat treatment for mechanical properties.
- position of acceptance test samples on the part.
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A
record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance Agents.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

M 1000 / 104  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1124

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough-machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final examination.

3.4. DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The parts shall be delivered as specified below.

QUENCHED AND TEMPERED CONDITION

NORMALIZED CONDITION
(Parts with average. thickness above 80 mm)

Temperature 890 to 940°C Temperature 890 to 940°C

Holding time: 1 minute per mm in Holding time: 1 minute per mm in thickness
thickness for a minimum time of 30 min. for a minimum time of 30 min.
Method of cooling: still air. Method of cooling: water.
Tempering : minimum temperature at all
points: 620 °C

Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II below.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been subjected to heat treatment for
mechanical properties; they shall be appropriately marked.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
Insofar as the shape of the parts so allows, test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their
axis is oriented perpendicular to the main rolling direction and that the distance between the axis
and the nearest treated surface (skin) is:
- 20 mm if the thickness is > 40 mm,
- mid-thickness if the thickness is  40 mm.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 105

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1124

The distance between the test-pertinent area of the test specimen and the other treated surfaces shall
not be less than:
- 40 mm if the thickness is > 40 mm,
- the thickness if this is  40 mm.
If the shape of the parts does not permit this, values as close as possible to those given above shall
be obtained.
For impact test specimens, notches are oriented perpendicular to the skin.

TABLE II

NAME OF TEST REQUIRED VALUES

PROPERTIES
TEST TEMPERATURE P 280 GH
Tension Room Rp0,2 minimum value 275 MPa
Rm 470/570 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 21

300°C Rtp0,2 minimum value 186 MPa

Rm minimum value 423 MPa

KV Impac 0°C (2) Minimum average value (1) 60 J

Minimum individual value 40 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value shall be acceptable for each set of three
test specimens.
(2) For the feedwater flow control system, the impact test temperature shall be -20°C

4.3 TESTING
Tests shall be performed on test specimens which were not subjected to heat treatment after
sampling.

4.3.1 Definition of a lot

A lot shall comprise parts of similar dimensions produced from the same heat of steel, and which
have undergone the same processing cycle, and which are from the same furnace charge or heat
treatment run.
For unit parts weighing 1000 kg or less , the lot shall be limited to 6000 kg. A unit part weighing
more than 1000 kg constitutes a lot.

4.3.2 Number and content of tests to be performed

One series of tests per lot for parts weighing 500 kg or less shall be performed, and two series of
tests on two different parts for parts weighing more than 500 kg. For parts weighing more than
1000 kg, two test series in two symmetrical locations of the part shall be performed. A test series
shall comprise tension testing at room temperature, KV testing, and hot tension testing.

M 1000 / 106  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1124

4.3.3 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
The dimensions of the test specimen used shall comply with MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset in MPa.
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa.
- percentage elongation after fracture.
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part and/or the lot will be accepted: if not, the
following paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part and/or the lot will be accepted: if not, it shall be rejected (see
paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens
The test shall be performed on three KV impact test specimens taken from adjacent locations.
The shape and dimensions of these specimens shall be as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

c) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements shown in table II must be met.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 107

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1124

The part and/or the lot will be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements. However,
where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the required
minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no more than
one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with the
following procedure:
- Two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall be tested at the
same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do
not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part and/or the lot will be
rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts and/or the lot rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests
may be retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be sampled as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed
shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3. No more than one retreatment shall
be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED STRESS

RELIEVING TREATMENT
The acceptance tests shall take into account all heat treatments to which the part is subjected during
manufacture. Where the Manufacturer does not require paragraph M 122 to be applied, acceptance
tests of the part and/or the lot will comply with the requirements of this paragraph. In such cases, no
as-delivered tests shall be performed. However the samples shall be subjected separately to
simulated stress relieving heat treatment in a laboratory furnace.

4.5.1 Simulated stress relieving heat treatment

Unless otherwise specified in the purchase order, these test specimens shall undergo the simulated
stress-relieving heat treatment according to the requirements of M 151.
Nominal holding temperature shall be 605°C, for a time calculated on the basis of 6 min per mm in
thickness, with a minimum of 2 hours.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The number of tests, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet the
requirements specified for tests performed on as-delivered parts.
Samples for these tests shall be taken in accordance with paragraph 4.2 on as-delivered parts.
Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected
to heat treatment (see paragraph 4.3).

M 1000 / 108  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1124

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

Not applicable.

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be examined carefully during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. All surfaces of the part which are accessible at the final stage shall be
subjected to a visual examination in accordance with MC 7100.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks, or any other injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a visual examination shall be performed. If any doubt arises the part
shall undergo liquid penetrant examination, in accordance with MC 4000.
Requirements for this examination are given in MC 4000.

EXAMINATION CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications.
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm.
- 3 or more indications in a line separated by less than 3 mm (edge to edge).
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

The examination shall be performed when the profile of the part permits satisfactory test
performance. It shall be performed in the following order of preference:
- after final machining,

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 109

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1124

- after heat treatment for mechanical properties, whether followed by machining or not.
However, parts or portions of parts which cannot be examined after heat treatment due to the
geometry of the part, shall be examined at the latest intermediate stage possible.
In the case of small formed parts, the examination may be performed on semi-finished products.

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe frequency shall normally be 4 MHz.

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the parts shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3 or, for
class 1 parts, with paragraph 13.3 of standard NF EN 10308.
Part type is 1, 2, 3 or 4.

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3 or, for
class 1 parts, with paragraph 14 of standard NF EN 10308.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3 or, for class 1 parts, in standard NF EN 10308.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of standard NF EN 10228-3:
- for the DGS method: quality class 3,
- for the DAC method: quality class 4.

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Surface defects may be removed by grinding providing that the resulting thickness remains within
the part tolerances. Defect removal shall be checked by liquid penetrant examination in accordance
with MC 4000. The criteria specified in paragraph 6 shall be respected.
Repair by welding shall not be permitted at the forging mill.

M 1000 / 110  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1124

9 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall use the identification and marking methods specified in paragraphs B and
C 1300.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery:
- ladle and product analyses.
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data.
- mechanical tests.
- visual examination.
- non-destructive examination.
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number.
- Supplier's particular.
- purchase order number.
- name of the inspection agency if required.
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 111

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1124

M 1000 / 112  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1125

M 1125

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

FORGED DIE-FORMED ELBOWS MADE FROM

TYPE P 280 GH CARBON STEEL

0 SCOPE
This specification covers forged die-formed elbows made from type P 280 GH carbon steel for use
in main steam systems.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analysis, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
He shall also provide a product analysis. This analysis may be performed on metal discard from
mechanical test specimens. This analysis shall be performed on each elbow.
The analyses shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 113

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1125

TABLE I

CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS IN %
FOR LADLE AND BEND ANALYSES

LADLE OR
AFNOR max. max. max. max max max. max max max
PRODUCT Si Mn A
GRADE C S P Cu(1) Sn(1) Ni Cr. Mo. Ceq(2)
ANALYSIS
0.10/ 0.80/ 0.020/
Ladle 0.20 0.015 0.020 0.25 0.030 0.50 0.25 0.10 0.48
0.35 1.60 0.050
P 280 GH
0.10/ 0.80/ 0.020/
Product 0.22 0.020 0.025 0.25 0.030 0.50 0.25 0.10 0.48
0.40 1.60 0.050
(1) The tin content may exceed 0.030% to a maximum of 0.040% provided that the Cu + 10 Sn content does not
exceed 0.55%.
(2) Ceq = C + Mn/6 + (Cr + Mo + V) / 5 + (Ni + Cu) / 15

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the supplier shall draw up manufacturing
programme. This programme shall include:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of the part in the ingot,
- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging and die-forming operation, including
cropping with partial and overall ratios of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawing of the part before heat treatments and in delivery condition.
- conditions for heat treatment for mechanical properties.
- position of acceptance test samples on the part.
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

3.2 FORGING - DIE-FORMING

There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A
record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance Agents.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

M 1000 / 114  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1125

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough-machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The inside and outside of the part shall be ground to its as-delivered profile prior to final
examination.
All elbows shall have their ends cut square and deburred.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITIONS – HEAT TREATMENT

The parts shall be delivered in normalized condition, as specified below:

NORMALIZED CONDITION

Temperature 890 to 940 °C

Holding time : 1 minute per mm in thickness for a
minimum time of 30 min.
Method of cooling : still air.

Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

If the elbow is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

4.2 SAMPLING
The test samples shall be taken from two test rings located at each end of the elbow, corresponding
to the initial ingot top and bottom ends. These samples shall be taken after the pipe has undergone
the normalizing heat treatment. They shall be appropriately marked.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
In the event of retests, the samples required shall be taken from a location close to the area from
which the first samples were taken.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 115

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1125

The test specimens for tension and energy absorbed by breakage tests shall be taken
circumferentially. For tension testing at room temperature and for impact testing, the specimens
taken at one end of the pipe shall be oriented at 180 degrees to those taken at the other end. The
notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins of the test ring.
The test specimens shall be taken at a distance from the treated end of the elbow at least equal to the
thickness of the elbow, without exceeding 40 mm, and at least 20 mm beneath the inner skin in the
as-delivered condition. When sampling conditions as those described above prove impossible,
particularly due to insufficient thickness, the test specimens shall be taken in such a way that their
centreline is located at mid-thickness.

TABLE II

NAME OF TEST REQUIRED VALUES

PROPERTIES
TEST TEMPERATURE P 280 GH
Tension Room Rp0,2 minimum value 275 MPa
Rm 470/570 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 21

300°C Rtp0,2 minimum value 186 MPa

Rm minimum value 423 MPa

KV Impac 0°C Minimum average value (1) 60 J

Minimum individual value 40 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value shall be acceptable for each set of
three test specimens.

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE SAMPLES AT DELIVERY CONDITIONS

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling (see paragraph 4.5).

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed on each elbow and orientation of test specimens are shown in
table III.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE

a) Test specimens
The dimensions of the test specimen used shall comply with MC 1000.

M 1000 / 116  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1125

TABLE III

NUMBER OF TEST
NAME OF ORIENTATION OF TEST
POSITION SPECIMENS PER
TEST TEST SPECIMEN TEMPERATURE
TYPE OF TEST

Bottom end Room 1

Top end Room 1

Tension Circonferential
at 180 °

Bottom end 300°C 1

Bottom end 0°C 3

KV Impact Circonferential Top end 0°C 3
at 180 °

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the elbow shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the elbow shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TEST
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall be performed on three KV impact test specimens taken from adjacent
locations. The shape and dimensions of these specimens shall be as specified in MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 117

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1125

b) Test method
The test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

c) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirement shown in table II must be met.
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements. However, where the
only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the required minimum value
and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no more than one result lower
than the required value), retest may be performed in accordance with the following procedure:
- Two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall be tested at the
same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do
not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be rejected (see
paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Elbows rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test samples shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in paragraph 4.2. The
tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3. No more than one retreatment
shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED STRESS

RELIEVING TREATMENT
The acceptance test shall take into account all heat treatments to which the part is subjected during
manufacture. It the Manufacturer does not request application of paragraph M 122, acceptance tests
shall comply with the requirements of this paragraph. In such cases, no as-delivered tests shall be
performed.

4.5.1 Simulated stress relieving heat treatment

Unless otherwise specified in the purchase order, these test specimens shall undergo the simulated
stress-relieving heat treatment according to the requirements of M 151.
Nominal holding temperature shall be 610°C, for a time calculated on the basis of 6 min per mm in
thickness, with a minimum of three hours.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The number of tests, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet the requirements
specified in table III for tests performed on as-delivered parts.

M 1000 / 118  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1125

Samples for these tests shall be taken in accordance with paragraph 4.2 on as-delivered elbows.
Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected
to normalizing heat treatment only (see paragraph 4.3).

5 TEST COUPONS
Not applicable.

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be examined carefully during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final
stage in accordance with MC 7100. Since elbows will be delivered ground (see paragraph 3.3), all
internal and external pipe surfaces shall have a workmanlike finish for the fabrication process and
heat treatment methods used.
Elbows shall be sound and free from cracks, tears, blisters, laps, slivers, or any other injurious
defect. If any of the above-mentioned defects are detected during examination, acceptance of the
elbow shall be subject to the requirements of paragraph 8 of this specification. If any doubt arises,
the elbows shall undergo liquid penetrant examination, in accordance with MC 4000.

EXAMINATION CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 119

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1125

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

The examination shall be performed when the profile of the part permits satisfactory test
performance. It shall be performed in the following order of preference:
- after final grinding
- after heat treatment for mechanical properties, whether followed by grinding or not.

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe frequency shall normally be 4 MHz.

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
The examination shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 3a.

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are :
- for the DGS method: quality class 3 of standard NF EN 10228-3,
- for the DAC method: quality class 4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

8 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Surface defects may be removed by grinding provided the remaining thickness is greater than the
minimum thickness. Defect removal is checked by means of liquid penetrant examination, in
accordance with MC 4000.
The requirements to be met are those specified in paragraph 6.
Weld repairs shall not be authorized at the forging mill.

M 1000 / 120  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1125

9 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

The dimensions and tolerances shall conform to the purchase order requirements.
Dimensions shall be checked on all elbows.

10 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
Unless otherwise stated in the equipment specification, elbows shall not be hydrostatically tested.
However, the Supplier must guarantee the pressure-retaining characteristics of the elbows in
accordance with the requirements of the equipment specification.

11 MARKING
The Supplier shall use the identification and marking methods specified in paragraphs B and
C 1300.

12 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order and shall conform to the following conditions:
- the ends shall be protected.

13 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data,
- mechanical tests,
- visual examination,
- non-destructive examination,
- dimensional check,
- hydrostatic test or supporting file.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 121

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1125

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particular,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 1000 / 122  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1131

M 1131

PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

FOR CLASS 1, 2 AND 3

CARBON STEEL PLATES

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable carbon steel plates, up to 250 mm thick which are not covered by
a part procurement specification.

1 GENERAL AND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

The grades shall be selected from carbon steels (P235 GH, P265 GH, P295 GH and P355 GH)
defined in standard NF EN 10028-1 and 2.
The requirements of standard NF EN 10028-1 and 2 for carbon steel plates are completed or
modified by the following provisions to be added to the paragraphs of parts 1 and 2 of the standard.

§ 8.2 OF NF EN 10028-2 "DELIVERY CONDITION"

The plates shall be delivered normalized by furnace heat treatment. However, hot forming plates
can be delivered untreated.

§ 8.3 OF NF EN 10028-2 "CHEMICAL COMPOSITION"

For plates intended for subsequent hot forming, the copper and tin contents are furthermore limited
by the following conditions:
- Cu ≤ 0.18 %
- Cu + 6 Sn ≤ 0.33 %

§ 8.4 OF NF EN 10028-2 "MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS"

Acceptance shall take into account all heat treatments to which the plate is subjected during
manufacture. If the Contractor does not request application of paragraph M 122, acceptance shall
comply with requirements of this paragraph. In such cases, no as-delivered tests shall be performed.
However, samples shall be subjected to simulated stress-relieving heat treatment separately in a
laboratory furnace.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 123

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1131

Instructions for the performance of this heat treatment shall follow the requirements of M 151.
Sampling conditions, test conditions and required results are the same as those required for samples
which have only been subjected to delivery heat treatment.
The minimum tensile strength values required at 300 °C are:
- 324 MPa for P235 GH grade,
- 369 MPa for P265 GH grade,
- 423 MPa for P295 GH grade,
- 459 MPa for P355 GH grade.
The elongation after fracture values for the tensile test at high temperature are recorded for
information purposes.
For the impact test at 0°C, the minimum impact energy absorption required for class 1 plates are an
average value of 40 Joules and an individual value of 28 Joules.
For the impact test at 0°C, the minimum impact energy absorption required for class 2 and 3 plates
are specified by the standard: an average value of 34 Joules and an individual value of 24 Joules.
For the impact test at -20°C, the minimum impact energy absorption must comply with the
requirements of the standard: an average value of 27 Joules and an individual value of 19 Joules.

§ 8.5 OF NF EN 10028-1 "SURFACE CONDITION"

A) DETECTION OF SURFACE DEFECTS
All plate surfaces shall be subject to visual examination at the final stage in accordance with
MC 7100.
After cutting to the delivery dimensions, the edges must be examined visually. There must be no
lamination.

B) ELIMINATION OF DEFECTIVE AREAS

Weld repairs by the supplier are prohibited.
In case of doubt after grinding, a check can be made to ensure that the defect has been completely
eliminated by magnetic particle examination (as per MC 5000) or liquid penetrant examination
(as per MC 4000).

SURFACE EXAMINATION CRITERION

Indications greater than 1 mm shall be taken into account.

LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION

In all cases, the following must be detected and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,

M 1000 / 124  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 1131

- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,

- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION

In all cases, the following must be detected and eliminated or repaired:

- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension which exceeds 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.

Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.

§ 8.6 OF NF EN 10028-1 "INTERNAL SOUNDNESS"

An ultrasonic examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 2400, which lays down the
conditions of applicability of Standard NF EN 10160:
- For class 1 plates : the examination shall only be carried out on parts at least 12 mm thick, in
accordance with the scanning plan and the levels S3 and E4 criteria given in the standard.
In addition, as stipulated in paragraph 9.2.2. of the standard, a test identical to the one performed
on the plate edges shall be performed in the weld areas.
- For class 2 plates : the examination shall only be carried out for parts at least 30 mm thick, in
accordance with the scanning plan and the levels S2 and E3 criteria given in the standard.
- For class 3 plates : the ultrasonic examination is not required.

§ 9.1 OF NF EN 10028-1 "TYPE AND CONTENT OF EXAMINATION DOCUMENTS "

A type 3.1 acceptance certificate is required.

For class 1 and 2 plates, the following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each
individual test and, in any case, prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- heat treatments (including reheat treatment),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

 n° 144-2014 M 1000 / 125

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 1131

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

§ 9.2 OF NF EN 10028-1 "EXAMINATIONS REQUIRED"

The impact tests shall be performed at 0°C.

The following additional tests shall be performed according to the requirements of this
specification :
1) Product chemical analysis shall be performed for class 1 and 2 plates.

2) The tensile test at high temperature shall be performed when this is stipulated in the equipment
specification or other relevant contractual documents. The test temperature is indicated in the
equipment specification.
This check is systematically performed for class 1 plates at 300°C.

3) Bending test at ambient temperature.

4) Impact test at -20°C shall be performed when specified in the equipment specification or any
other relevant contractual documents.

§ 10.2 OF NF EN 10028-1 "TEST SPECIMEN SAMPLING"

The centreline of the test specimens intended for the mechanical tests shall be at a distance from the
treated end at least equal to the plate thickness.
1) The centreline of the KV impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the final rolling
direction.

2) For the bending test, the test specimen shall have the dimensions specified in MC 1262.

§ 11 OF NF EN 10028-1 "TEST METHOD"

The types of test specimens and the test methods used shall comply with MC 1000.

The bending test is performed by parallel branches; the mandrel diameter or the shim thickness is
given for each steel grade in the appended table 1 depending on test specimen thickness "a"
in mm.
There shall be no cracking, tear or surface cracks on the outer bend.

M 1000 / 126  n° 140-2013

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1131

ANNEX

TABLE 1
Bending conditions

Mandrel diameter or
Steel grade
shim thickness

P235 GH 0.5 a
P265 GH 1a
P295 GH 2a
P355 GH 3a

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 127

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1131

M 1000 / 128  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1132

M 1132

PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CLASS 1, 2 AND 3 DISHED PARTS

MADE FROM CARBON STEEL

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable carbon steel dished parts, up to 150 mm in thickness which are
not covered by a part procurement specification.

1 BASE PRODUCT
Plate used for the manufacture of dished parts shall be procured as per product procurement
specification M 1131: CLASS 1, 2 and 3 CARBON STEEL PLATES; plate, however, can be
delivered untreated. In this case, the mechanical characteristics shall be checked on test specimens
taken from test coupons as stated in paragraph 4.2, and subjected to separate heat treatment for
mechanical properties followed by stress-relieving heat treatment or to heat treatment for
mechanical properties, in accordance with M 122.

2 MANUFACTURE
2.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
For class 1 and 2 dished parts, prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the
Manufacturer shall draw up a manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- position of dished part in the plate, more specifically, ingot centreline and final rolling directions
shall be marked on the part and on the test samples (refer to paragraph 4.2),
- forming process identification,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of the test specimens on samples.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 129

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1132

The various heating, dishing, possible machining, heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive
testing operations shall be presented in chronological order.
The Supplier must prove, by means of the required test results, that the selected manufacturing
process allows the guaranteed dimensional characteristics and mechanical properties to be obtained.
For Class 3 dished parts: (awaiting publication).

2.2 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

After forming, the dished part shall undergo a regenerative heat treatment, if the plate has been
delivered in the flat treated condition: this treatment is mostly identical to the heat treatment for
mechanical properties defined in product procurement specification M 1131.
If the plate has been delivered in flat untreated condition, the dished part shall undergo heat
treatment in accordance with the requirements of product procurement specification M 1131.

3 LOT COMPOSITION
A lot shall be composed of dished parts manufactured from the same original plate, subjected to the
same manufacturing cycle and forming part of the same furnace charge or heat treatment run.
The lot, however, shall be restricted to four parts of similar dimensions, as defined below:
e max
 1.1 and same strain value to within 10 %.
e min

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Required values for mechanical properties are identical to those indicated in product procurement
specification M 1131.

4.2 SAMPLING
The test samples shall be taken from coupons left attached to the part during cutting, and which have
undergone the same regenerative heat treatment or heat treatment for mechanical properties, as
defined in paragraph 2.2; if this proves impossible, they shall be taken from coupons cut from the
base plate before dishing. In this case, the coupons must undergo all dishing heat cycling along with
the part, then they must be welded to the dished part before it is subjected to regenerative heat
treatment or heat treatment for mechanical properties.
The coupons shall be appropriately marked and, more particularly, the direction of final rolling shall
be indicated.

M 1000 / 130  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1132

The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
No test specimen shall be taken closer to the sample or coupon edges than a distance equal to the
plate thickness. In order to fulfil this condition the forming shop can protect the edges by means of a
thermal buffer welded over the entire sample or coupon thickness.
Test specimen sampling shall be identical or as close as possible to the sampling conditions defined
in product procurement specification M 1131.
A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
position of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme (refer to
paragraph 2.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

(in accordance with paragraph M 122 of chapter M 100:
GENERAL PROVISIONS)
Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

For each lot, the following shall be performed:
- one series of tests, if the lot weight does not exceed 5 tonnes,
- two series of tests, one at each end of the plate where the lot comes from, if the latter is heavier
than 5 tonnes.

The test series shall include:

- a tensile test at room temperature,
- a bending test at room temperature,
- KV impact test at 0°C on test specimens taken in the transverse direction, for thicknesses of at
least 10 mm. An impact test at - 20°C or at - 40°C shall be performed when specified in the
equipment specification or other relevant contractual documents.
- a tensile test at high temperature when this is stipulated in the equipment specification or other
relevant contractual documents. The test temperature shall be indicated in the equipment
specification. For class 1, this test shall be systematically performed on a test specimen taken
from the bottom end.

4.3.2 Test procedure

Test procedure is identical to that defined in product procurement specification M 1131.
The values to be recorded and the results to be obtained are defined in this specification.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 131

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1132

4.4 RETREATMENT
Dished parts or lots rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or several mechanical tests
may be retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, the test specimens shall be sampled as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests to be
performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
The aggregate number of retreatments at the mill or forming shop shall be restricted to two.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT
The acceptance tests shall take into account all heat treatments to which the part is subjected during
manufacture. If the Contractor does not request application of chapter M 100 GENERAL
PROVISIONS, paragraph M 122, acceptance tests shall comply with the requirements of this
paragraph. In such cases, no as-delivered tests shall be performed.

4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment

This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The number of tests, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet the requirements
specified in table III for tests performed on as-delivered parts.
The sample for these tests shall be taken as stated in paragraph 4.2. The sample shall be subjected to
separate stress-relieving heat treatment in a laboratory furnace as described in paragraph 4.5.1.
Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected to heat treatment for mechanical
properties only (see paragraph 4.3).

4.6 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final stage in accordance
with MC 7100. The dished part shall be visually checked. Its surface shall be smooth, free of
scratches, laps, cracks, blisters, inclusions or any other injurious defects.
If the aforementioned inspection detects defects on the dished part, repairs shall be made as
stipulated in paragraph 7 of this specification.

M 1000 / 132  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 1132

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
After dishing and regenerative heat treatment or heat treatment for mechanical properties, an
ultrasonic examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 2400, which lays down the
conditions of applicability of Standard NF EN 10160.
- For class 1 dished parts : the examination shall be carried out wherever the thickness of the plate
from which the part was cut out is at least 12 mm. The scanning plan and criteria are those of
levels S3 and E4 given in Standard NF EN 10160.
In addition, as stipulated in paragraph 9.2.2 of the standard, a test identical to the one performed
on the plate edges shall be performed in the weld areas.
- For class 2 dished parts : the examination shall be carried out wherever the thickness of the plate
from which the part was cut out is at least 30 mm. The scanning plan and criteria are those of
levels S2 and E3 given in the standard.
- For class 3 dished parts : the ultrasonic examination is not required.

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

The only permitted defects are those which can be removed by grinding while remaining within the
dimensional tolerance range for the dished part.
No repair by welding shall be permitted in the forming shop.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on
the drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B,
C and 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.
In addition, rolling direction shall be indicated.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

 n° 144-2014 M 1000 / 133

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1132

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been retreated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- defect mapping,
- dimensional checks.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 1000 / 134  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1133

M 1133

PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

HOT OR COLD WORKED CARBON STEEL FITTINGS

WELDED WITH THE ADDITION OF FILLER METAL
FOR USE IN CLASS 2 AND 3 AUXILIARY PIPING

0 SCOPE
This specification covers hot or cold worked weldable carbon steel fittings welded with filler metal,
up to 80 mm in thickness.

1 BASE PRODUCTS
Plate for the manufacture of fittings shall be procured as per product procurement specification
M 1131: CLASS 1,2 and 3 CARBON STEEL PLATES, with the exception of the requirements for
heat treatment, sampling for mechanical tests and non destructive-examinations which are defined
below. The purchase order shall indicate whether the plate is to be hot worked. In such a case, the
following chemical composition limits shall apply:
- Cu + 6 Sn  0.33% and Cu  0.18%.

2 MANUFACTURE
2.1 FORMING OF FITTINGS
Refer to F 4000.

2.2 WELDING
Refer to SECTION IV, with due consideration paid to the following remarks: liquid penetrant or
magnetic particle examination of the surfaces to be welded is required only for class 2 pipes thicker
than 50 mm. A visual examination of the surfaces to be welded shall be performed in all cases,
including class 3.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 135

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1133

2.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The fittings shall be subjected to normalizing heat treatment in the following cases:
- the plate is delivered in flat untreated condition,
- the plate is hot worked,
- the forming process qualification shows that normalizing heat treatment is required after cold
forming.

The fittings shall undergo stress-relieving heat treatment, if applicable, in accordance with the
requirements and procedure defined in SECTION IV, chapter S 1000.
Note: If a plate delivered in normalized condition is cold worked, stress-relieving heat treatment shall be considered
to be sufficient, on the basis of the qualification test results.

3 LOT COMPOSITION
Lots shall be composed of fittings with the same nominal diameters and thickness, made from the
same original plate, which have been subjected to the same manufacturing cycle and treated in the
same furnace charge.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 BASE METAL MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OUTSIDE WELD ZONE
A diagram in annex A indicates the various possibilities for acceptance of the base metal outside the
weld zone.

4.1.1 Required values

The values to be recorded and the results to be obtained for the mechanical properties are identical
to those mentioned in product procurement specification M 1131.

4.1.2 Sampling
Tests for mechanical properties may be performed on flat plate and/or on fittings.
As far as possible, the sampling of the test specimens shall meet the requirements defined in
specification M 1131. However, no test specimen shall be located at a distance from the edge of the
sample or the coupon which is less than the thickness of the plate.

A - MECHANICAL TESTING OF A FLAT PLATE

The test samples shall be subjected to a simulated heat treatment comprising, if required, a stress
relieving heat treatment according to the requirements of M 151.

M 1000 / 136  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1133

The Supplier may ask for the provisions of paragraph M 122 to be made applicable, thereby
dispensing him from performing a simulated stress-relieving heat treatment.
However, if the plate is subjected to a normalizing heat treatment, in accordance with paragraph 2.3,
a restricted acceptance test shall be performed on the pipe.

B - MECHANICAL TESTING OF FITTINGS

One sample shall be taken per lot from a fitting prolongation in the as-delivered condition, or this
sample may be a production part.
If necessary, this test sample shall be subjected to a simulated heat treatment as per paragraph 2.3
and according to the requirements of M 151.
The Supplier may ask for the provisions of paragraph M 122 to be made applicable, thereby
dispensing him from performing a simulated stress-relieving heat treatment. In this case, tests shall
be performed on samples which have not been heat-treated subsequent to removal.
The Manufacturer need not comply with the requirements of paragraph 2.1, when the complete
series of mechanical tests is performed on fittings.

4.1.3 Number and content of tests

For each lot, the following shall be performed:
- one series of tests if the lot weight is less than 5 tonnes,
- two series of tests, one at each end of the flat plate or on two different fittings if the lot weight
exceeds 5 tonnes.

The complete series of tests shall consist of the following:

- one tensile test at room temperature,
- one bending test at room temperature,
- KV impact test on test specimens taken in the transverse direction of the plate or, where possible,
tangential to the fittings and for thicknesses of at least 12 mm. An impact test at - 20°C or at
- 40°C shall be performed when specified in the equipment specification or other relevant
contractual documents.
- A tensile test at high temperature when this is stipulated in the equipment specification or other
relevant contractual documents.

The restricted series of tests shall consist of the following:

- KV impact test at 0°C on test specimens taken, if possible, in the tangential direction and for
thicknesses of at least 12 mm. An impact test at - 20°C or at - 40°C shall be performed when
specified in the equipment specification or other relevant contractual documents.
- A tensile test at high temperature when this is stipulated in the equipment specification or other
relevant contractual documents.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 137

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1133

4.2 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES IN WELD ZONE

(DEPOSITED METAL AND HAZ)
4.2.1 Required values
Refer to SECTION IV, chapter S 3000.

4.2.2 Production coupon definition

Production coupons shall be produced as follows:
- one production coupon for the first 60 linear meters,
- one production coupon for the next 100 linear meters,
of weld for each qualified welding process, and which were subjected to the same heat treatment.

4.2.3 Sampling
The production coupon may consist of a production part: it shall also be possible to use a production
coupon located in the prolongation of the weld on a welded fitting and subjected to heat treatment at
the same time, in accordance with the requirements of S 7800 (SECTION IV).
Test specimens shall be taken in accordance with the requirements of SECTION IV, S 3000.

4.2.4 Number and content of the tests

Refer to SECTION IV, S 7800.

4.3 RETREATMENT
If the lot of fittings is rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or several mechanical
tests, it may be retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, the test specimens shall be sampled as specified in paragraph 4.1.2. The tests to be
performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.1.3. Only one retreatment shall
be permitted.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

5.1 ON PLATES
Refer to specification M 1131.

5.2 ON WELDS
Refer to the requirements of SECTION IV, S 7460.

M 1000 / 138  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1133

5.3 ON AS-DELIVERED FITTINGS

External and internal surfaces shall be sound, and free from injurious defects.
Fittings shall be delivered clean, free of any oxidation.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
6.1 CLASS 2 FITTINGS
6.1.1 An ultrasonic examination shall be performed on parts whose thickness exceeds 12 mm, in
accordance with the requirements of specification M 1131, class B plates:
- either on flat heat-treated plate,
- or on as-delivered part.

6.1.2 Welded joints are checked in accordance with chapter S 7700 of SECTION IV.

6.2 CLASS 3 FITTINGS

Only welded joints shall be checked in accordance with chapters S 7700 of SECTION IV.

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

7.1 FITTING OUTSIDE WELD ZONE
The only allowable defects are those which it is possible to remove by grinding within the internal
dimensional tolerances of the fitting.
Defect removal is checked by means of liquid penetrant examination, in accordance with MC 4000.

7.2 WELD ZONE

Refer to SECTION IV, chapter S 7600.

8 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

8.1 Dimensions and tolerances shall be stipulated in the equipment specification or other
relevant contractual documents.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 139

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1133

8.2 DIMENSIONAL CHECK

Dimensional checks shall at least consist of the following operations:
- check of thickness diameter, ovality and functional dimensions on 5 fittings per lot,
- check of weld bead additional thickness on 5 fittings per lot.

9 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
Fittings shall not be hydrostatically tested unless otherwise stipulated in the equipment
specification. However, the Supplier must guarantee the pressure-retaining characteristics of the
fittings in accordance with the requirements of the equipment specification.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall meet the requirements for identification and marking specified in chapters C
and D 1300.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Internal and external surfaces of fittings shall be descaled prior to delivery.
The purchase order shall specify whether the fittings are to be oiled or painted.
The ends of fittings shall be bevelled, deburred and protected. Other requirements for packaging and
transportation shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses, if applicable,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data,
- filler material lot acceptance,
- welding procedure qualification,
- welders and welding operators qualification,
- filler materials qualification,
- workshop qualification,

M 1000 / 140  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1133

- forming procedure qualification, where applicable,

- mechanical tests,
- visual examination,
- non-destructive examination,
- dimensional check,
- hydrostatic testing or supporting file.

These reports shall include:

- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- heat number and part reference number,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 141

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1133

ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF BASE METAL

OUTSIDE THE HAZ

M 1000 / 142  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1134

M 1134
PRODUCT TECHNICAL PROCUREMENT
SPECIFICATION

CLASS S1 AND S2 STEEL PLATES, BEAMS

AND COMMERCIAL GRADE BARS FOR
GENERAL STRUCTURAL USE

0 SCOPE
This specification covers class S1 and S2 steel plates, up to 150 mm in thickness, and beams and
commercial grade bars up to 100 mm in thickness for general structural use which are not covered
by an individual specification.

Only delivery conditions AR or N are accepted.

1 ENLARGEMENT ON STANDARDS NF EN 10025-1

AND NF EN 10025-2
§ 5.1.e of NF EN 10025-1

Quality level J2 or K2 is required for rod type hangers.

§ 5.1.a, 7.3.2.2, 8.2 of NF EN 10025-1, and § 8.2 of NF EN 10025-2

For quality level J2 or K2, a specific examination is required and a 3.1. type acceptance certificate
shall be supplied.

For other quality levels, a non-specific examination is required and a 2.2. type examination record
shall be supplied.

The examinations cover the chemical characteristics (chemical analysis of the melt) and the
mechanical characteristics (tensile and impact tests) as specified in tables 2, 7 and 9 of
NF EN 10025-2.

§ 7.7.1 of NF EN 10025-2 DIMENSIONAL CHECK

The dimensions of the parts shall comply with the purchase order drawing.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 143

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 1134

§ 6.3 of NF EN 10025-1 DELIVERY CONDITION

However, quality J2 or K2 plates shall be delivered in condition N, unless otherwise agreed in the
order.

§ 7.5 of NF EN 10025-2 SURFACE CONDITION

VISUAL EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

The products shall be examined visually.

Their surfaces shall be flat and even without any waviness and be free of ribbing, overlaps, scabs,
cracks, blisters or other detrimental defects.

After cutting to as-delivered dimensions, the edges shall be visually examined. There shall be no
cleavage or lamination.

If the above-mentioned examinations reveal any unacceptable defects the plate shall not be accepted
as is; the following requirements apply:

REMOVAL OF SURFACE DEFECTS

1. Any surface discontinuity other than cracks, flaws and laps can be removed by the producer, by
grinding, provided the thickness is not reduced at any point to either less than 96% of its nominal
value or 3 mm (the smallest value is applicable), and the operation is not detrimental to future
use of the product.

2. Defects such as cracks, flaws or laps must be completely removed before starting any weld repair
operation. This process must not reduce the thickness of the product to less than 80% of the
nominal thickness and the total area of the repaired surface does not exceed 2% of the surface
area of the part concerned.

§ 7.6 of NF EN 10025-2 INTERNAL DEFECTS

DETECTION OF INTERNAL DEFECTS

ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF QUALITY LEVEL J0, J2 AND K2 PRODUCTS
Class S1 plates for group 1 members as defined in H 1411, of at least 30 mm thickness shall be
subjected to ultrasonic examination in accordance with MC 2400, which lays down the conditions of
applicability of Standard NF EN 10160. Ultrasonic examination shall not be required for class S1
plates for group 2 members and class S2 plates.

The sampling plan and criteria are those of levels S2 and E3 given in Standard NF EN 10160.

M 1000 / 144  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1141

M 1141

PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CLASS 2 SEAMLESS PIPE MADE

FROM TU42C AND TU48C CARBON STEEL

0 SCOPE
This specification covers the procurement of hot or cold finished seamless pipe made from type
TU42C or TU48C weldable carbon steel to be used for auxiliary piping with an outside diameter
< 550 mm and a wall thickness < 50 mm.

These pipes, for which the grades are taken from the previous standard NFA 49-213 (cancelled), are
considered as products authorized for safe use in the field of implementation between the
temperatures of 0°C and 450°C.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be produced using an electric furnace or by any other technically equivalent process.
It shall be fully killed steel.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
The chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
He shall also provide a product analysis. This analysis may be performed on metal discard from
mechanical test specimens. An analysis shall be made on one pipe per batch.
The analyses shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 145

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1141

TABLE I

LADLE OR
C S P AI(1) Mo Ni Ti(2) Cu(3) Sn(3)
GRADE PRODUCT Si Mn
max. max. max. min. max. max. max. max. max.
ANALYSIS

Ladle 0.20 0.08-0.35 0.45-1.00 0.020 0.025 0.020 0.08 0.30 0.040 0.25 0.030
TU42C
Product 0.22 0.07-0.40 0.40-1.05 0.025 0.030 0.025 0.11 0.35 0.050 0.25 0.030
Ladle 0.22 0.10-0.35 0.65-1.25 0.020 0.025 0.020 0.08 0.30 0.040 0.25 0.030
TU48C
Product 0.24 0.09-0.40 0.60-1.30 0.025 0.030 0.025 0.11 0.35 0.050 0.25 0.030
(1) This requirement does not apply when the steel contains a sufficient quantity of elements that bind the nitrogen
present. The levels of these elements must be indicated. When the producer uses titanium, the following
requirement must be checked in ladle analysis: (A1 + Ti/2) < 0.020 %.
(2) The level of this element only needs to be indicated if it is added intentionally.
(3) However, the tin content may exceed 0.030 % up to a maximum of 0.040 % if the Cu + 10 Sn content does not
exceed 0.55 %.
(4) For pipes intended to undergo hot-working later, the copper and tin levels are further limited by the following
conditions:
Cu  0.18 %
Cu + 6 Sn  0.33 %

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 PIPES MANUFACTURING
The pipes shall be manufactured using a weldless process. They can be hot or cold-finished.

All the pipes shall have their ends cut square and deburred.

3.2 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The pipes shall be subjected to a normalizing heat treatment over the whole length.

If the pipe is to be subjected to a retreatment (cf. § 4.4), the new treatment shall satisfy the same
requirements.

In the event of specific stress-relieving heat treatment methods, these shall be defined by the
equipment specification or other documents applicable to the order.

M 1000 / 146  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1141

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are given in table II below.

TABLE II

TYPE OF TEST VALUE TO BE OBTAINED

CHARACTERISTICS
TEST TEMPERATURE TU42C TU48C
Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 235 MPa 275 MPa
(Axial or Rm 410 / 510 MPa 470 / 570 MPa
circumferential A % minimum axial 25 23
orientation) value
A % minimum 23 21
circumferential value
300°C (1) Rtp0.2 minimum value 157 MPa 186 MPa
Rm minimum value 369 MPa 423 MPa
KV impact 0°C Minimum average value 40 J 40 J
(Axial Minimum individual 28 J 28 J
orientation) value (2)

KV impact 0° Minimum average value 27 J 27 J

(Circumferential Minimum individual 19 J 19 J
orientation) value (2)

(1) If required by the equipment specification or other documents applicable to the order
(2) A maximum of one result lower than the minimum average value is acceptable in each set of
3 specimens

When reduced section impact test specimens are used, the values to be obtained are defined below.

VALUES TO BE OBTAINED

KV IMPACT TEST AT 0°C WITH REDUCED SECTION TEST SPECIMENS

MINIMUM ABSORBED ENERGY IN J

Specimen Dimensions 55 mm x 10 mm x 7.5 mm (1) 55 mm x 10 mm x 5 mm (2)

Direction of Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum

GRADES
sampling average value individual value (3) average value individual value (3)

TU42C Axial 32 22 22 16
TU48C Circumferential 22 16 15 11
(1) For pipes with thickness e such that: 8.8 < e < 12.5 mm
(2) For pipes with thickness e such that: 6.3 < e ≤ 8.8 mm
(3) A maximum of one result lower than the minimum average value is acceptable in each set of 3
specimens

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 147

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1141

4.2 SAMPLING
The samples to be tested shall be taken from pipes in delivery condition. Sampling shall be
performed at the end of the pipes.

Test samples shall be large enough to allow specimens for tests and repeat tests to be taken if
necessary.

In the case of possible performance of repeat tests, the necessary samples shall be taken from close
to the first sampling.

The samples shall be taken at a distance from the treated end of the pipe equal to at least the
thickness of the pipe, without exceeding 40 mm.

Wherever possible, the axis of the specimens shall be located at mid-thickness of the pipe.

The tension samples shall be taken as selected by the manufacturer from the following:

- for pipes with outside diameter less than or equal to 219.1 mm, the specimen shall be either a
section of pipe, or a prismatic specimen and it shall be taken longitudinally in relation to the
pipe axis;

- for pipes with outside diameter greater than 219.1 mm, the specimen shall be either a prismatic
specimen or a non adjusted cylindrical specimen and it shall be taken either longitudinally or
laterally in relation to the pipe axis.

The impact strength specimens shall be taken perpendicularly to the pipe axis. When standard
samples in the circumferential direction cannot be taken without flattening, then samples with a
smaller thickness with a cross-section of 7.5x10 mm or 5x10 mm shall be taken. The largest
specimen possible shall be used.

If the smaller circumferential specimen cannot be obtained, then the larger size axial specimen shall
be used.

In the event that it is impossible to obtain specimens with a minimum width of 5 mm, the pipes are
not subjected to the impact strength test.

For impact strength rupture specimens, the notch is perpendicular to the skin.

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

These tests shall be performed on specimens from samples that undergone no heat treatment after
sampling (see paragraph 4.5).

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The mechanical characteristics shall be determined for each batch.

A batch is defined as being formed of pipes from the same heat, with the same diameter and
thickness, having undergone the same production cycle and forming part of the same furnace charge
or the same heat treatment sequence.

M 1000 / 148  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1141

The batch shall be limited as follows:

- 200 pipes for outside diameters D  114.3 mm

- 100 pipes for 114.3 < D  323.9 mm
- 50 pipes for D > 323.9 mm

Test series to be performed and specimen positions are given in table III.

A high-temperature tensile test shall be performed when required in the equipment specification or
other documents applicable to the order. Similarly, the flattering and flare tests shall be performed
on each pipe when required by the equipment specification.

The elongation values after rupture for the high-temperature tensile test shall be recorded for
documentary purposes.

The specimen types and the test method shall comply with MC 1000.

TABLE III

NUMBER OF
TYPE SAMPLING TEST
SPECIMENS PER
OF TEST DIRECTION TEMPERATURE
TEST TYPE
Circumferential Room 2 per batch
Tension or 1 per pouring and heat
Axial 300°C (1)
treatment condition
Circumferential
KV impact or 0°C 2 series per batch
Axial
Flattening 2 per batch (2)
Axial Room
Flaring 2 per batch (2)

(1) if required by equipment specification

(2) 1 test per pipe if required by equipment specification.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
The dimensions of the test specimens used shall comply with MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 149

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1141

c) Results
The results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the pipe shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
If the tests results are unsatisfactory for a reason other than those referred to the cases described
above, two additional tests shall be performed for each unsatisfactory test with specimens taken
close to those that produced unsatisfactory results. If these repeat tests are satisfactory, the pipe
batch is accepted, otherwise it shall be rejected (cf. § 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens
The test shall be performed using three KV specimens taken end to end or side by side. The
shape and dimensions of the specimens shall be as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

c) Results
The conditions concerning the impact strength rupture energy values specified in table II shall be
satisfied.
If one of the conditions is not satisfied, the pipe batch shall be rejected. However, if the test
results are only unsatisfactory due to a single individual value being lower than the required
minimum value, while the other conditions are satisfied (satisfactory average, no more than one
result lower than the required average), repeat tests shall be performed as follows:
- Two series of three specimens, sampled close to the series of specimens that gave
unsatisfactory results, shall be tested at the same temperature as the first series. Each of the
two series of three specimens shall give satisfactory results under the conditions of § 4.1.
Otherwise the pipe batch shall be rejected (cf. § 4.4).

C - FLATTENING TEST
a) Test specimen and test method
The test specimen dimensions and the test method are specified in MC 1000. This test shall only
be performed for pipes with thickness less than or equal to 40 mm.
The deformation coefficient K to be taken into account is given below:

Grades K
TU42C 0.09
TU48C 0.07

M 1000 / 150  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1141

b) Results
After the test, the specimen must not show any sign of cracking or fracturing. However, minor
surface cracks are acceptable.

D - FLARE TEST
a) Test specimen and test method
The test specimen dimensions and the test method are specified in MC 1000.
The test shall be performed using a tapered mandrel with point angle of 60° and continued until
the increase in the expanded outside diameter of the pipe reaches the following values:

d/D (1) TU42C TU48C

 0.6 1.10 D 1.08 D
0.6 < d/D  0.8 1.12 D 1.10 D
> 0.8 1.17 D 1.15 D
(1) D = outside diameter of pipe and
d = D - 2e (with e = nominal thickness of pipe)

b) Results
After the test, the specimen must not show any sign of cracking or fracturing. However, minor
surface cracks are acceptable.

4.4 RETREATMENT
In the event that the pipe batch shall be rejected due to unsatisfactory results obtained for one or
more mechanical tests, it may be retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the
test report.
In this case, the samples for tests shall be taken in the same conditions as those specified in § 4.2.
The series of tests to be performed shall be identical to that specified in § 4.3.

The number of authorized retreatments is limited to 2.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS RELIEVING TREATMENT
The acceptance procedure shall take into account all heat treatments undergone by the part during
manufacture. If the Manufacturer does not request application of paragraph M 122, the acceptance
of the part is subjected to the requirements of this paragraph. In this case, no as-delivered tests shall
be performed but the samples taken shall be subjected to a simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
in a laboratory furnace.

4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment

Unless otherwise specified in the order, these samples shall undergo the simulated stress-relieving
heat treatment, in accordance with the requirements of M 151.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 151

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1141

4.5.2 Test conditions

The number of tests to be performed, the sampling directions and the test temperatures shall be
identical to those required for the delivery condition tests, as shown in table III.

The tests shall be performed on samples taken in accordance with the provisions of § 4.2 for pipes in
delivery condition. The samples are subjected to the simulated stress-relieving heat treatment in §
4.5.1, performed in a laboratory furnace. The test conditions and results to be obtained are identical
to those requested for representative samples of the as-delivered part (see § 4.3).

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

Not applicable.

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

6.1 VISUAL EXAMINATION
The outer and inner surfaces shall have the appearance of a well-performed finish in terms of the
production process. The surface condition of the pipes shall be such that it will not impair the
correct performance of the nondestructive tests.

Any imperfections in the depth that are shown to be greater than 5 % of the nominal thickness shall
be repaired. This requirement does not apply in the case of imperfections in depth that are less than
or equal to 0.3 mm. Similarly, any imperfection that appears repeated on a single pipe or on more
than one pipes in a single batch, on condition that its average depth is greater than or equal to the
largest of the two values - 3 % of nominal thickness or 0.2 mm, shall be repaired.

Surface imperfections that cause thickness to be less than the specified minimum shall be considered
as defects and the pipes concerned shall be considered nonconforming.

If this inspection reveals the presence of unacceptable defects, the requirements of paragraph 8 of
this specification must be applied.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
7.1. PROCEDURE
Each straight pipe shall be subjected to ultrasonic examination, in accordance with the methods
defined in MC 2500 with the following specifications:
- ultrasonic examination shall be performed on pipes in delivery condition,
- the surface condition shall comply with MC 2100,
- the test shall be performed for detection of longitudinal indications in accordance with standard
EN 10246-7.

M 1000 / 152  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1141

7.2 DEGREE AND TIME OF EXAMINATION

The inspection shall cover 100 % of the volume of the part.
Pipe ends that could not be adequately tested on the automatic test bench shall either be cropped or
be manually tested over at least 100 mm. The manual test method shall afford a sensitivity at least
equal to that of the automatic method; the reference pipe used to adjust sensitivity shall also be used
for automatic testing.

7.3 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

This shall be performed in accordance with MC 2500. The severity level is defined in MC 2534-1.

7.4 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

The acceptance criteria shall be those in paragraph 6 of standard EN 10246-7.
In case of doubts, suspect pipes are covered by paragraph 8 of this specification.

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Repair by welding shall not be permitted at the pipe Manufacturer's.

8.1 AFTER VISUAL INSPECTION

Surface imperfections may be eliminated by grinding or machining only, as long as the thickness
after repair remains greater than the specified minimum thickness. All ground areas shall remain
within the pipe profile.

8.2 AFTER ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION

Suspect areas may be eliminated by cropping or grinding, as long as the thickness remaining is
greater than the minimum required thickness. All ground areas shall remain within the pipe profile.
The elimination of the defect by grinding is checked by liquid penetrant testing in accordance with
MC 4000 or by magnetic particle examination in accordance with MC 5000.
After complete grinding of the suspect area, the pipe shall be again subjected to ultrasonic
examination (see § 7).

LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION CRITERIA

The following shall be considered relevant: indications with one dimension greater than 1 mm.
In any event, defects resulting in the following shall be detected and eliminated or, if necessary,
repaired:
- any linear indication,
- rounded indications with one dimension exceeding 3 mm,

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 153

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1141

- three or more indications in a line separated by less than 3 mm (edge to edge),

- any group of more than 5 indications, located in any 100 cm2 rectangular area whose major
dimension does not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the
indication being evaluated.

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION CRITERIA

The following shall be considered relevant: indications with one dimension greater than 1 mm.

In any event, defects resulting in the following shall be detected and eliminated or, if necessary,
repaired:
- any linear indication,
- non linear indications with one dimension exceeding 3 mm,
- three or more indications in a line, less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge) or extending for more
than 15 mm if the edge to edge is between 3 and 6 mm.
- Two separate indications shall be considered as one if the distance separating them is less than
twice the length of the shorter. The aggregate length of the indication shall be equal to the sum of
the measured lengths of two indications plus the interval separating them.

9 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

The dimensions and tolerances shall comply with the requirements of the order, and with the
requirements of NF EN 10216-2.

The dimensions of each pipe shall be checked.

10 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
Each pipe shall undergo a hydrostatic testing in accordance with the "hydrostatic test" paragraph of
standard NF EN 10216-2.

11 MARKING
The Supplier shall apply the methods of paragraph C 1300 concerning identification and individual
marking of the pipes.

12 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Methods to be defined with the order.

M 1000 / 154  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1141

13 TEST REPORTS
As the examination proceed, or at least prior to delivery of the pipes, the Supplier shall draw up test
reports for the following:
- chemical analysis - ladle and product - for each batch,
- heat treatment certificate specifying the diameter of the treated pipes, (including retreatment if
any),
- mechanical tests,
- visual examination,
- non-destructive examination,
- dimensional check,
- hydrostatic tests.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and pipe reference number,
- Supplier's particular,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency,
- test and retest results with the required values indicated opposite the results.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 155

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1141

M 1000 / 156  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1142

M 1142
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

TYPE P 235 GH AND P 265 GH,

ROLLED CARBON STEEL PIPES WELDED
WITHOUT THE ADDITION OF FILLER METAL
FOR USE IN CLASS 2 AND 3 PIPING

0 SCOPE
This specification covers tubes which are rolled and welded longitudinally, without the addition of
filler metal, made from carbon steel grade type P 235 GH and P 265 GH with an outside diameter
less than or equal to 168.3 mm.

1 GENERAL AND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

These tubes are procured as per standard NF EN 10 217-2. Furthermore, the following requirements
and supplements shall be added to the paragraphs of this standard.

§ 6.1 MANDATORY INFORMATION

The tubes are covered by test category 2.

§ 6.2 OPTIONS
An impact bending test is required at 0°C.

§ 8.2 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

For tubes intended for subsequent hot forming, the copper and tin contents are also limited by the
following conditions:

- Cu  0.18 %,
- Cu + 6 Sn  0.33 %.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 157

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1142

§ 8.4.3.1 LEAK-TIGHTNESS
Hydrostatic testing is required in all cases.

§ 8.7.4.2 HEIGHT OF THE WELD SEAM

For class 2 tubes, the weld seam must be flush on the outside of the tube, and the local over-
thickness of the internal weld seam shall not be more than 0.3 mm + 0.04 T.

§ 9.2 EXAMINATION DOCUMENT

An acceptance certificate is required; the indications shall correspond at least to those required for a
type 3.1 certificate in accordance with standard EN 10 204.

§ 11.5 RING TENSILE TESTS

This test is not required.

§ 11.7 EXPANSION TESTS

This test is not required.

§ 11.12.2 NON-DESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATIONS

Class 2 tubes
The non-destructive examinations are performed by flux leakage and by ultrasonic examination for
tube thicknesses equal to or more than 6.3 mm. Tube thicknesses of less than 6.3 mm are examined
either by flux leakage or ultrasonic examination.

Flux leakage examination:

a) Examination conditions
The tube is examined by flux leakage in accordance with the conditions defined in standard
NF EN 10246-5 with the following details:
- the examination is performed by certified personnel, in accordance with MC 8000,
- the flux leakage examination is performed on the tubes in the delivery condition,
- for the grades in question, the master tube can be of any grade as long as it is at least 4%
alloyed,
- calibration is carried out on internal and external longitudinal notches with the external notch
in the weld,
- the internal and external notches correspond to severity level F2 in standard NF EN 10217-2.

M 1000 / 158  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1142

b) Degree and time of examination

The examination concerns 100% of the volume of the part.
The ends which are not completely examined shall be discarded.

c) Acceptance criteria
Any confirmed indication with an amplitude equal to or more than the reference amplitude of the
master notch is unacceptable.
Suspect tubes are covered by the "Removal of faulty areas" paragraph in this specification.

Ultrasonic examination:
a) Examination conditions
Each tube is examined by ultrasonics in accordance with the conditions defined in MC 2500,
with the following details:
- the ultrasonic examination is performed on the tubes in the delivery condition,
- the surface condition must be in compliance with MC 2100,
- the examination is carried out in order to detect longitudinal imperfections in accordance with
standard EN 10246-7,
- the reflectors are type N notches.

In the case of tubes with an outside diameter / wall thickness ratio of less than 5, which are
excluded from the scope of the standard, the contractor's approval is required.

b) Degree and time of examination

The examination concerns 100% of the volume of the part.
The ends which are not completely examined on the automatic bench shall be:
- discarded, for diameters D < 88.9 mm,
- discarded or examined manually over 100 mm, for diameters D ≥ 88.9 mm.
The manual examination method shall be at least as sensitive as the automatic method; the
reference tube used to adjust the sensitivity shall be the same tube as that used for the automatic
examination.

c) Assessment of the indications

The assessment is performed in accordance with MC 2500.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 159

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1142

d) Acceptance criteria
The criteria are given in paragraph 6 of NF EN 10246-7.
Suspect tubes are covered by the "Removal of faulty areas" paragraph in this specification.

Class 3 tubes
The non-destructive examinations are either by flux leakage or ultrasonic examination.

Flux leakage examination:

The conditions in standard NF EN 10246-5 are supplemented by the following provisions:
- the examination is performed by certified personnel, in accordance with MC 8000,
- the leakage fux examination is performed on the tubes in the delivery condition,
- for the grades in question, the master tube can be of any grade as long as it is at least 4% alloyed,
- calibration is carried out on internal and external longitudinal notches with the external notch in
the weld. the internal and external notches correspond to severity level F2 in standard
NF EN 10217-2.

Suspect tubes are covered by the "Removal of faulty areas" paragraph in this specification.

Ultrasonic examination:
The conditions in standard NF EN 10246-7 are supplemented by the following provisions:
- for the grades in question, the master tube can be of any grade as long as it is at least 6% alloyed,
- the surface condition must be in compliance with MC 2100,
- calibration is carried out on external and internal longitudinal notches. For diameters of less than
20 mm, calibration is carried out on an external longitudinal notch only,
- the notches are located on the weld seam,
- the reference reflectors are type N notches.

In the case of tubes with an outside diameter / wall thickness ratio of less than 5, which are excluded
from the scope of the standard, the contractor's approval is required.

Suspect tubes are covered by the "Removal of faulty areas" paragraph in this specification.

M 1000 / 160  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1142

REMOVAL OF FAULTY AREAS

No weld repairs are permitted at the tube manufacturer's plant.

a) After visual examination

Surface imperfections can be removed only by grinding or machining as long as the thickness
after repair remains greater than the minimum specified thickness. All ground areas must be
within the tube profile.

b) After non-destructive examination

Suspect areas can be removed either by discard or by grinding or sanding to the extent where the
remaining thickness and/or length of the tube is greater than the ordered minimum thickness or
length. All ground areas must be within the tube profile.
After total grinding of the suspect area, the tube must be reexamined with all the non-destructive
acceptance examinations.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 161

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1142

M 1000 / 162  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1143

M 1143

PRODUCT REFERENCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

CLASS 2 AND 3 P235GH AND P265GH

CARBON STEEL SEAMLESS TUBES

0 PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This specification concerns procurement of P235GH and P265GH cold-finished or hot-finished
seamless carbon welding steel tubes.

1 GENERAL AND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

These tubes are procured in accordance with standard EN 10216-2. The requirements of this
standard apply and are amended or completed by the following requirements concerning the
paragraphs of the standard.

Para. 6.1 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 «INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BY THE

PURCHASER»

Acceptance tests: the test category selected for class 3 tubes is category 1.

Acceptance tests: the test category selected for class 2 tubes is category 2.

Para. 6.2 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 «OPTIONS»

An impact strength test is required at 0°C (option 4).

Para. 7.3 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 «Tube manufacture and delivery conditions»

The tubes must be subject to a normalizing heat treatment over the whole length.
Normalizing rolling is not authorized.

If the tubes are to be subject to rework (cf. additions to § 11.13), the new treatment must satisfy the
same requirements.

In the event of specific stress relief heat treatment methods, these must be defined by the equipment
specification or other documents applicable to the contract.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 163

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1143

Para. 8.2 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 «Chemical composition»

For tubes intended to undergo hot-working later, the copper and tin levels are further limited by the
following conditions (option 2):

Cu  0.18%
Cu + 6 Sn  0.33%

The class 2 tubes must be subject to product analysis (option 3).

Para. 8.3.2 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 «Mechanical characteristics at high

temperature»

The class 2 tubes must be characterized by a tensile test at 300°C if required by the equipment
specification or other documents applicable to the contact (option 6).

The values for tensile strength and elongation after rupture are recorded for documentary purposes.

Para. 8.4.2.1 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 «Leaktightness»

The leaktightness is checked by a hydrostatic test (option 7).

Para. 9.2.1 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 «Type of document»

An acceptance certificate with, at minimum, indications corresponding to those required in a type

3.1 certificate, in accordance with standard EN 10204, is required.

Para. 10.2.2.1 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 «Location, direction and preparation of

samples and specimens for mechanical tests - General points»

TESTS TO BE PERFORMED ON SAMPLES THAT HAVE UNDERGONE SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEF TREATMENT

The acceptance procedure must take into account the heat treatments undergone by the part during
manufacture. If the Contractor does not request application of M 122, the acceptance of the part is
subject to the requirements of this paragraph. In this case, the delivery condition tests are not
performed, but the samples taken are subject to a simulated stress-relief heat treatment in a
laboratory furnace.

The procedure for the simulated stress-relief heat treatment shall comply with the requirements
of M 151.

The conditions for sampling and performing the tests and the results to be obtained are identical to
those requested for samples that only undergo delivery heat treatment.

M 1000 / 164  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1143

Para. 11.4 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 «Ring tensile test»

This test is not used.

Para. 11.6 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 «Ring expansion test»

This test is not used.

Para. 11.11.1 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 «Nondestructive test»

All the class 2 tubes are subject to ultrasonic examination (option 16).

PROCEDURE
Each straight tube is subject to ultrasonic examination, in accordance with the methods defined in
MC 2500 with the following specifications:
- ultrasonic examination is performed on tubes in delivery condition,
- the surface condition must comply with MC 2100,
- the test is performed for detection of longitudinal imperfections in accordance with standard
EN 10246-7.

EXTENT AND STAGE OF EXAMINATION

The inspection shall cover 100% of the volume of the part.
Tube ends that could not be adequately tested on the automatic test bench shall either be cropped or
be manually tested over at least 100 mm. The manual test method shall afford a sensitivity at least
equal to that of the automatic method; the reference tube used to adjust sensitivity shall be the one
used for automatic testing.

ASSESSMENT OF INDICATIONS
This is performed in accordance with MC 2500. The severity level is defined in MC 2534-1.

ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
The acceptance criteria are those in paragraph 6 of standard EN 10246-7.
Suspect tubes are covered by the paragraph «Elimination of areas with defects» in this specification.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 165

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1143

ELIMINATION OF AREAS WITH DEFECTS

No weld repairs shall take place on the tube manufacturer's premises.
a) After visual inspection
Surface imperfections may be eliminated by grinding or machining only, as long as the thickness
after repair remains greater than the specified minimum thickness. All ground areas must be
within the tube profile.

b) After nondestructive testing

Suspect areas may be eliminated by cropping, or by grinding or sanding, as long as the thickness
and/or length remaining is greater than the minimum thickness or length required. All ground
areas must be within the tube profile.
After complete grinding of the suspect area, the tube is again subject to the set of nondestructive
tests.

Para. 11.13 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 «Repeat tests, sorting and rework»

The number of authorized rework operation is limited to 2.

M 1000 / 166  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1143 Bis

M 1143 Bis

PRODUCT REFERENCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

CLASS 2 P355NH STEEL SEAMLESS TUBES

0 PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This specification concerns procurement of P355NH cold-finished or hot-finished seamless welding
steel tubes.

1 GENERAL AND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

These tubes are procured in accordance with standard EN 10216-3. The requirements of this
standard apply and are amended or completed by the following requirements concerning the
paragraphs of the standard.

Para. 6.1 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-3 «Information to be provided by the purchaser»

Acceptance tests: the test category selected is category 2.

Para. 7.3 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-3 «Tube manufacture and delivery conditions»

The tubes must be subject to a normalizing heat treatment over the whole length.
Normalizing rolling is not authorized.
If the tubes are to be subject to rework (cf. additions to § 11.13), the new treatment must satisfy the
same requirements.
In the event of specific stress relief heat treatment methods, these must be defined by the equipment
specification or other documents applicable to the contract.

Para. 8.2 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-3 «Chemical composition»

For tubes intended to undergo hot-working later, the copper and tin levels are further limited by the
following conditions (option 2):
Cu  0.18%
Cu + 6 Sn  0.33%
The tubes must be subject to product analysis (option 3).

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 167

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1143 Bis

Para. 8.3.2 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-3 «Mechanical characteristics»

The tubes must be characterized by a tensile test at 300°C if required by the equipment specification
or other documents applicable to the contract (option 4).

Para. 8.4.2.1 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-3 «Leaktightness»

The leaktightness is checked by a hydrostatic test (option 6).

Para. 9.2.1 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-3 «Type of document»

An acceptance certificate with, at minimum, indications corresponding to those required in a type
3.1 certificate, in accordance with standard EN 10204, is required.

Para. 10.2.2.1 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-3 «Location, direction and preparation of

samples and specimens for mechanical tests - General points»

TESTS TO BE PERFORMED ON SAMPLES THAT HAVE UNDERGONE SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEF TREATMENT
The acceptance procedure must take into account the heat treatments undergone by the part during
manufacture. If the Contractor does not request application of M 122, the acceptance of the part is
subject to the requirements of this paragraph. In this case, the delivery condition tests are not
performed, but the samples taken are subject to a simulated stress-relief heat treatment in a
laboratory furnace.
The procedure for the simulated stress-relief heat treatment shall comply with the requirements
of M 151.
The conditions for sampling and performing the tests and the results to be obtained are identical to
those requested for samples that only undergo delivery heat treatment.

Para. 11.4 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-3 «Ring tensile test»

This test is not used.

Para. 11.6 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-3 «Ring expansion test»

This test is not used.

Para. 11.11.1 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-3 «Nondestructive test»

The tubes are subject to ultrasonic examination (option 16).

PROCEDURE
Each straight tube is subject to ultrasonic examination, in accordance with the methods defined in
MC 2500 with the following specifications:
- ultrasonic examination is performed on tubes in delivery condition,
- the surface condition must comply with MC 2100,

M 1000 / 168  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1143 Bis

- the test is performed for detection of longitudinal imperfections in accordance with standard
EN 10246-7.

EXTENT AND STAGE OF EXAMINATION

The inspection shall cover 100% of the volume of the part.
Tube ends that could not be adequately tested on the automatic test bench shall either be cropped or
be manually tested over at least 100 mm. The manual test method shall afford a sensitivity at least
equal to that of the automatic method; the reference tube used to adjust sensitivity shall be the one
used for automatic testing.

ASSESSMENT OF INDICATIONS
This is performed in accordance with MC 2500. The severity level is defined in MC 2534-1.

ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
The acceptance criteria are those in paragraph 7 of standard EN 10246-7.
Suspect tubes are covered by the paragraph «Elimination of areas with defects» in this specification.

ELIMINATION OF AREAS WITH DEFECTS

No weld repairs shall take place on the tube manufacturer's premises.
a) After visual inspection
Surface imperfections may be eliminated by grinding or machining only, as long as the thickness
after repair remains greater than the specified minimum thickness. All ground areas must be within
the tube profile.

b) After nondestructive testing

Suspect areas may be eliminated by cropping, or by grinding or sanding, as long as the thickness
and/or length remaining is greater than the minimum thickness or length required. All ground areas
must be within the tube profile.
After complete grinding of the suspect area, the tube is again subject to the set of nondestructive
tests.

Para. 11.13 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-3 «Repeat tests, sorting and rework»

The number of authorized rework operations is limited to 2.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 169

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1143 Bis

M 1000 / 170  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1144

M 1144

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

TYPE P280 GH SEAMLESS FORGED

CARBON STEEL PIPES

0 SCOPE
This specification deals with hot rolled seamless weldable type P 280 GH carbon steel pipes,
obtained by forging, extrusion or mandrel drawing for use in main steam systems.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
He shall also provide a product analysis. This analysis may be performed on metal discard from
mechanical test specimens. An analysis shall be made on each pipe.
The analyses shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 171

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1144

TABLE I

CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS IN % FOR LADLE

AND PIPE ANALYSES

LADLE OR
AFNOR Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Max
PRODUCT Si Mn A
GRADE C S P Cu(1) Sn(1) Ni Cr Mo Ceq(2)
ANALYSIS
0.10/ 0.80/ 0.020/
Ladle 0.20 0.015 0.020 0.25 0.030 0.50 0.25 0.10 0.48
P 280 0.35 1.60 0.050
GH 0.10/ 0.80/ 0.020/
Product 0.22 0.020 0.025 0.25 0.030 0.50 0.25 0.10 0.48
0.40 1.60 0.050
(1) The tin content may exceed 0.030% to a maximum of 0.040% provided that the Cu + 10 Sn content does not
exceed 0.55%.
For pipes which will be subsequently hot-worked, the copper and tin contents shall be limited by the following
requirement :
Cu  0.18 %
Cu + 6 Sn  0.33 %

(2) Ceq = C + Mn/6 + (Cr + Mo + V) / 5 + (Ni + Cu) / 15

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations the pipe Manufacturer shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of the part in the ingot,
- drawings of part after each forging operation with forging ratio and overall ratio of reduction
defined in accordance with M 380,
- drawing of the part before heat treatments and in delivery condition,
- conditions for heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

M 1000 / 172  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1144

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A
record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance Agents.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough-machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The inside and outside of the part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final
examination.
All pipes shall have their ends cut square and deburred.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The pipes shall be delivered in the normalized condition as specified below.

NORMALIZED CONDITION

Temperature 890 to 940 °C

Holding time : 1 minute per mm in thickness
for a minimum time of 30 mn
Method of cooling : still air.

Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

If the pipe is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II below.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 173

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1144

TABLE II

NAME OF TEST REQUIRED VALUES

PROPERTIES
TEST TEMPERATURE P 280 GH
Tension Room Rp0,2 minimum value 275 MPa
Rm 470/570 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 21

300°C Rt0,002 minimum value 186 MPa

Rm minimum value 423 MPa

Minimum average value (1) 60 J

KV impact 0°C
Minimum individual value 40 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value shall be acceptable for each set
of three test specimens
Note :. The value of the product of Rm (A - 2) must be greater than 10 500.

4.2 SAMPLING
The test samples shall be taken from two test rings located at each end of the pipe, corresponding to
the initial ingot top and bottom ends. These samples shall be taken after the pipe has undergone the
normalizing heat treatment. They shall be appropriately marked.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
In the event of retests, the samples required shall be taken from a location close to the area from
which the first samples were taken.
The test specimens for tension and energy absorbed by breakage tests shall be taken
circumferentially. For tension testing at room temperature and for impact testing, the specimens
taken at one end of the pipe shall be oriented at 180 degrees to those taken at the other end. The
notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins of the test ring.
The test specimens shall be taken at a distance from the treated end of the pipe at least equal to the
thickness of the pipe wall, without exceeding 40 mm, and at least 20 mm beneath the inner skin in
the as-delivered condition. When sampling conditions as those described above prove impossible,
particularly due to insufficient thickness, the test specimens shall be taken in such a way that their
centreline is located at mid-thickness.

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling (see paragraph 4.5).

M 1000 / 174  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1144

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table III.
TABLE III

NUMBER OF TEST
NAME OF ORIENTATION OF TEST
POSITION SPECIMENS PER TYPE
TEST TEST SPECIMEN TEMPERATURE
OF TEST
Bottom end room 1

Top end at room 1

Tension Circumferential
180 °

Bottom end 300°C 1

Bottom end 0°C 3
KV Impact Circumferential Top end at 0°C 3
180 °

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
The dimensions of the test specimens used shall comply with MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II .
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the pipe shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 175

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1144

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the pipe shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens
The test shall be performed at 0°C on three KV impact test specimens taken from adjacent
locations. The shape and dimensions of these specimens shall be as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method

The test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

c) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at 0°C shown in table II must be met.
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements. However, where the
only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the required minimum value
and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no more than one result lower
than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with the following procedure:
- Two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall be tested at the
same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do
not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Pipes rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be sampled as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed
shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3. No more than one retreatment shall be
allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS RELIEVING TREATMENT
The acceptance tests shall take into account all heat treatments to which the part is subjected during
manufacture. If the Manufacturer does not request application of paragraph M 122, acceptance tests
shall comply with the requirements of this paragraph. In such cases, no as-delivered tests shall be
performed.

M 1000 / 176  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1144

4.5.1 Simulated stress relieving heat treatment

Unless otherwise specified in the purchase order, these test specimens shall undergo the simulated
stress-relieving heat treatment according to the requirements of M 151.
Nominal holding temperature shall be 610°C, for a time calculated on the basis of 6 min per mm in
thickness, with a minimum of three hours.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The number of tests, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet the requirements
specified in table III for tests performed on as-delivered parts.
Samples for these tests shall be taken in accordance with paragraph 4.2 on as-delivered pipes.
Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected
to normalizing or quenching and tempering heat treatment only (see paragraph 4.3).

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

Not applicable.

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be examined carefully during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final
stage in accordance with MC 7100.
Since the pipes will be delivered ground (see paragraph 3.3), all internal and external surfaces shall
have a workmanlike finish for the fabrication process and heat treatment methods used.
Pipes shall be sound and free from cracks, tears, blisters, laps, slivers, or any other injurious defect.
If any of the above-mentioned defects are detected during examination, acceptance of the pipe shall
be subject to the requirements of paragraph 8 of this specification. If any doubt arises, the pipes
shall undergo liquid penetrant examination, in accordance with MC 4000.

EXAMINATION CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 177

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1144

- 3 or more indications in a line separated by less than 3 mm (edge to edge),

- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
7.1 PROCEDURE
All pipes shall be subjected to ultrasonic testing for defects, through straight beam examination
(for MC 2300, class 3) and angle beam examination (MC 2500).
Probe frequency shall normally be 4 MHz.

7.2 DEGREE AND TIME OF EXAMINATION

The examination shall concern the whole volume of the part.
The examination shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
This examination shall be performed at a time when the profile allows it to be carried out correctly,
and after heat treatment for mechanical properties has been performed.

7.3 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

This evaluation shall be performed in accordance with MC 2300 (paragraph 13 of standard
NF EN 10228-3) and MC 2500 depending on the part type.

7.4 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Any indication with an echo amplitude  50% of the reference echo shall be recorded.
Any indication whose echo amplitude is greater than the reference echo shall be unacceptable.

M 1000 / 178  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1144

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Surfaces defects may be removed by grinding, provided the thickness remains within the part
tolerances. Defect removal is checked by means of liquid penetrant examination, in accordance
with MC 4000.
Repair by welding shall not be permitted at the pipe Manufacturer's.

9 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

The dimensions and tolerances shall conform to the purchase order requirements.
Dimensions shall be checked on all pipes.

10 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
All pipes shall be subjected to an internal pressure which is determined by means of the following
equation and which shall be maintained for at least 15 seconds:
- P = 20 S x q/D,
- S = stress in MPa equal to 40% of the minimum Rm for the grade of steel,
- q = thickness in mm,
- D = outside diameter in mm,
- P = hydrostatic test pressure in bar.
The test pressure shall be limited to 500 bar. During the test, there must be no leakage or permanent
deformation.

11 MARKING
The Supplier shall use the identification and marking methods specified in paragraphs B and
C 1300.

12 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order, and shall conform to the following
conditions:
- the ends shall be protected.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 179

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1144

13 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the pipe:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data,
- mechanical tests,
- visual examination,
- non-destructive examination,
- dimensional check,
- hydrostatic test.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and pipe reference number,
- Supplier's particular,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 1000 / 180  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1145

M 1145

PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

HOT OR COLD ROLLED CARBON STEEL PIPE WELDED

WITH THE ADDITION OF FILLER METAL FOR USE IN
CLASS 2 AND 3 AUXILIARY PIPING

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable carbon steel pipes made from hot or cold rolled plate and welded
with the addition of filler metal, up to 80 mm in thickness and not covered by a part procurement
specification.

1 BASE PRODUCTS
Plate for the manufacture of pipes shall be procured as per product procurement specification
M 1131: CLASS 1, 2 and 3 CARBON STEEL PLATES, with the exception of the requirements for
heat treatment, sampling for mechanical tests and non-destructive examinations which are defined
below. The purchase order shall indicate whether the plate is to be hot worked. In such a case, the
following chemical composition limits shall apply:
- Cu + 6 Sn  0.33% and Cu  0.18%.

2 MANUFACTURE
2.1 FORMING OF PIPES
Refer to F 4000.

2.2 WELDING
Refer to SECTION IV, with due consideration paid to the following remarks: liquid penetrant or
magnetic particle examination of the surfaces to be welded is required only for class 2 pipes thicker
than 50 mm. A visual examination of the surfaces to be welded shall be performed in all cases,
including class 3.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 181

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1145

2.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The fittings shall be subjected to normalizing heat treatment in the following cases:
- the plate is delivered in flat untreated condition,
- the plate and/or the pipe is (are) hot worked,
- the forming process qualification shows that normalizing heat treatment is required after cold
forming.

The pipes shall undergo stress-relieving heat treatment, if applicable, in accordance with the
requirements and procedure defined in SECTION IV, chapter S 1000.
Note: If a plate delivered in normalized condition is to be cold worked, stress-relieving heat treatment shall be
considered to be sufficient, on the basis of the qualification test results.

3 LOT COMPOSITION
Pipes shall be divided into lots. Lots shall be composed of pipes with the same nominal diameters
and thickness, made from the same original plate, which have been subjected to the same
manufacturing cycle. In addition, if acceptance inspection is performed on finished pipes, the lot
shall be restricted to the pipes treated in the same furnace charge or during the same heat treatment
run, in the case of a continuous treatment furnace.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 BASE METAL MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OUTSIDE WELD ZONE
A diagram in annex A indicates the various possibilities for acceptance of the base metal outside the
weld zone.

4.1.1 Required values

The values to be recorded and the results to be obtained for mechanical properties are identical to
those mentioned in product procurement specification M 1131.

4.1.2 Sampling
Tests for mechanical properties may be performed on flat plate and/or on pipes.
As far as possible, the sampling of the test specimens shall meet the requirements defined in
specification M 1131. However, no test specimen shall be located at a distance from the edge of the
sample or the coupon which is less than the thickness of the plate.

M 1000 / 182  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1145

A - MECHANICAL TESTING OF A FLAT PLATE

The test samples shall be subjected to a simulated heat treatment comprising, if required, a
simulated stress relieving heat treatment according to the requirements of M 151.
The Supplier may ask for the provisions of paragraph M 122 to be made applicable, thereby
dispensing him from performing a simulated stress-relieving heat treatment.
However, if the plate is subjected to a normalizing heat treatment, in accordance with
paragraph 2.3, a restricted acceptance test shall be performed on the pipe.

B - MECHANICAL TESTING OF PIPES

One sample shall be taken per lot from a fitting prolongation in the as-delivered condition.
If necessary, this test sample shall be subjected, in accordance with paragraph 2.3, to a simulated
heat treatment according to the requirements of M 151.
The Supplier may ask for the provisions of paragraph M 122 to be made applicable, thereby
dispensing him from performing a simulated stress-relieving heat treatment. In this case, tests shall
be performed on samples which have not been heat-treated subsequent to removal.
The Manufacturer need not comply with the requirements of paragraph 2.1, when the complete
series of mechanical tests is performed on pipes.

4.1.3 Number and content of tests

For each lot, the following shall be performed:
- one series of tests if the lot weight is less than 5 tonnes,
- two series of tests, one at each end of the flat plate or on two different fittings if the lot weight
exceeds 5 tonnes.

The complete series of tests shall consist of the following:

- one tensile test at room temperature,
- one bending test at room temperature,
- KV impact test at 0°C on test specimens taken, if possible, in the tangential direction and for
thicknesses of at least 12 mm. An impact test at - 20°C or at - 40°C shall be performed when
specified in the equipment specification or other relevant contractual documents.
- A tensile test at high temperature shall be checked when this is stipulated in the equipment
specification or other relevant contractual documents.

The restricted series of tests shall consist of the following:

- KV impact test at 0°C on KV test specimens taken, if possible, in the tangential direction and for
thicknesses of at least 12 mm. An impact test at - 20°C or at - 40°C shall be performed when
specified in the equipment specification or other relevant contractual documents.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 183

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1145

- A tensile test at high temperature when this is stipulated by the equipment specification or other
relevant contractual documents.

4.2 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES IN WELD ZONE

(DEPOSITED METAL AND HAZ)
4.2.1 Required values
Refer to SECTION IV, chapter S 3000.

4.2.2 Production coupon definition

Production coupons shall be produced as follows:
- one production coupon for the first 60 linear meters,
- one production coupon for the next 100 linear meters,

of weld for each qualified welding process, and which were subjected to the same heat treatment.

4.2.3 Sampling
The production coupons shall be located in the prolongation of the welds, welded and subjected to
heat treatment at the same time.
Test specimens shall be taken in accordance with the requirements of SECTION IV, S 3000.

4.2.4 Number and content of the tests

Refer to SECTION IV, S 7800.

4.3 RETREATMENT
If the lot of pipes is rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or several mechanical
tests, it may be retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, the test specimens shall be sampled as specified in paragraph 4.1.2. The tests to be
performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.1.3. Only one retreatment shall be
permitted.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

5.1 ON PLATES
Refer to specification M 1131.

M 1000 / 184  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1145

5.2 ON WELDS
Refer to the requirements of SECTION IV, S 7460.

5.3 ON AS-DELIVERED PIPES

External and internal surfaces shall be sound, and free from injurious defects.
Pipes shall be delivered clean, free of any oxidation.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
6.1 CLASS 2 PIPES
6.1.1 An ultrasonic examination shall be performed on parts whose thickness exceeds 12 mm, in
accordance with the requirements of specification M 1131, classes S2 and E3 plates:
- either on flat heat-treated plate,
- or on as-delivered part.

6.1.2 Welded joints are checked in accordance with chapter S 7700 of SECTION IV.

6.2 CLASS 3 PIPES

Only welded joints shall be checked in accordance with chapter S 7700 of SECTION IV.

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

7.1 PIPE OUTSIDE WELD ZONE
The only allowable defects are those which it is possible to remove by grinding within the internal
dimensional tolerances of the pipe.
Defect removal is checked by means of liquid penetrant examination, in accordance with MC 4000.

7.2 WELD ZONE

Refer to SECTION IV, chapter S 7600.

8 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

Dimensional tolerances shall apply to the whole length of the pipe.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 185

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1145

8.1 OUTSIDE DIAMETER

Based on circumference measurement: ± 0.5% of the specified outside diameter, measured at
100 mm from each end:

8.2 OVALITY

max. outside diameter - min. outside diameter

 1 %, measured at 100 mm from each end.
nominal outside diameter

8.3 STRAIGHTNESS
Measured with a 3-metre ruler, both ends of which are in contact with the pipe. Deviation from true
straightness must not exceed 3 mm.

8.4 THICKNESS
Thickness and tolerances shall be specified in the purchase order.

8.5 EDGE OFFSET

The edge offset shall not exceed 5% of the pipe wall thickness, with a maximum value of 3 mm ;
the maximum additional thickness permitted for the weld bead (see S 7460) shall be complied with.

9 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
All pipes shall be subjected to an internal pressure which is determined by means of the following
equation and which shall be maintained for at least 15 seconds:
- P = 20 S x q/D,
- S = stress in MPa equal to 40% of the minimum Rm for the grade of steel,
- q = thickness in mm,
- D = outside diameter in mm,
- P = hydrostatic test pressure in bar.

The test pressure shall be limited to 500 bar. During the test, there must be no leakage or permanent
deformation.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall use the identification and marking methods specified in paragraphs C and
D 1300.

M 1000 / 186  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1145

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Internal and external surfaces of fittings shall be descaled prior to delivery.
The purchase order shall specify whether the fittings are to be oiled or painted.
The ends of fittings shall be bevelled, deburred and protected. Other requirements for packaging
and transportation shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses, if applicable,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data,
- filler material lot acceptance,
- welding procedure qualification,
- welders and welding operators qualification,
- filler materials qualification,
- workshop qualification,
- forming procedure qualification, where applicable,
- mechanical tests,
- visual examination
- non-destructive examination,
- dimensional check,
- hydrostatic testing.

These reports shall include:

- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- heat number and part reference number,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 187

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1145

ANNEX A

ACCEPTANCE TESTING
OF BASE METAL OUTSIDE WELD

M 1000 / 188  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1146

M 1146

PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CARBON STEEL SEAMLESS TUBES

FOR CLASS S1 AND S2 SUPPORTS

0 SCOPE
These products are intended for use in the fabrication of non-pressure-retaining supports and must
satisfy the requirements of standard NFEN 10216-2 taking into consideration the following
enlargements and additional requirements which apply to the various paragraphs of said standard.

1 GENERAL AND PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS

§5 Classification and designation
Only non-alloy steel grades P235GH and P265GH shall be used.

§ 6.1 Mandatory information

Test class 2 shall be adopted for class S1 supports.

§ 6.2 Options
One KV impact test at 0°C is required.
Where hot tension testing is required at the reference temperature stipulated in the equipment
specification or other relevant contractual documents, it shall be performed in compliance with
MC 1000.
The tensile strength and residual strain values shall be recorded for information purposes.

§ 9.2.1 Document types

A type 3.1 acceptance certificate compliant with EN 10204 shall be issued.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 189

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1146

§ 10 Sampling
Where specified, mechanical tests shall be performed on test samples which have undergone
simulated stress-relieving heat treatment, the conditions of execution of which are stipulated in the
equipment specification or other relevant contractual documents. In this case, no test is performed in
the as-delivered condition.

M 1000 / 190  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1147

M 1147
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

SEAMLESS CARBON STEEL TUBES

FOR CLASS 2 AND 3 HEAT EXCHANGERS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers seamless weldable carbon steel tubes made from P265GH whose
dimensions are limited as follows:
- outside diameter up to 25 mm,
- thickness up to 3.2 mm,
which may be bent, then expanded and/or welded on heat exchanger tube plates.

1 GENERAL AND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

The selected grade corresponds to P265GH of standard NF EN 10216-2.
The requirements of NF EN 10216-2 are supplemented or modified by the following provisions in
the paragraphs in this standard.

Other dimensions may be proposed. In this case, the selected dimensions shall be submitted to the
Contractor for approval.

§ 6 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 "INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED

BY THE PURCHASER"
Acceptance tests: The test category selected for these tubes is category 2.

Drawing up of a manufacturing program in accordance with paragraph M 170.5.

Tube prototype series: Prior to procurement, the Supplier shall draw up a characterization report for
the prototype series, in accordance with the requirements of paragraph M 170, specifying the
calibration of the procedures.

§ 7.3 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 "TUBE MANUFACTURE

AND DELIVERY CONDITION"
Manufacture of the tubes
The tubes shall be cold drawn (option 1) from a seamless tubular blank.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 191

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1147

Bending
Bending shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of F 4000. Tolerances more
stringent than those defined in the supplements to paragraph 8.7.4 of the standard may be defined in
the equipment specification or other relevant contractual documents.

Heat treatment - Delivery condition

Straight tubes
Straight tubes shall undergo a normalizing heat treatment in a controlled atmosphere.

Bent tubes
The bent sections of tubes shall undergo a stress-relieving heat treatment or not, depending on the
results obtained during the bending process qualification tests conducted in accordance with F 4000.

§ 8.2 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 "Chemical composition "

Chemical composition (contents in %)
Comply with the restrictions below regarding the copper and tin content (option 2).

LADLE OR
AFNOR max. max.
PRODUCT
GRADE Cu* Sn*
ANALYSIS
Ladle 0.25 0.030
P265GH
Product 0.25 0.030
* However, the tin content may exceed 0.030 % up to a maximum of 0.040 % provided the
Cu + 10 Sn content does not exceed 0.55 %.
For tubes intended for subsequent hot forming, the copper and tin contents are also
limited by the following conditions:
Cu  0.18 %
Cu + 6 Sn  0.33 %

A product analysis shall be performed on one tube per heat (option 3).

§ 8.3 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 "Mechanical properties"

Tensile test at elevated temperature (option 6)
For class 2 tubes, calculated on the basis of the yield strength at high temperature when it is equal to
or exceeds 250°C, one test per heat shall be performed in accordance with the provisions
of MC 1000.
The tensile strength and yield strength values shall be recorded for information purposes.
The test temperature is stipulated in the equipment specification or other relevant contractual
documents.

M 1000 / 192  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1147

Hardness measurements
The HRB hardness value shall be measured in accordance with MC 1000 on the outside of the tubes,
near to one end, or on a specimen.
A series of 3 measurements per tube shall be performed on 2 tubes per lot. The values measured
shall be recorded for information purposes.

§ 8.4.1 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 "Appearance"

The text of the standard is to be replaced by the following provisions:
The visual appearance of the inner and outer surfaces must correspond to a good finish and be in
relation with the manufacturing method. A light layer of scale is permissible on the condition that it
is adherent.
The tubes shall be checked in the factory from the dimensional point of view. During this check, any
surface imperfections, such as dents, mechanical marks, pits and scars must be examined.
a) In all cases, the thickness of sound metal, under an imperfection, must remain within the
specified tolerances.
b) Any imperfection such as a flaw, overlap or line which was noted during the check must be
examined.
If the depth of the imperfection is equal to or more than 0.2 mm or exceeds 10% of the tube
thickness, it must be removed.
c) On the condition that the imperfections meet the requirements of point a) and that the finish of
the tube is in relation with the required quality, any imperfections such as dents, mechanical
marks, pits and scars shall not be removed.
Repairs must be performed by polishing locally and on the condition that the remaining thickness is
greater than the minimum permissible value. Peening and weld repairs are prohibited.

§ 8.4 2.1 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 "Leak-tightness"

The tubes shall be subject to a hydrostatic test to check for leak-tightness (option 7).

§ 8.5 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 "Straightness"

Refer to the tolerances in the supplements to paragraph 8.7.4.

§ 8.6 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 "Preparation of ends"

After cutting, the ends shall have no excess thickness and shall be correctly deburred. Small inner or
outer bevels may remain after deburring.

§ 8.7.3 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 "Lengths"

The tubes are delivered in set lengths (option 12).

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 193

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1147

§ 8.7.4 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 "Outside diameters and thicknesses"

The text of the standard is replaced by the following provisions:

Dimensional tolerances on straight tubes

a) Tolerance on the outside diameter
D  20 mm ± 0.10 mm
20 mm < D  38 mm ± 0.15 mm
38 mm < D  50 mm ± 0.25 mm
D > 50 mm ± 0.30 mm

b) Tolerance on the thickness

On the tube body:
± 9 % with a minimum of 0.20 mm
On request at the call for tenders and on purchase order, the tubes can be supplied according to a
 18 %
minimum thickness. In this case the tolerance is 0 .
If the order does not specify this point, the thickness and tolerance conditions are those provided
in a).

c) Out-of-roundness tolerance - off-centering

The tubes must have a circular profile. Out-of-roundness must not exceed the tolerances on the
outside diameter (refer to a) ). When imperfections have been have been removed by polishing,
the outside diameter can be locally less than the minimum permitted diameter on the condition
that the thickness remains within the permitted limits in b).

d) Tolerances on precise lengths (L)

 3.0 mm
L≤6m 0
 4.5 mm
6m < L ≤ 9m 0
 6.0 mm
9 m < L ≤ 12 m 0
 7.5 mm
12 m < L ≤ 15 m 0
 9.0 mm
15 m < L ≤ 18 m 0
 12.5 mm
L > 18 m 0

e) Tolerance on straightness
Local deflection:
Any local deflection measured relative to a 1-meter rule must be less than 3 mm.

Total deflection:
The total permissible deflection must be at most equal to the maximum specified below:
L < 4 m: 2 mm per meter
4 m ≤ L < 6 m: 8 mm
L ≥ 6 m: 8 mm + 1 mm per additional meter length beyond 6 m.

M 1000 / 194  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1147

Dimensional tolerances on bent tubes

- Maximum out-of-roundness in the bent sections:

max. diameter - min. diameter.

 100  7 %
nominal diameter

- Minimum thickness of outside wall at bent section:

specified e min for the tube x R

e min 
d
R
2
. d = outside tube diameter,
. R = mean bending radius.

- Tolerance applicable to the overall length of the bent section (leg + bend):  04 mm

This tolerance applies to both legs.

- Tolerance applicable to the leg spacing at the beginning of the bend, depending on the bending
diameter D, expressed in mm:
D  150 ± 1.5 mm
150 < D  500 ± 2.5 mm
500 < D  1000 ± 3.5 mm
1000 < D  1500 ± 4.5 mm
1500 < D  2000 ± 5.5 mm

§ 11.5 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 "Flaring"

The flaring test is performed in all cases. The ring expansion test is not required.

§ 11.9 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 "Dimensional inspection"

Add the following supplements:

Dimensional check of the bent sections

The geometrical dimensions of all bent sections shall be checked.

Wall thickness and out-of-roundness, however, shall be checked on the basis of five bends taken at
random in each lot of bends with the same dimensions (same diameter, tube wall thickness, bending
radius per bundle).

Note: These inspection procedures apply if the tubes are bent in large-scale runs in a specialized tube Manufacturer's
workshop. Otherwise the procedure defined in paragraph F 4165 shall be applied.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 195

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1147

§ 11.11 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 "Non-destructive examination"

The non-destructive examinations are performed by eddy current examination and ultrasonic
examination.

Eddy current examination

Procedure
Each straight tube is subject to an eddy current examination, in accordance with MC 6000. The
various signals collected during the examination shall be recorded.

Degree and time of examination

The whole length of each straight tube in the finished condition shall be checked. If the ends of the
tubes cannot be checked they shall be cropped after bending, where necessary. The length of the
cropped section shall be recorded in the inspection document.

Ultrasonic examination
Procedure
Each tube shall be subjected to ultrasonic examination in accordance with MC 2500.
The various signals collected during the examination shall be recorded.

Degree and time of examination

The whole length of each straight tube in the finished condition shall be checked. If the ends of the
tubes cannot be checked they shall be cropped after bending, where necessary. The length of the
cropped section shall be recorded in the inspection document.

Defect catalog - Rejection criteria

The rejection criteria for defects considered as unacceptable are defined from a defect catalogue set
up by the Manufacturer on the basis of the prototype series of tubes mentioned in the supplements to
paragraph 6.
The signals produced by actual defects during ultrasonic and eddy current examinations are
compared with the signals generated by the calibration notches, so as to define factor K for the
various types of defects:
Rejection criterion
=K
Calibration notch defect signal
Only tubes which give a response lower than or equal to the rejection criterion in ultrasonic or eddy
current examination shall be accepted.

Removal of unacceptable areas

Surface defects detected by a non-destructive examination may be removed by polishing, except for
a one-meter section at each end of the tube, provided that the wall thickness remains greater than the
minimum thickness.
Weld repairs are prohibited.

M 1000 / 196  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1147

Repair examination
The removal of defects shall be checked by the same non-destructive examination method that
detected them.

§ 12 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 "Marking"

Add the following supplements (option 17):
The tubes considered to be sound after the non-destructive examinations shall receive the
Manufacturer's stamp.
Furthermore, a label shall be affixed to each tube crate with the following information:
- the tube diameter and wall thickness,
- the purpose of the tubes: part reference number,
- bend identification, if applicable.

All precautions shall be taken to avoid tubes definitely rejected at the various stages of manufacture
and examination from being accidentally included in the dispatched lots.

§ 13 OF STANDARD NF EN 10216-2 "Protection"

For storage and transportation, the tubes shall be protected from shocks, dust and rainfall.
If this is stipulated in the equipment specification, the outside of the tubes shall be coated with a thin
film of oil soluble in water at temperatures below 60°C.
The ends of the tubes shall be blanked by plugs, the collar diameter of which is smaller than the
outside tube diameter.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 197

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1147

M 1000 / 198  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1148

M 1148
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

TUBES MADE FROM CARBON STEEL, HOT OR COLD

ROLLED AND WELDED WITHOUT THE ADDITION OF
FILLER METAL, STEEL GRADES TS 42 C AND TS 48 C,
FOR USE IN CLASS 2 PIPING

0 SCOPE
This specification covers the procurement of tubes which are rolled and welded longitudinally,
without the addition of filler metal, made from carbon steel grades TS42C and TS48C, and with an
outside diameter less than or equal to 168.3 mm, excluding heat exchanger tubes.

NOTE: The grades of these tubes are taken from former standard NFA 49-243.

1 PREPARATION
The steel shall be prepared in an electric furnace or using any other technically equivalent process.
The steel must be totally calmed.

2 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
2.1 REQUIRED CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
The ladle and product chemical composition must meet the conditions specified in table I.

2.2 CHECK OF THE CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

The steelmaker shall provide a ladle analysis certified by the Director of the plant or his duly
certified representative.
He shall also provide a product analysis. This analysis can be made on the metal originating from
mechanical test specimen off-cuts. This analysis is performed on one tube per lot.
The analyses are performed in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 199

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1148

TABLE I

(1)
LADLE Al (2)
C S P Mo Ni Cr Nb Ti (2) Cu(3) Sn(3)
GRADE OR Si Mn Total
max. max. max. max. max. max max max. Max. max.
PRODUCT mini.
Ladle 0.18 0.08-0.35 0.45-1.00 0.020 0.025 0.020 0.08 0.30 0.30 0.010 0.040 0.25 0.030
TS 42C
Product 0.20 0.07-0.40 0.40-1.05 0.025 0.030 0.025 0.11 0.35 0.35 0.015 0.050 0.25 0.030
Ladle 0.20 0.10-0.35 0.65-1.25 0.020 0.025 0.020 0.08 0.30 0.30 0.010 0.040 0.25 0.030
TS 48C
Product 0.22 0.09-0.40 0.60-1.30 0.025 0.030 0.025 0.11 0.35 0.35 0.015 0.050 0.25 0.030
(1) This requirement is not applicable when the steel contains a sufficient quantity of elements to fix the nitrogen present. The content
of these elements must be indicated. When the steelmaker uses titanium, the following requirement must be checked on the ladle:
(Al + Ti/2) > 0.020 %
(2) The content of these elements must be indicated only if they are added intentionally to the heat.
(3) However, the tin content may exceed 0.030 % up to a maximum of 0.040 % provided the Cu + 10 Sn content does not exceed
0.55 %. For tubes intended for subsequent hot forming, the copper and tin contents are also limited by the following conditions:
Cu  0.18 %
Cu + 6 Sn  0.33 %

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURE OF THE TUBES
The tubes shall be manufactured from slit strips, profiled with a circular cross-section and welded
longitudinally by pressure without filler metal. They can be hot or cold finished.
The weld seam must be flush on the outside of the tube and scraped on the inside. Any local over-
thickness of the internal weld seam shall comply with the dimensional tolerances indicated in
paragraph 9 of this specification.
The finished tubes must not include the end-welds produced to join the lengths of strips before
forming.
The selected welding procedure shall be subject to prior qualification in accordance with a special
program to be drawn up as per S3121.
Welding shall be performed by qualified personnel in accordance with appropriate procedures.
The ends of all the tubes shall be cut square and deburred.

3.2 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The tubes shall undergo normalizing heat treatment over the whole of their length. This treatment
shall be recorded and the record shall be made available to the inspectors.
If the tube needs to be reworked (cf. § 4.4), the new treatment shall meet the same requirements.
In case of special stress-relieving heat treatment conditions, these conditions shall be defined in the
equipment specification or other documents applicable to the contract.

M 1000 / 200  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1148

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
The required mechanical properties values are given in table II. The KV impact test criteria are
given for reduced test specimens considering the dimensions of the tubes.

TABLE II

Test REQUIRED VALUES

Type of test CHARACTERISTICS
temperature TS 42C TS 48C
Rp0.2 minimum value 255 MPa 275 MPa
Tensile in Rm 410 / 510 MPa 470 / 570 MPa
Ambient
axial direction A % minimum value in
25 23
axial direction
Tensile in
300°C (1) Rtp0.2 minimum value 157 186
axial direction
KV impact in axial Average minimum
32 J 32 J
direction on value
reduced test
specimen Individual minimum
22 J 22 J
55x10x7.5 mm (2) value (4)
0°C
KV impact in axial Average minimum
22 J 22 J
direction on value
reduced test
specimen Individual minimum
16 J 16 J
55 x 10 x 5 (3) value (4)
KV impact in Average minimum
22 J 22 J
circumferential value
direction on
reduced test Individual minimum
specimen: 16 J 16 J
value (4)
55 x 10 x 7.5 (2)
0°C
KV impact in Average minimum
15 J 15 J
circumferential value
direction on
reduced test Individual minimum
specimen 11 J 11 J
value (4)
55 x 10 x 5 (3)
(1) The tensile test at elevated temperature shall be performed when required by the equipment specification or
other relevant contractual documents, and notably if the service temperature is above 250°C.
(2) For tubes of thickness "e" such as: 8.8 < e <12.5 mm
(3) For tubes of thickness "e" such as: 6.3 < e  8.8 mm
(4) In each series of 3 test specimens, only a maximum of one result below the average minimum value is
acceptable.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 201

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1148

4.2 SAMPLING
The samples intended for the tests shall be taken from the tubes in the delivery condition. The
samples shall be taken from the ends of the tubes.
The samples for testing shall be large enough to produce the test specimens and any retest
specimens.
If retests are necessary, the samples shall be taken from near the first samples.

The test specimens shall be taken at a distance from the treated end of the tube, equal to the tube
thickness, without exceeding 40 mm.

The tensile test specimens shall be taken in the longitudinal direction relative to the tube axis. The
test specimen shall be:
- either a section of tube,
- or a longitudinal strip cut from the tube, including the total thickness of the tube; the test
specimen shall be taken opposite the weld.

The KV impact test specimens shall be taken opposite the weld.

The dimensions of the tubes permitting, reduced thickness KV impact test specimens shall be taken
perpendicular to the tube axis. The size of the reduced thickness test specimens are 7.5 x 10 mm or
5 x 10 mm. The largest possible test specimen shall be used.

If the smallest circumferential test specimen cannot be obtained, then the largest test specimen in the
axial direction shall be used.
In the case where test specimens with a minimum width of 5 mm cannot be obtained, the tubes shall
not be subject to the impact bending test.
For the KV impact failure test specimens, the notch shall be perpendicular to the skin.

4.3 TESTS TO BE PERFORMED ON THE SAMPLES REPRESENTATIVE

OF THE PART IN THE DELIVERY CONDITION
The tests shall be performed on the test specimens taken from samples which have not been subject
to any heat treatment after sampling (refer to § 4.5 of this specification).

4.3.1 Number and composition of the series of tests to be performed

The mechanical characteristics are determined per lot.
A lot is defined as being comprised of tubes produced from the same heat, with the same diameter,
the same thickness, subject to the same manufacturing cycle and forming part of the same furnace
charge or the same heat treatment campaign.

The lot is limited to:

- 200 tubes for outside diameters D ≤ 114.3 mm
- 100 tubes where 114.3 < D ≤ 168.3 mm

M 1000 / 202  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1148

The series of tests to be performed and the position of the test specimens are given in table III.

The tensile test at elevated temperature shall be performed when required by the equipment
specification or other relevant contractual documents, and notably if the service temperature is
above 250°C.

The ultimate tensile strength and elongation values for the tensile test at high temperature shall be
recorded for information purposes.
The types of test specimens and the test method shall comply with MC 1000.

TABLE III

NUMBER OF TEST
TYPE DIRECTION OF TEST
SPECIMENS PER TYPE
OF TEST SAMPLING TEMPERATURE
OF TEST

Room 2 per lot

Tensile Axial
1 per heat and heat
300 °C (1)
treatment condition
Circumferential
KV impact or 0°C 2 series per lot
Axial
Flattening 2 series per lot
Axial Room
Flaring 2 per lot
(1) If required by the equipment specification

4.3.2 Test conditions

A - TENSILE TESTS AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT ELEVATED TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimen
A test specimen shall be used with dimensions in accordance with MC 1000.

b) Testing
The tensile test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.
The recorded values shall be:
- the yield strength at 0.2 % offset in MPa,
- the ultimate tensile strength in MPa,
- the percentage elongation after failure,
- the percentage reduction of area after failure.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 203

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1148

c) Results
The results obtained must correspond to the values specified in table II.
If this is not the case, and if the test specimen has a physical defect (not affecting the usability of
the product), or if the unsatisfactory result is due to incorrect installation or abnormal operation of
the test machine, a test shall be performed on another test specimen. If the results of this test are
satisfactory, the tube lot is accepted; if this is not the case, the paragraph above is applicable.
If the results of the test are insufficient, without being ascribable to one of the cases described
above, additional tests can be carried out (on the basis of two tests for each insufficient test), and
the test specimens shall be taken from near the test specimens which produced the unsatisfactory
results. If these retests are satisfactory, the tube lot is accepted; if this is not the case, the lot shall
be rejected (cf. § 4.4).

B - KV IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen
The test is performed on three KV test specimens sampled end to end or side by side. The shape
and the dimensions of the test specimens are defined in MC 1000.

b) Testing
The test is performed in accordance with MC 1000.

c) Results
The conditions concerning the impact bending energy of rupture values specified in table II must
be met.
If one of the conditions is not met, the tube lot shall be rejected. However, if the results of the
tests are not satisfactory, only due to the fact that an individual value is below the guaranteed
minimum value, but the other conditions are met (satisfactory average, one result at most below
the guaranteed average), retests shall be performed in accordance with the following conditions:
Two series of three test specimens, sampled from near the series of test specimens which
produced insufficient results, shall be tested at the same temperature as the first series. Each of
the two series of three test specimens shall produce satisfactory results under the conditions in
§ 4.1 of this specification, otherwise the tube lot shall be rejected (cf. § 4.4 of this specification).

C - FLATTENING TEST
a) Test specimen and testing
The dimensions of the test specimen and the test conditions are specified in MC 1000. This test is
performed only for tube thicknesses equal to or less than 40 mm. Each series of tests comprises
2 tests on the same sample tube: one with the weld in the 0° position, and the other with the weld
in the 90° position relative to the flattening axis.

M 1000 / 204  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1148

The distortion coefficient K to be taken into account is given below:

GRADES K
TS 42 C 0.09
TS 48 C 0.07

b) Results
After the test, there shall be no cracking or failure of the test specimen. However, slight surface
crazing is acceptable.

D - FLARING TEST
a) Test specimen and testing
The dimensions of the test specimen and the test conditions are specified in MC 1000. By
extension to standard NF EN ISO 8493, the test shall also be performed on tube diameters equal
to or less than 168.3 mm. The test shall be performed using a conical mandrel with an apex angle
of 60° and continued until the widened outer diameter reaches the following values:

d/D (1) TS 42 C TS 48 C
≤ 0.6 1.10 D 1.08 D
0.6< d/D ≤ 0.8 1.12 D 1.10 D
> 0.8 1.17 D 1.15 D
(1) D = nominal outside diameter of the tube and
d = D - 2e (where e = nominal thickness of the tube)

b) Results
After the test, there shall be no cracking or failure of the test specimen. However, slight surface
cracks are acceptable.

4.4 REHEAT TREATMENT

In the case where the tube lot is rejected due to unsatisfactory results obtained during one or more
mechanical tests, reheat treatment can be carried out and the rework conditions must be indicated in
the report.
In this case, the test samples shall be taken in the same conditions as those specified in § 4.2 of this
specification. The series of tests to be performed is identical to that specified in § 4.3.

The number of permitted retreatment operations is limited to 2.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 205

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1148

4.5 TESTS TO BE PERFORMED ON THE SAMPLES WHICH HAVE

UNDERGONE THE SIMULATED STRESS-RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT
Acceptance must take into account the heat treatments applied to the part during its manufacture. If
the Contractor does not ask for compliance with M 122, the acceptance of the part is subject to the
requirements of this paragraph. In this case, tests are performed only in the simulated stress-
relieving heat treatment condition.

4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment

Unless otherwise specified on the order, these samples shall be subject to the simulated stress-
relieving heat treatment in accordance with the requirements of M 151.

4.5.2 Tests to be performed

The number of tests to be performed, the test specimen sampling directions and the test temperatures
are identical to those required for the tests in the delivery condition, given in table III.
The tests shall be performed on samples taken in accordance with the requirements in § 4.2 on tubes
in the delivery condition. The samples shall be subject to the simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment defined in § 4.5.1, separately in a laboratory furnace. The test conditions and the results to
be obtained are identical to those required for the samples representative of the part in the delivery
condition (refer to § 4.3).

5 TEST COUPONS
Not applicable.

6 VISUAL EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

6.1 VISUAL EXAMINATION
All the tubes shall be subject to a visual examination of the inner and outer walls.
The weld area shall be free from cracks and lack of fusion.
The outer surface of the weld seam shall be flush. After scraping, the inner surface of the weld can
have an over-thickness (refer to § 9 of this specification)
The visual appearance of the inner and outer surfaces must correspond to a good finish and be in
relation with the manufacturing process. The surface condition of the tubes must be such that it does
not affect correct performance of the non-destructive examinations.
Any imperfection deeper than 5% of the nominal thickness shall be repaired. This requirement does
not apply to imperfections equal to or less than 0.3 mm deep. Similarly, any imperfection of a
repetitive nature on the same tube or on many tubes of the same lot (on the condition that its average
depth is equal to or more than the largest of the following values): 3 % of the nominal thickness or
0.2 mm, must be repaired.

M 1000 / 206  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1148

Surface imperfections which result in a thickness below the specified minimum thickness must be
considered as defects and the tubes concerned must be considered as non-compliant.

If this examination reveals unacceptable defects, comply with the requirements in paragraph 8 of
this specification.

7 DETECTION OF INTERNAL DEFECTS

7.1 GENERAL

All the tubes with a thickness of less than 6.3 mm shall undergo either an ultrasonic examination or
a flux leakage examination.
All the tubes with a thickness equal to or more than 6.3 mm shall undergo an ultrasonic examination
supplemented by a flux leakage examination.

7.2 ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION

PROCEDURE
Each tube is examined by ultrasonics in accordance with the conditions defined in MC 2500, with
the following details:
- the ultrasonic examination is performed on tubes in the delivery condition,
- the surface condition must be in accordance with MC 2100,
- the examination is carried out in order to detect longitudinal defects in accordance with
EN 10246-7,
- the reflectors are type N notches.

In the case of tubes with an outside diameter / wall thickness ratio of less than 5, which are excluded
from the scope of the standard, the Contractor's approval is required, as specified in the standard.

DEGREE AND TIME OF EXAMINATION

The examination concerns 100% of the volume of the part.

The ends which are not completely examined on the automatic bench shall be:
- discarded, for diameters D < 88.9 mm,
- discarded or manually examined over the length of the area not initially tested plus 10 % with a
minimum of 100 mm, for diameters D ≥ 88.9 mm.

The manual examination method shall be at least as sensitive as the automatic method; the reference
tube used to adjust the sensitivity shall be the same tube as that used for the automatic examination.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 207

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1148

EVALUATION OF THE INDICATIONS

The evaluation is performed in accordance with MC 2500.
- For cold finished tubes: the severity level is defined in MC 2534-2,
- For hot finished tubes: the severity level is U2, sub-category C, of standard NF EN 10246-7, i.e.
5% of the thickness of the tube with a minimum of 0.3 mm.

ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
The acceptance criteria are given in paragraph 6 of standard NF EN 10246-7.
Suspect tubes are covered by paragraph 8 "Removal of faulty areas" of this specification.

7.3 FLUX LEAKAGE EXAMINATION

PROCEDURE
The tube is examined by flux leakage in accordance with the conditions defined in standard
NF EN 10246-5 with the following details:
- The examination is performed by certified personnel, in accordance with MC 8000.
- The flux leakage examination is performed on tubes in the delivery condition.
- For the grades in question, the master tube can be of any grade as long as it is at least 4% alloyed.
- Calibration is carried out on internal and external longitudinal notches with the external notch in
the weld.
- The depth of the notches corresponds to severity level F2, i.e. 5% of the thickness of the tube
with a minimum of 0.3 mm.

DEGREE AND TIME OF EXAMINATION

The examination concerns 100% of the volume of the part.
Any tube end which is not completely examined shall be discarded.

ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
Any confirmed indication with an amplitude equal to or more than the reference amplitude of the
master notch is unacceptable.
Suspect tubes are covered by paragraph 8 "Removal of faulty areas" of this specification.

M 1000 / 208  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1148

8 REMOVAL OF FAULTY AREAS

No weld repairs are permitted at the tube manufacturer's plant.

8.1 AFTER VISUAL EXAMINATION

Surface imperfections can be removed only by grinding or machining as long as the thickness after
repair remains greater than the minimum specified thickness. All ground areas must be within the
tube profile.

8.2 AFTER EXAMINATION OF THE INTERNAL SOUNDNESS OF THE TUBE

Suspect areas can be removed either by cropping or by grinding or sanding to the extent where the
remaining thickness and length of the tube are greater than the ordered dimensions. All ground areas
must be within the tube profile.
After total grinding of the suspect area, the tube must be reexamined with all the non-destructive
acceptance examinations.

9 DIMENSIONS - TOLERANCES
Unless otherwise specified on the order, the dimensions and tolerances are those given in
NF EN 10217-2

The weld seam on the inner surface can have an over-thickness with a maximum height limited to
the following values:
D ≤ 76.1 and T ≤ 3.6; over-thickness ≤ 0.15 mm
D > 76.1 and T > 3.6; over-thickness ≤ 0.25 mm

The dimensions shall be checked on each tube.

10 HYDROSTATIC TEST
Each tube shall be subject to a hydrostatic test in accordance with the "hydrostatic test" paragraph of
standard NF EN 10217-2.

11 MARKING
The Supplier shall comply with the requirements in paragraph C 1300 concerning the identification
and individual marking of tubes.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 209

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1148

12 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORT

The conditions are to be defined on the order.

13 REPORTS
As the tests are performed, and in any case before delivery, the Supplier shall draw up the following
reports:
- the ladle and product chemical analysis per lot,
- the heat treatment certificate specifying the diameter of the tubes treated (including any eventual
reheat treatment),
- the mechanical tests,
- the visual examination,
- the non-destructive examination,
- the dimensional check,
- the hydrostatic tests,
- the welding procedure qualification and operator qualification reports.

These reports shall include:

- the heat number and the identification of the tubes,
- the Supplier's particulars,
- the purchase order number,
- the particulars of the acceptance organization,
- the results of the tests and retests, together with the required values.

M 1000 / 210  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1149

M 1149

PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

HOT OR COLD WORKED CARBON STEEL

WELD FITTINGS FOR USE
IN SECONDARY AND AUXILIARY PIPING

0 SCOPE
This specification covers carbon steel weld fittings of:
- hot or cold worked sheet,
- hot or cold worked seamless or welded rolled pipe,
of thickness less than or equal to 80 mm not covered by a part procurement specification.

The following is an example of the type of fitting concerned:

- curves,
- tees,
- reducers,
- heads,
- branches,
- extruded manifolds, etc.
They contain no welds other than those which might exist on the base products.

1 BASE PRODUCTS
1.1 Weld fittings for Feedwater Flow Control, Auxiliary Feedwater and Turbine Bypass
systems for the Main Secondary System defined in A 4222. The pipes used are procured in
accordance with technical specification M 1152 "TYPE P 280 GH SEAMLESS CARBON
STEEL PIPES".

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 211

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1149

1.2 Class 2 fittings other than those defined in A 4222.

1.2.1 Class 1 and 2 plates used for the manufacture of fittings shall be procured in accordance
with product procurement specification M 1131: "CLASS 1, 2 and 3 CARBON STEEL
PLATES", with the exception of the requirements for heat treatment, insofar as the fittings Supplier
shall be required to perform normalizing treatment on the fittings in delivery condition in
accordance with the requirements of paragraph 2.2.

1.2.2 Class 2 pipes used for the manufacture of fittings shall be procured in accordance with one
of the following specifications, depending on the type and character of the base product (seamless
pipe or welded rolled pipe) and the standard of quality:

- M 1141: " CLASS 2 SEAMLESS PIPE MADE FROM TYPE TU 42 C OR TU 48 C

CARBON STEEL",
- M 1145: " HOT OR COLD ROLLED CARBON STEEL PIPE WELDED WITH THE
ADDITION OF FILLER MATERIAL FOR USE IN CLASS 2 AND 3
AUXILIARY PIPING",
- M 1148: " TYPE TS 42 C AND TS 48 C HOT OR COLD ROLLED CARBON STEEL
PIPES WELDED WITHOUT THE ADDITION OF FILLER METAL FOR USE
IN CLASS 2 PIPING".

with the exception of the requirements of final heat treatment insofar as the fittings Supplier shall
be required to perform normalizing heat treatment on the fittings in delivery condition in
accordance with the requirements of paragraph 2.2.

2 MANUFACTURE
2.1 FORMING
Fittings may be hot or cold worked.

2.2 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Fittings shall be subjected to normalizing heat treatment when:
- the base product (plate or pipe) is delivered in non-heat-treated condition,
- the fitting is hot worked,
- the cold deformation coefficient is greater than 5%.

3 LOT COMPOSITION
Fittings shall be divided into lots consisting of parts:
- of the same type,
- of the same nominal dimension,

M 1000 / 212  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1149

- which have been subjected to the same manufacturing cycle,

- made from the same base material.

For feedwater flow control, auxiliary feedwater and turbine bypass system fittings defined in
A 4222, the lot shall be restricted to:
- 50 fittings for feedwater flow control system and turbine bypass system,
- 100 fittings for auxiliary feedwater system.

For fittings other than those defined in A 4222, the lot shall be restricted to:
- 100 fittings of dia.  114.3 mm and thickness < 12.5 mm,
- 50 fittings of dia. > 114.3 mm or thickness  12.5 mm.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Required values for mechanical properties are identical to those guaranteed and verified for initial
production parts in accordance with the corresponding product procurement specifications.

4.2 SAMPLING
As far as possible, the removal of test specimens shall meet the requirements defined in the product
procurement specification. However, no test specimen shall be located at a distance from the edge
of the sample or the coupon which is less than the nominal thickness of the plate.

4.2.1 Fittings for auxiliary feedwater system and fittings with a diameter
less than or equal to 114.3 mm
Test samples shall be taken from a coupon cut from the original plate or pipe which has been
subjected to the same manufacturing heat treatment cycle as the fittings of the lot represented.

4.2.2 Fittings for feedwater flow control system, turbine bypass system and
fittings with a diameter greater than 114.3 mm
Test samples shall be taken from one fitting of the lot, or from a prolongation provided for this
purpose.

4.3 MECHANICAL TESTING OF FITTINGS

One sample shall be taken per lot from a coupon or fitting in accordance with the requirements of
paragraph 4.2 depending on the dimensions of the fittings.
If necessary, this sample shall be subjected to simulated stress-relieving heat treatment which shall
take into account more than 80% of the aggregate time of heat treatment actually performed during
manufacture and fabrication, plus allowance for manufacturing variables. A furnace record shall be
made of the heat treatment cycle.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 213

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1149

Pipe acceptance tests for feedwater flow control system fittings shall be performed on samples
which have been subjected to simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
The Supplier may ask for the requirements of paragraph M 122 to be made applicable, thereby
dispensing him from performing tests after the simulated stress-relieving heat treatment. In this
case, tests shall be performed on samples which have not been heat-treated subsequent to removal.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

One series of tests shall be performed on each lot.
The complete series of tests shall consist of the following:
- one tension test at room temperature,
- one KV impact test for parts at least 12 mm thick,
- one high-temperature tension test per heat where stipulated in the reference technical
specification for the base product, in the equipment specification or other relevant contractual
documents.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A- TENSION TEST AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimen
Test specimen with a circular section and dimensions in accordance with the requirements
of MC 1000 shall be used.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction in area after fracture where checked on base products.

c) Results
Results obtained shall conform to the values prescribed in paragraph 4.1. If this is not the case
and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the usefulness of the product),
or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the specimen or a testing
machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If the results of the
second test are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, the following subparagraph
shall apply.

M 1000 / 214  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1149

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be removed from a location adjacent to that of the first test specimens. If the
results of the retests are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted: if not, the lot shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

B - KV IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen
The test shall be performed using three test specimens taken from adjacent locations. The shape
and size of specimens shall be as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000. It shall only be performed on fittings
of wall thickness  12 mm.

c) Results
If one of the requirements is not met, the part shall be rejected. However, if test results are only
unsatisfactory because one result is less than the minimum specified value and all the other
results are satisfactory (satisfactory average with one result less than the minimum required
value), retests performed in accordance with the following requirements shall be authorized:
2 sets of 3 specimens taken from a location adjacent to that of the first set of specimens which
provided unsatisfactory results shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. Each of the
two sets of three test specimens shall meet the requirements of paragraph 4.1: if not, the lot shall
be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Lots defined on the basis of unsatisfactory results obtained from one or more mechanical tests may
be retreated. Retreatment methods shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be removed in accordance with the requirements of
paragraph 4.2. Tests performed shall be those specified in paragraph 4.3. Only one retreatment shall
be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

5.1 FITTING SURFACES
All surfaces shall be carefully examined to verify that the metal is sound. All accessible surfaces of
parts shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final stage in accordance with MC 7100.
Internal and external surfaces of the fitting shall have a workmanlike finish for the fabrication
process and heat treatment methods used.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 215

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1149

Fittings shall be sound and free from cracks, tears, blisters, laps, slivers, or any other injurious
defect. If any of the above-mentioned defects are detected during examination, acceptance of
fittings shall be subject to the requirements of paragraph 7 of this specification. If any doubt arises,
fittings shall undergo liquid penetrant examination in accordance with MC 4000.

The criteria to fulfil shall be those required by the product procurement specification for the initial
product.

5.2 FINISHING OF ENDS

Ends of fittings shall be finished in accordance with the indications given in the purchase order.

5.3 PROTECTION
Protection methods for fittings shall be specified in the purchase order.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Base products constituting fittings shall be subjected to ultrasonic examination, in the as-treated
condition. The conditions of this examination and the criteria to be respected shall be those required
by the product procurement specification for the initial production part.
If this examination is performed on a finished fitting, it shall not be necessary to examine the base
product which may therefore be delivered without heat treatment for mechanical properties
(see paragraph 1.1).

7 ELIMINATION OF DEFECTS
Defects such as cracks, laps, slivers, etc., detected during the visual examination shall be probed.
If their depth does not exceed 5% of the nominal thickness (with a minimum of 0.3 mm), they may
be tolerated without being repaired, provided the defects are not grouped together or frequent.
Beyond this threshold, defects shall be eliminated by grinding or machining. If defect elimination
reduces the thickness of the remaining sound metal to less than the minimum permissible thickness,
taking account of tolerances, the fitting shall be rejected.
For feedwater flow control, auxiliary feedwater and turbine bypass system fittings defined in
A 4222, elimination of defects shall be checked through liquid penetrant examination as defined in
MC 4000.
Requirements to be met are those stipulated in the original product reference technical specification.
Other defects such as marks, mechanical marks, abrasions and pits shall not be repaired.
However, the wall thickness must remain within permissible tolerances, and the number of defects
shall be such that the finish of the fitting is of the required quality.
Peening and welding repair of surface defects shall not be permitted.

M 1000 / 216  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1149

8 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

Dimensions and tolerances shall be in conformance with the purchase order requirements.

9 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
Fittings shall not be hydrostatically tested unless otherwise stipulated in the equipment
specification. However, the Supplier must guarantee the pressure-retaining characteristics of the
fittings in accordance with the requirements of the equipment specification.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall meet the requirements for identification and marking specified in chapters B
and C 1300.
Fittings for feedwater flow control, auxiliary feedwater and turbine bypass systems shall be
individually marked.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Internal and external surfaces of fittings shall be descaled prior to delivery.
The purchase order shall specify whether the fittings are to be oiled or painted.
The ends of fittings shall be bevelled, deburred and protected. Other requirements for packaging
and transportation shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the fittings:

a) Base products
- base product acceptance report,
- non-destructive examinations.

b) Fittings
- heat treatment certificate,
- mechanical tests,
- visual examination,
- dimensional check,
- hydrostatic test or supporting file.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 217

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1149

These reports shall include:

- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency,
- heat number and identification number of the part,
- test and retest results, together with required values.

M 1000 / 218  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1151

M 1151

PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

HOT OR COLD WORKED CARBON STEEL

WELD FITTINGS FOR USE
IN CLASS 3 PIPING

0 SCOPE
This specification covers procurement for hot or cold worked carbon steel weld fittings.

1 GENERAL AND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

These fittings shall be procured in accordance with the requirements of the following standards:
- NF A 49-281 for fittings manufactured from weldless tubular blanks (grade AE 220 or AE 250),
- NF A 49-285 for elliptical heads (grade A 37 CP or A 42 CP).

The requirements of these standards shall be applied in full. Moreover, the following indications
shall be added to the following paragraphs of the standard:

a) NF A 49-281, paragraph 2.3 - NF A 49-285, paragraph 1.2 :

Pressure and temperature
P  50 bar,
θ  250°C.

b) NF A 49-281, paragraph 10.4 (additional tests):

- fittings with diameter > 114.3 mm.
A tensile test shall be performed per part lot according to the requirements of
paragraph 10.4.2.
Where a lot contains 25 or fewer parts, the tensile test may be performed on the straight
prolongation of an adjacent part, or on a test coupon from the tubular blank and which has
been subjected to the same manufacturing heat and heat treatment cycles as the parts of
the lot.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 219

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1151

- fittings with diameter  114.3 mm

A tensile test shall be performed per part lot, on the straight prolongation of an adjacent part,
or on a test coupon from the tubular blank and which has been subjected to the same
manufacturing heat and heat treatment cycles as the parts of the lot.
The tensile test defined above can be replaced by a micrographic examination performed per
part lot, according to the requirements of paragraph 10.4.3.
If this is the case, a hardness test shall be performed for each part, according to the
requirements of paragraph 10.4.6.

M 1000 / 220  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1152

M 1152
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

TYPE P280 GH SEAMLESS

CARBON STEEL PIPES

0 SCOPE
This specification deals with seamless type P 280 GH carbon steel pipes, for use in steam generator
feedwater flow control and auxiliary feedwater systems and for turbine bypass systems.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
He shall also provide a product analysis. This analysis may be performed on metal discard from
mechanical test specimens. An analysis shall be made on each pipe per lot.
The analyses shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 221

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1152

TABLEAU I

CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS IN PERCENTAGES

FOR LADLE AND PIPE ANALYSES

LADLE OR
AFNOR max. max. max. max. max. max. max. max. max.
PRODUCT Si Mn A
GRADE C S P Cu(1) Sn(1) Ni Cr(3) Mo Ceq(2)
ANALYSIS
0,10/ 0.80/ 0.020/
Ladle 0.20 0.015 0.020 0.25 0.030 0.50 0.25 0.10 0.48
P 280 0.35 1.60 0.050
GH 0.10/ 0.80/ 0.020/
Product 0.22 0.020 0.025 0.25 0.030 0.50 0.25 0.10 0.48
0.40 1.60 0.050
(1) However, the tin content may exceed 0.030% to a maximum of 0.040% provided that the Cu + 10 Sn content
does not exceed 0.55%.
For pipes which will be subsequently hot-worked, the copper and tin contents shall be limited by the following
requirement :
Cu  0.18 %
Cu + 6 Sn  0.33 %
(2) Ceq = C + Mn/6 + (Cr + Mo + V) / 5 + (Ni + Cu) / 15
(3) The maximum imposition for feedwater flow control system is replaced by a minimum imposition of 0.15%.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencing manufacturing operations, the pipe Manufacturer shall draw up a
manufacturing programme comprising, in chronological order, all the manufacturing stages and in
which all intermediary and final heat treatment, surface finish and non-destructive examination
operations are described.

3.2 MANUFACTURING OF PIPES

The rounds and/or billets which are to be used for manufacturing pipes shall be taken from ingots
from which sufficient top and bottom end discard has been removed. The overall ratio of reduction
shall be greater than or equal to 3.
Pipes shall be manufactured using a weld-less process. Pipes may be hot or cold finished.
All pipes shall have their ends cut square and deburred.

3.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The pipes shall be delivered in the normalized condition as specified below.

NORMALIZED CONDITION

Temperature 890 to 940 °C

Holding time : 1 minute per mm in thickness
for a minimum time of 30 min
Method of cooling : still air.

M 1000 / 222  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1152

Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

If the pipe is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II below.

TABLE II

NAME OF TEST REQUIRED VALUES

PROPERTIES
TEST TEMPERATURE P 280 GH
Tension Room Rp0,2 minimum value 275 MPa
Rm 470/570 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 21

300°C Rt0,002 minimum value 186 MPa

Rm minimum value 423 MPa

Minimum average value (1) 60 J

KV impact 0°C (2)
Minimum individual value 40 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value shall be acceptable for each set of
three test specimens
(2) In the feedwater flow control system, the energy absorbed by breakage test temperature is
-20°C
Note :. The value of the product of Rm (A - 2) must be greater than 10 500.

Where reduced section impact samples are used, the values to be obtained are shown in the
following table:

REQUIRED VALUES
LONGITUDINAL KV IMPACT TEST AT 0 °C – MINIMUM ENERGY ABSORBED
BY BREAKAGE IN J
55 mm x 10 mm x 7.5 mm 55 mm x 10 mm x 5 mm
Size specimen
for pipes 8.8 < e <12.5 mm 6.3 < e  8.8 mm
AFNOR Average for Minimum Average for Minimum
grade 3 specimens 1 specimen 3 specimens 1 specimen

P 280 GH 45 30 30 20

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 223

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1152

4.2 SAMPLING
The test samples shall be taken from pipes in the as-delivered condition. Samples shall be taken
from pipe ends.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
In the event of retests, the samples required shall be taken from a location close to the area from
which the first samples were taken.
Where the dimensions of the pipe so permit, tension and impact test specimens shall be taken
circumferentially, i.e in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the pipe.
In other cases, the tension and impact tests specimens shall be taken axially, i.e with their centreline
parallel to the axis of the pipe.
In all other cases, test specimens axis shall be located at mid-thickness of the pipe.
For impact test specimens, the notches shall be perpendicular to the skin.
The test specimens shall be taken at a distance from the treated end of the pipe at least equal to the
thickness of the pipe wall, without exceeding 40 mm.

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling (see paragraph 4.5).

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

Tests for mechanical properties shall be performed per lot.
The term lot applies to pipes produced from the same heat, having the same diameter and wall
thickness, having been subjected to the same manufacturing cycle and forming part of the same
furnace charge or the same set of heat treatments.
A lot shall be restricted to:
- 50 pipes for feedwater flow control and turbine bypass systems,
- 100 pipes for auxiliary feedwater systems.
Flattening and flaring tests shall be performed for each pipe.
The test series to be performed and the orientation of test specimens are shown in table III.

M 1000 / 224  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1152

TABLEAU III

NUMBER OF TEST
NAME ORIENTATION OF TEST
SPECIMENS
OF TEST TEST SPECIMEN TEMPERATURE
PER TYPE OF TEST
Circumferential room 1 per lot
Tension or
axial 300°C 1 per lot

Circumferential
KV Impact or 0°C (1) 3 per lot
axial

Flattening test 1 per tube

Axial Room
Flaring test 1 per tube (2)
(1) For feedwater flow control system, impact test temperature is - 20°C
(2) For auxiliary feedwater system only

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
The dimensions of the test specimens used shall comply with MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II .
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the lot of the pipes shall be accepted: if not, the
following paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the lot of the pipes shall be accepted: if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 225

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1152

B- IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens
The test shall be performed on three KV impact test specimens taken from adjacent locations.
The shape and dimensions of these specimens shall be as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

c) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements shown in table II must be met.
The lot of the pipes shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements. However,
where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the required
minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no more than
one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with the
following procedure:
- Two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall be tested at the
same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do
not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the lot of the pipes shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

C - FLATTENING TEST
a) Test specimen and test method
The size of the specimen and the test procedure are given in MC1000.
Deformation factor K is 0.08.

b) Results
There shall be no crack or fracture on the surface of the test specimen subsequent to testing.
However, slight superficial cracks are allowable. If more than 10% of the pipes prove to be
defective, the entire lot shall be rejected.

D - FLARING TEST
a) Test specimen and test method
The size of the specimen and the test procedure are given in MC1000.
The test shall be performed until the outside diameter reaches an expansion of 18%.

b) Results
There shall be no cracks or tears on the surface of the pipe subsequent to testing.
Result shall be interpreted in the same way as for the flattening test in paragraph C.

M 1000 / 226  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1152

4.4 RETREATMENT
Pipes rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be sampled as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed
shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3. No more than one retreatment shall be
allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS RELIEVING TREATMENT
The acceptance tests shall take into account all heat treatments to which the pipe is subjected during
manufacture. If the Manufacturer does not request application of paragraph M 122, acceptance tests
of the lot of the pipes shall comply with the requirements of this paragraph. In such cases, no as-
delivered tests shall be performed but the samples shall be subjected, separately in a laboratory
furnace, to simulated stress relieving heat treatment.
Acceptance tests of feedwater flow control system pipes shall be carried out on test samples which
have undergone simulated stress relieving heat treatment.

4.5.1 Simulated stress relieving heat treatment

Unless otherwise specified in the purchase order, these test specimens shall undergo the simulated
stress-relieving heat treatment according to the requirements of M 151.
Nominal holding temperature shall be 605°C, for a time calculated on the basis of 6 min per mm in
thickness, with a minimum of two hours.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The number of tests, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet the
requirements specified in table III for tests performed on as-delivered parts.
Samples for these tests shall be taken in accordance with paragraph 4.2 on as-delivered pipes.
Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected
to normalizing heat treatment only (see paragraph 4.3).

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

Not applicable.

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 227

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1152

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be examined carefully during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. All surfaces of the part which are accessible at the final stage shall be
subjected to a visual examination in accordance with MC 7100.
Internal and external surfaces of pipes shall have a workmanlike finish for the fabrication process.
Pipes shall be sound and free from cracks, tears, blisters, laps, slivers, or any other injurious defect.
If any of the above-mentioned defects are detected during examination, acceptance of the pipe shall
be subject to the requirements of paragraph 8 of this specification. If any doubt arises, the pipes
shall undergo liquid penetrant examination, in accordance with MC 4000.

EXAMINATION CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications in a line separated by less than 3 mm (edge to edge),
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
7.1 PROCEDURE
Each straight pipe shall be subjected to ultrasonic examination in accordance with the requirements
of MC 2500 and with the additional requirements taken into account:
- ultrasonic examination shall be performed on pipes in the as-delivered condition
- surface condition shall comply with the requirements of MC 2100,
- angle-beam examination shall be used to detect longitudinal and transverse defects in auxiliary
piping,
Probe frequency shall normally be 4 MHz.

M 1000 / 228  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1152

7.2 DEGREE AND TIME OF EXAMINATION

The examination shall concern the whole volume of the pipe.
Ends which have not been properly examined using the automatic test unit shall either be discarded
or manually examined over at least 100 mm. The manual examination method shall be at least as
sensitive as the automatic method: the reference pipe used to adjust the sensitivity shall be the same
as that used for the automatic examination.

7.3 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

This evaluation shall be performed in accordance with MC 2500.

7.4 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any indication with an echo amplitude  50% of the reference echo shall be recorded.
Any indication whose echo amplitude is greater than the reference echo shall be unacceptable.

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Surfaces defects may be removed by grinding, provided the thickness remains within the part
tolerances. Defect removal is checked by means of liquid penetrant examination, in accordance with
MC 4000.
Repair by welding shall not be permitted at the pipe Manufacturer's.

9 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

The dimensions and tolerances shall conform to the purchase order and meet the requirements of
standard NF EN 10216-2.
Dimensions shall be checked on all pipes.

10 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
All pipes shall be subjected to an internal pressure which is determined by means of the following
equation and which shall be maintained for at least 15 seconds:
- P = 20 S x q/D,
- S = stress in MPa equal to 40% of the minimum Rm for the grade of steel,
- q = thickness in mm,

 n° 137-2012 M 1000 / 229

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 1152

- D = outside diameter in mm,

- P = hydrostatic test pressure in bar.
The test pressure shall be limited to 500 bar. During the test, there must be no leakage or permanent
deformation.

11 MARKING
The Supplier shall use pipe identification and individual marking methods specified in paragraphs
B and C 1300.

12 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order, and shall conform to the following
conditions:
- the ends shall be protected.

13 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the pipe:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data,
- mechanical tests,
- visual examination,
- non-destructive examination,
- dimensional check,
- hydrostatic test.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and pipe correspondence reference number,
- Supplier's particular,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 1000 / 230  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111

M 2111

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM ALLOY STEEL

FORGINGS FOR PRESSURIZED WATER
NUCLEAR REACTOR SHELLS
IN THE BELTLINE REGION

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable manganese-nickel-molybdenum alloy steel forgings for
pressurized water nuclear reactor shells in the beltline region.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, it shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-
degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
In addition, he shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of the ingot and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom of the ingot.
These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 1
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 16 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Max. Carbon 0.20 0.22

Manganese 1.15 - 1.55 1.15 - 1.60
Max. Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Max. Sulphur 0.005 0.005
Silicon 0.10 - 0.30 0.10 - 0.30
Nickel 0.50 - 0.80 0.50 - 0.80
Max. Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 - 0.55 0.43 - 0.57
Max. Vanadium 0.01 0.01
Max Copper 0.08 0.08
Aluminium Max. – 0.04
Preferred Max. 0.04 –
Max. Cobalt 0.03 0.03

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of the part in the ingot,
- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and
overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

M 2000 / 2  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2111

3.2 FORGING
Sufficient discard, 13% from the top and 7% from the bottom of the ingot shall be cut-off to ensure
elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A record of ingot weight and discard
percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance Agents.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough-machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic examination.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The part shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat treatment
for mechanical properties shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling. Nominal holding temperature for tempering shall be between 635°C and 665°C.

Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. Thermocouple

locations shall be specified in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

3.5 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.

The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 3
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical properties requirements are shown in table II.

TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED VALUE

OF TEMPERATURE PROPERTIES CIRCUMFERENTIAL
TEST in °C DIRECTION
Room Rp0.2 minimum value 400 MPa
Rm 550/670 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20
Tension

350 Rtp0.2 minimum value 300 MPa

Rm minimum value 497 MPa
TRANSVERSE LONGITUDINAL

0 Minimum average value 80 J 80 J

Minimum individual value (1) 60 J 60 J

KV Impact – 20 Minimum average value 40 J 56 J

Minimum individual value (1) 28 J 40 J

+ 20 Minimum individual value 104 J 120 J

(1) Only one result below the minimum average value may be accepted per series of three test specimens.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from two test rings constituted by prolongations adjacent to the part.
One of these prolongations shall be on the ingot bottom side and the other on the top side. Two test
samples, X and Y, shall be taken from each test ring at two diametrically opposed locations. The
test specimen sampling directions are given in table III.
Samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been heat treated for mechanical properties: they
shall be clearly identified and their direction of maximum extension shall be indicated.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
The test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their centreline is at one quarter of the shell
thickness, from the inside face.
The test-pertinent areas of the test specimens shall be located at a distance from the free end of the
shell not smaller than the thickness of the part. To meet this requirement, the Supplier is allowed to
protect the top and bottom ends of the shell by means of a thermal buffer, the height of which is at
least equal to the thickness of the shell, as shown on diagram 2 appended to this specification. This
thermal buffer, the width of which shall at least equal the thickness of the shell, shall be welded
to the part.

M 2000 / 4  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111

The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be oriented radially.

A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme
(see paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown
in table III: "As-delivered tests".

4.3.2 Additional impact tests

In order to determine how the product energy absorbed by breakage varies with temperature, in
addition to impact tests at - 20°C, 0°C and + 20°C, three tests will be performed at - 40°C, three
at + 40°C and three at - 60°C, and if required three more tests shall be performed at + 60°C in order
to ascertain the shape of the curve. These tests shall be performed on specimens taken from one
sample of the bottom ring, in the transverse direction.

4.3.3 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
The test specimen used shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 5
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111

TABLE III

M 2000 / 6  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS AND PLOTTING THE DUCTILE-TO-BRITTLE TRANSITION CURVE

a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. The temperatures for additional tests
used to plot the ductile-to-brittle transition curve shall be those indicated in paragraph 4.3.2.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table II must
be fulfilled.
c) Tests at 0°C

The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements.
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens
shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three
test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be
rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Tests at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part shall
be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).
If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required in
paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 7
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for the three additional tests performed at
+ 40°C (see paragraph 4.3.2). If the requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the
part shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The number of tests, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet the
requirements specified in table III: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment".
One or two samples for these tests shall be taken from the bottom test ring (see paragraph 4.2) after
the part has undergone heat treatment for mechanical properties.
Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected
to heat treatment for mechanical properties only (see paragraph 4.3).
The additional impact tests mentioned in paragraph 4.3.2 shall be performed on the one or two
samples which have been subjected to simulated stress-relieving heat treatment. Tests
corresponding to the same sampling and thermal condition as those in table A1, if applicable, may
be used.

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

M 2000 / 8  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be examined carefully during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to a visual examination at the
final stage in accordance with MC 7100.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination shall be
performed on surfaces to be clad.
The examination procedures are those given in MC 4000 or MC 5000.

CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination
- any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
- are unacceptable:
1) linear indications,
2) rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
3) 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
4) 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications
being evaluated.

Magnetic particle examination

- any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
- are unacceptable:
1) linear indications,
2) non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
3) 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.

When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 9
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed after final machining of the part or at as advanced a stage as
possible for portions which cannot be examined in finished form.

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe characteristics are usually as follows:
- for straight beam examination: probe frequency 3 to 4 MHz,
- for angle beam examination: probe frequency 2 MHz, refraction angle 45°.

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 3b.
As a deviation from standard NF EN 10228-3 prescriptions, examination shall be performed in the
axial direction, from both ends over half the height of the part plus 10%.

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in method DGS in
standard NF EN 10228-3.

M 2000 / 10  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.
After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000.
The criteria to be applied are those defined in paragraph 6 of the present specification.

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
After heat treatment
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data: for parts which have been retreated this includes
recordings of all heat treatments,
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 11
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111

- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 2000 / 12  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2111

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

AND UPPER SHELF KV ENERGY

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed on the bottom test ring where required by equipment
specifications or other relevant contractual documents.

- KV TRANSITION CURVE
The longitudinal axis of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the inner face of the
wall equal to a quarter of the wall thickness.
The test-pertinent area of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the quenched end
equal to the thickness of the part. For this requirement to be met, the bottom end of the part may be
protected by a thermal buffer, the height of which at least equals the thickness of the part. This
buffer may be welded to the part.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the surface.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Each series of test will consist in the fracture of three test specimens.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value shall be recorded for information purposes.

RESULTS
The transition curve is plotted for information purposes only.

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph, with the following
exceptions:
- the specimens must be taken in HTMP + SSRHT condition,
- the specimens must be taken in the axial orientation of the part,
- the notch axes must be parallel to the surface.

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 13
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111

- DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact tests.
The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.
The longitudinal axis of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the inner face of the
wall equal to a quarter of the wall thickness.
The Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be cut out within the area between the quarter inner
quarter and half the thickness of the shell.
The test-pertinent area of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the quenched end
equal to the thickness of the part.

For this requirement to be met, the bottom end of the part may be protected by a thermal buffer, the
height of which at least equals the thickness of the part. This buffer may be welded to the part.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the surface.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given
in table A1.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Each series of test will consist in the fracture of three test specimens.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.
Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape
and dimensions of test specimens, as well as test procedures are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to – 20 °C.

M 2000 / 14  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111

TABLE A1

NAME CONDITION ORIENTATION TEST NUMBER NUMBER OF

OF OF OF TEMPERA- OF TEST SPECI-
TEST SPECIMENS SPECIMEN TURE IN °C LOTS MENS PER LOT
"AS-DELIVERED" TESTS

Ductile -to
brittle tran-
HTMP L (1) 1 24
sition curve
(KV impact)
TESTS PERFORMED AFTER SIMULATED STRESS RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT

Ductile-to HTMP + SSRHT L (1) 1 24

brittle tran-
sition curve
(KV impact)
 1 8
Ductile-to- HTMP + SSRHT T (2) 2 
brittle tran-  1 7
sition curve
(KV impact)

RTNDT
Pellini HTMP + SSRHT C (3) 2 4
KV impact HTMP + SSRHT T (3) 2 9

Key:

HTMP = heat treatment for mechanical properties

SSRHT = simulated stress relieving heat treatment

C = circumferential

L = longitudinal

T = transverse

(1) Each ductile-to-brittle transition curve shall be plotted on the basis of 8 temperatures, which must include
- 20°C, - 10°C, 0°C, + 10°C, + 20°C. The remaining three temperatures shall be chosen from outside the
- 20°C to - 20°C range and specifically one each on the upper (100% fibrous fracture) and lower (less than
10% fibrous fracture) shelves in order to obtain as complete a curve as possible.

(2) The tests shall be performed at 5 temperatures one of which must be 0°C : the shape of the upper shelf of the
curve should be defined as accurately as possible.

(3) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000.

Note: Sample results required in table III and in paragraphs 4.3.2 and 4.5.2 which correspond to the same
sampling heat treatment may be used.

When one set of test specimens is called for, it can be taken from any sample.

When two sets of test specimens are called for, one of them shall be taken per sample.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 15
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111

ANNEX 2 TO SPECIFICATION M 2111

CYLINDRICAL SHELL

POSITION OF TEST METAL

ORIENTATION OF TEST SPECIMENS FOR MECHANICAL TESTING

M 2000 / 16  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111 Bis

M 2111 Bis

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM ALLOY STEEL

FORGINGS FOR PRESSURIZED WATER
NUCLEAR REACTOR SHELLS
IN THE BELTLINE REGION OBTAINED
FROM HOLLOW INGOTS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable manganese-nickel-molybdenum alloy steel forgings for
pressurized water nuclear reactor shells in the beltline region, when these shells are obtained from a
hollow ingot.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, or by any other technically equivalent process, it
shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.

In addition, he shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of the ingot and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom of the ingot.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 17
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111 Bis

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 16 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Max. Carbon 0.20 0.22

Manganese 1.15 - 1.55 1.15 - 1.60
Max. Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Max. Sulphur 0.005 0.005
Silicon 0.10 - 0.30 0.10 - 0.30
Nickel 0.50 - 0.80 0.50 - 0.80
Max. Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 - 0.55 0.43 - 0.57
Max. Vanadium 0.01 0.01
Max Copper 0.08 0.08
Aluminium Max. – 0.04
Preferred Max. 0.04 –
Max.Cobalt 0.03 0.03

2.3 POSITION OF THE END OF SOLIDIFICATION

The position of the end of solidification in relation to the finished surfaces of the shell shall be
looked for on the part on the ingot top side.
This position will be obtained by determining the maximum carbon content in the thickness of the
part along at least 6 radii 60° apart.
If, for each of the radii, the carbon peak value is located at the most at 75% of the normal thickness
of the finished shell in relation to the finished outer surface, no additional examination shall be
required.
If not, a sulphur print indentation test shall be performed, with the part in the final condition, in the
bore on the top side at the position of the radii not meeting this 75% value. Check the absence of
large areas of dark veins and compare with the results obtained during the qualification procedure
performed in accordance with M 140.
These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,

M 2000 / 18  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111 Bis

- ingot weight and type,

- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of the part in the ingot,
- dimensioned sketch of the part after each forging operation, with forging ratio and overall ratio
of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- for the surface to be cladded, implemented provisions to ensure the reproducibility of the
macrographic cleanliness (typically A segregations) with regard to the qualification file,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling and non destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

3.2 FORGING
A minimum discard, 13% from the top and 4% from the bottom of the ingot shall be cut-off to
ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A record of ingot weight and discard
percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance Agents.

Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough-machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic examination.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The part shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat treatment
for mechanical properties shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by dipping in water,

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 19
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111 Bis

- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling. Nominal holding temperature for tempering shall be between 635°C and 665°C.
Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. Thermocouple
locations shall be specified in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instruction as above.

3.5 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical properties requirements are shown in table II.

TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED VALUE

OF TEMPERATURE PROPERTIES CIRCUMFERENTIAL
TEST in °C DIRECTION
Room Rp0.2 minimum value 400 MPa
Rm 550/670 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20
Tension

350 Rtp0.2 minimum value 300 MPa

Rm minimum value 497 MPa
TRANSVERSE LONGITUDINAL
0 Minimum average value 80 J 80 J
Minimum individual value (1) 60 J 60 J

KV Impact – 20 Minimum average value 40 J 56 J

Minimum individual value (1) 28 J 40 J

+ 20 Minimum individual value 104 J 120 J

(1) Only one result below the minimum average value may be accepted per series of three test specimens.

M 2000 / 20  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111 Bis

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from two test rings constituted by prolongations adjacent to the part.
One of these prolongations shall be on the ingot bottom side and the other on the top side. Two test
samples, X and Y, shall be taken from each test ring at two diametrically opposed locations. The
test specimen sampling directions are given in table III.

Samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been heat treated for mechanical properties, they
shall be clearly identified and their direction of maximum extension shall be indicated.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
The test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their centreline is at one quarter of the shell
thickness, from the inside face.
The test-pertinent areas of the test specimens shall be located at a distance from the free end of the
shell not smaller than the thickness of the part. To meet this requirement, the Supplier is allowed to
protect the top and bottom ends of the shell by means of a thermal shield, the height of which is at
least equal to the thickness of the shell, as shown on diagram 2 appended to this specification. This
thermal shield, the width of which shall at least equal the thickness of the shell, shall be welded
to the part.
The notch axes of KV impact test specimens shall be oriented radially.
A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme
(see paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table III: "As-delivered tests".

4.3.2 Additional impact tests

In order to determine how the product energy absorbed by breakage varies with temperature, in
addition to impact tests at - 20°C, 0°C and + 20°C, three tests will be performed at - 40°C, three
at + 40°C and three at - 60°C, and if required three more tests shall be performed at + 60°C in order
to ascertain the shape of the curve. These tests shall be performed on specimens taken from one
sample of the bottom ring, in the transverse direction.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 21
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111 Bis

4.3.3 Test procedures

A -TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0,2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted ; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted ; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS AND PLOTTING THE DUCTILE-TO-BRITTLE TRANSITION CURVE

a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. The temperatures for additional tests
used to define the KV energy absorbed by breakage transition curve shall be those indicated in
paragraph 4.3.2.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table II must
be fulfilled.

M 2000 / 22  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111 Bis

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements.
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens
shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three
test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be
rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Tests at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part shall
be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).
If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required in
paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for the three additional tests performed at
+ 40°C (see paragraph 4.3.2). If the requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C the
part shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two treatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 23
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111 Bis

TABLE III

M 2000 / 24  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111 Bis

4.5.2 Test conditions

The number of tests, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet the requirements
specified in table III: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving heat treatment".
One or two samples for these tests shall be taken from the bottom test ring (see paragraph 4.2) after
the part has undergone heat treatment for mechanical properties.
Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected
to heat treatment for mechanical properties only (see paragraph 4.3).
The additional impact tests mentioned in paragraph 4.3.2 shall be performed on the one or two
samples which have been subjected to simulated stress-relieving heat treatment. Tests
corresponding to the same sampling and thermal condition as those in table A1, if applicable, may
be used.

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be examined carefully during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to a visual examination at the
final stage in accordance with MC 7100.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks or other injurious defects.

Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination shall be

performed on surfaces to be clad.
The examination procedures are those given in MC 4000 or MC 5000.

CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination
- any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition,
- are unacceptable:
1) linear indications,
2) rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
3) 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 25
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111 Bis

4) 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications
being evaluated

Magnetic particle examination

- any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
- are unacceptable:
1) linear indications,
2) non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
3) 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed after final machining of the part or at as advanced a stage as
possible for portions which cannot be examined in finished form.

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe characteristics are usually as follows:
- for straight beam examination: probe frequency 3 to 4 MHz,
- for angle beam examination: probe frequency 2 MHz, refraction angle 45°.

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 3b.
As a deviation from standard NF EN 10228-3 prescriptions, examination shall be performed in the
axial direction, from both ends over half the height of the part plus 10%.

M 2000 / 26  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111 Bis

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in method DGS in
standard NF EN 10228-3.

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.
After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000.
- Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
The criteria to be applied are those defined in paragraph 6 of the present specification.

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
After heat treatment
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 27
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111 Bis

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- line of carbon measurement on top side of part,
- results of Baumann indentation tests, where applicable,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data: for parts which have been retreated this includes
recordings of all heat treatments,
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 2000 / 28  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111 Bis

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2111 Bis

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE
AND UPPER SHELF KV ENERGY

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed on the bottom test ring where required by equipment
specifications or other relevant contractual documents.

- KV TRANSITION CURVE
The longitudinal axis of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the inner face of the
wall equal to a quarter of the wall thickness.
The test-pertinent area of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the quenched end
equal to the thickness of the part. For this requirement to be met, the bottom end of the part may be
protected by a thermal buffer, the height of which at least equals the thickness of the part. This
buffer may be welded to the part.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the surface.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Each series of tests consists in the fracture of three tests specimens.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value shall be recorded for information purposes.

RESULTS
The transition curve is plotted for information purposes only.

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph, with the following
exceptions:
- the specimens must be taken in HTMP + SSRHT condition,
- the specimens must be taken in the axial orientation of the part,
- the notch axes must be parallel to the surface.

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 29
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111 Bis

- DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact tests.
The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.
The longitudinal axis of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the inner face of the
wall equal to a quarter of the wall thickness.
The Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be cut-out within the area between the quarter inner
quarter and half the thickness of the shell.
The test-pertinent area of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the quenched end
equal to the thickness of the part.
For this requirement to be met, the bottom end of the part may be protected by a thermal buffer, the
height of which at least equals the thickness of the part. This buffer may be welded to the part.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the surface.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Each series of tests will consist in the fracture of three test specimens.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.
Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape
and dimensions of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to – 20 °C.

M 2000 / 30  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111 Bis

TABLE A1

NAME CONDITION ORIENTATION TEST NUMBER NUMBER OF

OF OF OF TEMPERA- OF TEST SPECI-
TEST SPECIMENS SPECIMEN TURE IN °C LOTS MENS PER LOT
"AS-DELIVERED" TESTS

Ductile -to
brittle tran-
HTMP L (1) 1 24
sition curve
(KV impact)
TESTS PERFORMED AFTER SIMULATED STRESS RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT

Ductile-to HTMP + SSRHT L (1) 1 24

brittle tran-
sition curve
(KV impact)
 1 8
Ductile-to- HTMP + SSRHT T (2) 2 
brittle tran-  1 7
sition curve
(KV impact)

RTNDT
Pellini HTMP + SSRHT C (3) 2 4
KV impact HTMP + SSRHT T (3) 2 9

Key:

HTMP = heat treatment for mechanical properties

SSRHT = simulated stress relieving heat treatment

C = circumferential

L = longitudinal

T = transverse

(1) Each ductile-to-brittle transition curve shall be plotted on the basis of 8 temperatures, which must include
- 20°C, - 10°C, 0°C, + 10°C, + 20°C. The remaining three temperatures shall be chosen from outside the
- 20°C to - 20°C range and specifically one each on the upper (100% fibrous fracture) and lower (less than
10% fibrous fracture) shelves in order to obtain as complete a curve as possible.

(2) The tests shall be performed at 5 temperatures one of which must be 0°C : the shape of the upper shelf of the
curve should be defined as accurately as possible.

(3) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000.

Note: Sample results required in table III and in paragraphs 4.3.2 and 4.5.2 which correspond to the same
sampling heat treatment may be used.

When one set of test specimens is called for, it can be taken from any sample.

When two sets of test specimens are called for, one of them shall be taken per sample.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 31
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2111 Bis

ANNEX 2 TO SPECIFICATION M 2111 Bis

CYLINDRICAL SHELL

POSITION OF TEST METAL

ORIENTATION OF TEST SPECIMENS FOR MECHANICAL TESTING

M 2000 / 32  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112

M 2112

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM ALLOY STEEL

FORGINGS FOR PRESSURIZED WATER
NUCLEAR REACTOR SHELLS
OUTSIDE THE BELTLINE REGION

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable manganese-nickel-molybdenum alloy steel forgings for
pressurized water nuclear reactor shells outside the beltline region.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, it shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
In addition, he shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of the ingot and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom of the ingot. These
analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 33
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 16 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Max. Carbon 0.20 0.22

Manganese 1.15 - 1.55 1.15 - 1.60
Max. Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Max. Sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.10 - 0.30 0.10 - 0.30
Nickel 0.50 - 0.80 0.50 - 0.80
Max. Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 - 0.55 0.43 - 0.57
Max. Vanadium 0.01 0.01
Max Copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium Max. – 0.04
Preferred Max. 0.04 –
Max. Cobalt 0.03 0.03

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of the part in the ingot,
- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and
overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

M 2000 / 34  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2112

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A
record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance Agents.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough-machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic examination.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The part shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat treatment
for mechanical properties, shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling. Normal holding temperature for tempering shall be between 635°C and 665°C.

Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. Thermocouple

locations shall be specified in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

3.5 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 35
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical properties requirements are shown in table II.

TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED VALUE

OF TEMPERATURE PROPERTIES CIRCUMFERENTIAL
TEST in °C DIRECTION

Room Rp0.2 minimum value 400 MPa

Rm 550/670 MPa
Tension A % (5d) minimum value 20
350 Rtp0.2 minimum value 300 MPa
Rm minimum value 497 MPa

TRANSVERSE LONGITUDINAL

0 Minimum average value 80 J 80 J

Minimum individual value (1) 60 J 60 J

KV Impact – 20 Minimum average value 40 J 56 J

28 J 40 J
Minimum individual value (1)
+ 20 Minimum individual value 72 J 88 J
(1) Only one result below the minimum average value may be accepted per series of three test specimens.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from two test rings constituted by prolongations adjacent to the part.
One of these prolongations shall be on the ingot bottom side and the other on the top side. Two test
samples, X and Y, shall be taken from each test ring at two diametrically opposed locations. The
test specimen sampling directions are given in table III.
Samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been heat treated for mechanical properties ; they
shall be clearly identified and their direction of maximum extension shall be indicated.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
The test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their centreline is at one quarter of the shell
thickness, from the inside face.
When the test specimens are taken from the prolongation, the test-pertinent area of the test
specimens shall be located at a distance from the free end of the shell not smaller than the thickness
of the part. To meet this requirement, the Supplier is allowed to protect the top and bottom ends of
the shell by means of a thermal buffer, the height of which is at least equal to the thickness of the
shell, as shown on diagram 2 appended to this specification. This thermal buffer the width of which
shall at least equal the thickness of the shell, shall be welded to the part.
The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be oriented in a radial direction with respect to
the part.

M 2000 / 36  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112

A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme
(see paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table III: "As-delivered tests".

4.3.2 Additional impact tests

In order to determine how the product energy absorbed by breakage varies with temperature, in
addition to impact tests at - 20°C, 0°C and + 20°C, three tests will be performed at - 40°C, three
at + 40°C and three at - 60°C, and if required three more tests shall be performed at + 60°C in order
to ascertain the shape of the curve. These tests shall be performed on specimens taken from one
sample of the bottom ring, in the transverse direction.

4.3.3 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 37
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112

TABLE III

M 2000 / 38  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted ; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS AND PLOTTING THE DUCTILE-TO-BRITTLE TRANSITION CURVE

a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. The temperatures for additional tests
used to plot the ductile-to-brittle transition curve shall be those indicated in paragraph 4.3.2.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table II must
be fulfilled.

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements.
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens
shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three
test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be
rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Tests at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part shall
be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).
If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required in
paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for the three additional tests performed at
+ 40°C (see paragraph 4.3.2). If the requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the
part shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 39
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet
the requirements specified in table III: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment".
Samples for these tests shall be taken from the bottom test ring (see paragraph 4.2) after the part has
undergone heat treatment for mechanical properties.
Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried
out separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples
subjected to heat treatment for mechanical properties only (see paragraph 4.3).
The additional impact tests mentioned in paragraph 4.3.2 are not required for samples which have
been subjected to simulated stress-relieving heat treatment.

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be carefully examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final
stage in accordance with MC 7100.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination shall be
performed on surfaces to be clad.
The examination procedures are those given in MC 4000 or MC 5000.

M 2000 / 40  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112

CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

Magnetic particle examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.

When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed after final machining of the part or at as advanced a stage as
possible for portions which cannot be examined in finished form.

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 41
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112

Probe characteristics are usually as follows:

- for straight beam examination: probe frequency 3 to 4 MHz,
- for angle beam examination: probe frequency 2 MHz, refraction angle 45°.

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 3b.
As a deviation from standard NF EN 10228-3 prescriptions, examination shall be performed in the
axial direction, from both ends over half the height of the part plus 10%.

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in method DGS in
standard NF EN 10228-3.

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.
After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000.
The criteria to be applied are those defined in paragraph 6 of the present specification.

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
After heat treatment.
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

M 2000 / 42  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data: for parts which have been retreated, (this includes
recordings, of all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 43
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2112

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE
AND UPPER SHELF KV ENERGY

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed on the bottom test ring where required by equipment
specifications or other relevant contractual documents.

- KV TRANSITION CURVE
The longitudinal axis of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the inner face of the
wall equal to a quarter of the wall thickness.
The test-pertinent area of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the quenched end
equal to the thickness of the part. For this requirement to be met, the bottom end of the part may be
protected by a thermal buffer, the height of which at least equals the thickness of the part; This
buffer may be welded to the part.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the surface.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Each series of test will consist in the fracture of three test specimens.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.

RESULTS
The transition curve is plotted for information purposes only.

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph except for the
orientation of the notch axes, which must be parallel to the surface.

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

- DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact tests.
The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.

M 2000 / 44  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112

The longitudinal axis of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the inner face of the
wall equal to a quarter of the wall thickness.
The Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be cut-out within the area between the inner quarter and
half the thickness of the shell.
The test-pertinent area of the test specimens shall be located at a distance from the flat surface not
smaller than the thickness of the part. For this requirement to be met, the bottom end of the part
may be protected by a thermal buffer, the height of which at least equals the thickness of the part,
and that may be welded to the part.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the surface.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Each series of test will consist in the fracture of three test specimens.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.
Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape
and dimensions of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to – 20 °C.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 45
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112

TABLE A1

NAME CONDITION ORIENTATION TEST NUMBER NUMBER OF

OF OF OF TEMPERA- OF SPECIMENS
TEST SPECIMENS SPECIMEN TURE IN °C LOTS PER LOT

Ductile-to
brittle 8
1
transition HTMP + SSRHT T (1) 2 
curve (KV 1 7
impact)

RTNDT
Pellini HTMP + SSRHT C (2) 2 4
KV impact HTMP + SSRHT T (2) 2 9

Key:

HTMP = heat treatment for mechanical properties

SSRHT = simulated stress relieving heat treatment
C = circumferential
T = transverse
(1) Tests shall be performed at 5 temperatures, one of which must be 0° C ; the shape of the upper shelf of the
curve shall be defined as accurately as possible.
(2) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000.

Note : Sample results required in table III, which correspond to the same sampling and heat treatment, may be
used.
- When two sets of test specimens are called for, one of them shall be taken per sample.
- When one set of test specimens is called for, it can be taken from any sample.

M 2000 / 46  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112

ANNEX 2 TO SPECIFICATION M 2112

CYLINDRICAL SHELL

POSITION OF TEST METAL

ORIENTATION OF TEST SPECIMENS FOR MECHANICAL TESTING

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 47
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112

M 2000 / 48  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112 Bis

M 2112 Bis

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM ALLOY STEEL

FORGINGS FOR PRESSURIZED WATER
NUCLEAR REACTOR SHELLS
OUTSIDE THE BELTLINE REGION
OBTAINED FROM HOLLOW INGOTS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable manganese-nickel-molybdenum alloy steel forgings for
pressurized water nuclear reactor shells outside the beltline region, when these shells are obtained
from a hollow ingot.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, or by any other technically equivalent process, it
shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
In addition, he shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of the ingot and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom of the ingot.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 49
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112 Bis

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 16 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Max. Carbon 0.20 0.22

Manganese 1.15 - 1.55 1.15 - 1.60
Max. Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Max. Sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.10 - 0.30 0.10 - 0.30
Nickel 0.50 - 0.80 0.50 - 0.80
Max. Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 - 0.55 0.43 - 0.57
Max. Vanadium 0.01 0.01
Max Copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium Max. – 0.04
Preferred Max. 0.04 –
Max. Cobalt 0.03 0.03

2.3 POSITION OF THE END OF SOLIDIFICATION

The position of the end of solidification in relation to the finished surfaces of the shell shall be
looked for on the part on the ingot top side.
This position will be obtained by determining the maximum carbon content in the thickness of the
part along at least 6 radii 60° apart.
If, for each of the radii, the carbon peak value is located at the most at 75% of the normal thickness
of the finished shell in relation to the finished outer surface, no additional examination shall be
required.
If not, a sulphur print indentation test shall be performed, with the part in the final condition, on the
bore on the top side at the position of the radii not meeting this 75% value. Check the absence of
large areas of dark veins and compare with the results obtained during the qualification procedure
performed in accordance with M 140.
These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,

M 2000 / 50  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112 Bis

- top and bottom end discard percentages,

- position of the part in the ingot,
- dimensioned sketch of the part after each forging operation, with forging ratio and overall ratio
of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- for the surface to be cladded, implemented provisions to ensure the reproducibility of the
macrographic cleanliness (typically A segregations) with regard to the qualification file,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,

- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

3.2 FORGING
A minimum discard, 13% from the top and 4% from the bottom of the ingot shall be cut-off to
ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A record of ingot weight and discard
percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance Agents.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough-machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. The profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic examination:

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The part shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat treatment
for mechanical properties shall consist of the following operations :
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850 °C and 925 °C,
- quenching by dipping in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling. Nominal holding temperature for tempering shall be between 635 °C and 665 °C.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 51
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112 Bis

Temperature shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. Thermocouple

locations shall be specified in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instruction as above.

3.5 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical properties requirements are shown in table II.
TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED VALUE

OF TEMPERATURE PROPERTIES CIRCUMFERENTIAL
TEST in °C DIRECTION
Room Rp0.2 minimum value 400 MPa
Rm 550/670 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20
Tension

350 Rtp0.2 minimum value 300 MPa

Rm minimum value 497 MPa
TRANSVERSE LONGITUDINAL

0 Minimum average value 80 J 80 J

Minimum individual value (1) 60 J 60 J

KV Impact – 20 Minimum average value 40 J 56 J

Minimum individual value (1) 28 J 40 J

+ 20 Minimum individual value 72 J 88 J

(1) Only one result below the minimum average value may be accepted per series of three test specimens.

M 2000 / 52  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112 Bis

4.2 SAMPLING

Test samples shall be taken from two test rings constituted by prolongations adjacent to the part.
One of these prolongations shall be on the ingot bottom side and the other on the top side. Two test
samples, X and Y, shall be taken from each test ring at two diametrically opposed locations. The
test specimen sampling directions are given in table III.
Samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been heat treated for mechanical properties, they
shall be clearly identified and their direction of maximum extension shall be indicated.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
The test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their centreline is at one quarter of the shell
thickness, from the inside face.
When the test specimens are taken from the prolongation, the test-pertinent areas of the test
specimens shall be located at a distance from the free end of the shell not smaller than the thickness
of the part. To meet this requirement, the Supplier is allowed to protect the top and bottom ends of
the shell by means of a thermal shield, the height of which is at least equal to the thickness of the
shell, as shown on diagram 2 appended to this specification. This thermal shield, the width of which
shall at least equal the thickness of the shell, shall be welded to the part.
The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be oriented in a radial direction with respect to
the part.

A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme (see
paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table III: "As-delivered tests".

4.3.2 Additional impact tests

In order to determine how the product energy absorbed by breakage varies with temperature, in
addition to impact tests at - 20°C, 0°C and + 20°C, three tests will be performed at - 40°C, three at
+ 40°C and three at - 60°C, and if required three more tests shall be performed at + 60°C in order to
ascertain the shape of the curve. These tests shall be performed on specimens taken from one sample
of the bottom ring, in the transverse direction.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 53
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112 Bis

4.3.3 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded :
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory results obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted, if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS AND PLOTTING THE DUCTILE-TO-BRITTLE TRANSITION CURVE

a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. The temperatures for additional tests
used to define the KV energy absorbed by breakage transition curve shall be those indicated in
paragraph 4.3.2.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table II must
be fulfilled.

M 2000 / 54  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112 Bis

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure, two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens
shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three
test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be
rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Tests at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part shall
be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).
If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required in
paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure than this condition is fulfilled for the three additional tests performed at
+ 40°C (see paragraph 4.3.2). If the requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the
part shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED STRESS-RELIEVING

HEAT TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 55
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112 Bis

TABLE III

M 2000 / 56  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112 Bis

4.5.2 Test conditions

The number of tests, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet the requirements
specified in table III: "Test performed after simulated stress-relieving heat treatment".
Samples for these tests shall be taken from the bottom test ring (see paragraph 4.2) after the part has
undergone heat treatment for mechanical properties.
Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried
out separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples
subjected to heat treatment for mechanical properties only (see paragraph 4.3).

The additional impact tests mentioned in paragraph 4.3.2 shall be performed on samples which have
been subjected to simulated stress-relieving heat treatment.

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be carefully examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final
stage in accordance with MC 7100.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks or other injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination shall be
performed on surfaces to be clad.
The examination procedures are those given in MC 4000 or MC 5000.

CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination.
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indications shall be considered as unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 57
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112 Bis

Magnetic particle examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.

When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed after final machining of the part or at as advanced a stage as
possible for portions which cannot be examined in finished form.

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.

Probe characteristics are usually as follows:

- for straight beam examination: probe frequency 3 to 4 MHz,
- for angle beam examination: probe frequency 2 MHz, refraction angle 45°.

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 3b.
As a deviation from standard NF EN 10228-3 prescriptions, examination shall be performed in the
axial direction, from both ends over half the height of the part plus 10%.

M 2000 / 58  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112 Bis

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in method DGS in
standard NF EN 10228-3.

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.
After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000.
The criteria to be applied are those defined in paragraph 6 of the present specification.

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
After heat treatment.
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
The samples, delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 59
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112 Bis

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- line of carbon measurement on top side of part,
- results of sulphur print indentation tests, where applicable,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been retreated this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 2000 / 60  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112 Bis

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2112 Bis

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

AND UPPER SHELF KV ENERGY

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed on the bottom test ring where required by equipment
specifications or other relevant contractual documents.

- KV TRANSITION CURVE
The longitudinal axis of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the inner face of the
wall equal to a quarter of the wall thickness.
The test-pertinent area of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the quenched end
equal to the thickness of the part. For this requirement to be met, the bottom end of the part may be
protected by a thermal buffer, the height of which at least equals the thickness of the part. This
buffer may be welded to the part.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the surface.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
KV impact specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape and size of
test specimens shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each series of tests.
Percent shear value and lateral expansion value shall be recorded for information purposes.

RESULTS

The transition curve is plotted for information purposes only.

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph except for the
orientation of the notch axes, which must be parallel to the surface.

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

- DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact tests.
The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.
The longitudinal axis of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the inner face of the
wall equal to a quarter of the wall thickness.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 61
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112 Bis

The Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be cut-out within the area between the inner quarter and
half the thickness of the shell.
The test-pertinent area of the test specimens shall be located at a distance from the flat surface not
smaller than the thickness of the part. For this requirement to be met, the bottom end of the part
may be protected by a thermal buffer, the height of which at least equals the thickness of the part,
that may be welded to the part.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the surface.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
TABLEAU A1

NAME CONDITION ORIENTATION TEST NUMBER NUMBER OF

OF OF OF TEMPERA- OF SPECIMENS
TEST SPECIMENS SPECIMEN TURE IN °C LOTS PER LOT

Ductile-to
brittle 8
1
transition HTMP + SSRHT T (1) 2 
curve (KV 1 7
impact)

RTNDT
Pellini HTMP + SSRHT C (2) 2 4
KV impact HTMP + SSRHT T (2) 2 9

Key:

HTMP = heat treatment for mechanical properties

SSRHT = simulated stress relieving heat treatment
C = circumferential
T = transverse
(1) Tests shall be performed at 5 temperatures, one of which must be 0° C ; the shape of the upper shelf of the
curve shall be defined as accurately as possible.
(2) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000.

Note : Sample results required in table III, which correspond to the same sampling and heat treatment, may be
used.
- When two sets of test specimens are called for, one of them shall be taken per sample.
- When one set of test specimens is called for, it can be taken from any sample.

KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Each series of test will consist in the fracture of three test specimens.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.
Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape
and dimensions of test specimens, as well as test procedures are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to - 20 °C.

M 2000 / 62  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112 Bis

ANNEX 2 TO SPECIFICATION M 2112 Bis

CYLINDRICAL SHELL

POSITION OF TEST METAL

ORIENTATION OF TEST SPECIMENS FOR MECHANICAL TESTING

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 63
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2112 Bis

M 2000 / 64  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2113

M 2113

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM ALLOY STEEL

FORGINGS FOR TRANSITION RINGS AND
FLANGES OF PRESSURIZED WATER
NUCLEAR REACTOR VESSELS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable manganese-nickel-molybdenum alloy steel forgings for transition
rings and flanges of pressurized water nuclear reactor vessels.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, it shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
In addition, he shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of the ingot and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom of the ingot. These
analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 65
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2113

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 16 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Max. Carbon 0.20 0.22

Manganese 1.15 - 1.55 1.15 - 1.60
Max. Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Max. Sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.10 - 0.30 0.10 - 0.30
Nickel 0.50 - 0.80 0.50 - 0.80
Max. Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 - 0.55 0.43 - 0.57
Max. Vanadium 0.01 0.01
Max Copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium Max. – 0.04
Preferred Max. 0.04 –
Max. Cobalt 0.03 0.03

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of the part in the ingot,
- a dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and
overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

M 2000 / 66  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2113

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A
record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance Agents.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough-machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic examination.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The part shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat treatment
for mechanical properties, shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling. Nominal holding temperature for tempering shall be between 635°C and 665°C.
Temperature shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. Thermocouple
locations shall be specified in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

3.5 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 67
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2113

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

TABLE II

REQUIRED VALUE
NAME TEST
OF TEMPERA- PROPERTIES AXIAL CIRCUMFEREN-
TEST TURE DIRECTION TIAL DIRECTION
(TRANS) (LONG)

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 400 MPa

Rm 550/670 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 300 MPa

Rm minimum value 497 MPa

KV Impact 0°C Minimum average value 80 J 80 J

Minimum individual value (1) 60 J 60 J

- 20°C Minimum average value 40 J 56 J

Minimum individual value (1) 28 J 40 J

+ 20°C Minimum individual value 72 J 88 J

(1) Only one result below the minimum average value may be accepted per series of three test
specimens.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken at two diametrically opposed locations X and Y from a test ring
consisting of a prolongation attached to the part. This prolongation shall be located towards the
bottom of the ingot (see appendices 2, 2bis, 3, 4 of this specification).
Samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been heat treated for mechanical properties; they
shall be clearly identified and their direction of maximum extension shall be indicated.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
- For transition rings, the test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their centreline is at
one quarter of the shell thickness, from the inside face. The test-pertinent area of the test
specimens shall be located at a distance from the flat surface not smaller than the thickness of
the part.
To meet this requirement, the Supplier is allowed to protect the bottom end of the shell by means
of a thermal buffer, the height of which is at least equal to the thickness of the shell, as shown on
diagrams attached to appendices 2 and 2bis of this specification. This thermal buffer, the width
of which shall at least equal the thickness of the shell, shall be welded to the part.
- For flanges, the test specimens shall be taken in a such a way that their centreline is at 40 mm
from the inside face of the cylinder. The test-pertinent area of the test specimens shall be at a
minimum distance of 40 mm from any other surface.

M 2000 / 68  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2113

The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be oriented in a radial direction with relation to
the part.

A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme
(see paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Test shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table III: "As-delivered tests".

4.3.2 Additional impact tests

In order to determine how the product energy absorbed by breakage varies with temperature, in
addition to impact tests at - 20°C, 0°C and + 20°C, three tests will be performed at - 40°C,
three at + 40°C and three at - 60°C, and if required three more tests shall be performed at + 60°C in
order to ascertain the shape of the curve. These tests shall be performed on specimens taken axially
from one of the samples.

4.3.3 Test procedure

A -TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 69
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2113

TABLE III

M 2000 / 70  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2113

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.

If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS AND PLOTTING THE DUCTILE-TO-BRITTLE TRANSITION CURVE

a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.

Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. Test temperatures are + 20°C, 0°C
and - 20°C. The temperatures for additional tests used to plot the ductile-to-brittle transition
curve shall be those indicated in paragraph 4.3.2.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table II must
be fulfilled.

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements.

However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens
shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three
test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be
rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Tests at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1), or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part shall
be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 71
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2113

If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required in
paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for the three additional tests performed at
+ 40°C (see paragraph 4.3.2). If the requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the
part shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The number of tests, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet the requirements
specified in table III: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving heat treatment".
Samples for these tests shall be taken from the test ring (see paragraph 4.2) after the part has
undergone heat treatment for mechanical properties.
Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected
to heat treatment for mechanical properties only (see paragraph 4.3).
The additional impact tests mentioned in paragraph 4.3.2 are not required for samples which have
been subjected to simulated stress-relieving heat treatment.

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

M 2000 / 72  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2113

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be carefully examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final
stage in accordance with MC 7100.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination shall be
performed on surfaces to be clad.
The examination procedures are those given in MC 4000 or MC 5000.

CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.

All defects which product the following indications shall be considered as unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
does not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

Magnetic particle examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.

When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 73
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2113

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed after final machining of the part or at as advanced a stage as
possible for portions which cannot be examined in finished form.

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe characteristics are usually as follows:
- for straight beam examination: probe frequency 4 MHz or 2 MHz, depending on the structure,
- for angle beam examination: probe frequency 2 MHz or 1 MHz, depending on the structure,
refraction angle 45°.

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 3b.

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in method DGS in
standard NF EN 10228-3.

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.

The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.

M 2000 / 74  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2113

After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000.
The criteria to be applied are those defined in paragraph 6 of the present specification.

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
After heat treatment.
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on he
drawing.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data: for parts which have been retreated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments,
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 75
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2113

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2113

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed where required by equipment specifications or other
relevant contractual documents.

- KV TRANSITION CURVE
For transition rings, the longitudinal axis of the test specimens must be located at a distance from
the inner face of the wall equal to a quarter of the wall thickness.
The test-pertinent area of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the quenched end
equal to the thickness of the part. For this requirement to be met, the bottom end of the part may be
protected by a thermal buffer, the height of which at least equals the thickness of the part. This
buffer may be welded to the part.
For flanges, the test specimens shall be taken at least 20 mm from any quenched surface and at least
40 mm from all other quenched surfaces.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of these
specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Each series of tests shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value shall be recorded for information purposes.

RESULTS
The transition curve is plotted for information purposes only.

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph except for the
orientation of the notch axes, which must be parallel to the skins.

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

M 2000 / 76  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2113

- DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact tests.
The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.
For transition rings, the longitudinal axis of the test specimens must be located at a distance from
the inner face of the wall equal to a quarter of the wall thickness.
The test-pertinent area of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the quenched end
equal to the thickness of the part.
For this requirement to be met, the bottom end of the part may be protected by a thermal buffer, the
height of which at least equals the thickness of the part. This buffer may be welded to the part.

TABLE A1

CONDITION ORIENTATION TEST NUMBER NUMBER OF

NAME OF
OF OF TEMPERA- OF SPECIMENS
TEST
SPECIMENS SPECIMEN TURE IN °C LOTS PER LOT
Ductile-to
brittle 8
1
transition HTMP + SSRHT A (1) 2 
curve (KV 1 7
impact)

RTNDT
Pellini HTMP + SSRHT C (2) 2 4
KV impact HTMP + SSRHT A (2) 2 9

Key:

HTMP = heat treatment for mechanical properties

SSRHT = simulated stress relieving heat treatment
C = circumferential
A = axial

(1) Tests shall be performed at 5 temperatures, one of which must be 0° C ; the shape of the upper shelf of the
curve shall be defined as accurately as possible.

(2) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000.

Note : Sample results required in table III, which correspond to the same sampling and heat treatment, may be
used.

When two sets of test specimens are called for, one of them shall be taken per sample.

When one set of test specimens is called for, it can be taken from any sample.

For flanges, the test specimens shall be taken at least 20 mm from any quenched surface and at least
40 mm from all other quenched surfaces.

The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 77
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2113

The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.

KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of these
specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

Each series of test shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.

Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.

Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions
of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to – 20 °C.

M 2000 / 78  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2113

ANNEX 2 TO SPECIFICATION M 2113

TRANSITION RING
CASE OF UNIT FORGED PARTS

POSITION OF TEST METAL

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 79
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2113

ANNEX 2 BIS TO SPECIFICATION M 2113

TRANSITION RING
CASE OF TWO FORGED PARTS FROM THE SAME INGOT

POSITION OF TEST METAL

M 2000 / 80  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2113

ANNEX 3 TO SPECIFICATION M 2113

REACTOR VESSEL FLANGE

POSITION OF TEST METAL

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 81
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2113

ANNEX 4 TO SPECIFICATION M 2113

REACTOR VESSEL FLANGE

POSITION OF TEST METAL

M 2000 / 82  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2114

M 2114

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM ALLOY STEEL

FORGINGS FOR PRESSURIZED WATER
NUCLEAR REACTOR VESSEL NOZZLES

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable manganese-nickel-molybdenum alloy steel forgings for
pressurized water nuclear reactor vessel nozzles.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-
degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.

In addition, he shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of the ingot and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom of the ingot. These
analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 83
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2114

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 16 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Max. Carbon 0.20 0.22

Manganese 1.15 - 1.55 1.15 - 1.60
Max. Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Max. Sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.10 - 0.30 0.10 - 0.30
Nickel 0.50 - 0.80 0.50 - 0.80
Max. Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 - 0.55 0.43 - 0.57
Max. Vanadium 0.01 0.01
Max Copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium Max. – 0.04
Preferred Max. 0.04 –
Max. Cobalt 0.03 0.03

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of the part in the ingot,
- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and
overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be
presentated in chronological order.

M 2000 / 84  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2114

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard, 13% from the top and 7% from the bottom of the ingot, to ensure
elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A record of ingot weight and discard
percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance Agents.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough-machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic examination.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The part shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat treatment
for mechanical properties, shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties followed by still air
cooling. Nominal holding temperature for tempering shall be between 635°C and 665°C.
Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. Thermocouple
locations shall be specified in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

3.5 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 85
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2114

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

TABLE II

REQUIRED VALUE
NAME TEST
OF TEMPE- PROPERTIES CIRCUMFERENTIAL AXIAL
TEST RATURE DIRECTION DIRECTION
(TRANS) (3) (LONG) (3)

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 400 MPa

Rm 550/670 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20
350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 300 MPa
Rm minimum value 497 MPa
KV Impact 0°C Minimum average value 80 J 80 J
Minimum individual value (1), (2) 60 J 60 J

- 20°C Minimum average value 40 J 56 J

Minimum individual value (1), (2) 28 J 40 J
+ 20°C Minimum individual value 72 J 88 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value shall be accepted per series of three test
specimens.
(2) If neither the forging schedule nor the results of other tests provide clear indication of transverse
direction, both transverse and longitudinal tests shall be performed at the same depth in order to
determine this direction without any ambiguity.
(3) Depth at which samples are taken (see annex 4)
- circumferential direction : 40 X 80 mm
- axial direction : 80 X 160 mm

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken at two diametrically opposed locations X and Y from a test ring
consisting of a prolongation attached to the part.
Samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been heat treated for mechanical properties; they
shall be clearly identified and their direction of maximum extension shall be indicated.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
The test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their test-pertinent area is at a distance from
the skins in accordance with the diagram enclosed in annex 2 of this specification. Profiles of the
nozzle at the time of heat treatment for mechanical properties).
The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be radially oriented.
A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme (see
paragraph 3.1).

M 2000 / 86  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2114

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED NOZZLE SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table III: "As-delivered tests".

4.3.2 Additional impact tests

In order to determine how the product energy absorbed by breakage varies with temperature. In
addition to impact tests at - 20°C, 0°C and + 20°C, three tests will be performed at - 40°C, three
at + 40°C and three at - 60°C, and if required three more tests shall be performed at + 60°C in order
to ascertain the shape of the curve. These tests shall be performed on specimens taken
circumferentially from one of the samples.

4.3.3 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2 % offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in Mpa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 87
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2114

TABLE III

M 2000 / 88  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2114

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4)

B - IMPACT TESTS AND PLOTTING THE DUCTILE-TO-BRITTLE TRANSITION CURVE

a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.

Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. The temperatures for additional tests
used to plot the ductile-to-brittle transition curve shall be those indicated in paragraph 4.3.2.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table II must
be fulfilled.

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result in an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens
shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three
test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be
rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Test at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part shall
be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).
If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required in
paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for the three additional tests performed at
+ 40°C (see paragraph 4.3.2). If the requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the
part shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 89
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2114

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet
the requirements specified in table III: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment".
Samples for these tests shall be taken from the test ring (see paragraph 4.2) after the part has
undergone heat treatment for mechanical properties.
Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected
to heat treatment for mechanical properties only (see paragraph 4.3).
The additional impact tests mentioned in paragraph 4.3.2 are not required for samples which have
been subjected to simulated stress-relieving heat treatment.

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be carefully examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final
stage in accordance with MC 7100.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination shall be
performed on surfaces to be clad.
The examination procedures are those given in MC 4000 or MC 5000.

M 2000 / 90  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2114

CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.

All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

Magnetic particle examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.

When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed when the profile of the part permits satisfactory performance.
It shall be performed in the following order of preference:
- after final machining,
- after heat treatment for mechanical properties, whether or not subsequent machining is
performed.
However, parts or portions of parts which cannot be examined after heat treatment due to the
geometry of the part, shall be examined at the latest intermediate stage possible.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 91
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2114

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe characteristics are usually as follows:
- for straight beam examination: probe frequency 4 MHz or 2 MHz, depending on the structure,
- for angle beam examination: probe frequency 2 MHz or 1 MHz, depending on the structure,
refraction angle 45°.

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 3b.

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in method DGS in
standard NF EN 10228-3.

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.
After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000.
The criteria to be applied are those defined in paragraph 6 of the present specification.

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
After heat treatment.
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.

M 2000 / 92  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2114

The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been retreated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 93
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2114

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2114

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed where required by equipment specifications or other
relevant contractual documents.

- KV TRANSITION CURVE
The test specimens shall be taken at least 20 mm from any quenched surface and at least 40 mm
from all other quenched surfaces.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of these
specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Each series of tests shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value shall be recorded for information purposes.

RESULTS
The transition curve is plotted for information purposes only.

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph, with the following
exceptions:
- the specimens must be taken in HTMP + SSRHT condition,
- the specimens must be taken in the axial orientation of the part,
- the notch axes must be parallel to the skins.

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

- DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact tests.
The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.

M 2000 / 94  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2114

The test specimens shall be taken at least 20 mm from any quenched surface and at least 40 mm
from all other quenched surfaces.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of these
specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Each series of tests shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.
TABLE A1

NAME CONDITION ORIENTATION TEST NUMBER NUMBER OF

OF OF OF TEMPERATURE OF SPECIMENS
TEST SPECIMENS SPECIMEN IN °C LOTS PER LOT
Ductile-to
brittle  1 8
transition HTMP + SSRHT • (1) 2 
curve  1 7
(KV impact)

Preliminary C NDTT + 33°C 2 3 (4)

KV impact A NDTT + 33°C 2 3 (4)

RTNDT
Pellini HTMP + SSRHT C (2) 2 4
KV impact HTMP + SSRHT • (2) 2 9
Key:

HTMP = heat treatment for mechanical properties

SSRHT = simulated stress relieving heat treatment
C = circumferential
A = axial
• = in the direction of the poorest preliminary KV impact test results.
(1) Tests shall be performed at 5 temperatures, one of which must be 0° C; the shape of the upper shelf of the curve
shall be defined as accurately as possible.
(2) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000.
(3) For nozzles subjected to preliminary KV impact tests, the number of specimens shall be 2 x 6
(4) For each group of nozzles belonging to the same rough forging

Note : Sample results required in table III, which correspond to the same sampling and heat treatment, may be used.
- When two sets of test specimens are called for, one of them shall be taken per sample.
- When one set of test specimens is called for, it can be taken from any sample.

Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.
Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions
of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to - 20 °C.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 95
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2114

ANNEX 2 TO SPECIFICATION M 2114

POSITION OF TEST METAL

M 2000 / 96  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115

M 2115

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

18 MND 5 MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM
ALLOY STEEL FORGINGS
FOR PWR STEAM GENERATOR
TUBE PLATES

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable 18 MND 5 manganese-nickel-molybdenum alloy steel forgings
for PWR steam generator tube plates with or without integral ferrules.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-
degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.

In addition, he shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of the ingot and the other on a test ring taken from the bottom of the ingot. These
analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 97
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 18 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Carbon 0.20 0.22

Manganese 1.15 - 1.60 1.15 - 1.60
Max. Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Max. Sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.10 - 0.30 0.10 - 0.30
Nickel 0.50 - 0.80 0.50 - 0.80
Max. Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 - 0.55 0.43 - 0.57
Max. Vanadium 0.01 0.01
Max Copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium Max. – 0.04
Preferred Max. 0.04 –

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of the part in the ingot, the face on which cladding is to be deposited shall at all times be
located at the bottom of the ingot,
- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and
overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

M 2000 / 98  n° 144-2014
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A
record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance Agents.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough-machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic examination.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The part shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat treatment
for mechanical properties, shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling.
Holding temperature for tempering shall be between 635°C and 665°C. Temperatures shall be
measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. Thermocouple locations on the part shall
be stipulated in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

3.5 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 99
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115

TABLE II

REQUIRED VALUE (2)

TEST
NAME OF
TEMPE- PROPERTIES
TESTS CIRCUMFERENTIAL DIRECTION
RATURE

Rp0.2 minimum value 420 MPa

Room
Rm 580/700 MPa
Tensile
A % (5d) minimum value 20
Rtp0.2 minimum value 350 MPa
350°C
Rm minimum value 522 MPa
TRANSVERSE LONGITUDINAL

0°C Minimum average value 80 J 80 J

Minimum individual value (1) 60 J 60 J
KV Impact
– 20°C Minimum average value 40 J 40 J
Minimum individual value (1) 28 J 28 J

+20°C Minimum individual value 72 J 72 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value shall be accepted per series of three test
specimens.

(2) For the tensile tests, the equipment specification may stipulate the values given in the following table
for grade 16 MND 5:

REQUIRED VALUE
TEST
NAME
TEMPE- PROPERTIES
OF
RATURE CIRCUMFERENTIAL DIRECTION
TEST

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 400 MPa

Rm 550/670 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 300 MPa

Rm minimum value 497 MPa

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken at two diametrically opposed locations X and Y from a test ring
consisting of a prolongation to the diameter attached to the part and located towards the bottom end
of the ingot (bottom test ring) as per the sketch in Annex 2.
In addition, test samples for tube plates with integral ferrules on their primary and/or secondary side
(welding tab in as-delivered profile, at least 300mm proud of the tube plate surface) shall be taken at
two diametrically opposed locations W and Z. These samples shall be taken from a test ring (on the
ferrule) consisting of an interior or exterior reinforcement or of a prolongation adjacent to the
ferrule, as per the sketch in Annex 3.

M 2000 / 100  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115

Samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been heat treated for mechanical properties; they
shall be clearly identified and their direction of maximum extension shall be indicated.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
The test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their centreline is located at least 50 mm and
at least 100 mm from the treated surfaces in accordance with the diagrams attached to annexes 2 and
3 of this specification.

The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.
A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme
(see paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table III: "As-delivered tests".

4.3.2 Test procedure

A -TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 101

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115

TABLE III

M 2000 / 102  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.

If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted, if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted, if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4)

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. Test temperatures shall be + 20°C,
0°C and - 20°C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table II must
be fulfilled.

c) Tests at 0 °C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens
shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three
test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be
rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Tests at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part shall
be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).
If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required in
paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 103

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for the three tests performed at + 40°C. If the
requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the part shall be rejected (see
paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.

In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.

Nominal holding temperature is in principle 615°C.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet
the requirements specified in table III: "Test performed after simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment".

Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected
to heat treatment for mechanical properties only (see paragraph 4.3).

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be carefully examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final
stage in accordance with MC 7100.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects.

M 2000 / 104  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115

Subsequent to final machining, a magnetic particle examination or a liquid penetrant examination

shall be performed on part surfaces. Requirements for this examination are given in MC 5000 or in
MC 4000.

CRITERIA
MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
The following conditions are unacceptable:
- linear indications,

- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,

- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.

LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION

Any defect with one dimension greater than 1 mm shall be considered a recordable condition.
The following conditions are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge),
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
does not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed after final machining of the part at as advanced a stage as
possible for portions which cannot be examined in finished form.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 105

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.

Probe characteristics shall usually be as follows:

- straight beam examination: frequency 3 to 4 MHz,

- in addition, for welding tabs and/or ferrules, angle beam examination: frequency 2 MHz, with
refraction angle of 45°.

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.

Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

Part type is 4.

For continuous tube plate sections, straight beam examination shall be performed from both the
primary and secondary side surfaces, and from the outer peripheral surface.

For ferrules and/or welding tabs, the examination shall be performed as follows:

- straight beam examination from the surface to be welded and from the outer peripheral surface,

- angle beam examination from the outer peripheral surface, in two opposite directions, both
axially and circumferentially (making a total of four scanning directions).

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

For straight beam examination: the recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of
quality class 3 in standard NF EN 10228-3.

For angle beam examination: the recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of
quality class 3 for the DGS technique in standard NF EN 10228-3.

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.

The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.

After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000. The
criteria for this examination are given in paragraph 6 above.

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
After heat treatment;

M 2000 / 106  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115

The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (in the case of retreatment this includes recordings of
all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 107

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2115

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE
AND UPPER SHELF KV ENERGY

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed where required by equipment specifications or other
relevant contractual documents.

- DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact tests.

The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.

The test specimens shall be taken from the bottom test ring at least 20 mm from any quenched
surface and at least 40 mm from all other quenched surfaces.

The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.

The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.

KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

Each series of tests shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.

Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.

Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions
of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to - 12°C.

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph, with the following
exceptions:
- the specimens must be taken in HTMP + SSRHT condition,
- the specimens must be taken in the circumferential orientation, from the bottom test ring,
- the notch axes must be parallel to the skins.

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

M 2000 / 108  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115

TABLE A1

CONDITION TEST NUMBER NUMBER OF

NAME OF SPECIMEN
OF TEST TEMPERA- OF SPECIMENS
TEST ORIENTATION
SPECIMEN TURE IN °C LOTS PER LOT
RTNDT

Pellini drop HTMP + SSRHT R (1) 2 8

weight

KV impact HTMP + SSRHT T (1) 2 12

Key :

HTMP = Heat treatment for mechanical properties.

SSRHT = Simulated stress relieving heat treatment
R = Radial
T = Transverse

(1)Test temperatures are given in MC 1000

Note: Where the test calls for two sets of test specimens, one such set should be taken from each sample.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 109

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115

ANNEX 2 TO SPECIFICATION M 2115

STEAM GENERATOR TUBE PLATE

POSITION OF TEST METAL

M 2000 / 110  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115

ANNEX 3 TO SPECIFICATION M 2115

ADDITIONAL TEST COUPON FOR TUBE PLATES

WITH INTEGRAL FERRULES

Note: the test ring may be prolonged up to the plate.

POSITION OF TEST METAL

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 110 a

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115

M 2000 / 110 b  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115 Bis

M 2115 Bis

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

20 MND 5 MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM
ALLOY STEEL FORGINGS
FOR PWR STEAM GENERATOR
TUBE PLATES

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable 20 MND 5 manganese-nickel-molybdenum alloy steel forgings
for PWR steam generator tube plates with or without integral ferrules.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-
degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.

In addition, he shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of the ingot and the other on a test ring taken from the bottom of the ingot. These
analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 111

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115 Bis

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 20 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Carbon 0.22 0.23

Manganese 1.20 - 1.50 1.11 - 1.59
Max. Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Max. Sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.15 - 0.30 0.15 - 0.30
Nickel 0.40 - 1.00 0.37 - 1.03
Max. Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 - 0.60 0.43 - 0.62
Max. Vanadium 0.01 0.01
Max Copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium Max. – 0.04
Preferred Max. 0.04 –

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of the part in the ingot : the face on which cladding is to be deposited shall at all times
be located at the bottom of the ingot,
- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and
overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

M 2000 / 112  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115 Bis

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A
record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance Agents.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough-machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic examination.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The part shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat treatment
for mechanical properties, shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling.
Holding temperature for tempering shall be between 630°C and 660°C. The measured tempering
temperature of the part shall not be less than 621°C. The maximum permissible deviation applicable
to the tempering temperature (± 15°C according to F 8140) is valid for the nominal temperature but
it does not allow temperatures measured on the part less than 621°C, even if the nominal tempering
temperature is less than 636°C. Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed
on the part. Thermocouple locations on the part shall be stipulated in the manufacturing program
(see paragraph 3.1)
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

3.5 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 113

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115 Bis

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical properties requirements are shown in table II.

TABLE II

TEST REQUIRED VALUE

NAME OF
TEMPE- PROPERTIES
TESTS CIRCUMFERENTIAL DIRECTION
RATURE

Rp0.2 minimum value 420 MPa

Room Rm 620/795 MPa
Tensile A % (5d) minimum value 20

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 350 MPa

Rm minimum value 522 MPa
TRANSVERSE LONGITUDINAL

0°C Minimum average value 80 J 80 J

Minimum individual value (1) 60 J 60 J
KV Impact
– 20°C Minimum average value 40 J 40 J
Minimum individual value (1) 28 J 28 J

+20°C Minimum individual value 72 J 72 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value shall be accepted per series of three test
specimens.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken at two diametrically opposed locations X and Y from a test ring
consisting of a prolongation to the diameter attached to the part and located towards the bottom end
of the ingot (bottom test ring) as per the sketch in Annex 2.

In addition, test samples for tube plates with integral ferrules on their primary and/or secondary side
(welding tab in as-delivered profile, at least 300mm proud of the tube plate surface) shall be taken at
two diametrically opposed locations W and Z. These samples shall be taken from a test ring (on the
ferrule) consisting of an interior or exterior reinforcement or of a prolongation adjacent to the
ferrule, as per the sketch in Annex 3.
Samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been heat treated for mechanical properties; they
shall be clearly identified and the direction of the major working direction shall be indicated.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
The test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their centreline is located at least 50 mm and
at least 100 mm from the treated surfaces in accordance with the diagram attached to annexes 2 and
3 of this specification.

M 2000 / 114  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115 Bis

The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.
A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme
(see paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table III: "As-delivered tests".

4.3.2 Test procedure

A -TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted, if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted, if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 115

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115 Bis

TABLE III

M 2000 / 116  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115 Bis

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. Test temperatures shall be + 20°C,
0°C and - 20°C.

b) Results
The energy impact energy absorption requirements at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table II
must be fulfilled.

c) Tests at 0 °C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens
shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three
test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be
rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Tests at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part shall
be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).
If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required in
paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for the three tests performed at + 40°C. If the
requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the part shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 117

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115 Bis

In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.
Nominal holding temperature is in principle 615°C.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet
the requirements specified in table III: "Test performed after simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment".
Samples for these tests shall be taken from the test ring (see paragraph 4.2) after the part has
undergone heat treatment for mechanical properties.
Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected
to heat treatment for mechanical properties only (see paragraph 4.3).

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined at all stages of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. At the delivery stage, all surfaces shall be subjected to a visual examination
in accordance with MC 7100.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a magnetic particle examination or a liquid penetrant examination
shall be performed on part surfaces. Requirements for this examination are given in MC 5000 or in
MC 4000.

CRITERIA
Magnetic particle examination
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
The following conditions are unacceptable:
- linear indications,

M 2000 / 118  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115 Bis

- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,

- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION

Any defect with one dimension greater than 1 mm shall be considered a recordable condition.
The following conditions are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge),
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
does not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination is performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with MC 2300.

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed after final machining of the part at as advanced a stage as
possible for portions which cannot be examined in finished form.

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2310.

Probe characteristics shall usually be as follows:

- straight beam examination: frequency 3 to 4 MHz,

- in addition, for welding tabs and/or ferrules, angle beam examination: frequency 2 MHz, with
refraction angle of 45°.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 119

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115 Bis

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.

The scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

Part type is 4.

For continuous tube plate sections, straight beam examination shall be performed from both the
primary and secondary side surfaces, and from the outer peripheral surface.

For ferrules and/or welding tabs, the examination shall be performed as follows:

- straight beam examination from the surface to be welded and from the outer peripheral surface,

- angle beam examination from the outer peripheral surface, in two opposite directions, both
axially and circumferentially (making a total of four scanning directions).

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

For straight beam examination: the recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of
quality class 3 in standard NF EN 10228-3.

For angle beam examination: the recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of
quality class 3 for the DGS technique in standard NF EN 10228-3.

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.
After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000. The
criteria for this examination are given in paragraph 6 above.

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
After heat treatment;
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on
the drawing.

M 2000 / 120  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115 Bis

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (in the case of retreatment this includes recordings of
all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 121

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115 Bis

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2115 Bis

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE
AND UPPER SHELF KV ENERGY

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed where required by equipment specifications or other
relevant contractual documents.

- DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact tests.

The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.

The test specimens shall be taken from the bottom test ring at least 20 mm from any quenched
surface and at least 40 mm from all other quenched surfaces.

The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.

The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.

KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

Each series of tests shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.

Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.

Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions
of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to - 12°C.

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph, with the following
exceptions:
- the specimens must be taken in HTMP + SSRHT condition,
- the specimens must be taken in the circumferential orientation, from the bottom test ring,
- the notch axes must be parallel to the skins.

M 2000 / 122  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115 Bis

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

TABLE A1

CONDITION TEST NUMBER NUMBER OF

NAME OF SPECIMEN
OF TEST TEMPERA- OF SPECIMENS
TEST ORIENTATION
SPECIMEN TURE IN °C LOTS PER LOT
RTNDT

Pellini drop HTMP + SSRHT R (1) 2 8

weight

KV impact HTMP + SSRHT T (1) 2 12

Key :

HTMP = Heat treatment for mechanical properties.

SSRHT = Simulated stress relieving heat treatment
R = Radial
T = Transverse

(1)Test temperatures are given in MC 1000

Note: Where the test calls for two sets of test specimens, one such set should be taken from each sample.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 123

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115 Bis

ANNEX 2 TO SPECIFICATION M 2115 BIS

STEAM GENERATOR TUBE PLATE

POSITION OF TEST METAL

M 2000 / 124  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115 Bis

ANNEX 3 TO SPECIFICATION M 2115 Bis

ADDITIONAL TEST COUPON FOR TUBE PLATES

WITH INTEGRAL FERRULES

Note: the test ring may be prolonged up to the plate.

POSITION OF TEST METAL

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 124 a

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2115 Bis

M 2000 / 124 b  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2116

M 2116

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM
ALLOY STEEL FORGINGS
FOR PWR STEAM GENERATOR
SUPPORT RINGS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable manganese-nickel-molybdenum alloy steel forgings for PWR
steam generator support rings.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum
degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I below.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.

In addition, he shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of the ingot and the other on a specimen taken to the bottom of the ingot. These
analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

Whenever two parts are forged in multiple, only one analysis shall be performed per part, each
complying with the requirements of table I.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 125

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2116

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 16 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Max. Carbon
0.20 0.22
Manganese 1.15 - 1.55 1.15 - 1.60
Max. Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Max. Sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.10 - 0.30 0.10 - 0.30
Nickel 0.50 - 0.80 0.50 - 0.80
Max. Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 - 0.55 0.43 - 0.57
Max. Vanadium 0.03 (1) 0.03 (1)
Max Copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium Max. – 0.04
Preferred Max. 0.04 –

(1) A maximum vanadium content of 0.01 may be required.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of the part in the ingot,
- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and
overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and
delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical
properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

M 2000 / 126  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2116

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A
record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance Agents.

Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
The forging shall be rough-machined so that ultrasonic examination of the whole volume of the part
can be performed.

Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough-machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

Whenever two parts are forged in multiple, they shall be separated at the time of machining for heat
treatment.

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic examination.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The part shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat treatment
for mechanical properties, shall consist of the following:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling. Nominal holding temperature for tempering shall be between 635°C and 665°C.

Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. Thermocouple

locations shall be specified in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

3.5 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 127

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2116

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

TABLE II

REQUIRED VALUE
NAME TEST
OF TEMPE- PROPERTIES AXIAL CIRCUMFEREN-
TEST RATURE DIRECTION TIAL DIRECTION
(TRANS) (LONG)

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 400 MPa

Rm 550/670 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 300 MPa

Rm minimum value 497 MPa

KV Impact 0°C Minimum average value 80 J 80 J

Minimum individual value (1) 60 J 60 J

- 20°C Minimum average value 40 J 40 J

Minimum individual value (1) 28 J 28 J

+ 20°C Minimum individual value 72 J 72 J

(1) Only one result below the minimum average value may be accepted per series of three test specimens.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken at two diametrically opposed locations X and Y from a test ring
attached to the part and located towards the bottom end of the ingot. Where two parts are
manufactured from the same ingot, one of the rings shall be located towards the top of the ingot and
the other one towards the bottom.
Samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been heat treated for mechanical properties; they
shall be clearly identified and their direction of maximum extension shall be indicated.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
The test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their centreline is located as shown in the
diagram of annex 2 of this specification:
- 50 mm from the plane profile of the ring and 100 mm from the circular profile as far as impact
test specimens taken circumferentially and tensile test specimens are concerned.
- 20 mm from the circular profile of the ring and 40 m from the plane profile, as far as impact test
specimens taken axially are concerned.
The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be orientated radially with respect to the rings.

M 2000 / 128  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2116

A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme
(see paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown
in table III: "As-delivered tests".

4.3.2 Test procedure

A -TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

The following values shall be recorded:

- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.

If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results ar due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 129

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2116

TABLE III

M 2000 / 130  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2116

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. Test temperatures shall be + 20°C,
0°C and - 20°C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table II must
be fulfilled.

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens
shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three
test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be
rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Tests at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part shall
be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).
If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required in
paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for three tests performed at + 40°C. If the
requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the part shall be rejected (see
paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 131

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2116

In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet
the requirements specified in table III: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment".
Samples for these tests shall be taken from the test ring (see paragraph 4.2) after the part has
undergone heat treatment for mechanical properties.
Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results for tension and KV impact tests at 0°C
shall be the same as for samples subjected to heat treatment for mechanical properties only
(see paragraph 4.3).

4.6 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be carefully examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to a visual examination at the
final stage in accordance with MC 7100.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination shall be
performed on surfaces to be clad.
The examination procedures are those given in MC 4000 or MC 5000.

CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,

M 2000 / 132  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2116

- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,

- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

Magnetic particle examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.

When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 7 of this specification shall apply.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed after final machining of the part at as advanced a stage as
possible for portions which cannot be examined in finished form.

6.2 PROCEDURE
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.

Probe characteristics are usually as follows:

- for straight beam examination: probe frequency 4 MHz,
- for angle beam examination: probe frequency 2 MHz, refraction angle 35° and 45°.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 133

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2116

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 3b.

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in method DGS in
standard NF EN 10228-3.

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.
After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with the
requirements of MC 5000.
The criteria to be applied are those defined in paragraph 6 of the present specification.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
After heat treatment.
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

M 2000 / 134  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2116

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (in the case of retreatment, this includes recordings of
all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 135

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2116

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2116

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed where required by equipment specifications or other
relevant contractual documents.

- DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact tests.

The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.

The test specimens shall be taken at least 20 mm from any quenched surface and at least 40 mm
from all other quenched surfaces.

The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.

The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.

KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

Each series of tests shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.

Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.

Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and
dimensions of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to - 12°C.

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph, with the following
exceptions:
- the specimens must be taken in HTMP + SSRHT condition,
- the specimens must be taken in the axial orientation of the part,
- the notch axes must be parallel to the skins.

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

M 2000 / 136  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2116

TABLE A1

CONDITION TEST NUMBER NUMBER OF

NAME OF SPECIMEN
OF TEST TEMPERA- OF SPECIMENS
TEST ORIENTATION
SPECIMEN TURE IN °C LOTS PER LOT
RTNDT

Pellini drop HTMP + SSRHT C (1) 2 8

weight

KV impact HTMP + SSRHT A (1) 2 12

Key :

HTMP = Heat treatment for mechanical properties.

SSRHT = Simulated stress relieving heat treatment
C = Circumferential
A = Axial

(1) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000

Where the test calls for two sets of test specimens, one such set should be taken from each sample.

Note : Where samples required here are the same and are heat treated in the same manner as those specified in
table III, tests do not need to be repeated.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 137

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2116

ANNEX 2 TO SPECIFICATION M 2116

STEAM GENERATOR SUPPORT RING

POSITION OF TEST METAL

M 2000 / 138  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2117

M 2117

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM
ALLOY STEEL MAIN FLANGE FORGINGS
FOR PRESSURIZED WATER REACTOR
COOLANT PUMPS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable manganese nickel-molybdenum alloy steel main flange forgings
for pressurized water reactor coolant pumps.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-
degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I below.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.

In addition, he shall provide one product analysis performed on a specimen taken at the bottom of
the ingot. These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 139

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2117

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 16 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Max. Carbon 0.20 0.22

Manganese 1.15 - 1.55 1.15 - 1.60
Max. Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Max. Sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.10 - 0.30 0.10 - 0.30
Nickel 0.50 - 0.80 0.50 - 0.80
Max. Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 - 0.55 0.43 - 0.57
Max. Vanadium 0.03 0.03
Aluminium Max. – 0.04
Preferred Max. 0.04 –

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of the part in the ingot,
- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and
overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

M 2000 / 140  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2117

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A
record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance Agents.

Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough-machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic examination.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The part shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat treatment
for mechanical properties, shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling. Nominal holding temperature for tempering shall be between 635°C and 680°C, and
such that nowhere in the part is the temperature outside this range.

Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. Thermocouples

shall be installed at several locations on the part with one thermocouple at least per part and two
thermocouples at least if the charge consists of only one part. Thermocouple locations shall be
specified in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

3.5 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 141

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2117

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II below.

TABLE II

TEST
NAME REQUIRED VALUE IN
TEMPE- PROPERTIES
OF TEST CIRCUMFERENTIAL DIRECTION
RATURE
Tension Room Rp0,2 minimum value 400 MPa
Rm minimum value 550 - 670 MPa
A % 5d minimum value 20
Z % minimum value 38

KV Impact 0°C Minimum average value 80 J

Minimum individual value (1) 60 J

(1) No more than one result below the average value shall be acceptable.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken at two diametrically opposed locations X and Y from a test ring
consisting of a prolongation to the diameter attached to the part through its full cross-section.

Samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been heat treated for mechanical properties; they
shall be clearly identified and their direction of maximum extension shall be indicated.

The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.

The test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their centreline is located more than 40 mm
from the nearest face skin and their test-pertinent area more than 80 mm from the other faces.

The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.

A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme
(see paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table III.

M 2000 / 142  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2117

TABLE III

CONDITION ORIENTA- TEST NUMBER OF SAMPLE

NAME
OF TION OF TEMPERA- SPECIMENS PER
OF TEST
SPECIMENS SPECIMEN TURE TYPE OF TEST X Y

Tension HTMP tangential room 1 X X

KV Impact HTMP tangential 0°C 3 X X

Key: HTMP = heat treatment for mechanical properties

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall have a circular section. Their normal diameter shall be 10 mm and their
dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.

If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted ; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 143

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2117

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series.
Their percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value shall be recorded for information
purposes.
Test temperature shall be 0°C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at 0°C shown in table II must be fulfilled.

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure.
Two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall be tested at the
same temperature as the first set.
If results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do not comply with the requirements
given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be carefully examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final
stage in accordance with MC 7100.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects.

M 2000 / 144  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2117

Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination shall be

performed on surfaces to be clad.
The examination procedures are those given in MC 4000 or MC 5000.

CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

Magnetic particle examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.

Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.

When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 7 of this specification shall apply.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed after any heat treatment for mechanical properties and
preferably after last machining performed at the forging mill.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 145

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2117

6.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe frequency shall normally be 4 MHz.

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 2.

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
The forging mill shall not be authorized to make any weld repair.
After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000. The
criteria for this examination are given in paragraph 5 above.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
After heat treatment.
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on this
drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.

The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

M 2000 / 146  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2117

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,

- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (in the case of retreatment, this includes recordings of
all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 147

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2117

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2117

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed when required by equipment specifications or other
relevant contractual documents.

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact tests.

The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.

The test specimens shall be taken at least 20 mm from any quenched surface and at least 40 mm
from all other quenched surfaces.

The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.

The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.

KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of these
specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000. Each series of tests shall consist of
the fracture of three test specimens. Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test
specimens shall be recorded for information purposes.

Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions
of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to - 12°C.

TABLE A1

CONDITION
NAME OF OF TEST SPECIMEN TEST TEMPERA- NUMBER OF
TEST SPECIMENS ORIENTATION TURE IN °C SPECIMENS

RTNDT

Pellini HTMP any (1) 8

KV TTQ tangentiel (1) 12
Key : HTMP = Heat treatment for mechanical properties
(1) Test temperatures are defined in MC 1000.

M 2000 / 148  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119

M 2119

PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

18 MND 5 MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM
ALLOY STEEL FORGINGS
FOR PWR COMPONENTS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable 18 MND 5 manganese-nickel-molybdenum alloy steel forgings
for pressurized water nuclear reactors.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-
degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I below.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.

In addition, he shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of the ingot and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom of the ingot. These
analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 149

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 18 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Max. Carbon 0.20 0.22

Manganese 1.15 - 1.60 1.15 - 1.60
Max. Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Max. Sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.10 - 0.30 0.10 - 0.30
Nickel 0.50 - 0.80 0.50 - 0.80
Max. Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 - 0.55 0.43 - 0.57
Max. Vanadium 0.03 (1) 0.03 (1)
Max Copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium Max. – 0.04
Preferred Max. 0.04 –

(1) A maximum vanadium content of 0.01 % can be required for parts to be clad.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of the part in the ingot,
- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and
overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

M 2000 / 150  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

For parts whose weight does not exceed 250 kg in the as-delivered condition, no manufacturing
programme shall be required, unless otherwise specified in the purchase order.

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A
record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance Agents.

Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough-machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic examination.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The part shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat treatment
for mechanical properties shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water or water spraying,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling.

Holding temperature for tempering shall be between 635°C and 665°C. Temperatures shall be
measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. Thermocouple locations on the part shall
be stipulated in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

In the case of a heat treatment lot comprising several parts, at least a thermocouple is placed on the
load. Thermocouple locations on the part shall be stipulated in the manufacturing programme
(see paragraph 3.1).

Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 151

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119

3.5 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

TABLE II

TEST
NAME OF
TEMPE- PROPERTIES REQUIRED VALUE (3)
TEST
RATURE

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 450 MPa

Rm 600 to 720 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 380 MPa

Rm minimum value 540 MPa

KV impact 0°C Minimum average value 80 J

Minimum individual value (1) 60 J

- 20°C Minimum average value 40 J

Minimum individual value (1) 28 J

+20°C Minimum individual value 72 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value may be accepted per series for three test
specimens.

(2) For the tensile tests, the equipment specification may stipulate the values for grade 16 MND 5:

TEST REQUIRED VALUE (3)

NAME OF
TEMPE- PROPERTIES
TEST DIRECTION TRANSVERSE
RATURE

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 400 MPa

Rm 550 to 670 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 300 MPa

Rm mimimum value 497 MPa

M 2000 / 152  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119

4.2 SAMPLING
The samples shall be taken from one part per lot at two diametrically opposed locations X and Y
from a test ring consisting of a prolongation or additional thickness attached to the part.
Samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been heat treated for mechanical properties, they
shall be clearly identified and their direction of maximum extension shall be indicated.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
The test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their test-pertinent area is located at 60 mm
from the circular profile and at 40 mm from the plane profile of the part. When the test specimens
cannot be sampled as indicated above, mostly due to insufficient thickness (< 120 mm), the test
specimens are taken so that their longitudinal axis is at midthickness and their test-pertinent area is
at a minimum distance from the end equal to the thickness.
These profiles shall be those of the part at the time of heat treatment for mechanical properties.
The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be oriented radially with respect to the parts, except
for the radial test specimens, for which the notch axis must be oriented tangentially.
A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme
(see paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Definition of a lot

For parts whose unit weight is less than 250 kg (in the as-delivered condition), the lot shall consist
of a set of parts which have the same dimensions which are made from the same heat, and which
have undergone the same processing cycle and have been treated in the same furnace charge. The
weight of the lot is limited to 3000 kg.
For parts whose unit weight is equal to or greater than 250 kg (in the as-delivered condition), the lot
shall compulsorily consist of one part.
Note: Multiple-blank forgings which are not cut out until after heat treatment may be considered as individual part.

4.3.2 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed orientation of test specimens and test temperatures are shown in
table III: "As-delivered tests".

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 153

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119

4.3.3 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.

If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted ; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.

Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. Test temperatures shall be + 20°C,
0°C and - 20°C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table II must
be fulfilled.

M 2000 / 154  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119

TABLE III

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 155

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119

c) Tests at 0 °C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).

However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens
shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three
test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be
rejected, (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Tests at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part shall
be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required in
paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fail to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for three tests performed at + 40°C. If the
requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the part shall be rejected (see
paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.

In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.

No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.

Nominal holding temperature is in principle 615°C.

M 2000 / 156  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119

4.5.2 Test conditions

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet
the requirements specified in table III: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment".

Samples for these tests shall be taken from the test ring (see paragraph 4.2) after the part has
undergone heat treatment for mechanical properties.

Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results for tension and KV impact tests at 0°C
shall be the same as for samples subjected to heat treatment for mechanical properties only.

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be carefully examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final
stage in accordance with MC 7100.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination shall be
performed on surfaces to be clad.
The examination procedures are those given in MC 4000 or MC 5000.

CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 157

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119

Magnetic particle examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.

When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed when the profile of the part permits satisfactory performance.
It shall be performed in the following order of preference:
- after final machining,
- after heat treatment for mechanical properties, whether followed by machining or not.
However, parts or portions of parts which cannot be examined after heat treatment due to the
geometry of the part, shall be examined at the latest intermediate stage possible.

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe characteristics are usually as follows:
- for straight beam examination: probe frequency 4 MHz,
- for angle beam examination: probe frequency 2 MHz to 4 MHz, refraction angle 45° to 70°
depending on the geometry of the part.

M 2000 / 158  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3 or,
with paragraph 13.3 of standard NF EN 10308 for type 1 parts.
Part type is 1, 2, 3, or 4.

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3 or, with
paragraph 14 of standard NF EN 10308 for type 1 parts.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 1028-3 or, in standard NF EN 10308 for type 1 parts.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in method DGS in
standard NF EN 10228-3.

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.
After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000.
The criteria to be applied are those defined in paragraph 6 of the present specification.

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
After heat treatment.
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on this
drawing.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 159

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.

The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (in the case of retreatment, this includes recordings of
all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 2000 / 160  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2119

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
- DETERMINATION OF THE RTNDT TEMPERATURE
These supplementary tests shall be performed where required by B 2500 or equipment specifications
or other relevant contractual documents.
The test specimens shall be taken at least 20 mm from any quenched surface and at least 40 mm
from all other quenched surfaces.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
For small parts, where there is not enough metal for these tests to be performed the KV test
specimens and Pellini drop weight test specimens need not be taken. These cases shall be made clear
in the equipment specifications. Only three KV test specimens need be taken with their centreline
parallel to the longitudinal centreline of the part. The test shall be performed at + 49°C.
The following results must be obtained with each test specimen:
- absorbed energy  68 J,
- lateral expansion value  0.9 mm.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of these
specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Each series of tests shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.
Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions
of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
The criteria shall be specified in the purchase order.
The estimated or measured RTNDT must be less than or equal to - 12°C.

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph, with the following
exceptions:
- the specimens must be taken in HTMP + SSRHT condition,

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 161

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119

- the specimens must be taken in the axial orientation of the part,

- the notch axes must be parallel to the skins.

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

TABLE A1

TEST NUMBER OF
NAME OF CONDITION ORIENTATION
TEMPERATURE SPECIMENS PER
TEST OF TEST OF SAMPLE
IN °C TYPE OF TEST

TESTS PERFORMED AFTER SIMULATED STRESS RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT

RTNDT

 Pellini
drop HTMP + SSRHT any (1) (2)
 weight

 KV
 impact
HTMP + SSRHT transverse (1) (2)

Key:

HTMP = heat treatment for mechanical properties

SSRHT = simulated stress relieving heat treatment
(1) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000

(2) The number of tests required shall be stipulated the purchase order

M 2000 / 162  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119 Bis

M 2119 Bis

PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

20 MND 5 MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM
ALLOY STEEL FORGINGS
FOR PWR COMPONENTS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable 20 MND 5 manganese-nickel-molybdenum alloy steel forgings
for pressurized water nuclear reactors.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-
degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I below.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.

In addition, he shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of the ingot and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom of the ingot. These
analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 163

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119 Bis

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 20 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Max. Carbon 0.22 0.23

Manganese 1.20 - 1.50 1.11 - 1.59
Max. Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Max. Sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.15 - 0.30 0.15 - 0.30
Nickel 0.40 - 1.00 0.37 - 1.03
Max. Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 - 0.60 0.43 - 0.62
Max. Vanadium 0.03 (1) 0.03 (1)
Max Copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium Max. – 0.04
Preferred Max. 0.04 –

(1) A maximum vanadium content of 0.01 % can be required for parts to be claded.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of the part in the ingot,
- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and
overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

M 2000 / 164  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119 Bis

The various heat treatments, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be
presented in chronological order.
For parts whose weight does not exceed 250 kg in the as-delivered condition, no manufacturing
programme shall be required, unless otherwise specified in the purchase order.

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.
A record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance
Agents.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough-machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic examination.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The part shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat treatment
for mechanical properties shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water or water spraying,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling.
Holding temperature for tempering shall be between 630°C and 660°C. The measured tempering
temperature of the part shall not be less than 621°C. The maximum permissible deviation applicable
to the tempering temperature (± 15°C according to F 8140) is valid for the nominal temperature but
it does not allow temperatures measured on the part less than 621°C, even if the nominal tempering
temperature is less than 636°C. Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed
on the part. Thermocouple locations on the part shall be stipulated in the manufacturing program
(see paragraph 3.1)
In the case of a heat treatment lot comprising several parts, at least a thermocouple is placed on the
load. Thermocouple locations on the part shall be stipulated in the manufacturing programme
(see paragraph 3.1).
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 165

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119 Bis

3.5 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical properties requirements are shown in table II.

TABLE II

TEST
NAME OF
TEMPERATURE PROPERTIES REQUIRED VALUES
TEST
IN °C

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 450 MPa

Rm 620/795 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20

350 Rtp0.2 minimum value 380 MPa

Rm minimum value 560 MPa

KV impact 0 Minimum average value 80 J

Minimum individual value (1) 60 J

- 20 Minimum average value 40 J

Minimum individual value (1) 28 J

+20 Minimum individual value 72 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value may be accepted per series for three test
specimens.

4.2 SAMPLING
The samples shall be taken from one part per lot at two diametrically opposed locations X and Y
from a test ring consisting of a prolongation or additional thickness attached to the part.
Samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been heat treated for mechanical properties, they
shall be clearly identified and the direction of the major working direction shall be indicated.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.

M 2000 / 166  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119 Bis

The test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their test-pertinent area is located at 60 mm
from the circular profile and at 40 mm from the plane profile of the part. When the test specimens
cannot be sampled as indicated above, mostly due to insufficient thickness (< 120 mm), the test
specimens are taken so that their longitudinal axis is at midthickness and their test-pertinent area is
at a minimum distance from the end equal to the thickness.
These profiles shall be those of the part at the time of heat treatment for mechanical properties.
The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be oriented radially with respect to the parts, except
for the radial test specimens, for which the notch axis must be oriented tangentially.
A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing program
(see paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Definition of a lot

For parts whose unit weight is less than 250 kg (in the as-delivered condition), the lot shall consist
of a set of parts which have the same dimensions which are made from the same heat, and which
have undergone the same processing cycle and have been treated in the same furnace charge. The
weight of the lot is limited to 3000 kg.
For parts whose unit weight is equal to or greater than 250 kg (in the as-delivered condition), the lot
shall compulsorily consist of one part.
Note: Multiple-blank forgings which are not cut out until after heat treatment may be considered as individual part.

4.3.2 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed orientation of test specimens and test temperatures are shown in
table III: "As-delivered tests".

4.3.3 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 167

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119 Bis

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.

If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted ; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.

Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. Test temperatures shall be + 20°C,
0°C and - 20°C.

b) Results
The impact energy absorption requirements at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table II must be
fulfilled.

M 2000 / 168  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119 Bis

TABLE III

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 169

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119 Bis

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).

However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens
shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three
test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be
rejected, (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Tests at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part shall
be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required in
paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fail to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for three tests performed at + 40°C. If the
requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the part shall be rejected (see
paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.

In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.

No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.

Nominal holding temperature is in principle 615°C.

M 2000 / 170  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119 Bis

4.5.2 Test conditions

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet
the requirements specified in table III: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment".

Samples for these tests shall be taken from the test ring (see paragraph 4.2) after the part has
undergone heat treatment for mechanical properties.

Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results for tension and KV impact tests at 0°C
shall be the same as for samples subjected to heat treatment for mechanical properties only.

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined at all stages of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. At the delivery stage, all surfaces shall be subjected to a visual examination
in accordance with MC 7100.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination shall be
performed on surfaces to be clad.
The examination procedures are those given in MC 4000 or MC 5000.

CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 171

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119 Bis

Magnetic particle examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.

When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination is performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with MC 2300.

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed when the profile of the part permits satisfactory performance.
It shall be performed in the following order of preference:
- after final machining,
- after heat treatment for mechanical properties, whether followed by machining or not.
However, parts or portions of parts which cannot be examined after heat treatment due to the
geometry of the part, shall be examined at the latest intermediate stage possible.

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in paragraphs MC 2300.
Probe characteristics are usually as follows:
- for straight beam examination: probe frequency 4 MHz,
- for angle beam examination: probe frequency 2 MHz to 4 MHz, refraction angle 45° to 70°
depending on the geometry of the part.

M 2000 / 172  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119 Bis

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3 or, for
type 1 parts, to paragraph 13.3 of standard NF EN 10308.
Part type is 1, 2, 3, or 4.

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3 or, for
type 1 parts, to paragraph 14 of standard NF EN 10308.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 of standard
NF EN 10228-3 or, for type 1 parts, of standard NF EN 10308.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in method DGS in
standard NF EN 10228-3.

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.
After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000.
The criteria to be applied are those defined in paragraph 6 of the present specification.

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
After heat treatment.
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on this
drawing.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 173

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119 Bis

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.

The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (in the case of retreatment, this includes recordings of
all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 2000 / 174  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119 Bis

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2119 Bis

CHARACTERIZATION OF THE MATERIAL
TOWARDS FAST FRACTURE

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed where required by B 2500 or equipment specifications
or other relevant contractual documents.

- DETERMINATION OF THE RTNDT TEMPERATURE

The test specimens shall be taken at least 20 mm from any quenched surface and at least 40 mm
from all other quenched surfaces.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
For small parts, where there is not enough metal for these tests to be performed the KV test
specimens and Pellini drop weight test specimens need not be taken. These cases shall be made clear
in the equipment specifications. Only three KV test specimens need be taken with their centreline
parallel to the longitudinal centreline of the part. The test shall be performed at + 49°C.
The following results must be obtained with each test specimen:
- absorbed energy  68 J,
- lateral expansion value  0.9 mm.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of these
specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Each series of tests shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.
Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions
of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
The criteria shall be specified in the purchase order.
The estimated or measured RTNDT must be less than or equal to - 12°C.

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph, with the following
exceptions:
- the specimens must be taken in HTMP + SSRHT condition,

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 175

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2119 Bis

- the specimens must be taken in the axial orientation of the part,

- the notch axes must be parallel to the skins.

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

TABLE A1

TEST NUMBER OF
NAME OF CONDITION ORIENTATION
TEMPERATURE SPECIMENS PER TYPE
TEST OF TEST OF SAMPLE
IN °C OF TEST

TESTS PERFORMED AFTER SIMULATED STRESS RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT

RTNDT
 Pellini HTMP + SSRHT any (1) (2)
 drop
 weight
 KV
 impact
HTMP + SSRHT transverse (1) (2)

Key:

HTMP = heat treatment for mechanical properties

SSRHT = simulated stress relieving heat treatment
(1) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000

(2) The number of tests required shall be stipulated the purchase order

M 2000 / 176  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2121

M 2121

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM
HEAVY ALLOY STEEL PLATES
FOR DISHED HEADS OF PRESSURIZED WATER
NUCLEAR REACTOR VESSELS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable manganese-nickel-molybdenum alloy steel plates for dished
upper and lower heads of pressurized water nuclear reactor vessels.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-
degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
In addition, he shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of the rolled sheet and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom of the rolled
sheet. These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 177

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2121

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 16 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Maximum Carbon 0.20 0.22

Manganese 1.15 - 1.55 1.15 - 1.60
Maximum Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Maximum Sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.10 - 0.30 0.10 - 0.30
Nickel 0.50 - 0.80 0.50 - 0.80
Maximum Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 - 0.55 0.43 - 0.57
Maximum Vanadium 0.01 0.01
Maximum Copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium maximum – 0.04
preferred maximum 0.04 –
Maximum Cobalt 0.03 0.03

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- preliminary press flattening and rolling operations,
- position of the plate in the ingot, and more specifically final rolling direction with respect to the
ingot centreline.
- indication of the main rolling direction.
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the plate,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

M 2000 / 178  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2121

3.2 ROLLING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.
A record of ingot weight and top and bottom end discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of
Surveillance Agents.

3.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

3.3.1 Delivery in the as-treated condition
The plates shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat
treatment for mechanical properties, shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850 °C and 925 °C,
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling.
Nominal holding temperature for tempering shall be between 635 °C and 665 °C. Holding time shall
be selected depending on plate thickness, on the minimum basis of half an hour for every twenty
five millimeters in thickness.
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

3.3.2 Delivery in the untreated condition

Upon request from the dished head Supplier, the plates may be delivered in a condition other than
the as-treated condition, subject to approval by the Manufacturer and Contractor, insofar as the
dished head Supplier proves that the hot dishing and heat treatment facilities he uses, and the
experience he has gained provide the finished part with the same mechanical properties as the
steelmaker would have obtained in the same area of the original plate after heat treatment for
mechanical properties.
These requirements are part of the qualification in accordance with M 140 of the dished head
manufacturing programme. In this case, the test samples shall undergo a simulated heat treatment
for mechanical properties according to the requirements of M 151. This treatment shall follow the
requirements of paragraph 3.3.1.

3.4 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 179

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2121

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

4.2 SAMPLING
The face corresponding to the extrados of the plate after dishing shall be given in identification
mark prior to sampling. This face shall also be identified on each sample.

Test samples shall be taken from the top and bottom ends of each rolled plate.

Samples shall be taken from the plate in as-delivered condition by the rolling mill.

They shall be clearly identified and final rolling direction shall be indicated.

The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests, in both flat and dished condition.

Test specimens shall be taken at half the distance between the edge of the plate and its centreline.
When this proves impossible, they shall be taken as close to this position as possible. No test
specimen shall be taken at a distance from the treated end of the plate or samples smaller than the
plate thickness.

In order to meet this requirement, the rolling mill shall be allowed to protect the end of the plate or
test samples by means of a thermal buffer welded to the full thickness of the plate or sample, prior to
heat treatment.

The longitudinal axis of the tension test specimens shall be perpendicular to the final rolling
direction. This axis shall be located at one quarter of the plate thickness from the face corresponding
to the intrados after dishing, or as close to this position as possible.

The longitudinal axis of the impact test specimens is parallel to the final rolling direction for
"lengthwise" tests, and perpendicular to this direction (and thus parallel to the rolling skin), for
"transverse" tests. Test specimens shall be taken from the skin corresponding to the extrados after
dishing, and at a quarter of the thickness from the face corresponding to the intrados after dishing.

The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to rolling skins.

The longitudinal axis of the bending test specimens shall be perpendicular to final rolling direction.
Test specimens shall be taken at skin level.

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling, for plates delivered in the as-treated condition (4.3.3.1), or on test
specimens taken from samples which have undergone simulated heat treatment for mechanical
properties (4.3.3.2) in the case of plates delivered in the untreated condition.

M 2000 / 180  n° 137-2012


REQUIRED VALUES

n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

NAME OF TEST
PROPERTIES LONGITUDINAL TRANSVERSE
TEST TEMPERATUE
DIRECTION DIRECTION

Tension room Rp0.2 minimum value 400 MPa

Rm 550/670 MPa
A% (5d) minimum value
20
350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 300 MPa
Rm minimum value 497 MPa

KV impact 0°C Minimum average value 80 J 80 J

TABLE II

Minimum individual value (1) 60 J 60 J

- 20°C Minimum average value 56 J 40 J

Minimum individual value (1) 40 J 28 J

+ 20°C Minimum individual value 88 J 72 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value shall be accepted per series of three test specimens.

M 2000 / 181
M 2121
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2121

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown
in table III: "As-delivered tests".
Note: The series of tests to be performed after the simulated stress-relieving heat treatment shall only be performed
upon special requirement from the dished head Manufacturer.

TABLE III

ORIENTATION OF SPECIMEN
NUMBER
TEST TOP END BOTTOM END OF
NAME
TEMPE- AT QUARTER AT QUARTER SPECIMENS
OF TEST AT SKIN AT SKIN
RATURE THICKNESS THICKNESS PER TYPE
OF TEST
Long Trans Long Trans Long Trans Long Trans
TESTS AFTER HEAT TREATMENT FOR MECHANICAL PROPERTIES (HTMP OR SHTMP)

Tension room 1 1 2
350 1 1

Bend room 1 1 2
KV impact 0 3 3 3 3 3 3 18
- 20 3 3 3 3 12
+ 20 3 3 3 3 12
TESTS AFTER SIMULATED STRESS RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT (HTMP OR SHTMP + SSRHT)

Tension room 1 1
KV impact 0 3 3
Key: - HTMP : heat treatment for mechanical properties
- SHTMP : simulated heat treatment for mechanical properties
- SSRHT : simulated stress relieving heat treatment

This impact tests shall be performed on test specimens taken as follows:

- one each from samples located at the top and bottom ends of the ingot,
- one each near a rolling skin and at a quarter of the plate thickness, from each of these test
samples,
- one series of test specimens shall be taken parallel to the rolling direction and another series shall
be taken perpendicular to this direction. This shall apply to each sampling location.

A series of tests shall be performed at 0°C, another at - 20°C and another at + 20°C.

For all these tests, the results shall meet the requirements of paragraph 4.1. However, only
transverse impact tests at 0°C, - 20°C, + 20°C and longitudinal impact tests at + 20°C shall be
actually performed.

Usually, longitudinal impact tests at 0°C and - 20°C shall not be performed. The Contractor,
however, may require that these tests be performed at his own expense, on the basis of the results
obtained for the other tests.

M 2000 / 182  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2121

4.3.2 Additional impact tests

In order to determine how the product energy absorbed by breakage varies with temperature, in
addition to impact tests at - 20°C, 0°C and + 20°C, three tests will be performed at - 40°C, three
at + 40°C and three at - 60°C, and if required three more tests shall be performed at + 60°C in order
to ascertain the shape of the curve. These tests shall be performed on specimens taken from the
sample located towards the bottom end of the rolled plate, at a quarter of the plate thickness, in the
transverse direction.

4.3.3 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II (percentage reduction of area is
given for information purposes).

If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS AND PLOTTING THE DUCTILE-TO-BRITTLE TRANSITION CURVE

a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 183

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2121

Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. Test temperatures shall be + 20°C,
0°C and - 20°C.

The temperatures for additional tests used to plot the ductile-to-brittle transition curve shall be
those indicated in paragraph 4.3.2.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table II
must be fulfilled.

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements. However, where the
only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the required minimum
value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no more than one result
lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with the following
procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall be
tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test
specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be
rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Tests at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part
shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close
to the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required
in paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fail to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for the three additional tests performed at
+ 40°C (see paragraph 4.3.2). If the requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C,
the part shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

C - BEND TESTS
a) Test specimens
The dimensions of the test specimen shall meet the requirements of MC 1000.

The longitudinal axis of the test specimen shall be perpendicular to the final rolling direction.
The test specimen shall be 30 mm thick, and one of its faces shall be a rolling skin and shall
constitute the outside face of the bend.

M 2000 / 184  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2121

b) Test method
The bend test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.
The test specimen shall be bent until its two legs, whose length shall be 3.5 times the specimen
thickness, are parallel. The mandrel diameter shall be 105 mm.

c) Results
No cracks, tears or blisters shall be accepted on the outside face of the bend.
If this is not the case, the procedures given under 4.3.3.A "Results" shall be followed.

4.4 RETREATMENT
4.4.1 Plates delivered in the as-treated condition
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.

In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.

No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.4.2 Plates delivered in the untreated condition

If parts are rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests, another
series of test samples shall be taken as specified in paragraph 4.2. These samples shall be subjected
to another simulated stress-relieving heat treatment. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the
test report.

No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
If the forming shop requires that tests be performed after simulated stress-relieving heat treatment,
the following shall apply.

This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.

Nominal holding temperature is in principle 615 °C.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet
the requirements specified in table III: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment". The tests shall be performed on samples taken from the plate (see paragraph 4.2).

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 185

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2121

Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected
to heat treatment for mechanical properties only (see paragraph 4.3) or for stress relieving heat
treatment.

The additional impact tests mentioned in paragraph 4.3.2 are not required for samples which have
been subjected to simulated stress-relieving heat treatment.

4.6 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final stage in accordance
with MC 7100. Their surface shall be plane, uniform and free from wrinkles, overlaps, scabs, tears,
cracks and any other injurious defect.

After cutting to as-delivered dimensions, the edges shall be visually examined. There shall be no
cleavage or lamination.

If the above-mentioned examinations detect defects in the plate, the plate cannot be accepted as is
and the requirements of paragraph 7 of this specification shall apply.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
An ultrasonic examination shall be performed on plates in accordance with MC 2400, which lays
down the conditions of applicability of Standard NF EN 10160. The scanning plan and criteria are
those of levels S3 and E4 given in this Standard.

In addition, as stipulated in paragraph 9.2.2 of the standard, a test identical to the one performed on
the plate edges shall be performed in the weld areas.

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS OR ACCEPTANCE AS

IS WITH PROVISION FOR SUBSEQUENT REPAIR
7.1 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS
Small surface defects may be removed by grinding or chipping, provided the thickness remains
locally within the plate tolerances.

The Supplier may propose removing larger defects by the same method. In this case, he shall present
the Manufacturer with a report giving a detailed description of the detected defect (location, size,
seriousness). This proposal shall be accepted only if the Manufacturer judges the remaining
thickness to be sufficient with the safety coefficients applied to the equipment design taken into
account.

M 2000 / 186  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2121

In all cases, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000 after
the defective area has been removed.

Remark: when a surface repair is made to facilitate ultrasonic examination, no particle examination
or liquid penetrant examination shall be required.

CRITERIA

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.

All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.

Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications, plus the distance between them.

7.2 ACCEPTANCE AS IS WITH PROVISION FOR SUBSEQUENT REPAIR

If the plate shows more serious defects, it shall usually be rejected.

The Supplier may exceptionally ask the Manufacturer to accept as is plates with certain surface
defects, with provision for subsequent repair in the Manufacturer's workshops, provided that:
- the total surface area to be corrected does not exceed 1% of the plate surface area,
- the excavation required to remove all defects never reduces the thickness by more than 15 mm.

The Supplier may also exceptionally ask the Manufacturer to accept as is plates which include
certain defects visible on the edges (cleavage of the plate cut out to final dimensions shall always
entail the rejection of the plate), provided that the excavation required for complete removal of the
defects remains compatible with the execution of welds.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The plate dimensions shall conform to the requirements of the procurement drawing.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 187

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2121

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.

The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

In addition, the plates shall be marked at two diagonally opposed corners, in such a way that a
person standing at the bottom of the plate shall be able to read the indications in the upper right hand
corner and those in the lower left hand corner. If the plate is delivered in the as-treated condition
(see paragraph 3.3.1), heat treatment shall be marked on the plate.

10 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (in the case of retreatment, this includes recordings of
all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- defect mapping
- dimensional check,
- heat treatment (temperature range and holding times).

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 2000 / 188  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2122

M 2122

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM
ALLOY STEEL DISHED HEADS FOR PRESSURIZED
WATER NUCLEAR REACTOR VESSELS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable manganese-nickel-molybdenum alloy dished heads for
pressurized water nuclear reactor vessels.

1 BASE PRODUCT
Plate used for the manufacture of dished heads shall be procured as per part procurement
specification M 2121 "Manganese-nickel-molybdenum heavy alloy steel plates for dished heads of
pressurized water nuclear reactor vessels".

2 PLATE REPAIR CONDITIONS

As a general rule, the procured plates shall be free of defects. Part procurement specification
M 2121, however, states that exceptionally plates with certain types of defects may be accepted with
provision for subsequent repair by welding in the Manufacturer's workshop.

2.1 REPAIR PROGRAMME

The Manufacturer shall draw up a detailed programme describing exact repair conditions. Precise
information shall be given on the following items:
- extent and location of the defects and excavations to be made,
- description of the welding process to be used,
- electrode type and characteristics of the deposited metal (taking into account subsequent heat
treatments),

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 189

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2122

- preheating temperature,
- heat treatment after repair.

2.2 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS

Defects shall be removed by grinding (chipping may have been performed before-hand, if
necessary).

The same checks as stipulated in paragraphs 5 and 6 of part procurement specification M 2121 shall
be performed.

2.3 REPAIR OF DEFECTS

After all the defects have been removed, an accurate chart of all excavations shall be made and the
reports of all checks performed shall be written.

If the requirements relating to the depth of excavations specified in paragraph 7.1 of M 2121 are
met, the Manufacturer shall be entitled to perform the repair.

The repair procedure, the welders and filler materials shall have been previously qualified in
accordance with the conditions stated in SECTION IV.

The excavation shall be filled to above the level of the plate surface. This excess metal shall then be
removed by grinding.

2.4 CHECK AND HEAT TREATMENT

The repaired plate shall be subjected to magnetic particle examination in accordance with MC 5000
and to complete ultrasonic examination by means of longitudinal waves, in conformity with the
conditions defined in paragraph 6 of part procurement specification M 2121.

Repaired areas shall be subjected to angle beam ultrasonic examination in accordance with the
instructions stated in MC 2600 for checking welds. Level 1 criteria shall apply.

Any plate which has been repaired shall be subjected to heat treatment; this is the regenerative heat
treatment or heat treatment for mechanical properties defined in paragraph 3.2.

The above-mentioned checks shall be repeated after regenerative heat treatment or heat treatment
for mechanical properties has been completed.

The Manufacturer shall prepare a drawing or sketch which clearly shows the location and
dimensions of major repairs.

Conditions for carrying out the repairs shall be appended to this repair chart.

M 2000 / 190  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2122

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURE PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forming shop shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- position of the part in the plate, more specifically ingot centreline and final rolling directions
shall be marked on the part and on the test samples (refer to paragraphs 4.2 and 4.6),
- forming process identification,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final regenerative heat treatment or heat
treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of the test specimens on samples.

The various heating, dishing, possible machining, heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive
testing operations shall be presented in chronological order.

The forming shop must prove, by means of the required test results, that the selected manufacturing
process allows the required dimensional characteristics and mechanical properties to be obtained.

3.2 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

3.2.1 Plates delivered in as-treated condition
After forming, the dished heads shall undergo a regenerative heat treatment, this shall be identical to
heat treatment for mechanical properties defined in paragraph 3.3.1, in procurement
specification M 2121.

3.2.2 Delivery in the untreated condition

After hot forming, the dished heads shall be subjected to heat treatment for mechanical properties
consisting of the following operations:
- austenitizing (at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C),
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling.

Nominal holding temperature for tempering shall be between 635°C and 665°C. Holding time shall
be selected depending on plate thickness, on the minimum basis of half an hour for every twenty
five millimeters in thickness.

For tempering, temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part.

Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 191

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2122

If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

3.3 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES - METAL STRUCTURE

4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Required values for mechanical properties are identical to those indicated in Table I.

4.2 SAMPLING
The test samples shall be taken from coupons left attached to the part during cutting, and which have
undergone the same regenerative heat treatment or heat treatment for mechanical properties, as
defined in paragraph 3.2. If this proves impossible, they shall be taken from coupons cut from the
base plate. In this case, the coupons must undergo all dishing heat cycling along with the part, then
they must be welded to the dished part before it is subjected to regenerative heat treatment.

The coupons shall be appropriately marked and, more particularly, the extrados and direction of
final rolling shall be indicated.

The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.

No test specimen shall be taken closer to the sample or coupon edges than a distance equal to the
plate thickness. In order to fulfil this condition, the Manufacturer can protect the edges by means of
a thermal buffer welded over the entire sample or coupon thickness.

The longitudinal axis of the tension and impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the final
rolling direction for "transverse" tests, and parallel to this direction for "lengthwise" tests. This axis
shall be at a quarter of the plate thickness from the face corresponding to the intrados after dishing,
or as close to this position as possible. Impact test specimens taken at skin level shall be taken from
the skin corresponding to the extrados after dishing.

The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to rolling skins.

The longitudinal axis of the bending test specimens shall be perpendicular to final rolling direction.
Test specimens shall be taken at skin level.

A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme
(see paragraph 3.1).

M 2000 / 192  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2122

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table II A and II B: "As-delivered tests" dealing with dished heads made from plates delivered in the
as-treated condition and from plates delivered in the untreated condition, respectively.

The impact tests shall be performed on test specimens taken as follows:

- one each from samples located at the top and bottom ends of the plate thickness,
- one each near a rolling skin and at a quarter of the plate thickness, from each of these test
samples,
- for each sampling position, one series of test specimens shall be taken shall be taken :
. dished heads made from plates delivered in the heat-treated condition : in the transverse
direction,
. dished heads made from plates delivered in the as-rolled condition : in the longitudinal and
transverse directions,

A series of tests shall be performed at 0°C, another at - 20°C and another at + 20°C.

For all these tests, the results shall meet the requirements of paragraph 4.1.

4.3.2 Additional impact tests

In order to determine how the product energy absorbed by breakage varies with temperature, in
addition to impact tests at - 20°C, 0°C and + 20°C, three tests shall be performed at - 40°C, three at
+ 40°C and three at - 60°C, and if required three more tests shall be performed at + 60°C in order to
ascertain the shape of the curve. These tests shall be performed on specimens taken from the sample
located towards the bottom end of the rolled plate, at a quarter of the plate thickness, in the
transverse direction.

4.3.3 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 193

M 2000 / 194
REQUIRED VALUES
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

NAME OF TEST
PROPERTIES LONGITUDINAL TRANSVERSE
TEST TEMPERATUE
DIRECTION DIRECTION

Tension room Rp0.2 minimum value 400 MPa

Rm 550/670 MPa
A% (5d) minimum value
20
350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 300 MPa
Rm minimum value 497 MPa

KV impact 0°C Minimum average value 80 J 80 J

TABLE II

Minimum individual value (1) 60 J 60 J

- 20°C Minimum average value 56 J 40 J

Minimum individual value (1) 40 J 28 J

+ 20°C Minimum individual value 88 J 72 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value shall be accepted per series of three test specimens.


n° 137-2012
M 2122
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2122

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table I.

If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS AND PLOTTING THE DUCTILE-TO-BRITTLE TRANSITION CURVE

a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.

Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series.

Their percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value shall be recorded for information
purposes.

Test temperatures shall be + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C.

The temperatures for additional tests used to plot the ductile-to-brittle transition curve shall be
those indicated in paragraph 4.3.2.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table I
must be fulfilled.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 195

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2122

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance
with the following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective
specimens shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two
sets of three test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the
part shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Tests at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part
shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close
to the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required
in paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fail to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for the three additional tests performed at
+ 40°C (see paragraph 4.3.2). If the requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C,
the part shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

C - BEND TESTS
a) Test specimens
The longitudinal axis of the test specimen shall be perpendicular to the final rolling direction.

The dimensions of the test specimen shall meet the requirements of MC 1000.

The test specimen shall be 30 mm thick, and one of its faces shall be a rolling skin and shall
constitute the outside face of the bend.

b) Test method
The bend test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000. The test specimen shall be bent
until its two legs, whose length shall be 3.5 times the specimen thickness, are parallel. The
mandrel diameter shall be 105 mm.

c) Results
No cracks, tears or blisters shall be accepted on the outside face of the bend.

If this is not the case, the procedures given under 4.3.3.A "Results" shall be followed.

M 2000 / 196  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2122

Table II A

DISHED HEADS FORMED FROM AS-TREATED PLATES

ORIENTATION OF SPECIMEN
NUMBER
TEST TOP END BOTTOM END OF
NAME
TEMPERA- SPECIMENS
OF TEST AT QUARTER AT QUARTER
TURE AT SKIN AT SKIN PER TYPE
THICKNESS THICKNESS
OF TEST
Long Trans Long Trans Long Trans Long Trans
AS-DELIVERED (HTMP)

Tension room 1 1 2
350°C 1 1

Bend 1 1 2
KV impact 0°C 3 3 3 3 12
- 20°C 3 3 6
+ 20°C 3 3 6
TESTS AFTER SIMULATED STRESS RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT (HTMP + SSRHT)
room 1 1
Tension
350°C 1 1
KV impact 0°C 3 3 6
Key: - HTMP : heat treatment for mechanical properties
- SSRHT : simulated stress relieving heat treatment

Table II B

DISHED HEADS FORMED FROM NON-HEAT TREATED PLATES

ORIENTATION OF SPECIMEN
NUMBER
TEST TOP END BOTTOM END OF
NAME
TEMPERA- AT QUARTER AT QUARTER SPECIMENS
OF TEST AT SKIN AT SKIN
TURE THICKNESS THICKNESS PER TYPE
OF TEST
Long Trans Long Trans Long Trans Long Trans
AS-DELIVERED (HTMP)

Tension room 1 1 2
350°C 1 1

Bend 1 1 2
KV impact 0°C 3 3 3 3 3 3 18
- 20°C 3 3 3 3 12
+ 20°C 3 3 3 3 12
TESTS AFTER SIMULATED STRESS RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT (HTMP + SSRHT)
room 1 1
Tension
350°C 1 1
KV impact 0°C 3 3 6
Key: - HTMP : heat treatment for mechanical properties
- SSRHT : simulated stress relieving heat treatment

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 197

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2122

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.

In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.

No more than two retreatments shall be allowed at the rolling mill and forming shop altogether.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.

Nominal holding temperature is in principle 615 °C.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet
the requirements specified in table II A and II B: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving
heat treatment". The supplementary impact tests mentioned in paragraph 4.3.2, shall not be required
for test samples which have undergone simulated stress-relieving heat treatment.

The tests shall be performed on samples taken from the part having undergone regenerative heat
treatment or heat treatment for mechanical properties, in the conditions defined in paragraph 4.2.
Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected
to regenerative heat treatment or heat treatment for mechanical properties only.

4.6 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

All surfaces of the part shall be subject to a visual examination at the final stage in accordance with
MC 7100. Surfaces shall be smooth, free of scratches, laps, cracks, blisters, inclusions or any other
injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination shall be
performed on surfaces to be clad.
The examination procedures are those given in MC 4000 or MC 5000.

M 2000 / 198  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2122

CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

Magnetic particle examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.

If the above-mentioned examination detects defects in the plate, the plate cannot be accepted as is
and the requirements of paragraph 7 of this specification shall apply.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
After dishing and regenerative heat treatment, an ultrasonic examination shall be performed in
accordance with MC 2400, which lays down the conditions of applicability of Standard NF EN
10160.

The scanning plan and criteria are those of levels S3 and E4 given in this standard.

In addition, as stipulated in paragraph 9.2.2 of the standard, a test identical to the one performed on
the plate edges shall be performed in the weld areas.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 199

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2122

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

The only permitted defects are those which can be removed by grinding while remaining within the
dimensional tolerance range for the dished part. No repair by welding shall be permitted in the
forming shop; however, the requirements of paragraph 7 in M 2121 relative to the plate shall apply
to the dished head.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings.

The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.

The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase.

In addition, rolling direction shall be indicated.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been treated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- defect mapping,
- dimensional check.

M 2000 / 200  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2122

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 201

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2122

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2122

DETERMINATION TO RTNDT TEMPERATURE

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed where required by equipment specifications or other
relevant contractual documents.
The test specimens shall be taken from parts which have undergone regenerative heat treatment or
heat treatment for mechanical properties, in the same conditions as defined in the first two parts of
paragraph 4.2. Simulated stress-relieving treatment as defined in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace.

KV TRANSITION CURVE
The longitudinal axis of the test specimens shall be located at a depth equal to at least one quarter of
the inner plate thickness.
No test specimen shall be taken at a distance from the edges of the samples or coupons smaller than
the thickness of the plate. For this requirement to be met, the Manufacturer may be allowed to
protect the edges by means of a thermal buffer welded over the entire thickness of the samples or
coupons.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.
The series of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.

RESULTS
The transition curve is plotted for information purposes only.

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph, with the following
exceptions:
- the specimens must be taken in HTMP + SSRHT condition,
- the specimens must be taken in the axial orientation of the part,
- the notch axes must be parallel to the skins.

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact tests.
The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.

M 2000 / 202  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2122

The longitudinal axis of the KV test specimens shall be located at a depth equal to at least one
quarter of the plate thickness.
The Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken in such a way that they are located at a depth
equal to at least one quarter of the plate thickness.
The test-pertinent area of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the quenched end
equal to the thickness of the part.
For this requirement to be met, the bottom end of the part may be protected by a thermal buffer, the
height of which at least equals the thickness of the part. This buffer may be welded to the part.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.

TABLE A 1

NAME CONDITION ORIENTATION TEST NUMBER OF

OF OF OF TEMPERATURE SPECIMENS PER TYPE
TEST SPECIMENS SPECIMEN IN °C OF TEST
Ductile-to-
brittle
HTMP + SSRHT transverse (1) 15 (4)
transition curve
KV impact

RTNDT

Pellini
drop HTMP + SSRHT transverse (2) 8 (3)
weight
KV impact HTMP + SSRHT transverse (2) 12 (3)

Key:
HTMP = Regenerative heat treatment or heat treatment mechanical properties
SSRHT = Simulated stress relieving heat treatment

(1) The tests shall be performed at 5 different temperatures, one of which must be 0°C, the shape of the
upper shelf of the curve should be defined as accurately as possible.

(2) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000.

(3) Half of the specimens shall be taken from samples procured at the top ends of ingots and the other half from
samples procured at the bottom ends.

(4) 7 specimens shall be taken from samples procured at the top ends of ingots and the other half from samples
procured at the bottom ends.

Note: - Where samples required here are the same as and are heat treated in the same manner as those specified
in tables II A et II B, tests do not need to be repeated.

KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of these
specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 203

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2122

Each series of tests shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.

Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.

Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions
of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to - 20 °C.

M 2000 / 204  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2125

M 2125

PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

18 MND 5 MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM
ALLOY STEEL PLATES 30 TO 110 mm THICK
FOR PWR PRESSURIZER AND
STEAM GENERATOR SUPPORTS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable 18 MND 5 manganese-nickel-molybdenum steel plates, from 30
to 110 mm in thickness, for PWR pressurizer and steam generator supports. These plates shall be
used in cold formed condition.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-
degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.

In addition he shall provide one product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of each rolled plate and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom of the plate.
These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000. The analyses may be performed on
metal discard from mechanical test specimens.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 205

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2125

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 18 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Maximum Carbon 0.20 0.22

Manganese 1.15 - 1.60 1.15 - 1.60
Maximum Phosphorus 0.012 0.012
Maximum Sulphur 0.012 0.012
Silicon 0.10 - 0.30 0.10 - 0.30
Nickel 0.50 - 0.80 0.50 - 0.80
Maximum Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 - 0.55 0.43 - 0.57
Maximum Vanadium 0.03 0.03
Maximum Copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium maximum – 0.04
preferred max. 0.04 –

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the rolling mill shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- indication of main rolling direction,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the plate,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples,
- the various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be
presented in chronological order.

3.2 ROLLING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A
record of ingot weight and top and bottom end discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of
Surveillance Agents.

M 2000 / 206  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2125

3.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The plates shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat
treatment for mechanical properties, shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water or water spraying,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling,
The nominal holding temperature for tempering shall be between 635°C and 665°C.
The holding time is set according to the thickness of the plate on the basis of at least half an hour per
twenty five millimeters in thickness.
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

3.4 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

4.2 SAMPLING
The test samples shall be taken from the top and bottom ends of each rolled sheet.
Samples shall be taken (or cut) from the plate after it has been heat treated for mechanical
properties. They shall be clearly identified and final rolling direction shall be indicated.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests, either in flat or formed condition.
Test specimens shall be taken at half the distance between the edge of the plate and its centreline.
When this proves impossible, they shall be taken as close to this position as possible. No test
specimen shall be taken at a distance from the quenched end of the plate or samples smaller than the
plate thickness.
In order to meet this requirement, the rolling mill shall be allowed to protect the end of the plate by
means of a thermal buffer welded over the entire thickness of the plate, prior to heat treatment.
The longitudinal axis of the tension test specimens shall be perpendicular to the final rolling
direction. This axis shall be located at the quarter of the plate thickness, or as close to this
position as possible.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 207

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2125

TABLE II

REQUIRED VALUE
NAME OF TEST
PROPERTIES TRANSVERSE
TEST TEMPERATURE
DIRECTION (2)
Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 450 MPa
Rm 600 to 700 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 18

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 380 MPa

Rm minimum value 540 MPa

KV impact 0°C Minimum average value 56 J

Minimum individual value (1) 40 J

+20°C Minimum individual value 72 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value may be accepted per series for three test
specimens.

(2) For the tensile tests, the equipment specification may stipulate the values for grade 16 MND 5:

REQUIRED VALUE
NAME OF TEST
PROPERTIES TRANSVERSE
TEST TEMPERATURE
DIRECTION

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 400 MPa

Rm 550 to 670 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 300 MPa

Rm minimum value 497 MPa

The longitudinal axis of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the final rolling
direction (and parallel to the rolling skin).
The impact tests shall be performed on specimens taken in samples located at the top and at the
bottom ends of the plate.
The specimens are taken :
- for thicknesses ≤ 40 mm : near the skin and in 1/2 thickness,
- for thicknesses > 40 mm : near the skin and in 1/4 thickness.
The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to rolling skins.
The longitudinal axis of the bending test specimens shall be perpendicular to final rolling direction.
Test specimens shall be taken at skin level.

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

M 2000 / 208  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2125

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table III: "As- delivered tests".

Tensile test at high temperature shall be performed when specified in the equipment specification or
other relevant contractual documents.

For all these tests, the results shall meet the requirements of paragraph 4.1.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A -TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

The following values shall be recorded:

- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.

If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the plate shall be accepted ; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the plate shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 209

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2125

TABLE III

M 2000 / 210  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2125

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. Test temperatures shall be
+ 20°C, 0°C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at + 20°C and 0°C shown in table II must be
fulfilled.

c) Tests at 0°C
The plate shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens
shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three
test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the plate shall be
rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fail to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for the three tests performed at + 40°C. If the
requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the part shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

C - BEND TESTS
a) Test specimens
The dimensions of the test specimen shall meet the requirements of MC 1000.
The longitudinal axis of the test specimen shall be perpendicular to the final rolling direction.
The test specimen shall be 30 mm thick, and one of its faces shall be a rolling skin and shall
constitute the outside face of the bend.

b) Test method
The bend test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.
The test specimen shall be bent until its two legs, whose length shall be 3.5 times the specimen
thickness, are parallel. The mandrel diameter shall be 105 mm.

c) Results
No cracks, tears or blisters shall be accepted on the outside face of the bend.
If this is not the case, the procedures given under 4.3.2.A "Results" shall be followed.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 211

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2125

4.4 RETREATMENT
Plates rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.

In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.

No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.

Nominal holding temperature is in principle 615 °C.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet
the requirements specified in table III: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment".

The tests shall be performed on samples taken from the plate it has undergone heat treatment for
mechanical properties, as defined in paragraph 4.2.

Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions (see paragraph 4.3.2) and results for tension testing
and KV impact testing at 0°C shall be the same as for samples subjected to heat treatment for
mechanical properties only.

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

All surfaces of the plates shall be subject to a visual examination at the final stage in accordance
with MC 7100. Their surface shall be plane, uniform and free from wrinkles, overlaps, scabs, tears,
cracks and other injurious defects.
After cutting to as-delivered dimensions, the edges shall be visually examined. There shall be no
cleavage or lamination.
If the above-mentioned examinations detect defects in the plate, the plate cannot be accepted as is
and the requirements of paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

M 2000 / 212  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2125

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Plates shall be subjected to ultrasonic examination in accordance with MC 2400, which lays down
the conditions of applicability of Standard NF EN 10160. The scanning plan and criteria are those of
levels S2 and E3 of Standard NF EN 10160.

8 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS OR ACCEPTANCE

AS IS WITH PROVISION FOR SUBSEQUENT REPAIR
8.1 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS
Small surface defects may be removed by grinding or chipping, provided the thickness remains
locally within the plate tolerances.
The Supplier may propose removing larger defects by the same method. In this case, he shall present
the Manufacturer with a report giving a detailed description of the detected defect (location, size,
seriousness).
This proposal shall be accepted only if the Manufacturer judges the remaining thickness to be
sufficient with the safety coefficients applied to the equipment design taken into account.
In all cases, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000 after
the defective area has been removed.
Remark: when a surface repair is made to facilitate ultrasonic examination, no particle examination
or liquid penetrant examination shall be required.

EXAMINATION CRITERIA:
Indications with one dimension greater than 1 mm shall be taken into account.

All defects which produce the following indications must be eliminated or repaired:
- linear indication,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.

Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications, plus the distance between them.

8.2 ACCEPTANCE AS IS WITH PROVISION FOR SUBSEQUENT REPAIR

If the plate shows more serious defects, it shall usually be rejected.

The Supplier may exceptionally ask the Manufacturer to accept as is plates with certain surface
defects, with provision for subsequent repair in the Manufacturer's workshops, provided that:
- the total surface area to be corrected does not exceed 1% of the plate surface area,

- the excavation required to remove all defects never reduces the thickness by more than 20%
or 15 mm.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 213

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2125

The Supplier may also exceptionally ask the Manufacturer to accept as is plates which include
certain defects visible on the edges (cleavage of the plate cut out to final dimensions shall always
entail the rejection of the plate), provided that the excavation required for complete removal of the
defects remains compatible with the execution of welds.

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The plate dimensions shall conform to the requirements of the procurement drawing.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

In addition, the plates shall be marked at two diagonally opposed corners, in such a way that a
person standing at the bottom of the plate shall be able to read the indications in the upper right hand
corner and those in the lower left hand corner.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been treated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- chart of the defects,
- dimensional check,
- heat treatment (temperature range and holding times).

M 2000 / 214  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2125

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 215

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2125

M 2000 / 216  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126

M 2126

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

18 MND 5 MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM
ALLOY STEEL PLATES FOR
PRESSURIZED WATER REACTOR
PRESSURE-RETAINING BOUNDARIES

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable 18 MND 5 manganese-nickel-molybdenum steel plates for
pressurized water nuclear reactor pressure-retaining boundaries.

These plates shall be used in cold or hot formed condition.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-
degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.

In addition, he shall provide one product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of each rolled plate and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom of the sheet.
These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000. The analyses may be performed on
metal discard from mechanical test specimens.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 217

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 18 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Maximum Carbon 0.20 0.22

Manganese 1.15 - 1.60 1.15 - 1.60
Maximum Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Maximum Sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.10 - 0.30 0.10 - 0.30
Nickel 0.50 - 0.80 0.50 - 0.80
Maximum Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 - 0.55 0.43 - 0.57
Maximum Vanadium 0.03 0.03
Maximum Copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium maximum – 0.04
preferred max. 0.04 –

(1) A maximum vanadium content of 0.01 % can be required for parts to be clad.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the rolling mill shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- rolling and preliminary press flattening operations, if relevant,
- position of the plate in the ingot, and more specifically final rolling direction with respect to the
ingot centreline,
- indication of main rolling direction,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the plate,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

M 2000 / 218  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126

3.2 ROLLING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.
A record of ingot weight and top and bottom end discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of
Surveillance Agents.

3.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

3.3.1 Delivery in the as-treated condition
The plates shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat
treatment for mechanical properties, shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still
air cooling,

Holding temperature for tempering shall be between 635°C and 665°C. Holding time at that
temperature shall depend on the thickness of the plate, on the minimum basis of half an hour per
25 mm of thickness.

Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

3.3.2 Delivery in a condition other than as-treated

The plates can be delivered in a condition other than the as-treated condition, at the request of the
formed head Suppliers, and with the agreement of the Supplier and the Contractor, provided that the
formed head Supplier can prove that the hot forming and heat treatment equipment in its possession,
as well as the manufacturing methods employed and its experience in this field, enable it to obtain
mechanical properties over the entire completed part equivalent to those obtained in the same areas
by the steelmaker of the original steel plate after heat treatment for mechanical properties. These
provisions are part of the qualification procedure according to M 140 of the head manufacturing
programme.

A - PLATES FOR FORMING WITHOUT PRIOR WELDING

The plates can be delivered untreated, in this case, the test samples shall undergo simulated heat
treatment for mechanical, properties according to the requirements of M 151. This treatment
shall be carried out in compliance with the requirements of paragraph 3.3.1.

The cycles corresponding to the simulated heat treatment for mechanical properties shall be
recorded and written up in a report.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 219

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126

B - PLATES TO BE WELDED BEFORE FORMING

The plates shall be delivered after normalizing heat treatment. This treatment comprises:
- austenitizing (at a temperature of between 850 and 925°C),
- air cooling.
The test samples are taken after normalizing heat treatment and should be subjected to simulated
heat treatment for mechanical, properties according to the requirements of M 151. This treatment
shall be carried out in compliance with the requirements of paragraph 3.3.1.

3.4 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from the top and bottom ends of each rolled sheet.

Samples shall be taken from the plate in as-delivered condition by the rolling mill. They shall be
clearly identified and rolling direction shall be indicated.

The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests, both in flat or formed condition.

Test specimens shall be taken at half the distance between the edge of the plate and its centreline.
When this proves impossible, they shall be taken as close to this position as possible. No test
specimen shall be taken at a distance from the treated end of the plate or samples smaller than the
plate thickness.

In order to meet this requirement, the rolling mill shall be allowed to protect the end of the plate or
test samples by means of a thermal buffer welded over the entire thickness of the plate or sample,
prior to heat treatment.

The longitudinal axis of the tension test specimens shall be perpendicular to the final rolling
direction. This axis shall be located at one quarter of the plate thickness, or as close to this position
as possible.

M 2000 / 220  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126

TABLE II

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 221

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126

The longitudinal axis of the impact test specimens shall be parallel to the final rolling direction for
"longitudinal" tests, and perpendicular to this direction (and thus parallel to the rolling skin) for
"transverse" tests. Test specimens shall be taken at skin level and at a quarter of the thickness.

The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to rolling skins.

The longitudinal axis of the bending test specimens shall be perpendicular to final rolling direction.
Test specimens shall be taken at skin level.

4.3 TESTING ON SAMPLES REPRESENTATIVE OF THE PLATE IN THE HEAT

TREATED (for mechanical properties) CONDITION
Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling, for plates delivered in the as-treated condition (see paragraph 3.3.1), or on
test specimens taken from samples which have undergone simulated heat treatment for mechanical
properties (see paragraph 3.3.2) in the case of plates delivered in the as-rolled or as normalized
condition.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table III.A: "As-delivered tests" which relates to plates delivered in the as-treated condition and
III B: "Tests performed after simulated heat treatment for mechanical properties" which relates to
plates delivered untreated, or as normalized.

The impact tests shall be performed on test specimens taken as follows:

- from samples located at the top side and at the bottom side ends of the ingot,
- from each of these test samples, near a rolling skin and at a quarter of the plate thickness,
- one series of test specimens shall be taken parallel to the rolling direction and another series shall
be taken perpendicular to this direction. This shall apply to each sampling location.

A series of tests shall be performed at 0°C, another at - 20°C and another at + 20°C.

For all these tests, the results shall meet the requirements of paragraph 4.1. However, only
transverse impact tests at 0°C, - 20°C, + 20°C and longitudinal impact tests at + 20°C shall be
actually performed.

Usually, longitudinal impact tests at 0°C and - 20°C shall not be performed. The Contractor,
however, may require that these tests be performed at his own expense, on the basis of the results
obtained for the other tests.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

M 2000 / 222  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted ; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

TABLE III.A

PLATE DELIVERED IN THE HEAT TREATED CONDITION

ORIENTATION OF SPECIMEN
NUMBER
TEST TOP END BOTTOM END OF
NAME
TEMPERA- SPECIMENS
OF TEST AT QUARTER AT QUARTER
TURE AT SKIN AT SKIN PER TYPE
THICKNESS THICKNESS
OF TEST
Long Trans Long Trans Long Trans Long Trans
AS-DELIVERED (HTMP)

Tension room 1 1 2
350°C 1 1
Bend room 1 1 2
KV impact 0°C 3 3 3 3 12
- 20°C 3 3 3 3 12
+ 20°C 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 24
TESTS AFTER SIMULATED STRESS RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT (HTMP + SSRHT)

Tension room 1 1 2
350°C 1 1
KV impact 0°C 3 3 3 3 12
Key:
HTMP : heat treatment for mechanical properties
SSRHT : simulated stress relieving heat treatment

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 223

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126

TABLE III.B

PLATE DELIVERED IN THE UNTREATED CONDITION

OR IN THE NORMALIZED CONDITION

ORIENTATION OF SPECIMEN
NUMBER
TEST TOP END BOTTOM END OF
NAME
TEMPERA- SPECIMENS
OF TEST AT QUARTER AT QUARTER
TURE AT SKIN AT SKIN PER TYPE
THICKNESS THICKNESS
OF TEST
Long Trans Long Trans Long Trans Long Trans
AS-DELIVERED (HTMP)

Tension room 1 1 2
350°C 1 1

Bend room 1 1 2
KV impact 0°C 3 3 3 3 12
- 20°C 3 3 6
+ 20°C 3 3 3 3 12
TESTS AFTER SIMULATED STRESS RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT (HTMP + SSRHT)

Tension room 1 1
KV impact 0°C 3 3

Key:
HTMP : heat treatment for mechanical properties
SSRHT : simulated stress relieving heat treatment

Note : This series of tests planned after simulated stress relieving heat treatment are only performed on special
request of the person responsible for the formed head manufacturing.

B -IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.

Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. Test temperatures shall be + 20°C,
0°C and - 20°C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirement at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table II must
be fulfilled.

M 2000 / 224  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126

c) Tests at 0 °C
The plate shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements. (See paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance
with the following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective
specimens shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two
sets of three test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the
plate shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Tests at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the plate
shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close
to the first set. The plate shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required
in paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fail to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for the three tests performed at + 40°C. If the
requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the plate shall be rejected (see
paragraph 4.4).

C - BEND TESTS
a) Test specimens
The dimensions of the test specimen shall meet the requirements of MC 1000.

The longitudinal axis of the test specimen shall be perpendicular to the final rolling direction.
The test specimen shall be 30 mm thick, and one of its faces shall be a rolling skin and shall
constitute the outside face of the bend.

b) Test method
The bend test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

The test specimen shall be bent until its two legs, whose length shall be 3.5 times the specimen
thickness, are parallel. The mandrel diameter shall be 105 mm.

c) Results
No cracks, tears or blisters shall be accepted on the outside face of the bend.

If this is not the case, the procedures given under 4.3.2.A "Results" shall be followed.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 225

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126

4.4 RETREATMENT
4.4.1 Plates delivered in the as-treated condition
Plates rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.4.2 Plates delivered in the untreated or as-normalized condition

If plates are rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests, another
series of test samples shall be taken as specified in paragraph 4.2. These samples shall be subjected
to another simulated stress-relieving heat treatment. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the
test report.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
In the case of plates delivered in as-treated condition and upon request of the head manufacturing
manager in other cases, tests shall be performed after simulated stress-relieving heat treatment.
Instructions for the performance of this treatment shall follow the requirements of M 151.
Nominal holding temperature is in principle 615 °C.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet
the requirements specified in table III.A and III.B: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving
heat treatment".
The tests shall be performed on samples taken from the plate (see paragraph 4.2).
Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected
to heat treatment for mechanical properties only (see paragraph 4.3).
Specific requirements of paragraph 4.3.1 shall not apply in the case of plates delivered in the as-
treated condition.

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

M 2000 / 226  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2126

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

All surfaces of the part shall be subject to a visual examination at the final stage in accordance with
MC 7100. Their surface shall be plane, uniform and free from wrinkles, overlaps, scabs, tears,
cracks and other injurious defects.

After cutting to as-delivered dimensions, the edges shall be visually examined. There shall be no
cleavage or lamination.

If the above-mentioned examinations detect unacceptable defects in the plate, the requirements of
paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Plates shall be subjected to ultrasonic examination in accordance with MC 2400, which lays down
the conditions of applicability of Standard NF EN 10160. The scanning plan and criteria are those of
levels S3 and E4 given in this standard.
In addition, as stipulated in paragraph 9.2.2 of the standard, a test identical to the one performed on
the plate edges shall be performed in the weld areas.

8 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS OR ACCEPTANCE

AS IS WITH PROVISION FOR SUBSEQUENT REPAIR
8.1 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS
Small surface defects may be removed by grinding or chipping, provided the thickness remains
locally within the plate tolerances.

The Supplier may propose removing larger defects by the same method. In this case, he shall present
the Manufacturer with a report giving a detailed description of the detected defect (location, size
seriousness). This proposal shall be accepted only if the Manufacturer judges the remaining
thickness to be sufficient with the safety coefficients applied to the equipment design taken into
account.

In all cases, a magnetic examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000 after the
defective area has been removed.

Note: when a surface repair is made to facilitate ultrasonic examination, no particle examination or
liquid penetrant examination shall be required.

CRITERIA
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.

All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 227

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126

- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.

Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length shall be equal to the sum of the length
of this indication shall be equal to the sum of the lengths of the two indications, plus the distance
between them.

8.2 ACCEPTANCE AS IS WITH PROVISION FOR SUBSEQUENT REPAIR

If the plate shows more serious defects, it shall usually be rejected.

The Supplier may exceptionally ask the Manufacturer to accept as is plates with certain surface
defects, with provision for subsequent repair in the Manufacturer's workshops, provided that:
- the total surface area to be corrected does not exceed 1 % of the plate surface area,
- the excavation required to remove all defects never reduces the thickness by more than 15 mm.

The Supplier may also exceptionally ask the Manufacturer to accept as is plates which include
certain defects visible on the edges (cleavage of the plate cut out to final dimensions shall always
entail the rejection of the plate), provided that the excavation required for complete removal of the
defects remains compatible with the execution of welds.

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The plate dimensions shall conform to the requirement of the procurement drawing.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

In addition, the plates shall be marked at two diagonally opposed corners, in such a way that a
person standing at the bottom of the plate shall be able to read the indications in the upper right hand
corner and those in the lower left hand corner. If the plate is delivered in the as-treated condition
(see paragraph 3.3.1) or as-normalized (see paragraph 3.3.2.B), heat treatment shall be marked on
the plate.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

M 2000 / 228  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been treated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- chart of the defects,
- dimensional check,
- heat treatment (temperature range and holding times).

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 229

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2126

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed where required by equipment specifications or other
relevant contractual documents.

These tests shall be performed only on cold formed plates. In the case of hot formed plates, RTNDT
temperature shall be determined in formed condition.

- DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact test.

The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.

The longitudinal axis of the KV test specimens shall be located at a depth equal to at least one
quarter of the plate thickness.

The Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken in such a way that they are located at a depth
equal to at least one quarter of the plate thickness.

The test pertinent area of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the quenched end
equal to the thickness of the part. For this requirement to be met, the bottom end of the part may be
protected by a thermal buffer, the height of which at least equals the thickness of the part. This
buffer may be welded to the part.

The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.

The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.

KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of these
specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

Each series of test shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.

Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.

Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions
of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to – 12 °C.

M 2000 / 230  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126

TABLE A 1

NAME CONDITION ORIENTATION TEST NUMBER OF

OF OF OF TEMPERATURE SPECIMENS PER TYPE
TEST SPECIMENS SPECIMEN IN °C OF TEST

RTNDT

Pellini
drop HTMP + SSRHT transverse (1) 8 (2)
weight
KV impact HTMP + SSRHT transverse (1) 12 (2)

Key:
HTMP = Heat treatment for mechanical properties
SSRHT = Simulated stress relieving heat treatment

Note: - Where samples required here are identical to and heat treated in the same manner as those specified in
tables III A tests do not need to be repeated.

(1) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000.

(2) Half of the specimens shall be taken from samples located at the top end of the ingot and the other half from
samples located at the bottom end of the ingot.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 231

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126

M 2000 / 232  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126 Bis

M 2126 Bis

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

20 MND 5 MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM
ALLOY STEEL PLATES FOR
PRESSURIZED WATER REACTOR
PRESSURE-RETAINING BOUNDARIES

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable 20 MND 5 manganese-nickel-molybdenum steel plates for
pressurized water nuclear reactor pressure-retaining boundaries.

These plates shall be used in cold or hot formed condition.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-
degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.

In addition, he shall provide one product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of each rolled plate and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom of the sheet.
These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000. The analyses may be performed on
metal discard from mechanical test specimens.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 233

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126 Bis

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 20 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Maximum Carbon 0.22 0.23

Manganese 1.20 - 1.50 1.11 - 1.59
Maximum Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Maximum Sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.15 - 0.30 0.15 - 0.30
Nickel 0.40 - 0.70 0.37 - 0.73
Maximum Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 - 0.60 0.43 - 0.62
Maximum Vanadium 0.03 0.03
Maximum Copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium maximum – 0.04
preferred max. 0.04 –

(1) A maximum vanadium content of 0.01 % can be required for parts to be claded.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the rolling mill shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- rolling and preliminary press flattening operations, if relevant,
- position of the plate in the ingot, and more specifically final rolling direction with respect to the
ingot centreline,
- indication of main rolling direction,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the plate,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

M 2000 / 234  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126 Bis

3.2 ROLLING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.
A record of ingot weight and top and bottom end discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of
Surveillance Agents.

3.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

3.3.1 Delivery in the as-treated condition
The plates shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat
treatment for mechanical properties, shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still
air cooling,

Holding temperature for tempering shall be between 630°C and 660°C. The measured tempering
temperature of the part shall not be less than 621°C. The maximum permissible deviation applicable
to the tempering temperature (± 15°C according to F 8140) is valid for the nominal temperature but
it does not allow temperatures measured on the part less than 621°C, even if the nominal tempering
temperature is less than 636°C. Holding time shall be selected depending on plate thickness, on the
minimum basis of half an hour for every 25 mm in thickness

Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

3.3.2 Delivery in a condition other than as-treated

The plates can be delivered in a condition other than the as-treated condition, at the request of the
formed head Suppliers, and with the agreement of the Supplier and the Contractor, provided that the
formed head Supplier can prove that the hot forming and heat treatment equipment in its possession,
as well as the manufacturing methods employed and its experience in this field, enable it to obtain
mechanical properties over the entire completed part equivalent to those obtained in the same areas
by the steelmaker of the original steel plate after heat treatment for mechanical properties. These
provisions are part of the qualification procedure according to M 140 of the head manufacturing
programme.

A - PLATES FOR FORMING WITHOUT PRIOR WELDING

The plates can be delivered untreated, in this case, the test samples shall undergo simulated heat
treatment for mechanical, properties according to the requirements of M 151. This treatment
shall be carried out in compliance with the requirements of paragraph 3.3.1.

The cycles corresponding to the simulated heat treatment for mechanical properties shall be
recorded and written up in a report.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 235

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126 Bis

B - PLATES TO BE WELDED BEFORE FORMING

The plates shall be delivered after normalizing heat treatment. This treatment comprises:
- austenitizing (at a temperature of between 850 and 925°C),
- air cooling.
The test samples are taken after normalizing heat treatment and should be subjected to simulated
heat treatment for mechanical, properties according to the requirements of M 151. This treatment
shall be carried out in compliance with the requirements of paragraph 3.3.1.

3.4 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from the top and bottom ends of each rolled sheet.

Samples shall be taken from the plate in as-delivered condition by the rolling mill. They shall be
clearly identified and rolling direction shall be indicated.

The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests, both in flat or formed condition.

Test specimens shall be taken at half the distance between the edge of the plate and its centreline.
When this proves impossible, they shall be taken as close to this position as possible. No test
specimen shall be taken at a distance from the treated end of the plate or samples smaller than the
plate thickness.

In order to meet this requirement, the rolling mill shall be allowed to protect the end of the plate or
test samples by means of a thermal buffer welded over the entire thickness of the plate or sample,
prior to heat treatment.

The longitudinal axis of the tension test specimens shall be perpendicular to the final rolling
direction. This axis shall be located at one quarter of the plate thickness, or as close to this position
as possible.

M 2000 / 236  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126 Bis

TABLE II

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 237

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126 Bis

The longitudinal axis of the impact test specimens shall be parallel to the final rolling direction for
"longitudinal" tests, and perpendicular to this direction (and thus parallel to the rolling skin) for
"transverse" tests. Test specimens shall be taken at skin level and at a quarter of the thickness.

The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to rolling skins.

The longitudinal axis of the bending test specimens shall be perpendicular to final rolling direction.
Test specimens shall be taken at skin level.

4.3 TESTING ON SAMPLES REPRESENTATIVE OF THE PLATE IN THE HEAT

TREATED (for mechanical properties) CONDITION
Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling, for plates delivered in the as-treated condition (see paragraph 3.3.1), or on
test specimens taken from samples which have undergone simulated heat treatment for mechanical
properties (see paragraph 3.3.2) in the case of plates delivered in the as-rolled or as normalized
condition.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table III.A: "As-delivered tests" which relates to plates delivered in the as-treated condition and
III B: "Tests performed after simulated heat treatment for mechanical properties" which relates to
plates delivered untreated, or as normalized.

The impact tests shall be performed on test specimens taken as follows:

- from samples located at the top side and at the bottom side of the ingot,
- from each of these test samples, near a rolling skin and at a quarter of the plate thickness,
- one series of test specimens shall be taken parallel to the rolling direction and another series shall
be taken perpendicular to this direction. This shall apply to each sampling location.

A series of tests shall be performed at 0°C, another at - 20°C and another at + 20°C.

For all these tests, the results shall meet the requirements of paragraph 4.1. However, only
transverse impact tests at 0°C, - 20°C, + 20°C and longitudinal impact tests at + 20°C shall be
actually performed.

Usually, longitudinal impact tests at 0°C and - 20°C shall not be performed. The Contractor,
however, may require that these tests be performed at his own expense, on the basis of the results
obtained for the other tests.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

M 2000 / 238  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126 Bis

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted ; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

TABLE III.A

PLATE DELIVERED IN THE HEAT TREATED CONDITION (for mechanical properties)

ORIENTATION OF SPECIMEN
NUMBER
TEST TOP END BOTTOM END OF
TYPE
TEMPERA- SPECIMENS
OF TEST AT QUARTER AT QUARTER
TURE AT SKIN AT SKIN PER TYPE
THICKNESS THICKNESS
OF TEST
Long Trans Long Trans Long Trans Long Trans
AS-DELIVERED (HTMP)

Tension room 1 1 2
350°C 1 1
Bend room 1 1 2
KV impact 0°C 3 3 3 3 12
- 20°C 3 3 3 3 12
+ 20°C 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 24
TESTS AFTER SIMULATED STRESS RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT (HTMP + SSRHT)

Tension room 1 1 2
350°C 1 1
KV impact 0°C 3 3 3 3 12

Key:
HTMP : heat treatment for mechanical properties
SSRHT : simulated stress relieving heat treatment

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 239

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126 Bis

TABLE III.B

PLATE DELIVERED IN THE UNTREATED CONDITION

OR IN THE NORMALIZAED CONDITION

ORIENTATION OF SPECIMEN
NUMBER
TYPE TEST TOP END BOTTOM END OF
TEMPERA- AT QUARTER AT QUARTER SPECIMENS
OF TEST TURE AT SKIN AT SKIN PER TYPE
THICKNESS THICKNESS
OF TEST
Long Trans Long Trans Long Trans Long Trans
AS-DELIVERED (HTMP)

Tension room 1 1 2
350°C 1 1

Bend room 1 1 2
KV impact 0°C 3 3 3 3 12
- 20°C 3 3 6
+ 20°C 3 3 3 3 12
TESTS AFTER SIMULATED STRESS RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT (HTMP + SSRHT)

Tension room 1 1
KV impact 0°C 3 3

Key:
HTMP : heat treatment for mechanical properties
SSRHT : simulated stress relieving heat treatment

Note : This series of tests planned after simulated stress relieving heat treatment are only performed on special
request of the person responsible for the formed head manufacturing.

B -IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. Test temperatures shall be + 20°C,
0°C and - 20°C.

b) Results
The impact energy absorption requirement at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table II must be
fulfilled.

M 2000 / 240  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126 Bis

c) Tests at 0°C
The plate shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements. (See paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance
with the following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective
specimens shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two
sets of three test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the
plate shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Tests at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the plate
shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).
If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close
to the first set. The plate shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required
in paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fail to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for the three tests performed at + 40°C. If the
requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the plate shall be rejected (see
paragraph 4.4).

C - BEND TESTS
a) Test specimens
The dimensions of the test specimen shall meet the requirements of MC 1000.
The longitudinal axis of the test specimen shall be perpendicular to the final rolling direction.
The test specimen shall be 30 mm thick, and one of its faces shall be a rolling skin and shall
constitute the outside face of the bend.

b) Test method
The bend test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.
The test specimen shall be bent until its two legs, whose length shall be 3.5 times the specimen
thickness, are parallel. The mandrel diameter shall be 105 mm.

c) Results
No cracks, tears or blisters shall be accepted on the outside face of the bend.
If this is not the case, the procedures given under 4.3.2.A "Results" shall be followed.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 241

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126 Bis

4.4 RETREATMENT
4.4.1 Plates delivered in the heat-treated condition
Plates rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.4.2 Plates delivered in the untreated or in the normalized condition

If plates are rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests, another
series of test samples shall be taken as specified in paragraph 4.2. These samples shall be subjected
to another simulated stress-relieving heat treatment. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the
test report.

No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
In the case of plates delivered in as-treated condition and upon request of the head manufacturing
manager in other cases, tests shall be performed after simulated stress-relieving heat treatment.

Instructions for the performance of this treatment shall follow the requirements of M 151.

Nominal holding temperature is in principle 615°C.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet
the requirements specified in table III.A and III.B: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving
heat treatment".

The tests shall be performed on samples taken from the plate (see paragraph 4.2).

Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected
to heat treatment for mechanical properties only (see paragraph 4.3).

Specific requirements of paragraph 4.3.1 shall not apply in the case of plates delivered in the heat
treated condition.

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

M 2000 / 242  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2126 Bis

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

At the delivery stage, all surfaces of parts shall be subjected to a visual examination in accordance
with MC 7100. Their surface shall be plane, uniform and free from wrinkles, overlaps, scabs, tears,
cracks and other injurious defects.
After cutting to as-delivered dimensions, the edges shall be visually examined. There shall be no
cleavage or lamination.
If the above-mentioned examinations detect unacceptable defects in the plate, the requirements of
paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Plates shall be subjected to ultrasonic examination in accordance with MC 2400, which lays down
the conditions of applicability of Standard NF EN 10160. The scanning plan and criteria are those of
levels S3 and E4 given in this standard.
In addition, as stipulated in paragraph 9.2.2 of the standard, a test identical to the one performed on
the plate edges shall be performed in the weld areas.

8 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS OR ACCEPTANCE

AS IS WITH PROVISION FOR SUBSEQUENT REPAIR
8.1 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS
Small surface defects may be removed by grinding or chipping, provided the thickness remains
locally within the plate tolerances.
The Supplier may propose removing larger defects by the same method. In this case, he shall present
the Manufacturer with a report giving a detailed description of the detected defect (location, size
seriousness). This proposal shall be accepted only if the Manufacturer judges the remaining
thickness to be sufficient with the safety coefficients applied to the equipment design taken into
account.
In all cases, a magnetic examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000 after the
defective area has been removed.
Note: when a surface repair is made to facilitate ultrasonic examination, no particle examination or
liquid penetrant examination shall be required.

CRITERIA
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 243

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126 Bis

Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length shall be equal to the sum of the length
of this indication shall be equal to the sum of the lengths of the two indications, plus the distance
between them.

8.2 ACCEPTANCE AS IS WITH PROVISION FOR SUBSEQUENT REPAIR

If the plate shows more serious defects, it shall usually be rejected.

The Supplier may exceptionally ask the Manufacturer to accept as is plates with certain surface
defects, with provision for subsequent repair in the Manufacturer's workshops, provided that:
- the total surface area to be corrected does not exceed 1 % of the plate surface area,
- the excavation required to remove all defects never reduces the thickness by more than 15 mm.

The Supplier may also exceptionally ask the Manufacturer to accept as is plates which include
certain defects visible on the edges (cleavage of the plate cut out to final dimensions shall always
entail the rejection of the plate), provided that the excavation required for complete removal of the
defects remains compatible with the execution of welds.

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The plate dimensions shall conform to the requirement of the procurement drawing.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

In addition, the plates shall be marked at two diagonally opposed corners, in such a way that a
person standing at the bottom of the plate shall be able to read the indications in the upper right hand
corner and those in the lower left hand corner. If the plate is delivered in the as-treated condition
(see paragraph 3.3.1) or as-normalized (see paragraph 3.3.2.B), heat treatment shall be marked on
the plate.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

M 2000 / 244  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126 Bis

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been treated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- chart of the defects,
- dimensional check,
- heat treatment (temperature range and holding times).

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 245

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126 Bis

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2126 Bis

CHARACTERIZATION OF THE MATERIAL
TOWARDS FAST FRACTURE

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed where required by equipment specifications or other
relevant contractual documents.

These tests shall be performed only on cold formed plates. In the case of hot formed plates, RTNDT
temperature and KV energy on the upper shelf shall be determined in formed condition.

- DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact test.

The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.

The longitudinal axis of the KV test specimens shall be located at a depth equal to at least one
quarter of the plate thickness.

The Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken in such a way that they are located at a depth
equal to at least one quarter of the plate thickness.

The test pertinent area of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the quenched end
equal to the thickness of the part. For this requirement to be met, the bottom end of the part may be
protected by a thermal buffer, the height of which at least equals the thickness of the part. This
buffer may be welded to the part.

The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.

The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.

KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of these
specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

Each series of test shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.

Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.

Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions
of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to - 12°C.

M 2000 / 246  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126 Bis

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value shall be determined from a series of tests at the top end of ingots and from another set at
the bottom end.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph, with the following
exceptions:
- the specimens must be taken in HTMP + SSRHT condition,
- the specimens must be taken in the axial orientation of the part,
- the notch axes must be parallel to the skins.

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

TABLE A 1

NAME CONDITION ORIENTATION TEST NUMBER OF

OF OF OF TEMPERATURE SPECIMENS PER TYPE
TEST SPECIMENS SPECIMEN IN °C OF TEST

RTNDT

Pellini
drop HTMP + SSRHT transverse (1) 8 (2)
weight
KV impact HTMP + SSRHT transverse (1) 12 (2)

Key:
HTMP = Heat treatment for mechanical properties
SSRHT = Simulated stress relieving heat treatment

Note: - Where samples required here are identical to and heat treated in the same manner as those specified in
tables III A tests do not need to be repeated.

(1) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000.

(2) Half of the specimens shall be taken from samples located at the top end of the ingot and the other half from
samples located at the bottom end of the ingot.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 247

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2126 Bis

M 2000 / 248  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2127

M 2127

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

18 MND 5 MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM
ALLOY STEEL HOT-FORMED WELDLESS HEADS FOR
PRESSURE-RETAINING BOUNDARIES OF
PRESSURIZED WATER NUCLEAR REACTORS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable manganese-nickel-molybdenum alloy steel weldless hot-formed
heads or parts thereof for pressurized water nuclear reactor pressure-retaining boundaries.

1 BASE PRODUCT
Plate used for the manufacture of dished heads shall be procured as per part procurement
specification M 2126: "18 MND 5 manganese-nickel-molybdenum alloy steel for PWR pressure-
retaining boundaries".

2 PLATE REPAIR CONDITIONS

As a general rule, the procured plates shall be free of defects. Part procurement specification
M 2126, however, states that exceptionally plates with certain types of defects may be accepted with
provision for subsequent repair by welding in the Manufacturer's workshop. This operation shall not
be carried out until the heads have been subjected to heat treatment for mechanical properties.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the Supplier shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- position of the part in the plate, more specifically, ingot centreline and final rolling directions
shall be marked on the part and on the test samples (see paragraphs 4.2 and 4.6),

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 249

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2127

- forming process identification,

- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final regenerative heat treatment or heat
treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples in the part,
- drawing with position of the test specimens on samples.
The various heating, forming, possible machining, heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive
testing operations shall be presented in chronological order.
The Supplier must prove, by means of the required test results, that the selected manufacturing
process allows the required dimensional characteristics and mechanical properties to be obtained.

3.2 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

3.2.1 Plates delivered in as-treated condition
After forming, the heads shall undergo a regenerative heat treatment; this shall be identical to heat
treatment for mechanical properties defined in paragraph 3.3.1 in procurement specification
M 2126.

3.2.2 Delivery in the untreated condition

After forming, the heads shall be subjected to heat treatment for mechanical properties, as defined in
paragraph 3.3.1 of part procurement specification M 2126.
For tempering, temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part.

3.3 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES - METAL STRUCTURE

4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Required values for mechanical properties are identical to those indicated in table I.

4.2 SAMPLING
The test samples shall be taken from coupons left attached to the part during cutting, and which have
undergone the same regenerative heat treatment or heat treatment for mechanical properties, as
defined in paragraph 3.2. If this proves impossible and only in the case of heads made from plates
delivered in the as-treated condition, they shall be taken from coupons cut from the base plate. In
this case, the coupons must undergo all forming heat cycling along with the part, and they must be
welded to the part before it is subjected to regenerative heat treatment.

M 2000 / 250  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2127

TABLE I

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 251

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2127

The coupons shall be appropriately marked and, more particularly, the direction of final rolling shall
be indicated.

The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.

No test specimen shall be taken closer to the sample or coupon edges than a distance equal to the
plate thickness. In order to fulfil this condition, the forming shop can protect the edges by means of
a thermal buffer welded over the entire sample or coupon thickness.

The longitudinal axis of the tension and impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the final
rolling direction for "transverse" tests, and parallel to this direction for "longitudinal" tests. The axis
shall be at a quarter of the plate thickness or as close to this position as possible for quarter
thickness testing.

The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to rolling skins.

The longitudinal axis of the bending test specimens shall be perpendicular to final rolling direction.
Test specimens shall be taken at skin level.

A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
position of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme
(see paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens and test temperatures are shown in
tables II A and II B "As-delivered tests" dealing with hot worked heads made from plates delivered
in the as-treated condition and from plates delivered in the untreated condition, respectively.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

M 2000 / 252  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2127

The following values shall be recorded:

- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table I.

If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product), or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted, if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective; if the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

TABLE II.A

HEADS FROM AS-TREATED PLATE

ORIENTATION OF SPECIMEN NUMBER

TEST OF
NAME
TEMPERA- AT SKIN AT QUARTER THICKNESS SPECIMENS
OF TEST
TURE PER TYPE
Longitudinal Transverse Longitudinal Transverse OF TEST

AS-DELIVERED (HTMP)

Tension room 1 1
350°C 1 1

Bend 1 1
KV impact 0°C 3 3 6
- 20°C 3 3
+ 20°C 3 3
TESTS AFTER SIMULATED STRESS RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT (HTMP + SSRHT)

room 1 1
Tension
350°C 1 1
KV impact 0°C 3 3
Key:
HTMP : Heat treatment for mechanical properties
SSRHT : Simulated stress relieving heat treatment

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 253

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2127

TABLE II.B

HEADS FORMED FROM NON-HEAT-TREATED PLATE

ORIENTATION OF SPECIMEN NUMBER

TEST OF
NAME
TEMPERA- AT SKIN AT QUARTER THICKNESS SPECIMENS
OF TEST
TURE PER TYPE
Longitudinal Transverse Longitudinal Transverse OF TEST

AS-DELIVERED (HTMP)

Tension room 1 1
350°C 1 1

Bend 1 1
KV impact 0°C 3 3 3 9
- 20°C 3 3 6
+ 20°C 3 3 6
TESTS AFTER SIMULATED STRESS RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT (HTMP + SSRHT)

room 1 1
Tension
350°C 1 1
KV impact 0°C 3 3
Key:
HTMP : Heat treatment for mechanical properties
SSRHT : Simulated stress relieving heat treatment

B -IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.

Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series.

Their percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value shall be recorded for information
purposes.

Test temperatures shall be + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table I must
be fulfilled.

M 2000 / 254  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2127

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (paragraph 4.4).

However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no more
than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with the
following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall
be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test
specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

d) Test at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part shall
be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of the results for all six tests is as required
in paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for the three tests performed at + 40°C. If the
requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the part shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

C - BEND TESTS
a) Test specimens
The dimensions of the test specimen shall meet the requirements of MC 1000.

The longitudinal axis of the test specimen shall be perpendicular to the final rolling direction.
The test specimen shall be 30 mm thick, and one of its faces shall be rolling skin and shall
constitute the outside face of the bend.

b) Test method
The bend test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

The test specimen shall be bent until its two legs, whose length shall be 3.5 times the specimen
thickness, are parallel. The mandrel diameter shall be 105 mm.

If this is not the case, the procedures given under 4.3.2. A "Results" shall be followed.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 255

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2127

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.

In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.

No more than two retreatments shall be allowed at the rolling mill and the part Supplier altogether.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.
Nominal holding temperature is in principle 615°C.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet
the requirements specified in tables II.A and II.B: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving
heat treatment".

The tests shall be performed on samples taken from the part having undergone regenerative heat
treatment or heat treatment for mechanical properties, in the conditions defined in paragraph 4.2.
The sample is subjected separately in a laboratory furnace to the stress relieving heat treatment
defined in paragraph 4.5.1. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected to
regenerative heat treatment or heat treatment for mechanical properties only.

4.6 BASE METAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION-SURFACE DEFECTS

All surfaces of the part shall be subject to a visual examination at the final stage in accordance with
MC 7100. Surfaces shall be smooth, free of scratches, laps, cracks, blisters, inclusions or any other
injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination shall be
performed on surfaces to be clad.
The examination procedures are those given in MC 4000 or MC 5000.

M 2000 / 256  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2127

CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

Magnetic particle examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.
If the above-mentioned examinations detect unacceptable defects in the plate, the requirements of
paragraph 7 of this specification shall apply.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
After forming and regenerative heat treatment or heat treatment for mechanical properties, an
ultrasonic examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 2400, which lays down the
conditions of applicability of standard NF EN 10160.
The scanning plan and criteria are those of levels S3 and E4 given in this standard.
In addition, as stipulated in paragraph 9.2.2 of the standard, a test identical to the one performed on
the plate edges shall be performed in the weld areas.

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

The only permitted defects are those which can be removed by grinding while remaining within the
dimensional tolerance range for the part.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 257

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2127

No repair by welding shall be permitted at the Supplier's; however, the requirements of paragraph 8
in M 2126 relative to the plate shall apply to the head.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.
In addition, rolling direction shall be indicated.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been retreated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- defect mapping,
- dimensional check.

M 2000 / 258  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2127

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 259

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2127

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2127

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed where required by equipment specifications or other
relevant contractual documents.
The test specimens shall be taken from parts which have undergone regenerative heat treatment or
heat treatment for mechanical properties, in the same conditions as defined in the first two parts of
paragraph 4.2. Simulated stress-relieving treatment as defined in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace.

- DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact tests.
The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.
The longitudinal axis of the KV test specimens shall be located at a depth equal to at least one
quarter of the plate thickness.
The Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken in such a way that they are located at a depth
equal to at least one quarter of the plate thickness.
The test-pertinent area of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the quenched end
equal to the thickness of the part. For this requirement to be met, the bottom end of the part may be
protected by a thermal buffer, the height of which at least equals the thickness of the part. This
buffer may be welded to the part.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of these
specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Each series of test shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.
Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions
of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to - 12°C.

M 2000 / 260  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2127

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph, with the following
exceptions:
- the specimens must be taken in HTMP + SSRHT condition,
- the specimens must be taken in the axial orientation of the part,
- the notch axes must be parallel to the skins.

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

TABLE A 1

NAME CONDITION ORIENTATION TEST

OF OF NUMBER OF SPECIMENS
OF TEMPERATURE
SPECIMENS SPECIMEN PER TYPE OF TEST
TEST IN °C

RTNDT

Pellini
drop HTMP + SSRHT transverse (1) 8
weight
KV impact HTMP + SSRHT transverse (1) 12

Key:
HTMP = Heat treatment for mechanical properties
SSRHT = Simulated stress relieving heat treatment

Note: - Where samples required here are identical to and heat treated in the same manner as those specified in
tables II A and II B tests do not need to be repeated.

(1) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 261

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2127

M 2000 / 262  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2128

M 2128

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

HEADS OBTAINED BY HOT FORMING OF

TWO WELDED HALF-PLATES MADE OF 18 MND 5
MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM
ALLOY STEEL FOR PRESSURE RETAINING
BOUNDARIES OF PWR REACTOR VESSELS

0 SCOPE
This specification concerns the weldable 18 MND 5 manganese-nickel-molybdenum alloy steel
heads, obtained by hot forming of two previously welded half-plates, for pressure-retaining
boundaries of PWR reactor vessels.

1 BASIC MATERIAL
The plates used for manufacturing the heads shall be produced in the normalized condition
according to part procurement specification M 2126: "18 MND 5 manganese-nickel-molybdenum
alloy steel plates for pressurized water reactor pressure-retaining boundaries".

2 PLATE REPAIR CONDITIONS

As a general rule, the plates procured must be free of defects. However, part procurement
specification M 2126 exceptionally states that plates comprising certain types of defects can be
accepted for weld repairs in the Manufacturer'shops. This can only be done after heat treatment of
the head for mechanical properties.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to the commencement of manufacturing operations, the Manufacturer shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall in particular include the following:
- the heat treatment condition of the plate at procurement (normalized condition),

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 263

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2128

- the position of the part in the plate, in particular the direction of the ingot axis and the final
rolling direction marked on the part and on the test samples (see paragraphs 4.1.2, and 4.2.2),
- the welding process,
- the forming method adopted,
- the forming temperature range and the number of heats,
- the conditions of intermediate heat treatment and final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- the position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on the samples.

The various machining, welding, heating and forming, heat treatment, test sampling and non-
destructive examination sampling operations are given in chronological order.

The necessary test results shall be produced to demonstrate that the manufacturing conditions enable
the guaranteed dimensional characteristics and mechanical properties to be obtained.

3.2 WELDING
Refer to SECTION IV (welding) plus the following additions:

3.2.1 Acceptance of filler materials

- S 2534: the mould shall undergo the following heat treatment:
a) heat treatment for mechanical properties:
. austenitizing at a temperature between 850 and 925 °C,
. air quenching,
. tempering at 640 ± 5 °C.

b) Simulated stress relieving heat treatment.

3.2.2 Qualification of welding procedure

- S3224b): The qualification assembly shall undergo a simulated forming thermal cycle; this
treatment is performed at the forming temperature in a single cycle with a hold time at least equal
to the cumulative hold times of the consecutive forming periods performed on the part.

3.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

After forming, the heads shall undergo heat treatment for mechanical properties, which shall
include:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850 and 925 °C,

M 2000 / 264  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2128

- quenching by immersion in water,

- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling.
Nominal holding temperature for tempering shall be between 635°C and 665°C. Holding time shall
be selected depending on head thickness on the minimum basis of half an hour for every 25 mm in
thickness. Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part.
Thermocouple locations shall be specified in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.3), retreatment shall be performed in accordance with
the same instructions as above.

3.4 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES - STRUCTURES

4.1 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF THE UNWELDED BASE METAL
4.1.1 Required values
The mechanical properties requirements are given in table I below:

4.1.2 Sampling
Test samples shall be taken from coupons left attached to the part during cutting. These coupons
shall be subjected to the heat treatment for mechanical properties stipulated in paragraph 3.3 at the
same time as the part. If it is impossible to leave the coupons attached, the test samples shall be
taken from coupons cut from the mother plate. In this case, the coupons shall undergo a simulated
forming heat treatment cycle; this treatment is carried out at the forming temperature in a single
cycle and with a hold time equal to the cumulative hold times of the consecutive forming heats
performed on the part. The coupons shall be welded to the part before it undergoes heat treatment
for mechanical properties, or, if this is impossible, they should undergo heat treatment for
mechanical properties at the same time as the part.
The coupons shall be clearly identified and in particular show the final rolling direction.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
Test specimens shall be taken at half the distance between the edge of the plate and its centreline.
When this proves impossible, they shall be taken as close to this position as possible. No specimen
shall be taken at a distance from the edges of the samples or coupons smaller than the thickness of
the plate. In order to meet this requirement, the Supplier shall be allowed to protect the edges of the
plate by means of a thermal buffer welded to the entire thickness of the samples or coupons.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 265

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2128

TABLE I

M 2000 / 266  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2128

The longitudinal axis of the tension and impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the final
rolling direction for "transverse" tests and parallel to it for "lengthwise" tests. The axis shall be
located at one quarter the thickness of the plate or as close as possible to this position for the quarter
thickness test.

The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the rolling skin.

The longitudinal axis of the bending test specimens shall be perpendicular to the final rolling
direction. Test specimens shall be taken at skin level.

A drawing showing the position of the samples on the parts and a dimensional drawing showing the
position of specimens on these samples, are attached to the manufacturing programme
(see paragraph 3.1).

4.1.3 Testing of representative as-delivered part samples

4.1.3.1 Number and content of tests
The number of tests to be performed, the orientation of test specimens and the test temperatures are
shown in Table II: "Tests in the as-delivered condition".

4.1.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND A HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
The results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table I.

If this is not the case, and if the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product), or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
test specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen.
If the results of this second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 267

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2128

TABLE II

M 2000 / 268  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2128

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.3).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens, as well as the test conditions, shall be as specified in MC 1000.

Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value shall be recorded for information purposes.

The test temperatures shall be + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at + 20°C, 0 °C and - 20°C shown in table I must
be fulfilled.

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.3) if it fails to meet any one of these requirements.
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all the other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value) retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens
shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three
test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the plate shall be
rejected (see paragraph 4.3).

d) Tests at - 20°C
If the average of results for the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part shall
be rejected (see paragraph 4.3).

If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required in
paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1.1, a check
shall be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for three tests performed at + 40°C. If the
requirements of paragraph 4.1.1 are not met at + 40°C, the part shall be rejected (see
paragraph 4.3).

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 269

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2128

C -BEND TESTS
a) Test specimens
The dimensions of the test specimen, whose longitudinal axis shall be perpendicular to the final
rolling direction, shall be as stipulated in MC 1000.

Its thickness shall be 30 mm and one of its faces shall be the rolling skin of the plate and shall
constitute the outside face of the bend.

b) Test method
The bend test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

The test specimen shall be bent until its two legs, whose length shall be 3.5 times the specimen
thickness, are parallel. The mandrel diameter shall be 105 mm.

c) Result
No cracks, tears or blisters shall be accepted on the outside face of the bend, failing which, the
procedures given in 4.1.3.2.A "Results" shall be followed.

4.1.4 Testing of samples subjected to simulated stress relieving heat treatment

4.1.4.1 Simulated stress relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.

Holding temperature shall be 615 °C.

4.1.4.2 Test conditions

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet
the requirements of table II: "tests performed after simulated stress relieving heat treatment."
Samples for these tests shall be taken after the part has undergone heat treatment for mechanical
properties as described in paragraph 4.1.2. Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment of sample shall
be carried out separately in a laboratory furnace as defined in paragraph 4.1.4.1. Conditions and
results to be obtained shall be the same as those required for samples subjected to heat treatment for
mechanical properties only.

4.1.5 Test coupons

The requirements of M 370 shall apply.

4.2 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES IN THE WELD

(DEPOSITED METAL AND HAZ)
In compliance with the requirements of SECTION IV, chapter S 7800, a weld test specimen is to be
made for each part.

M 2000 / 270  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2128

4.2.1 Required values

The mechanical properties values required are those given in table I for the transverse orientation.

4.2.2 Sampling
The coupon is located in the axis of the weld and is welded at the same time as the weld. It
undergoes the simulated forming cycle defined in paragraph 3.2.2 followed, after welding to the
part, by heat treatment for mechanical properties (if the coupon cannot be welded to the part, it must
be subjected to heat treatment for mechanical properties at the same time as the part).
It shall be cut into three parts:
- the first shall be subjected to simulated stress relieving heat treatment as defined in
paragraph 4.1.4.1. This part shall be analyzed as quickly as possible upon completion of
simulated stress relieving heat treatment, for possible retreatment in the conditions stipulated in
paragraph 4.3,
- the second shall be subjected to the same heat treatment including the hot finishing heat cycle
when necessary - as the production weld and shall be treated at the same time as the production
weld, unless technically impossible,
- the third shall be retained until acceptance of the weld coupon report.

4.2.3 Number and content of tests

- On the first part of the test-coupon, mechanical tests are performed. These tests comprise at least:
. transverse tensile tests,
. KV impact tests at 0°C performed in the deposited metal and in the HAZ.
- On the second part, the series of tests to be performed is the same as for the welding procedure
qualification test assemblies (see S 3000). Additional toughness tests shall, however, be
conducted when required by the equipment specification or other documents applicable to the
contract.

4.3 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.

In such cases, test coupons shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in paragraphs 4.1.2 and
4.2.2. The tests to be conducted shall be the same as those stipulated in paragraphs 4.1.3, 4.1.4
and 4.2.3.

The total cumulative number of retreatments performed by the rolling mill and by the Supplier shall
not exceed two.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 271

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2128

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

5.1 ON THE UNWELDED PART
All surfaces of the part shall be subject to a visual examination at the final stage in accordance with
MC 7100. Surfaces shall be smooth, free of scratches, laps, cracks, blisters, inclusions or any other
injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination shall be
performed on surfaces to be clad.
The examination procedures are those given in MC 4000 or MC 5000.

CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

Magnetic particle examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.
If the above-mentioned examination detects unacceptable defects on the part, the requirements of
paragraph 7 of this specification shall apply.

5.2 WELD
Refer to the stipulations of SECTION IV, chapter S 7000.

M 2000 / 272  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2128

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
After forming and regenerative heat treatment or heat treatment for mechanical properties, an
ultrasonic examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 2400, which lays down the
conditions of applicability of standard NF EN 10160.

The scanning plan and criteria are those of levels S3 and E4 given in this standard.

In addition, as stipulated in paragraph 9.2.2, of the standard, a test identical to the one performed on
the plate edges shall be performed in the weld areas.

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

7.1 ON THE UNWELDED PART
Only those defects which can be removed by grinding shall be tolerated, provided the thickness
remains locally within the part tolerances.
In principle, no repair welds shall be authorized. However, the requirements of paragraph 8 of
M 2126 concerning the plate shall apply to the head.

7.2 WELD
Refer to SECTION IV, chapter S 7000.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The part dimensions shall be checked against the procurement drawing.
The main dimensions shall be recorded and the values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.
In addition, the rolling direction shall also be marked.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 273

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2128

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
before delivery of the part:
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been retreated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,

- chart of the defects,

- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 2000 / 274  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2128

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2128

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed when required by equipment specifications or other
documents applicable to the contract.
These tests shall be performed on samples taken from the head end of the plate, in the same
conditions as specified in paragraph 4.1.2. The sample shall be separately subjected to simulated
stress relieving heat treatment in a laboratory furnace, as defined in paragraph 4.1.4.1 of this
specification.

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

The RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact tests.
The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.
The longitudinal axis of the KV test specimens shall be located at a depth equal to at least one
quarter of the plate thickness.
The Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken in such a way that they are located at a depth
equal to one quarter the plate thickness.
The test pertinent area of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the quenched end at
least equal to the thickness of the plate. For this requirement to be met, the Supplier may protect the
edges with a thermal buffer, which is welded over the entire thickness of the samples or coupons.
The notch axes of the KV impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skin.
Test specimen orientation and test temperatures are given in table A1 below.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from the adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each series of tests.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value shall be recorded for information purposes.
Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions
of these specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to - 12°C.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 275

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2128

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph, with the following
exceptions:
- the specimens must be taken in HTMP + SSRHT condition,
- the specimens must be taken in the axial orientation of the part,
- the notch axes must be parallel to the skins.

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

TABLE A1

NAME CONDITION ORIENTATION TEST

OF OF NUMBER OF SPECIMENS
OF TEMPERATURE
SPECIMENS SPECIMEN PER TYPE OF TEST
TEST IN °C

RTNDT

Pellini
drop HTMP + SSRHT transverse (1) 8
weight
KV impact HTMP + SSRHT transverse (1) 12

Key:
HTMP = Heat treatment for mechanical properties
SSRHT = Simulated stress relieving heat treatment

Note: - The results of the KV impact tests specified in table II, can be used if they correspond to the same
samples and heat treatment conditions.

(1) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000.

M 2000 / 276  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131

M 2131

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM
ALLOY STEEL FORGINGS
FOR PRESSURIZER HEADS
AND REACTOR VESSEL HEADS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable manganese-nickel-molybdenum alloy steel 16 MND 5 forgings
for reactor vessel heads and 18 MND 5 for pressurizer heads of pressurized water nuclear reactor
vessel.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-
degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
In addition, he shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of the ingot and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom of the ingot. These
analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000. The analyses may be performed on metal
discard from mechanical test specimens.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 277

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 16 MND 5 and 18 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %
Max. Carbon 0.20 0.22
Manganese 1.15 - 1.55 (1) 1.15 - 1.60
Max. Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Max. Sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.10 - 0.30 0.10 - 0.30
Nickel 0.50 - 0.80 0.50 - 0.80
Max. Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 - 0.55 0.43 - 0.57
Max. Vanadium 0.01 0.01
Max Copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium Max. – 0.04
Preferred Max. 0.04 –
Max. Cobalt 0.03 (2) 0.03 (2)
(1) For grade 18 MND 5 the manganese content as determined by ladle analysis is extended to 1.60%.
(2) The cobalt content limitation as determined by ladle or product analysis applies only to vessel heads.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages
- the position and orientation of the part in the ingot, enabling it to be checked that the face to be
clad is as far away as possible from ingot segregation areas,
- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and
overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawing of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

M 2000 / 278  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2131

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.
A record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance
Agents.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough-machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic examination.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The part shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat treatment
for mechanical properties, shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling. Nominal holding temperature for tempering shall be between 635°C and 665°C.
Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. Thermocouple
locations shall be specified in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instruction as above.

3.5 GAUGING OF VESSEL HEADS

If, subsequent to heat treatment for mechanical properties, the rough-machined part is so severely
deformed that final shape cannot be obtained by machining, gauging shall be permitted after heating
the part to 550°C maximum.
Gauging shall always be followed by heat treatment consisting in heating the part to 570°C
to 600°C.
Minimum holding time at this temperature shall be 4 hours. Cooling shall take place in still air.
The thermal cycles shall be recorded as stipulated in paragraph 3.4. The test coupons shall remain
attached to the part throughout these operations.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 279

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131

3.6 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements as shown in table II.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken at two diametrically opposed locations X and Y from a test ring
consisting of a prolongation attached to every part.

Samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been treated for mechanical properties; they shall
be clearly identified and their direction of maximum extension shall be indicated.

The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.

The test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their centreline is at one quarter of the part
thickness, from the inside face.

No test specimen shall be taken at a distance from the edges of the samples or coupons smaller than
the thickness of the part.

To meet this requirement, the Supplier shall be allowed to protect the edges by means of a thermal
buffer, the height of which is at least equal to the thickness of the part. This thermal buffer, the
width of which shall be at least equal the thickness of the part, shall be welded to the part.

The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.

A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme (see
paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

M 2000 / 280  n° 137-2012


REQUIRED VALUE
TEST
NAME OF 16MND5 18MND5

n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

TEMPERATURE PROPERTIES
TEST
IN °C
CIRCONFERENTIAL CIRCONFERENTIAL
DIRECTION DIRECTION

Room Rp0,2 minimum value 400 MPa 420 MPa

Rm 550/670 MPa 580/700 MPa
A% (5d) minimum value
Tension 20 20
350 Rtp0,2 minimum value 300 MPa 350 MPa
Rm minimum value 497 MPa 522 MPa
TABLE II

LONG. AND TRANS. LONG. AND TRANS.

0 Minimum average value 80 J 80 J

Minimum individual value (1) 60 J 60 J
- 20 Minimum average value 56 J 56 J
KV Impact
Minimum individual value (1) 40 J 40 J

+ 20 Minimum individual value 88 J 88 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value shall be accepted per series of three test specimens.

A schema showing the orientation of the test specimens is appended to the present specification (see Annex 2).

M 2000 / 281
M 2131
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table III "As-delivered tests".

TABLE III

CONDITION ORIENTATION TEST NUMBER OF SAMPLES

NAME OF
OF OF TEMPERATURE SPECIMEN PER
TEST
SPECIMEN SPECIMEN IN °C TYPE OF TEST X Y

AS-DELIVERED TESTS
C Room 1 X X
Tension HTMT
C 350 1 X X
A 0 3 X X
KV A - 20 3 X X
impact A + 20 3 X X
HTMT X X
C 0 3
C - 20 3 X X
C + 20 3 X X

TESTS PERFORMED AFTER SIMULATED STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT

C Room 1 X
Tension HTMT + SSRHT
C 350 1 X

KV A 0 3 X
HTMT + SSRHT
Impact C 0 3 X

Légende :

HTMT = heat treatment for mechanical properties

SSRHT = simulated stress relieving heat treatment
C = circumferential
A = axial

A schema showing the orientation of the test specimens is appended to the present specification
(see Annex 2).

4.3.2 Additional impact tests

These tests are only performed in the case of vessel heads.
In order to determine how the product energy absorbed by breakage varies with temperature, in
addition to impact tests at - 20°C, 0°C and + 20°C, three tests will be performed at - 40°C, three at
+ 40°C and three at - 60°C, and if required three more tests shall be performed at + 60°C in order to
ascertain the shape of the curve. These tests shall be performed on specimens taken transversely
from one of the samples (the longitudinal axis of test specimen is perpendicular to the part's major
working direction).

M 2000 / 282  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131

4.3.3 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

The following values shall be recorded:

- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.

If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS AND PLOTTING OF DUCTILE-TO-BRITTLE TRANSITION CURVE

a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end to end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens and test conditions shall be specified in MC 1000.

Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes.

For the pressurizer head the tests shall be performed at - 20°C, 0°C and + 20°C.

For the vessel head the temperatures for additional tests used to plot the ductile-to-brittle
transition curve shall be those indicated in paragraph 4.3.2.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 283

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131

b) Results
The impact at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table II must be fulfilled.

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure: two sets of three test specimens shall be tested at the same temperature
as the first test. If results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do not comply with the
requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Tests at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part shall
be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required in
paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for the three additional tests performed at
+ 40°C (see paragraph 4.3.2). If the requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the
part shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.

In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.

No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.

M 2000 / 284  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131

4.5.2 Test conditions

The number of tests, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet the requirements
specified in table III: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving heat treatment".
Samples of these tests shall be taken from the test ring (see paragraph 4.2) after the part has
undergone heat treatment for mechanical properties.
Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected
to heat treatment for mechanical properties only (see paragraph 4.3).
The additional impact tests mentioned in paragraph 4.3.2 shall be performed on samples which have
been subjected to simulated stress-relieving heat treatment.

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be carefully examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final
stage in accordance with MC 7100.
Parts should be sound and free from strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination shall be
performed on surfaces to be clad.
The examination procedures are those given in MC 4000 or MC 5000.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Liquid penetrant examination
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indications shall be considered as unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 285

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131

Magnetic particle examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed after final machining of the part or at as advanced a stage as
possible for portions which cannot be examined in finished form.

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe characteristics are usually as follows:
- for straight beam examination: probe frequency 3 to 4 MHz,
- for angle beam examination: probe frequency 2 MHz, refraction angle 45°.

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 4.
The examination shall be performed from the inner surface for straight beam examination as well as
for angle beam examination. Angle beam examination shall be done for two opposite directions
along meridians and parallels (4 sensing directions).

M 2000 / 286  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in method DGS in
standard NF EN 10228-3.

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.
After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000.
The criteria to be applied are those defined in paragraph 6 of the present specification.

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
After heat treatment.
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 287

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been retreated this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 2000 / 288  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2131

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE,
TRANSITION CURVE AND UPPER SHELF KV ENERGY

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed where required by equipment specifications or other
relevant contractual documents.

KV TRANSITION CURVE
The longitudinal axis of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the inner face of the
wall equal to a quarter of the wall thickness.
The test-pertinent area of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the quenched end
equal to the thickness of the part.
To meet this requirement, the Supplier is allowed to protect the bottom end of the part by means of
a thermal buffer, the height of which is at least equal to the thickness of the part. This thermal
buffer, shall be welded to the part.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
TABLE A1

NAME CONDITION ORIENTATION TEST NUMBER NUMBER OF

OF OF OF TEMPERA- OF SPECIMENS
TEST SPECIMENS SPECIMEN TURE IN °C LOTS PER LOT

Ductile-to  1 8
brittle HTMP + SSRHT T (1) 2 
transition curve  1
7
(KV impact
method)

RTNDT
HTMP + SSRHT C (2) 2 4
Pellini drop
weight

KV impact HTMP + SSRHT T (2) 2 9

Key:
HTMP = heat treatment for mechanical properties
SSRHT = simulated stress relieving heat treatment
C = circumferential
T = transverse direction (longitudinal axis of test specimen is perpendicular to part's major working
direction)

(1) These tests are only performed in the case of vessel heads. They shall be performed at 5 temperatures, one of
which must be 0°C, the shape of the upper shelf of the curve shall be defined as accurately as possible.
(2) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 289

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131

Note: - The results of the tests requested in Table III corresponding to the same samplings and heat treatments may
be used.

- Whenever two lots of test specimens are considered, one shall be taken from each test sample.

- When only one lot of test specimens is considered, it may be taken from any test sample.

KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end to end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Each series of test shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value shall be recorded for information purposes.
A schema showing the orientation of the test specimens is appended to the present specification (see
Annex 2).

RESULTS
The transition curve is plotted for information purposes only.

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph, with the following
exceptions:
- the specimens must be taken in HTMP + SSRHT condition,
- the specimens must be taken in the axial orientation of the part,
- the notch axes must be parallel to the skins.

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact tests.
The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.
The longitudinal axis of KV test specimens must be located at a distance from the inner face of the
wall equal to a quarter of the wall thickness.
The Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be cut out within the area between the inner quarter and
half the thickness of the head.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end to end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens as well as test procedures are specified in MC 1000.

M 2000 / 290  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131

Each series of test will consist of the fracture of three test specimens.

Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.

Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end to end locations. The shape
and dimensions of test specimens, as well as test procedures are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to - 20°C for the heads vessel and
- 12°C for the heads pressurizer.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 291

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131

ANNEX 2 TO SPECIFICATION M 2131

ORIENTATION OF TEST SPECIMENS FOR MECHANICAL TESTING

M 2000 / 292  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131 Bis

M 2131 Bis

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM
20 MND 5 ALLOY STEEL FORGINGS
FOR PRESSURIZER HEADS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable 20 MND 5 manganese-nickel-molybdenum alloy steel forgings
for PWR pressurizer heads.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-
degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
In addition, he shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of the ingot and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom of the ingot. These
analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000. The analyses may be performed on metal
discard from mechanical test specimens.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 293

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131 Bis

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 20 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %
Max. Carbon 0.22 0.23
Manganese 1.20 - 1.50 1.11 - 1.59
Max. Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Max. Sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.15 - 0.30 0.15 - 0.30
Nickel 0.40 - 1.00 0.37 - 1.03
Max. Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 - 0.60 0.43 - 0.62
Max. Vanadium 0.01 0.01
Max Copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium Max. – 0.04
Preferred Max. 0.04 –

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages
- the position and orientation of the part in the ingot, enabling it to be checked that the face to be
clad is as far away as possible from ingot segregation areas,
- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and
overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawing of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

M 2000 / 294  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2131 Bis

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.
A record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance
Agents.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough-machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic examination.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The part shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat treatment
for mechanical properties, shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling.
Nominal holding temperature for tempering shall be between 630°C and 660°C. The measured
tempering temperature of the part shall be not less than 621°C. The maximum permissible deviation
of the tempering temperature (± 15°C according to F 8140) holds true at nominal temperature
although temperatures measured on the part of less than 621°C are not allowed, even in cases where
the nominal tempering temperature is under 636°C.
Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. Thermocouple
locations shall be specified in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instruction as above.

3.5 GAUGING OF VESSEL HEADS

If, subsequent to heat treatment for mechanical properties, the rough-machined part is so severely
deformed that final shape cannot be obtained by machining, gauging shall be permitted after heating
the part to 550°C maximum.
Gauging shall always be followed by heat treatment consisting in heating the part to 570°C
to 600°C.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 295

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131 Bis

Minimum holding time at this temperature shall be 4 hours. Cooling shall take place in still air.
The thermal cycles shall be recorded as stipulated in paragraph 3.4. The test coupons shall remain
attached to the part throughout these operations.

3.6 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements as shown in table II.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken at two diametrically opposed locations X and Y from a test ring
consisting of a prolongation attached to every part.
Samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been treated for mechanical properties; they shall
be clearly identified and the indication of the major working direction shall be reported.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
The test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their centreline is at one quarter of the part
thickness, from the inside face.
No test specimen shall be taken at a distance from the edges of the samples or coupons smaller than
the thickness of the part.
To meet this requirement, the Supplier shall be allowed to protect the edges by means of a thermal
buffer, the height of which is at least equal to the thickness of the part. This thermal buffer, the
width of which shall be at least equal the thickness of the part, shall be welded to the part.
The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.
A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme
(see paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

M 2000 / 296  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131 Bis

TABLE II

TEST REQUIRED VALUE

NAME OF
TEMPERATURE PROPERTIES
TEST CIRCONFERENTIAL
IN °C
DIRECTION

Room Rp0,2 minimum value 420 MPa

Rm 620/795 MPa
Tension A% (5d) minimum value 20
350 Rtp0,2 minimum value 350 MPa
Rm minimum value 560 MPa
LONG. AND TRANS
0 Minimum average value 80 J
Minimum individual value (1) 60 J
KV – 20 Minimum average value 56 J
Impact Minimum individual value (1) 40 J

+ 20 Minimum individual value 88 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value shall be accepted per series of three test
specimens.

A schema showing the orientation of the test specimens is appended to the present specification
(see Annex 2).

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table III "As-delivered tests".

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 297

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131 Bis

TABLE III

CONDITION ORIENTATION TEST NUMBER OF SAMPLES

NAME OF
OF OF TEMPERATURE SPECIMEN PER
TEST
SPECIMEN SPECIMEN IN °C TYPE OF TEST X Y

AS-DELIVERED TESTS
C Room 1 X X
Tension HTMT
C 350 1 X X
A 0 3 X X
A - 20 3 X X
KV A + 20 3 X X
HTMT X X
impact C 0 3
C - 20 3 X X
C + 20 3 X X

TESTS PERFORMED AFTER SIMULATED STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT

C Room 1 X
Tension HTMT + SSRHT
C 350 1 X

KV A 0 3 X
HTMT + SSRHT
Impact C 0 3 X

Légende :

HTMT = heat treatment for mechanical properties

SSRHT = simulated stress relieving heat treatment
C = circumferential
A = axial

A schema showing the orientation of the test specimens is appended to the present specification
(see Annex 2).

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.

If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

M 2000 / 298  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131 Bis

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end to end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens and test conditions shall be specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. The tests shall be performed at
+ 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C.

b) Results
The impact at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table II must be fulfilled.

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure: two sets of three test specimens shall be tested at the same temperature
as the first test. If results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do not comply with the
requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Tests at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part shall
be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required in
paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for the three additional tests performed at
+ 40°C (see paragraph 4.3.2). If the requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the
part shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 299

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131 Bis

In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The number of tests, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet the requirements
specified in table III: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving heat treatment".
Samples of these tests shall be taken from the test ring (see paragraph 4.2) after the part has
undergone heat treatment for mechanical properties.
Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected
to heat treatment for mechanical properties only (see paragraph 4.3).

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal.
All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final stage in accordance
with MC 7100.
Parts should be sound and free from strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination shall be
performed on surfaces to be clad.
The examination procedures are those given in MC 4000 or MC 5000.

CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,

M 2000 / 300  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131 Bis

- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,

- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

Magnetic particle examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.

When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed after final machining of the part or at as advanced a stage as
possible for portions which cannot be examined in finished form.

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe characteristics are usually as follows:
- for straight beam examination: probe frequency 3 to 4 MHz,
- for angle beam examination: probe frequency 2 MHz, refraction angle 45°.

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 301

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131 Bis

Part type is 4.
The examination shall be performed from the inner surface for straight beam examination as well as
for angle beam examination. Angle beam examination shall be done for two opposite directions
along meridians and parallels (4 sensing directions).

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in method DGS in
standard NF EN 10228-3.

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.
After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000.
The criteria to be applied are those defined in paragraph 6 of the present specification.

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
After heat treatment.
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

M 2000 / 302  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131 Bis

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been retreated this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 303

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131 Bis

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2131

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE
AND UPPER SHELF KV ENERGY

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed where required by equipment specifications or other
relevant contractual documents.

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact tests.

The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.

The longitudinal axis of KV test specimens must be located at a distance from the inner face of the
wall equal to a quarter of the wall thickness.

The Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be cut out within the area between the inner quarter and
half the thickness of the head.
The test-pertinent area of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the quenched end
equal to the thickness of the part.
For this requirement to be met, the bottom end of the part may be protected by a thermal buffer, the
height of which at least equals the thickness of the part.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end to end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Each series of test will consist of the fracture of three test specimens.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.
The Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end to end locations. The
shape and dimensions of test specimens, as well as test procedures are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to - 12°C.

M 2000 / 304  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131 Bis

TABLE A1

NAME CONDITION ORIENTATION TEST NUMBER NUMBER OF

OF OF OF TEMPERA- OF SPECIMENS
TEST SPECIMENS SPECIMEN TURE IN °C LOTS PER LOT

RTNDT
Pellini drop HTMP + SSRHT C (1) 2 4
weight

KV impact HTMP + SSRHT T (1) 2 6

Key:
HTMP = heat treatment for mechanical properties
SSRHT = simulated stress relieving heat treatment
C = circumferential
T = transverse direction (longitudinal axis of test specimen is perpendicular to part's direction of maximum
extension)

(1) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000.

Note: - The results of the tests requested in Table III corresponding to the same samplings and heat treatments may
be used.
- Whenever two lots of test specimens are considered, one shall be taken from each test sample.
- When only one lot of test specimens is considered, it may be taken from any test sample.

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph, with the following
exceptions:
- the specimens must be taken in HTMP + SSRHT condition,
- the specimens must be taken in the axial orientation of the part,
- the notch axes must be parallel to the skins.

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 305

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2131 Bis

ANNEX 2 TO SPECIFICATION M 2131 Bis

ORIENTATION OF TEST SPECIMENS FOR MECHANICAL TESTING

M 2000 / 306  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2132

M 2132

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

MANGANESE-NICKEL-CHROMIUM-MOLYBDENUM
STEEL ALLOY FORGINGS FOR PWR REACTOR
COOLANT PUMP SHAFT ASSEMBLIES

0 SCOPE
This specification covers alloy steel forgings for drive shaft, spool piece and motor coupling sleeves
of pressurized water reactor coolant pump shaft assemblies. The drive shaft, in rough-machined
condition, is a cylinder whose diameter is approximately 700 mm at the centre section level. The
other parts are hollow cylinders with a wall thickness between 50 and 100 mm.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or any other equivalent technical process then
killed and vacuum-degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.

In addition, he shall provide a product analysis which shall be performed on a specimen taken at the
bottom of the ingot.

These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 307

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2132

TABLE I

AFNOR 30 M 5 25 NCD 8-05 20 CM 8-06

GRADE
Ladle Product Ladle Product Ladle Product
ELEMENT analysis % analysis % analysis % analysis % analysis % analysis %

Carbon  0.35  0.35 0.22 - 0.30 0.22 - 0.30 0.19 - 0.25 0.19 - 0.28
Manganese  1.30  1.30 0.40 - 0.70 0.40 - 0.75 1.40 - 1.60 1.40 - 1.60
Maxi. Phosphorus 0.025 0.030 0.015 0.020 0.015 0.020
Max. Sulphur 0.020 0.025 0.015 0.020 0.020 0.025
Silicon 0.10 - 0.40 0.10 - 0.50 0.10 - 0.35 0.10 - 0.40 0.25 - 0.40 0.25 - 0.50
Nickel  0.50  0.50 1.90 - 2.30 1.90 - 2.35  0.30  0.30
Chromium  0.40  0.40 1.20 - 1.50 1.20 - 1.55 1.80 - 2.00 1.80 - 2.00
Molybdenum  0.25  0.25 0.35 - 0.50 0.35 - 0.50 0.25 - 0.35 0.25 - 0.35
Max. Aluminium - 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10
Max. Vanadium - - 0.08 0.08 - -

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages
- position of the part in the ingot,
- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and
overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

M 2000 / 308  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2132

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.
A record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance
Agents.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the parts shall correspond as closely
as possible to the as-delivered profile.
Maximum permissible extra thickness of the shaft shall be 30 mm on the radius. If this profile
cannot be obtained directly by forging, it shall be obtained by rough-machining. This profile shall be
given in the manufacturing programme.

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic examination.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The part shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat treatment
for mechanical properties, shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing,
- quenching in water or in oil,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling, for grades 30 M 5 and 20 CM 8-06, or by furnace-cooling for grade 25 NCD 8-05.

Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the charge, with at least one
thermocouple per part, or with at least two thermocouples when the charge consists of only one part.
Thermocouple locations shall be specified in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3 1).

Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 309

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2132

TABLE II

25 NCD
30 M 5 20 CM 8-06
NAME TEST 8-05
OF TEMPE- PROPERTIES
Tangen- Axial and Tangen-
TEST RATURE Axial Axial
tial tangential tial
direction direction
direction directions direction
Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 280 MPa 280 MPa 500 MPa 500 MPa
Rm minimum value 550 MPa 550 MPa 700 MPa 600 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20 18 15 13
Z %minimum value 40 30 35 30

KV 0°C Minimum average value 40 J 56 J 40 J

impact Minimum individual 28 J 40 J 28J
value (1)
(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value may be accepted.

4.2 SAMPLING
4.2.1 Drive shaft
Test samples shall be taken from two prolongations marked X and Y, and attached to the shaft
through their entire cross-section. These prolongations shall be located at each end of the shaft and
in an oversize of centre section marked Z.

Samples shall be taken after the part has been heat treated for mechanical properties: they shall be
clearly identified and their direction of maximum extension shall be indicated.

The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.

The test specimens shall be cut out from the prolongations is such a way that their centreline is at
60 mm from the skin of the nearest face, and such that their test-pertinent area is at least at 120 mm
from the other faces.

The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be oriented radially.

A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme
(see paragraph 3.1).

4.2.2 Other parts

Test samples shall be taken from a test ring consisting of a prolongation marked T, attached to the
part through its entire cross-section.

Samples shall be taken after the part has been heat treated for mechanical properties; they shall be
clearly identified and their direction of maximum extension shall be indicated.

The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.

M 2000 / 310  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2132

Test specimens shall be taken from the prolongations in such a way that their centreline is at 20 mm
from the skin of the nearest face, and such that their test-pertinent area is more than 40 mm from the
other faces.
The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be oriented radially.
A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of the specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme (see
paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures as shown in
table III.
TABLE III

NAME CONDITION ORIENTATION TEST NUMBER OF SAMPLES

OF OF OF TEMPERA- SPECIMENS PER
TEST TEST TEST TURE TYPE OF TEST T X Y Z

Tension HTMP axial* room 1 X X X

tangential room 1 X
KV impact HTMP axial 0°C 3 X X X X
Key: HTMP = Heat treatment for mechanical properties.

* Except for 20 CM 8-06 grade, for which sampling in only made in the tangential direction.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall have a circular section. Their normal diameter shall be 10 mm and their
dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 311

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2132

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.

If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a test machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If the
results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method

KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be specified in MC 1000.

Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series.

Test temperature shall be 0°C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at 0°C shown in table II must be fulfilled.

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no more
than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with the
following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall
be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test
specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.

In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.

No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

M 2000 / 312  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2132

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal.

Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks or other injurious defects.

Subsequent to final machining, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed on part surfaces.
Requirements for this examination are given in MC 5000.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

- Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
- All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
. linear indications,
. rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
. 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.

Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.

When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 7 of this specification shall apply.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

6.1 DRIVE SHAFT

6.1.1 Time of examination
This examination shall be performed after heat treatment for mechanical properties, and preferably
after final machining (see MC 2300).

6.1.2 Procedures
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe frequency shall normally be 4 MHz.
If instrument gauging cannot be performed on a flat bottom hole for the axial examination, a
frequency of 2 MHz may be used.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 313

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2132

6.1.3 Scanning plan and degree of examination

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Parts type is 1a.
In addition to standard NF EN 10228-3 prescriptions, examination shall be performed in the axial
direction, from both ends over half the length of the part plus 10%.

6.1.4 Evaluation of indications

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

6.1.5 Recordable conditions and examination criteria

Recordable indication range and acceptability limit are those of standard NF EN 10228-3 :
- for radial direction: quality class 3,
- for axial direction: quality class 2.

6.2 OTHER PARTS

6.2.1 Time of examination
This examination shall be performed after heat treatment for mechanical properties and preferably
after final machining (see MC 2300).

6.2.2 Procedures
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe characteristics are usually as follows:
- for straight beam examination: frequency 4 MHz,
- for angle beam examination: frequency 2 MHz.

6.2.3 Scanning plan and degree of examination

The entire volume of the parts shall be subjected to volumetric examination.

Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

Part type is 3b.

In addition to standard NF EN 10228-3 prescriptions, for parts with diameter higher than 100 mm,
an examination shall be performed in the axial direction, from both lateral faces over half the length
of the part plus 10%.

M 2000 / 314  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2132

6.2.4 Evaluation of indications

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

6.2.5 Recordable conditions and examination criteria

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in method DGS in
standard NF EN 10228-3.

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.

The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.

After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000. The
criteria for this examination are given in paragraph 5 above.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
AFTER HEAT TREATMENT
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.

The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on
the drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.

The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 315

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2132

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and produce analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been retreated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 2000 / 316  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2133

M 2133

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

18 MND 5 MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM
ALLOY STEEL FORGINGS FOR
STEAM GENERATOR AND PRESSURIZER SHELLS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers forgings made of weldable 18 MND 5 manganese-nickel-molybdenum
alloy steel intended to be used for PWR steam generators and pressurizer shells.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-
degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
In addition, he shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of the ingot and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom of the ingot. These
analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

2.3 CASE OF SHELLS MADE FROM A HOLLOW INGOT -

POSITION OF THE END OF SOLIDIFICATION
When required by the equipment specification or other applicable contractual documents, the
position of the end of solidification in relation to the finished surfaces of the shell shall be looked
for on the part on the ingot top side.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 317

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2133

This position will be obtained by determining the maximum carbon content in the thickness of the
part along at least 4 radii 90° apart.
These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 18 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Max. carbon 0.20 0.22

Manganese 1.15 – 1.60 1.15 – 1.60
Max. Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Max. Sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.10 – 0.30 0.10 – 0.30
Nickel 0.50 – 0.80 0.50 – 0.80
Max. Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 – 0.55 0.43 – 0.57
Max. Vanadium 0.03 (1) 0.03 (1)
Max. Copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium max. – 0.04
Preferred max. 0.04 –
(1) A maximum vanadium content of 0.01 % is required for parts which will be clad.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of the part in the ingot,
- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and
overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- case of shells made from a hollow ingot : for the surface to be cladded, implemented provisions
to ensure the reproducibility of the macrographic cleanliness (typically A segregations) with
regard to the qualification file,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,

M 2000 / 318  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2133

- position of acceptance test samples on the part,

- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatments, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be
presented in chronological order.

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.
A record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance
Agents.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough-machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic examination.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The parts shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat
treatment for mechanical properties, shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling.
Holding temperature for tempering shall be between 635°C and 665°C. Temperature shall be
measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. Thermocouple locations on the part shall
be stipulated in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).
This heat treatment is performed in conformance with M 150 requirement.
Records shall be evaluated by Supplier.
If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

3.5 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 319

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2133

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical properties requirements are shown in Table II.
TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED VALUE (2) (3)

OF TEMPERATURE PROPERTIES
TESTS IN °C CIRCUMFERENTIAL

Room Rp0.2 minimum value 450 MPa

Tension Rm 600 to 720 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20
Thickness
≤ 125 mm 350 Rtp0.2 minimum value 380 MPa
Rm minimum value 540 MPa

Room Rp0.2 minimum value 420 MPa

Tension Rm 580 to 700 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20
Thickness
>125 mm 350 Rtp0.2 minimum value 350 MPa
Rm minimum value 522 MPa
TRANSVERSE LONGITUDINAL

0 Minimum average value 80 J 80 J

Minimum individual value (1) 60 J 60 J

KV Impact – 20 Minimum average value 40 J 56 J

Minimum individual value (1) 28 J 40 J

+20 Minimum individual value 72 J 88 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value shall be accepted per series for three test specimens
(2) For the tensile tests, the equipment specification may stipulate the values for grade 16 MND 5:

TEST REQUIRED VALUE

NAME OF TEMPERATURE PROPERTIES
TEST IN °C CIRCUMFERENTIAL

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 400 MPa

Rm 550 to 670 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20

350 Rtp0.2 minimum value 300 MPa

Rm minimum value 497 MPa

(3) If the forging programme or the results obtained do not allow a clear determination of the transverse direction,
test shall be performed in both directions (transverse and longitudinal) with the same removal depth so as to
determine unequivocally the transverse direction.

M 2000 / 320  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2133

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from two test rings constituted by prolongations adjacent to the part.
One of these prolongations shall be on the ingot bottom side and the other on the top side. Two test
samples, X and Y, shall be taken from each test ring at two diametrically opposed locations. The
test specimen sampling directions are given in table III.
Samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been heat treated for mechanical properties: they
shall be clearly identified and their direction of maximum extension shall be indicated.

The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.

The test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their centreline is at one quarter of the shell
thickness, from the inside face.

The test-pertinent areas of the test specimens shall be located at a distance from the free end of shell
not smaller than the thickness of the part. To meet this requirement, the Supplier is allowed to
protect the top and bottom ends of the shell by means of a thermal buffer, the height of which is at
least equal to the thickness of the shell, as shown on diagram appended to this specification. This
thermal buffer, the width of which shall at least equal the thickness of the shell, shall be welded to
the part.

The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be oriented radially.

A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme (§ 3.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table III: "As-delivered tests".

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 321

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2133

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted ; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted ; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end to end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.

Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. Test temperatures shall be + 20°C,
0°C and - 20°C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage required at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table II must
be fulfilled.

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no more
than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with the
following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimen shall
be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test
specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

M 2000 / 322  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2133

TABLE III

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 323

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2133

d) Test at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or if, where
the average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part
shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).
If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required in
paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Test at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for the three additional tests performed at
+ 40°C. If the requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the part shall be rejected
(see § 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.
Nominal holding temperature shall be 615°C.

4.5.2 Test conditions - Required values

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens and test temperatures shall meet
the requirements specified in table III: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment".
Samples for these tests shall be taken from the bottom test ring (see paragraph 4.2) after the part has
undergone heat treatment for mechanical properties.
Simulated stress relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results of tensile tests and KV impact tests at 0°C
shall be the same as for samples subjected to heat treatment for mechanical properties only.

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

M 2000 / 324  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2133

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be carefully examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final
stage in accordance with MC 7100.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks or other injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant examination or a magnetic particle examination
shall be performed on surfaces to be clad. Requirements for this examination are given in MC 4000
or in MC 5000.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Liquid penetrant examination
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
As unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

Magnetic particle examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.

The following indications shall be unacceptable:

- linear indications,

- non linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,

- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than 15
mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.

Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 325

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2133

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed after final machining.

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.

Probe characteristics are usually as follows:

- for straight beam examination: probe frequency 3 to 4 MHz,
- for angle beam examination: probe frequency 2 MHz, refraction angle 45°.

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 3b.

In addition to standard NF EN 10228-3 prescriptions, for parts of thickness greater than 100 mm,
examination shall be performed in the axial direction, from both lateral faces over half the height of
the part plus 10% for cylindrical shells and the straight part of conical shells.

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in method DGS in
standard NF EN 10228-3.

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.

The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs. 

After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000.

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered as a recordable condition.

M 2000 / 326  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2133

All defects which produce the following indications shall be eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indication with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.

Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less that twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The total indication length shall be equal to the sum of the
lengths of both indications, to which shall be added the distance between them.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 326 a

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2133

M 2000 / 326 b  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2133

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
AFTER HEAT TREATMENT
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used in compliance with B 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been retreated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 327

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2133

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2133

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE
AND UPPER SHELF KV ENERGY

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed on the bottom test ring where required by equipment
specifications or other relevant contractual documents.

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact test.
The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.
The longitudinal axis of the KV test specimens shall be located at a depth equal to at least one
quarter of the shell thickness from the inner surface.
The Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken in such a way that they are located between a
depth equal to at least one quarter of the shell thickness from the inner surface and the half
thickness.
The test-pertinent area of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the quenched end
equal to the thickness of the part.
For this requirement to be met, the bottom end of the part can be protected by a thermal buffer at
least as high as the part thickness and welded to the part.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the surface.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end to end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Each series of tests shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.
Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end to end locations. The shape
and dimensions of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
A schema showing the orientation of the test specimens is appended to the present specification
(see Annex 2).

M 2000 / 328  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2133

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to - 12 °C.

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph, with the following
exceptions:
- the specimens must be taken in HTMP + SSRHT condition,
- the specimens must be taken in the axial orientation of the part,
- the notch axes must be parallel to the surface.

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

TABLE A1

NAME OF CONDITION ORIENTATION TEST TEMPERATURE NUMBER OF

TEST OF TEST OF SAMPLE IN °C SPECIMENS

RTNDT

Pellini
 drop HTMP + SSRHT C (1) 8
 weight

 KV HTMP + SSRHT T (1) 12
 impact
Key:

HTMP = heat treatment for mechanical properties

SSRHT = simulated stress relieving heat treatment
C = Circumferential
T = Transversal
(1) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000

Note : The results of the tests required in Table III which correspond to the same
specimens and heat treatment may be used.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 329

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2133

ANNEX 2 TO SPECIFICATION M 2133

POSITION OF TEST METAL

ORIENTATION OF TEST SPECIMENS FOR MECHANICAL TESTING

M 2000 / 330  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2133 Bis

M 2133 Bis
PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

20 MND 5 MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM
ALLOY STEEL FORGINGS FOR
STEAM GENERATOR SHELLS
AND PRESSURIZER SHELLS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers forgings made of weldable 20 MND 5 manganese-nickel-molybdenum
alloy steel intended to be used for PWR steam generators shells and pressurizer shells.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-
degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
In addition, he shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of the ingot and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom of the ingot. These
analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

2.3 CASE OF SHELLS MADE FROM A HOLLOW INGOT -

POSITION OF THE END OF SOLIDIFICATION
When required by the equipment specification or other applicable contractual documents, the
position of the end of solidification in relation to the finished surfaces of the shell shall be looked
for on the part on the ingot top side.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 331

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2133 Bis

This position will be obtained by determining the maximum carbon content in the thickness of the
part along at least 4 radii 90° apart.

These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 20 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Max. carbon 0.22 0.23

Manganese 1.20 – 1.50 1.11 – 1.59
Max. Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Max. Sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.15 – 0.30 0.15 – 0.30
Nickel 0.40 – 1.00 0.37 – 1.03
Max. Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 – 0.60 0.43 – 0.62
Max. Vanadium 0.03 (1) 0.03 (1)
Max. Copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium max. – 0.04
Preferred max. 0.04 –
(1) A maximum vanadium content of 0.01 % is required for parts which will be clad.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- the position and orientation of the part in the ingot, enabling it to be checked that the face to be
clad is as far away as possible from ingot segregation areas,
- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and
overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- case of shells made from a hollow ingot : for the surface to be cladded, implemented provisions
to ensure the reproducibility of the macrographic cleanliness (typically A segregations) with
regard to the qualification file,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

M 2000 / 332  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2133 Bis

The various heat treatments, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be
presented in chronological order.

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.
A record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance
Agents.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough-machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic examination.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The parts shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat
treatment for mechanical properties, shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling.
Holding temperature for tempering shall be between 630°C and 660°C. The measured tempering
temperature of the part shall not be less than 621°C. The maximum permissible deviation applicable
to the tempering temperature (± 15°C according to F 8140) is valid for the nominal temperature but
it does not allow temperatures measured on the part less than 621°C, even if the nominal tempering
temperature is less than 636°C. Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed
on the part. Thermocouple locations on the part shall be stipulated in the manufacturing program
(see paragraph 3.1)
This heat treatment is performed in conformance with M 150 requirement.
Records shall be evaluated by Supplier.
If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

3.5 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 333

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2133 Bis

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical properties requirements are shown in Table II.
TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED VALUE (2)

OF TEMPERATURE PROPERTIES
TESTS IN °C CIRCUMFERENTIAL

Room Rp0.2 minimum value 450 MPa

Rm 620 to 795 MPa
Tension
A % (5d) minimum value 20
Thickness
≤ 125 mm 350 Rtp0.2 minimum value 380 MPa
Rm minimum value 560 MPa
Room Rp0.2 minimum value 420 MPa
Rm 620 to 795 MPa
Tension
A % (5d) minimum value 20
Thickness
>125 mm 350 Rtp0.2 minimum value 350 MPa
Rm minimum value 560 MPa
TRANSVERSE LONGITUDINAL

0 Minimum average value 80 J 80 J

Minimum individual value (1) 60 J 60 J
KV
– 20 Minimum average value 40 J 56 J
Impact
Minimum individual value (1) 28 J 40 J

+20 Minimum individual value 72 J 88 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value shall be accepted per series for three test
specimens
(2) If the forging programme or the results obtained do not allow a clear determination of the transverse direction,
test shall be performed in both directions (transverse and long) with the same removal depth so as to determine
unequivocally the transverse direction.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from two test rings constituted by prolongations adjacent to the part.
One of these prolongations shall be on the ingot bottom side and the other on the top side. Two test
samples, X and Y, shall be taken from each test ring at two diametrically opposed locations. The
test specimen sampling directions are given in table III.

Samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been heat treated for mechanical properties: they
shall be clearly identified and their direction of maximum extension shall be indicated.

The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.

M 2000 / 334  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2133 Bis

The test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their centreline is at one quarter of the shell
thickness, from the inside face.
The test-pertinent areas of the test specimens shall be located at a distance from the free end of shell
not smaller than the thickness of the part. To meet this requirement, the Supplier is allowed to
protect the top and bottom ends of the shell by means of a thermal buffer, the height of which is at
least equal to the thickness of the shell, as shown on diagram appended to this specification. This
thermal buffer, the width of which shall at least equal the thickness of the shell, shall be welded to
the part.
The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be oriented radially.
A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme (§ 3.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table III: "As-delivered tests".

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 335

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2133 Bis

TABLE III

M 2000 / 336  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2133 Bis

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.

If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted, if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted ; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end to end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.

Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. Test temperatures shall be + 20°C,
0°C and - 20°C.

b) Results
The impact energy absorption required at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table II must be
fulfilled.

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no more
than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with the
following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimen shall
be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test
specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

d) Test at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or if, where
the average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part
shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 337

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2133 Bis

If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required in
paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Test at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for the three additional tests performed at
+ 40°C. If the requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the part shall be rejected
(see § 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.
Nominal holding temperature shall be 615°C.

4.5.2 Test conditions - Required values

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens and test temperatures shall meet
the requirements specified in table III: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment".
Samples for these tests shall be taken from the bottom test ring (see paragraph 4.2) after the part has
undergone heat treatment for mechanical properties.
Simulated stress relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results of tensile tests and KV impact tests at 0°C
shall be the same as for samples subjected to heat treatment for mechanical properties only.

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

M 2000 / 338  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2133 Bis

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined at all stages of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. At the delivery stage, all surfaces shall be subjected to a visual examination
in accordance with MC 7100.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks or other injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant examination or a magnetic particle examination
shall be performed on surfaces to be clad. Requirements for this examination are given in MC 4000
or in MC 5000.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Liquid penetrant examination
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
As unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

Magnetic particle examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.

The following indications shall be unacceptable:

- linear indications,

- non linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,

- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than 15
mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.

Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination is performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with MC 2300.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 339

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2133 Bis

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed after final machining.

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in paragraphs MC 2300.

Probe characteristics are usually as follows:

- for straight beam examination: probe frequency 3 to 4 MHz,
- for angle beam examination: probe frequency 2 MHz, refraction angle 45°.

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
The scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 3b.
In addition to standard NF EN 10228-3 prescriptions, for parts of thickness greater than 100 mm,
examination shall be performed in the axial direction, from both lateral faces over half the height of
the part plus 10% for cylindrical shells and the straight part of conical shells.

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in method DGS in
standard NF EN 10228-3.

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.
After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000.
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered as a recordable condition.

M 2000 / 340  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2133 Bis

All defects which produce the following indications shall be eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indication with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less that twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The total indication length shall be equal to the sum of the
lengths of both indications, to which shall be added the distance between them.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 340 a

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2133 Bis

M 2000 / 340 b  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2133 Bis

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
AFTER HEAT TREATMENT
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.

The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used in compliance with B 1300.

The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been retreated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 341

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2133 Bis

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2133 Bis

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE
AND UPPER SHELF KV ENERGY

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed on the bottom test ring where required by equipment
specifications or other relevant contractual documents.

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact test.
The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.
The longitudinal axis of the KV test specimens shall be located at a depth equal to at least one
quarter of the shell thickness from the inner surface.
The Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken in such a way that they are located between a
depth equal to at least one quarter of the shell thickness from the inner surface and the half
thickness.
The test-pertinent area of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the quenched end
equal to the thickness of the part.
For this requirement to be met, the bottom end of the part can be protected by a thermal buffer at
least as high as the part thickness and welded to the part.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the surface.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end to end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Each series of tests shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.
Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end to end locations. The shape
and dimensions of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
A schema showing the orientation of the test specimens is appended to the present specification
(see Annex 2).

M 2000 / 342  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2133 Bis

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to - 12°C.

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph, with the following
exceptions:
- the specimens must be taken in HTMP + SSRHT condition,
- the specimens must be taken in the axial orientation of the part,
- the notch axes must be parallel to the surface.

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

TABLE A1

NAME OF CONDITION ORIENTATION TEST TEMPE- NUMBER OF

TEST OF TEST OF SAMPLE RATURE IN °C SPECIMENS

RTNDT

Pellini
 drop HTMP + SSRHT C (1) 8
 weight

 KV HTMP + SSRHT T (1) 12
 impact
Key:

HTMP = heat treatment for mechanical properties

SSRHT = simulated stress relieving heat treatment
C = Circumferential
T = Transversal
(1) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000

Note : The results of the tests required in Table III which correspond to the same
specimens and heat treatment may be used.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 343

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2133 Bis

ANNEX 2 TO SPECIFICATION M 2133 Bis

POSITION OF TEST METAL

ORIENTATION OF TEST SPECIMENS FOR MECHANICAL TESTING

M 2000 / 344  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134

M 2134

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

18 MND 5 MANGANESE - NICKEL – MOLYBDENUM

ALLOY STEEL ELLIPSOIDAL DOMES
FOR STEAM GENERATOR

0 SCOPE
This specification covers ellipsoidal domes with integrated nozzles obtained by forging or by hot
forming of a circular forged blank. These parts are made of weldable 18 MND 5 manganese-nickel-
molybdenum alloy steel intended to be used for PWR steam generators.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-
degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
In addition, he shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of the ingot and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom of the ingot. These
analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 345

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 18 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Max. carbon 0.20 0.22

Manganese 1.15 – 1.60 1.15 – 1.60
Max. Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Max. Sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.10 – 0.30 0.10 – 0.30
Nickel 0.50 – 0.80 0.50 – 0.80
Max. Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 – 0.55 0.43 – 0.57
Max. Vanadium 0.01 0.01
Max. Copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium max. – 0.04
Preferred max. 0.04 –

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
a) In the case of forged dome
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing program which shall include the following :
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- the position and orientation of the dome in the ingot; enabling it to be checked that the face to
be clad is as far away as possible from ingot segregation areas,
- dimensioned sketch of the dome subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and
overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and
delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical
properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be
presented in chronological order.

M 2000 / 346  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134

b) In the case of domes hot-worked from forged blanks

Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, both the forging mill and the Manufacturer
shall draw up a manufacturing programme which shall include the following :
For the forging mill manager
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- the position and orientation of the dome in the ingot; enabling it to be checked that the face to
be clad is as far away as possible from ingot segregation areas,
- identification marking of top and bottom ends,
- dimensioned sketch of the blank subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and
overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and
delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments of the blank,

For the Manufacturer

- the delivery condition of the blank,
- identification marking of top and bottom ends,
- the forming process used,
- the maximum and minimum forming temperatures and the number of thermal working
sequence,
- drawings of the forged blank, profiles of the lot worked at the heat treatment stage, non-
destructive examination and delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical
properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various forging, heating, forming, machining if applicable, heat treatment, sampling of test
specimens for tests and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented in chronological
order.

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 347

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134

3.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The dome shall be delivered in the heat-treated condition. This treatment for mechanical properties
shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling.
The holding temperature for tempering shall be between 635°C and 665°C. The temperature shall be
measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. As a minimum, one thermocouple shall be
placed on the edge of the part and one on the nozzle. Thermocouple locations on the part shall be
stipulated in the manufacturing programme (para. 3.1).
This heat treatment is performed in conformance with M 150 requirement.

Records shall be evaluated by the forging mill manager or the Supplier.

3.4 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical properties requirements are shown in Table II.

4.2 SAMPLING
The samples for mechanical testing shall be taken from two attached test rings, one on the nozzle
excess length or reinforcement (test ring 1, see Annex 1), the other one (test ring 2, see Annex 2) on
the excess length at the blank edge.
Samples shall be taken after the dome has been heat treated for mechanical properties.
Test samples shall be taken from each test ring at two diametrically opposed locations X and Y from
a test ring; they shall be clearly identified and the major working direction shall be indicated.
The test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their centreline is at one quarter of the head
thickness, from the inside face.
Samples taken from the nozzle excess length or reinforcement (test ring 1) shall be cut in such a way
that their test pertinent area is 60 mm away from the cylindrical profile and less than 40 mm from
any other surface.

M 2000 / 348  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134

Test specimens taken from the excess length at the blank edge (test ring 2) shall be cut out in such a
way that their centreline is at one quarter of the dome thickness, from the inside face. No test
specimen shall be taken at a distance from the edges of the samples or coupons smaller than the
thickness of the part.
To meet this requirement, the Supplier shall be allowed to protect the edges of the dome by means
of a thermal buffer, the height of which is at least equal to the thickness of the part. This thermal
buffer, the width of which shall be at least equal the thickness of the part, shall be welded to
the part.
The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to rolling skins.
A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme
(paragraph 3.1).

TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED VALUE (2) (3)

OF TEMPERATURE PROPERTIES
TESTS IN °C CIRCUMFERENTIAL DIRECTION

Room Rp0,2 minimum value 450 MPa

Rm 600 to 720 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20
Tension

350 Rtp0,2 minimum value 380 MPa

Rm minimum value 540 MPa
LONG TRANSVERSE

0 Minimum average value 80 J 80 J

Minimum individual value (1) 60 J 60 J
KV
– 20 Minimum average value 56 J 40 J
Impact
Minimum individual value (1) 40 J 28 J

+ 20 Minimum individual value 88 J 72 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value shall be accepted per series for three test
specimens
(2) For the tensile tests, the equipment specification may stipulate the values for grade 16 MND 5:

TEST REQUIRED VALUE

NAME OF
TEMPE- PROPERTIES
TEST
RATURE CIRCUMFERENTIAL DIRECTION

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 400 MPa

Rm 550 to 670 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20
Rtp0.2 minimum value 300 MPa
350°C Rm minimum value 497 MPa

(3) If the forging programme or the results obtained do not allow a clear determination of the transverse direction,
test shall be performed in both directions (circumferential and axial) with the same removal depth so as to
determine unequivocally the transverse direction.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 349

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE DELIVERY CONDITION

PART SAMPLES
Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment, after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table III: "As-delivered tests".

4.3.2 Test procedure

A -TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results

Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.

If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted, if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted, if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

M 2000 / 350  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134

TABLE III

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 351

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end to end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. Test temperatures shall be + 20°C,
0°C and - 20°C.

b) Results
The impact energy absorption at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shall satisfy the requirements shown in
Table II.

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no more
than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with the
following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimen shall
be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test
specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

d) Test at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the dome
shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).
If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required in
paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Test at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for the three additional tests performed at
+ 40°C. If the requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not satisfied at + 40°C, the dome shall be
rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

M 2000 / 352  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.
The normal nominal holding temperature is 615°C.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens and test temperatures shall meet
the requirements specified in table III: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment".
The tests shall be performed on samples taken from the part after heat treatment for mechanical
properties under the same conditions as those described in paragraph 4.2.
Simulated stress relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected
to heat treatment for mechanical properties only.

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be carefully examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final
stage in accordance with MC 7100.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks or other injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination shall be
performed on surfaces to be clad.
The examination procedures are those given in MC 4000 or MC 5000.

CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
The following conditions shall be considered unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 353

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134

- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

Magnetic particle examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

The examination shall be performed after final machining or at as advanced a stage as possible for
portions which cannot be examined at the final stage.

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe characteristics are usually as follows:
- for straight beam examination: frequency 4 MHz,
- for angle beam examination: frequency 2 MHz, refraction angle 45°.

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 4.
For the sections of the dome subjected to use, the examination shall be performed using longitudinal
waves from one of the lateral surfaces.

M 2000 / 354  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134

For the steam outlet nozzle, the examination shall be performed as for a family 3b part.
In the case of domes hot-worked from forged blanks, the steam outlet nozzle shall be subjected to
straight beam examination and angle beam examination at the forged blank stage.
At the dome stage, the nozzle shall be examined by longitudinal waves only.
In the case of forged domes, the steam outlet nozzle shall be subjected to straight beam examination
and angle beam examination after final machining of the part or at as advanced a stage as possible
for portions which cannot be examined at the final stage.

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in method DGS in
standard NF EN 10228-3.

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
Neither the forging mill nor the Manufacturer shall be authorized to make weld repairs.
After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000.

The criteria to be applied are those defined in paragraph 6 of the present specification.

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings.

The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on
the drawing.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 355

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134

10 MARKING
The forging mill and the Manufacturer shall specify the identification and marking methods used in
compliance with B 1300.

The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the forging mill and the Manufacturer after each
individual test and, in any case, prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been retreated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,

- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- forging mill's and, where applicable, Manufacturer's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 2000 / 356  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2134

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE
AND UPPER SHELF KV ENERGY

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed where required by equipment specifications or other
relevant contractual documents.

Samples for these tests shall be taken from the edge of the dome (ring 2) after the part has
undergone heat treatment for mechanical properties as described in paragraph 4.2. Simulated stress-
relieving treatment as defined in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out separately in a laboratory
furnace.

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact test.

The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.

The test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their centreline is at one quarter or more of the
head thickness, from the inside face of the dome. No test specimen shall be taken at a distance from
the edges of the samples or coupons smaller than the thickness of the part.

To meet this requirement, the Supplier shall be allowed to protect the edges by means of a thermal
buffer, the height of which is at least equal to the thickness of the part. This thermal buffer, the
width of which shall be at least equal the thickness of the part, shall be welded to the part.

The notch axes of the KV impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.

The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.

KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end to end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

Each series of tests shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.

Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.

Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions
of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to - 12°C.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 357

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph, with the following
exceptions:
- the specimens must be taken in HTMP + SSRHT condition,
- the specimens must be taken in the axial orientation of the elliptic dome,
- the notch axes must be parallel to the skins.
A schema showing the orientation of the test specimens is appended to the present specification (see
Annex 2).

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

TABLE A1

NAME OF CONDITION ORIENTATION TEST TEMPE- NUMBER OF

TEST OF TEST OF SAMPLE RATURE IN °C SPECIMENS

RTNDT

Pellini
 drop HTMP + SSRHT circumferential (1) 8
 weight

 KV HTMP + SSRHT transverse (1) 12
 impact
Key:

HTMP = heat treatment for mechanical properties

SSRHT = simulated stress relieving heat treatment

(1) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000

Note : The results of the tests required in Table III which correspond to the same specimens and heat
treatment may be used.

A schema showing the orientation of the test specimens is appended to the present specification (see
Annex 2).

M 2000 / 358  n° 137-2012

 RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134

ANNEX 2 TO SPECIFICATION M 2134

Test ring 1

Test ring 2

LOCATION OF THE TEST RINGS

ORIENTATION DES EPROUVETTES POUR ESSAIS MECANIQUES

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 359

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134

M 2000 / 360  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134 Bis

M 2134 Bis

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

MANGANESE - NICKEL - MOLYBDENUM STEEL

(20 MND 5) ELLIPSOIDAL DOMES
FOR STEAM GENERATOR

0 SCOPE
This specification covers ellipsoidal domes with integrated nozzles obtained by forging or by hot
forming of a circular forged blank. These parts are made of weldable 20 MND 5 manganese-nickel-
molybdenum alloy steel intended to be used for PWR steam generators.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-
degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
In addition, he shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of the ingot and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom of the ingot. These
analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 361

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134 Bis

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 20 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Max. carbon 0.22 0.23

Manganese 1.20 – 1.50 1.11 – 1.59
Max. Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Max. Sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.15 – 0.30 0.15 – 0.30
Nickel 0.40 – 1.00 0.37 – 1.03
Max. Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 – 0.60 0.43 – 0.62
Max. Vanadium 0.01 0.01
Max. Copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium max. – 0.04
Preferred max. 0.04 –

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
a) In the case of forged dome
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing program which shall include the following :
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- the position and orientation of the dome in the ingot; enabling it to be checked that the face to
be clad is as far away as possible from ingot segregation areas,
- dimensioned sketch of the dome subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and
overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and
delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical
properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be
presented in chronological order.

M 2000 / 362  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134 Bis

b) In the case of domes hot-worked from forged blanks

Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, both the forging mill and the Manufacturer
shall draw up a manufacturing programme which shall include the following :
For the forging mill manager
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- the position and orientation of the dome in the ingot; enabling it to be checked that the face to
be clad is as far away as possible from ingot segregation areas,
- identification marking of top and bottom ends,
- dimensioned sketch of the blank subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and
overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and
delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments of the blank,

For the Manufacturer

- the delivery condition of the blank,
- identification marking of top and bottom ends,
- the forming process used,
- the maximum and minimum forming temperatures and the number of thermal working
sequence,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles of the hot worked blank at the heat treatment stage, non-
destructive examination and delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical
properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various forging, heating, forming, machining if applicable, heat treatment, sampling of test
specimens for tests and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented in
chronological order.

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 363

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134 Bis

3.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The dome shall be delivered in the heat-treated condition. This treatment for mechanical properties
shall consist of the following operations :
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling.
Holding temperature for tempering shall be between 630°C and 660°C. The measured tempering
temperature of the part shall not be less than 621°C. The maximum permissible deviation applicable
to the tempering temperature (± 15°C according to F 8140) is valid for the nominal temperature but
it does not allow temperatures measured on the part less than 621°C, even if the nominal tempering
temperature is less than 636°C. Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed
on the part. Thermocouple locations on the part shall be stipulated in the manufacturing program
(see paragraph 3.1)
This heat treatment is performed in conformance with M 150 requirement.
Records shall be evaluated by the forging mill manager or the Supplier.

3.4 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical properties requirements are shown in Table II.
4.2 SAMPLING
The samples for mechanical testing shall be taken from two attached test rings, one on the nozzle
excess length or reinforcement (test ring 1, see Annex 1), the other one (test ring 2, see Annex 2) on
the excess length at the blank edge.
Samples shall be taken after the dome has been heat treated for mechanical properties.
Test samples shall be taken from each test ring at two diametrically opposed locations X and Y from
a test ring; they shall be clearly identified and the major working direction shall be indicated.
The test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their centreline is at one quarter of the head
thickness, from the inside face.
Samples taken from the nozzle excess length or reinforcement (test ring 1) shall be cut in such a way
that their test pertinent area is 60 mm away from the cylindrical profile and less than 40 mm from
any other surface.

M 2000 / 364  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134 Bis

Test specimens taken from the excess length at the blank edge (test ring 2) shall be cut out in such a
way that their centreline is at one quarter of the dome thickness, from the inside face. No test
specimen shall be taken at a distance from the edges of the samples or coupons smaller than the
thickness of the part.
To meet this requirement, the Supplier shall be allowed to protect the edges of the dome by means
of a thermal buffer, the height of which is at least equal to the thickness of the part. This thermal
buffer, the width of which shall be at least equal the thickness of the part, shall be welded
to the part.
The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to rolling skins.
A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme
(paragraph 3.1).

TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED VALUE (2)

OF TEMPERATURE PROPERTIES CIRCUMFERENTIAL
TESTS IN °C DIRECTION
Room Rp0,2 minimum value 450 MPa
Rm 620 to 795 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20
Tension

350 Rtp0,2 minimum value 380 MPa

Rm minimum value 540 MPa
LONG TRANSVERSE

0 Minimum average value 80 J 80 J

Minimum individual value (1) 60 J 60 J
KV
– 20 Minimum average value 56 J 40 J
Impact
Minimum individual value (1) 40 J 28 J

+ 20 Minimum individual value 88 J 72 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value shall be accepted per series for three test
specimens
(2) If the forging programme or the results obtained do not allow a clear determination of the transverse direction,
test shall be performed in both directions (circumferential and axial) with the same removal depth so as to
determine unequivocally the transverse direction.

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE DELIVERY CONDITION

PART SAMPLES
Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment, after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table III: "As-delivered tests".

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 365

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134 Bis

4.3.2 Test procedure

A -TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results

Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.

If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted, if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted, if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end to end location. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. Test temperatures shall be + 20°C,
0°C and - 20°C.

b) Results
The impact energy absorption at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shall satisfy the requirements shown
in Table II.

M 2000 / 366  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134 Bis

TABLE III

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 367

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134 Bis

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no more
than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with the
following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimen shall
be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test
specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

d) Test at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the dome
shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).
If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required in
paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Test at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for the three additional tests performed at
+ 40°C. If the requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not satisfied at + 40°C, the dome shall be
rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.

The normal nominal holding temperature is 615°C.

M 2000 / 368  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134 Bis

4.5.2 Test conditions

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens and test temperatures shall meet
the requirements specified in table III: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment".

The tests shall be performed on samples taken from the part after heat treatment for mechanical
properties under the same conditions as those described in paragraph 4.2.

Simulated stress relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected
to heat treatment for mechanical properties only.

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. At the delivery stage, all surfaces shall be subjected to a visual examination
in accordance with MC 7100.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks or other injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination shall be
performed on surfaces to be clad.
The examination procedures are those given in MC 4000 or MC 5000.

CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination:
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
The following conditions are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 369

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134 Bis

Magnetic particle examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination is performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with MC 2300.

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

The examination shall be performed after final machining or at as advanced a stage as possible for
portions which cannot be examined at the final stage.

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in paragraphs MC 2300.
Probe characteristics are usually as follows:
- for straight beam examination: frequency 4 MHz,
- for angle beam examination: frequency 2 MHz, refraction angle 45°.

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to the examination.
The scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
The parts are type 4.
For the main part of the dome, the examination shall be performed using longitudinal waves from
one of the lateral surfaces.
For the steam outlet nozzle, the examination shall be performed as for a type 3b part.
In the case of domes hot-worked from forged blanks, the steam outlet nozzle shall be subjected to
straight beam examination and angle beam examination at the forged blank stage.
At the dome stage, the nozzle shall be examined by longitudinal waves only.

M 2000 / 370  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134 Bis

In the case of forged domes, the steam outlet nozzle shall be subjected to straight beam examination
and angle beam examination after final machining of the part or at as advanced a stage as possible
for portions which cannot be examined at the final stage.

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in method DGS in
standard NF EN 10228-3.

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
Neither the forging mill nor the Manufacturer shall be authorized to make weld repairs.
After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000.
The criteria to be applied are those defined in paragraph 6 of the present specification.

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

10 MARKING
The forging mill and the Manufacturer shall specify the identification and marking methods used in
compliance with B 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 371

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134 Bis

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the forging mill and the Manufacturer after each
individual test and, in any case, prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been retreated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Manufacturer's and forging mill's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 2000 / 372  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134 Bis

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2134 Bis

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE
AND UPPER SHELF KV ENERGY

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed where required by equipment specifications or other
relevant contractual documents.

Samples for these tests shall be taken from the edge of the dome (ring 2) after the part has
undergone heat treatment for mechanical properties as described in paragraph 4.2. Simulated stress-
relieving treatment as defined in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out separately in a laboratory
furnace.

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact test.

The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.

The test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their centreline is at one quarter or more of the
head thickness, from the inside face of the dome. No test specimen shall be taken at a distance from
the edges of the samples or coupons smaller than the thickness of the part.

To meet this requirement, the Supplier shall be allowed to protect the edges by means of a thermal
buffer, the height of which is at least equal to the thickness of the part. This thermal buffer, the
width of which shall be at least equal the thickness of the part, shall be welded to the part.

The notch axes of the KV impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.

The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given
in table A1.

KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end to end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

Each series of tests shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.

Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.

Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions
of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to - 12°C.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 373

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134 Bis

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph, with the following
exceptions:
- the specimens must be taken in HTMP + SSRHT condition,
- the specimens must be taken in the axial orientation of the elliptic dome,
- the notch axes must be parallel to the skins.
A schema showing the orientation of the test specimens is appended to the present specification
(see Annex 2).

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

TABLE A1

NAME OF CONDITION ORIENTATION TEST TEMPE- NUMBER OF

TEST OF TEST OF SAMPLE RATURE IN °C SPECIMENS

RTNDT

Pellini
 drop HTMP + SSRHT circumferential (1) 8
 weight

 KV HTMP + SSRHT transverse (1) 12
 impact
Key:

HTMP = heat treatment for mechanical properties

SSRHT = simulated stress relieving heat treatment

(1) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000

Note : The results of the tests required in Table III which correspond to the same specimens and heat
treatment may be used.

A schema showing the orientation of the test specimens is appended to the present specification
(see Annex 2).

M 2000 / 374  n° 137-2012

 RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134 Bis

ANNEX 2 TO SPECIFICATION M 2134 Bis

Test ring 1

Test ring 2

LOCATION OF THE TEST RINGS

ORIENTATION DES EPROUVETTES POUR ESSAIS MECANIQUES

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 375

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2134 Bis

M 2000 / 376  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2135

M 2135
PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM ALLOY STEEL

FORGINGS FOR PRESSURIZED WATER NUCLEAR
REACTOR SHELLS (WITH INTEGRATED FLANGES)
OUTSIDE THE BELTLINE REGION

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable manganese-nickel-molybdenum alloy steel forgings for
pressurized water nuclear reactor shells, with integrated flange, outside the beltline region.

1 CONSTRUCTION
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, it shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-degassed.

2 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analysis, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
In addition, he shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of the ingot and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom of the ingot. These
analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

 No. 137-2012 M 2000 / 377

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2135

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 16 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Max. carbon 0.20 0.22

Manganese 1.15 - 1.55 1.15 - 1.60
Max. phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Max. sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.10 - 0.30 0.10 - 0.30
Nickel 0.50 - 0.80 0.50 - 0.80
Max. Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 - 0.55 0.43 - 0.57
Max. Vanadium 0.01 0.01
Max. copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium max. – 0.04
Preferred max. 0.04 –
Max. Cobalt 0.03 0.03

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of the part in the ingot; the flange should be located at the top end of the ingot
- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and
overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of the test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

M 2000 / 378  no. 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2135

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.
A record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance
Agents.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough-machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic examination.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The part shall be delivered in the heat-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat
treatment for mechanical properties, shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling. Nominal holding temperature for tempering shall be between 635°C and 665°C.
Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. Thermocouple
locations on the part shall be stipulated in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1)
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

3.5 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

 No. 137-2012 M 2000 / 379

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2135

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUE
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

TABLE II

TEST
NAME
TEMPERATURE PROPERTIES REQUIRED VALUE
OF TEST
IN °C
CIRCUMFERENTIAL
DIRECTION

Room R p0.2 minimum value 400 MPa

Tension Rm 550-670 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20

350 Rt p0.2 minimum value 300 MPa

Rm minimum value 497 MPa
LONGITUDINAL TRANSVERSE
DIRECTION DIRECTION
0 Minimum average value 80 J 80 J
Minimum individual value (1) 60 J 60 J
KV
– 20 Minimum average value 56 J 40 J
impact
Minimum individual value (1) 40 J 28 J

+ 20 Minimum individual value 88 J 72 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value shall be accepted per series of three test
specimens.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken at two attached test rings. One of test rings shall be located in the excess
length or diameter of the flange (test ring 1, Annex 2). It shall be located at the top end of the ingot.
The other test ring shall be located in the excess length of the shell (test ring 2, Annex 2). It shall be
located at the bottom end of the ingot.
Test samples shall be taken from each test ring at two diametrically opposed coupons X and Y.
Samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been heat treated for mechanical properties ; they
shall be clearly identified and the major working direction shall be indicated.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for any retests
and additional tests.
Test specimens taken from the excess length or diameter of the flange (test ring 1) shall be cut in
such a way that their centerline is at 40 mm from the inside face of the cylinder. The test-pertinent
area of the test specimens shall be at a minimum distance of 40 mm from any other surface.

M 2000 / 380  no. 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2135

Test specimens taken from the excess length of the shell (test ring 2) shall be cut out in such a way
that their centreline is at one quarter of the shell thickness from the inside face. The test-pertinent
area of the test specimens shall be located at a distance from the free end of the shell not smaller
than the thickness of the part.
To meet this requirement, the Supplier is allowed to protect the bottom end of the part by means of a
thermal buffer, the height of which is at least equal to the thickness of the shell, as shown on
diagrams attached to Annex 2 of this specification. This thermal buffer, the width of which shall at
least equal the thickness of the shell, shall be welded to the part.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.
A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programmes
(see paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING TO PERFORM ON SAMPLES REPRESENTATIVE

OF THE SHELL IN THE DELIVERY CONDITION
Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table III: "Tests performed in the delivery condition".

4.3.2 Additional impact tests

In order to determine the variation of the impact energy absorption with the temperature, the
following tests shall be performed on each of the test rings, in addition to those performed at - 20°C,
0°C and + 20°C : three tests at -40°C, three tests at +40°C, three tests at -60°C and if necessary to
ascertain the shape of the curve, three tests at +60°C. The specimens shall be taken on one of the
samples, in the transverse direction.

4.3.3 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall have dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

 No. 137-2012 M 2000 / 381

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2135

TABLE III

M 2000 / 382  no. 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2135

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part is accepted; if not, the following paragraph
shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part is accepted; if not, it is rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS AND PLOTTING THE DUCTILE-TO-BRITTLE TRANSITION CURVE

a) Test specimens and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Each series of tests shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens. Percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for information purposes. The
temperatures for additional tests used to plot the ductile-to-brittle transition curve shall be those
indicated in paragraph 4.3.2.

b) Results
The minimum impact energy absorption at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table I must be
fulfilled.

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no more
than one result lower than the specified average value), retests may be performed in accordance
with the following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective
specimens shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two
sets of three test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part
is rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Tests at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part is
rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

 No. 137-2012 M 2000 / 383

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2135

If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the specified minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part is accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required in
paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
specified minimum average value.

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fail to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for the three additional tests performed at + 40°C
(see paragraph 4.3.2). If the requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the part is
rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet
the requirements specified in table III: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment".
Samples for these tests shall be taken from the test rings (see paragraph 4.2) after the part has
undergone heat treatment for mechanical properties.
Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected
to heat treatment for mechanical properties only (see paragraph 4.3).
The supplementary impact tests mentioned in paragraph 4.3.2, are not required for test samples
which have undergone simulated stress-relieving treatment.

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

M 2000 / 384  no. 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2135

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

All surfaces shall be carefully examined during fabrication to verify that the metal is sound. All
surfaces of parts shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final stage in accordance with
MC 7100.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination shall be
performed on surfaces to be clad.
The examination procedures are those given in MC 4000 or MC 5000.

CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination.
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indications shall be considered as unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

Magnetic particle examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
Are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance
with MC 2300.

 No. 137-2012 M 2000 / 385

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2135

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed after final machining of the part or at as advanced a stage as
possible for portions which cannot be examined in finished form.

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in paragraph MC 2300.
Probe characteristics are usually as follows:
- for straight beam examination: probe frequency 4 MHz or 2 MHz, depending on the structure,
- for angle beam examination: probe frequency 2 MHz or 1 MHz, depending on the structure,
refraction angle 45°.

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
The examination shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3
Part type is 3b.
As a deviation from standard NF EN 10228-3 prescriptions, the examination in the axial direction
shall be performed from both ends over half the height of the part plus10%.

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in method DGS in
standard NF EN 10228-3.

8 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

The only permitted defects are those which can be removed by grinding while remaining within the
dimensional tolerance range for the dished part.
The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.
After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000.
The criteria to be applied are those defined in paragraph 6 of the present specification.

M 2000 / 386  no. 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2135

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
After heat treatment.
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (in the case of retreatment this includes recordings of
all heat treatments,
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 No. 137-2012 M 2000 / 387

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2135

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2135

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

AND UPPER SHELF KV ENERGY

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed where required by equipment specifications or other
relevant contractual documents.

- KV TRANSITION CURVE
Test specimens taken from the excess length or diameter of the flange (test ring 1) shall be cut at
least 20 mm from any quenched surface and at least 40 mm from all other quenched surfaces.
Test specimens taken from the excess length of the shell (test ring 2) shall be cut in such a way that
their longitudinal centreline is at least one quarter of the shell thickness from the inside face of the
cylinder. The test-pertinent area of the test specimens shall be located at a distance from the flat
surface not smaller than the thickness of the shell.
To meet this requirement, the Supplier is allowed to protect the bottom end of the part by means of a
thermal buffer, the height of which is at least equal to the thickness of the shell. This thermal buffer,
the width of which shall be at least equal the thickness of the shell, shall be welded to the shell.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.
The series of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape and
dimensions of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Each series of tests shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.

RESULTS
The transition curve for each test ring is plotted for information purposes only.

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value shall be determined from a series of tests for each test ring.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph, with the following
exceptions :
- All specimens shall be taken axially.
- the notch axes must be parallel to the skins

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

M 2000 / 388  no. 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2135

- DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact tests.

The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.

Test specimens taken from the excess length or diameter of the flange (test ring 1) shall be cut at
least 20 mm from any quenched surface and at least 40 mm from all other quenched surfaces.
Test specimens taken from the excess length of the shell (test ring 2) shall be cut in such a way that
their longitudinal centreline is at least one quarter of the shell thickness from the inside face of the
cylinder. The test-pertinent area of the test specimens shall be located at a distance from the end of
the shell not smaller than the thickness of the part.
To meet this requirement, the Supplier is allowed to protect the bottom end of the part by means of a
thermal buffer, the height of which is at least equal to the thickness of the shell. This thermal buffer,
the width of which shall be at least equal the thickness of the shell, shall be welded to the shell.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Each series of tests shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.
Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape
and dimensions of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
The value of RTNDT shall be determined. It must be less than or equal to - 20°C.

 No. 137-2012 M 2000 / 389

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2135

TABLE A1

M 2000 / 390  no. 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2135

ANNEX 2 TO SPECIFICATION M 2135

Test ring 1 flange end

ingot top end

POSITION OF TEST METAL

 No. 137-2012 M 2000 / 391

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2135

ANNEX 2 TO SPECIFICATION M 2135

Test ring 2 shell end

Ingot bottom end

POSITION OF TEST METAL

M 2000 / 392  no. 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2135

ORIENTATION OF TEST SPECIMENS FOR MECHANICAL TESTING

 No. 137-2012 M 2000 / 393

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2135

M 2000 / 394  no. 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2141

M 2141

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

HEAVY MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM
ALLOY STEEL PLATES FOR PWR STEAM GENERATOR
CHANNEL HEAD FORGINGS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable heavy manganese-nickel-molybdenum alloy steel plates used in
the manufacture of forged channel heads obtained by dishing of a blank and punching of nozzles,
for pressurized water reactor steam generators.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-
degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 395

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2141

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 16 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Maximum carbon 0.20 0.22

Manganese 1.15 - 1.55 1.15 - 1.60
Maximum Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Maximum Sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.10 - 0.30 0.10 - 0.30
Nickel 0.50 - 0.80 0.50 - 0.80
Maximum Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 - 0.55 0.43 - 0.57
Maximum Vanadium 0.01 0.01
Maximum Copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium preferred max. 0.04 0.04
Tin For information For information

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the Supplier shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- preliminary press upsetting and rolling operations,
- position of the blank in the ingot, and more specifically main rolling direction with respect to the
ingot centreline,
- dimensioned sketch of the part,
- main rolling direction,
- references of documents used (specifications, drawings and procedures).

3.2 FORGING - ROLLING

There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A
record of ingot weight and top and bottom end discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of
Surveillance Agents.

3.3 DELIVERY CONDITION

Heavy plates may be delivered in the as-rolled condition.

M 2000 / 396  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2141

4 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Heavy plates shall be visually examined: their surface shall be plane, uniform and free from
wrinkles, overlaps, scabs, tears, cracks and any other injurious defects.

After cutting to as-delivered dimensions, the edges shall be visually examined. There shall be no
cleavage or lamination.

If the above-mentioned examinations detect unacceptable defects in the plate, the requirements
stipulated below shall apply.
a) Minor surface defects may be removed by grinding or chipping, provided that the thickness of
the heavy plate remains sufficient for a channel head to be manufactured in accordance with the
drawing.
Subsequent to defect removal, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed. The
following criteria shall apply:
- any indication with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable
condition,
- all defects which produce the following indications shall be considered as unacceptable:
• linear indications,
• non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
• aligned indications extending over more than 15 mm. Two separate indications shall be
considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice the length of whichever is
the smaller.
Major defects which cannot be eliminated as specified above shall lead to the rejection of the
plate. No repair by welding shall be permissible.
b) The extent of defects which appear on the edges shall be determined during the ultrasonic
examination stipulated in paragraph 5, so as to make sure they do not affect the useful part of the
heavy plate and coupons. In this case they are left unrepaired.

5 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

5.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed on the as-delivered parts.

5.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe frequency is normally 4 MHz.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 397

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2141

5.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.

Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

Part type is 2.

As a deviation of standard NF EN 10228-3 prescriptions, examination is performed only from one

side face (if possible the outer face of the future steam generator channel head subject of M 2142
Part Procurement Specification).

5.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

5.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

6 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.

7 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be defined in the purchase order.

8 TEST REPORTS

The following test reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier prior to delivery of the heavy plate:
- ladle analysis,
- non-destructive examination (ultrasonic, visual and magnetic particle).

These reports shall include:

- heat number and heavy plate reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable.

M 2000 / 398  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2142

M 2142

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

PWR STEAM GENERATOR CHANNEL HEAD

FORGINGS MADE FROM DISHED, PIERCED
MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM
ALLOY STEEL PLATE

0 SCOPE
This specification covers forged channel heads obtained by dishing of a blank made from a heavy
plate and punching of nozzles. These channel heads are made of weldable manganese-nickel-
molybdenum alloy steel, and are designed for presurized water nuclear reactor steam generators.

1 BASE PRODUCT
Plates used for the manufacture of channel heads shall be procured as per part procurement
specification M 2141 "HEAVY MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM ALLOY STEEL
PLATES FOR PWR STEAM GENERATOR CHANNEL HEAD FORGINGS".

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Product chemical composition, shall comply with the requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The Supplier shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom of the ingot. These analyses shall be
performed in accordance with MC 1000. These analyses may be performed on metal discard from
mechanical test specimens.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 399

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2142

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 16 MND 5

ELEMENT PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Maximum Carbon 0.22
Manganese 1.15 - 1.60
Maximum Phosphorus 0.008
Maximum Sulphur 0.008
Silicon 0.10 - 0.30
Nickel 0.50 - 0.80
Maximum Chromium 0.25
Molybdenum 0.43 - 0.57
Maximum Vanadium 0.01
Maximum Copper 0.20
Aluminium preferred max. 0.04
Tin For information

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- position of the blank in the heavy plate, more specifically, ingot centreline direction and main
rolling direction shall be marked on the blank and test samples (see paragraphs 4.2 and 4.6),
- dishing process selected, with indication of the minimum heating temperature and cooling
conditions,
- selected process for piercing nozzles, minimum heating temperature for the part of the channel
head where this operation is to be performed, maximum time allowed between removal of part
from the furnace and the first stroke of the press,
- position of acceptance test samples on the channel head,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive testing operations shall be presented in
chronological order.

The forging mill must prove, by means of the required test results, that the selected manufacturing
process allows the required dimensional characteristics and mechanical properties to be obtained
throughout the channel head.

M 2000 / 400  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2142

3.2 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

After forming and piercing, the channel heads shall be subjected to heat treatment for mechanical
properties which shall consist of the following:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still
air cooling.

Nominal holding temperature for tempering shall be between 635°C and 665°C.

Holding time shall be selected depending on plate thickness, on the minimum basis of half an hour
for every twenty-five millimeters in thickness.

Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part.

Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

3.3 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Required values for mechanical properties are identical to those indicated in Table II.

4.2 SAMPLING
The test samples shall be taken from coupons left attached to the lank during cutting, and which
have undergone the same heat treatment for mechanical properties, as defined in paragraph 3.2. If
this proves impossible, they shall be taken from coupons cut from the heavy plate after it has been
rolled, in accordance with the requirements of the following paragraphs. In this case, the coupons
must undergo all dishing heat cycling along with the channel head.

In addition, the coupons shall be subjected in furnace to one of the thermal cycles undergone by the
part when it is heated for piercing. The selected cycle (time and temperature) is the one
corresponding to the highest temperature obtained.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 401

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2142

TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED VALUE

OF TEMPE- PROPERTIES
TEST RATURE LONGITUDINAL TRANSVERSE
DIRECTION DIRECTION

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 400 MPa

Rm 550/670 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 300 MPa

Rm minimum value 497 MPa

KV Impact 0°C Minimum average value 80 J 80 J

Minimum individual value (1) 60 J 60 J

- 20°C Minimum average value 40 J 40 J

Minimum individual value (1) 28 J 28 J

+ 20°C Minimum individual value 72 J 72 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value may be accepted per series of three test
specimens.

In cases where the coupons are cut from rolling of the heavy plate, they shall be welded to the
channel head before it is subjected to heat treatment for mechanical properties.

The coupons taken from the top and bottom ends of the heavy plate shall be appropriately marked
and, more particularly, the main rolling direction shall be indicated.

The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests. Test specimens shall be taken at mid-distance between the edge of the plate and its
centreline, or, if this proves impossible, as close to this position as possible.

No test specimen shall be taken closer to the sample or coupon edges than a distance equal to the
plate thickness. In order to fulfil this condition, the dishing operator can protect the edges by means
of a thermal buffer welded over the entire sample or coupon thickness.

The longitudinal axis of the tension and impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the main
rolling direction for "transverse" tests, and parallel to this direction for "longitudinal" tests.

The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to rolling skins.

The longitudinal axis of the bending test specimens shall be perpendicular to final rolling direction.
Test specimens shall be taken at skin level.

A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme
(see paragraph 3.1).

M 2000 / 402  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2142

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED

CHANNEL HEAD SAMPLES
Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table III: "As-delivered tests".

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

The following values shall be recorded:

- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.

If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 403

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2142

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method

KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.

Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. Test temperatures shall be + 20°C,
0°C and - 20°C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table II must
be fulfilled.

c) Tests at 0°C
The channel head shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements
(see paragraph 4.4). However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which
is lower than the required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory
average, no more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in
accordance with the following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the
defective specimens shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of
the two sets of three test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1,
the channel head shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Tests at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part shall
be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required in
paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for three tests performed at + 40°C. If the
requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the channel head shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

M 2000 / 404  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2142

TABLE III

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 405

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2142

C - BEND TESTS
a) Test specimens
The dimensions of the bend test specimen with its longitudinal axis perpendicular to the final
rolling direction shall meet the requirements of MC 1000.

The test specimen shall be 30 mm thick, and one of its faces shall be a rolling skin and shall
constitute the outside face of the bend.

b) Test method
The bend test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000. The test specimen shall be bent
until its two branches, whose length shall be 3.5 times the specimen thickness, are parallel. The
mandrel diameter shall be 105 mm.

c) Results
No cracks, tears or blisters shall be accepted on the outside face of the bend.

If this is not the case, the procedures given under 4.3.2.A c "Results" shall be followed.

4.4 RETREATMENT
Channel heads rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may
be retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, the coupons shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.
Nominal holding temperature shall be 615°C.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures shall meet
the requirements specified in table III: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment".
The tests shall be performed on samples taken from the channel head after having undergone
regenerative heat treatment or heat treatment for mechanical properties, in the conditions defined in
paragraph 4.2.
Simulated stress-relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1, shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected
to heat treatment for mechanical properties only.

M 2000 / 406  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2142

4.6 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be carefully examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final
stage in accordance with MC 7100.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination shall be
performed on surfaces to be clad.
The examination procedures are those given in MC 4000 or MC 5000.
Surfaces affected by extrusion operations (nozzle inside and outside surfaces up to a distance equal
to dome thickness, measured from nozzle crotch radius) shall be subjected to magnetic particle
examination by the magnetic field induction technique.

Requirements for this examination are given in MC 5000.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Liquid penetrant examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.

All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,

- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

Magnetic particle examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.

All defects which produce the following shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 407

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2142

Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications, plus the distance between them.

When the examinations described above indicate the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 7 of this specification shall apply.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed after final machining of the part or at as advanced a stage as
possible for portions which cannot be examined in finished form.

6.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe characteristics are usually as follows:
- for straight beam examination: probe frequency 4 MHz,
- for angle beam examination: probe frequency 2 MHz, refraction angle 45°.

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 4.
For the dome, straight beam examination shall be performed from the inner face.
For nozzles, as for type 3b parts, both straight beam examination and angle beam examination shall
be performed from inner and outer faces.

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

M 2000 / 408  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2142

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in method DGS in
standard NF EN 10228-3.

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.

The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs. After repairs, a magnetic particle
examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000. The requirements of paragraph 5 of
this specification shall apply.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been retreated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 409

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2142

- chart of the defects,

- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 2000 / 410  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2142

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2142

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed where required by equipment specifications or other
relevant contractual documents.
The test specimens shall be taken from parts which have undergone regenerative heat treatment or
heat treatment for mechanical properties, in the same conditions as defined in the first two parts of
paragraph 4.2. Simulated stress-relieving treatment as defined in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace.

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact tests.
The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.
The longitudinal axis of the KV test specimens shall be located at a depth equal to at least one
quarter of the plate thickness.
The Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken in such a way that they are located at a depth
equal to at least one quarter of the plate thickness.
The test-pertinent area of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the quenched end
equal to the thickness of the part.
For this requirement to be met, the Supplier shall be allowed to protect the edges by a thermal buffer
welded over the entire thickness of the part.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of these
specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

Each series of test shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.
Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions
of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to - 12°C.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 411

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2142

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph, with the following
exceptions:
- the specimens must be taken in HTMP + SSRHT condition,
- the specimens must be taken in the axial orientation of the part,
- the notch axes must be parallel to the skins.

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

TABLE A 1

TEST NUMBER OF
NAME OF CONDITION ORIENTATION
TEMPERATURE SPECIMENS PER
TEST OF TEST OF SAMPLE
IN °C TYPE OF TEST

RTNDT

Pellini
 drop HTMP + SSRHT transverse (1) 8 (2)
 weight

 KV HTMP + SSRHT transverse (1) 12 (2)
 impact
Key:

HTMP = simulated heat treatment for mechanical properties (case of blank)

SSRHT = simulated stress relieving heat treatment
(1) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000

(2) Half of the specimens are taken form the top and half from bottom end of the ingot.

Note: The results of the tests required in table II which correspond to the same specimens and
heat treatments may be used.

M 2000 / 412  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143

M 2143

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

18 MND 5 MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM
ALLOY STEEL FORGINGS FOR
PRESSURIZED WATER NUCLEAR REACTOR
STEAM GENERATOR CHANNEL HEADS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers channel heads obtained by forging or stamping of a circular forged blank
and punching out of the nozzles. These channel heads are made of weldable 18 MND 5 manganese-
nickel-molybdenum alloy steel intended to be used for PWR steam generators.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-
degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle product analyses, shall comply with the requirements
given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
In addition, he shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of the ingot and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom of the ingot. These
analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000. The analyses may be made on metal
discard from mechanical test specimens.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 413

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 18 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %
Max. Carbon 0.20 0.22
Manganese 1.15 – 1.60 1.15 – 1.60
Max. Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Max. Sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.10 – 0.30 0.10 – 0.30
Nickel 0.50 – 0.80 0.50 – 0.80
Max. Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 – 0.55 0.43 – 0.57
Max. Vanadium 0.01 0.01
Max. Copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium max. – 0.04
Preferred max. 0.04 –

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
a) Domes obtained by stamping of a circular forged blank and punching out of the nozzles.

Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a

manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position and orientation of the blank in the ingot enabling it to be checked that the face to be
clad is as far away as possible from ingot segregation areas,
- dimensioned sketch of the blank subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and
overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- selected stamping mode with the minimum heating temperature and cooling conditions,
- nozzle punching mode with the minimum and maximum heating temperatures for the zone of
the channel head concerned, and maximum time between removal from the furnace and the
first press stroke,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and
delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical
properties,

M 2000 / 414  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143

- position of acceptance test samples on the part,

- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various forging, dishing, punching, possible machining, heat treatment, sampling and non-
destructive testing operations shall be presented in chronological order.

b) Domes obtained by forging

Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a

manufacturing program which shall include the following:

- identification of melting process,

- ingot weight and type,

- top and bottom end discard percentages,

- the position and orientation of the dome in the ingot enabling it to be checked that the face to
be clad is as far away as possible from ingot segregation areas,

- a dimensional summary sketch of the dome subsequent to each forging operation giving the
partial and overall ratios of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,

- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and
delivery,

- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical
properties,

- position of acceptance test samples on the part,

- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various forging, possible machining, heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive
examination operations shall be presented in chronological order.

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 415

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143

3.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile.

The part shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat treatment
for mechanical properties, shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still
air cooling.

Holding temperature for tempering shall be between 635°C and 665°C. Temperature shall be
measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. Selected temperatures and thermocouple
locations on the part shall be stipulated in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
If the part to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance with
the same instructions as above.

3.4 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

M 2000 / 416  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143

TABLE II

REQUIRED VALUE (2)

TEST
NAME OF
TEMPE- PROPERTIES
TESTS CIRCUMFERENTIAL DIRECTION
RATURE

Rp0.2 minimum value 420 MPa

Room Rm 580/700 MPa
Tension A % (5d) minimum value 20

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 350 MPa

Rm minimum value 522 MPa

TRANSVERSE LONGITUDINAL
0°C Minimum average value 80 J 80 J
Minimum individual value (1) 60 J 60 J
KV Impact
– 20°C Minimum average value 40 J 56 J
Minimum individual value (1) 28 J 40 J

+20°C Minimum individual value 72 J 88 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value shall be accepted per series for three test
specimens
(2) For the tensile tests, the equipment specification may stipulate the values given in the table below for grade
16 MND 5:

TEST REQUIRED VALUE

NAME OF
TEMPE- PROPERTIES
TEST CIRCUMFERENTIAL DIRECTION
RATURE
Room Rp0.2 minimum value 400 MPa
Rm 550/670 MPa
Tension A % (5d) minimum value 20

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 300 MPa

Rm minimum value 497 MPa

4.2 SAMPLING
The samples for mechanical testing shall be taken from test rings adjacent to the part. One test ring
shall be taken from the excess length at the peripheral edge of the dome (test ring 1). The other test
rings shall be taken from the excess length or reinforcement of each nozzle (test rings 2). Test rings
taken from nozzle reinforcements shall be removed and welded back in the nozzle extension prior to
heat treatment for mechanical properties. See Annex 2.

These samples shall be taken after heat treatment for mechanical properties.

Test samples shall be cut:

- from the test ring located at the peripheral edge of the dome (test ring 1): Two test samples, X
and Y, shall be taken at diametrically opposed locations.

- from each test ring located in nozzles (test rings 2): one test sample Z

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 417

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143

The test samples shall be clearly identified and their direction of maximum extension shall be
indicated.

The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for any
additional tests and retests.

In test piece 1, the axis of the test specimens shall be located at quarter-thickness from the inside
face. No test specimen shall be taken within a distance from the end of the prolongation smaller than
the part thickness.

To meet this requirement, the Supplier is allowed to protect the peripheral edge of the dome by
means of a thermal buffer, the height of which is at least equal to the thickness of the part. This
thermal buffer, the width of which shall be at least equal the thickness of the part, shall be welded to
the part.

In test piece 2, the axis of the test specimens shall be located on the inside of the nozzle, at quarter-
thickness. No test specimen shall be taken within a distance from the end of the prolongation
smaller than the nozzle thickness.

To meet this requirement, the Supplier may protect the nozzle end by a thermal buffer whose height
is at least equal to the nozzle thickness. This thermal buffer, whose width is at least equal to the
nozzle thickness, is to be welded to it.

The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skin.

A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme
(see paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED NOZZLE SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table III: "As-delivered tests".

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

M 2000 / 418  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143

TABLE III

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 419

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

The following values shall be recorded:

- yield strength at 0.2% offset in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.

If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end location. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.

Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. Test temperatures shall be + 20°C,
0°C and - 20°C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage required at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table II must be
fulfilled.

c) Tests at 0 °C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet an one of these requirements. However, where the
only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the required minimum value
and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no more than one result lower
than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with the following procedure:
two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimen shall be tested at the same
temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do not
comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

M 2000 / 420  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143

d) Test at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part shall
be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close to
the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required in
paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for the three additional tests performed at
+ 40°C. If the requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the part shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.
Nominal holding temperature shall be 615 °C.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens and test temperatures shall meet
the requirements specified in table III: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment".
Samples for these tests shall be taken from the test ring (see paragraph 4.2) after the part has
undergone heat treatment for mechanical properties.
Simulated stress relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected
to heat treatment for mechanical properties only.

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.
 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 421
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be carefully examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final
stage in accordance with MC 7100.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks or other injurious defects.
Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant examination or magnetic particle examination
shall be performed on surfaces to be clad.
The examination procedures are those given in MC 4000 or MC 5000.

The surface affected by the extrusion operation (inner and outer surfaces of nozzles, up to a distance
equal to one dome thickness, measured from the piping connection radius) shall undergo a magnetic
particle examination by the magnetic field induction technique.
The requirements for this examination are specified in MC 5000.

CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination.
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
The following conditions shall be considered unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.
Magnetic particle examination
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
The following conditions shall be considered unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

M 2000 / 422  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed after final machining of the part or at as advanced a stage as
possible for portions which cannot be examined in finished form.

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe characteristics are usually as follows:
- for straight beam examination: probe frequency 4 MHz,
- for angle beam examination: probe frequency 2 MHz, refraction angle 45°.

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 4.
For the dome, both straight beam examination and angle beam examination shall be performed.
Angle beam examination shall be performed for two opposite directions, along meridians and
parallels (4 sensing directions).
For nozzles, as for type 3b, both straight beam examination and angle beam examination shall be
performed from inner and outer faces.

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in method DGS in
standard NF EN 10228-3.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 423

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.
After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with the
requirements of MC 5000.
The acceptance criteria are those defined in paragraph 6 of this specification.

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used in compliance with B 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been retreated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

M 2000 / 424  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 425

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2143

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE
AND UPPER SHELF KV ENERGY

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed where required by equipment specifications or other
relevant contractual documents.
The test specimens shall be taken from peripheral edge of the dome (ring 1) after the part has
undergone heat treatment for mechanical properties, in the same conditions as defined in the first
two parts of paragraph 4.2. Simulated stress-relieving treatment as defined in paragraph 4.5.1 shall
be carried out separately in a laboratory furnace.

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact tests.
The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.
The longitudinal axis of the KV test specimens shall be located at a depth equal to at least one
quarter of the part thickness from the inside of the part.
The Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken in such a way that their axes lie between one
quarter and one half of the thickness from the inside of the part.
The test-pertinent area of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the quenched end
equal to the thickness of the part.
For this requirement to be met, the Supplier shall be allowed to protect the edges by a thermal buffer
welded over the entire thickness of the part.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Each series of test shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.
Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions
of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to - 12°C.

M 2000 / 426  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph, with the following
exceptions:
- the specimens must be taken in HTMP + SSRHT condition,
- the specimens must be taken in the axial orientation of the part,
- the notch axes must be parallel to the skins.

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

TABLE A 1

TEST NUMBER OF
NAME OF CONDITION ORIENTATION
TEMPERATURE SPECIMENS PER
TEST OF TEST OF SPECIMEN
IN °C TYPE OF TEST

RTNDT

 Pellini
HTMP + SSRHT circumferential (1) 8
 drop
 weight
 KV
 impact
HTMP + SSRHT transverse (1) 12

Key:

HTMP = simulated heat treatment for mechanical properties

SSRHT = simulated stress relieving heat treatment

(1) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000

Note: The results of the tests required in table II which correspond to the same specimens and heat
treatments may be used.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 426 a

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143

ANNEX 2 TO SPECIFICATION M 2143

POSITION OF TEST RINGS
DURING HEAT TREATMENT FOR MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

Test ring 1

Test ring 2
Test ring 2

ORIENTATION OF SPECIMENS FOR MECHANICAL TESTS

M 2000 / 426 b  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143 Bis

M 2143 Bis

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

20 MND 5 MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM
ALLOY STEEL FORGINGS FOR
PRESSURIZED WATER NUCLEAR REACTOR
STEAM GENERATOR CHANNEL HEADS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers channel heads obtained by forging or stamping of a circular forged blank
and punching out of the nozzles. These channel heads are made of weldable 20 MND 5 manganese-
nickel-molybdenum alloy steel intended to be used for PWR steam generators.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-
degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle product analyses, shall comply with the requirements
given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
In addition, he shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed on a specimen
taken at the top of the ingot and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom of the ingot. These
analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000. The analyses may be made on metal
discard from mechanical test specimens.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 427

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143 Bis

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 20 MND 5

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %
Max. Carbon 0.22 0.23
Manganese 1.20 – 1.50 1.11 – 1.59
Max. Phosphorus 0.008 0.008
Max. Sulphur 0.008 0.008
Silicon 0.15 – 0.30 0.15 – 0.30
Nickel 0.40 – 1.00 0.37 – 1.03
Max. Chromium 0.25 0.25
Molybdenum 0.45 – 0.60 0.43 – 0.62
Max. Vanadium 0.01 0.01
Max. Copper 0.20 0.20
Aluminium max. – 0.04
Preferred max. 0.04 –

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
a) Domes obtained by stamping of a circular forged blank and punching out of the nozzles.

Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a

manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position and orientation of the blank in the ingot enabling it to be checked that the face to be
clad is as far away as possible from ingot segregation areas,
- dimensioned sketch of the blank subsequent to each forging operation, with forging ratio and
overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- selected stamping mode with the minimum heating temperature and cooling conditions,
- nozzle punching mode with the minimum and maximum heating temperatures for the zone of
the channel head concerned, and maximum time between removal from the furnace and the
first press stroke,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and
delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical
properties,

M 2000 / 428  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143 Bis

- position of acceptance test samples on the part,

- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various forging, dishing, punching, possible machining, heat treatment, sampling and non-
destructive testing operations shall be presented in chronological order.

b) Domes obtained by forging

Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a

manufacturing program which shall include the following:

- identification of melting process,

- ingot weight and type,

- top and bottom end discard percentages,

- the position and orientation of the dome in the ingot enabling it to be checked that the face to
be clad is as far away as possible from ingot segregation areas,

- a dimensional summary sketch of the dome subsequent to each forging operation giving the
partial and overall ratios of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,

- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and
delivery,

- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical
properties,

- position of acceptance test samples on the part,

- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various forging, possible machining, heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive
examination operations shall be presented in chronological order.

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 429

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143 Bis

3.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile.

The part shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat treatment
for mechanical properties, shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 925°C,
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still
air cooling.
Holding temperature for tempering shall be between 630°C and 660°C. The measured tempering
temperature of the part shall not be less than 621°C. The maximum permissible deviation applicable
to the tempering temperature (± 15°C according to F 8140) is valid for the nominal temperature but
it does not allow temperatures measured on the part less than 621°C, even if the nominal tempering
temperature is less than 636°C. Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed
on the part. Thermocouple locations on the part shall be stipulated in the manufacturing program
(see paragraph 3.1)
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
If the part to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance with
the same instructions as above.

3.4 STRUCTURE
Where required by the equipment specification, micrographic examination, including photography,
shall be carried out on a longitudinal section.
The austenitic grain size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1330, shall be greater than
or equal to 5.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

M 2000 / 430  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143 Bis

TABLE II

REQUIRED VALUE
NAME TEST
OF TEMPE- PROPERTIES
TESTS RATURE CIRCUMFERENTIAL DIRECTION

Room Rp0.2 minimum value 420 MPa

Rm 620/795 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20
Tension

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 350 MPa

Rm minimum value 560 MPa
TRANSVERSE LONGITUDINAL
0°C Minimum average value 80 J 80 J
Minimum individual value (1) 60 J 60 J
KV
Impact – 20°C Minimum average value 40 J 56 J
Minimum individual value (1) 28 J 40 J

+20°C Minimum individual value 72 J 88 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value shall be accepted per series for three test
specimens

4.2 SAMPLING
The samples for mechanical testing shall be taken from test rings adjacent to the part. One test ring
shall be taken from the excess length at the peripheral edge of the dome (test ring 1). The other test
rings shall be taken from the excess length or reinforcement of each nozzle (test rings 2). Test rings
taken from nozzle reinforcements shall be removed and welded back in the nozzle extension prior to
heat treatment for mechanical properties. See Annex 2.

These samples shall be taken after heat treatment for mechanical properties.

Test samples shall be cut:

- from the test ring located at the peripheral edge of the dome (test ring 1): Two test samples, X
and Y, shall be taken at diametrically opposed locations.

- from each test ring located in nozzles (test rings 2): one test sample Z
The test samples shall be clearly identified and their direction of maximum extension shall be
indicated.

The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for any
additional tests and retests.

In test piece 1, the axis of the test specimens shall be located at quarter-thickness from the inside
face. No test specimen shall be taken within a distance from the end of the prolongation smaller than
the part thickness.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 431

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143 Bis

To meet this requirement, the Supplier is allowed to protect the peripheral edge of the dome by
means of a thermal buffer, the height of which is at least equal to the thickness of the part. This
thermal buffer, the width of which shall be at least equal the thickness of the part, shall be welded to
the part.

In test piece 2, the axis of the test specimens shall be located on the inside of the nozzle, at quarter-
thickness. No test specimen shall be taken within a distance from the end of the prolongation
smaller than the nozzle thickness.
To meet this requirement, the Supplier may protect the nozzle end by a thermal buffer whose height
is at least equal to the nozzle thickness. This thermal buffer, whose width is at least equal to the
nozzle thickness, is to be welded to it.
The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skin.

A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing program
(see paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED NOZZLE SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown in
table III: "As-delivered tests".

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

The following values shall be recorded:

- yield strength at 0.2% offset in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

M 2000 / 432  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143 Bis

TABLE III

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 433

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143 Bis

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.

If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end location. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.

Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. Test temperatures shall be + 20°C,
0°C and - 20°C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage required at + 20°C, 0°C and - 20°C shown in table II must be
fulfilled.

c) Tests at 0°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet an one of these requirements. However, where the
only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the required minimum
value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no more than one result
lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with the following
procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimen shall be tested
at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test
specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be
rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Test at - 20°C
If the average of the results of the three tests is not satisfactory (see paragraph 4.1) or, where the
average value is satisfactory, two results are lower than the specified average value, the part
shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

If the average is satisfactory and only one test result is lower than the required minimum
individual value, a second series of three tests shall be performed using specimens taken close
to the first set. The part shall be accepted if the average of results for all six tests is as required
in paragraph 4.1 and no more than one of the results of the second test series is lower than the
required minimum average.

M 2000 / 434  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143 Bis

e) Tests at + 20°C
Where one or more of the results fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1, a check shall
be made to ensure that this condition is fulfilled for the three additional tests performed at
+ 40°C. If the requirements of paragraph 4.1 are not fulfilled at + 40°C, the part shall be
rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.

In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment
This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.
Nominal holding temperature shall be 615 °C.

4.5.2 Test conditions

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens and test temperatures shall meet
the requirements specified in table III: "Tests performed after simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment".
Samples for these tests shall be taken from the test ring (see paragraph 4.2) after the part has
undergone heat treatment for mechanical properties.
Simulated stress relieving treatment of samples as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out
separately in a laboratory furnace. Conditions and results shall be the same as for samples subjected
to heat treatment for mechanical properties only.

5 BASE MATERIAL TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined at all stages of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. At the delivery stage, all surfaces shall be subjected to a visual examination
in accordance with MC 7100.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks or other injurious defects.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 435

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143 Bis

Subsequent to final machining, a liquid penetrant examination or magnetic particle examination

shall be performed on surfaces to be clad.
The examination procedures are those given in MC 4000 or MC 5000.
The surface affected by the extrusion operation (inner and outer surfaces of nozzles, up to a distance
equal to one dome thickness, measured from the piping connection radius) shall undergo a magnetic
particle examination by the magnetic field induction technique.
The requirements for this examination are specified in MC 5000.

CRITERIA
Liquid penetrant examination.
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
The following conditions shall be considered unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

Magnetic particle examination

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
The following conditions shall be considered unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

M 2000 / 436  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143 Bis

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination is performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with MC 2300.

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed after final machining of the part or at as advanced a stage as
possible for portions which cannot be examined in finished form.

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in paragraphs MC 2300.
Probe characteristics are usually as follows:
- for straight beam examination: probe frequency 4 MHz,
- for angle beam examination: probe frequency 2 MHz, refraction angle 45°.

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
The scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 4.
For the dome, both straight beam examination and angle beam examination shall be performed.
Angle beam examination shall be performed for two opposite directions, along meridians and
parallels (4 sensing directions).
For nozzles, as for type 3b, both straight beam examination and angle beam examination shall be
performed from inner and outer faces.

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in method DGS in
standard NF EN 10228-3.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 437

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143 Bis

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.
After repairs, a magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance with the
requirements of MC 5000.
The acceptance criteria are those defined in paragraph 6 of this specification.

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on
the drawing.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used in compliance with B 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been retreated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- micrographic examination, where appropriate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

M 2000 / 438  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143 Bis

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 439

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143 Bis

ANNEX 1 TO SPECIFICATION M 2143 Bis

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE
AND UPPER SHELF KV ENERGY

SUPPLEMENTARY TESTS
These supplementary tests shall be performed where required by equipment specifications or other
relevant contractual documents.
The test specimens shall be taken from peripheral edge of the dome (ring 1) after the part has
undergone heat treatment for mechanical properties, in the same conditions as defined in the first
two parts of paragraph 4.2. Simulated stress-relieving treatment as defined in paragraph 4.5.1 shall
be carried out separately in a laboratory furnace.

DETERMINATION OF RTNDT TEMPERATURE

RTNDT temperature is determined by conducting Pellini drop weight tests and KV impact tests.
The procedure for determining RTNDT temperature is given in MC 1000.
The longitudinal axis of the KV test specimens shall be located at a depth equal to at least one
quarter of the part thickness from the inside of the part.
The Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken in such a way that their axes lie between one
quarter and one half of the thickness from the inside of the part.
The test-pertinent area of the test specimens must be located at a distance from the quenched end
equal to the thickness of the part.
For this requirement to be met, the Supplier shall be allowed to protect the edges by a thermal buffer
welded over the entire thickness of the part.
The notch axes of the impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the skins.
The number of tests to be performed, test specimen orientation and testing temperatures are given in
table A1.
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent or end-to-end locations. The shape and
dimensions of these specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.
Each series of test shall consist of the fracture of three test specimens.
Percent shear fracture and lateral expansion value of test specimens shall be recorded for
information purposes.
Pellini drop weight test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions
of test specimens, as well as test procedures, are specified in MC 1000.

RESULTS
RTNDT must be determined. The value must be less than or equal to - 12°C.

M 2000 / 440  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143 Bis

- DETERMINATION OF KV ENERGY IN THE UPPER SHELF

This value is determined through a series of tests.
The specimen taking and test conditions are identical to the previous paragraph, with the following
exceptions:
- the specimens must be taken in HTMP + SSRHT condition,
- the specimens must be taken in the axial orientation of the part,
- the notch axes must be parallel to the skins.

RESULTS
The fracture energy measured must be greater than or equal to 130 J.

TABLE A 1

TEST NUMBER OF
NAME OF CONDITION ORIENTATION
TEMPERATURE SPECIMENS PER
TEST OF TEST OF SPECIMEN
IN °C TYPE OF TEST

RTNDT

 Pellini
HTMP + SSRHT circumferential (1) 8
 drop
 weight
 KV
 impact
HTMP + SSRHT transverse (1) 12

Key:

HTMP = simulated heat treatment for mechanical properties

SSRHT = simulated stress relieving heat treatment

(1) Test temperatures are given in MC 1000

Note: The results of the tests required in table II which correspond to the same specimens and
heat treatments may be used.

 n° 144-2014 M 2000 / 440 a

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2143 Bis

ANNEX 2 TO SPECIFICATION M 2143 Bis

POSITION OF TEST RINGS
DURING HEAT TREATMENT FOR MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

Test ring 1

Test ring 2
Test ring 2

ORIENTATION OF SPECIMENS FOR MECHANICAL TESTS

M 2000 / 440 b  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2311

M 2311

PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

FORGED NICKEL-CHROMIUM-MOLYBDENUM-
VANADIUM ALLOY STEEL BARS FOR USE
IN MAKING PRESSURIZED WATER
NUCLEAR REACTOR VESSEL STUDS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers the procurement of forged nickel-chromium-molybdenum-vanadium alloy
steel bars, from 100 to 300 mm in diameter, used in making pressurized water nuclear reactor vessel
studs.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace and vacuum-degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. In addition, he shall provide a product analysis. The analysis may be performed on
metal discard from mechanical test specimens. These analyses shall be performed in accordance
with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 441

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2311

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 40 NCDV 7-03

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Carbon 0.37 - 0.44 0.35 - 0.46

Manganese 0.60 - 0.95 0.55 - 0.95
Maximum Phosphorus 0.020 0.025
Maximum Sulphur 0.010 0.015
Maximum Silicon 0.35 0.35
Nickel 1.55 - 2.00 1.55 - 2.05
Chromium 0.60 - 0.95 0.60 - 1.00
Molybdenum 0.40 - 0.60 0.35 - 0.60
Maximum Copper 0.20 0.20
Vanadium 0.04 - 0.10 0.04 - 0.10

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A
record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance Agents.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

3.2 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME

Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of the part in the ingot,
- diameters of the bars at the time of heat treatment and as-delivered diameters,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments, heat treatment for mechanical properties and any
subsequent stabilizing heat treatments,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

M 2000 / 442  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2311

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the bar diameter shall correspond as closely as
possible to the as-delivered diameter. These diameters shall be given in the manufacturing
programme.

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The bars shall be machined in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings.
Surface condition shall be suitable for non-destructive testing, as detailed in SECTION III for the
examinations concerned here. The surface condition shall be determined in accordance
with MC 7200.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Bars shall be delivered in the as-treated condition.
Heat treatment for mechanical properties shall consist of:
- austenitizing at between 820°C and 885°C,
- quenching by immersion,
- tempering at a temperature which will produce the requisite properties, followed by still air
cooling. Nominal holding temperature shall be between 590°C and 630°C for a minimum time
of 4 hours.

Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part.

Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

3.5 STRAIGHTENING OF BARS

Straightening of bars shall normally not be allowed. However, if subsequent to heat treatment for
mechanical properties, the blank is so deformed that the finished part cannot be obtained by
machining, cold straightening shall be permitted, provided out-of-straightness does not exceed
10 millimetres per metre. The report shall indicate the measured sag and allows the straightened
bars to be identified.
A straightening operation shall always be followed by stabilizing heat treatment of the entire lot.
This treatment consists in heating to a temperature 20°C to 40°C lower than the tempering
temperature, but not less than 560°C. Minimum holding time shall be 4 hours, followed by still air
cooling. Temperature deviations and heat cycles shall comply with the requirements of
paragraph 3.4.
The conditions and criteria adopted for both straightening and thermal stabilisation shall be
indicated in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.2).

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 443

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 2311

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II below.
TABLE II

REQUIRED VALUE
NAME TEST
PROPERTIES > 200 mm
OF TEST TEMPERATURE  200 mm
 300 mm
Tensile room Rp0.2 minimum value 900 MPa
Rm 1000/1170 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 12
Z % minimum value 45

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 720 MPa

Rm minimum value 920 MPa
Minimum average value - 48 J
KV impact 0°C Minimum individual value (1) 60 J 36 J
Lateral expansion value 0.64 mm -

+20°C
Minimum individual value - 64 J
Lateral expansion value - 0.64 mm

BRINELL
room 302 to 375 HB
hardness

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value may be accepted per series of three test
specimens.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from prolongations to two bars of each lot which shall be cropped after
all heat treatments have been completed, including stabilizing heat treatment if required.
The size of test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for any
subsequent retests.
Test specimens shall be taken longitudinally so that their axis is located at a distance from the skin
of the bar equal to half the radius. Test-pertinent areas shall be located at a distance from the treated
end of the bar at least equal to the diameter of the bar.
Test specimens for V-notch impact testing at + 20°C shall be taken longitudinally at 25.4 mm from
the skin of the finished stud shank, i.e.:
Dd
 25.4 mm from the bar skin
2
(D = bar diameter,
d = finished stud shank diameter).
Impact test specimen notch shall be radially orientated.

M 2000 / 444  n° 140-2013

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 2311

4.3 TESTING OF SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The term lot applies to a group of bars of the same diameter manufactured from the same heat of
steel which have undergone the same manufacturing cycle and same heat treatment (including
stabilizing treatment subsequent to straightening) in the same furnace charge.

A lot shall weigh no more than 5 tonnes.

Maximum hardness deviation within the same lot shall not exceed 42 HB.

a) Test prolongations
The length of the two bars intended to be used for testing shall be such that:
- a prolongation can be cropped from both ends of one of them (bar marked A),
- a prolongation can be cropped from one end of the other bar.

In case of retreatment, the test samples shall be taken from two bars of the lot in the same
conditions as above.

b) Number and content of tests

The number of tests, orientation of test specimens and test temperatures are given in table III
below.
TABLE III
NUMBER OF
NAME SAMPLING DEPTH ORIENTATION OF TEST
SPECIMENS
OF TEST IN mm SPECIMEN TEMPERATURE
PER LOT
Tension D/4 Longitudinal room 3

D/4 Longitudinal 350°C (1) 1

KV Impact D/4 Longitudinal 0°C 9

Dd
 25.4 Longitudinal +20°C 9
2
BRINELL hardness Not applicable room Not applicable

(1) The tensile test at high temperature shall be performed in the prolongation which has the lowest hardness level.

Key:
D = diameter of bar.
d = diameter of the shank of the finished stud.

 n° 140-2013 M 2000 / 445

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 2311

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected and the requirements of
paragraph 4.4 "Retreatment" shall apply.

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series.
In addition to the characteristics specified in Table II, the percent shear fracture of each test
specimen shall be recorded for information purposes. The same shall apply to lateral expansion
in cases where table II does not have specific requirements on this matter.
Test temperatures shall be 0°C and + 20°C.

M 2000 / 446  n° 140-2013

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2311

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements shown in table II must be fulfilled.

The lot shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements. However, where the
only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the required minimum value
and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no more than one result lower
than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with the following procedure:
two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall be tested at the same
temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do not
comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the lot shall be rejected, and the
requirements of paragraph 4.4 "Retreatment" shall apply.

C - HARDNESS TESTS
Hardness tests shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. A hardness indentation shall be
made at each end of the bar.

These tests provide an indication of homogeneity, both of the bars themselves and of the lot as a
whole.

Results shall meet the requirements given in table II. If this is not the case, the lot shall be
rejected and the requirements of paragraph 4.4 "Retreatment" shall apply.

4.4 RETREATMENT
Lots rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report. In such cases, test specimens
shall be taken under the same conditions as specified in paragraph 4.2. Prolongations to be used for
testing are as indicated in paragraph 4.3.1. The tests performed shall be the same as those described
in table III.

No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

5.1 VISUAL EXAMINATION
Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal.

This examination shall be performed during both descaling and final machining of the bars.

Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects. Finished parts shall
be subjected to liquid penetrant examination, after threading.

If, on surface examination, a part is found to have defects, it cannot be accepted as is, and the
requirements of paragraph 7 of this specification shall apply.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 447

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 2311

5.2 MAGNETIC PARTICLE AND LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATIONS

5.2.1 Magnetic particle examination
Magnetic particle examination procedures are specified in MC 5140.

The examination shall be performed on machined parts prior to threading.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.

The following indications shall be considered unacceptable conditions:

- linear indications whose greatest dimension is larger than one third of the nominal diameter or
8 mm, whichever is smaller,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.

Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications, plus the distance between them.

Whenever linear indications are detected, a liquid penetrant examination shall confirm that they do
not correspond to a defect appearing at the surface, otherwise the part shall be rejected.

5.2.2 Liquid penetrant examination

Requirements for liquid penetrant examination are given in MC 4140.
The examination shall be performed on all parts in finished condition (after threading), see M 5140.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.

All defects which produce the following indications shall be considered unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance
with MC 2300.

M 2000 / 448  n° 140-2013

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2311

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed on the as-delivered part.

6.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe frequency is normally 3 to 4 MHz.
If instrument gauging cannot be performed on a flat bottom hole for the axial examination, a
frequency of 2 MHz may be used.

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3 or with
paragraph 13.3 of standard NF EN 10308.
Part type is 1a.
In addition to standard NF EN 10308 or standard NF EN 10228-3 prescriptions, examination shall
be performed in the axial direction, from both ends over half the length of the part plus 10%.

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3 or with
paragraph 14 of standard NF EN 10308.

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of standard NF EN 10228-3 or
standard NF EN 10308 :
- for radial direction: quality class 3,
- for axial direction: quality class 2.

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
No repair by welding shall be permissible.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings.
The values shall be within the tolerances given on the drawings.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 449

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2311

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been retreated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments including stabilizing heat treatment, if relevant),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 2000 / 450  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 2312

M 2312

PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

HOT-WORKED NICKEL-CHROMIUM-MOYBDENUM
ALLOY STEEL BARS WITH OR WITHOUT VANADIUM,
USED IN MAKING BOLTS FOR PRESSURIZED WATER
NUCLEAR REACTOR VESSELS AND COOLANT PUMPS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers the procurement of forged nickel-chromium-molybdenum, with or without
vanadium, alloy steel bars  320 mm in diameter or rolled bars  150 mm in diameter, used for
manufacturing nuts and washers for reactor vessels, casing studs and nuts, and bolting for the no. 1
seal housing of pressurized water nuclear reactor coolant pump casings.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace and vacuum degassed, or by any other technically
equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. In addition, he shall provide a product analysis. The analysis may be performed on
metal discard from mechanical test specimens. These analyses shall be performed in accordance
with MC 1000.

 n° 140-2013 M 2000 / 451

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 2312

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 40 NCD 7.03 40 NCDV 7.03

ELEMENT (in %) LADLE PRODUCT LADLE PRODUCT

Carbon 0.37 - 0.44 0.35 - 0.46 0.37 - 0.44 0.35 - 0.46

Manganese 0.70 - 0.90 0.65 - 0.95 0.60 - 0.95 0.55 - 1.00
Max. Phosphorus 0.020 0.025 0.020 0.025
Max. Sulphur 0.010 0.015 0.010 0.015
Max. Silicon 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35
Nickel 1.65 - 2.00 1.60 - 2.05 1.55 - 2.00 1.50 - 2.05
Chromium 0.70 - 0.95 0.65 - 1.00 0.60 - 0.95 0.55 - 1.00
Molybdenum 0.30 - 0.40 0.28 - 0.42 0.40 - 0.60 0.35 - 0.60
Max. Copper 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
Vanadium – – 0.04 - 0.10 0.04 - 0.10

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 HOT-WORKING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.
A record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance
Agents. Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

For rolled bars, the maximum 150 mm diameter to be taken into consideration is the as-rolled
diameter.

3.2 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME

Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the supplier shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- the type of hot working,
- position of the part in the ingot,
- diameters of the bars at the time of heat treatment and as-delivered diameters,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments, heat treatment for mechanical properties and any
subsequent stabilizing heat treatments,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

M 2000 / 452  n° 140-2013

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 2312

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
The bars are machined before heat treatment for mechanical properties. Those to be used for making
nuts and washers with outside diameters greater than 200 mm at the heat-treatment stage shall also
be bored. Their outside and, if applicable, inside diameters shall be as close as possible to the as-
delivered diameters. These diameters shall be given in the manufacturing programme.

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The bars shall be machined in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings.
Surface condition shall be suitable for non-destructive testing, as detailed in SECTION III for the
examinations concerned here. The surface condition shall be determined in accordance
with MC 7200.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Bars shall be delivered in the as-treated condition.
Heat treatment for mechanical properties, shall consist of:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 820°C and 885°C,
- quenching by immersion in water,
- tempering at a temperature which will produce the requisite properties, followed by still air
cooling. Nominal holding temperature shall be between 590°C and 650°C.
In the case of parts subjected to hot forming according to paragraph 3 of PPS M 5140 bars can be
delivered untreated. In this case the Supplier shall justify compliance with the guaranteed properties
required at the end of heat treatment.
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

3.5 STRAIGHTENING OF BARS

Straightening of bars shall normally not be allowed. However, if subsequent to heat treatment for
mechanical properties, the blank is so deformed that the finished part cannot be obtained by
machining, cold straightening shall be permitted, provided out-of-straightness does not exceed
10 millimeters per metre. The report shall indicate the measured sag and allows the straightened
bars to be identified.
A straightening operation shall always be followed by stabilizing heat treatment of the entire lot.
This treatment consists in heating to a temperature 20 to 40°C lower than the tempering
temperature, but not less than 560°C.

 n° 140-2013 M 2000 / 453

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 2312

Cooling after heat treatment shall be performed in still air.

Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
The conditions and criteria adopted for both straightening and thermal stabilisation shall be recorded
in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.2).

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II below.

TABLE II

40 NCD 7.03 - 40 NCDV 7.03

TEST Class A Class B Class C
NAME
TEMPERATURE PROPERTIES
OF Ø
(in °C) Ø Ø Ø
TEST > 200 mm
≤ 200 mm ≤ 200 mm ≤ 160 mm
≤ 320 mm

Rp0,2 minimum value 830 MPa 900 MPa 965 MPa

Rm minimum value 930 MPa 1000 MPa 1070 MPa

Room Rm minimum value - 1170 MPa -
A% (5d) minimum value 13 12 12
Tensile Z% minimum value 45 45 45
t
R p0,2 minimum value 695 MPa - -
300
Rm minimum value 900 MPa - -
t
R p0,2 minimum value - 720 MPa -
350
Rm minimum value - 920 MPa -

Minimum individual value 64 J 60 J 36 J 60 J

(1)
0 Minimum average value - - 48 J -
KV
Impact Minimal lateral expansion 0.64 mm 0.64 mm - 0.64 mm

Minimum individual value - - 64 J -

+20
Minimal lateral expansion - - 0.64 mm -
Brinell 277 to 363 311 to 401
hardness Room 302 to 375 HB
HB HB
Note 1 No more than one result below the minimum average value, where required, shall be accepted per series of
three test specimens.

M 2000 / 454  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 2312

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from prolongations to two bars of each lot which shall be cropped after
all heat treatments have been completed, including stabilizing heat treatment if required.
For bars delivered in the as-manufactured condition, or which, during working, will be subjected to
heat treatment modifying their mechanical properties, the tests shall be performed on test specimens
taken from samples which have been subjected to simulated heat treatment.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for any
subsequent retests.
Test specimens shall be taken longitudinally so that their axis is located at mid-radius (or mid-
thickness in the case of bars treated after forging). Test-pertinent areas shall be located at a distance
from the treated end of the bar at least equal to the diameter of the bar.
In the case of class B nuts with the diameter strictly greater than 200 mm, test specimens for V-
notch impact testing at + 20°C shall be taken longitudinally at 25.4 mm from the skin of the finished
stud shank, i.e.:
Dd
 25.4 mm from the bar skin
2
D = bar diameter,
d = finished stud shank diameter (to be specified in the purchase order).

Impact test specimen notch roots shall be radially oriented.

4.3 TESTING OF SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The term lot applies to a group of bars of the same diameter manufactured from the same heat of
steel which have undergone the same manufacturing cycle and same heat treatment (including
stabilizing heat treatment subsequent to straightening) in the same furnace charge.
A lot shall weigh no more than 5 tonnes.
Maximum hardness deviation within the same lot shall not exceed 42 HB.
For bars delivered in the heat-treated condition, maximum hardness deviation within the same lot
shall not exceed 42 HB.

a) Test prolongations
The length of the two bars intended to be used for testing shall be such that:
- a prolongation can be cropped from both ends of one of them (bar marked A),
- a prolongation can be cropped from one end of the other bar.
In case of retreatment, the test samples shall be taken from two bars of the lot in the same
conditions as above.

 n° 140-2013 M 2000 / 455

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 2312

b) Number and content of tests

The number of tests, orientation of test specimens and test temperatures are given in table III
below.
TABLE III

NUMBER OF
NAME SAMPLING DEPTH ORIENTATION TEST
SPECIMENS
OF TEST IN mm OF SPECIMEN TEMPERATURE
PER LOT
Tension
D/4 (1) Longitudinal room 3
D/4 (1) Longitudinal 300 or 350°C (2) 1
KV Impact Longitudinal 9
D/4(1) 0°C

Dd
 25.4 (1) Longitudinal +20°C 9
2
BRINELL – – –
room
hardness

(1) Or at mid-thickness when the bar is treated after boring.

(2) The tensile test at high temperature shall be performed in the prolongation which has the lowest hardness
level, at the temperature specified in Table II
Key:
D = diameter of bar.
d = diameter of the shank of the finished stud.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

M 2000 / 456  n° 140-2013

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 2312

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted ; if not, it shall be rejected and the requirements of
paragraph 4.4 "Retreatment" shall apply.

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series.
In addition to the characteristics specified in Table II, the percent shear fracture of each test
specimen shall be recorded for information purposes. The same shall apply to lateral expansion
in cases where table II does not so specify.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements shown in table II must be fulfilled.
The lot shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements. However, where the
only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the required minimum value
and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no more than one result lower
than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with the following procedure.
- two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall be tested at the
same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do
not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the lot shall be rejected, and the
requirements of paragraph 4.4 "Retreatment" shall apply.

C - HARDNESS TESTS
Hardness tests shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. A hardness indentation shall be
made at each end of the bar.
These tests provide an indication of homogeneity, both of the bars themselves and of the lot as a
whole.
Results shall meet the requirements given in table II. If this is not the case, the lot shall be
rejected and the requirements of paragraph 4.4 "Retreatment" shall apply.

 n° 140-2013 M 2000 / 457

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 2312

4.4 RETREATMENT
Lots rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report. In such cases, test specimens
shall be taken under the same conditions as specified in paragraph 4.2. Prolongations to be used for
testing are indicated in paragraph 4.3.1. The tests performed shall be the same as those described
in table III.

No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

5.1 VISUAL EXAMINATION
Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal.

This examination shall be performed during both descaling and final machining of the bars.

Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects.

If, on surface examination, a part is found to have defects, it cannot be accepted as is, and the
requirements of paragraph 7 of this specification shall apply.

5.2 MAGNETIC PARTICLE AND LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATIONS

5.2.1 Magnetic particle examination
Magnetic particle examination procedures are specified in MC 5140.

The examination shall be performed on machined parts, prior to threading.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.

The following indications shall be considered unacceptable conditions:

- linear indications whose greatest dimension is larger than one third of the nominal diameter or
8 mm, whichever is smaller,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.

Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications, plus the distance between them.
Whenever linear indications are detected, a liquid penetrant examination shall confirm that they do
not correspond to a defect appearing at the surface, otherwise the part shall be rejected.

M 2000 / 458  n° 140-2013

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 2312

5.2.2 Liquid penetrant examination

Requirements for liquid penetrant examination are given in MC 4140.
The examination shall be performed on all parts in finished condition (after threading), see M 5140,
except for the vessel and pump casing nuts, for which the examination shall be performed on blanks,
prior to threading.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indications shall be considered unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance
with MC 2300.

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed on the as-delivered part.

6.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe characteristics are usually as follows:
- for straight beam examination: frequency 3 to 4 MHz,
- for angle beam examination: frequency 2 MHz, refraction angle 35°.

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3 or,
with paragraph 13.3 of standard NF EN 10308, for type 1 parts.
Bars which are solid at the heat treatment for mechanical properties stage are of part type 1a.
Bars which are drilled at the heat treatment for mechanical properties stage are of part type 3a.
In addition to standard NF EN 10308 or standard NF EN 10228-3 prescriptions, for type 1 parts with
diameter higher than 100 mm, an examination in the axial direction shall be performed from both
ends over half the length of the part plus 10%.

 n° 140-2013 M 2000 / 459

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 2312

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3 or, with
paragraph 14 of standard NF EN 10308, for type 1 parts.

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of standard NF EN 10228-3 or,
standard NF EN 10308 for type 1 parts:
- for radial direction: quality class 3,
- for axial direction: quality class 2.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of standard NF EN 10228-3:
- for the DGS method: quality class 3,
- for the DAC method: quality class 3.

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
No repair by welding shall be permissible.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings.
The values shall be within the tolerances given on the drawings.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

M 2000 / 460  n° 140-2013

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 2312

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been retreated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments including stabilizing heat treatment, if relevant),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 140-2013 M 2000 / 461

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 2312

M 2000 / 462  n° 140-2013

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2321

M 2321

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

PWR REACTOR COOLANT PUMP DISK FLYWHEELS

MADE FROM NICKEL-CHROMIUM-MOLYBDENUM
ALLOY STEEL PLATE

0 SCOPE
This specification covers the reactor coolant pump disk flywheels made from low nickel-chromium-
molybdenum alloy steel (20 NCD 14-7), cut from plates between 150 and 220 mm in thickness.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It shall be aluminium-killed and vacuum-
degassed.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I below.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. In addition, he shall provide two product analyses, one of which shall be performed
on a specimen taken at the top of each rolled sheet and the other on a specimen taken at the bottom
of the sheet.

These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

The analyses may be performed on metal discard from mechanical test specimens.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 463

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2321

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 20 NCD 14-7

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Maximum Carbon 0.23 0.23

Silicon 0.20 - 0.35 0.20 - 0.35
Manganese 0.20 - 0.40 0.20 - 0.45
Maximum Sulphur 0.010 0.015
Maximum Phosphorus 0.015 0.020
Nickel 3.00 - 4.00 3.00 - 4.00
Chromium 1.50 - 2.00 1.50 - 2.00
Molybdenum 0.45 - 0.60 0.45 - 0.60
Maximum Vanadium 0.030 0.030
Maximum Copper 0.25 0.25
Maximum Aluminium 0.030 0.030

Note: Tin, arsenic and antimony contents shall be determined for information purposes.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the rolling mill shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- preliminary press flattening and rolling operations,
- position of the disks within the sheet, and more specifically final rolling direction with respect to
the ingot centreline,
- indication of main rolling direction,
- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each manufacturing operation, with forging ratio
and overall ratio of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of the sheet as-rolled, profile for heat treatment,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the rolled sheet,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

M 2000 / 464  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2321

3.2 ROLLING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.
A record of ingot weight and top and bottom end discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of
Surveillance Agents.

3.3 MACHINING
If the disks are obtained by oxy-gas cutting, an oversize shall be left attached to the blank.

This oversize shall be at least 50 mm on the radius at bore location and 30 mm on the perimeter.

All the surfaces shall then be rough-machined.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

3.4.1 Plate delivery condition
The plates from which the disks are to be cut shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This
treatment shall consist of the following operations:

- homogenizing heat treatment between 900°C and 1000°C,

- heat treatment for mechanical properties:
. austenitizing (at a temperature between 840°C and 870°C),
. quenching by immersion in water,
. tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still
air cooling.

Nominal holding temperature for tempering shall be between 620°C and 670°C. Holding time shall
be selected depending on plate thickness, on the minimum basis of half an hour for every twenty
five millimeters thickness.

Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

3.4.2 Disk delivery condition

If, subsequent to oxy-gas cutting of disks, the Supplier considers it necessary to subject the part to
stress-relieving heat treatment, this treatment shall be performed at a holding temperature at least
20°C lower than the nominal tempering temperature. Cooling shall take place in still air.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 465

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2321

Heat treatment conditions shall be indicated in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1),
which shall include the following information:
- holding temperature and time,
- cooling rate.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II below:
TABLE II

NAME TEST
PROPERTIES REQUIRED VALUE
OF TEST TEMPERATURE

Tension 20°C Rp0.2 minimum value 600 MPa

Rm 750/900 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value
15
KV impact 0°C Minimum average value 104 J
Minimum individual value (1) 80 J
– 40°C Minimum individual value 56 J

(1) No more than one result the minimum average value shall be accepted per series of three test specimens.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from the top and bottom ends of each rolled sheet.

Samples shall be taken from the plate after it has undergone the heat treatment for mechanical
properties suited to the grade of steel (see paragraph 3.4). They shall be clearly identified and final
rolling direction shall be indicated.

The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.

Test specimens shall be taken at half the distance between the edge of the plate and its centreline.
When this proves impossible, they shall be taken as close to this position as possible. No test
specimen shall be taken at a distance from the treated end of the plate smaller than the plate
thickness.

The longitudinal axis of the tension test specimens and impact test specimens shall be perpendicular
to the final rolling direction. This axis shall be located at half the plate thickness, or as close to this
position as possible.

The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to rolling skins.

M 2000 / 466  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2321

4.3 TESTS TO BE PERFORMED ON SAMPLES

4.3.1 Condition of samples
The tests shall be performed on test specimens taken from samples which have undergone a heat
treatment representative of that of the disks.

If the disks are subjected to stress-relieving heat treatment subsequent to oxy-gas cutting (see
paragraph 3.4.2), the test samples shall undergo simulated stress-relieving heat treatment in a
laboratory furnace in the conditions which follows the requirements of M 151 stipulated in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

4.3.2 Number and content of tests

The number of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown
in table III.
TABLE III

POSITION OF SPECIMENS NUMBER OF

TEST DEPTH AND
NAME TOP BOTTOM SPECIMENS
TEMPE- ORIENTATION
OF TEST PER TYPE OF
RATURE OF SPECIMEN 1/4 3/4 1/4 3/4 TEST
WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH
Tension room halfway through plate 1 1 1 1 4
transverse
KV impact 0°C halfway through plate 3 3 3 3 12
transverse
- 40°C halfway through plate 3 3
transverse
Ductile-to- halfway through plate 15 15
brittle transverse
transition
curve (1)

(1) In order to determine variation in energy absorbed by breakage as a function of temperature, three impact tests
(in addition to the tests at 0°C and - 40°C) shall be performed at each of the following temperatures:
- 80°C, - 60°C, - 20°C, + 20°C and + 40°C.
These tests must allow the ductile-to-brittle transition temperature to be determined.
Ductile-to-brittle transition temperature is the temperature at which the surface of a broken specimen exhibits
50% granular and 50% fibrous fracture.

4.3.3 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall have a circular section. Their normal diameter shall be 10 mm and their
dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 467

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2321

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

The following values shall be recorded:

- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II (percentage reduction of area is
given for information purposes).

If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted, if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS AND PLOTTING THE DUCTILE-TO-BRITTLE TRANSITION CURVE

a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.

Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes.

The temperature for additional tests used to define the ductile-to-brittle transition curve shall be
those indicated in table III.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at 0°C and - 40°C shown in table II must be
fulfilled.

M 2000 / 468  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2321

c) Test at 0°C
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements. However, where the
only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the required minimum value
and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no more than one result lower
than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with the following procedure:
two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall be tested at the same
temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do not
comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

d) Tests at - 40°C
If one of the results does not meet the requirements of table II, two series of retests shall be
performed on test specimens taken close to the defective ones. The part shall be accepted if no
result of the second test series is lower than the specified individual minimum.

4.4 RETREATMENT
Plates rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects.
The disks shall be subjected to liquid penetrant examination.
Requirements for this examination are given in MC 4000.
The surfaces subjected to this examination shall be the following:
- the centre bore and the surfaces adjacent to the circle of radium 900 mm, from the disk axis,
- the disk perimeter.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition (1).
All defects which produce indications larger than the acceptable dimensions indicated in the table
below shall be located and eliminated or repaired.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 469

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2321

LOCATION ROOT AND FLANK BORING AND TOP

OF THREAD AND BOTTOM SIDES DISK EDGE
TYPE OF (1) (2) (1)
INDICATION
not parallel to
top and  1.5  1.5  3.0
Linear bottom sides
indications
(mm) parallel
to top and  1.5  1.5  5.0
bottom sides

Rounded indications (mm)  1.5  1.5  5.0

Cumulative straight Three of more indications aligned less than 2 mm

line indications apart (from edge to edge) (1)
5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular
Density area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension shall
(clustered indications) not exceed 20 cm taken in the most unfavourable
location relative to the indications being evaluated.
(1) Different dimensions, at least equal to those indicated, may be imposed by the equipment specification or other
relevant contractual documents for the corresponding surfaces machined at the Manufacturer's.
(2) These dimensions should be the minimum level guaranteed by the Manufacturer which does the machining.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed after any heat treatment for mechanical properties and
preferably after last machining performed at the forging mill.

6.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe frequency shall normally be 4 MHz.

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 2.
As a deviation from standard NF EN 10228-3, one side wall is examined.

M 2000 / 470  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2321

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard NF EN
10228-3.

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

In rough-machined condition, only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted
part tolerances shall be acceptable.

No repair by welding shall be permissible.

After repairs, a liquid penetrant examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 4000. The
requirements of paragraph 5 above shall apply.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
After heat treatment.
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the Supplier and the profile of the finished
part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.

The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

 n° 137-2012 M 2000 / 471

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 2321

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been retreated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and disk reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 2000 / 472  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3201

M 3201
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

MARTENSITIC STAINLESS CHROMIUM-NICKEL-

MOLYBDENUM STEEL CASTINGS FOR
NON-PRESSURE-RETAINING INTERNAL,
CATEGORY A, B AND C PARTS OF
PRESSURIZED WATER REACTOR PUMPS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers cast internal non-pressure- retaining parts in weldable martensitic stainless
steel of AFNOR grades Z5 CND 13-04 and Z5 CN 12-01. These parts fall into three categories, A,
B and C, in accordance with chapters C and D 2000. Categories A and B are themselves divided into
sub-categories A1, A2, B1, B2.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric arc or high or medium frequency induction furnace, or any
other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. This may be performed on a small ingot or on a pellet adjoining the part or assembly
or on metal discard from mechanical test specimens. These analyses shall be performed in
compliance with MC 1000.
For category A parts, the product per lot analysis shall be verified.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 1
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3201

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE Z5 CND 13-04 Z5 CN 12-01

LADLE AND PRODUCT LADLE AND PRODUCT
ELEMENT
ANALYSIS % ANALYSIS %

Maximum Carbon 0.060 0.080

Silicon 0.30 - 0.80 max. 0.60
Manganese max. 1.00 0.40 - 0.80
Maximum Sulphur 0.020 0.020
Maximum Phosphorus 0.030 0.030
Chromium 12.00 - 13.50 11.50 - 13.00
Nickel 3.50 - 4.50 0.90 - 1.30
Molybdenum 0.40 - 0.70 max. 0.50

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the foundry shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include, in particular, the following:
- identification of melting process,
- identification of casting method,
- part procurement drawings with position of any samples which are integrally attached or adjacent
to the part,
- heat treatment conditions,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling, non-destructive testing and repair welding operations shall be
presented in chronological order.

PROTOTYPE PART
The manufacturing method shall be tested using a prototype part produced in accordance with the
requirements of M 160. This prototype part is only required for category A and B impellers as
defined in annex 1.
The radiographic examination stipulated by M 160 is executed as stipulated in MC 3200 with the
criteria defined in annex 1.

3.2 CASTING
The choice of casting method shall be left to the foundry. This method shall be identified in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

M 3000 / 2  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3201

3.3 MACHINING
Parts shall be machined as indicated on the procurement drawing.
Surface roughness of the zones to be examined shall be such as to ensure that the results of non-
destructive examinations are significantly accurate. These surface roughness figures are detailed in
SECTION III of this Code for the examinations concerned here.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Parts shall be delivered as treated.

Heat treatment for mechanical properties shall consist of quenching followed by tempering.
Austenitizing temperatures prior to tempering and tempering temperatures shall be set by the
foundry in order to meet the requirements given in paragraph 4 of this specification. The nominal
tempering temperature shall however be higher than 600°C.
Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. The Supplier may
be allowed not to place thermocouples on the part for small size parts treated as a lot, in accordance
with the requirements of F 8140. If, after heat treatment, the parts do not exhibit the required
characteristics, they may be retreated (see paragraph 4.4).

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.
TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED VALUE

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE Z5 CND 13-04 Z5 CN 12-01

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 550 MPa 380 MPa

Rm 750/900 MPa 540/700 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 15 18

KV 0°C Minimum average value 40 J 32 J

impact Minimum individual value (1) 28 J 24 J

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value may be accepted per series of three tests.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall consist of ingots integral with the part or from separately cast ingots attached to
the part (1) prior to heat treatment, except in the case of a sample undergoing simulated stress-
relieving heat treatment.
(1) For this type of part, it is not necessary to weld test ingots to the part before heat treatment. However, care must be
taken to ensure that the test ingots which represent the parts lot undergo heat treatments with these parts.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 3
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3201

The samples shall be of sufficient size to ensure that the necessary number of test specimens may be
taken for the tests prescribed and for any retests required.
The smallest dimension of the test ingot cross-section shall be representative of the minimum
thickness of the part walls (excluding hub) and this dimension must never be less than 28 mm. In the
case of parts with a maximum wall thickness of less than 28 mm, the smallest dimension of the test
sample cross-section may be less than 28 mm provided it remains greater than 14 mm.
Specimen axes must be located along the sample axes.
Samples shall be taken after heat treatment for mechanical properties.

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
The mechanical properties shall be determined for each lot. A lot is defined as comprising parts
from the same heat of steel which have been treated in the same furnace charge. A lot is
restricted to:
- 10 parts or 3000 kg for parts weighing more than 50 kg,
- 30 parts or 1500 kg for parts weighing 50 kg or less.
Two series of tests shall be performed for each lot. One on a sample which has undergone heat
treatment for mechanical properties and one on a sample which has undergone heat treatment for
mechanical properties and simulated stress-relieving heat treatment, performed in the following
conditions according to the requirements of M 151.
The number and content of the tests to be performed are shown in table III.
As with the test samples, a Brinell hardness test is carried out on each part of the lot in order to
ensure that the mechanical properties recorded are truly representative.
If repairs by welding are performed prior to heat treatment of the lot for mechanical properties, only
tests after treatment for mechanical properties are required.

TABLE III

NUMBER OF
NAME CONDITION TEST
SPECIMENS
OF TEST OF SPECIMEN TEMPERATURE
PER TYPE OF TEST

Tension HTMP room 1

HTMP + SSRHT room 1

KV impact HTMP 0°C 3

HTMP + SSRHT 0°C 3
BRINELL hardness HTMP room -
HTMP + SSRHT room -
Key :

- HTMP : heat treatment for mechanical properties.

- SSRHT : simulated stress relieving heat treatment.

M 3000 / 4  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3201

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall have a circular section. Their normal diameter shall be 10 mm and their
dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests were
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. Test temperature shall be 0°C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage required at 0°C shown in table II must be fulfilled.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 5
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3201

c) Retests
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no more
than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with the
following procedure: two sets of three test specimens shall be tested at the same temperature as
the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do not comply with the
requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2.
The tests performed shall be same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Final examination for surface defects shall be performed after all heat treatment has been completed.

EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
Sand shall be carefully removed from all the parts, which shall then be trimmed to eliminate risers
and vent scrap, parting lines and runner. Parts shall then be subjected to a complete visual
examination in accordance with MC 7100.
Parts shall be carefully examined during all stages of manufacture and machining to ensure that the
metal is sound.
Parts shall be free from defects such as scale, cracks, porosities, sand inclusions, or other injurious
defects.
A liquid penetrant examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 4000.

5.1 DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

Defined in annex 1 according to the different part categories and zones shown in annexes 2 and 3.

5.2 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS

Any defect with one dimension of 2 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.

M 3000 / 6  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3201

5.3 EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Defined in annex 1 according to the different part categories.

6 RADIOGRAPHIC VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION

Unless otherwise indicated, all examinations shall be performed after the parts have been heat
treated.
This examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 3200.

6.1 TEST AREAS

Defined in annex 1 according to the different part categories and zones shown in annexes 2 and 3.

6.2 DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The length of the zone examined on weld edges shall be measured from the final profile and shall be
equal to at least 3 times the thickness of the wall. There is no requirement for this length to
exceed 75 mm.

6.3 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

For all severity levels, the following defects shall be unacceptable: cracks, chaplets and chill
remnants.
The applicable acceptance criteria specified by standard NF EN 12681, Annex A, are defined in
annex 1 according to the different part categories.
Special case of castings, with wall thickness lower or equal to 25.4 mm, made by the lost wax
process:
Table IV, gives the applicable criteria and reference radiographs as defined in ASTM E 192
standard, as a function of severity levels mentioned above.

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

7.1 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITHOUT REPAIR WELDING
Defects detected by surface examination or magnetic particle examination may be eliminated by
grinding, provided the thickness of the ground areas remains within the tolerances specified on the
drawing and that the resulting cavities are not injurious to the areas around them.
Where this is not the case, the requirements of paragraph 7.2 shall apply.
Overheating of the ground surface must be avoided during removal:
- cavities must blend smoothly into surrounding areas,
- cavities shall be subjected to liquid penetrant examination in accordance with the procedures and
criteria described in paragraph 5 of this specification.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 7
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3201

7.2 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITH REPAIR WELDING

7.2.1 Removal of defects
Areas whose defects do not meet the acceptability criteria defined in paragraphs 5 and 6 shall be
excavated by grinding or chipping or carbon arc cutting plus grinding (in the case of carbon arc
cutting, the part shall be preheated to a temperature of about 120°C).
Excavation cavities shall be subjected to liquid penetrant examination in accordance with the
procedures and criteria described in paragraph 5 of this specification.
Where doubt exists as to whether a radiographically detected defect has been completely removed
by excavation, particularly if there are two defects, one below the other, in the same cross-section, a
new radiographic examination may be made of the excavated area (in which case the requirements
of MC 3200 shall not be applicable).
Excavation shall continue until surface defects which are unacceptable for finished parts have been
eliminated, in accordance with the criteria given in paragraph 5.
If an excavation is located in an area for which liquid penetrant or radiographic examination is not
stipulated in paragraphs 5 and 6, the acceptability criteria to be applied to cavity inspection shall be
those of paragraph 5 concerning category C impellers.

7.2.2 Repair welding

Repairs shall be made by welding. The grade of the deposited metal shall be of the same type as the
base metal. The foundry shall draw up detailed repair welding procedures in accordance with the
requirements of SECTION IV of this Code.

7.2.3 Heat treatment after welding

Heat treatment must be performed after repair welding. This treatment can be either heat treatment
for mechanical properties, or stress-relieving heat treatment. In this latter case, because of the
temperature variations in the furnace, the nominal temperature shall not be less than 580°C. If for a
particular reason heat treatment cannot be performed after welding, the provisions of paragraph
S 7620 can be applied.

7.3 EXAMINATION OF WELD REPAIRS

The following non-destructive examinations shall be made on completion of weld repairs:

A - LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION OF ALL AREAS REPAIRED

Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 5 of this
specification.
In the case of repairs made in an area for which the liquid penetrant or radiographic examination is
not stipulated in paragraphs 5 and 6, the acceptability criteria to be applied shall be those of
paragraph 5 concerning category C impellers.

M 3000 / 8  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3201

TABLE IV

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 9
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3201

B - RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION OF MAJOR REPAIRS

The terms "major" and "minor" excavation cavities are defined in annexes 4 and 5 of this
specification.
Cavities are classified according to depth or surface area.
Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraph 6 of
this specification. For repairs in zones where volumetric examination is not specified in paragraph 6
above, major repairs shall be radiographically examined as prescribed in MC 3240, unless the zone
is not readily accessible for radiographic examination. Severity level 3 shall be applicable.
Interpretation of radiographs shall meet the requirements of MC 3250.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensional characteristics of parts after final machining shall comply with the procurement
drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with
C and D 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- charts of major repairs,
- for all repairs by welding (major and minor):
. production weld data sheets,
. welding procedure data sheets and filler materials acceptance reports quoted in production
weld data sheets,

M 3000 / 10  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3201

- dimensional checks,
- heat treatment (temperature ranges and holding times).

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 11
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3201

ANNEX 1

Pump internals classification: Examinations to be performed

M 3000 / 12  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3201

ANNEX 1 (cont.)

Pump internals classification: Examinations to be performed

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 13
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3201

ANNEX 2

IMPELLERS

TEST AREA 1 = Outlet vane TEST AREA 4 = Vane-to-shroud radius

TEST AREA 2 = Inlet vane TEST AREA 5 = Hub

TEST AREA 3 = Leaktight seal bearing surface TEST AREA 6 = Channels

M 3000 / 14  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3201

ANNEX 3

DIFFUSERS

TEST AREA 1 = return channels TEST AREA 4 = Outlet vane

TEST AREA 2 = Seal contact surface TEST AREA 5 = Diffuser channels

TEST AREA 3 = Inlet vane TEST AREA 6 = Channels

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 15
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3201

ANNEX 4

M 3000 / 16  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3201

ANNEX 5

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
SURFACE TO BE MACHINED

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 17
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3201

ANNEX 5 (cont.)

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
UNMACHINED SURFACE

M 3000 / 18  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3202

M 3202
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

ROLLED OR FORGED MARTENSITIC STEEL

PARTS FOR CLASS 2 AND 3 AUXILIARY
PUMP DRIVE SHAFTS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers the procurement of parts to be used in the fabrication of martensitic steel
auxiliary pump drive shafts (AFNOR grades Z12 C 13, Z20 C 13, Z5 CND 13.04, Z5 CND 16.04).
For shafts whose profile is obtained solely by machining of a bar, forged or rolled rounds with a
maximum diameter of 200 mm or less may be procured.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made in an electric furnace and vacuum-degassed, or any other technically
equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and part analyses, shall comply with the requirements
of table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. In addition, the foundry shall provide a product analysis. This analysis may be
performed on metal discard from mechanical test specimens.
These analyses shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 19
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3202

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the Supplier shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- rolling instruction sheet or a dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation
with the partial and total reduction coefficients determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of the part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examinations and
delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment sampling and non-destructive testing operations shall be presented in
chronological order.

3.2 FORGING OR ROLLING

There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.
A record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance
Agents. The same applies for the overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380
which shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the shaft is rough-machined either by forging or by
rolling, or by forging and rolling, or by rolling and machining, such that the profile of the rough-
machined part shall correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall
be given in the manufacturing programme (paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After final heat treatment

After heat treatment, the parts shall be subjected to the following so that they may be ultrasonic
tested:
. either descaling if the shafts have been subjected to machining, before heat treatment, to a profile
compatible with US examination,
. or machining to a US examination profile.

M 3000 / 20  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3202

TABLE I

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 21
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3202

The surface roughness obtained shall be such as to ensure that the results of non-destructive
examinations are significantly accurate.
The surface condition must be determined in accordance with MC 7200.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Shafts shall be delivered in the as-treated condition.

3.4.1 Grades Z12 C 13 and Z20 C 13

The treatment shall consist of oil quenching with an austenitizing temperature of between 950°C
and 1000°C, followed by tempering at a temperature of > 600°C and air or water cooling.
In addition, the shafts undergo stabilizing heat treatment at a temperature at least 25°C less than the
minimum tempering temperature. The cooling rate after temperature holding shall be given in the
manufacturing programme.

3.4.2 Grades Z5 CND 13.04 and Z5 CND 16.04

The treatment shall consist of oil quenching with an austenitizing temperature of between 950°C
and 1080°C, followed by tempering in time-temperature and cooling conditions such as to guarantee
a stable structure. This temperature is always > 580°C.
In addition, the shafts undergo one or more stabilizing heat treatments, if possible done vertically, at
a temperature lower than the tempering temperature.

3.4.3 Conditions applicable to all shafts

Details of all heat treatments (holding times, holding temperatures, cooling rate) are given in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).
The thermal cycles undergone by the shafts shall be recorded by means of thermocouples. During
tempering and stabilizing treatment, and unless technologically impossible, at least one of the
thermocouples is placed on one of the parts in the charge.
Thermocouple locations shall be specified in the manufacturing programme.
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

M 3000 / 22  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3202

TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED VALUE

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE Longitudinal Transverse
Z12 C 13 and Z20 C 13

Tension room Rp0.2 minimum value 590 MPa

Rm 730-930 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 15

KV + 20°C Minimum individual value 40 J 28 J

impact

Brinell room 201 to 285 HB 201 to 285 HB

hardness
Z5 CND 13.04

Tension room Rp0.2 minimum value 685 MPa

Rm 780-980 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 15

KV 0°C Minimum average value (1) 56 J 40 J

impact Minimum individual value 40 J 28 J

Brinell room 217 to 302 HB 217 to 302 HB

hardness
Z5 CND 16.04

Tension room Rp0.2 minimum value 685 MPa

Rm 820-1020 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 14

KV 0°C Minimum average value (1) 72 J 48 J

impact Minimum individual value 48 J 32 J

Brinell room 229 to 311 HB 229 to 311 HB

hardness
(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value may be accepted per series of three tests
specimens.

4.2 SAMPLING
The test sample shall consist of a prolongation at the end with the largest diameter.
The prolongation, equivalent in diameter to the corresponding journal of the forged shaft or of the
bar, shall be cropped after the part or rough forging has been subjected to all heat treatments: heat
treatment for mechanical properties and stabilizing heat treatment.
The size of the prolongation shall be such that it can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 23
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3202

Tension and impact test specimens shall be taken longitudinally at mid-radius. However, should the
diameter so permit, test specimens may be taken transversely.
Test-pertinent areas shall be located at a distance from the treated end of the prolongation at least
equal to the radius of the journal or the bar.
Impact test specimen notch roots shall be radially oriented.

4.3 TESTING OF SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Definition of a lot

A - SHAFTS MACHINED FROM FORGED OR ROLLED ROUNDS
OF DIAMETER  200 mm
A lot shall consist of rough-machined parts of the same diameter and from the same heat, each
capable of providing a maximum of two shafts, which have undergone the same manufacturing
cycle and the same heat treatments (including stabilizing treatment after straightening) in the same
furnace charge.
A lot shall be limited to 1500 kg.

B - FORGED SHAFTS OF DIAMETER > 200 mm

A lot shall consist of a rough-machined part capable of providing a maximum of two shafts.

4.3.2 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, the orientation of test specimens and test temperatures are given
in table III.
TABLE III

NUMBER
NAME ORIENTATION TEST
OF SPECIMENS
OF TEST OF SPECIMEN TEMPERATURE
PER TYPE OF TEST
Tension Longitudinal or room 1
transverse

KV Longitudinal or 0 or 20°C * 3
impact transverse

Hardness room See 4.3.3.C

*For grades Z12 C13 and Z20 C13

M 3000 / 24  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3202

A - SHAFTS MACHINED FROM FORGED OR ROLLED ROUNDS

OF DIAMETER  200 mm
A maximum of one series of tests per rough-forging and a minimum of two series of tests per lot
shall be performed.
One series of tests shall be performed for lot consisting of one rough-forging,

B - FORGED SHAFTS OF DIAMETER  200 mm

One series of tests per rough-forging shall be performed.

4.3.3 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall have a circular section. Their normal diameter shall be 10 mm and their
dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II. If this is not the case and the test
specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the usefulness of the product) or if
unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the specimen or a testing machine
malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If the results of the second test are
satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, the following paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be specified in MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 25
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3202

Three test specimens shall be broken for each series of tests.

Percent shear fracture shall be recorded.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements shown in table II must be met.
The lot shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of the requirements. However, where the only
unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the required minimum value,
retests may be performed in accordance with the following procedure:
- two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall be tested at the
same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do
not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the lot shall be rejected and the
requirements of paragraph 4.4 "Retreatment" shall apply.

C - HARDNESS TESTS
a) Tests
Hardness tests shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. An indentation shall be made
along four 90° axes, in three different planes, located at both ends and in the middle of the shaft
or rough forging. This hardness measurement in the middle of the blank may be waived in the
case of a blank capable of producting only one shaft and in the case where such measurement
would adversely affect the final machining of the shaft. This point shall be specified in the
technical manufacturing programme taking into account heat treatment and delivery profiles.
These tests serve to establish the uniform hardness of the rough-forging and the heat-treated lot.

b) Results
The hardness values shown in table II must be satisfied. The maximum allowable hardness
variation within the same lot shall be 42 HB.

4.4 RETREATMENT
Lots rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be taken under the same conditions as specified in paragraph 4.2.
The tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3. No more than two
retreatments shall be allowed.

M 3000 / 26  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3202

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

5.1 VISUAL EXAMINATION
During the various manufacturing and machining phases, the surfaces are thoroughly examined to
check the soundness of the metal.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks or other injurious defects.
Should the visual examination show up defects on the part, the part cannot be accepted as is and the
instructions given in paragraph 7 of this specification shall apply.

5.2 MAGNETIC PARTICLE OR LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION

A liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination shall be carried out on all surfaces of the shaft
in the as treated condition and machined to the delivery dimensions.

5.2.1 Magnetic Particle Examination

The magnetic particle examination procedures are defined as per MC 5140.

CRITERIA
Magnetic Particle Examination
- Indications with one dimension greater than 1 mm shall be considered recordable conditions.
- All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
. linear indications,
. rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,

. three or more aligned indications less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more
than 15 mm if this distance is between 3 and 6 mm.
Two separate indications are considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice the
length of the smaller of them. The cumulated indication length is equal to the measurement of the
lengths of both indications plus the gap between them.
If the above examinations show the presence of defects on the part, it may not be accepted as is and
the instructions given in paragraph 7 of this specification shall apply.

5.2.2 Liquid Penetrant Examination

The liquid penetrant examination procedures are defined as per MC 4140.

CRITERIA
- any defect with an indication of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition,

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 27
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3202

- in all cases, defects producing the following indications shall be located and eliminated or
repaired:
. linear indications,
. rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
. three or more aligned indications less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
. five or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2 whose greater
dimension shall not exceed 20 cm taken in the most unfavourable location in relation to the
indications being evaluated.
Should the above examinations indicate the presence of unacceptable defects on the part, the
instructions given in paragraph 7 of this specification shall apply.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed when the profile of the part permits satisfactory test
performance. It shall be performed in the following order of preference:
- after final machining,
- after heat treatment followed by machining or descaling if the shafts were machined before heat
treatment.

6.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in paragraph MC 2300.
Probe frequency shall normally be 2 MHz.

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3 or with
paragraph 13.3 of standard NF EN 10308.
Part type is 1a.
In addition to standard NF EN 10308 or standard NF EN 10228-3 prescriptions, for parts with
diameter higher than 100 mm and issued from rough forgings with diameter variations
dia.max/dia.min > 1.5, an examination shall be performed in the axial direction, from both ends over
half the length of the part plus 10%.

M 3000 / 28  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3202

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3 or with
paragraph 14 of standard NF EN 10308.

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of standard NF EN 10228-3 or
standard NF EN 10308:
- for radial direction: quality class 3,
- for axial direction: quality class 2.

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
After repairs, a liquid penetrant examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 4000. The
criteria applicable are those given in paragraph 5.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the Supplier and the profile of the finished
part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. These values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with C 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 29
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3202

- heat treatment data,

- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 3000 / 30  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3203

M 3203
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

13% CHROMIUM MARTENSITIC STAINLESS

STEEL PLATES FOR USE IN MAKING
PWR STEAM GENERATOR
SUPPORT PLATES

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable 13% chromium martensitic stainless steel plates between 15 mm
and 40 mm thick, for use in making PWR steam generator support plates.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric arc furnace, or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
The chemical composition, as determined by ladle and plate analysis, shall comply with the
requirements of table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
He shall also supply an analysis of the top end of a plate from each heat. If the plates are taken from
continuous-cast slabs, this analysis shall be performed on one plate from each slab, from either of
the two ends in relation to the rolling direction.
These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000. Samples may be taken from metal
discard from mechanical test specimens.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 31
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3203

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE Z 10 C 13
ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS % PRODUCT ANALYSIS %

Maximum carbon 0.10 0.11

Maximum manganese 1.00 1.03
Maximum phosphorus 0.025 0.030
Maximum sulphur 0.030 0.035
Maximum silicon 0.50 0.55
Maximum nickel 1.00 1.00
Chromium 12.50 - 14.00 12.35 - 14.15
Molybdenum for information for information
Copper for information for information
Aluminium for information for information

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the rolling mill shall draw up a manufacturing
programmme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- method of obtaining plate (ingot, continuous casting, and dimensions of products at the various
rolling stages),
- main rolling direction,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the plate,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

3.2 ROLLING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A
record of ingot weight and top and bottom discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of
Surveillance Agents.

M 3000 / 32  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3203

3.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The part shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment, which is called heat treatment
for mechanical properties, shall consist of the following operations:
- austenitizing at a temperature between 960°C and 1050°C,
- quenching by immersion in water or water spraying, or by immersion in oil,
- tempering at a temperature selected so as to obtain the required properties, followed by still air
cooling.
Nominal holding temperature for tempering shall be between 715°C and 770°C.
Should the Supplier choose different heat treatment procedures for tempering, he shall request the
Contractor's approval prior to performance of this treatment.
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
If the plate or plates are to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in
accordance with the same instructions as above.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II below.
TABLE II

NAME TEST
PROPERTIES REQUIRED VALUE
OF TEST TEMPERATURE
Tension room Rp0.2 minimum value 400 MPa
Rm 550 to 700 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 16

300°C Rtp0.2 for information

Rm for information

KV impact 0°C Minimum average value 28 J

Longitudinal room Minimum individual value (1) 21 J

Bend test at No tears or cracks on the tension
180° side of the specimens

Brinell room Maximum value 220 HB

hardness Preferred maximum value 200 HB
(1) No more than one result below the average minimum value shall be accepted per series of three tests
specimens.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 33
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3203

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from the top end of each rolled plate or, if the plates are taken from
continuous-cast slabs, from either end in relation to the rolling direction.
Samples shall be taken from the plate as-delivered by the rolling mill after it has been subjected to
treatment for mechanical properties (see paragraph 3.3). They shall be clearly identified and their
final rolling direction shall be indicated.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests. Test specimens shall be taken half-way between the edge and the axis of the plate or, if
this is impossible, from as close as possible to this location. No test specimen shall be taken at a
distance from the treated end of the plate which is less than the thickness of the plate.
The longitudinal axis of the tension test specimens shall be perpendicular to the final rolling
direction. It is located at 1/6 of the plate thickness, or as close to this position as possible.
The longitudinal axis of the impact test specimens shall be parallel to the final rolling direction. The
test specimens shall be taken from the skin.
The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the rolling skin.
The longitudinal axis of the bending test specimen shall be perpendicular to the final rolling
direction. The test specimen shall be taken at the skin.

4.3 TESTING
Tests shall be performed on test specimens from samples which were not subjected to heat treatment
after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens and test temperatures are given in
table III "As- delivered tests".

TABLE III

AS-DELIVERED TESTS
NUMBER OF
NAME ORIENTATION TEST
SPECIMENS PER
OF TEST OF SPECIMEN TEMPERATURE
TYPE OF TEST
Tension Transverse room 1
Tension Transverse 300°C 1
KV impact Longitudinal 0°C 3
Bend test Transverse room 1

M 3000 / 34  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3203

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
additional tests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at 0°C shown in table II must be fufilled.
If any one of the conditions is not fulfilled, the part is rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 35
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3203

However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no more
than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with the
following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall
be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test
specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

C - BEND TESTS
a) Test specimens
The dimensions of the test specimen shall meet the requirements of MC 1000.
The longitudinal axis of the test specimen shall be perpendicular to the final rolling direction.
The test specimen shall be 30 mm thick and one of its faces shall be a rolling skin and shall
constitute the outside face of the bend.

b) Test method
The bend test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.
The test specimen shall be bent until its two legs, whose length shall be 3.5 times the specimen
thickness, are parallel. The mandrel diameter shall be 105 mm.

c) Results
No cracks, tears or blisters shall be accepted on the outside face of the bend.
If this is not the case, the procedures given under 4.3.2.A "Results" shall be followed.

D - HARDNESS TESTS
Hardness tests shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

4.4 RETREATEMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, the coupons shall be taken under the same conditions, as specified in paragraph 4.2.
The tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

All surfaces of the plates shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final stage in accordance
with MC 7100. Their surface shall be plane, uniform and free from wrinkles, overlaps, scabs, tears,
cracks and any other injurious defects.

M 3000 / 36  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3203

After cutting to as-delivered dimensions, the edges shall be visually examined in accordance with
MC 7100. There shall be no cleavage or lamination.
If the above-mentioned examinations detect defects in the plate, the plate cannot be accepted as is
and the requirements of paragraph 7 of this specification shall apply.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
An ultrasonic examination is performed in accordance with MC 2400 which stipulates the
conditions of application of Standard NF EN 10307.
The scanning plan and criteria are those of levels S2 and E3 given in Standard NF EN 10307.

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Small surface defects may be removed by grinding or chipping, provided the thickness remains
locally within the plate tolerances.
The Supplier may propose removing larger defects by the same method. In this case, he shall submit
a report giving a detailed description of the detected defect (location, size, seriousness).
This proposal shall only be accepted if the remaining thickness is sufficient, taking into account the
safety coefficients applied to the equipment design.
In all cases, a liquid penetrant examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 4000 after the
defective area has been removed.
Remark: When a surface preparation is made to facilitate ultrasonic examination, no liquid penetrant
examination shall be required.

CRITERIA
Indications with one dimension greater than 1 mm shall be recorded.

LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION

All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,

- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,

- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 37
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3203

8 ACCEPTANCE AS IS WITH PROVISION

FOR SUBSEQUENT REPAIR
If the plate shows more serious defects, it shall usually be rejected.
The Supplier may exceptionally ask for as-is acceptance of plates with certain surface defects, with
provision for subsequent repair, provided that:
- the total surface area to be corrected does not exceed 1% of the plate surface area,
- the excavation required to remove all defects never reduces the thickness by more than 20% or
by more than 15 mm for plates thicker than 75 mm.
The Supplier may also exceptionally ask for as-is acceptance, with provision for subsequent repair,
of plates which include certain defects visible on the edges (cleavage of the plate cut out to final
dimensions shall always entail the rejection of the plate), provided that the excavation required for
complete removal of the defects remains compatible with the execution of welds.

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The plate dimensions shall conform to the requirements of the drawing specified in the purchase
order.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (in the case of retreatment, this includes recordings of
all heat treatments),

M 3000 / 38  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3203

- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check,
- heat treatment (temperature range and holding times).

These reports shall include:

- heat number and plate reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,

- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 39
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3203

M 3000 / 40  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3204

M 3204
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

FORGINGS MADE FROM CLASS 2 AND 3

MARTENSITIC STAINLESS STEEL

0 SCOPE
This specification covers forgings made from class 2 and 3 martensitic stainless steel.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric arc furnace, or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
Requirements relating to the cobalt content shall be detailed in the equipment specification or other
relevant contractual documents in compliance with subchapters C 2400 and D 2400.
The steelmaker shall also supply a product analysis. This analysis may be made on metal discard
from mechanical test specimens.
These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 41
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3204

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE Z5 CND 16-04 Z5 CND 13-04

LADLE PRODUCT LADLE PRODUCT
ELEMENT
ANALYSIS % ANALYSIS % ANALYSIS % ANALYSIS %
Carbon 0.070 max 0.070 max 0.060 max 0.060 max
Chromium 15.00 - 17.00 15.00 - 17.00 12.00 - 14.00 12.00 - 14.00
Nickel 3.50 - 5.50 3.50 - 5.50 3.50 - 4.50 3.50 - 4.50
Molybdenum 0.60 - 1.20 0.60 - 1.30 0.30 - 0.70 0.30 - 0.70
Manganese 0.50 - 1.00 0.50 - 1.00 0.50 - 1.00 0.50 - 1.00
Silicon 1.00 max 1.00 max 0.30 - 0.60 0.30 - 0.60
Maximum sulphur 0.020 0.025 0.015 0.020
Maximum phosphorus 0.025 0.030 0.025 0.030

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of the part in the ingot,
- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation giving the partial and
overall ratios of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A
record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance Agents.

The overall ratio of reduction, calculated in accordance with M 380, shall be greater than 3.

M 3000 / 42  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3204

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the forging shall be rough-machined to a profile as
close as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the manufacturing
programme (paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final examination.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The parts shall be delivered in the as-treated condition. This treatment shall consist of oil quenching
between 950°C and 1080°C, followed by tempering at a temperature higher than 580°C.
If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the retreatment shall be performed in accordance
with the same instructions as above.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.
TABLE II

NAME TEST MECHANICAL REQUIRED VALUE

OF TEST TEMPERATURE PROPERTIES Z5 CND 16-04 Z5 CND 13-04
Tension room Rp0.2 minimum value 635 MPa 685 MPa
Rm 780 to 980 MPa 780 to 980 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 14 15

KV impact 0°C Minimum average value 72 J 56 J

Minimum individual value 48 J 40 J
Brinell hardness room 230 to 295 HB 230 to 295 HB

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from one part per lot. The sample for testing shall be attached to the
part.
These samples shall be taken or cut after the part has been heat treated for mechanical properties;
they shall be clearly identified and their rolling direction shall be indicated.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 43
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3204

The test specimens are cut out in such a way that their axes are oriented:
- for tension and impact test specimens:
. parallel to the main forging direction.

The sample from which the test specimens are to be taken shall be located 20 mm beneath one skin
and 40 mm from any other treated surface.

When it is impossible to position the samples as indicated above in particular because of insufficient
thickness (< 40 mm), the test specimens shall be taken in such a way that their longitudinal axis is
located at mid-thickness and their test-pertinent part is no closer to any other surface than a distance
equal to the thickness.

These surfaces shall be as-treated.

The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the main surfaces.

A drawing showing the position of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
position of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme
(see paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Definition of a lot

A lot shall consist of parts of the same size, from the same heat and which have been subjected to
the same manufacturing cycle and the same heat treatments in the same furnace charge.

4.3.2 Number and content of tests

The tests to be performed, both for lot and part acceptance, orientation of test specimens and test
temperatures are shown in table III.
TABLE III

NUMBER
NAME ORIENTATION TEST
OF SPECIMENS
OF TEST OF SPECIMEN TEMPERATURE
PER TYPE OF TEST
Tension longitudinal room 1
KV impact longitudinal 0°C 3

M 3000 / 44  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3204

4.3.3 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall have a circular section. Their normal diameter shall be 10 mm and their
dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II (reduction of area shall be recorded
for information purposes).
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at 0°C shown in table II must be met.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 45
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3204

c) Tests at 0°C
The part or lot shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see
paragraph 4.4). However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is
lower than the required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory
average, no more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in
accordance with the following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the
defective specimens shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of
the two sets of three test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1,
the lot shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

d) Hardness tests
Hardness tests shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000. A hardness indentation shall be
made on each part of the lot and on the test samples.
Results shall meet the requirements of table II. If this is not the case, the lot or the part shall be
rejected and the requirements of paragraph 4.4 "Retreatment" shall apply.

4.4 RETREATMENT
Lots or lots rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report. In such cases, test coupons
shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks or other injurious defects.
After final machining, liquid penetrant examination shall be performed, in accordance with
MC 4000.
The examination procedures are specified in MC 4000.

EXAMINATION CRITERIA
The following criteria shall be applied.
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,

M 3000 / 46  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3204

- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,

- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge),
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.
When the examinations described above indicate the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the part cannot be accepted as-is and the instructions given in paragraph 7 of this specification
shall apply.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed after final machining.
However, for zones which cannot be examined in the treated condition due to the geometry of the
part, this examination shall be performed at the latest intermediate stage possible.

6.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe frequency shall normally be 4 MHz.

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 1, 2, 3 or 4.

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION (1)
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limit are those of standard NF EN 10228-3:
- for type 1 parts: quality class 3,
- for type 2, 3 or 4 parts: quality class 2.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 47
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3204

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION (1)

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of standard NF EN 10228-3:
- for the DGS method: quality class 2,
- for the DAC method: quality class 3.

(1) For class 3 parts, recordable indication ranges are not considered.

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
After repairs, a liquid penetrant examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 4000. The
applicable criteria shall be those of paragraph 5.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
AFTER HEAT TREATMENT
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on
the drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with
C and D 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

M 3000 / 48  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3204

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 49
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3204

M 3000 / 50  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3205

M 3205
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

GRADE Z 12 CN 13 MARTENSITIC STAINLESS

STEEL FORGINGS USED FOR INTERNAL
HOLD DOWN SPRINGS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers the procurement of forged parts used for the fabrication of grade
Z 12 CN 13 martensitic stainless steel internal hold down springs.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace and vacuum degassed. A melting process at least
equivalent to the vacuum refining technique type may be used. The melting process may also be
followed by remelting.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as defined by ladle and part analyses, shall comply with the requirements
given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. He shall also provide a product analysis. This analysis may be performed on metal
discard from mechanical test specimens.
These analyses shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 51
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3205

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE Z 12 CN 13
ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS (%) PRODUCT ANALYSIS (%)

Carbon 0.08 - 0.14  0.15

Maximum Silicon 0.50 0.50
Maximum Manganese 1.00 1.00
Maximum Sulphur 0.015 0.020
Maximum Phosphorus 0.015 0.020
Chromium 11.50 - 13.00 11.50 - 13.00
Nickel 1.00 - 1.80 1.00 - 2.00
Molybdenum 0.40 - 0.60 0.40 - 0.60
Maximum Copper 0.50 0.50
Maximum Nitrogen 0.010 - 0.030 0.040
Maximum Cobalt 0.20 0.20

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of the part in the ingot,
- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation giving the partial and
overall ratios of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties.
The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

M 3000 / 52  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3205

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.
A record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance
Agents. The same applies to the overall ratio of reduction, which shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the part shall be rough-machined to a profile as
close as possible to the as-delivered profile. This profile shall be given in the manufacturing
programme (paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

After heat treatment, the part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic
examination.
The surface roughness obtained shall be such as to ensure that the results of non-destructive
examinations are significantly accurate.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The springs shall be delivered in the as-treated condition.

3.4.1 Heat treatment

Heat treatment shall consist in air or oil quenching with an austenitizing temperature between 960°C
and 1010°C, followed by tempering for 4 hours minimum at a nominal temperature of between
610°C and 670°C and then air cooling.
In addition, the springs may be subjected to stabilizing heat treatment. In this case, the stabilizing
heat treatment shall be performed at a temperature 30°C to 50°C less than the minimum tempering
temperature. The cooling rate after temperature holding shall be given in the manufacturing
programme.
Details of all heat treatments shall be given in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).
Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part.
During tempering and any stabilizing heat treatment, at least two thermocouples shall be placed on
the part. The position of the thermocouples on the part shall be given in the manufacturing
programme.
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 53
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3205

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are given in table II.
TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE VALUE
Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 620 MPa
Rm minimum value 760/900 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 14
Z % minimum value 50

350°C Rtp0.02 minimum value 515 MPa

KV impact 20°C Minimum average value (1) 48 J

Minimum individual value 40 J

Brinell hardness Room - 226/277 HB

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value shall be accepted per series of three tests
specimens

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from two diametrically opposed zones in a test ring attached to the part.
These samples shall be cut out after the part has been heat treated for mechanical properties; they
shall be clearly identified and their direction of maximum extension shall be indicated. The size of
test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests and retests.
Test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their centreline is 20 mm from the internal
cylindrical surface and their test-pertinent areas at least 40 mm from the other surfaces.
The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be oriented radially.
Sampling shall be performed in accordance with the drawing in annex 1 of this specification.

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Samples
Tests shall be performed on specimens from samples subjected to heat treatment representative of
that of the springs.
If the springs are subjected to stress-relieving heat treatment after they have been cut out (see
paragraph 3.4.1) the test samples shall be subjected to simulated stress-relieving heat treatment in a
laboratory furnace according to the requirements of M 151.

M 3000 / 54  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3205

4.3.2 Number and content of tests

The tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens and test temperatures are given in table III.
TABLE III

NUMBER OF SPECIMENS
NAME ORIENTATION TEST PER TYPE OF TEST
OF TEST OF SPECIMEN TEMPERATURE
0° 90° 180° 270°
Tension Tangential Room 1 – 1 –
Tangential 350°C 1 – 1 –

KV Tangential 20°C 3 – 3 –
impact

Hardness – Room 1 1 1 1

4.3.3 Test procedure

A -TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II. If this is not the case and the test
specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the usefulness of the product) or if
unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the specimen or a testing machine
malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If the results of the second test are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatifactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 55
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3205

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be specified in MC 1000, for tests at 20°C.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series. Test temperature shall be 20°C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at 20°C shown in table II must be fulfilled.
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements. However, where the
only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the required minimum value,
retests may be performed in accordance with the following procedure:
- two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall be tested at the
same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do
not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be rejected and the
requirements of paragraph 4.4 "Retreatment" shall apply.

C - HARDNESS TESTS
Hardness tests shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000. Four hardness indentations shall
be made at 90°, on one of the faces of the test specimen, as shown in annex 1.
These tests enable the uniformity of the part to be evaluated.

4.4 RETREATMENT
A part rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test samples and specimens shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in
paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3. No more
than two retreatments shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal.
The spring shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks or other injurious defects.

M 3000 / 56  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3205

A liquid penetrant examination (MC 4000) shall be performed on all surfaces of the rough-forged
treated spring.
The following recordable conditions and examination criteria shall be applied:
- any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition,
- all defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
. linear indications,
. non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
. 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
. 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications
being evaluated.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the part cannot be accepted as-is and the instructions of paragraph 7 of this specification shall apply.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance
with MC 2300.

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed after final machining of the part or at as advanced a stage as
possible for portions which cannot be examined in finished form.

6.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe characteristics are usually as follows:
- for straight beam examination: probe frequency 2 to 3 MHz,
- for angle beam examination: probe frequency 2 MHz, refraction angle 45°.

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 3c.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 57
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3205

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3.

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of standard NF EN 10228-3:
- for the DGS method: quality class 3,
- for the DAC method: quality class 3.

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
After repairs, a liquid penetrant examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 4000. The
examination criteria shall be the same as those specified in paragraph 5.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on
the drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with G 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

M 3000 / 58  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3205

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- heat treatments,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 59
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3205

ANNEX 1

M 3000 / 60  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3206

M 3206
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

MARTENSITIC STAINLESS STEEL

ROLLED OR FORGED BARS FOR USE
IN MANUFACTURING CLASS 2 AND 3
CONTROL VALVE BLANKS OR CAGES

0 SCOPE
This specification covers the procurement of rolled or forged bars made of martensitic stainless steel
grade X 108 CrMo 17 for use in manufacturing blanks and grade X5 CrNiCuNb 17-4 for use in
manufacturing cages for class 2 and 3 control valves for service temperatures below 250°C.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition as determined by ladle analyses, shall comply with the requirements given
in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill Manager or his duly accredited
representative. This analysis shall be performed in conformity with MC 1000.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 ROLLING OR FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 61
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3206

TABLE I

GRADE X 108 CrMo 17 X5 CrNiCuNb 17-4

Carbon 0.95 - 1.20 0.070 max.

Max Silicon 1.00 0.75
Max Manganese 1.00 1.00
Max Phosphorus 0.025 0.025
Max Sulphur 0.015 0.015
Chromium 16.00 - 18.00 15.5 - 17.5
Copper - 3.00 - 5.00
Molybdenum 0.40 - 0.80 -
Nickel - 4.00 - 5.00
Niobium - 0.15 - 0.45

3.2 MACHINING
3.2.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
The bars shall be machined in the softened condition (grade X 108 CrMo 17) or before hardening
(grade X5 CrNiCuNb 17-4) to a profile as close as possible to the as-delivered profile.
Surface condition shall be suitable for ultrasonic testing in accordance with MC 2300. The surface
conditions shall be determined in accordance with MC 7200.

3.2.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The bars shall be machined in accordance with the requirements of the drawings. Surface condition
shall be suitable for non-destructive examination of the surface, as detailed in SECTION III for the
examinations concerned here. The surface condition shall be determined in accordance
with MC 7200.

3.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT FOR MECHANICAL

PROPERTIES
- GRADE X 108 CrMo 17
Bars shall be delivered in the softened condition.
Heat treatment for mechanical properties (1) after machining of parts shall comprise:
. preheating with slow heating to a temperature between 780°C and 830°C,
. austenitizing at a temperature between 1010°C and 1060°C,
. quenching of a type suited to the product section with controlled end-of-cooling temperature,
. tempering at a temperature between 150°C and 450°C for at least 1 hour.

(1) In the case of this grade, the user's attention is drawn to the delicate nature of the performance of this heat treatment
which shall be defined via common accord with the Supplier.

M 3000 / 62  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3206

- GRADE X5 CrNiCuNb 17-4

Bars shall be delivered in the as-treated condition.
They may exceptionally be delivered in a condition other than that in which are to be used. In
this case the Supplier shall justify compliance with the guaranteed properties required at the end
of heat treatment.
Heat treatment for mechanical properties, shall consist of the following operations:
. austenitizing at a temperature between 1020°C and 1060°C, followed by air cooling or
immersion in oil down to a temperature lower or equal to 30°C,
. hardening treatment at a temperature of 480°C ± 10°C for at least minimum 1 hour, followed
by air cooling.

For both grades, a certificate giving details of heat treatment conditions (1) shall be required.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are given below:
- Grade X 108 CrMo 17:

TABLE II

REQUIRED VALUE
TEST
NAME OF TEST PROPERTIES ANNEALED AFTER
TEMPERATURE
CONDITION HTMP
Brinell Hardness Room Maximum value 255 HB
Rockwell Hardness Room Minimum value 53 HRC
Maximum value 60 HRC

(1) The term "conditions" refers to:

- heating rate,
- holding temperature,
- holding time,
- quenching method,
- cooling temperature and time, if necessary.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 63
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3206

- Grade X5 CrNiCuNb 17-4:

TABLE III

NAME TEST MECHANICAL REQUIRED

OF TEST TEMPERATURE PROPERTIES VALUES
Tension Room Rp 0.2 min. 1165 MPa
Rm 1300 - 1650 MPa
A % min. 9

KV Impact Room KV min. 30 J

Rockwell Room min. 40 HRC
hardness

4.2. SAMPLING
Requirements of paragraphs 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.3 only apply to grade X5 CrNiCuNb 17-4.

4.2.1 Hardness tests

Hardness tests shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.
One indentation shall be made:
- in the annealed condition, at one end of each bar,
- in the as-treated condition, on each part.

4.2.2 Definition of a lot

A lot shall consist of bars with similar diameters or cross sections (as defined below), from the same
heat and which have been subjected to the same manufacturing cycle and the same heat treatment in
the same furnace charge, or, in the case of batch furnace, which belong to the same batch of heat
treatment.
dia. max
 1.1
dia. min
e max S max
 1.1 and  1.25
e min S min

4.2.3 Extra-lengths for tests

Test samples shall consist of bar extra-lengths and shall be discarded after all heat treatments have
been performed.
Extra-lengths shall be taken from 4% of the bars with a minimum of two bars, taking 2% of the bars
which present the lowest hardness of the lot and 2% of the bars which present the highest hardness
of the lot, a hardness measurement being performed on each bar.
The size of test samples shall be such that they can provide test specimens necessary for any retests.

M 3000 / 64  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3206

4.2.4 Sampling
Sampling procedures are as follows:
- the axis of the test specimens shall be parallel to the bar axis and located at the following
distance from the skin:
. for dia.  25 mm, along the axis of the bar,
. for 25 < dia.  50 mm, 12.5 mm from the skin,
. for dia. > 50 mm, at mid-radius,
- the test-pertinent area of the specimens shall be located at a distance from the end of the bar at
least equal to the diameter of the bar.
For bars delivered in the heat-treated condition, the tests are performed on specimens taken from
samples which have not been subjected to any heat treatment after sampling.
For bars delivered in the as-manufactured condition, or which, during working, will be subjected to
heat treatment modifying their mechanical properties, the tests shall be performed on test specimens
taken from samples which have been subjected to simulated heat treatment.

4.3 TESTING OF SAMPLES

4.3.1 Number and content of tests
The following series of mechanical tests shall be performed on each sample (4.2.3):
- one tensile test at room temperature (one test specimen),
- one KV impact test at + 20°C (three test specimens).

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSILE TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall have a circular section. As a rule their diameter shall be 10 mm and their
dimensions shall conform to MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tensile test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 65
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3206

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in paragraph 4.1.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another test specimen.
If the results of the second test are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted, if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory test. Specimens shall be taken close to those
which were defective.
If the results of the second test are satisfactory, the lot is acceptable; if not, it is rejected and the
requirements of paragraph 4.4 "Retreatment" shall apply.

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens and tests
Test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of these
specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements of paragraph 4.1 must be fulfilled.
The lot shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements. However, where the
only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the required minimum value,
retests may be performed in accordance with the following procedure:
- two sets of test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall be tested at the same
temperature as the first set,
- either of the two sets of test specimens shall comply with the requirements given in
paragraph 4.1, if not, the lot shall be rejected, and the requirements of paragraph 4.4
"Retreatment" shall apply.

4.4 RETREATMENT
- GRADE X 108 CrMo 17
No retreatment shall be allowed after heat treatment for mechanical properties.

- GRADE X5 CrNiCuNb 17-4

A lot rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.

M 3000 / 66  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3206

In such case, the requirements for taking test specimens are those defined in paragraph 4.2, and
the tests shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

5.1 VISUAL EXAMINATION
Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal.
Bars shall be subjected to visual examination during both preliminary and final machining.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks or other injurious defects.
When the surface examination indicates the presence of defects on the finished part, the part cannot
be accepted.

5.2 LIQUID PENETRANT OR MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION

One of these examinations shall be performed on the machined part after heat treatment for
mechanical properties.

5.2.1 Liquid penetrant examination

The liquid penetrant examination methods shall be defined in accordance with MC 4140.
The entire surface shall be examined after final machining.

CRITERIA
a) Zones playing an active part in leaktightness
In zones playing an active part in leaktighness, no characterized indication shall be acceptable.

b) Other zones
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indications shall be unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2 whose greatest dimensions
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications
being evaluated.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 67
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3206

5.2.2 Magnetic particle examination

Test procedures shall be specified in accordance with MC 5140.
Due to the high carbon content, special precautions shall be taken to avoid overheating when the
magnetic field is induced by means of an electric current.

CRITERIA
a) Zones playing an active part in leaktightness
In zones playing an active part in leaktightness, no characterized indication shall be acceptable.

b) Other zones
Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indications shall be unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than
twice the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be
equal to the sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects, these
cannot be accepted.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process on bars with dia.  50 mm
in accordance with MC 2300.

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed on as-delivered parts:
- for grade X 108 CrMo 17 in the annealed condition,
- for grade X5 CrNiCuNb 17-4 in the quenched or quenched tempered condition.

6.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe frequency shall normally be 3 to 4 MHz.

M 3000 / 68  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3206

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3 or with
paragraph 13.3 of standard NF EN 10308.

If the scanning cannot be performed by rotation it shall be performed on a grid layout in accordance
with paragraph 12.3 of standard NF EN 10228-3 or with paragraph 13.2 of standard NF EN 10308.
Part type is 1a.

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3 or with
paragraph 14 of standard NF EN 10308.

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3 or standard NF EN 10308.

7 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings.
The values shall be within the tolerances given on the drawings.

8 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used in compliance with
C and D 1300.

9 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

10 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle analysis,
- heat treatment, specifying diameter of treated bars,

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 69
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3206

- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional checks.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results, together with required values.

M 3000 / 70  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3207

M 3207
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

SEAMLESS PIPES MADE FROM MARTENSITIC

STAINLESS STEEL WITH CHROMIUM FOR
THE CONTROL RODS OF PWR REACTOR
CONTROL ROD DRIVE MECHANISMS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers the control rods of CRDMs made from martensitic stainless steel with
chromium for PWR reactors.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. An analysis shall be made of one pipe per heat.
Analyses shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 71
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3207

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE X12 Cr13

ELEMENT LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSIS (%)

Maximum Carbon 0.150

Maximum Manganese 1.00
Maximum Phosphorus 0.030
Maximum Sulphur 0.030
Maximum Silicon 1.00
Maximum Nickel 0.50
Chromium 11.50 - 13.50
Maximum Cobalt 0.20

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the pipe manufacturer shall draw up a
manufacturing programme presenting, in chronological order, the various states of manufacture, and
specifying all intermediate and final heat treatment operations, finishing operations and non-
destructive examinations.

3.2 PIPE MANUFACTURE

Round bars and billets used for the manufacture of pipe shall be taken from ingots which have had
sufficient discard removed from the top and bottom ends. If necessary, they shall be carefully
scarfed. Overall ratio of reduction shall be greater than 3.
Pipes shall be either hot drawn or cold drawn (to be specified in the manufacturing programme,
paragraph 3.1). Pipes shall undergo slow cooling after hot drawing. Pipes shall be straightened
between rollers.

3.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Pipes shall be delivered in the as-treated condition.
After austenitizing, pipes shall be quenched in water or oil. Tempering shall be performed at a
temperature greater than or equal to 600°C. Stress-relieving heat treatment, after straightening of
pipes, shall be performed at a temperature at least 20°C lower than tempering temperature, but not
less than 580°C.
These temperatures take into account temperature variations between different points on a pipe.
Heat treatment temperatures shall be measured with at least one thermocouple placed on one of the
pipes of the furnace charge.

M 3000 / 72  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3207

Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

If the lot is to be retreated, the retreatment shall be performed in accordance with the same
instructions as above.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II below.
TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE VALUE

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 550 MPa

Rm minimum value 690 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 18
Z % minimum value 50

KV impact 0°C Minimum average value 40 J

Minimum individual value (1) 28 J

Rockwell Room Maximum value 27

hardness Minimum value 17

(1) No more than one result below the average required value can be accepted per series of three tests.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from pipes in the as-delivered condition. Samples shall be taken from
pipe ends.
Tension and impact test specimens shall be taken longitudinally to the pipe, i.e., with their axis
parallel to the axis of the pipe, with their test pertinent area as close as possible to the inner skin.
In the case of impact test specimens, the generatrix of the bottom of the notch shall be perpendicular
to the skin.

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
Mechanical properties shall be determined per lot. The term "lot" applies to pipe produced from the
same heat, having the same diameter, the same wall thickness, having been subjected to the same
manufacturing cycle and forming part of the same furnace charge.
A lot shall be limited to 80 pipes.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 73
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3207

A hardness test shall be performed on each end of the pipe. The length of the pipes of the lot as a
whole shall allow test samples to be taken from prolongations. These tests shall be performed on
2 pipes of the lot representing the highest and lowest hardness values.
The number of tests to be performed, sampling direction and test temperatures are given in table III.
TABLE III

NAME OF ORIENTATION TEST NUMBER OF SPECIMENS

TEST OF SAMPLE TEMPERATURE PER TYPE OF TEST

Tension Longitudinal Room temp. 1 for each pipe tested

KV impact Longitudinal 0°C 3 for each pipe tested

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall have a circular section. Their normal diameter shall be 10 mm and their
dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen
taken from another pipe of the lot with the nearest hardness value to that of the initial pipe. If the
results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken from twice the initial number of pipes from the lot. These pipes shall
have the nearest hardness values to that of the initial pipe.
If the results of the retests are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

M 3000 / 74  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 3207

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements shown in table II must be met.
The lot shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements. However, where the
only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the required minimum value
and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no more than one result lower
than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with the following procedure:
- two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall be tested at the
same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do
not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

C – HARDNESS TESTS
Hardness tests shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000. One hardness indentation shall
be made at each end of each pipe of the lot.
The tests allow the homogeneity of the pipes of the lot to be evaluated and prolongations to be
selected for testing.

4.4 RETREATMENT
Lots rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report. In such cases, test specimens
shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. Prolongations shall be chosen as indicated in paragraph 4.3.1.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

5.1 PIPE SURFACES
During the various stages of manufacture and machining, pipe surfaces shall be examined with the
greatest care to check the soundness of the metal.
Parts shall be sound and free from flaws, cracks, notches or any other injurious defect. Inner
surfaces shall be free from mill scale.

 n° 144-2014 M 3000 / 75
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3207

If any of the above-mentioned defects are detected during examination, the part cannot be accepted
as is, and the provisions of paragraph 7 of this paragraph shall be applied.

5.2 SURFACE CONDITION

Pipe shall be delivered pickled.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
6.1 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2530.
Probe frequency shall normally be 4 MHz.
In the case of a high thickness/external diameter ratio (order of magnitude: 0.35 to 0.40), this
examination can be performed by immersing using an inclined refraction beam with a refraction
angle less than 35°. The probe frequency shall be between 2 and 5 MHz. Adjustment shall be made
on the two notches, using those echoes obtained with longitudinal or shear waves which give the
best answer.

6.2 DEGREE AND TIME OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the pipe shall be subjected to the examination.
The examination shall be performed in the as-treated condition (before or after stress relieving heat
treatment) with the pipe machined as close to the as-delivered dimensions as possible.

6.3 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with MC 2530, with the following additional
requirement:
- the depth of notches on the reference pipe shall be 3% of pipe wall thickness, with a minimum of
0.1 mm and a maximum of 1 mm.

6.4 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any indication with an echo amplitude  50% of the reference echo shall be recorded.
Any indication for which the echo height is greater than the height of the reference echo shall be
unacceptable.

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Slight surface defects may be removed by grinding or machining to within permitted pipe
tolerances.
Excessive local heating during grinding or machining shall be avoided.

M 3000 / 76  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3207

A liquid penetrant examination shall be performed on the repaired zone to ensure that the defect has
been completely removed. The repaired zone shall blend in smoothly with the pipe surface.
No repair by welding shall be allowed.

8 DIMENSIONS - TOLERANCES
8.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Pipe outside diameter and wall thickness tolerances and pipe length shall be indicated in the
reference drawings.

8.2 DIMENSIONAL CHECK

Dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings with
respect to the profile of the finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on
the drawing.

9 MARKING
Any identification mark used shall not be given to more than one pipe.
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and in any case,
prior to delivery of the pipe:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been retreated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional checks.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 77
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3207

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 3000 / 78  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3208

M 3208
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CLASS 1, 2 AND 3 PRESSURE-RETAINING

MARTENSITIC STAINLESS STEEL CASTINGS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable Z5 CND 13-04, Z5 CN 12-01 and Z6 CNU 17-04 grade
pressure-retaining martensitic stainless steel castings.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric arc or a medium to high frequency induction furnace or any
other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. For class 1 materials, a product analysis shall also be supplied. This analysis may be
performed on metal discard from mechanical test specimens.
These analyses shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 79
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3208

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE Z5 CND 13-04 Z5 CN 12-01 Z6 CNU 17-04

LADLE AND PRODUCT LADLE AND PRODUCT LADLE AND PRODUCT
ELEMENT
ANALYSIS (%) ANALYSIS (%) ANALYSIS (%)

Max. Carbon 0.060 0.080 0.070

Silicon 0.30 - 0.80 0.60 max. 0.80 max.
Manganese 0.40 - 1.00 0.40 - 0.80 1.00
Max. Sulphur 0.020 0.020 0.020
Max. Phosphorus 0.030 0.030 0.030
Chromium 12.00 - 13.50 11.50 - 13.00 15.00 - 17.00
Nickel 3.50 - 4.50 0.90 - 1.30 3.50 - 5.00
Molybdenum 0.40 - 0.70 0.50 max. 0.80 max.
Copper – – 2.50 - 3.50
Ta + Nb – – 0.15 - 0.35
Max. Nitrogen – – 0.060

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the foundry shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- identification of casting method,
- part procurement drawing with positions of any samples which are integrally attached or adjacent
to the part,
- heat treatment conditions,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling, non-destructive testing and repair welding operations shall be
presented in chronological order.

PROTOTYPE PART
The manufacturing method shall be tested using a prototype part produced in accordance with the
requirements of M 160.

3.2 CASTING
The choice of casting method shall be shall be left to the foundry. This method shall be identified in
the manufacturing programme.

M 3000 / 80  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3208

3.3 MACHINING
Parts shall be machined as indicated on the procurement drawing. Surface roughness shall be such
that the results of non-destructive tests are significantly accurate. These surface roughness values
are given in SECTION III.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Parts shall be delivered in the as-treated condition.
Heat treatment for mechanical properties for grades Z5 CND 13-04 and Z5 CN 12-01 shall consist
of quenching followed by tempering, and for grade Z6 CNU 17-04, of quenching followed by one or
two tempering operations. Austenitizing temperatures prior to tempering and tempering
temperatures shall be set by the foundy in order to meet the requirements given in paragraph 4 of
this specification. Nominal tempering temperature shall be higher than 600°C for grades
Z5 CND 13-04 and Z5 CN 12-01, and higher than 580°C for grade Z6 CNU 17-04.
Heat treatment conditions shall be specified in the manufacturing programme (1).
Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. The Supplier may
be allowed not to place thermocouples on the part for small size parts treated as a lot, in accordance
with the requirements of F 8140. If, after heat treatment, the parts do not exhibit the required
characteristics, they may be retreated (see paragraph 4.4).

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall consist of attachments integral with the part or from ingots cast integrally with
the part or separately. In all cases, ingots shall be attached to the part prior to heat treatment for
mechanical properties.
The samples shall be of sufficient size to ensure that the necessary number of test specimens may be
taken for the tests prescribed and for any retests required. The smallest dimension of the test ingot or
attachment cross section shall be representative of the standard section of the pressure vessel
(excluding flanges and knuckles) but shall not be less than 28 mm and not more than 240 mm. The
samples shall be taken so that the axes of the attachments or ingots are located at least one quarter of
their thickness from the skins, at a minimum distance of 14 mm.

(1)
The term "conditions" refers to:
- heating rate,
- holding temperature,
- holding time,
- cooling rate.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 81
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3208

In the case of parts whose standard thickness is less than 28 mm, the smallest dimension of the test
sample cross section may be equal to this thickness provided it remains greater than 14 mm, the test
specimen axis being at mid-thickness.
The size of the attachment ingots and the orientation and location of the test specimens within the
ingots shall be specified in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

TABLE II

TEST REQUIRED VALUE

NAME MECHANICAL
TEMPE-
OF TEST PROPERTIES
RATURE Z5 CND 13-04 Z5 CN 12-01 Z6 CNU 17-04

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 550 MPa 380 MPa 720 MPa
Rm 760-900 MPa 540-700 MPa 900-1080MPa
A % on 5 d minimum value 15 18 10

KV 0°C Minimum average value 40 J 32 J 16 J

impact Minimum individual value (1) 28 J 24 J 12 J

Rockwell-C Room Minimum value – – 28

hardness

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value may be accepted per series of three tests.

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
- For parts weighing more than 1000 kg in the as-delivered condition, the mechanical properties
shall be determined for each part.
- For other parts, mechanical properties shall be determined per lot. A lot is defined as comprising
parts from the same heat of steel which have been treated in the same furnace charge. A lot is
restricted to 5000 kg.
The number and content of tests is given in table III.
As with the test samples, each part of the lot shall be subjected to a Brinell or a Rockwell C
hardness test, in order to ensure that the mechanical properties recorded are truly representative.

M 3000 / 82  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3208

TABLE III

NUMBER OF
NAME CONDITION TEST
SPECIMENS PER
OF TEST OF SPECIMEN TEMPERATURE
TYPE OF TEST

Tension TTQ + TTD Room 1

KV impact TTQ + TTD 0°C 3

Brinell or Rockwell-C TTQ + TTD Room –

hardness

HTMP : Heat treatment for mechanical properties

SSRHT : Simulated stress relieving heat treatment (see paragraph 7.2.4).

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall have a circular section. Their normal diameter shall be 10 mm and their
dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 83
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3208

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series and their percent shear fracture and
lateral expansion value recorded for information purposes. Test temperature shall be 0°C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at 0°C shown in table II must be fulfilled.
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure:
- Two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall be tested at the
same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do
not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the part shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

C - HARDNESS TESTS
Hardness tests shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2.
The tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Final examination for surface defects shall be performed after all heat treatment has been completed.

SURFACE CONDITION
Sand shall be carefully removed from the parts, which shall then be trimmed to eliminate risers and
vent scrap, parting lines and runner. Parts shall then be subjected to a complete visual examination
in accordance with MC 7100.

M 3000 / 84  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3208

Surfaces shall be carefully examined during all stages of manufacture and machining to ensure that
the metal is sound.

Parts shall be sound and free from defects such as scale, cracks, porosities, sand inclusions or other
injurious defects.

A magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5000
or MC 4000.

5.1 DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The scope of the magnetic particle examination is defined in the following table:

AT THE FOUNDRY AT THE MANUFACTURER'S (2)

CLASS 1 On all accessible machined and/or

On all accessible surfaces
PARTS ground surfaces
For pressure enclosures: For pressure enclosures:
- all accessible machined surfaces - all accessible machined and/or ground
- after careful grinding, all crotch surfaces
CLASS 2 regions of external surfaces
PARTS (1)
For other parts: For other parts:
- machined surfaces of leaktight zones - machined surfaces of leaktight zones
- zones to be welded
CLASS 3
Not required On O-ring seal zones
PARTS

(1) For castings subject to pressure in Main Secondary Circuit components, as defined in paragraph C4440
of the RCC-M, the scope required is the same as for Class 1 parts.
(2) At the Manufacturer's, the magnetic particle examination may be replaced by liquid penetrant
examination

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any defect with one dimension of 2 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition. All
defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 5 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
20 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 85
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3208

In addition, liquid penetrant examinations shall be performed on all surfaces for which magnetic
particle examination generated non-linear indications with dimensions of 2 to 5 mm. The following
shall be considered unacceptable conditions:
- rounded indications with a dia.  4 mm,
- linear indications with a length  2 mm.
Weld edges
The criteria to be respected are given in C 4000 for class 2 parts.

5.2 LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION

Liquid penetrant examination shall be performed in the areas specified in paragraph 5.1 to
supplement magnetic particle examination or when it is not possible to perform magnetic particle
examination.
The examination shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of MC 4000.
In all cases, liquid penetrant examination shall be performed on O-ring bearing surfaces.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any indications with one dimension of 2 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indications shall be detected and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 5 mm,
- 3 or more indications in a line separated by less than 3 mm (edge to edge),
- 10 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

WELD EDGES
Applicable criteria are given in chapter B 4000 for class 1 parts and in chapter C 4000 for class 2.
When liquid penetrant examination is performed on 0-ring bearing surfaces, any indication with one
dimension greater than 0.3 mm shall be considered a recordable condition. All defects which
produce indications with one dimension greater than 1 mm shall be detected and repaired.
No aligned or grouped indications corresponding to the definitions given above shall be acceptable.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Unless otherwise indicated, all examinations shall be performed after the part has been heat-treated.

A radiographic examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 3200.

M 3000 / 86  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3208

6.1 ZONES EXAMINED

The zones to be radiographed shall be selected after the final part drawing has been drafted and the
protototype parts have been examined.
The zones to be examined are:

6.1.1 Class 1 parts

In principle, the entire part shall be examined: if this is not possible, then the minimum zones to be
radiographed are defined in MC 3200.

6.1.2 Class 2 parts

Zones 2, 3 and 5 as described in the drawings in annex 1 of this specification and the weld edges.

6.1.3 Class 3 parts

Weld edges.

6.2 DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The length of the zone examined on weld edges shall be measured from the final profile and shall be
equal to at least 3 times the thickness of the wall. There is no requirement for this length to
exceed 75 mm.

6.3 EXAMINATION CRITERIA

For all severity levels, the following defects shall be unacceptable:
- tears,
- cracks,
- chaplets,
- chill remnants,
are unacceptable. The applicable acceptance criteria specified by standard NF EN 12681, Annex A,
are as follows:

6.3.1 Class 1 parts

- Weld edges: severity level 1.
- Remainder of the part: severity level 2.

6.3.2 Class 2 parts

- Weld edges: severity level 1.
- Remainder of the part: severity level 3.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 87
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3208

6.3.3 Class 3 parts

- Weld edges: severity level 1.

6.3.4 Special case of castings, with wall thickness lower or equal to 25.4 mm,
made by the lost wax process:
Table IV, gives the applicable criteria and reference radiographs as defined in ASTM E 192
standard, as a function of severity levels called in paragraphs 6.3.1, 6.3.2 and 6.3.3.

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

7.1 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITHOUT REPAIR WELDING
Defects detected by surface examination of magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination may
be eliminated by grinding, provided the thickness of the ground areas remains within the tolerances
specified on the drawing and that the resulting cavities are not injurious to the areas around them.
Where this is not the case, the requirements of paragraph 7.2 shall apply.
Overheating of the ground surface must be avoided during grinding:
- cavities must blend smoothly into surrounding areas,
- cavities shall be subjected to magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination in accordance
with the procedures and criteria described in paragraph 5 of this specification.

7.2 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITH REPAIR WELDING

7.2.1 Removal of defects
Areas whose defects do not meet the acceptability criteria defined in paragraphs 5 and 6 shall be
excavated by grinding or chipping or carbon arc cutting plus grinding (in the case of carbon arc
cutting, the part shall be preheated to a temperature higher than 120 C).
Excavation cavities shall be subjected to magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination in
accordance with the procedures and criteria described in paragraph 5 of this specification. Where
doubt exists as to whether a radiographically detected defect has been completely removed by
excavation, particularly if there are two defects, one below the other, in the same cross-section, a
new radiographic examination may be made of the excavated area (in which case the requirements
of MC 3200 shall not be applicable).
Excavation shall continue until surface defects which are unacceptable for finished parts have been
eliminated, in accordance with the criteria given in paragraphs 5.1 or 5.2.

7.2.2 Repair welding

Repairs shall be made by welding. The grade of deposited metal shall be of the same type as that of
the base metal. The foundry shall give precise repair procedures in a document drawn up in
accordance with the requirements of SECTION IV.

M 3000 / 88  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3208

TABLE IV

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 89
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3208

7.2.3 Heat treatment after repair welding

Heat treatment is compulsory after repair by welding. This treatment may be either heat treatment
for mechanical properties or stress-relieving heat treatment. Temperature of the latter shall be at
least equal to 580°C.
For grade Z6 CNU 17-04 parts, repairs shall be followed by heat treatment for mechanical
properties. For parts other than pressure boundary parts, where exceptionally postweld heat
treatment cannot be performed, the provisions of paragraph S 7620 may be applied.

7.2.4 Tests after stress-relieving heat treatment

If the part or the lot is subjected to more than one stress-relieving heat treatment, the series of tests
described in paragraph 4.3.1 of this specification shall be performed using test specimens from a
sample which has been subjected to the same treatments as the part or lot, in the same furnace
charges. The results of these tests shall comply with the requirements of table II of paragraph 4.1 of
this specification.

7.3 EXAMINATION OF WELD REPAIRS

The following non-destructive examinations shall be made on completion of weld repairs.

A - EXAMINATION OF ALL AREAS REPAIRED

- Visual examination.
- Magnetic particle examination or liquid penetrant examination of all repair areas. Examination
procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 5 of this specification.

B - RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION OF MAJOR REPAIRS

The terms "major" and "minor" excavation cavities are defined in appendices 2 and 3 of this
specification.
Cavities are classified according to depth or surface area.
Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 6 of this
specification.
Charts showing the exact location and dimensions of major repairs shall be prepared.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensional characteristics of parts after final machining shall comply with the procurement
drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B, C
and D 1300.

M 3000 / 90  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3208

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data,
- charts of major repairs,
- for all repairs by welding (major and minor):
. production weld data sheets,
. welding procedure data sheets and filler materials acceptance reports quoted in production
weld data sheets,
. in addition, for class 1 parts only, welding procedure qualification reports used (these
documents may be subjected to generic distribution),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional checks,
- heat treatment (temperature ranges and holding times).

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 91
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3208

ANNEX 1

PUMP CASINGS

M 3000 / 92  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3208

ANNEX 2

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 93
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3208

ANNEX 3

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
SURFACE TO BE MACHINED

M 3000 / 94  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3208

ANNEX 3

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
UNMACHINED SURFACE

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 95
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3208

M 3000 / 96  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3301

M 3301
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CLASS 1, 2 AND 3 AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL

FORGINGS AND DROP FORGINGS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers all weldable austenitic stainless steel forgings and drop forgings of no
more than 10 t which are not covered by an individual product procurement specification.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or by any other technically equivalent process.
In the particular case of thin parts subjected to pressure, the technical specification or other relevant
contractual documents shall specify if the metal shall be vacuum or electroslag remelted.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I appended.
Requirements relative to cobalt content shall be stipulated in the equipment specification or other
relevant contractual documents, in accordance with sub-chapters B 2400, C 2400 and D 2400 or
other relevant contractual documents.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 97
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3301

A product analysis is generally specified in the purchase order. This analysis is compulsory for
class 1 materials. Only C, Cr and Ni contents shall be checked. Mo, Co, N, Ti and Nb + Ta content
shall also be checked if these elements are specified in the chemical requirements. This analysis
shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

2.3 INTERGRANULAR CORROSION TEST

The intergranular corrosion test shall be stipulated, in accordance with the rules set forth in
paragraphs B 2300, C 2300, D 2300 and G 2300. It shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000,
either on a test ingot made at the time of casting, or on the product, on the basis of one test per lot.
The sensitizing treatment to be performed, as a function of the selected grade, is given in table I.
The heating temperature to be adopted shall be:
Treatment A:
- for grades not containing molybdenum, 650° C ± 10°C,
- for grades containing molybdenum, 675° C ± 10°C.
Treatment B:
- for grades not containing molybdenum, 700° C ± 10°C,
- for grades containing molybdenum, 725° C ± 10°C.
The corrosion test result shall be considered satisfactory if during sound testing the test specimen
gives a clear metallic sound, and provided no cracks or tears are detected during the bend tests.
Should any doubt remain, the absence of intergranular corrosion shall be confirmed by micrographic
examination.

3 MANUFACTURE
The overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380, should not, as a general rule, be
lower than 3.

3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME

3.1.1 Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the foundry shall draw up a
manufacturing programme for class 1 parts listed in M 141 and for class 1 parts weighing more than
1 tonne. This chapter shall include the following:
a) identification of melting process,
b) ingot weight and type,
c) top and bottom end discard percentages,
d) position of the part in the ingot or product relationship,
e) dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation giving partial and overall
ratios of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
f) drawings of part as-forged or drop-forged, profiles for heat treatment for mechanical properties,

M 3000 / 98  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3301

g) conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
h) position of acceptance test samples on the part,
i) drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

3.1.2 For other parts (class 1 parts not listed in M 141 and weighing one tonne or less, and
class 2 and 3 parts), the manufacturing programme need only specify points f, g, h and i.

3.2 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Forged or drop-forged parts shall be delivered in the as-treated condition; final heat treatment for
mechanical properties shall consist of solution heat treatment at a temperature between 1050°C and
1150°C. Records for class 1 parts shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements shall be given in table II.

4.2 SAMPLING
4.2.1 General
Test samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been subjected to heat treatment for
mechanical properties; they shall be appropriately marked.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
Insofar as the shape of the parts so allows, test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their
axis is oriented perpendicular to the main rolling direction and that the distance between the axis
and the nearest treated surface (skin) is:
- 20 mm if the thickness is > 40 mm,
- mid-thickness if the thickness is  40 mm.
The distance between the test-pertinent area of the test specimen and the other treated surfaces shall
not be less than:
- 40 mm if the thickness is > 40 mm,
- the thickness if this is  40 mm.
If the shape of the parts does not permit this, values as close as possible to those given above shall
be obtained.
For impact test specimens, notches are oriented perpendicular to the skin.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 99
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3301

4.2.2 Drop-forged parts

Mechanical test samples shall be cut out from one or more parts in a lot or from a test bar of the
same heat of steel simultaneously treated in the same heat treatment charge. This test bar shall first
have been subjected to forging operations considered to be representative of those undergone by
the parts.
The position of test specimens in the parts or the test bar shall be given in the mechanical test report
in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 4.2.1.

4.3 TESTING
Tests shall be performed on test specimens which were not subjected to heat treatment after
sampling.

4.3.1 Definition of a lot

A lot shall comprise parts of similar dimensions produced from the same heat of steel, and which
have undergone the same processing cycle, and which are from the same furnace charge or heat
treatment run.
A lot shall be limited to 5000 kg.

4.3.2 Number and content of tests

One series of tests shall be performed per lot for parts weighing 500 kg or less and two series of
tests shall be performed for parts weighing more than 500 kg.
A test series shall comprise:
- 1 tension testing at room temperature,
- 1 KV testing at room temperature. The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at
ambient temperature is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer,
- 1 tension testing at the temperature specified in table II, when this temperature is also given in
the equipment specification or other relevant contractual documents. This check shall always be
performed for class 1 parts.

4.3.3 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

M 3000 / 100  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3301

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II (percentage reduction of area shall
be given purely for information purposes).
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part and/or the lot shall be accepted; if not, the
following paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part and/or the lot shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens and test methods
KV test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of these
specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000. Three test specimens shall be
broken for each test series.

b) Results
The mean value for a series of three specimens shall meet the specified value in table II. An
individual value may be less than the required value on condition it is not below 70% of the
latter.
If the conditions defined above are not fulfilled, three additional specimens shall be taken next to
the specimen that produced the unsatisfactory result and tested.
The part and/or lot can be accepted after the test performed on the second series of three
specimens, if the following conditions are simultaneously satisfied:
- the mean value of the six tests shall be greater than or equal to the minimum specified value,
- no more than two individual values out of the six shall be less than the minimum specified
value,
- only one individual value out of the six shall be less than 70% of the specified value.
If this is not the case, the part or lot shall be rejected.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 101

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 3301

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts and/or lots rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may
be retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test samples and specimens shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in
paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3. No more
than one retreatment shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be carefully examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal.
All surfaces of the part which are accessible at the final stage shall be subjected to a visual
examination in accordance with MC 7100. This examination shall be followed by a liquid penetrant
examination in accordance with MC 4000 if so specified in the equipment specification or other
relevant contractual documents.
The part shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks or other injurious defects.
The following recordable conditions and examination criteria shall be applied for liquid penetrant
examination:
- any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition,
- all defects which produce the following indications shall be unacceptable:
. linear indications,
. non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
. 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
. 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications
being evaluated.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the part cannot be accepted as-is and the instructions of paragraph 7 of this specification shall apply.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

M 3000 / 102  n° 144-2014

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3301

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

The examination shall be performed when the profile of the part permits satisfactory test
performance. It shall be performed in the following order of preference:
- after final machining,
- after heat treatment for mechanical properties, whether followed by machining or not.
However, parts or portions of parts which cannot be examined after heat treatment due to the
geometry of the part, shall be examined at the latest intermediate stage possible.
In the case of small formed parts, the examination may be performed on semi-finished products.

6.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe characteristics are usually as follows:
- for straight beam examination: probe frequency 2 MHz,
- for angle beam examination: probe frequency 1 MHz, refraction angle chosen as a function of
part geometry.
A lower frequency may be used for thick parts, if their structure so requires.

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

Ultrasonic examination is performed on class 1 and 2 parts and on class 3 parts weighting more
than 500 kg.
The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-4.
Part type is 1, 2, 3 or 4.

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-4.

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION (1)
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 2 in standard
NF EN 10228-4, the thickness to be taken into account shall be one which is representative of the
part in its final condition.
If this is not possible, any adjustment shall be justified and submitted to the Contractor for approval.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 103

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3301

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION (1)

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are:
- for the DAC method, those of Table III
TABLE III

Acceptance criteria
Forging thickness Recording
(mm) threshold % Isolated Extensive or grouped
discontinuities % discontinuities %
e ≤ 250 50 100 50
250 < e ≤ 400 100 200 100

- for the DGS method, those of Table IV

TABLE IV

Acceptance criteria
Recording
threshold Isolated Extensive or grouped
Forging thickness
discontinuity discontinuities
(mm) Deq (1)
(mm) Deq (1) Deq (1)
(mm) (mm)

e ≤ 75 >3 ≤5 ≤3

75 < e ≤ 250 >5 ≤8 ≤5

250 < e ≤ 400 (2) >8 ≤ 11 ≤8

1) Deq : Equivalent diameter of flat bottom hole
2) For thicknesses > 400 mm, the test requirements and applicable criteria shall be specified by the
equipment specification or other relevant contractual documents.

(1) For class 3 parts, recordable indication ranges are not considered.

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted tolerances for the part
delivered by the forging mill shall be acceptable.
Liquid penetrant examination shall be performed after grinding, in accordance with MC 4000, to
ensure that the defect has completely disappeared.
Examination criteria shall be those defined in paragraph 5. The forging mill shall not be authorized
to make any weld repair.

M 3000 / 104  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3301

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
After heat treatment.
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
In the case of drop forgings, this examination shall be performed by representative sampling.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B, C
and D 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- intergranular corrosion test, where applicable,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data for class 1 products (in the case of retreatment this
includes recordings of all heat treatments),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 105

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3301

M 3000 / 106  n° 137-2012


TABLE II

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL USED

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

ROOM TEMPERATURE 350°C

TYPE OF Min. A % (5D)
AFNOR GRADE Min. Rm (MPa) Min. KV (J) (1) Min. Rm (MPa)
STEEL min
Min.Rp0.2 Min. Rp0.2
(MPa)  150 > 150 (MPa)  150 > 150
mm Long. Trans. Long. Trans.
mm mm mm
Z6 CN 18-10 210 520 485 45 40 - 60* 125 394 368
Z5 CN 18-10 210 520 485 45 40 - 60* 125 394 368
18-10 steel
Z2 CN 18-10 175 490 450 45 40 - 60* 105 350 327
not
containing Z2 CN 19-10
Controled 210 520 485 45 40 - 60* 125 394 368
Mo nitrogen content
Z6 CN Nb 18-11 220 540 490 40 35 100 60* 140 365 340
Z8 CNT 18-11 220 540 490 40 35 100 60* 135 425 397
Z6 CND 17-12 210 520 485 45 40 - 60* 130 445 416
Z5 CND 17-12 210 520 485 45 40 - 60* 130 445 416
18-10 steel Z2 CND 17-12 175 490 450 45 40 - 60* 105 382 355
containing Z2 CND 18-12
Mo Controled 220 520 485 45 40 - 60* 130 400 380
nitrogen content
Z8 CNDNb 18-12 230 540 490 35 35 100 60* 150 365 340
Z8 CNDT 18-12 230 540 490 35 35 100 60* 150 425 397
* Value raised to 100 J for class 1 equipment
(1) The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer

M 3000 / 107
M 3301
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3301

M 3000 / 108  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3302

M 3302
PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

FORGED DISKS MADE FROM GRADE Z3 CN 18-10

CONTROLLED NITROGEN CONTENT STAINLESS
STEELS USED IN THE MANUFACTURE
OF PWR CORE SUPPORTS AND
UPPER SUPPORT PLATES

0 SCOPE
This specification covers the procurement of forged parts made from weldable grade Z3 CN 18-10
controlled nitrogen content austenitic stainless steel forgings used in the manufacture of:
- core supports,
- upper support plates.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or by any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. In addition he shall provide a part analysis.
This latter analysis may be performed on metal discard from mechanical test specimens. It shall be
used to evaluate the content of the following elements: carbon, chromium, nickel, nitrogen and
cobalt. If a more complete material analysis is performed, it should only show the usual residual
content for elements other than those specified in table I. These analyses shall be performed in
accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 109

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3302

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE Z 3 CN 18-10 CONTROLLED NITROGEN CONTENT

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS (%) PRODUCT ANALYSIS (%)

Max. Carbon (1) 0.038 0.040

Chromium 18.50 to 20.00 18.50 to 20.00
Nickel 9.00 to 11.00 9.00 to 11.00
Max. Silicon 1.00 1.00
Max. Manganese 2.00 2.00
Max. Sulphur 0.015 0.020
Max. Phosphorus 0.030 0.035
Max. Copper 1.00 1.00
Max. Cobalt 0.20 0.20
Preferred max. 0.10 –
Max. Nitrogen 0.080 0.080
Max. Boron 0,0018 0.0018

(1) See paragraph 2.4

2.3 INTERGRANULAR CORROSION TEST

The intergranular corrosion test shall be performed, in accordance with the rules set forth in G 2300,
on a hot worked, solution heat treated (at more than 1050°C) test ingot made at the time of casting
An accelerated intergranular corrosion test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000. The
sensitizing treatment shall be treatment B (heating at 700°C ± 10°C for 30 minutes followed by
slow cooling).
The test result shall be considered satisfactory if during sound testing the test specimen gives a clear
metallic sound, and provided no cracks or tears are detected during the bend tests. Should any doubt
remain, the absence of intergranular corrosion shall be confirmed by micrographic examination.
If the intergranular corrosion test is not satisfactory, the carbon content shall be checked by a
chemical analysis.
If the result shows a carbon content higher than the required value of 0.038%, the heat of steel is
rejected.
If the result shows a carbon content of 0.038% or less, a further intergranular corrosion test shall be
performed by a laboratory on two test specimens taken close to the defective specimen. If either of
these tests, confirmed by micrographic examination, proves to be unsatisfactory, the heat of steel
shall be rejected.

M 3000 / 110  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3302

2.4 ACCEPTANCE OF PARTS NOT SATISFYING THE ABOVE CONDITIONS

However, if the analyses and tests performed by the laboratory show a carbon content slightly in
excess of 0.038%, or if the result of the intergranular corrosion test is unsatisfactory, the Contractor
may, at the request of the Supplier and with the agreement of the Manufacturer, agree to the part
being manufactured on condition that the Manufacturer shall undertake buttering or cladding with a
very low carbon content austenitic 18-10 stainless steel of the core support to core shell weld. This
operation shall be performed in accordance with a precise, approved procedure.
This repair procedure shall be accepted if the measured carbon content of the finished part is no
higher than 0.040%, or if it is only slightly above this figure.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the foundry shall draw up a manufacturing
programme. This programme shall include:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of the part in the ingot,
- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation giving partial and overall
ratios of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.
Ingot weight and top and bottom end discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of the
Surveillance Agents. The overall ratio of reduction, calculated in accordance with M 380, shall be
greater than 3.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 111

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3302

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
The as-forged part shall be rough-machined to enable a preliminary ultrasonic examination to be
performed. For this examination, surface roughness shall be at least N 10 of AFNOR standard
NF E 05-051.
Rough-machining shall be such that the entire volume of the part may be examined.
The profile of the part during heat treatment shall be as close as possible to that of the part as-
delivered. The main bores in particular shall be rough-machined before heat treatment. These
profiles shall be specified in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile. Insofar as is possible, the entire volume of the
part shall be subjected to ultrasonic examination.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The part shall be delivered in the solution heat treated condition; this solution heat treatment shall
consist of heating at between 1050°C and 1150°C, followed by immersion in water.
Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. The position of the
thermocouples on the part shall be indicated in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.
TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE VALUE
Tension Room Rp0,2 minimum value 205 MPa
Rmminimum value 485 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 45

350°C Rtp0,2 minimum value 115 MPa

Rmminimum value 368 MPa

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from two diametrically opposed zones in a test ring.
These samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been heat treated for mechanical properties
and shall be appropriately marked.

M 3000 / 112  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3302

The size of test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
Test specimens shall be cut out in such a way that their centreline is situated at least 30 mm from the
flat surface of the ring and at least 15 mm from the circular surface, in accordance with the sketch in
annex 1 of this specification.
A drawing showing the position of samples on the parts and the dimensioned drawing of test
specimens on these coupons shall be attached to the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING
Tests shall be performed on test specimens taken from samples which have not been subjected to
heat treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The number of tests to be performed, orientation of samples and test temperatures are given
in table III.
TABLE III

NUMBER OF SAMPLES
NAME CONDITION TEST
SPECIMENS PER
OF TEST OF SPECIMENS TEMPERATURE
TYPE OF TEST A B

Tension C room 1 X X
Tension C 350°C 1 X X
C : circumferential

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 113

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3302

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
A part rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test samples and specimens shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in
paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3. No more
than one retreatment shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal.
The part shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks or other injurious defects.
A visual examination shall be performed on all parts and this may be followed by a liquid penetrant
examination of the entire part in accordance with MC 4000.
The following recordable conditions and examination criteria shall be applied:
- any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition,
- all defects which produce the following indications shall be unacceptable:
. linear indications,
. non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 4 mm,
. 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
. 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications
being evaluated.

M 3000 / 114  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3302

When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the part cannot be accepted as-is and the instructions of paragraph 7 of this specification shall apply.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance
with MC 2300.

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed in the as-treated condition and after machining to as-delivered
dimensions.

6.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe frequency shall usually be 2 MHz, or 1 or 0.5 MHz if the structure of the part so requires.

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-4.
Part type is 2.
As a deviation from standard NF EN 10228-4, both lateral faces are subjected to examination.

6.4 EVALUATION DES INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-4.
For indication amplitude evaluation, an distance-amplitude-correction curve (DAC) is established
from the responses given by at least three flat bottom cylindrical holes, 19 mm in diameter.

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

The following shall be considered recordable conditions:
- any indication with an echo amplitude  50 % of the reference curve,
- any zone with a ratio R < 0.12 (- 18 dB).
Any indication whose amplitude exceeds the reference amplitude shall result in repair or rejection
of the part.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 115

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3302

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted tolerances of the part delivered
by the Forging Mill shall be acceptable.
Liquid penetrant examination shall be performed after grinding, to ensure that the defect has
completely disappeared.
The forging mill shall not be authorized to make any weld repair.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
After heat treatment.
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded and the values recorded shall be within the tolerances
specified on the drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with G 1300.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in accordance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- intergranular corrosion test,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (in the case of retreatment this includes recordings of
all heat treatments),
- mechanical tests,

M 3000 / 116  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3302

- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 117

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3302

ANNEX 1

UPPER AND LOWER CORE SUPPORT

POSITION OF TEST SAMPLE

M 3000 / 118  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3303

M 3303
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

COLD FINISHED SEAMLESS AUSTENITIC STAINLESS

STEEL TUBES FOR CLASS 1, 2 AND 3
HEAT EXCHANGERS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers cold finished seamless austenitic stainless steel tubes for heat exchangers.
This specification covers the procurement of straight or bent tubes of thicknesses between
0.8 and 3.0 mm.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the Mill Manager or his duly accredited
representative.
A check shall be performed on one tube per lot. Only the carbon, chromium and nickel contents
shall be checked. If molybdenum and nitrogen are mentioned in the chemical requirements, their
contents shall also be checked. These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.
Requirements relative to cobalt content shall be stipulated in the equipment specification or other
relevant contractual documents, in accordance with subchapters B 2400, C 2400 and D 2400.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 119

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3303

M 3000 / 120  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3303

2.3 INTERGRANULAR CORROSION TEST

The intergranular corrosion test shall be stipulated in accordance with the rules set forth in
paragraphs B 2300, C 2300 and D 2300. It shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000, either
on a test ingot made at the time of casting, or on the product, on the basis of one test per lot.
The sensitizing treatment to be performed, as a function of the selected grade, is given in table I.
The heating temperature to be adopted shall be:
Treatment A:
- for grades not containing molybdenum, 650°C ± 10°C,
- for grades containing molybdenum, 675°C ± 10°C.
The corrosion test result shall be considered satisfactory if during sound testing the test specimen
gives a clear metallic sound, and provided no cracks or tears are detected during the bend tests.
Should any doubt remain, the absence of intergranular corrosion shall be confirmed by micrographic
examination.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
See M 170.5.
In cases where the tubes are procured already bent, the conditions for cold bending of the heat
exchanger tube bends, and the bending process qualification are defined in F 4160.
In cases where the equipment specification stipulates a limit for residual tensile stresses, the action
to be taken to limit these stresses both for tubes and bends shall be defined in accordance with
paragraph 3.4.2 below.

3.2 MANUFACTURE OF TUBES

The rounds and/or billets which are to be used for manufacturing tubes shall be taken from ingots
where sufficient top and bottom end discard has been removed. If required, all cracks shall be
carefully removed. The overall ratio of reduction shall not be less than 3. In any case, it shall be
such that an austenitic grain size number of at least 2, as determined in accordance with MC 1000, is
obtained on the finished part.
Furthermore, the Manufacturer shall guarantee that the manufacturing processes he uses do not
impair the intergranular corrosion strength of the steel. The tubes shall be cold finished.

3.3 PROTOTYPE SERIES OF TUBES

Prior to procurement, the Supplier shall draw up a characterisation report for the prototype series, in
accordance with the requirements stated in chapter M 170, specifying the non-destructive
examination methods to be calibrated, as indicated in paragraph 9.
In the case of bent tubes, and if the risk of stress corrosion is taken into account, Mg Cl2 tests or ring
opening tests shall be performed on five bent tubes:
- with the smallest radius, in stress-relieved condition,

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 121

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3303

- with the smallest radius, in non-stress-relieved condition.

These tests shall be performed at one metre intervals on straight sections, at the transition zone
between straight and bent sections and on bends. Test conditions and criteria are defined
in MC 1360.
In the case where bent tubes are supplied, for small radius tubes, test results shall show that the
bending procedure used allows correct dimensional requirements (ovality, thinning) to be obtained
without the production of cracks or any other surface defects.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

3.4.1 Heat treatment of straight tubes
Straight tubes shall be subjected to final solution heat treatment at a temperature between 1050°C
and 1150°C.
The temperature range shall be indicated in the manufacturing programme mentioned in
paragraph 3.1. The conditions for solution heat treatment, as well as the furnace atmosphere, shall
be specified in the manufacturing programme. The holding temperature shall be recorded and the
feed speed shall be monitored continuously. Temperature diagrams shall be kept at the disposal of
the Surveillance Agents.

3.4.2 Stress-relieving heat treatment of bends

This heat treatment shall be performed on heat exchanger bends, if the tests specified for this
purpose in paragraph 3.3 show that it is necessary.
Parameters for this heat treatment shall be specified in the manufacturing programme mentioned in
paragraph 3.1.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from tubes in the as-delivered condition (after solution heat treatment
and pickling). Samples shall be taken from tube ends.
In the event of retests, the samples required shall be taken from a location close to the area from
which the first samples were taken.
Tension test specimens shall be taken longitudinally.
Flattening and flare tests shall be performed on sections of tubes taken from tube ends.

M 3000 / 122  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3303

TABLE II

REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF

AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEELS USED

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES FOR TUBES

REFERENCE
TYPE OF AFNOR ROOM 350 °C
HEAT
STEEL GRADE
TREATMENT Min. Rp0,2 Min. Rm Min. A% Min. Rp0,2 Min. Rm
(MPa) (MPa) (5D) (MPa) (MPa)

Z5 CN 18.10 210 520 45 125 394

18-10
Z2 CN 18.10 175 490 45 105 350
steel
not con- Z2 CN 19.10 220 520 45 125 394
taining controlled Solution
Mo nitrogen heat
content treatment
between
Z5 CND 17.12 1050°C 210 520 45 130 445
8-10 and
Z2 CND 17.12 1150°C 175 490 45 105 355
steel
con- Z2 CND 18.12 220 520 45 130 400
taining controlled
Mo nitrogen
content

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
Tests for mechanical properties shall be performed per heat or per lot.
The term "lot" applies to tubes produced from the same heat, having the same diameter, the same
wall thickness, having been subjected to the same manufacturing cycle and forming part of the same
furnace charge or the same set of heat treatments. A lot shall be restricted to a maximum length
of 4000 m.
The number of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens and test temperatures are given
in table III.

TABLE III

NUMBER OF TEST SPECIMENS

NAME TEST PER TYPE OF TEST
OF TEST TEMPERATURE
PER HEAT PER LOT

Tension Room – 1
Tension (*) 350°C 1 –
Flattening Room – 5%
Flare Room – 5%
(*) The yield strength at temperature shall be verified at the temperature given in table II when
specified in the equipment specification or other relevant contractual documents.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 123

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3303

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens used for tension testing shall be taken from strips cut from the tube, which have
the same wall thickness as the tube or from tubular sections, in accordance with MC 1000.

b) Test method
Tension testing of test specimens taken from strips of tube, or tubular sections, shall be
performed in accordance with the requirements of MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II. If this is not the case and the test
specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the usefulness of the product) or if
unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the specimen or a testing machine
malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If the results of the second test
are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, the following paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - FLATTENING TEST
a) Test specimens and test method
The size of the specimen and the test procedure are given in MC 1000.

b) Results
There shall be no cracks or tears on the surface of the tube subsequent to the first stage of
flattening.
At the second stage of flattening, the shell shall not show any delamination or any other
significant heterogeneity.
If the results of the flattening test performed on a tube are not satisfactory, this tube shall be
retested, and tests shall be performed on two more tubes. If the results are unsatisfactory, the
flattening test shall be performed on all the tubes in the lot and all the defective tubes shall be
rejected. If more than 10% of the tubes prove to be defective, the entire lot shall be rejected.

M 3000 / 124  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3303

C - FLARE TEST
a) Test specimens and test method
The size of the specimen and the test procedure are given in MC 1000.

b) Results
There shall be no cracks or tears on the surface of the pipe subsequent to testing.
Results shall be interpreted in the same way as for a flattening test (see paragraph 4.3.2.B).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Lots rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
Only one retreatment shall be allowed.

5 RESIDUAL TENSILE STRESS CHECK

This check shall be performed on heat exchanger tubes only where the risk of stress corrosion is
taken into account in the equipment specification.
Test conditions and requirements for MgCl2 or ring opening tests shall be those defined
in MC 1360.

5.1 CHECK ON STRAIGHT TUBES

This check shall be performed on a test sample taken from one tube per lot.

5.2 CHECK ON BENDS

This check shall be performed only for bends which are not subjected to stress-relieving heat
treatment (see paragraph 3.1: manufacturing programme). For each tube bundle, the check shall be
performed on the bend with the smallest radius, among those which have not been subjected to
stress-relieving heat treatment. The tests shall be performed on two samples, one taken at the middle
and the other at the transition zone between the straight and the bent section.

6 MICROGRAPHIC EXAMINATION OF BENDS

This test shall be performed only if the bends undergo stress-relieving heat treatment.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 125

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3303

For each tube bundle, the test shall be performed on two bends, one with the smallest bending radius
and the other with the largest one. The micrographic examination is intended to check the absence
of grain size increase after stress-relieving heat treatment of the bends, and the absence of
intergranular precipitates. For each bend, the examination shall be performed on two samples, one
of which shall be taken in the middle of the bend and the other at the transition zone between the
straight and the bent section.

7 DETERMINATION OF AUSTENITIC GRAIN SIZE

The test shall be performed for tubes of the same dimensions (diameter and wall thickness) on five
tubes per heat taken from different lots, in accordance with the requirements of MC 1000.
Grain size number shall be equal to at least 2.

8 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE CONDITION

8.1 TUBE SURFACES
All surfaces of the part which are accessible at the final stage shall be subjected to a visual
examination in accordance with MC 7100. External and internal surfaces shall be sound and free
from cracks, tears, blisters, laps, slivers, or any other injurious defect.
Straight tubes shall be delivered clean, free of oxidation. For bends which have been subjected to
stress-relieving heat treatment, a slight yellowish or blueish discolouration resulting from the
presence of a thin highly adhesive oxide layer shall be permissible. This discolouration shall comply
with that of the reference sample taken from the master samples. If conformity is not achieved, the
oxide layer shall be removed from the bends by a procedure which shall have been defined before-
hand. The cleanliness of the inside of the tube shall be checked by means of a pig.
Final roughness (Ra) of the tube surface shall not exceed 3.2 µm . Surface condition examination
shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of MC 7200.

8.2 FINISH
The tubes shall be pickled, if necessary, passivated, rinsed and dried.

9 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
9.1 ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION
Each tube shall be subjected to ultrasonic examination in accordance with the requirements of
MC 2500, the following additional requirements being taken into account:
- ultrasonic examination shall be performed on tubes in the solution heat-treated condition,
- surface condition shall comply with the requirements of MC 2100
- angle-beam examination shall be used to detect longitudinal and transverse defects.

M 3000 / 126  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3303

RESULTS
Only those defects whose echo amplitude is lower than the rejection criterion as defined in
paragraph 9.2 shall be considered acceptable. Ends which are inadequately examined by the
automatic test bench shall be discarded.

9.2 DEFECT CATALOGUE

The provisions of M 170.6 apply.

9.2.1 Acceptable defects

Defects of a depth less than the following values shall be tolerated:

TUBES OF WALL THICKNESS  1.5 mm TUBES OF WALL THICKNESS > 1.5 mm

10 % of tube wall thickness with

0.15 mm
a minimum of 0.08 mm

10 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF DEFECTS

As a general rule, those parts of tubes with unacceptable defects detected by either visual or non-
destructive examination shall be discarded.
However, surface repairs may be performed using mild abrasives provided they remain within
dimensional tolerances.
After repairs, the tubes shall be subjected to visual and volumetric examination, as required by
paragraphs 8 and 9.

11 DIMENSIONS - TOLERANCES
11.1 TOLERANCES
Tube dimension tolerances shall be as follows:
- outside diameter: ± 0.5% (including ovality) with a minimum of ± 0.1 mm,
- thickness: ± 10% of nominal thickness; however, for tubes of diameter  10 mm, the tolerance
may be between 0% and + 20%.

11.2 DIMENSIONAL CHECKS

The minimum dimensional checks shall be as follows:

11.2.1 Dimensional check of straight tubes

Thickness, diameter and ovality check on five tubes per lot.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 127

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3303

11.2.2 Dimensional check of bent tubes

The requirements of F 4165a) are replaced by the following:
A dimensional check is carried out on five bent tubes for each lot with at least one bent tube of each
radius. This check shall consist of:
- check of bend radius and bend ovality at three points (45°, 90°, 135°), and length of the
straight legs,
- ultrasonic examination of the extrados thickness.

12 HYDROSTATIC TEST
Each tube shall be subjected to hydrostatic testing during finishing operations in accordance with
the requirements of the equipment specification.

13 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used in compliance with
C and D 1300.

14 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Procedures shall be specified in the purchase order and shall comply with the following
requirements:
- tube ends shall be bevelled and blanked with plastic caps,
- all tubes shall be sealed in watertight polythene packing.

15 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the pipe:
- ladle and product analyses,
- intergranular corrosion (where applicable),
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data,
- mechanical tests,
- visual examination,
- non-destructive examination,
- determination of grain size,
- dimensional check.

M 3000 / 128  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3303

These reports shall include:

- heat number and tube reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 129

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3303

M 3000 / 130  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3304

M 3304
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CLASS 1, 2 AND 3 AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL

PIPES AND TUBES (NOT INTENDED FOR
USE IN HEAT EXCHANGERS)

0 SCOPE
This specification covers seamless austenitic stainless steel pipes and tubes of auxiliary piping or
other uses, of thickness between 1.0 and 50.0 mm.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
A check shall be performed on one pipe or tube per ladle. Only the carbon, nickel and chromium
contents shall be checked. If molybdenum and nitrogen are mentioned in the chemical requirements,
their contents shall also be checked. These analyses shall be performed in accordance
with MC 1000.
Requirements relative to cobalt content shall be stipulated in the equipment specification or other
relevant contractual documents, in accordance with subchapters B 2400, C 2400 and D 2400.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 131

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3304

M 3000 / 132  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3304

2.3 INTERGRANULAR CORROSION TEST

The intergranular corrosion test shall be stipulated in accordance with the rules set forth in
paragraphs B 2300, C 2300, D 2300 and G 2300. It shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000,
either on a test ingot made at the time of casting, or on the product, on the basis of one test per lot.
The sensitizing treatment to be performed, as a function of the selected grade, is given in table I.
The heating temperature to be adopted shall be:
Treatment A:
- for grades not containing molybdenum, 650°C± 10°C,
- for grades containing molybdenum, 675°C± 10°C.
The corrosion test result shall be considered satisfactory if during sound testing the test specimen
gives a clear metallic sound, and provided no cracks or tears are detected during the bend tests.
Should any doubt remain, the absence of intergranular corrosion shall be confirmed by micrographic
examination.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the pipe or tube Manufacturer shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include in chronological order the various manufacturing
stages. All intermediate and final treatment, finishing and non-destructive examination operations
shall be mentioned.

3.2 MANUFACTURING OF PIPES AND TUBES

The rounds and/or billets which are to be used for manufacturing pipes or tubes shall be taken from
ingots where sufficient top and bottom end discard has been removed. The overall ratio of reduction
shall not be less than 3. In any case, it shall be such that an austenitic grain size number of at least 2,
as determined in accordance with MC 1000, is obtained on the finished part.
Furthermore, the Manufacturer shall guarantee that the manufacturing processes he uses do not
impair the intergranular corrosion strength of the steel.
Pipes and tubes shall be hot finished and small diameters and thicknesses may be cold drawn (this
shall be specified in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1)).

3.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Pipes and tubes shall be subject to solution heat treatment at a temperature between 1050°C and
1150°C prior to delivery.
For class 1 and 2 pipes and tubes, the conditions for solution heat treatment, as well as the furnace
atmosphere, shall be specified in this manufacturing programme in paragraph 3.1. The holding
temperature shall be recorded and the feed speed shall be monitored continuously. Diagrams shall
be kept at the disposal of the Surveillance Agents.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 133

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3304

The requirements of the above paragraph cover the establishment of the reference method.
For hot finished pipes and tubes it may be permitted not to perform high quality furnace heat
treatment on condition that the Supplier submit a written report to the Contractor demonstrating that
his installation:
- guarantees that the product reaches a temperature greater than 1150°C on completion of hot-
working,
- provides for rapid cooling by immersion on completion of hot-working. The maximum transfer
time between the end of hot-working and immersion shall be mentioned in the written report.
The written report shall demonstrate that the proposed method gives results at least equivalent to
those of the reference method.

3.4 WORK HARDENING

After solution heat treatment, Z5 CND 17-12 grade tubes can be subjected to cold work-hardening,
in order to obtain the required mechanical properties (see paragraph 4.1), subject to prior agreement
with the Contractor. The work-hardening ratio and procedure shall be set by the Supplier and
stipulated in the manufacturing programme. As a general rule, the work-hardening ratio shall
be  30%.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from tubes in the as-delivered condition. Samples shall be taken from
pipes and tube ends.
When the dimensions of the pipe or tube so permit, tension and impact test specimens shall be taken
perpendicular to the pipe or tube axis. Their test-pertinent area shall be as close as possible to the
internal skin. For impact test specimens, the notches shall be perpendicular to the skin.
In all other cases, the tension and impact test specimens shall be taken longitudinally, i.e. with their
centreline parallel to the axis of the pipe or tube. Their test-pertinent area shall be as close as
possible to the internal skin.
Impact testing shall not be performed on thicknesses of 12 mm or less.
Flattening and flare tests shall be performed on tubular sections taken from pipe or tube ends.
In the event of retests, samples shall be taken close to the original samples.

M 3000 / 134  n° 137-2012


TABLE II

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEELS USED

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES ON PIPES AND TUBES

n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

TEMPERATURE
REFERENCE
TYPE OF AFNOR
HEAT ROOM 350 °C
STEEL GRADE
TREATMENT
Min. A % (5d) Min. KV (J)(1)
Min. Rm Min. Rp0.2 Min. Rp0.2 Min. Rm
(MPa) (MPa) (MPa) (MPa)
Long. Trans. Trans.

Z6 CN 18.10 60**
520 210 45 40 125 394
Z5 CN 18.10 60**
520 210 45 40 125 394
Steel 18.10 Z2 CN 18.10
490 175 45 40 60** 105 350
Without Mo Z2 CN 19.10
520 210 45 40 60** 125 394
Controled
nitrogen content
Quenching after
Z6 CND 17.12 maintaining 60**
520 210 45 40 130 445
Z5 CND 17.12 between 1050°C 60**
520 210 45 40 130 445
Steel 18.10 With Mo Z2 CND 17.12 and 1150°C 60**
490 175 45 40 105 355
Z2 CND 18.12 60**
520 220 45 40 135 400
Controled
nitrogen content
Steel 18.10
with Mo Z5 CND 17.12 690 490 20 / / 279 /
work-hardened*
* For non-pressure parts
** Value raised to 100 J for class 1 equipment
(1) The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer.

M 3000 / 135
M 3304
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3304

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
Tests for mechanical properties shall be performed per heat or per lot.
The term "lot" applies to pipe or tubes produced from the same heat, having the same diameter, the
same wall thickness, having been subjected to the same manufacturing cycle and forming part of the
same furnace charge or the same set of heat treatments.
A lot shall be restricted as follows:
a) to 50 production lengths not exceeding 1000 m for pipes and tubes of diameter > 150 mm and
wall thickness > 9 mm,

b) to 100 production lengths not exceeding 2000 m for tubes of diameter  150 mm or wall
thickness  9 mm.
The number of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens and test temperatures are given
in table III.

TABLE III

NUMBER OF SPECIMENS
ORIENTATION TEST PER TYPE OF TEST
NAME OF TEST
OF SPECIMEN TEMPERATURE
PER HEAT PER LOT

Tension Longitudinal (a) Room – 1

Tension (d) Longitudinal (a) 350°C 1 –
KV impact for Transverse (f) Room – 3
thickness  12 mm
Flattening Room – 5 % (b) (e)
Flare Room – 5 % (c) (e)

(a) Transverse when the pipe is sufficiently thick.

(b) Limited to pipes whose OD  400 mm or whose thickness  15% of the OD.
(c) Limited to pipes whose OD  150 mm and whose thickness  9 mm.
(d) This test shall be performed when specified in the equipment specification or other relevant
contractual documents.
This test shall be performed systematically for class 1 pipes.
(e) With a minimum of two tests per lot for work-hardened Z5 CND 17-12 tubes.
(f) The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is certified
greater than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer.

M 3000 / 136  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3304

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
When the wall thickness of the pipe or tube is sufficient, a test specimen with a circular section
10 mm in diameter whose dimensions conform to MC 1000 shall be used.
When the wall thickness of the pipe or tube is such that test specimens with a circular section
10 mm in diameter cannot be used, strips cut out from the pipe or tube or tubular sections
removed in accordance with MC 1000 shall be used for tension testing.

b) Test method
The test shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II. If this is not the case and the test
specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the usefulness of the product) or if
unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the specimen or a testing machine
malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If the results of the second test
are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, the following paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - KV IMPACT TESTS
a) Test and specimens
The dimensions of three test specimens taken from adjacent locations and the test procedures are
specified in MC 1000.

b) Results
The mean value for a series of three specimens shall meet the specified value in table II. An
individual value may be less than the required value on condition it is not below 70% of
the latter.
If the conditions defined above are not fulfilled, three additional specimens shall be taken next to
the specimen that produced the unsatisfactory result and tested

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 137

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3304

The part and/or lot can be accepted after the test performed on the second series of three
specimens, if the following conditions are simultaneously satisfied:
- the mean value of the six tests shall be greater than or equal to the minimum specified value,
- no more than two individual values out of the six shall be less than the minimum specified
value,
- only one individual value out of the six shall be less than 70% of the specified value.
If this is not the case, the part or lot shall be rejected.

C - FLATTENING TEST
a) Test specimens and test method
The size of the specimen and the test procedure are given in MC 1000.

b) Results
There shall be no cracks or tears on the surface of the pipe or tube subsequent to the first stage of
flattening.
At the second stage of flattening, the shell shall not show any delamination or any other
significant heterogeneity.
If the results of the flattening test performed on a tube are not satisfactory, this tube shall be
retested, and tests shall be performed on two more tubes. If the results are unsatisfactory, the
flattening test shall be performed on all the tubes in the lot and all the defective tubes shall be
rejected. If more than 10% of the tubes prove to be defective, the entire lot shall be rejected.

D - FLARE TEST
a) Test specimens and test method
The size of the specimen and the test procedure are given in MC 1000.

b) Results
There shall be no cracks or tears on the surface of the pipe or tube subsequent to testing.
Results shall be interpreted in the same way as for a flattening test (see paragraph 4.3.2.C).

4.4 RETREATMENT
A lot rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test samples shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in paragraph 4.2. The
test performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than one retreatment shall be allowed.

M 3000 / 138  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3304

5 DETERMINATION OF AUSTENITIC GRAIN SIZE

The grain size number of class 1 and 2 pipes and tubes shall be checked on one pipe or tube per lot
in accordance with MC 1000.
Grain size number shall be equal to at least 2.

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE CONDITION

6.1 TUBE SURFACES
All surfaces of the part which are accessible at the final stage shall be subjected to a visual
examination in accordance with MC 7100. External and internal surfaces shall be sound and free
from cracks, tears, blisters, laps, slivers, or any other injurious defect.
Straight pipes and tubes shall be delivered clean, free of oxidation. For auxiliary piping, maximum
final roughness shall be:
- 3.2 µm (N8) for the inner and outer surfaces of work-hardened Z5 CND 17-12 pipes and tubes,
- 6.3 µm (N9) for the inner and outer surfaces of cold-finished pipes and tubes,
- 12.5 µm (N10) for the inner and outer surfaces of hot-finished pipes and tubes.
For miscellaneous piping, the maximum final roughness for both inner and outer surfaces shall be
12.5 µm (N10).
In all cases, surface roughness shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of MC 7231.

6.2 FINISH - PROTECTION

Pipes and tubes shall be delivered pickled and passivated.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
7.1 ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF CLASS 1 AND 2 PIPES AND TUBES
Each straight pipe or tube shall be subjected to ultrasonic examination in accordance with the
requirements of MC 2500, the following additional requirements being taken into account:
- ultrasonic examination shall be performed on pipes and tubes when delivered,
- surface condition shall comply with the requirements of MC 2100,
- angle-beam examination shall be used to detect longitudinal and transverse defects in auxiliary
piping,
- angle-beam examination shall be used to detect longitudinal defects in miscellaneous piping.
This check is not required for class 3 pipes and tubes.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 139

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3304

RESULTS
Only those defects whose echo amplitude is lower than that of the echo produced by the notch in the
standard tube described in MC 2534 shall be acceptable.
Ends which have not been properly examined using the automatic test unit shall either be discarded
or manually examined over at least 100 mm. The manual examination method shall be at least as
sensitive as the automatic method: the reference pipe used to adjust the sensitivity shall be the same
as that used for the automatic examination.

7.2 EDDY CURRENT EXAMINATION

This check is performed on pipes or tubes of diameter < 50 mm and thickness < 2 mm. It may
however be replaced by ultrasonic examination as defined in paragraph 7.1. Each straight pipe or
tube shall be checked using eddy currents in accordance with the conditions stipulated in MC 6000.
Pipes or tubes shall be checked in the as-delivered condition.

RESULTS
Only pipes or tubes which give an eddy current examination response lower than the signal given by
the standard tube shall be considered. Inadequately examined ends shall be discarded.

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

As a general rule, those parts of pipes or tubes with unacceptable defects detected by either visual or
non- destructive examination shall be discarded.
Surface defects may be removed by grinding provided that the remaining thickness is greater than
the minimum specified thickness and provided that the usual precautions are taken (avoid
overheating of the ground surface, use iron-free corundum grinding wheels).
For auxiliary piping, liquid penetrant examination shall be performed after grinding, in accordance
with the requirements below:

EXAMINATION CRITERIA
Indications of 1 mm or more shall be considered recordable conditions.
In any case, defects producing the following indications shall be located and removed:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more grouped indications less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge),
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.
If major defects appear and they cannot be removed by grinding, the defective part of the pipe or
tube shall be discarded.

M 3000 / 140  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3304

9 DIMENSIONS - TOLERANCES
9.1 TOLERANCES
Pipe and tube dimension tolerances shall be stipulated in the procurement drawings in accordance
with the requirements of AFNOR standard NF A 49-214.

9.2 DIMENSIONAL CHECK

The minimum dimensional checks shall be as follows:
- thickness, diameter and ovality check on five pipes or tubes per lot.

10 HYDROSTATIC TEST
Seamless pipes and tubes shall be subjected to hydrostatic testing during finishing operations in
accordance with the requirements of the equipment specification.

11 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used in compliance with B,
C and D 1300.

12 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Procedures shall be specified in the purchase order and shall meet the following requirements:
- pipe and tube ends shall be bevelled and blanked with plastic caps,
- all pipes and tubes shall be sealed in watertight polythene packing.

13 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the pipe or tube:
- ladle and product analyses,
- intergranular corrosion,

- evaluation or recorded heat treatment data (in the case of retreatment, this includes all recordings
of heat treatments),
- mechanical tests,
- visual examination,

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 141

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3304

- non-destructive examination,
- determination of grain size, in the case of class 1 and 2 pipes and tubes,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and pipe or tube reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 3000 / 142  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3306

M 3306
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CLASS 1, 2 AND 3 AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL

ROLLED OR FORGED BARS
AND SEMI-FINISHED PRODUCTS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers all rolled or forged bars and semi-finished products made from weldable
austenitic stainless steel which are not covered by an individual procurement specification.
The grades shall be selected from those defined in table I appended to this specification.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, or any other technically equivalent process.
In the particular case of thin parts subjected to pressure, the technical specification or other relevant
contractual documents shall explicitly specify whether the metal shall be vacuum or electroslag
remelted.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I appended.
Requirements relative to cobalt content shall be stipulated in the equipment specification or other
relevant contractual documents, in accordance with subchapters B 2400, C 2400 and D 2400.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 143

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3306

A product analysis is generally specified in the purchase order. This analysis is compulsory for
class 1 materials. Only C, Cr and Ni contents shall be checked. Mo, Co, N, Ti and Nb contents shall
also be checked if these elements are specified in the chemical requirements. This analysis shall be
performed in accordance with MC 1000.

2.3 INTERGRANULAR CORROSION TEST

The intergranular corrosion test shall be stipulated, in accordance with the rules set forth in
paragraphs B 2300, C 2300 and D 2300. It shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000, either
on a test ingot made at the time of casting, or on the product, on the basis of one test per lot.
The sensitizing heat treatment to be performed, as a function of the selected grade, is given in
table I. The heating temperature to be adopted shall be:
Treatment A:
- or grades not containing molybdenum, 650°C ± 10°C,
- for grades containing molybdenum, 675°C ± 10°C.

Treatment B:
- for grades not containing molybdenum, 700°C ± 10°C,
- for grades containing molybdenum, 725°C ± 10°C.
The corrosion test result shall be considered satisfactory if during sound testing the test specimen
gives a clear metallic sound, and provided no cracks or tears are detected during the bend tests.
Should any doubt remain, the absence of intergranular corrosion shall be confirmed by micrographic
examination.

3 MANUFACTURE
The overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380, should not, as a general rule, be
lower than 3.

3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME

3.1.1 Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the Supplier shall draw up a
manufacturing programme for class 1 bars used in the manufacture of parts listed in M 141 and for
class 1 bars with a diameter greater than 80 mm. This programme shall include the following:
a) identification of melting process,
b) ingot weight and type,
c) top and bottom end discard percentages,
d) as-treated and as-delivered bar diameters,
e) conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties
and any subsequent stabilizing treatment,

M 3000 / 144  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3306

f) drawing with position of test specimens on samples,

g) the various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be
presented in chronological order.

3.1.2 For class 1 bars of diameter  80 mm used in the manufacture of parts not listed in M 141,
and for class 2 bars, only points d), e) and g) are required.

3.1.3 For class 3 bars, the manufacturing programme is not required.

3.2 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Rolled bars shall be delivered in the as-treated condition; final heat treatment for mechanical
properties shall consist of solution heat treatment at a temperature between 1050°C and 1150°C.

Records for class 1 parts shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are given in table II appended.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been subjected to heat treatment for
mechanical properties; they shall be appropriately marked.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
Sampling procedures are defined figure 1 below.

4.3 TESTING
Tests shall be performed on test specimens which were not subjected to heat treatment after
sampling.

4.3.1 Definition of a lot

A lot shall comprise parts of similar shape, cross-section and diameter, as defined below:
 max e max S max
 1.1 and  1.1 and  1.25
 min e min S min

In all cases the parts of the lot shall be from the same heat of steel. They shall have undergone the
same processing cycle and shall be from the same furnace charge or shall have been subjected to the
same heat treatment run. A lot shall be restricted to 3000 kg.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 145

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3306

FIGURE 1

M 3000 / 146  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3306

4.3.2 Number and content of tests

One series of tests shall be performed per lot.
A series of tests shall comprise:
- 1 tension testing at room temperature,
- 1 KV testing at room temperature. The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at
ambient temperature is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer,
- 1 tensile test at the temperature indicated in table II when this is stipulated in the equipment
specification or other relevant contractual documents. This check shall always be performed for
class 1 parts.
Impact testing shall only be performed for diameters greater than or equal to 15 mm or thicknesses
greater than or equal to 12 mm.

4.3.3 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part and/or the lot shall be accepted: if not, the
following paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective.
If the results of the retests are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted: if not, it shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 147

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3306

B - V IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000. Three test specimens shall
be broken for each test series.

b) Results
The mean value for a series of three specimens shall meet the specified value in table II. An
individual value may be less than the required value on condition it is not below 70% of
the latter.
If the conditions defined above are not fulfilled, three additional specimens shall be taken next to
the specimen that produced the unsatisfactory result and tested.
The part and/or lot can be accepted after the test performed on the second series of three
specimens, if the following conditions are simultaneously satisfied:
- the mean value of the six tests shall be greater than or equal to the minimum specified value,
- no more than two individual values out of the six shall be less than the minimum specified
value,
- only one individual value out of the six shall be less than 70% of the specified value.
If this is not the case, the part or lot shall be rejected.

4.4. RETREATMENT
Lots rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test samples and specimens shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in
paragraph 4.2. The test performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3. No more
than one retreatment shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal.
The part shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks or other injurious defects.
A visual examination shall be performed on all parts and may be followed by a liquid penetrant
examination in accordance with MC 4000 if so specified in the equipment specification or other
relevant contractual documents.

M 3000 / 148  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3306

The following recordable conditions and examination criteria shall be applied to liquid penetrant
examination:
- any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition,
- all defects which produce the following indications shall be unacceptable:
. linear indications,
. non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
. 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
. 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications
being evaluated.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the part cannot be accepted as-is and the instructions of paragraph 7 of this specification shall apply.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process on class 1 and 2 bars and
semi-finished products with diameters  50 mm in accordance with MC 2300.

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed in the as-treated condition and after machining to as-delivered
dimensions.

6.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe frequency shall usually be 2 MHz.

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-4 or with
paragraph 13.3 of standard NF EN 10308.
Part type is 1.

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-4 or with
paragraph 14 of standard NF EN 10308.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 149

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3306

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 2 in standard
NF EN 10228-4 or standard NF EN 10308, the thickness to be taken into account shall be one which
is representative of the part in its final condition.
The Manufacturer shall specify the acceptance criteria for the bars or, failing this, include the test in
his manufacturing procedure.

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted tolerances for the part
delivered by the rolling mill shall be acceptable.
Liquid penetrant examination shall be performed after grinding, in accordance with MC 4000, to
ensure that the defect has completely disappeared.
Examination criteria shall be those defined in paragraph 5.
The rolling mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.

8 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B,
C and D 1300.

9 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

10 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- intergranular corrosion test, where applicable,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data for class 1 products (in the case of retreatment this
includes recordings of all heat treatments),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

M 3000 / 150  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3306

These reports shall include:

- heat number and bar reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 151

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3306

M 3000 / 152  n° 137-2012


TABLE II

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEELS USED

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

n° 137-2012
ROOM TEMPERATURE 350°C
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

TYPE OF DESIGNATION
STEEL AFNOR Min. Min. Rm (MPa) Min. A% (5d) Min. KV (J)(1) Min. Min. Rm (MPa)
Rp0.2 Rp0.2
(MPa)  150 mm > 150 mm Long. Trans. Long. Trans. (MPa)  150 mm > 150 mm

Z6 CN 18-10 210 520 485 45 40 - 60* 125 394 368

Z5 CN 18-10 210 520 485 45 40 - 60* 125 394 368
Z2 CN 18-10 175 490 450 45 40 - 60* 105 350 327
STEEL 18-10
without Mo Z2 CN 19-10
Controled 210 520 485 45 40 - 60* 125 394 368
nitrogen content
Z6 CN Nb 18-11 220 540 490 40 35 100 60* 140 365 340
Z8 CNT 18-11 220 540 490 40 35 100 60* 135 425 397
Z6 CND 17-12 210 520 485 45 40 - 60* 130 445 416
Z5 CND 17-12 210 520 485 45 40 - 60* 130 445 416
Z2 CND 17-12 175 490 450 45 40 - 60* 105 382 355
STEEL 18-10
with Mo Z2 CND 18-12
Controled 220 520 485 45 40 - 60* 130 400 380
nitrogen content
Z8 CNDNb 18-12 230 540 490 35 35 100 60* 150 365 340
Z8 CNDT 18-12 230 540 490 35 35 100 60* 150 425 397
* Value raised to 100 J for the class 1 equipment
(1) The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer..

M 3000 / 153
M 3306
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3306

M 3000 / 154  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3307

M 3307
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CLASS 1, 2 AND 3 AUSTENITIC

STAINLESS STEEL PLATES

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable austenitic stainless steel plates, up to 120 mm in thickness, which
are not covered by an individual procurement specification.
The grades shall be selected from those defined in table I appended to this specification.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and plate analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I appended.
Requirements relative to cobalt content shall be stipulated in the equipment specification or other
relevant contractual documents, in accordance with subchapters B 2400, C 2400 and D 2400.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
A plate analysis is generally specified in the purchase order. This analysis is compulsory for class 1
and 2 components. Only C, Cr and Ni contents shall be checked. Mo, Co, N, Ti and Nb content shall
also be checked if these elements are specified in the chemical requirements. This analysis shall be
performed in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 155

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3307

2.3 INTERGRANULAR CORROSION TEST

The intergranular corrosion test shall be stipulated in accordance with the rules set forth in
paragraphs B 2300, C 2300 and D 2300. It shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000, either
on a test ingot made at the time of casting, or on the product, on the basis of one test per lot.
The sensitizing heat treatment to be performed, as a function of the selected grade, is given in table
I. The heating temperature to be adopted shall be:
Treatment A:
- for grades not containing molybdenum, 650°C ± 10°C,
- for grades containing molybdenum, 675°C ± 10°C.
Treatment B:
- for grades not containing molybdenum, 700°C ± 10°C,
- for grades containing molybdenum, 725°C ± 10°C.
The corrosion test result shall be considered satisfactory if during sound testing the test specimen
gives a clear metallic sound, and provided no cracks or tears are detected during the bend tests.
Should any doubt remain, the absence of intergranular corrosion shall be confirmed by micrographic
examination.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the Supplier shall draw up a manufacturing
programme for class 1 and 2 parts. This programme shall include:
a) identification of melting process,
b) ingot weight and type,
c) identification of main hot-working operations,
d) top and bottom end discard percentages,
e) position of the plate in the ingot, in particular the final rolling direction in relation to the ingot
axis,
f) main rolling direction,
g) identification of main cold-working operations (for cold- finished plates),
h) conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
i) drawing with position of acceptance test samples,
j) position of test specimens in these samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

M 3000 / 156  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3307

For plates less than 80 mm thick, points b), c) and d) of the manufacturing programme shall not be
required.
For class 3 parts, only the information given in points a), f), h), i) and j) need be provided.

3.2 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Final heat treatment for mechanical properties shall consist of solution heat treatment at a
temperature between 1050° C and 1150° C. Records for class 1 parts shall be evaluated by the
Supplier.
There are three distinct cases:
a) Plates  3 mm thick finished by cold rolling
These plates are delivered after cold-rolling, either solution heat-treated (for conditions see
paragraph 3.2), pickled and passivated, or solution heat-treated, pickled, passivated and work-
hardened. Sheets and strip may be delivered on spools.

b) Plates > 3 mm thick finished by cold-rolling

These plates shall be delivered after cold-rolling. They shall be solution heat treated (see
paragraph 3.2), pickled and passivated. If work-hardening treatment is necessary, it shall be
subject to approval as defined in M 140.

c) Plates > 3 mm thick hot-rolled

These plates shall be delivered after hot-rolling. They shall be solution heat treated, pickled and
passivated.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements shall be given in table II appended.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been subjected to heat treatment for
mechanical properties; they shall be appropriately marked and shall show the final rolling direction.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
Sampling procedures are defined below according to plate thickness.
Test specimens shall be taken halfway between the edge and the plate centreline. Test specimens
shall always be taken at a distance from the edge of the sample at least equal to the thickness of the
plate. The longitudinal axis of test specimens shall be perpendicular to the final rolling direction.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 157

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3307

The longitudinal axis for tension test specimens is located as follows:

- at mid-thickness for plates  30 mm thick,
- at 1/4 thickness for plates > 30 mm thick,
- for plates less than 10 mm thick, the test specimen thickness shall be equal to the thickness of the
plate (specimen with rectangular cross-section).
The longitudinal axis of impact specimens shall be located at mid-thickness.
Impact test specimen notch roots shall be perpendicular to the rolling skin.
For thicknesses less than or equal to 12 mm, the impact test shall not be performed.

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Definition of a lot
A lot shall consist of plates, sheets or strips from the same heat of steel. They shall have undergone
the same processing cycle and shall be from the same furnace charge or shall have been subjected to
the same heat treatment run.

4.3.2 Number and content of tests

For class 1, 2 and 3 plates:
- per lot restricted to 3000 kg, one series of tests at one end of the plate, band or strip
corresponding to the top end of the ingot,
- per lot greater than 3000 kg, two series of tests, one at each end of the plate, sheet or strip.
A tensile test at high temperature shall be performed when this is stipulated in the equipment
specification or other relevant contractual documents. This check shall always be performed for
class 1 plates.
The number of tests to be performed and test temperatures are given in table III appended.

4.3.3 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.
For thicknesses less than 20 mm, the test specimen with a circular section may be replaced by a
specimen with a rectangular section, in accordance with MC 1000.

M 3000 / 158  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3307

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the plate or plates shall be accepted; if not, the
following paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the plate or plates shall be accepted; if not, they shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

B - KV IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000. Three test specimens shall
be broken for each test series.

b) Results
The mean value for a series of three specimens shall meet the specified value in table II. An
individual value may be less than the required value on condition it is not below 70% of
the latter.
If the conditions defined above are not fulfilled, three additional specimens shall be taken next to
the specimen that produced the unsatisfactory result and tested.
The part and/or lot can be accepted after the test performed on the second series of three
specimens, if the following conditions are simultaneously satisfied:
- the mean value of the six tests shall be greater than or equal to the minimum specified value,
- no more than two individual values out of the six shall be less than the minimum
specified value,

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 159

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3307

- only one individual value out of the six shall be less than 70% of the specified value.
If this is not the case, the part or lot shall be rejected.

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test coupons shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in paragraph 4.2. The
tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than one retreatment shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final stage in accordance
with MC 7100. Their surfaces shall be plane, uniform and free from buckles, blowholes, tears,
cracks and inclusions.
After cutting to as-delivered dimensions, the edges shall be visually examined in accordance with
MC 7100. There shall be no cleavage or lamination (for example, a layer of fine inclusions drawn
out during rolling). Where there is doubt, a liquid penetrant examination shall be performed in
accordance with MC 4000.

EXAMINATION CRITERIA
Only the following shall be tolerated:
a) for class 1 and 2 plates:
- linear indications of 8 mm or less for plates 40 mm thick or less, and of 10 mm or less for
plates more than 40 mm thick.
In addition, when the conditions in which the plate is to be used give rise to the risk of lamellar
tearing, only grouped indications whose total length over the most densely defective meter is as
follows, shall be tolerated:
< 30 mm for plates  40 mm thick,
< 40 mm for plates > 40 mm thick.
The risk of lamellar tearing must be specified by the Manufacturer.
Two adjacent indications are considered to be one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of the smaller of the two. The total length is equal to the sum of the lengths of the
indications plus the distance between them.

M 3000 / 160  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3307

b) for class 3 plates:

- linear indications of 12 mm or less for plates 40 mm thick or less, and of 15 mm or less for
plates thicker than 40 mm.

If these criteria are not met, no weld repairs shall be authorized and the plate shall be rejected.
However, if the indications are exceptional and localized (which can be checked by angle-beam
ultrasonic examination) this zone may be removed by grinding and the plate may be accepted
provided that its dimensions are still acceptable.
Remark: if, when the plate is used in the manufacturing cycle, cleavage or lamination is discovered, the plate shall
be discarded.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
An ultrasonic examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 2400 which stipulates the
conditions of application of Standard NF EN 10307.
- For class 1 plates: the examination shall only be carried out on parts at least 12 mm thick, in
accordance with the scanning plan and the levels S3 and E4 criteria given in Standard
NF EN 10307.
In addition, as stipulated in paragraph 9.2.2 of the standard, a test identical to the one performed
on the plate edges shall be performed in the weld areas.
- For class 2 plates: the examination shall only be carried out for parts at least 30 mm thick, in
accordance with the scanning plan and the levels S2 and E3 criteria given in Standard
NF EN 10307.
- For class 3 plates: the ultrasonic examination is not required.

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

7.1 REMOVAL BY GRINDING
The Supplier may remove surface defects by grinding, provided that:
- the remaining thickness is within the tolerances specified by the drawing or the purchase order,
- the cavity blends smoothly in with the surrounding surface,
- after removal, the surface is subjected to liquid penetrant examination in accordance with
MC 4000.
Only indications greater than 1 mm shall be considered recordable.
Defects producing the following shall be unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non linear indications with one dimension greater than 2 mm.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 161

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3307

7.2 REPAIR WELDING

As a general rule, the rolling mill shall not be authorized to perform repair welding.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions of the plates, sheets or strips shall comply with those specified on the drawing or in
the purchase order.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B,
C and D 1300.

Samples delivered with the part shall be marked in accordance with the provisions of the
purchase order.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- intergranular corrosion test, if required by the purchase order,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data for class 1 plates (in the case of retreatment this
includes recordings of all heat treatments),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and plate, sheet or strip reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 3000 / 162  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3307

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 163

 TABLE II

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEELS USED

M 3000 / 164
MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

TYPE OF AFNOR ROOM TEMPERATURE 350°C

STEEL GRADE
Min. Rp0.2 Min. A% (5d) Min. KV Min. Rp0.2 Min. Rm
Min. Rm
(MPa) (MPa) (J)(1) (MPa) (MPa)
Ep > 3 mm Ep  3 mm

Z6 CN 18-10 210 520 45 40 / 125 394

Z5 CN 18-10 210 520 45 40 / 125 394

Z2 CN 18-10 175 490 45 40 / 105 350
STEEL 18-10
without Mo Z2 CN 19-10
Controled 210 520 45 40 / 125 394
nitrogen content
Z6 CN Nb 18-11 220 540 40 35 60* 140 365
Z8 CNT 18-11 220 540 40 35 60* 135 425
Z6 CND 17-12 210 520 45 40 / 130 445
Z5 CND 17-12 210 520 45 40 / 130 445
Z2 CND 17-12 175 490 45 40 / 105 382
STEEL 18-10
with Mo Z2 CND 18-12
Controled 220 520 45 40 / 130 400


nitrogen content
Z8 CNDNb 18-12 230 540 35 35 60* 150 365
Z8 CNDT 18-12 230 540 35 35 60* 150 425

* Value raised to 100 J for the class 1 equipment

(1) The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer.

n° 137-2012
M 3307

TABLE III

LOCATION OF SAMPLES NUMBER OF

TEST
NAME WEIGHT THICKNESS TOP END BOTTOM END SPECIMENS
TEMPERATURE
OF TEST OF LOT OF PLATE PER TYPE

n° 137-2012
IN °C
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

Half At quarter Half At quarter

OF TEST
thickness thickness thickness thickness

e  30 mm 1 - - - 1
 3000 kg
e > 30 mm - 1 - - 1

Room e  3 mm 1 - 1 - 2

> 3000 kg 3 mm < e  30 mm 1 - 1 - 2

Tension e > 30 mm - 1 - 1 2

e  30 mm 1 - - - 1
 3000 kg
e > 30 mm - 1 - - 1
350
12 mm < e  30 mm 1 - 1 - 2
> 3000 kg
e > 30 mm - 1 - 1 2

12 mm < e  30 mm 1 - - - 3
 3000 kg
(a) e > 30 mm 1 - - - 3
KV
Room
impact
12 mm < e  30 mm 1 - 1 - 6
> 3000 kg
e > 30 mm 1 - 1 - 6

(a) The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer.

M 3000 / 165
M 3307
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3307

M 3000 / 166  n° 137-2012

 RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 3308

M 3308
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

STRAIN HARDENED HOT WORKED ROLLED OR

FORGED BARS  50 mm IN DIAMETER MADE
FROM AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL USED FOR
THE FABRICATION OF BOLTING MATERIAL
FOR REACTOR INTERNALS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers the procurement of strain hardened, hot worked, rolled or forged bars,
 50 mm in diameter, made from austenitic stainless steel used for the fabrication of bolting
materials for reactor internals:
- of grades Z2 CND 17.12 and Z2 CND 18.12 with controlled nitrogen content for centring pins
(welded),
- of- grades Z2 CND
of grades 17.12,
Z2 CND Z2 CND
17.12, 18.12
Z2 CND withwith
18.12 controlled nitrogen
controlled content
nitrogen andand
content Z6 CND 17.12
Z6 CND for
17.12
 non-welded screws. screws.
for non-welded

It does not apply to fasteners contributing to pressure resistance.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I below.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. He shall also supply a product analysis. This analysis may be performed on metal
discard from mechanical tests. The ladle analysis requirements shall also apply to the product
analysis. However, the ladle analysis shall be sufficient except for C, Ni, Cr, Mo and Co contents
which must be checked on one bar per heat of steel. These analyses shall be performed in
accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 144-2014 M 3000 / 167

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3308

TABLE I

Z2 CND 18-12
CONTROLLED
AFNOR GRADE Z6 CND 17-12 Z2 CND 17-12
NITROGEN
CONTENT
LADLE AND PRODUCT LADLE AND PRODUCT LADLE AND PRODUCT
ELEMENTS ANALYSES ANALYSES ANALYSES
PERCENTAGES PERCENTAGES PERCENTAGES

Carbon 0.030 - 0.080 0.035 max. 0.030 max.

Max. Magnesium 2.00 2.00 2.00
Max. Phosphorus (1) 0.020 0.020 0.020
Max. Sulphur (1) 0.015 0.015 0.015
Max. Silicon 1.00 1.00 1.00
Nickel 10.00 - 14.00 11.50 - 12.50 10.00 - 14.00
Chromium 16.00 - 18.00 17.00 - 18.20 16.00 - 19.00
Molybdenum 2.25 - 3.00 2.25 - 2.75 2.25 - 2.75
Max. Copper 1.00 1.00 1.00
Max. Nitrogen – 0.080 –
Cobalt max. 0.20 0.20 0.20
Preferred max. 0.10 0.10 0.10

(1) For part analysis, the maximum guaranteed value is increased by 0.005%.

2.3 INTERGRANULAR CORROSION TEST ON CENTRING PINS

The intergranular corrosion test shall be performed, in accordance with the rules set forth in
paragraph G 2300, at the time of casting, in accordance with MC 1000.
The heating temperature shall be 725°C ± 10°C. The holding time shall be 30 minutes, followed by
slow cooling. However, if the test cannot be performed in a test ingot made at the time of casting,
one test per lot shall be performed on a bar in the solution heat treated condition before strain
hardening.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 FORGING OR ROLLING
The bars shall be rolled or forged.
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A
record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of the Surveillance
Agents.
The same applies to the overall ratio of reduction which, calculated in accordance with M 380, shall
be 3 or more.

M 3000 / 168  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3308

3.2 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME

Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the Supplier shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- as-treated and as-delivered bar diameters,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- work hardening ratio and procedures,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples,
- the various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be
presented in chronological order.

3.3 HEAT TREATMENT

The bars shall be subjected to solution heat treatment at a temperature between 1050°C and 1150°C,
followed by water cooling.
Conditions for heat treatment shall be indicated in the manufacturing programme.

3.4 WORK HARDENING

After solution heat treatment, the bars shall be subjected to cold work hardening in order to obtain
the required mechanical properties (see paragraph 4.1). The work hardening ratio and procedure
shall be set by the Supplier and stipulated in the manufacturing programme. As a general rule, the
work hardening ratio shall be  30%.

3.5 MACHINING - DELIVERY CONDITION

The bars shall be machined by turning or grinding, such that surface condition shall be suitable for
non-destructive examination. The surface condition is detailed in SECTION III for the examinations
concerned here. The surface condition shall be determined in accordance with MC 7200.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are given in table II below.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 169

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3308

TABLE II

NAME OF TEST REQUIRED VALUE

PROPERTIES
TEST TEMPERATURE Dia.  30 mm 30<dia  50mm

Tension room Rp0.2 450/620 MPa 450/620 MPa

Rm minimum value 655 MPa 590 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 30 30
Z % minimum value 60 60
KV room Minimum average value 80 J 80 J
Impact

Brinell room minimum value 192 HB 192 HB

hardness
prior to work
hardening

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall consist of bar prolongations which are cropped after heat and mechanical
treatments.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
Test specimens shall be cut longitudinally, such that their axis is coincident with that of the bar. The
test-pertinent area of the specimens shall be located at a distance from the end of the bar equal to
that of the diameter.

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
After work hardening, each bar becomes a separate entity and its mechanical properties must be
checked.
a) Test prolongations
The bars must be of sufficient length to provide a prolongation for tension and impact testing.

b) Number and content of tests

The number of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens and test temperatures are
given in table III below.

M 3000 / 170  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3308

TABLE III

NUMBER OF TESTS PER BAR

ORIENTA- TEST
DEPTH OF AFTER SOLUTION
NAME OF TEST TION OF TEMPERATURE
SPECIMEN HEAT TREATMENT AFTER WORK
SPECIMEN IN °C
AND BEFORE WORK HARDENING
HARDENING

Tension Bar axis Long 20 / 1

KV impact Bar axis Long 20 / 1
Brinell hardness 20 1 /

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall have a circular section. Their normal diameter shall be 10 mm and their
dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000 at one end of each bar. The
following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective.
If the results of the retests are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 171

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 3308

B - IMPACT TEST ON BARS WITH DIAMETER  15 mm

a) Test specimens and test method
The KV test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations at the end of each bar. The axis
defined by the notch root shall be perpendicular to the skin. The shape and size of the test
specimen and the test conditions shall be as defined in MC 1000. Three specimens shall be
broken for each test. The test temperature shall be 20°C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at 20°C as given in table II must be satisfied.
The mean value for a series of three specimens shall meet the specified value in table II. An
individual value may be less than the required value on condition it is not below 70% of the
latter.
If the conditions defined above are not fulfilled, three additional specimens shall be taken next to
the specimen that produced the unsatisfactory result and tested.
The part and/or lot can be accepted after the test performed on the second series of three
specimens, if the following conditions are simultaneously satisfied:
- the mean value of the six tests shall be greater than or equal to the minimum specified value,
- no more than two individual values out of the six shall be less than the minimum specified
value,
- only one individual value out of the six shall be less than 70% of the specified value.
If this is not the case, the part or lot shall be rejected.

C - HARDNESS TEST
Hardness tests shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.
One hardness indentation shall be made on each bar after heat treatment and prior to work
hardening. The results obtained shall satisfy the requirements of table II.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal. The parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks or other injurious
defects.
A liquid penetrant examination shall not be performed on the bars, but on the finished screws and
centring pins, in accordance with MC 4000. Recordable conditions and examinations criteria are
defined in M 5140 § 5.2.1.

M 3000 / 172  n° 140-2013

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 3308

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process on bars with diameters
≥ 15 mm in accordance with MC 2300.

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed after heat treatment and work hardening.

6.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe frequency is usually 2 MHz.

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-4 or with
paragraph 13.3 of standard NF EN 10308.

If the scanning cannot be performed by rotation it shall be performed on a grid layout in accordance
with paragraph 12.3 of standard NF EN 10228-4 or with paragraph 13.2 of standard NF EN 10308.
Part type is 1a.

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-4 or with
paragraph 14 of standard NF EN 10308.

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 2 in standard
NF EN 10228-4 or standard NF EN 10308.

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within dimensional tolerances of the part shall
be acceptable.
No repair welding shall be authorized.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions and tolerances shall be those stipulated in the purchase order.

 n° 140-2013 M 3000 / 173

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3308

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B,
C and D 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- intergranular corrosion test,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (in the case of retreatment this includes recordings of
all heat treatments),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 3000 / 174  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3309

M 3309
PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

NIOBIUM STABILIZED AUSTENITIC STAINLESS

STEEL FORGINGS FOR THE MANUFACTURE
OF SHAFTS FOR PWR REACTOR
COOLANT PUMPS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers the procurement of niobium stabilized austenitic stainless steel forgings
for the manufacture of shafts for PWR reactor coolant pumps.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. In addition, he shall provide a product analysis. This analysis may be performed on
metal discard from mechanical tests. These analyses shall be performed in accordance
with MC 1000.

2.3 INTERGRANULAR CORROSION TEST

An intergranular corrosion test shall be performed on metal discard after solution heat treatment of
the shaft, but prior to stabilizing heat treatment as defined in paragraph 3.4. The test shall be
performed in accordance with MC 1000, treatment B (heating to 700°C ± 10°C for 30 minutes,
followed by slow cooling). If the carbon content shown by the product analysis is less than 0.040%,
this test shall only be necessary on one shaft per heat of steel.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 175

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3309

The two test specimens shall be taken from one of the test prolongations situated at each end of the
shaft (see paragraph 4.2). They shall be taken longitudinally or tangentially under the skin.
TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE Z6 CNNb 18-11

ELEMENTS LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSES (%)

Max. Carbon 0.080

Max. Silicon 1.00
Max. Manganese 2.00
Max. Sulphur (1) 0.015
Max. Phosphorus (1) 0.030
Chromium 17.00 - 20.00
Nickel 9.00 - 13.00
Niobium (2)Min. 8 times the carbon content
Max. 1.00
Max. Copper 1.00
Max. Cobalt 0.20

(1) For part analysis, the maximum guaranteed value is increased by 0.005%.

(2) Part of the niobium may be replaced by tantalum provided that the total content of
niobium and tantalum is not less than 10 times the carbon content.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of the part in the ingot,
- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation, with partial and overall
ratios of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,

M 3000 / 176  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3309

- position of acceptance test samples on the part,

- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.
A record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance
Agents. Overall ratio of reduction shall be greater than 3 (calculated in accordance with M 380).

3.3 MACHINING
Before heat treatment, the profile of the shaft shall correspond as closely as possible to the as-
delivered profile. Maximum permissible extra thickness shall be 30 mm on the radius. If this profile
cannot be obtained directly by forging, it shall be obtained by rough-machining. This profile shall be
given in the manufacturing programme.
After heat treatment, the part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic
examination.
Surface roughness obtained shall be such as to ensure that the results of non-destructive
examinations are significantly accurate.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The part shall be delivered in the solution heat treated condition. The solution heat treatment
temperature shall be between 1050°C and 1150°C. The part shall be subjected to solution heat
treatment by total immersion in water.
In order to ensure effective cooling, the part is either rotated during immersion, or fixed in position
and the water is pumped around it.
The shaft shall also be subjected to stabilizing heat treatment at a temperature between 850°C and
870°C for 12 to 24 hours.
During this treatment, the part shall be suspended in the vertical position. The cooling rate after
holding should not exceed 50°C/hour until a temperature of 150°C is reached.
Details of the solution heat treatment and the dimensional stabilizing heat treatment shall be given in
the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).
Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the charge with at least one
thermocouple per part, or with at least two thermocouples when the charge consists of only one part.
Thermocouple locations shall be specified in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1). If
the parts are rotated during stabilizing heat treatment, the Supplier may be allowed not to place
thermocouples on the parts in accordance with the requirements of F 8140.
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 177

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3309

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.
TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED VALUE

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE
LONGITUDINAL TRANSVERSE

Tensile Room Rp0.2 Min. value 210 MPa 210 MPa

Rm Min. value 480 MPa 480 MPa
A % (5d) Min. value 40 35

350°C Rtp0.2 Min. value 140 MPa for information

purposes
Rm Min. value 340 MPa for information
purposes
KV impact Room Min. average value 100 J* 60 J

* The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is certified greater than
or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from two prolongations marked X and Y located at each end of
the shaft.
The prolongations, whose diameters shall be equal to those of the corresponding shaft journals, shall
be cropped after the part has been subjected to all heat treatments, both solution heat treatment and
dimensional stabilizing heat treatment.
For shafts with end diameter greater than 400 mm (such as shafts with plates), a test ring,
identification marking Z shall be sampled from the prolongation of the area of greatest diameter.
The internal diameter is thus approximately 400 mm.
The size of the prolongations shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
Test specimens shall be taken at mid-radius longitudinally and tangentially. For the prolongation,
identification marking Z, the test pieces shall be sampled at mid-thickness. The test-pertinent part of
the specimens shall be located at least 30 mm from the end face of the prolongation. The notch axes
of impact test specimens shall be oriented radially.

4.3 TESTING
Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The number of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown
in table III.

M 3000 / 178  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3309

TABLE III

NUMBER OF PROLONGATION
NAME ORIENTATION TEST SPECIMENS
OF TEST OF SPECIMEN TEMPERATURE PER TYPE
OF TEST X Y Z*

Tension Longitudinal Room 1 X X X

Tension Longitudinal 350°C 1 X X X
KV impact Longitudinal Room 3 X X X

Tension Tangential Room 1 X X X

Tension Tangential 350°C 1 X X X
KV impact Tangential Room 3 X X X

* If applicable

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II. If this is not the case and the test
specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the usefulness of the product) or if
unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the specimen or a testing machine
malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If the results of the second test
are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 179

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3309

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens
The shape and dimensions of test specimens shall be as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
Tests shall be performed at + 20°C, in accordance with MC 1000.

c) Results
The mean value for a series of three specimens shall meet the specified value in table II. An
individual value may be less than the required value on condition it is not below 70% of
the latter.
If the conditions defined above are not fulfilled, three additional specimens shall be taken next to
the specimen that produced the unsatisfactory result and tested.
The part and/or lot can be accepted after the test performed on the second series of three
specimens, if the following conditions are simultaneously satisfied:
- the mean value of the six tests shall be greater than or equal to the minimum specified value,
- no more than two individual values out of the six shall be less than the minimum specified
value,
- only one individual value out of the six shall be less than 70% of the specified value.
If this is not the case, the part or lot shall be rejected.

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3. No more than one retreatment shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks or other injurious defects.
A liquid penetrant examination shall be performed on all surfaces in accordance with the
requirements of MC 4000.
The following criteria are to be applied:
- any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition,

M 3000 / 180  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3309

- all defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
1) linear indications,
2) rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
3) 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
4) 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications
being evaluated.

When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the part cannot be accepted as-is and the instructions given in paragraph 7 of this specification
shall apply.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed in the as-treated condition and after machining to as-delivered
dimensions.

6.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.

Probe frequency shall normally be 2 MHz or 1 MHz, depending on the structure.

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-4.
Part type is 1.

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-4.

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 2 of standard
NF EN 10228-4.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 181

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3309

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall
be acceptable.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on
the drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- intergranular corrosion test,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been retreated, this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 3000 / 182  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3310

M 3310
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

GRADE Z2 CN 19-10 CONTROLLED NITROGEN

CONTENT AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL
PLATES FROM 10 mm TO 100 mm THICK
USED FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF
PWR REACTOR INTERNALS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable austenitic stainless steel plates between 10 mm and 100 mm
thick, used in the manufacture of PWR reactor internals.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. In addition he shall provide a product analysis taken from the top end of each rolled
sheet or strip. These analyses shall be performed in compliance with the requirements of MC 1000.
These samples may be taken from mechanical test specimen discard.
The product analysis shall be used to evaluate the content of the following elements: carbon,
chromium, nickel and cobalt. If a more complete material analysis is performed, it should only show
the usual residual content for elements other than those specified in table I.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 183

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3310

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE Z2 CN 19-10 CONTROLLED NITROGEN CONTENT

ELEMENTS LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSES (%)

Max. Carbon 0.035

Chromium 18.50 to 20.00
Nickel 9.00 to 10.00
Max. Silicon 1.00
Max. Manganese 2.00
Max. Sulphur (1) 0.015
Max. Phosphorus (1) 0.030
Max. Copper 1.00
Max. Boron 0.0018
Max. Nitrogen 0.080
Max. Cobalt 0.20*

(1) For part analysis, the maximum guaranteed value is increased by 0.005%.

* For certain internal core structures the maximum cobalt content is limited to
0.10 % maximum (see G 2400).

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the Supplier shall draw up a manufacturing
programme. This programme shall include:
a) identification of melting process,
b) ingot weight and type,
c) top and bottom end discard percentages,
d) position of the part in the ingot, in particular final rolling direction in relation to the ingot axis,
e) indication of main rolling direction,
f) conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
g) position of acceptance test samples on the part,
h) drawing with position of test specimens on samples. The various heat treatment, sampling and
non-destructive examination operations shall be presented in chronological order.

Where e < 80 mm, points b, c and d of the above programme shall not be required.

M 3000 / 184  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3310

3.2 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The plate shall be delivered in the as-treated condition after hot or cold rolling. Final heat treatment
for mechanical properties shall consist of a solution heat treatment at a temperature between 1050°C
and 1150°C.
Levelling by cold drawing is permitted for plate whose thickness is less than 40 mm on condition
that the strain hardening induced is at most about 1%.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from the plate as-delivered by the rolling mill (therefore after solution
heat treatment). They shall be appropriately marked and shall show the final rolling direction.
The size of test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests and
retests.
Test samples shall be taken halfway between the edge and the axis of the plate. Specimens shall not
be taken closer to the edge of the sample than a distance equal to the thickness of the plate. The
longitudinal axis of the test specimens shall be perpendicular to the final rolling direction.
The longitudinal axis for tension test specimens shall be located at mid-thickness for plates 30 mm
thick or less, or at quarter thickness for plates thicker than 30 mm.
The longitudinal axis of impact test specimens shall be located at mid-thickness.
The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the rolling skin.
TABLE II

NAME TEST
PROPERTIES REQUIRED VALUE
OF TEST TEMPERATURE

Tension Room Rp0.2 Min. value 210 MPa

Rm Min. value 520 MPa
A % (5d) Min. value 40

350°C Rtp0,2 Min. value 125 MPa

Rm Min. value 394 MPa

KV impact Room Minimum average value 60 J

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 185

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3310

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
The following tests shall be performed on each rolled sheet or strip:
- one series of tests at the end corresponding to the top of the ingot for sheets or strips weighing
3000 kg or less,
- two series of tests, one at each end, for sheets or strips weighing more than 3000 kg.
The number of tests to be performed, orientation of samples and test temperatures are given
in table III.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.
For plates less than 20 mm thick, the cylindrical test specimens may be replaced by specimens
with a rectangular section, as stipulated in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

M 3000 / 186  n° 137-2012


TABLE III

LOCATION OF SAMPLES NUMBER OF

TEST
NAME TOP END BOTTOM END SPECIMENS
TEMPERATURE WEIGHT THICKNESS
OF TEST PER TYPE

n° 137-2012
IN °C
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

Half At quarter Half At quarter

OF TEST
thickness thickness thickness thickness

 30 mm 1 - - - 1
 3000 kg
> 30 mm - 1 - - 1
Room
 3 mm 1 - 1 - 2
> 3000 kg
> 30 mm - 1 - 1 2
Tension
 30 mm - - 1 - 1
 3000 kg
> 30 mm - - - 1 1
350
 30 mm - - 1 - 1
> 3000 kg
> 30 mm - - - 1 1

 30 mm 1 - - - 3
 3000 kg
(a) > 30 mm 1 - - - 3
KV
Room
impact
 30 mm - - 1 - 3
> 3000 kg
> 30 mm 1 - 1 - 6

(a) The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer.

M 3000 / 187
M 3310
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3310

B - KV IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000. Three test specimens shall
be broken for each test series.

b) Results
The mean value for a series of three specimens shall meet the specified value in table II. An
individual value may be less than the required value on condition it is not below 70% of the
latter.
If the conditions defined above are not fulfilled, three additional specimens shall be taken next to
the specimen that produced the unsatisfactory result and tested.
The part and/or lot can be accepted after the test performed on the second series of three
specimens, if the following conditions are simultaneously satisfied:
- the mean value of the six tests shall be greater than or equal to the minimum specified value,
- no more than two individual values out of the six shall be less than the minimum specified
value,
- only one individual value out of the six shall be less than 70% of the specified value.
If this is not the case, the part or lot shall be rejected.

4.4 RETREATMENT
A part rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test samples and specimens shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in
paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.

No more than one retreatment shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

The plates shall be subjected to visual examination and their surfaces shall be plane, uniform and
free from wrinkles, buckles, blowholes, tears, cracks, blisters and inclusions.
After the plate has been cut to as-delivered dimensions, a visual examination of the edges shall be
performed in accordance with MC 7100. There must be no cleavage or lamination. Only those
indications with one dimension greater than 8 mm shall be recorded.

M 3000 / 188  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3310

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
An ultrasonic examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 2400 which stipulates the
conditions of application of the Standard NF EN 10307.
- For plates more than 60 mm thick: the scanning plan and the criteria are those of levels S3 and E4
of Standard NF EN 10307.
In addition, as stipulated in paragraph 9.2.2 of the standard, a test identical to the one performed
on the plate edges shall be performed in the weld areas.
- For plates less than or equal to 60 mm thick: the scanning plan and the criteria are those of
levels S2 and E3 of Standard NF EN 10307.

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

7.1 REMOVAL BY GRINDING
The Supplier may remove surface defects by grinding, provided that:
- the remaining thickness is within the tolerances specified by the drawing,
- the cavity blends smoothly in with the surrounding surface,
- after removal, the surface is subjected to liquid penetrant examination in accordance with
MC 4000.

7.2 REPAIR WELDING

As a general rule, the rolling mill shall not be authorized to perform repair welding.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions of the plates shall comply with those specified on the purchase order drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
Samples delivered with the part shall be marked in accordance with the provisions of the
purchase order.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 189

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3310

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data for class 1 plates (in the case of retreatment this
includes recordings of all heat treatments),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and plate reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 3000 / 190  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3311

M 3311
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL FORGINGS

FOR CLASS 2 AND 3 TUBE PLATES

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable austenitic stainless steel forgings for tube plates between 30 mm
and 250 mm thick, intended for use in auxiliary system heat exchangers.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
In addition, he shall supply a product analysis. This analysis may be performed on metal discard
from mechanical test specimens.
These analyses shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of MC 1000.
Cobalt content requirements shall be given in the equipment specification or other relevant
contractual documents, in compliance with subchapters B 2400, C 2400 and D 2400.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 191

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3311

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE Z2 CN 18-10 Z2 CND 17-12

ELEMENTS LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSES %

Max. Carbon 0.030 0.030

Max. Manganese 2.00 2.00
Max. Phosphorus (1) 0.030 0.030
Max. Sulphur (1) 0.015 0.015
Max. Silicon 1.00 1.00
Nickel 9.00 - 12.00 11.00 - 14.00
Chromium 17.00 - 20.00 16.00 - 19.00
Molybdenum – 2.25 - 2.75
Max. Boron 0.0018 0.0018
Max. Copper 1.00 1.00

(1) For part analysis, the maximum guaranteed value is increased by 0.005%.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the forging mill shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- position of the part in the ingot,
- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each forging operation giving partial and overall
ratios of reduction determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of part as-forged or drop-forged, profiles of heat treatment, non-destructive
examination and delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

M 3000 / 192  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3311

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.
A record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance
Agents.
The overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough-machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile after heat treatment prior to final ultrasonic
examination.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Parts shall be delivered in the as-treated condition: final heat treatment for mechanical properties
shall consist of solution heat treatment at a temperature between 1050°C and 1150°C.
For tube plates weighing more than 5 tonnes, temperatures shall be measured by means of
thermocouples placed on the part.
If the part is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the new heat treatment shall also satisfy the same
requirements.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are given in table II.
TABLE II

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES: VALUES TO BE OBTAINED

AFNOR Room temperature 350°C

GRADE Rp0.2 min. Rm min. Min. A % (5d) Min. KV (J) Rp0.2 min. Rm min.
(MPa) (MPa) Long Trans Trans (MPa). (MPa)

Z2 CN 18-10 175 490 45 40 60 105 350

Z2 CND 17-12 175 490 45 40 60 105 382

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from a test ring comprised of an extra thickness or extra diameter
attached to the part.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 193

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3311

These samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been solution heat treated, they shall be
clearly identified and their orientation in the plate shall be indicated.
The size of test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests and
retests.
Test specimens shall be cut in such a way that their axes are tangential and that the test sample from
which they are cut shall be at least 20 mm from the flat surface of the ring and 40 mm from the
circular surface.
When it is impossible to position the test specimens as described above, they shall be taken such
that their axis is located at mid-thickness and their test-pertinent area shall be no closer to any other
surface than a distance equal to the thickness.
These profiles are those of the part in the solution heat treated condition.
The notch axes of impact test specimens shall be oriented perpendicular to the faces.
A diagram giving the position of samples on the part and a dimensioned sketch showing the position
of the test specimens on these parts shall be included in the manufacturing programme
(see paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED SAMPLES

Test shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not heat treated after
sampling.

4.3.1 Definition of a lot

A lot shall comprise one part.
For class 3 parts of unit weight 500 kg or less, acceptance may be by lots: the lot shall comprise
parts of similar thickness:
 e max 
  1.1
 e min 
 

from the same heat, subjected to the same manufacturing cycle and the same heat treatment.
A lot shall be restricted to 5000 kg.

4.3.2 Number and content of tests

The tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens and test temperatures are given in table III.
For parts weighing more than 5 tonnes, two series of tests shall be performed on samples taken from
diametrically opposed locations.

M 3000 / 194  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3311

A tensile test at high temperature shall be performed when this is stipulated in the equipment
specification or other relevant contractual documents.
TABLE III

NUMBER OF
NAME ORIENTATION TEST
SPECIMENS PER
OF TEST OF SPECIMEN TEMPERATURE
TYPE OF TEST

Tension Tangential Room 1

Tangential 350°C 1
KV impact (a) Tangential Room 3

(a) The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is certified greater
than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer.

4.3.3 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 195

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3311

B - KV IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
KV test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of these
specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000. Three test specimens shall be
broken for each test series.

b) Results
The mean value for a series of three specimens shall meet the specified value in table II. An
individual value may be less than the required value on condition it is not below 70% of the
latter.
If the conditions defined above are not fulfilled, three additional specimens shall be taken next to
the specimen that produced the unsatisfactory result and tested.
The part and/or lot can be accepted after the test performed on the second series of three
specimens, if the following conditions are simultaneously satisfied:
- the mean value of the six tests shall be greater than or equal to the minimum specified value,
- no more than two individual values out of the six shall be less than the minimum specified
value,
- only one individual value out of the six shall be less than 70% of the specified value.

If this is not the case, the part or lot shall be rejected.

4.4 RETREATMENT
A part rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test samples and specimens shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in
paragraph 4.2. The test performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3. No more
than one retreatment shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal.
The parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks or other injurious defects.
All parts shall be visually examined. This may be followed by liquid penetrant examination in
accordance with MC 4000 if so stipulated in the equipment specification.

M 3000 / 196  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3311

The following recordable conditions and examination criteria shall be applied:

- any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition,
- all defects which produce the following indications shall be unacceptable:
. linear indications,
. non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
. 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
. 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications
being evaluated.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the part cannot be accepted as-is and the instructions of paragraph 7 of this specification shall apply.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed in after as-treated condition and after machining to as-
delivered dimensions.

6.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe frequency shall usually be 2 MHz.

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-4.
Part type is 2.
As a modification of standard NF EN 10228-4, both side faces shall be subjected to examination.

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-4.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 197

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3311

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 2 of standard
NF EN 10228-4.

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted tolerances of the part delivered
by the forging mill dimensional shall be acceptable.
After repairs, a liquid penetrant examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 4000, to
ensure that the defect has been completely removed.
The examination criteria shall be the same as those specified in paragraph 5.
No weld repairs shall be authorized at the forging mill.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK AFTER HEAT TREATMENT

The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with C 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses, where applicable,
- evaluation of heat treatment data,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

M 3000 / 198  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3311

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 199

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3311

M 3000 / 200  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3312

M 3312
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CLASS 1, 2 AND 3 DISHED PARTS MADE

FROM AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable austenitic stainless steel dished parts, up to 120 mm in thickness
which are not covered by a product procurement specification.

1 BASE PRODUCT
Plate used for the manufacture of dished parts shall be procured as per product procurement
specification M 3307: "austenitic stainless steel plate"; plate can however be delivered untreated. In
this case, the mechanical characteristics shall be checked on test specimens taken from test coupons
as stated in paragraph 4.2, and subjected to separate heat treatment for mechanical properties.

2 MANUFACTURE
2.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
For class 1 and 2 dished parts, prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the
Manufacturer shall draw up a manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- position of dished part in the plate, more specifically, ingot centreline and final rolling directions
shall be marked on the part and on the test samples (refer to paragraph 4.2),
- forming process identification,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of the test specimens on samples.
The various heating, dishing, possible machining, heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive
testing operations shall be presented in chronological order.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 201

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3312

The forming shop must prove, by means of the required test results, that the selected manufacturing
process allows the guaranteed dimensional characteristics and mechanical properties to be obtained.
For Class 3 dished parts: (awaiting publication).

2.2 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

After forming, the dished part shall undergo solution heat treatment, this treatment is mostly
identical to the heat treatment for mechanical properties defined in product procurement
specification M 3307.

3 LOT COMPOSITION
A lot shall be composed of dished parts manufactured from the same original plate, subjected to the
same manufacturing cycle and forming part of the same furnace charge or heat treatment run.
The lot, however, shall be restricted to four parts of similar dimensions, as defined below:
e max
 1.1
e min

and same strain value to within 10%.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Required values for mechanical properties are identical to those indicated in product procurement
specification M 3307.

4.2 SAMPLING
The test samples shall be taken from coupons left attached to the part during cutting, and which have
undergone the same solution heat treatment as indicated in paragraph 2.2 or, if this proves
impossible, they shall be taken from coupons cut from the base plate before dishing. In this case, the
coupons must undergo all dishing heat cycling along with the part, then they must be welded to the
dishing part before it is subjected to solution heat treatment.
The coupons shall be appropriately marked and, more particularly, the direction of final rolling shall
be indicated.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
Test specimens shall be taken mid-way between the edge and the axis of the plate from which the
dished part is taken, or as close to this position as possible.

M 3000 / 202  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3312

No test specimen shall be taken closer to the sample or coupon edges than a distance equal to the
plate thickness. In order to fulfil this condition, the forming shop can protect the edges by means of
a thermal buffer welded over the entire sample or coupon thickness.
The longitudinal axis of the tension and impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the final
rolling direction.
The longitudinal axis for tension test specimens shall be located:
- for dished parts of thickness  30 mm: at mid-thickness (for dished parts of thickness < 10 mm:
the test specimen shall be as thick as possible - rectangular section test specimen),
- for dished parts of thickness > 30 mm: at quarter thickness.
The longitudinal axes for impact test specimens shall be located at mid-thickness.
Notch root axes of impact test specimens shall be perpendicular to the rolling skin.
A diagram showing the position of samples on the dished part and a dimensioned sketch giving the
position of the specimens in these samples shall be included in the manufacturing programme (see
paragraph 2.1).

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

For class 1, 2 and 3 dished parts:
- per lot restricted to 3000 kg, one series of tests on the top end of the plate from which the dished
part or parts come,
- per lot greater than 3000 kg, two series of tests, one at the top end and one at the bottom end of
the plate from which the dished part or parts come.
A tensile test at high temperature shall be performed when this is stipulated in the equipment
specification or other relevant contractual documents. This test shall be systematically performed on
class 1 dished parts.
For class 1, this test shall be systematically performed on a test specimen taken from the
bottom end.
The number of tests and test temperatures are given in table III of M 3307.

4.3.2 Test procedure

Test procedure is identical to that defined in product procurement specification M 3307. Results
obtained shall conform to those required in this specification.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 203

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3312

4.4 RETREATMENT
Dished parts or lots rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or several mechanical tests
may be retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, the test specimens shall be sampled as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests to be
performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than one retreatment shall be authorized.

4.5 TEST COUPONS

The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

All surfaces of the part shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final stage in accordance
with MC 7100. Its surface shall be smooth, free of scratches, laps, cracks, blisters, inclusions or any
other injurious defects.
After cutting to as-delivered dimensions, the dished part edges shall be examined in accordance with
MC 7100. There must be no cleavage or lamination. Should any doubt remain, a liquid penetrant
examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 4000.

EXAMINATION CRITERIA
Only defects producing the following indications shall be tolerated:
a) for class 1 and 2 dished parts:
- linear indications 8 mm long or less for dished parts 40 mm thick or less, and 10 mm long or
less for dished parts thicker than 40 mm.
In addition, when the conditions in which the plate is to be used give rise to the risk of lamellar
tearing, only grouped indications whose total length over the most densely defective meter is as
follows, shall be tolerated:
< 30 mm for plates  40 mm thick,
< 40 mm for plates > 40 mm thick.
The risk of lamellar tearing must be specified by the Manufacturer.
Two adjacent indications are considered to be one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of the smaller of the two. The total length is equal to the sum of the lengths of the
indications plus the distance between them.

M 3000 / 204  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3312

b) for class 3 dished parts:

- linear indications of 12 mm or less for plates 40 mm thick or less, and of 15 mm or less for
plates thicker than 40 mm.
If these criteria are not met, no weld repairs shall be authorized and the dished part shall be rejected.
However, if the indications are exceptional and localized (which can be checked by angle-beam
ultrasonic examination, for example) this zone may be removed by grinding and the dished part may
be accepted provided that its dimensions are still acceptable.
REMARK: If, when the plate is used in the manufacturing cycle, cleavage or lamination is
discovered, the dished part shall be discarded.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
An ultrasonic examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 2400 which stipulates the
conditions of application of Standard NF EN 10307.
- For class 1 dished parts: the examination shall be carried out wherever the thickness of the plate
from which the part is cut out is at least 12 mm. The scanning plan and criteria are those of levels
S3 and E4 given in Standard NF EN 10307.
In addition, as stipulated in paragraph 9.2.2 of standard, a test identical to the one performed in
the plate edges shall be performed in the weld areas.
- For class 2 dished parts: the examination shall be carried out wherever the thickness of the plate
from which the part was cut out is at least 30 mm. The scanning plan and criteria are those of
levels S2 and E3 of Standard NF EN 10307.
- For class 3 dished parts: the ultrasonic examination is not required.

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

7.1 REMOVAL BY GRINDING
The Supplier may remove surface defects by grinding provided that:
- the remaining thickness is within the tolerances specified by the drawing or the purchase order,
- the cavity blends in smoothly with the surrounding surface,
- after removal, the surface is subjected to liquid penetrant examination in accordance with
MC 4000.
Only indications greater than 1 mm shall be considered recordable.
Defects producing the following indications shall be unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 2 mm.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 205

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3312

7.2 REPAIR WELDING

As a general rule, the forming shop shall not be authorized to perform repair welding.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions of the dished parts shall comply with those specified on the drawing or in the
purchase order.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used in compliance with B, C and
D 1300. Samples delivered with the part shall be marked in accordance with the provisions of the
purchase order. In addition, the rolling direction shall be marked.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses, where applicable,
- intergranular corrosion test, where applicable,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data for class 1 dished parts (in the case of retreatment this
includes recordings of all heat treatments),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and plate, sheet or strip reference number,
- Supplier's and forging mill's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 3000 / 206  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3314

M 3314
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

COLD-ROLLED AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL PIPE

WELDED WITH THE ADDITION OF FILLER METAL FOR
USE IN CLASS 1, 2 AND 3 AUXILIARY PIPING

0 SCOPE
This specification covers austenitic stainless steel pipes made from cold rolled plate and welded
with the addition of filler metal, up to 50 mm thickness and not covered by an individual
procurement specification.

1 BASE PRODUCTS
Plate for the manufacture of pipes shall be procured as per product procurement specification
M 3307: CLASS 1, 2 AND 3 AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL PLATE.

2 MANUFACTURE
2.1 FORMING
The plates shall be formed by cold rolling. The requirements of chapter F 4000 shall apply.

2.2 WELDING
Refer to SECTION IV "WELDING", with due consideration paid to the following remarks: liquid
penetrant or magnetic particle examination of the surfaces to be welded is required only for class 1
and 2 pipes thicker than 25 mm. A visual examination of the surfaces to be welded shall be
performed in all cases, including class 3.

2.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Solution heat treatment may be performed on rolled welded pipes, in accordance with the
instructions given in F 4000, supplemented by those of paragraph 4 below.
The pipes shall be delivered in pickled and passivated condition.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 207

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3314

3 LOT COMPOSITION
The term lot refers to pipes with the same nominal diameters and thickness, which have been
subjected to the same manufacturing cycle, made from the same heat of steel, and produced in the
same furnace charge or in the same continuous-process furnace run.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 BASE METAL MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OUTSIDE WELD ZONE
No further mechanical testing shall be required, in addition to those performed on plates if, the
requirement of F 4000 being met, the calculated maximum elongation resulting from forming does
not exceed 15%.
In cases where the calculated maximum elongation equals or exceeds 15%, solution heat treatment
at a temperature between 1050°C and 1150°C shall be performed after forming. In such cases,
qualification testing shall be performed in accordance with F 4000. In addition, a reduced series of
tests shall be performed on each lot of pipes.

4.1.1 Required values

Required values for mechanical properties are identical to those mentioned in product procurement
specification M 3307.

4.1.2 Sampling
A - TESTING OF PLATES
Refer to M 3307.

B - TESTING OF PIPES
For each lot, a sample shall be taken from a prolongation to solution heat treated pipe.

4.1.3 Number and content of tests

A - TESTING OF PLATES
Refer to M 3307.

B - TESTING OF PIPES
The reduced series of tests to be performed for each lot of pipes which have undergone solution heat
treatment shall comprise a tension test and one impact test. The impact test may be waived if the
A% elongation value at ambient temperature is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the material
manufacturer.

4.1.4 Test procedure

Refer to M 3307.

M 3000 / 208  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3314

4.2 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES IN WELD ZONE

4.2.1 Required values
Refer to SECTION IV, chapter S 3000.

4.2.2 Production coupon definition

Production coupons shall be produced as follows:
- one production coupon for the first 60 linear metres,
- one production coupon for the next 100 linear metres,
of weld for each qualified welding process and which were subjected to the same heat treatment.

4.2.3 Sampling
The production coupons shall be located in the prolongation of the welds, welded and subjected to
heat treatment at the same time in accordance with the instructions given in S 7800 (SECTION IV).
Test specimens shall be taken in accordance with the requirements of SECTION IV, S 3000.

4.2.4 Number and content of tests

Refer to SECTION IV, S 7800.

4.2.5 Test procedure

Refer to SECTION IV, S 3000.

4.3 RETREATMENT
Lots of pipes rejected under solution heat treatment on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or
several mechanical tests may be retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test
report.
In such cases, the test specimens shall be sampled as specified in paragraph 4.1.2. The tests to be
performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.1.3. Only one retreatment shall be
permitted.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

5.1 ON PLATES
Refer to specification M 3307.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 209

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3314

5.2 ON WELDS
Refer to the requirements of SECTION IV, S 7460.
The visual examination is supplemented by a liquid penetrant examination as per S 7700.

5.3 ON AS-DELIVERED PIPES

All surfaces of the part which are accessible at the final stage shall be subjected to a visual
examination in accordance with MC 7100. External and internal surfaces shall be sound and free
from cracks, tears, blisters, laps, slivers, or any other injurious defect.
Pipes shall be delivered clean, free of any oxidation. Surface condition shall be determined in
accordance with MC 7200. Maximum surface roughness shall be 12.5 m.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Plates which have been subjected to non-destructive ultrasonic examination (in accordance with
M 3307) at the time of acceptance shall not undergo another examination of this type.
Welds shall be subjected to radiographic examination, in accordance with MC 3000. The degree of
radiographic examination and the criteria to be used for evaluating the seriousness of defects are
defined below:

CLASS DEGREE OF EXAMINATION CRITERIA

1 100 % In compliance with S 7714.3

2 100 % In compliance with S 7724.3
3 10 % In compliance with S 7734.3

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

7.1 PIPE OUTSIDE WELD ZONE
Defective areas shall be removed by grinding, in accordance with specification M 3307. Defect
removal is checked by means of liquid penetrant examination, in accordance with MC 4000.

7.2 WELD ZONE

Refer to SECTION IV, chapter S 7600.

M 3000 / 210  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3314

8 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

8.1 Dimensions and tolerances shall be indicated on the procurement drawings, in accordance
with requirements specified below.

Outside diameter : ± 1 % (including ovality)

 0,10 e
Wall thickness outside HAZ:
 0,35 mm
ROLLED PIPE WELDED
WITH THE ADDITION OF Internal and external weld reinforcement:
FILLER METAL L
  2 mm on external reinforcement
10
L
  1 mm and a maximum of 3 mm on internal reinforcement
20
e = nominal wall thickness of pipe
L = width of weld

8.2 DIMENSIONAL CHECK

Dimensional checks shall at least include the following:
- check of wall thickness, diameter and ovality of five pipes per lot,
- check of the extra thickness of the weld bead on five pipes per lot.

9 HYDROSTATIC TEST
Each pipe in as-delivered condition shall be subjected to hydrostatic testing, in accordance with the
requirements specified in the purchase order.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall use the identification and marking methods specified in B, C and D 1300.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 211

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3314

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- plate acceptance (chemical analysis, mechanical tests and non-destructive examinations),
- workshop qualification,
- forming procedure qualification, where applicable,
- filler material qualification,
- filler material lot acceptance,
- welding procedure qualification
- welders and welding operators qualification,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data,
- mechanical tests,
- visual examination,
- non-destructive examination,
- dimensional check,
- hydrostatic testing.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and pipe reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 3000 / 212  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3315

M 3315

PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

HOT OR COLD WORKED AUSTENITIC STAINLESS

STEEL FITTINGS WELDED WITH THE ADDITION OF
FILLER METAL FOR USE IN CLASS 1, 2 AND 3
AUXILIARY PIPING

0 SCOPE
This specification covers hot or cold worked austenitic stainless steel fittings welded with filler
metal, up to 50 mm in thickness, which are not covered by an individual procurement specification.

1 BASE PRODUCTS
Plate for the manufacture of fittings shall be procured as per product procurement specification
M 3307: "Class 1, 2 and 3 austenitic stainless steel plate".

2 MANUFACTURE
2.1 FORMING
The plates shall be hot or cold rolled. The requirements of chapter F 4000 shall apply.

2.2 WELDING
Refer to SECTION IV "WELDING", with due consideration paid to the following remarks: liquid
penetrant or magnetic particle examination of the surfaces to be welded is required only for class 1
and 2 fittings thicker than 25 mm. A visual examination of the surfaces to be welded shall be
performed in all cases, including class 3.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 213

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3315

2.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Solution heat treatment may be performed on rolled welded fittings, in accordance with the
instructions given in F 4000, supplemented by those of paragraph 4 below.
The fittings shall be delivered in pickled and passivated condition.

3 LOT COMPOSITION
The term lot refers to fittings with the same nominal diameters and thickness, which have been
subjected to the same manufacturing cycle, made from the same heat of steel, and produced in the
same furnace charge or in the same continuous-process furnace run.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 BASE METAL MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OUTSIDE WELD ZONE
No further mechanical testing shall be required, in addition to those performed on plates if, the
requirement of F 4000 being met, the calculated maximum elongation resulting from forming does
not exceed 15%.
In cases where the calculated maximum elongation equals or exceeds 15%, solution heat treatment
at a temperature between 1050°C and 1150°C shall be performed after forming. In such cases,
qualification testing shall be performed in accordance with F 4000. In addition, a reduced series of
tests shall be performed on each lot of fittings.

4.1.1 Required values

Required values for mechanical properties are identical to those mentioned in product procurement
specification M 3307.

4.1.2 Sampling
A - TESTING OF PLATES
Refer to M 3307.

B - TESTING OF FITTINGS
For each lot, a test sample shall be taken. This test sample shall consist either of a solution heat
treated fitting or of a prolongation to a fitting which has been solution heat treated at the same time.

4.1.3 Number and content of tests

A - TESTING OF PLATES
Refer to M 3307.

M 3000 / 214  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3315

B - TESTING OF FITTINGS
The reduced series of tests to be performed for each lot of fittings which have undergone solution
heat treatment shall comprise a tension test and one impact test. The impact test may be waived if
the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the
material manufacturer.

4.1.4 Test procedure

Refer to M 3307.

4.2 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES IN WELD ZONE

4.2.1 Required values
Refer to S 3000.

4.2.2 Production coupon definition

Production coupons shall be produced as follows:
- one production coupon for the first 60 linear metres,
- one production coupon for the next 100 linear metres ,
of weld for each qualified welding process, and which were subjected to the same heat treatment.
However, for class 1 fittings with a diameter > 400 mm, the equipment specification may stipulate
other frequencies.

4.2.3 Sampling
The production coupon may consist of a production part. A production coupon located in the
prolongation of the weld of a welded fitting and subjected to heat treatment at the same time in
accordance with the instructions given in S 7800 may be used.
Test specimens shall be taken in accordance with the requirements of S 3000.

4.2.4 Number and content of tests

Refer to S 7800.

4.2.5 Test procedure

Refer to S 3000.

4.3 RETREATMENT
Lots of fittings rejected after solution heat treatment on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or
several mechanical tests may be retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test
report.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 215

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3315

In such cases, the test specimens shall be sampled as specified in paragraph 4.1.2. The tests to be
performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.1.3. Only one retreatment shall be
permitted.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

5.1 ON PLATES
Refer to specification M 3307.

5.2 ON WELDS
Refer to the requirements of S 7460.
The visual examination is supplemented by a liquid penetrant examination as per S 7700.

5.3 ON AS-DELIVERED FITTINGS

All surfaces of the part which are accessible at the final stage shall be subjected to a visual
examination in accordance with MC 7100. External and internal surfaces shall be sound and free
from cracks, tears, blisters, laps, slivers, or any other injurious defect.
Pipes shall be delivered clean, free of any oxidation. Surface conditions shall be determined in
accordance with MC 7200. Maximum surface roughness shall be 12.5 µm .

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Plates which have been subjected to non-destructive ultrasonic examination (in accordance with
M 3307) at the time of acceptance shall not undergo another examination of this type.
Welds shall be subjected to radiographic examination, in accordance with MC 3000. The degree of
radiographic examination and the criteria to be used for evaluating the seriousness of defects are
defined below.

CLASS DEGREE OF EXAMINATION CRITERIA

1 100 % In compliance with S 7714.3

2 100 % In compliance with S 7724.3
3 10 % In compliance with S 7734.3

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

7.1 FITTINGS OUTSIDE WELD ZONE
Defective areas shall be removed by grinding, in accordance with specification M 3307. Defect
removal is checked by means of liquid penetrant examination in accordance with MC 4000.

M 3000 / 216  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3315

7.2 WELD ZONE

Refer to chapter S 7600.

8 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

8.1 Dimensions and tolerances shall be stipulated in the equipment specification or other
relevant contractual documents.

8.2 DIMENSIONAL CHECK

Dimensional checks shall at least include the following:
- check of wall thickness, diameter and ovality of five fittings per lot,
- check of extra thickness of the weld bead on five fittings per lot.

9 HYDROSTATIC TEST
Fittings shall not be hydrostatically tested unless otherwise stipulated in the equipment
specification. However the Supplier must guarantee the pressure-retaining characteristics of the
fittings in accordance with the requirements of the equipment specification.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall use the identification and marking methods specified in B, C and D 1300.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- plate acceptance (chemical analysis, mechanical tests and non-destructive examinations),
- workshop qualification,
- forming procedure qualification, where applicable,

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 217

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3315

- filler material qualification,

- filler material lot acceptance,
- welding procedure qualification,
- welders and welding operators qualification,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data,
- mechanical tests,
- visual examination,
- non-destructive examination,
- dimensional check,
- hydrostatic testing or supporting file.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 3000 / 218  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3316

M 3316
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CLASS S1 AND S2 AUSTENITIC STAINLESS

STEEL PLATE, SHEET AND STRIP

0 SCOPE
These products shall meet the requirements of standard NF EN 10088-2, supplemented by the
following enlargements and additional requirements which apply to the various paragraphs of the
above standard.

1 ENLARGEMENT ON STANDARD
Para. 5 CLASSIFICATION
Only standardised austenitic steel grades shall be used (refer to table 3).

Para. 6.2 Delivery conditions

Manufacturing ranges, as defined in table 6. 1 U and 1 C (for hot rolled plates) and 2 C (for cold
rolled plates) shall not apply.

Para 6.6 Surface quality

For hot-rolled quarto plates (symbol P in Table 10) the requirements of standard NF EN 10163-2
class A3 (weld repair is not authorized at the material manufacturing shop) shall apply unless
otherwise agreed.

Para. 9.2 Approval on tests and checking documents

Unless otherwise specified in the equipment specification or other relevant documents, only a
certificate of compliance with the purchase order (document 2.1 as per NF EN 10204) shall be
required.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 219

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3316

2 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS
All surfaces of the plates shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final stage in accordance
with MC 7100.: their surface shall be smooth and free from wrinkles, buckles, blow-holes, tears,
blisters, grit and inclusions of foreign materials.
The Supplier may remove surface defects by grinding, on condition that:
- the thickness of the ground area remains within the minimum tolerances specified on the drawing
or in the purchase order,
- the resulting cavity blends in gradually with the surrounding area.
After cutting to as-delivered dimensions, the edges shall be visually examined. There shall be no
cleavage or lamination (consisting, for example, of a fine layer of incrusted material drawn out
during rolling).
If cleavage or lamination is detected during fabrication of the plate, the plate shall be rejected.

2.2 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION

Class S1 plates for group 1 members of at least 30 mm thickness shall be subjected to ultrasonic
examination.
This examination is performed in accordance with MC 2400 which stipulates the conditions of
application of Standard NF EN 10307.
The scanning plan and criteria are those of levels S2 and E3 of Standard NF EN 10307.
Ultrasonic examination is not required for class S1 plates for group 2 members or for class S2 plates.

2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHECK

The dimensions of plate, sheet or strip shall conform to the drawing or purchase order.

2.4 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used in accordance with the
provisions of H 1600. Samples delivered with the part shall be identified in accordance with the
requirements of the purchase order.

2.5 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

M 3000 / 220  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3317

M 3317
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

HOT OR COLD WORKED AUSTENITIC

STAINLESS STEEL WELD FITTINGS
FOR USE IN CLASS 1, 2 AND 3 PIPING

0 SCOPE
This specification covers austenitic stainless steel weld fittings of:
- hot or cold worked plate,
- from rolled or forged rounds,
- hot or cold worked seamless or welded rolled pipe,
of thickness less than or equal to 50 mm not covered by a part procurement specification.

The following is an example of the type of fitting concerned:

- curves,
- tees,
- reducers,
- heads,
- branches,
- extruded manifolds, etc.
They contain no welds other than those which might exist on the base products.

1 BASE PRODUCTS
1.1 Plate used for the manufacture of fittings shall be procured in accordance with product
procurement specification M 3307 Class 1, 2 and 3 austenitic stainless steel plate.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 221

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3317

1.2 Rounds used for the manufacture of fittings shall be procured in accordance with the
following specifications:
- M 3301 "Class 1, 2 and 3 forgings and drop forgings",
- M 3306 "Class 1, 2 and 3 rolled or forged bars and semi-finished products".

1.3 Pipe used for the manufacture of fittings shall be procured in accordance with one of the
following specifications, depending on the type and character of the base product (seamles pipe or
welded rolled pipe) and the standard:
- M 3304 "Class 1, 2 and 3 austenitic stainless steel pipe and tubes (not intended for use in heat
exchangers),"
- M 3314 "Cold-rolled austenitic stainless steel pipe welded with the addition of filler metal for
use in class 1, 2 and 3 auxiliary piping",
- M 3320 "Class 1, 2 and 3 rolled austenitic stainless steel pipes and tubes welded without the
addition of filler metal and subsequently drawn (not intended for use in heat exchangers)".
It is permissible for base products used in the manufacture of fittings, and whose forming technique
requires several thermal cycles to be delivered non-heat-treated.

2 MANUFACTURE
2.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME FOR CLASS 1 FITTINGS
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the Supplier shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include in chronological order all the different steps in the fabrication, and
which shall specify all the intermediary and final heat treatment, surface finish and non-destructive
examination operations.

2.2 FORMING
Fittings may be hot or cold worked.

2.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Fittings shall be solution heat treated in the following cases:
- the fitting is hot worked,
- the cumulative cold deformation coefficient is greater than 10% (or 15% with supporting file).

For class 1 fittings, heat treatment conditions and the atmosphere in the furnace are specified in the
manufacturing programme mentioned in paragraph 2.1. Heat cycles to which the treated parts have
been subjected shall be recorded and these records shall be kept at the disposal of the Surveillance
agents.

M 3000 / 222  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3317

3 LOT COMPOSITION
Fittings shall be divided into lots consisting of parts:
- of the same type,
- of the same nominal dimension,
- which have been subjected to the same manufacturing cycle,
- made from the same base material.
- from the same furnace load if heat treatment has been performed after forming,

Moreover, each lot shall be restricted to:

- 100 fittings of dia  114.3 mm and thickness < 12.5 mm,
- 50 fittings of dia. > 114.3 mm or thickness  12.5 mm.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Required values for mechanical properties are identical to those guaranteed and verified for the
sheet and pipe in accordance with the corresponding product procurement specifications.

4.2 SAMPLING
As far as possible, the removal of test specimens shall meet the requirements defined in the base
product procurement specification. However, no test specimen shall be located at a distance from
the edge of the sample or the coupon which is less than the nominal thickness of the fitting.

4.2.1 Fittings with a diameter less than or equal to 114.3 mm

Test samples shall be taken from a coupon cut from the original plate or pipe which has been
subjected to the same manufacturing heat treatment cycle as the fittings of the lot represented.

4.2.2 Fittings with a diameter greater than 114.3 mm

Test samples shall be taken from one fitting of the lot or from a prolongation provided for this
purpose.

4.3 MECHANICAL TESTING OF FITTINGS

One sample shall be taken per lot from a coupon or fitting in accordance with the requirements of
paragraph 4.2, depending on the dimensions of the fittings.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 223

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3317

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

One series of tests shall be performed on each lot. The complete series of tests shall consist of the
following:
- one tension test at room temperature,
- one KV impact test at room temperature for parts having a thickness at least equal to 12 mm. The
impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is certified greater
than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer.
- one measurement of austenitic grain size for class 1 and 2 fittings,
- one verification of yield strength at temperature per heat when stipulated in the equipment
specification or other relevant contractual documents.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TEST AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimen
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.
When the wall thickness of the fitting does not allow use of test specimens with a circular
section and a diameter of 10 mm, the tension test shall be performed on strips cut from the fitting
or on sections of fitting in accordance with the requirements of MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000 for circular test specimens and
test specimens taken from a strip of fitting consisting of a section of fitting.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall conform to the values prescribed in paragraph 4.1. If this is not the case
and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the usefulness of the product),
of if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the specimen or a testing
machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If the results of the
second test are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted: if not, the following subparagraph
shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be removed from a location adjacent to that of the first test specimens. If the
results of the retests are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted: if not, the lot shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

M 3000 / 224  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3317

B - KV IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
The dimensions of the three test specimens taken from adjacent locations are defined in
MC 1000, as are the test conditions.

b) Results
Each of the results shall comply with the required values specified in paragraph 4.1. An
individual value may be less than the required value on condition it is not below 70% of the
latter.
If the conditions defined above are not fulfilled, three additional specimens shall be taken next to
the specimen that produced the unsatisfactory result and tested.
The part and/or lot can be accepted after the test performed on the second series of three
specimens, if the following conditions are simultaneously satisfied:
- the mean value of the six tests shall be greater than or equal to the minimum specified value,
- no more than two individual values out of the six shall be less than the minimum specified
value,
- only one individual value out of the six shall be less than 70% of the specified value.
If this is not the case, the part or lot shall be rejected.

4.4 RETREATMENT
Lots rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results obtained from one or more mechanical tests may
be retreated. Retreatment methods shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be removed in accordance with the requirements of
paragraph 4.2. Tests performed shall be those specified in paragraph 4.3. Only one retreatment shall
be allowed.

5 DETERMINATION OF AUSTENITIC GRAIN SIZE

Grain size number shall be checked for hot worked class 1 and 2 fittings. The check shall be made in
accordance with the requirements of MC 1000.
Grain size number shall be equal to at least 2.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 225

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3317

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE CONDITION

6.1 FITTING SURFACES
All surfaces of the part which are accessible at the final stage shall be subjected to a visual
examination in accordance with MC 7100. External and internal surfaces shall be sound and free
from cracks, tears, blisters, laps, slivers, or any other injurious defect.
Fittings shall be delivered clean, free of any oxidation.
Fittings shall be sound and free from flaws, cracks, surface cracks, tears, overlaps, slivers, or any
other injurious defect.
Surface examination shall be completed by a liquid penetrant examination following the
requirements of MC 4000 of all accessible surfaces for class 1 and 2 fittings from base material
delivered non-heat treated. Liquid penetrant examination shall be extended to cover the welding of
fittings produced from base products delivered in the heat treated condition.
The following criteria shall be applied:
- indications with one dimension greater than 1 mm shall be considered,
- the following shall not be acceptable:
. linear indications,
. rounded indications with one dimensions greater than 3 mm,
. three or more aligned indications less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge),
. five or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2 whose greatest
dimension shall not exceed 20 cm taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the
indication being evaluated.
If defects are detected by the above examination on the parts, the latter shall not be accepted as-is
and the requirements of paragraph 8 of this specification shall be applied.

6.2 FINISHING OF ENDS

Ends of fittings shall be finished in accordance with the indications given in the purchase order.

6.3 PROTECTION
Protection methods for fittings shall be specified in the purchase order.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION FOR CLASS 1, 2 AND 3 FITTINGS

Class 1 and 2 seamless fittings:
- base products which have been subjected to non-destructive ultrasonic examination (in
accordance with TPS M 3301, M 3304, M 3306, M 3307) at the time of acceptance shall not
undergo another examination of this type.

M 3000 / 226  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3317

Class 1, 2 and 3 welded fittings:

- base products which have been subjected to non-destructive ultrasonic examination (in
accordance with TPS M 3314 and M 3320) at the time of acceptance shall not undergo another
examination of this type,
- welds on fittings, whether the latter have been heat treated or not, shall be subjected to
radiographic examination as follows:
. NI and N2 = 100%
. N3 = 10%
. in addition, for fittings produced according to TPS M 3320, radiographic examination shall be
extended to cover fittings of less than 65 mm diameter, regardless of their thickness. The
conditions of this examination and the criteria to be respected shall be those required by the
product procurement specification for the base product.

8 REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE AREAS

The only permitted defects are those which can be removed by grinding while remaining within the
dimensional tolerance range for the part.
The ground area shall be worked gradually into the part. Liquid penetrant examination shall be
performed after grinding or machining to ensure that the defect has completely disappeared
according to the requirements of MC 4000.
Criteria are those define in paragraph 6.1 of this specification.
Repair by peening and welding repair of surface defects shall not be permitted.

9 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

Dimensions and tolerance shall be specified in the equipment specification.

10 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
Fittings shall not be hydrostatically tested unless otherwise stipulated in the equipment
specification. However, the Supplier must guarantee the pressure-retaining characteristics of the
fitting in accordance with the requirements of the equipment specification.

11 MARKING
The Supplier shall meet the requirements for identification and marking specified in chapters
C and D 1300.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 227

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3317

12 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Fittings shall be descaled and passivated.
The ends of fittings shall be bevelled, deburred and protected. Other requirements for packaging and
transportation shall be specified in the purchase order.

13 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the fitting:
a) Base products
- base product acceptance report,
- non-destructive examinations.

b) Fittings
- heat treatment certificate,
- mechanical tests,
- visual examination,
- liquid penetrant examination for class 1 and 2 fittings if required,
- dimensional check,
- hydrostatic test or supporting file.

These reports shall include:

- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency,
- heat number and identification number of the part, if applicable,
- test and retest results, together with required values.

M 3000 / 228  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3319

M 3319
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

ROLLED AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL TUBES

WELDED WITHOUT THE ADDITION OF FILLER METAL
AND ROLLED AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL TUBES
WELDED WITHOUT ADDITION OF FILLER METAL
AND SUBSEQUENTLY DRAWN FOR USE IN
CLASS 1, 2 AND 3 HEAT EXCHANGERS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers rolled austenitic stainless steel tubes welded without the addition of filler
metal and rolled austenitic stainless steel tubes welded without the addition of filler metal and
subsequently drawn for use in class 1, 2 and 3 heat exchangers.
The specification covers the procurement of straight or bent tubes, of thicknesses between
0.8 and 2.0 mm.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
A check shall be performed on one tube per lot. Only the carbon, chromium and nickel contents
shall be checked. If molybdenum and nitrogen are mentioned in the chemical requirements, their
contents shall also be checked. These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.
The requirements relative to cobalt content shall be stipulated in the equipment specification or
other relevant documents, in accordance with sub-chapters B 2400, C 2400 and D 2400.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 229

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3319

M 3000 / 230  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3319

2.3 INTERGRANULAR CORROSION TEST

The intergranular corrosion test shall be stipulated in accordance with the rules set forth in
paragraphs B 2300, C 2300 and D 2300. It shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000, either
on a test ingot made at the time of casting, or on the product, on the basis of one test per lot.
The sensitizing treatment to be performed, as a function of the selected grade, is given in table I.
The heating temperature to be adopted shall be:

Treatment A:
- for grades not containing molybdenum, 650°C ± 10°C,
- for grades containing molybdenum, 675°C ± 10°C.
The corrosion test result shall be considered satisfactory if during sound testing the test specimen
gives a clear metallic sound, and provided no cracks or tears are detected during the bend tests.
Should any doubt remain, the absence of intergranular corrosion shall be confirmed by micrographic
examination.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
See M 170.5.
In cases where the tubes are procured already bent, the conditions for cold bending of the heat
exchanger tube bends, and the bending process qualification are defined in F 4160.
In cases where the equipment specification stipulates a limit for residual tensile stresses, the action
to be taken to limit these stresses both for tubes and bends shall be defined in accordance with
paragraph 3.4.2 below.

3.2 MANUFACTURE OF TUBES

3.2.1 Rolled welded tubes
The tubes shall be rolled, welded without addition of filler metal and set to calibrated size.
The tubes shall be made from a sheet finished by cold rolling.
Welding shall be performed on non-bevelled edges, along a generatrix. The selected process shall be
electric arc welding without addition of filler metal, in a protective atmosphere on the inside and
outside of the tube. The weld shall penetrate the entire wall thickness of the tube.
The weld joint may be cold worked by forging, or any other equivalent process. In this case, the
extra thickness of the weld bead prior to forging shall be between 0.10 and 0.20 mm, depending on
the tube wall thickness. This operation shall be followed by solution heat treatment.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 231

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3319

3.2.2 Rolled welded tubes subsequently drawn

Subsequent to welding without addition of filler metal, and heat treatment, these tubes shall be
subjected to one or more cold deformation operations.
The final cold working operation shall always be followed by solution heat treatment.

3.3 PROTOTYPE SERIES OF TUBES

Prior to procurement, the Supplier shall draw up a characterisation report for the prototype series, in
accordance with the requirements stated in chapter M 170, specifying the non-destructive
examination methods to be calibrated, as indicated in paragraph 9.
In the case of bent tubes, and if the risk of stress corrosion is taken into account, MgCl2 tests or ring
opening tests shall be performed on five bent tubes:
- with the smallest radius, in stress-relieved condition,
- with the smallest radius, in non-stress-relieved condition,
these tests shall be performed at one metre intervals on straight sections, at the transition zone
between straight and bent sections and on bends. Test conditions and criteria are defined
in MC 1360.
In the case where bent tubes are supplied, for small radius tubes, test results shall show that the
bending procedure used allows correct dimensional requirements (ovality, thinning) to be obtained
without the production of cracks or any other surface defects.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

3.4.1 Heat treatment of straight tubes
Straight tubes shall be subjected to final solution heat treatment at a temperature between 1050°C
and 1150°C.
Where tubes are subjected to continuous heat treatment, a temperature higher than 1150°C may be
permissible, depending on the results obtained from the prototype series defined in paragraph 3.3,
provided it does not exceed 1200°C. The temperature range shall be indicated in the manufacturing
programme mentioned in paragraph 3.1. The conditions for solution heat treatments, as well as the
furnace atmosphere shall be specified in this manufacturing programme. The holding temperature
shall be recorded and the feed speed shall be monitored continuously.

3.4.2 Stress-relieving heat treatment of bends

This heat treatment shall be performed on heat exchanger bends, if the tests specified for this
purpose in paragraph 3.3 show that it is necessary.
Parameters for this heat treatment shall be specified in the manufacturing programme mentioned in
paragraph 3.1.

M 3000 / 232  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3319

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.
TABLE II

REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF

AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEELS USED

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES FOR TUBES

TYPE OF AFNOR ROOM TEMPERATURE 350 °C

STEEL GRADE
Min. Rp0,2 Min. Rm Min. A% Min. Rp0,2 Min. Rm
(MPa) (MPa) (5D) (MPa) (MPa)

Z5 CN 18.10 210 520 45 125 394

18-10 steel
not Z2 CN 18.10 175 490 45 105 350
containing Z2 CN 19.10 210 520 45 125 394
Mo controlled nitrogen
content
Z5 CN 17.12 210 520 45 130 445
18-10 steel Z2 CN 17.12 175 490 45 105 355
containing Z2 CN 18.12 220 520 45 130 440
Mo controlled nitrogen
content

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from tubes in the as-delivered condition (after solution heat treatment
and pickling). Samples shall be taken from tube ends.
In the event of retests, the samples required shall be taken from a location close to the area from
which the first samples were taken.
Tension test specimens shall be taken longitudinally.
Flattening and flare tests shall be performed on sections of tubes taken from tube ends.

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
Tests for mechanical properties shall be performed per heat or per lot.
The term "lot" applies to tubes produced from the same heat, having the same diameter, the same
wall thickness, having been subjected to the same manufacturing cycle and forming part of the same
furnace charge or the same set of heat treatments. A lot shall be restricted to a maximum length
of 4000 m.
The number of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens and test temperatures are given
in table III.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 233

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3319

TABLE III

NUMBER OF TEST SPECIMENS

TEST PER TYPE OF TEST
NAME OF TEST
TEMPERATURE
PER HEAT PER LOT

Tension Room – 1
Tension (*) Temperature 1 –
Flattening Room – 5%
Flare Room – 5%

(*) The yield strength and tensile strength shall be determined at the temperature given in table II
when specified in the equipment specification or other relevant contractual documents.

4.3.2 Test procedure

4.3.2.1 Tension testing at room temperature and at high temperature
a) Test specimens
Test specimens used for tension testing shall be taken from strips cut from the tube, which have
the same wall thickness as the tube or from tubular sections, in accordance with MC 1000.

b) Test method
Tension testing of test specimens taken from strips of tube, or tubular sections, shall be
performed in accordance with the requirements of MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II. If this is not the case and the test
specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the usefulness of the product) or if
unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the specimen or a testing machine
malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If the results of the second test
are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, the following paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

M 3000 / 234  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3319

4.3.2.2 Flattening test

a) Test specimens and test method
The size of the specimen and the test procedure are given in MC 1000.

b) Results
There shall be no cracks or tears on the surface of the tube subsequent to the first stage of
flattening.
At the second stage of flattening, the shell shall not show any delamination or any other
significant heterogeneity.
If the results of a flattening test performed on a tube are not satisfactory, this tube shall be
retested, and tests shall be performed on two more tubes. If the results are unsatisfactory, the
flattening test shall be performed on all the tubes in the lot and all the defective tubes shall be
rejected. If more than 10% of the tubes prove to be defective, the entire lot shall be rejected.

4.3.2.3 Flare test

a) Test specimens and test method
The size of the specimen and the test procedure are given in MC 1000.

b) Results
There shall be no cracks or tears on the surface of the pipe subsequent to testing.
Results shall be interpreted in the same way as for a flattening test (see paragraph 4.3.2.2).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Lots rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the
same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
Only one retreatment shall be allowed.

5 RESIDUAL TENSILE STRESS CHECK

This check shall be performed on heat exchanger tubes only where the risk of stress corrosion is
taken into account in the equipment specification.
Test conditions and requirements for MgCl2 or ring opening tests shall be those defined
in MC 1360.

5.1 CHECK ON STRAIGHT TUBES

This check shall be performed on a test sample taken from one tube per lot.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 235

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3319

5.2 CHECK ON BENDS

This check shall be performed only for bends which are not subjected to stress-relieving heat
treatment (see paragraph 3.1: manufacturing programme). For each tube bundle, the check shall be
performed on the bend with the smallest radius, among those which have not been subjected to
stress-relieving heat treatment. The tests shall be performed on two samples, one taken at the middle
and the other at the transition zone between the straight and the bent section.

6 MICROGRAPHIC EXAMINATION OF BENDS

This test shall be performed only if the bends undergo stress-relieving heat treatment.
For each tube bundle, the test shall be performed on two bends, one with the smallest bending radius
and the other with the largest one. The micrographic examination is intended to check the absence
of grain size increase after stress-relieving heat treatment of the bends, and the absence of
intergranular precipitates. For each bend, the examination shall be performed on two samples, one
of which shall be taken in the middle of the bend and the other at the transition zone between the
straight and the bent section.

7 DETERMINATION OF AUSTENITIC GRAIN SIZE

The test shall be performed for tubes of the same dimensions (diameter and wall thickness) on five
tubes per heat taken from different lots, in accordance with the requirements of MC 1000.
Grain size number shall be equal to at least 2.

8 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE CONDITION

8.1 TUBE SURFACES
All surfaces of the part which are accessible at the final stage shall be subjected to a visual
examination in accordance with MC 7100. External and internal surfaces shall be sound and free
from cracks, tears, blisters, laps, slivers, or any other injurious defect.
The extra thickness on the weld seam shall be removed by crosswise polishing by means of an
abrasive tape. There shall be no undercut with sharp edges.
Straight tubes shall be delivered clean, free of oxidation. For bends which have been subjected to
stress-relieving heat treatment, a slight yellowish or blueish discoloration resulting from the
presence of a thin highly adhesive oxide layer shall be permissible. This discoloration shall comply
with that of the reference sample taken from the master samples. If conformity is not achieved, the
oxide layer shall be removed from the bends by a procedure which shall have been defined
beforehand. The cleanliness of the inside of the tube shall be checked by means of a pig.
Final roughness (Ra) of the tube surface shall not exceed 3.2 µm . Surface condition examination
shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of MC 7200.

M 3000 / 236  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3319

8.2 FINISH - PROTECTION

The tubes shall be pickled, if necessary, passivated, rinsed and dried.
The ends of tubes shall be cut square. The ends of tubes shall be blanked by protective plastic plugs,
and both ends of the tubes shall be protected externally by a watertight cover.

9 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
9.1 ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION
This examination may be performed in place of the eddy current examination stipulated in
paragraph 9.2. In this case, all tubes shall be ultrasonically examined in accordance with the
conditions of MC 2500 and the following requirements:
- ultrasonic examination shall be performed on tubes in the solution heat-treated condition,
- surface condition shall comply with the requirements of MC 2100,
- shear waves examination shall be used to detect longitudinal and transverse defects.

RESULTS
Ends which are inadequately examined by the automatic test bench shall be discarded.

9.2 EDDY CURRENT EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed on all tubes: it may, however, be replaced by the ultrasonic
examination defined in paragraph 9.1.
Each straight tube shall be subjected to eddy current examination in accordance with the procedure
specified in MC 6000. The tube to be examined shall be in the solution heat-treatment condition.

RESULTS
Ends which are inadequately examined by the automatic test bench shall be discarded.

9.3 REPERTORY OF DEFECTS

The rejection criterion, for defects considered unacceptable, is defined on the one hand, on the basis
of a defect catalogue prepared by the Manufacturer for the prototype series of tubes, in conformance
with the provisions of M 170.6, and on the other, such that defects of depth greater than those listed
below shall be eliminated:
- tubes of thickness  1.5 mm: 10% of the thickness of the tube with a minimum of 0.08 mm,
- tubes of thickness > 1.5 mm: 0.15 mm.
The results of ultrasonic and Eddy Current examination of the actual defects is compared to the
results obtained during calibration in order to establish, for the various types of defects encountered,
the coefficient K:
Rejection criterion
K
Signal from reference defect

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 237

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3319

Only those tubes with ultrasonic and Eddy Current results less than or equal to the rejection criterion
shall be accepted.

10 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF DEFECTS

As a general rule, those parts of tubes with unacceptable defects detected by either visual or non-
destructive examination shall be discarded.
However, surface repairs may be performed using mild abrasives provided they remain within
dimensional tolerances.
After repairs, the tubes shall be subjected to visual and volumetric examination, as required by
paragraphs 8 and 9.

11 DIMENSIONS - TOLERANCES
11.1 TOLERANCES
Tube dimension tolerances shall be as follows:
- outside diameter: ± 0.5% (including ovality) with a minimum of ± 0.1 mm,
- thickness: ± 10% of nominal thickness; however for tubes of diameter  10 mm, the tolerance
may be between 0% and + 20%.

11.2 DIMENSIONAL CHECKS

The minimum dimensional checks shall be as follows.

11.2.1 Dimensional check of straight tubes

Thickness, diameter and ovality check on five tubes per lot.
The extra thickness of the weld bead shall also be checked on five tubes per lot.

11.2.2 Dimensional check of bent tubes

The requirements of F 4165 a) are replaced by the following:
A dimensional check is carried out on five bent tubes from each lot with at least one bent tube of
each radius. This check shall consist of:
- check of bend radius and bend ovality at three points (45°, 90°, 135°), and length of the straight
legs,
- ultrasonic examination of the extrados thickness.

M 3000 / 238  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3319

12 PNEUMATIC TEST
All tubes shall be subjected to underwater pneumatic air-tightness testing or using the air under air
differential pressure method during finishing operations. These tests shall be performed in
accordance with the requirements of the equipment specification.

13 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used in compliance with B,
C and D 1300.

14 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

15 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the pipe:
- ladle and product analyses,
- intergranular corrosion (where applicable),
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data,
- mechanical tests,
- visual examination,
- non-destructive examination,
- determination of grain size,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and tube reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 239

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3319

M 3000 / 240  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3320

M 3320
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CLASS 1, 2 AND 3 ROLLED AUSTENITIC STAINLESS

STEEL PIPES AND TUBES WELDED WITHOUT
THE ADDITION OF FILLER METAL AND
SUBSEQUENTLY DRAWN (NOT INTENDED
FOR USE IN HEAT EXCHANGERS)

0 SCOPE
This specification covers rolled austenitic stainless steel pipes and tubes welded without the addition
of filler metal and subsequently drawn for auxiliary piping or other uses of thickness between
0.7 mm and 6.0 mm.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
A check shall be performed on one pipe or tube per lot. Only the carbon and chromium and nickel
contents shall be checked. If molybdenum and nitrogen are mentioned in the chemical requirements,
their contents shall also be checked. These analyses shall be performed in accordance with
MC 1000.
The requirements relative to cobalt content shall be stipulated in the equipment specification or
other relevant documents, in accordance with subchapters B 2400, C 2400 and D 2400.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 241

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3320

M 3000 / 242  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3320

2.3 INTERGRANULAR CORROSION TEST

The intergranular corrosion test shall be stipulated in accordance with the rules set forth in
paragraphs B 2300, C 2300 and D 2300. It shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000, either
on a test ingot made at the time of casting, or on the product, on the basis of one test per lot.
The sensitizing treatment to be performed, as a function of the selected grade, is given in table I.
The heating temperature to be adopted shall be:

Treatment A:
- for grades not containing molybdenum, 650°C ± 10°C,
- for grades containing molybdenum, 675°C ± 10°C.
The corrosion test result shall be considered satisfactory if during sound testing the test specimen
gives a clear metallic sound, and provided no cracks or tears are detected during the bend tests.
Should any doubt remain, the absence of intergranular corrosion shall be confirmed by micrographic
examination.

3 MANUFACTURING
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME FOR CLASS 1 AND 2
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations the pipe or tube Manufacturer shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include in chronological order the various manufacturing
stages.

3.2 MANUFACTURE OF PIPES AND TUBES

3.2.1 Welding procedures qualification
The welding procedures adopted shall have been previous qualified in accordance with a special
programme to be drawn up.

3.2.2 Rolled welded pipes and tubes

Pipes and tubes shall be rolled, welded without addition of filler metal and set to calibrated size.
Pipes and tubes shall be made from a sheet finished by cold rolling.
Welding shall be performed on non-bevelled edges, along a generatrix. The selected process shall be
electric arc welding without addition of filler metal, in a protective atmosphere on the inside and
outside of the pipe or tube. The weld shall penetrate the entire wall thickness of the pipe or tube.
The weld joint may be cold worked by forging, or any other equivalent process. In this case, the
extra thickness of the weld bead prior to forging shall be between 0.10 and 0.20 mm, depending on
the pipe or tube wall thickness. This operation shall be followed by solution heat treatment.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 243

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3320

3.2.3 Rolled welded pipe and tubes subsequently drawn

Subsequent to welding and heat treatment, these pipes and tubes shall be subjected to one or more
cold forming operations. The last cold forming operation shall always be followed by solution heat
treatment.

3.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Pipes and tubes shall be subject to solution heat treatment at a temperature between 1050°C and
1150°C prior to delivery.
For class 1 and 2 pipes and tubes, the conditions for solution heat treatment, as well as the furnace
atmosphere, shall be specified in this manufacturing programme referred to in paragraph 3.1. The
holding temperature shall be recorded and the feed speed shall be monitored continuously.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from tubes in the as-delivered condition (after solution heat treatment).
Samples shall be taken from pipe and tube ends.
The tension test specimens shall be taken longitudinally, i.e. with their centreline parallel to the axis
of the pipe or tube.
Flattening and flare tests shall be performed on tubular sections taken from pipe or tube ends.
In the event of retests, samples shall be taken close to the original samples.

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
Tests for mechanical properties shall be performed per heat or per lot.
The term "lot" applies to pipe or tubes produced from the same heat, having the same diameter, the
same wall thickness, having been subjected to the same manufacturing cycle and forming part of the
same furnace charge or the same set of heat treatments.

M 3000 / 244  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3320

TABLE II

REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF

AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEELS USED

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES FOR TUBES

TYPE OF AFNOR ROOM TEMPERATURE 350 °C
STEEL GRADE min. Rp0,2 min. Rm min. A% min. Rp0,2 min. Rm
(MPa) (MPa) (5D) (MPa) (MPa)

Z6 CN 18.10 210 520 45 125 394

18-10 steel Z5 CN 18.10 210 520 45 125 394
not Z2 CN 18.10 175 490 45 105 350
containing
Z2 CN 19.10 210 520 45 125 394
Mo
controlled nitrogen
content
Z6 CN 17.12 210 520 45 130 445
Z5 CN 17.12 210 520 45 130 445
18-10 steel
containing Z2 CN 17.12 175 490 45 105 355
Mo Z2 CN 18.12 220 520 45 130 400
controlled nitrogen
content

A lot shall be restricted as follows:

a) To 50 production lengths not exceeding 1000 m
for pipes and tubes of diameter > 150 mm.

b) To 100 production lengths not exceeding 2000 m

for tubes of diameter  150 mm.
The number of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens and test temperatures are given in
table III.
TABLE III

NUMBER OF SPECIMENS
NAME ORIENTATION TEST PER TYPE OF TEST
OF TEST OF SPECIMEN TEMPERATURE
PER HEAT PER LOT
Tension Longitudinal Room – 1

Tension (a) Longitudinal At high temperature 1 –

Flattening Room – 5%
Flare Room – 5%
(a) This test shall be performed at temperature given in table II when specified in the equipment
specification or other relevant contractual documents.
This test shall be performed systematically for class 1 pipes and tubes.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 245

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3320

4.3.2 Test procedure at high temperature

4.3.2.1 Tension testing at room temperature and at high temperature
a) Test specimens
Tension testing shall be made on strips cut out from the tube or tubular sections in accordance
with MC 1000.

b) Test method
The test shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II. If this is not the case and the test
specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the usefulness of the product) or if
unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the specimen or a testing machine
malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If the results of the second test
are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, the following paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

4.3.2.2 Flattening test

a) Test specimens and test method
The size of the specimen and the test procedure are given in MC 1000.

b) Results
There shall be no cracks or tears on the surface of the pipe or tube subsequent to the first stage of
flattening.
At the second stage of flattening, the shell shall not show any delamination or any other
significant heterogeneity.
If the results of the flattening test performed on a tube are not satisfactory, this tube shall be
retested, and tests shall be performed on two more tubes. If the results are unsatisfactory, the
flattening test shall be performed on all the tubes in the lot and all the defective tubes shall be
rejected. If more than 10% of the tubes prove to be defective, the entire lot shall be rejected.

M 3000 / 246  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3320

4.3.2.3 Flare test

a) Test specimens and test method
The size of the specimen and the test procedure are given in MC 1000.

b) Results
There shall be no cracks or tears on the surface of the pipe or tube subsequent to testing.
Results shall be interpreted in the same way as for a flattening test (see paragraph 4.3.2.2).

4.4 RETREATMENT
A lot rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test samples shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in paragraph 4.2. The
tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than one retreatment shall be allowed.

5 DETERMINATION OF AUSTENITIC GRAIN SIZE

The grain size number of class 1 and 2 pipes and tubes shall be checked on one pipe or tube per lot
in accordance with MC 1000.
Grain size number shall be equal to at least 2.

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE CONDITION

6.1 PIPE AND TUBE SURFACES
All surfaces of the part which are accessible at the final stage shall be subjected to a visual
examination in accordance with MC 7100. External and internal surfaces shall be sound and free
from cracks, tears, blisters, laps, slivers, or any other injurious defect.
The extra thickness of the weld seam of rolled welded pipes and tubes shall be removed by cross-
wise polishing by means of an abrading tape. There shall be no undercut with sharp edges.
Straight pipes and tubes shall be delivered clean, free of oxidation. For auxiliary piping, maximum
final roughness shall be:
- 6.3 µm (N9) for the inner and outer surfaces of cold-finished pipes and tubes,
- 12.5 µm (N10) for the inner and outer surfaces of hot-finished pipes and tubes.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 247

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3320

For miscellaneous piping, the maximum final roughness for both inner and outer surfaces shall be
12.5 µm (N 10).
In all cases, surface roughness shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of MC 7231.

6.2 FINISH - PROTECTION

Pipes and tubes shall be delivered pickled and passivated.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
7.1 ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF CLASS 1 AND 2 PIPES AND TUBES
This examination may be performed in place of the eddy current examination stipulated in
paragraph 7.2. In this case, all straight pipes and tubes shall be ultrasonically examined in
accordance with the conditions of MC 2500 and the following requirements:
- ultrasonic examination shall be performed on pipes and tubes in the solution heat-treated
condition,
- surface condition shall comply with the requirements of MC 2100,
- angle-beam examination shall be used to detect longitudinal and transverse defects in auxiliary
piping,
- angle-beam examination shall be used to detect longitudinal defects in miscellaneous piping.
This check is not required for class 3 pipes and tubes.

RESULTS
Only those defects whose echo amplitude is lower than that of the echo produced by the notch in the
standard tube shall be considered acceptable.
Ends which have not been properly examined using the automatic test unit shall either be discarded
or manually examined over at least 100 mm. The manual examination method shall be at least as
sensitive as the automatic method; the reference pipe used to adjust the sensitivity shall be the same
as that used for the automatic examination.

7.2 EDDY CURRENT EXAMINATION

This check is performed on pipes and tubes of diameter < 65 mm and thickness < 3 mm. It may
however be replaced by ultrasonic examination as defined in paragraph 7.1. Each straight pipe or
tube shall be checked using eddy currents in accordance with the conditions stipulated in MC 6000.
Pipes and tubes shall be checked in the solution heat-treated condition.

RESULTS
Only pipes and tubes which give an eddy current examination response lower than the signal given
by the standard pipe or tube shall be considered acceptable. Inadequately examined ends shall be
discarded.

M 3000 / 248  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3320

7.3 RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION

This check is performed on pipes and tubes with an outside diameter  65 mm or of thickness
 3 mm.
Pipes and tubes shall be checked in the solution heat-treated condition.
Checking procedures shall comply with the requirements of MC 3000.
The degree of radiographic examination and the examination criteria to be applied as a function of
the pipe or tube class, are defined below.

DEGREE
CLASS CRITERIA
OF EXAMINATION

1 100% In accordance with S 7714.3

2 100% In accordance with S 7724.3
3 10% In accordance with S 7734.3

8 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

As a general rule, those parts of pipes or tubes with unacceptable defects detected by either visual or
non-destructive examination shall be discarded.
Surface defects may be removed by grinding provided that the remaining thickness is greater than
the minimum specified thickness and provided that the usual precautions are taken (avoid
overheating of the ground surface, use iron-free corundum grinding wheels).
For auxiliary piping, liquid penetrant examination shall be performed after grinding, in accordance
with the requirement below.

EXAMINATION CRITERIA
Indications of 1 mm or more shall be considered recordable conditions.
In any case, defects producing the following indications shall be located and removed:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more grouped indications less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge),
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.
If major defects appear and they cannot be removed by grinding, the defective part of the pipe or
tube shall be discarded.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 249

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3320

9 DIMENSIONS - TOLERANCES
9.1 Pipe and tube dimension tolerances shall be stipulated in the procurement drawings and
shall comply with the requirements specified below.

- Outside diameter :
± 1% (including ovality) minimum 0.1 mm,
- Thickness :
±10% of the nominal wall thickness or - 0% + 20% of the nominal wall
thickness.
- Extra internal thickness of weld bead:
 0.20 mm + 5% of pipe thickness for pipes delivered in the as-welded
condition
 0.15 mm for pipes with worked bead.

9.2 DIMENSIONAL CHECK

The minimum dimensional checks shall be as follows:
- thickness, diameter and ovality check on five pipes or tubes per lot,
- extra thickness of the weld bead shall also be checked on five pipes or tubes per lot.

10 PNEUMATIC TEST
All tubes shall be subjected to underwater pneumatic air-tightness testing during finishing
operations. These tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the equipment
specification.
For pipes of diameter > 60.3 mm, the pneumatic test may be replaced by an hydrostatic test in
accordance with the requirements of the equipment specification.

11 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used in compliance with B,
C and D 1300.

12 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Procedures shall be specified in the purchase order and shall meet the following requirements:
- pipe and tube ends shall be bevelled and blanked with plastic caps,
- all pipes and tubes shall be sealed in watertight polythene packing.

M 3000 / 250  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3320

13 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the pipe:
- ladle and product analyses,
- intergranular corrosion,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (in the case of retreatment, this includes all recordings
of heat treatments),
- mechanical tests,
- visual examination,
- non-destructive examination,
- determination of grain size, in the case of class 1 and 2 pipes and tubes,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and pipe or tube reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 251

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3320

M 3000 / 252  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3321

M 3321
PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

FORGED TUBES AND ELBOWS MADE FROM GRADE

X2 CrNi 19.10 CONTROLLED NITROGEN CONTENT AND
X2 CrNiMo 18.12 CONTROLLED NITROGEN CONTENT
AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL FOR REACTOR
COOLANT PIPING

0 SCOPE
This specification covers:
- forged or extruded straight tubes with or without integrated nozzles
- forged bent tubes with or without integrated nozzles
- forged die-formed or bent elbows,
made from weldable grade X2 CrNi 19.10 and X2 CrNiMo 18.12 controlled nitrogen content
austenitic stainless steel for use in PWR reactor coolant systems.

Qualification of the bending procedure as stipulated in RCC-M paragraph F 4120 is not required for
parts bent in accordance with the present Parts Procurement Specification.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL AND PHYSICO-CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analysis, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 253

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3321

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis of the elements specified in table I. This analysis shall
be certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited representative.
The product chemical analysis shall be performed on a sample taken from the internal skin of each
part at the extremity which corresponds to the top and bottom ends of the original ingot.
For checking the boron content of the product, the analysis shall be made on a sample taken from
within the thickness of the part, to avoid any possible superficial boron depletion of the part.
These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000. If a more complete material
analysis is performed, it should only show the usual residual content values for elements other than
those specified.
TABLE I

X2 CrNi 19.10 X2 CrNiMo 18.12

DESIGNATION CONTROLLED NITROGEN CONTROLLED NITROGEN
CONTENT CONTENT

ELEMENTS LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSES (%)

Max. carbon 0,035 0,035

Max. manganese 2,00 2,00
Max. phosphorus (1) 0,030 0,030
Max. sulphur (1) 0,015 0,015
Max. silicon 1,00 1,00
Chromium 18,50 to 20,00 17,00 to 18,20
Nickel 9,00 to 10,00 11,50 to 12,50
Molybdenum – 2,25 to 2,75
Max. nitrogen 0,080 0,080
Cobalt max. 0,20 0,20
Preferred max. 0,10 0,10
Max. copper 1,00 1,00
Max. boron 0,0018 0,0018
(1) For the part analysis the max. guaranteed content shall be increased by 0,005%

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the Supplier shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- discard percentages of top, bottom and center core, where appropriate,
- top and bottom end orientation of part(s) in the ingot,

M 3000 / 254  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3321

- number of heats of forgings,

- dimensioned sketch of the part subsequent to each hot-working operation, including the initial
tubular sketch where appropriate with partial and overall forging ratios determined in accordance
with M 380,
- for bending, the procedure used and the associated examinations,

- dimensioned sketches of the profiles at the heat-treatment, ultrasonic testing and in delivery
conditions,
- conditions for any intermediate heat treatment and solution heat treatments,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various steel making, forging, machining, non-destructive examination, heat treatment and test
sampling operations shall be presented in chronological order.

3.2 FORGING - DIE-FORMING - EXTRUSION - BENDING

There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregations.
A record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance
Agents. The same applies for the overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380.
For bending, the requirements of F4131.5 shall apply.
The centreline of the part shall be parallel to the centreline of the ingot.

3.3 MACHINING
The part shall be machined as specified in the procurement drawing prior to final ultrasonic
examination except for any integrated nozzle(s) which shall be examined at an intermediate stage.
Surface condition shall be determined in accordance with MC 7200.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The parts shall be delivered in the solution heat treated condition. This solution heat treatment shall
consist of heating at between 1050°C and 1150°C. Heat treatment conditions shall conform to
M 150 requirements. These temperatures shall be measured by means of at least two thermocouples
placed in blocks in contact with each part. The location of the blocks on the parts shall be indicated
in the manufacturing programme.
Before heat treatment, the profile of the parts shall correspond as closely as possible to the as-
delivered profile.
The parts shall be subjected to solution heat treatment by total immersion in water. The time taken
to transfer the part from the furnace to the quenching tank shall be as short as possible. This time
shall be specified in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 255

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 3321

3.5 STRUCTURE
A micrographic examination, with photographs, shall be performed on one end of the part and on
the end of any integrated nozzle(s).
In the case of a bent part, a metallographic replica of the outer bend surface shall be produced on
the intrados and extrados.
Unless otherwise specified in the equipment specification or other contractual documents,
particularly regarding the feasibility of parts inspection, grain size must be uniform and the grain
size number, as determined in accordance with MC 1000, shall be greater or equal to 1.
If the grain size number, as determined by comparison with standards charts, lies between 0 and 1
included, then it shall be checked again using one of the other grain size measurement methods
mentioned in the standard. In this case, depending on the method used (planimetric or intercept), the
measurements taken at three random fields shall give results that satisfy one of the following
criteria:
- Planimetric method
. mean diameter of grain ≤ 0.250 mm,
or
. number of grains per square millimetre > 12.
- Intercept method
. mean number of grain intercepts ≥ 4.42,
or
. mean intersected segment ≤ 0.226 mm.
The grain size number is deemed compliant if one of the above criteria is met.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

TABLE II

REQUIRED VALUE
TEST
TEST X2 CrNiMo 18.12 X2 CrNi 19.10
TEMPERATURE PROPERTIES
TYPE CONTROLLED CONTROLLED
IN °C
NITROGEN NITROGEN

Tension Room R p0,2 minimum value 210 MPa 210 MPa

Rm minimum value 510 MPa 510 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 35 35

350 Rt p0,2 minimum value 130 MPa 125 MPa

Rm minimum value 407 MPa 368 MPa

KV Room Minimum average value 100 J 100 J

impact

M 3000 / 256  n° 140-2013

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3321

4.2 SAMPLING
Samples shall be taken after solution heat treatment.
One sample shall be taken from each end of the elbow, from each end of the tube and from the end
of any integrated nozzle(s).
The size of the samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests and
retests.
Specimens shall be taken at quarter inner thickness of the tube or elbow. Samples from nozzles
shall be taken at least 20 mm from the outer wall.
All specimens shall be taken tangentially.
For each type of test, the specimens taken at one end shall be at 180° to those taken at the other end.
Specimen size and the position of these specimens in the samples shall be specified in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
The number of tests to be performed and test temperatures are given in table III.

TABLE III

TEST Test Ingot Ingot bottom Each

TYPE temperature top end end nozzle end

Tension room 1 1 1

Tension 350°C 1 1 1

KV impact (a) room 3 3 3

(a) The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is certified greater
than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall have dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 257

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3321

- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,

- percentage elongation after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II. If this is not the case and the test
specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the usefulness of the product) or if
unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the specimen or a testing machine
malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen.
If the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective.
If the results of the retests are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected
(see § 4.4)

B - KV IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens
The shape and dimensions of test specimens shall be as specified in MC 1000.

b) Testing
Tests shall be performed at room temperature in accordance with MC 1000.

c) Results
The average value for series of three tests specimens shall correspond to the value specified in
Table II. One individual value may be lower than the specified value on condition that it is not
less than 70% of the specified value.
If the above conditions are not fulfilled, three additional test specimens shall be taken from the
same sample, close to the original specimens which gave insufficient results.
The part may only be accepted if the following conditions are simultaneously met after testing
the second series of three specimens:
- the average value of the six tests is equal to or exceeds the specified minimum value,
- no more than two out of the six individual values may be less than the specified minimum
value,
- only one individual value out the six is less than 70% of the value specified.
Otherwise the part shall be rejected.

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.

M 3000 / 258  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3321

In such cases, test samples shall be taken in the same condition as specified in paragraph 4.2.
The tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than one retreatment shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

5.1 VISUAL EXAMINATION
All surfaces of the part which are accessible at the final stage shall be subjected to a visual
examination in accordance with MC 7100.
The internal surface of tubes and elbows with an inside diameter greater than 600 mm and of any
nozzles shall be subjected to the same examination.
The surface shall be sound and free of defects such as scaling, longitudinal scratches, strings,
blisters, pitting, etc., affecting the usefulness of the parts.

5.2 LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION

The external surface and edges shall be subjected to liquid penetrant examination in accordance
with MC 4000. The internal surface of tubes and elbows with an inside diameter greater than
600 mm and of any nozzles shall be subjected to the same examination. This examination shall be
performed in the as-delivered condition.
The following recordable conditions and examination criteria shall be applied:
- any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
- all defects which produce the following indications shall be searched, removed or repaired:
. linear indications,
. non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
. 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
. five or more grouped indications found inside a 100 cm2 rectangular area, whose longest
dimension does not exceed 20 cm, located in the worst case position with respect to the
indications.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the part cannot be accepted as-is and the instructions of paragraph 7 of this specification shall
apply.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance
with MC 2300.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 259

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3321

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed on the part in the as treated condition and machined to the
delivery dimensions or at as advanced a stage as possible for portions which cannot be examined in
finished form.

6.2 PROCEDURES
The examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe characteristics are usually as follows:
- for straight beam examination: probe frequency 2 to 2,5 MHz (or 1 MHz if the structure of the
part so requires).
- for angle beam examination: probe frequency 2 to 2,5 MHz (or 1 MHz if the structure of the part
so requires), refraction angle between 35° and 45°.

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-4.
The grid-to-grid section of tubes and elbows course is part type 3a.
Nozzles shall be examined after drilling. The part type of nozzles is 3a. Furthermore, in addition to
the requirements of standard NF EN 10228-4, nozzles shall be subjected to an angle beam
examination in both axial directions.

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-4.

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are defined according to part thickness as
shown table III. The applicable criteria are those relating to the thickness of the zone examined in
the as-delivered profile.

M 3000 / 260  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3321

TABLE III

Acceptance criteria
Recording Extensive or
threshold Isolated
grouped
Zone examined discontinuity
Deq (1) discontinuities
(mm) Deq (1)
Deq (1)
(mm)
(mm)
Grid-to-grid section: Tube and elbow 3 ≤5 ≤3
e < 75 mm 3 ≤5 ≤3
Nozzle
e  75 mm 5 ≤8 ≤5

1) Deq : Equivalent diameter of flat bottom hole

ANGLE BEAM EXAMINATION

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are:
- for the DAC method, those of Table IV
TABLE IV

Acceptance criteria
Forging thickness Recording
Isolated Extensive or grouped
(mm) threshold %
discontinuities % discontinuities %
e ≤ 250 50 100 50
250 < e ≤ 400 100 200 100

- for the DGS method, those of Table V

TABLE V

Acceptance criteria
Recording Extensive or
threshold Isolated
Zone examined grouped
Deq (1) discontinuity
discontinuities
(mm) Deq (1)
Deq (1)
(mm)
(mm)
Grid-to-grid section: Tube and elbow 3 ≤5 ≤3
e < 75 mm 3 ≤5 ≤3
Nozzle e  75 mm 5 ≤8 ≤5
250 < e ≤ 400 >8 ≤ 11 ≤8
1) Deq : Equivalent diameter of flat bottom hole

The applicable criteria are those relating to the thickness of the zone examined in the as-
delivered profile.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 261

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3321

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted tolerances of the part shall be
tolerated.
Overheating of ground areas during grinding should be avoided.
Liquid penetrant examination shall be performed on the repaired zone after grinding, to ensure that
the defect has completely disappeared and that the repaired zone blends smoothly with the
surrounding area.
Weld repairs shall not be authorized.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
8.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Outside diameter, out of roundness and pipe wall thickness of parts and all other dimensions
tolerances shall be specified in the reference drawings.

8.2 DIMENSIONAL CHECK

The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded and the values recorded shall be within the tolerances
specified on the drawing.

9 MARKING
Any marking shall not apply to more than one part. The top and bottom ends of the original ingot
shall be marked.
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analysis,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (in the case of retreatment this includes recordings of
all heat treatments),

M 3000 / 262  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3321

- micrographic examination,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 263

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3321

M 3000 / 264  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3401

M 3401

PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CHROMIUM NICKEL (CONTAINING NO MOLYBDENUM)

AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC STAINLESS STEEL
CASTINGS FOR PWR REACTOR
COOLANT PUMP CASINGS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable austenitic-ferritic stainless steel (without molybdenum) pump
casings constituting the pressure-retaining boundary of the PWR reactor coolant pump.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL AND PHYSICO-CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I below.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. In addition, he shall supply a product analysis and these analyses shall be performed
in compliance with MC 1000. This analysis may be performed on metal discard from mechanical
test specimens.
If a more complete material analysis is performed, it should only show the usual residual contents
for elements other than those specified in table I.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 265

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3401

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE Z3 CN 20-09 M

ELEMENT LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSES (%)

Max. Carbon 0.040

Max. Silicon 1.50
Max. Manganese 1.50
Max. Sulphur 0.015
Max. Phosphorus 0.030
Chromium 19.00 - 21.00
Nickel 8.00 - 11.00
Max. Copper 1.00
Max Cobalt 0.20
Preferred Cobalt 0.10
Note : Residual nitrogen and molybdenum contents shall be determined for
information purposes.

2.3 CALCULATION OF FERRITE CONTENT

The ferrite content, evaluated using Schaeffler's diagram given in MC 1000, excluding nitrogen,
should be between 12 and 25%*. This evaluation is performed on the ladle analysis. A second
evaluation is performed from the part analysis. It shall be given for information purposes.
For information purposes, the Supplier shall measure the ferrite content according to MC 1340
requirements, in the ingot zone from which mechanical test specimens are taken.
* Preferred value: 15 to 20%.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the foundry shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- identification of volute casting method,
- part procurement drawing with positions of test samples on the part,
- heat treatment conditions,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling, non-destructive examination and repair welding operations
shall be presented in chronological order.

M 3000 / 266  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3401

PROTOTYPE PART
The manufacturing method shall be tested using a prototype part produced in accordance with the
requirements of M 160.

3.2 CASTING
The choice of casting method shall be left to the foundry. This method shall be identified in the
manufacturing programme.

3.3 MACHINING
Parts shall be machined as indicated on the procurement drawing.
Surface roughness shall be such that the results of non-destructive tests are significantly accurate.
These surface roughness values are given in SECTION III.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Parts shall be delivered in the solution heat treated condition. The solution heat treatment
temperature shall be between 1050°C and 1150°C.
If, for reasons concerning dimensional tolerances, the Manufacturer feels it necessary to subject the
part to stabilizing heat treatment (see F 8410), this operation shall be performed at 400°C for at least
48 hours, followed by slow cooling.
Temperature shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the part. The position of
thermocouples on the part shall be specified in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).
The part shall be subjected to solution heat treatment by total immersion in water.
If, after heat treatment, the part does not exhibit the required characteristics, it may be retreated
(see paragraph 4.4).
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

3.5 HYDROSTATIC TEST

Each casing shall be subjected to hydrostatic testing in accordance with B 5000.
Hydrostatic testing shall be preceded by initial pressurization in the same conditions as the
hydrostatic test itself and should give the same strain readings.
The surface stresses on the first casing produced by each foundry shall be measured during testing
by strain gauges, the number and location of which shall be specified in the manufacturing
programme.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 267

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3401

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II below.

TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE VALUE
Tensile Room Rm minimum value 480 MPa
Rp0.2 minimum value 210 MPa
A (5d) minimum value 35%

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 120 MPa

Rm minimum value 320 MPa

KV impact (1) Room Minimum average value 100 J

(1) The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is certified
greater than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall consist of prolongations attached to the part or of test ingots either separate or
attached. The smallest dimension of the section of these ingots shall be representative of the average
thickness of the part.
The axis of test specimens shall be at least 40 mm from the skin for prolongations, and 60 mm for
test ingots.
Samples shall be taken after solution heat treatment.
The size of samples shall be such that they can provide enough specimens for all tests and retests.

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
The following tests shall be performed on a prolongation from each pump volute:
- 1 tensile test at room temperature,
- 1 tensile test at 350°C,
- 1 KV impact test at room temperature. The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation
value at ambient temperature is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the material
manufacturer.

M 3000 / 268  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3401

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method

The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:

- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,

- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,

- percentage elongation after fracture.

c) Results

Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.

If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and method

KV test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of these
specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.

Three specimens shall be broken for each series of tests.

Tests shall be performed at room temperature in accordance with MC 1000.

b) Results

The mean value for a series of three specimens shall meet the specified value in table II. An
individual value may be less than the required value on condition it is not below 70% of
the latter.

If the conditions defined above are not fulfilled, three additional specimens shall be taken next to
the specimen that produced the unsatisfactory result and tested.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 269

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3401

The part and/or lot can be accepted after the test performed on the second series of three
specimens, if the following conditions are simultaneously satisfied:

- the mean value of the six tests shall be greater than or equal to the minimum specified value,

- no more than two individual values out of the six shall be less than the minimum specified
value,

- only one individual value out of the six shall be less than 70% of the specified value.
If this is not the case, the part or lot shall be rejected.

4.4 RETREATMENT
A part rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test coupons shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in paragraph 4.2. The
tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than one retreatment shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Sand shall be carefully removed from the parts, which shall then be trimmed to eliminate risers and
vent scrap, parting lines and runners.
If a blowpipe or carbon arc process is used, mechanical machining or grinding of the surfaces
affected shall be performed to a depth of at least 3 mm.
Surface roughness shall be determined in accordance with MC 7200.
Surface roughness shall not be greater than 6.3 µm .

5.1 VISUAL EXAMINATION

Parts shall be subjected to a general visual examination in accordance with MC 7100. During
machining, all surfaces shall be examined to check the soundness of the metal.
A last examination shall be performed at the final stage prior to delivery.

RESULTS
Parts shall be sound and free from defects such as scale, cracks, porosities, sand inclusions, or other
injurious defects.

M 3000 / 270  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3401

5.2 LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION

All surfaces shall be subjected to liquid penetrant examination in accordance with MC 4000.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any defect with one dimension of 2 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
As regards all crotch regions, lug and nozzle roots and weld bevels, all defects which produce the
following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 5 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

The rest of the surfaces shall be checked in their entirety using the following acceptance criteria:
- no linear indication greater than 5.0 mm shall be acceptable,
- no non-linear indication with a diameter greater than 5.0 mm shall be acceptable,
- 4 or more indications aligned less than 2.0 mm apart, edge to edge, shall be unacceptable,
- 10 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 40 cm2, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 15 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated, shall be considered unacceptable.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Where possible, the entire part shall be subjected to radiographic examination.
The examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 3200.
The degrees of examination shall be specified in the manufacturing programme.

EXAMINATION CRITERIA
Defects such as cracks, chaplets and chill remnants shall be unacceptable. The applicable acceptance
criteria specified by standard NF EN 12681, Annex A, are as follows:
- for the 75 mm wide circular zone around the final outline of the suction and discharge nozzle
weld edges: severity level 1,
- for the other parts of the casing: severity level 2.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 271

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3401

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

7.1 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITHOUT REPAIR WELDING
Defects detected by surface examination or visual or liquid penetrant examination may be
eliminated by grinding or arc gouging followed by grinding to a depth of at least 3 mm, provided the
thickness of the ground areas remains within the tolerance specified on the drawing and that the
resulting cavities are not injurious to the areas around them.
Where this is not the case, the requirements of paragraph 7.2 shall apply. Overheating of the ground
surface must be avoided during grinding.
Cavities must blend smoothly into surrounding areas.
The cavity shall be subjected to liquid penetrant examination in accordance with MC 4000. The
procedure and examination criteria shall be those given in paragraph 5.2 of this specification.

7.2 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITH REPAIR WELDING

7.2.1 Removal of defects
Areas whose defects do not meet the acceptability criteria defined in paragraph 5.1, 5.2 and 6 shall
be excavated. The excavation shall be checked by liquid penetrant examination in accordance
with MC 4000.

EXAMINATION CRITERIA
Indications greater than 2 mm shall be considered recordable conditions.
In any case, defects producing the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 5 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge),
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications
being evaluated.
If there is doubt as to whether a radiographically detected defect has been eliminated by excavation,
in particular where one defect may lie on top of another, radiographic re-examination of the
excavated zone is recommended (the stipulations of MC 3200 are not then required).
Excavations shall be continued until elimination of defects which fail to meet the criteria required
for the finished part.

M 3000 / 272  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3401

7.2.2 Repair welding

Repairs shall be made by welding. The grade deposited metal shall be of the same type as that of the
base metal. The ferrite content evaluated on the DELONG diagram given in S 2000 shall be
between 5 and 15%.
The foundry shall give precise details of the repair procedures in a file drawn up in accordance with
the requirements of SECTION IV. These procedures shall be attached to the manufacturing
programme.

7.2.3 Heat treatment after repair welding

Solution heat treatment is not required after repair by welding.

7.3 EXAMINATION OF WELD REPAIRS

The following non-destructive examination shall be made on completion of weld repairs.

A - EXAMINATION OF ALL AREAS REPAIRED

Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 5.2 of this
specification.

B - RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION OF MAJOR REPAIRS

(in accordance with MC 3200)
The terms "major" and "minor" excavation cavities are defined in annexes 1 and 2.
Cavities are classified according to depth or surface area.
Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 6 of this
specification.
Charts showing the exact location and dimensions of major repairs shall be prepared.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
Dimensions shall be checked against the procurement drawings with regard to both the profile of the
part as-delivered by the Foundry and the profile of the finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded and they must be within the tolerances specified on the
drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
Samples delivered with the part shall be marked in accordance with the requirements of the
purchase order.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 273

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3401

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (in the case of retreatment, this includes recordings of
all heat treatments),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- charts of major repairs,
- for all repairs by welding (major and minor):
. production weld data sheets,
. welding procedure data sheets and filler materials acceptance reports quoted in production
weld data sheets,
. welding procedure qualification reports used (these documents may be subjected to generic
distribution),

- dimensional checks,
- electrode acceptance certificate,
- "Service des Mines" test report.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Manufacturer's and forging mill's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 3000 / 274  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3401

ANNEX 1

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 275

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3401

ANNEX 2

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
SURFACES TO BE MACHINED

M 3000 / 276  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3401

ANNEXE 2

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
UNMACHINED SURFACE

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 277

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3401

M 3000 / 278  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3402

M 3402
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CLASS 1, 2 AND 3 PRESSURE-RETAINING

AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC STAINLESS
STEEL CASTINGS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers weldable chromium-nickel austenitic-ferritic stainless steel castings with
or without molybdenum, not covered by an individual procurement specification.
Use of the grade containing molybdenum is only authorized for parts to be used in a maximum
operating temperature below 250°C.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I below.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. If the part is obtained from several separate ladles, the steelmaker shall supply the
chemical analysis of each ladle.
A product analysis is compulsory for all class 1 materials. One part per lot shall be analyzed.
The analysis may be performed on metal discard from mechanical test specimens, and shall comply
with the requirements of MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 279

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3402

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE Z3 CND 19-10 M Z3 CN 20-09 M

ELEMENT LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSES (%)

Max. Carbon 0.040 0.040

Max. Silicon 1.50 1.50
Max. Manganese 1.50 1.50
Max. Sulphur 0.015 0.015
Max. Phosphorus 0.030 0.030
Chromium 18.00 - 21.00 19.00 - 21.00
Nickel 9.00 - 12.00 8.00 - 11.00
Molybdenum 2.25 - 2.75 (1)
Max. Copper 1.00 1.00
Cobalt (2) (2)

Nota : Residual nitrogen content shall be determined for information purposes.

(1) Residual molybdenum content shall be determined for information purposes.
(2) Cobalt content shall be as required in the equipment specification or other relevant
contractual documents in compliance with subchapters B 2400, C 2400 and D 2400.

2.3 CALCULATION OF FERRITE CONTENT

The ferrite content, evaluated using Schaeffler's diagram given in MC 1000, excluding nitrogen,
should be between 12 and 25% (preferred value: 15 to 20%). This evaluation is performed on the
ladle analysis. A second evaluation is performed from the part analysis for class 1 components. It
shall be given for information purposes. In addition, on class 1 products, for information purposes,
the Supplier shall measure the ferrite content, according to MC 1340 requirements, in the ingot zone
from which mechanical test specimens are taken.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the foundry shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- identification of casting method,
- part procurement drawing with positions of test samples on the part, if they are attached or
adjacent,
- nature of test specimens when they are cast separately,

M 3000 / 280  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3402

- heat treatment conditions,

- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling, non-destructive testing and repair welding operations shall be
presented in chronological order.

PROTOTYPE PART
The manufacturing method shall be tested using a prototype part produced in accordance with the
requirements of M 160.

3.2 CASTING
The choice of casting method shall be left to the foundry. The method shall be identified in the
manufacturing programme.

3.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Parts shall be delivered in the heat treated condition: final heat treatment for mechanical properties
shall consist of a solution heat treatment at between 1050°C and 1150°C.
If, after heat treatment, the part does not exhibit the required characteristics, it may be retreated (see
paragraph 4.4).
For class 1 parts, records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II below.
TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED VALUE

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE Z3 CND 19-10 M Z3 CN 20-09 M
Tensile Room Rp0.2 minimum value 210 MPa 210 MPa
Rm minimum value 480 MPa 480 MPa
A % (5d) 35 35

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 140 MPa 120 MPa

Rm minimum value 390 MPa 320 MPa

KV impact (1) Room Minimum average value 80 J* 80 J*

* Value raised to 100 J for class 1 equipment

(1) The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is certified greater than
or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 281

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3402

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall consist of attachments integral with the part or from ingots cast integrally with
the part or separately. In all cases, ingots shall be attached to the part prior to heat treatment for
mechanical properties.
The samples shall be of sufficient size to ensure that the necessary number of test specimens may be
taken for the tests prescribed and for any retests required. The smallest dimension of the test ingot or
attachment cross section shall be representative of the standard section of the pressure vessel
(excluding flanges and knuckles), but shall not be less than 28 mm, and not more than 240 mm. The
samples shall be taken so that the axes of the attachments or ingots are located at least one quarter of
their thickness from the skins, at a minimum distance of 14 mm.
In the case of parts whose standard thickness is less than 28 mm, the smallest dimension of the test
sample cross section may be equal to this thickness provided it remains greater than 14 mm, the test
specimen axis being at mid-thickness.
The size of the attachment ingots and the orientation and location of the test specimens within the
ingots shall be specified in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING
Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

The following series of tests shall be performed on each lot:
- 1 tensile test at room temperature,
- 1 KV impact test at room temperature. The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation
value at ambient temperature is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the material
manufacturer.
A tensile test at high temperature shall be performed when this is stipulated by the equipment
specification or other relevant contractual documents. This test shall be carried out systematically on
class 1 parts.

DEFINITION OF A LOT
A lot is defined as comprising parts from the same heat of steel and the same furnace charge. A lot
is restricted to 5000 kg. In addition, for pump casings, a lot is comprised of parts whose maximum
thicknesses are either less than 35 mm, or between 35 and 65 mm, or greater than 65 mm.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

M 3000 / 282  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3402

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - KV IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and method
KV test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of these
specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000. Three specimens shall be broken
for each series of tests.

b) Results
The mean value for a series of three specimens shall meet the specified value in table II. An
individual value may be less than the required value on condition it is not below 70% of
the latter.
If the conditions defined above are not fulfilled, three additional specimens shall be taken next to
the specimen that produced the unsatisfactory result and tested.
The part and/or lot can be accepted after the test performed on the second series of three
specimens, if the following conditions are simultaneously satisfied:
- the mean value of the six tests shall be greater than or equal to the minimum specified value,
- no more than two individual values out of the six shall be less than the minimum
specified value,
- only one individual value out of the six shall be less than 70% of the specified value.
If this is not the case, the part or lot shall be rejected.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 283

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3402

4.4 RETREATMENT
A part and/or lot rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may
be retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test coupons shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in paragraph 4.2. The
tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3. No more than one retreatment
shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be carefully examined during all phases of the fabrication to verify the metal
soundness.
All surfaces of the part which are accessible at the final stage shall be subjected to a visual
examination in accordance with MC 7100. The final inspection for surface defects shall be
performed after completion of all heat treatments
Parts shall be thoroughly deburred and free of adhering sand. Risers, cores, vent scrap, parting lines
and runners shall be removed. If a blowpipe or air carbon arc gouging process is used, mechanical
machining or grinding of the surfaces affected shall be performed on a depth not less than 3 mm.
Parts shall be sound and free from defects such as scale, cracks, porosities, sand inclusions, or other
injurious defects.
Liquid penetrant examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 4000.

5.1 DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The scope of the liquid penetrant examination is defined in the following table.

AT THE FOUNDRY AT THE MANUFACTURER'S

CLASS 1 On all accessible machined and/or

On all accessible surfaces
PARTS ground surfaces
For valves: For valves:
- all accessible machined surfaces - all accessible machined and/or
- after careful grinding, all crotch ground surfaces
CLASS 2 regions of external surfaces
PARTS (1)
For other parts: For other parts:
- edges to be welded - zones to be welded
- zones 3 and 5 defined in annex 1 - zones 3 and 5 defined in annex 1
CLASS 3
Not required On O-ring seal zones
PARTS

(1) For castings subject to pressure in Main Secondary Circuit components, as defined in paragraph C 4440
of the RCC-M, the scope required is the same as for Class 1 parts.

M 3000 / 284  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3402

5.2 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any defect with one dimension of 2 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
In any case, all defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or
repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 5 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications for class 1 parts and 10 or more for class 2 and class 3 parts within
a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greater dimension shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most
unfavourable location relative to the indications being evaluated.
Specific case of the weld edges: the criteria to be used are those given in B 4000 for class 1 and in
C 4000 for class 2.
When checking O-ring bearing surfaces, indications of 0.3 mm shall be considered recordable
defects. In any case, all defects producing the following indications shall be located and repaired:
- indications with one dimension greater than 1 mm,
- any aligned or grouped indication as defined above.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Unless otherwise indicated, all examinations shall be performed after the part has been heat-treated.
A radiographic examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 3200.

6.1 ZONES EXAMINED

The zones of be rediographed shall be selected after the final part drawing has been drafted and the
prototype parts have been examined.
The Manufacturer shall define the following for the Supplier:
- weld zones,
- zones considered critical on account of the applied sollicitation loads,
- deep machining zones,
- weld edges,
The zones to be examined are:

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 285

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3402

6.1.1 Class 1 parts

a) Valves with a nominal diameter greater than 50 mm: on the whole part.
b) Valves with a nominal diameter less than or equal to 50 mm: on welds zones and body ends.
c) Where possible, all other parts shall be 100% radiographically examined; the minimum zones to
be radiographed are specified in MC 3200.

6.1.2 Class 2 parts

a) For valves with a nominal diameter greater than 100 mm, the following zones shall be examined:
weld zones, ends, zones considered crucial on account of the loadings they must support and the
casting method used, and zones which shall be subjected to deep machining.
b) For valves with a nominal diameter of 100 mm or less, weld zones and the ends shall be
examined.

For valves with a nominal diameter less than or equal to 50 mm radiography may be replaced by
liquid penetrant examination.
c) For other parts, areas 3 and 5 shown on the diagrams in annex 1 to this specification shall be
examined together with the weld edges.

6.1.3 Class 3 parts

a) For valves with a nominal diameter greater than 80 mm, weld zones and ends shall be examined.
b) Radiographic examination shall not be required for valves whose nominal diameter does not
exceed 80 mm.
c) For other parts, only the weld edges shall be examined.

6.1.4 Class 1 and 2 parts not subjected to pressure

On zones to be weld, on zones considered critical regarding the applied loads or regarding the
casting method used, and on zones which have to be deep machined,

6.2 DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

6.2.1 Valves
Body ends shall be measured from the edge of the nozzle to be welded to the piping and the crotch
region of the valve body, before the part is machined. There shall not be more than 5 mm extra
length on a valve body end or nozzle. When the final profile is shown on the radiographic film, no
requirements shall be applicable to the extra length, and the length of the zone examined hereafter
shall be measured from the final profile.
The length of the weld zone on the body end shall be measured from the final profile of the end; it
shall be equal to at least 3 times the nominal thickness of the pipe to which it is connected. There is
no requirement for this length to exceed 75 mm.

M 3000 / 286  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3402

When a blind flange is fitted to the valve body end, the weld zone shall be located between the weld
edge on the body end or nozzle and the face of the blind flange on the weld edge side of the end.
However, the length of the zone shall not exceed 3 times the nominal thickness of the pipe to which
the end is connected, measured from the final profile, or a distance of 75 mm.

6.2.2 Other parts

The length of the zone examined on the weld edges shall be measured from the final profile and
shall be equal to at least 3 times the thickness of the wall. There is no requirement for this length to
exceed 75 mm.

6.3 CRITERIA
For all severity levels, the following defects shall be unacceptable: cracks, chaplets, chill remnants.
The applicable acceptance criteria specified by standard NF EN 12681, Annex A, are as follows:

6.3.1 Class 1 parts

a) Valves
- Weld body ends: severity level 1.
- Nozzle or body end and remainder of part: severity level 2.

b) Other parts
- Weld body ends: severity level 1.
- Other portions: severity level 2.

6.3.2 Class 2 parts

a) Valves
- Weld body ends: severity level 1.
- Nozzles or body ends: severity level 2.
- Other portions: severity level 3.

b) Other parts
- Weld edges: severity level 1.
- Other portions: severity level 3.

6.3.3 Class 3 parts

a) Valves
- Weld body ends: severity level 1.
- Nozzle or body ends: severity level 2.
- Other portions: severity level 3.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 287

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3402

b) Other parts
- Weld edges: severity level 1.

6.3.4 Special case of castings, with wall thickness lower or equal to 25.4 mm,
made by the lost wax process:
Table III, gives the applicable criteria and reference radiographs as defined in ASTM E 192
standard, as a function of severity levels called in paragraphs 6.3.1, 6.3.2 and 6.3.3.

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

7.1 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITHOUT REPAIR WELDING
Defects detected by surface examination or magnetic particle examination may be eliminated by
grinding or by arc gouging followed by grinding to a depth of at least 3 mm, provided the thickness
of the ground areas remains within the tolerances specified on the drawing and that the resulting
cavities are not injurious to the areas around them. Where this is not the case, the requirements of
paragraph 7.2 shall apply.
Overheating of the ground surface must be avoided during grinding.
Cavities must blend smoothly into surrounding areas.
Cavities shall be subjected to liquid penetrant examination in accordance with the procedures and
criteria described in paragraph 5.2 of this specification.

7.2 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITH REPAIR WELDING

7.2.1 Removal of defects
Areas whose defects do not meet the acceptability criteria defined in paragraphs 5 and 6 shall be
excavated. Excavation cavities shall be subjected to liquid penetrant examination in accordance with
the procedures and criteria described in paragraph 5 of this specification. Where doubt exists as to
whether a radiographically detected defect has been completely removed by excavation, particularly
if there are two defects, one below the other, in the same cross-section, a new radiographic
examination may be made of the excavated area (in which case the requirements of MC 3200 shall
not be applicable).
Excavation shall continue until surface defects which are unacceptable for finished parts have been
eliminated, in accordance with the criteria given in paragraph 5.2.

7.2.2 Repair welding

Repairs shall be made by welding in accordance with the requirements of SECTION IV of this code.
The grade of deposited metal shall be the same as that of the base metal.

7.2.3 Heat treatment after repair welding

A solution heat treatment shall not be required subsequent to repair.

M 3000 / 288  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3402

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 289

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3402

7.3 EXAMINATION OF WELD REPAIRS

The following non-destructive examinations shall be made on completion of weld repairs:

A - LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION OF ALL ZONES REPAIRED

Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 5 of this
specification.

B - RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION OF MAJOR REPAIRS

The terms "major" and "minor" excavation cavities are defined in annexes 2 and 3 of this
specification.
Cavities are classified according to depth or surface area.
Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraph 6 of
this specification. For repairs in zones where volumetric examination is not specified in paragraph
6.1 above, major repairs shall be radiographically examined as prescribed in MC 3240, unless the
zone is not readily accessible for radiographic examination. Severity level 3 shall be applicable.
Interpretation of radiographs shall meet the requirements of MC 3250.
Charts showing the exact location and dimensions of major repairs shall be prepared.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensional characteristics of parts after final machining shall comply with the procurement
drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B,
C and D 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses, where applicable,
- evaluation or copy of recorded heat treatment data for class 1 and 2 products, a heat treatment
certificate for class 3 products,

M 3000 / 290  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3402

- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- charts of major repairs,

- for all repairs by welding (major and minor):

. production weld data sheets,
. welding procedure data sheets and filler materials acceptance reports quoted in production
weld data sheets,
. in addition, for class 1 parts only, welding procedure qualification reports used (these
documents may be subjected to generic distribution),
- dimensional checks.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 291

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3402

ANNEX 1

PUMP BODY

M 3000 / 292  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3402

ANNEX 2

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 293

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3402

ANNEX 3

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
SURFACE TO BE MACHINED

M 3000 / 294  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3402

ANNEX 3

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
UNMACHINED SURFACE

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 295

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3402

M 3000 / 296  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3403

M 3403
PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CAST ELBOWS AND INCLINED

NOZZLES MADE FROM CHROMIUM-NICKEL
AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC STAINLESS STEEL
WITHOUT MOLYBDENUM FOR PWR REACTOR
COOLANT SYSTEM PIPING

0 SCOPE
This specification covers cast inclined elbows and nozzles made from weldable austenitic-ferritic
stainless steel without molybdenum for PWR reactor coolant system piping.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL AND PHYSICO-CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I below.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. In addition, he shall also supply a product analysis. This analysis may be performed
on metal discard from mechanical test specimens, and shall comply with the requirements of
MC 1000. If a more complete material analysis is performed, it should only show the usual residual
contents for elements other than those specified in table I.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 297

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3403

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE Z3 CN 20-09 M

ELEMENT LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSES (%)
Max. Carbon 0.040
Max. Silicon 1.50
Max. Manganese 1.50
Max. Sulphur 0.015
Max. Phosphorus 0.030
Chromium 19.00 - 21.00
Nickel 8.00 - 11.00
Max. Copper 1.00
Cobalt Max. 0.20
Cobalt preferred Max. 0.10
Note : Residual nitrogen and molybdenum content shall be determined for
information purposes.

2.3 CALCULATION OF FERRITE CONTENT

The ferrite content, evaluated using Schaeffler's diagram given in MC 1000, excluding nitrogen,
should be between 12 and 20% (preferred value: 15 to 18%). This evaluation is performed on the
ladle analysis. Another analysis shall be performed on the part. It shall be given for information
purposes. In addition, for information purposes, the Supplier shall measure the ferrite content
according to MC 1340, in ingot zone from which mechanical test specimens are taken.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the foundry shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- identification of casting method of elbows and inclined nozzles,
- elbow and nozzle procurement drawing with positions of test samples on the part, if they are
attached or adjacent,
- heat treatment conditions,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling, non-destructive testing and repair welding operations shall be
presented in chronological order.

M 3000 / 298  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3403

PROTOTYPE PART
The manufacturing method shall be tested using a prototype part produced in accordance with the
requirements of M 160.

3.2 CASTING
The choice of casting method shall be left to the foundry. This method shall be identified in the
manufacturing programme.

3.3 MACHINING
Elbows and nozzles shall be machined to the requirements of the procurement drawings.
Surface roughnesses are specified in SECTION III.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITIONS - HEAT TREATMENT

Elbows and nozzles shall be delivered in the solution heat treated condition. The solution heat
treatment temperature shall be between 1050°C and 1150°C.
Temperatures shall be measured by means of thermocouples placed on the charge.
Maximum permissible deviation from specified holding temperatures for the entire part shall be
± 20°C. The position of the thermocouples on the part shall be specified in the manufacturing
programme (see paragraph 3.1).
Parts shall be subjected to solution heat treatment by total immersion in water. If, after heat
treatment, the part does not exhibit the required characteristics, it may be retreated (see
paragraph 4.4).
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II below.
TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED VALUE

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE Z3 CN 20-09 M
Tensile Room Rp0.2 minimum value 210 MPa
Rm minimum value 480 MPa
A % (5d) 35

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 120 MPa

Rm minimum value 320 MPa
KV impact (1) Room Minimum average value 80 J*
* Value raised to 100 J for class 1 equipment
(1) The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is certified
greater than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 299

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3403

4.2 SAMPLING
The size of samples shall be such that they can provide enough specimens for all tests and retests.
These samples shall be:
1) either prolongations located at both ends of each elbow which are not cropped until the part has
undergone solution heat treatment. The size and location of test specimens in these
prolongations shall be given in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).
Test specimens shall be taken from the inner quarter of the thickness so that, for each type of
test, the test specimens taken from one end are diametrically opposed to those taken from the
other end.

2) or adjacent cast blocks (one block per part), welded to the parts before they are subjected to
solution heat treatment. The smallest dimension of the block cross-section shall be
representative of the maximum thickness of the part.
The test-pertinent areas of these blocks shall be located at least 20 mm from the skins.
The dimensions of the blocks and the position of test specimens in the blocks shall be specified
in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
A - SPECIMENS TAKEN FROM PROLONGATIONS
The number and content of tests are given in table III.
TABLE III

POSITION ORIENTATION NUMBER OF SPECIMENS

TEST
OF SPECIMEN OF SAMPLE PER TYPE OF TEST

Tensile test at room One quarter Tangential 1 at each end 180° apart
temperature thickness from
inner surface
Tensile test at One quarter Tangential 1 at each end 180° apart
350 °C thickness from
inner surface
KV impact at One quarter Tangential 3 samples taken from
room thickness from with radial notch adjacent locations at each
temperature(1) inner surface end 180° apart
(1) The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is certified
greater than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer.

B - SPECIMENS TAKEN FROM SEPARATE BLOCKS

The number and content of tests are given in table IV.

M 3000 / 300  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3403

TABLE IV

POSITION OF NUMBER OF SPECIMENS

NAME OF TEST
SAMPLE PER TYPE OF TEST
Tension test at room See paragraph 4.2 1
temperature

Tensile test at 350°C See paragraph 4.2 1

KV impact at room See paragraph 4.2 3 test specimens taken

temperature(1) end-to-end
(1) The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient temperature
is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall
be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II. If this is not the case and the test
specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the usefulness of the product) or if
unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the specimen or a testing machine
malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If the results of the second test
are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following paragraphs shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - KV IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens
The shape and dimensions of these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in
MC 1000.

b) Test method
Tests shall be performed at room temperature in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 301

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3403

c) Results
The mean value for a series of three specimens shall meet the specified value in table II. An
individual value may be less than the required value on condition it is not below 70% of the
latter.
If the conditions defined above are not fulfilled, three additional specimens shall be taken next to
the specimen that produced the unsatisfactory result and tested.
The part and/or lot can be accepted after the test performed on the second series of three
specimens, if the following conditions are simultaneously satisfied:
- the mean value of the six tests shall be greater than or equal to the minimum specified value,
- no more than two individual values out of the six shall be less than the minimum specified
value,
- only one individual value out of the six shall be less than 70% of the specified value.
If this is not the case, the part or lot shall be rejected.

4.4 RETREATMENT
A part rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test coupons shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in paragraph 4.2. The
tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than one retreatment shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Sand shall be carefully removed from the parts, which shall then be trimmed to eliminate risers and
vent scrap, parting lines and runners.
A minimum of 5 mm material thickness shall be removed from the internal and external surfaces of
the parts.
If a blowpipe or carbon arc process is used, mechanical machining or grinding of the surfaces
affected shall be performed to a depth of at least 3 mm.
Surface roughness shall comply with the requirements of MC 7200.
Surface roughness (Ra) shall not exceed 6.3 µm .

5.1 VISUAL EXAMINATION

Parts shall be subjected to a general visual examination in accordance with MC 7100. During
machining, all surfaces shall be examined to check the soundness of the metal.
A last examination shall be performed at the final stage prior to delivery.

M 3000 / 302  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3403

RESULTS
Parts shall be sound and free from defects such as scale, cracks, porosities, sand inclusions, or other
injurious defects.

5.2 LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION

All internal and external surfaces shall be subjected to liquid penetrant examination in their entirety,
in accordance with MC 4000.
Liquid penetrant examination of edges is not required at this stage of production.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any defect with one dimension of 2 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
In any case, all defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or
repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 5 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications
being evaluated.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Where possible, all surfaces shall be 100% radiographically examined. Examination conditions shall
meet the requirements of M 3200.
Examination times shall be specified in the manufacturing programme.
Elbow and nozzle ends shall be examined using a radiation source identical to that used in the
examination of the nozzle crotch area welds and in such a way that the remaining parts of the nozzle
shall be examined over a length of 75 mm from the final profile of the part.
The nozzle weld edge shall be examined over a length of 75 mm from the non-bevelled end.

CRITERIA
Defects such as cracks, chaplets and chill remnants shall be unacceptable.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 303

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3403

The applicable acceptance criteria specified by standard NF EN 12681, Annex A, are as follows:
For elbow and nozzle ends over 75 mm from the final profile of the part and for the saddle weld
edges over a length of 75 mm from the non-bevelled end: severity level 1.
For other parts: severity level 2.

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

7.1 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITHOUT REPAIR WELDING
Defects detected by surface examination or liquid penetrant examination may be eliminated by
grinding or by carbon arc gouging followed by grinding to a depth of at least 3 mm, provided the
thickness of the ground areas remains within the tolerances specified on the drawing and that the
resulting cavities are not injurious to the areas around them. Where this is not the case, the
requirements of paragraph 7.2 shall apply.
Overheating of the ground surface must be avoided during grinding.
Cavities must blend smoothly into surrounding areas.
Cavities shall be subjected to liquid penetrant examination in accordance with the procedures and
criteria described in paragraph 5.2 of this specification.

7.2 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITH REPAIR WELDING

7.2.1 Removal of defects
Areas whose defects do not meet the acceptability criteria defined in paragraphs 5.1, 5.2 and 6 shall
be excavated. Excavation cavities shall be subjected to liquid penetrant examination in accordance
with the procedures and criteria described in paragraph 5.2 of this specification. Where doubt exists
as to whether a radiographically detected defect has been completely removed by excavation,
particularly if there are two defects, one below the other, in the same cross section, a new
radiographic examination may be made of the excavated area.
Excavation shall continue until surface defects which are unacceptable for finished parts have been
eliminated.

7.2.2 Repair welding

Repairs shall be made by welding in accordance with the requirements of SECTION IV of this
Code. The grade of deposited metal shall be the same as that of the base metal.

7.2.3 Heat treatment after repair welding

A solution heat treatment shall not be required subsequent to repair.

M 3000 / 304  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3403

7.3 EXAMINATION OF WELD REPAIRS

The following non-destructive examinations shall be made on completion of weld repairs:

A - LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION OF ALL ZONES REPAIRED

Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 5.2 of this
specification.

B - RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION OF MAJOR REPAIRS

The terms "major" and "minor" excavation cavities are defined in annexes 1 and 2 of this
specification.
Cavities are classified according to depth or surface area.
- Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraph 6
of this specification.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
Dimensional characteristics shall comply with the procurement drawing.

9 MARKING
Radiographic film identification shall be marked in full on the part.
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- calculation of ferrite content,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (in the case of retreatment, this includes recordings for
all heat treatments),
- mechanical tests,

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 305

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3403

- non-destructive examinations,
- charts of major repairs,
- for all repairs by welding (major and minor):
. production weld data sheets,
. welding procedure data sheets and filler materials acceptance reports quoted in production
weld data sheets,
. welding procedure qualification reports used (these documents may be subjected to generic
distribution),
- dimensional checks.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 3000 / 306  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3403

ANNEX 1

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 307

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3403

ANNEX 2

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
SURFACE TO BE MACHINED

M 3000 / 308  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3403

ANNEX 2 (cont.)

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
UNMACHINED SURFACE

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 309

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3403

M 3000 / 310  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3405

M 3405
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

NON-PRESSURE-RETAINING CATEGORY A, B AND C

CHROMIUM NICKEL AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC
STAINLESS STEEL CAST INTERNAL PUMP PARTS
(CONTAINING NO MOLYBDENUM) FOR
PRESSURIZED WATER REACTORS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers non-pressure-retaining category A, B and C weldable chromium nickel
austenitic-ferritic stainless steel cast internal pump parts containing no molybdenum.
These parts are divided into three categories: A, B and C, in accordance with the requirements of
chapters C and D 2000. Categories A and B are themselves divided into sub-categories A1, A2,
B1, B2.
Reactor coolant pump internals are in category A2.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL AND PHYSICO-CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I below.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. This may be performed on a small ingot or on a pellet adjoining the part or
assembly or on metal discard form mechanical test specimens. These analyses shall be performed
in compliance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 311

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3405

For category A parts , the product per lot analysis shall be verified.
If a more complete material analysis is performed, it should only show the usual residual contents
for elements other than those specified in table I.
TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE Z3 CN 20-09 M

ELEMENT LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSES (%)

Max. Carbon 0.040

Max. Silicon 1.50
Max. Manganese 1.50
Max. Sulphur 0.015
Max. Phosphorus 0.030
Chromium 19.00 - 21.00
Nickel 8.00 - 11.00
Max. Copper 1.00
Cobalt (1)
(1) Cobalt content shall be as required in the equipment specification or other
relevant contractual documents in compliance with subchapters B 2400 -
C 2400 and D 2400.
Note : Residual nitrogen and molybdenum contents shall be determined for
information purposes.

2.3 CALCULATION OF FERRITE CONTENT

The ferrite content, evaluated using Schaeffler's diagram given in MC 1000, excluding nitrogen,
should be between 12 and 25% (preferred value: 15 to 20%). This evaluation is performed on the
ladle analysis. A second evaluation shall be made using the product analysis. It shall be given for
information purposes.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the foundry shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- identification of casting method,
- part procurement drawing with positions of test samples on the part, if these are attached or
adjacent to the part,
- heat treatment conditions,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

M 3000 / 312  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3405

The various heat treatment, sampling, non-destructive testing and repair welding operations shall
be presented in chronological order.

PROTOTYPE PART
The manufacturing method shall be tested using a prototype part produced in accordance with the
requirements of M 160.
This prototype part shall only be required for class A and B impellers as defined in annex 1, and
for coolant pump diffusers.
The radiographic examination, as stipulated by M 160, should be executed as per MC 3200 with
the criteria defined in annex 1.

3.2 CASTING
The choice of casting method shall be left to the foundry. This method shall be identified in the
manufacturing programme.

3.3 MACHINING
Parts shall be machined as indicated on the procurement drawing.
Surface roughness shall be such that the results of non-destructive tests are significantly accurate.
These surface roughness values are given in SECTION III.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Parts shall be delivered in the solution heat treated condition. The solution heat treatment
temperature shall be between 1050°C and 1150°C.

Maximum permissible deviation from nominal holding temperatures for the entire charge shall
be ± 20°C.
- The part shall be subjected to solution heat treatment by total immersion in water,
- if, after heat treatment, the part does not exhibit the required characteristics, it may be retreated
(see paragraph 4.4).
Records with details on actual temperatures and holding times shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II below.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 313

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3405

TABLE II

NAME TEST
PROPERTIES REQUIRED VALUE
OF TEST TEMPERATURE

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 210 MPa

Rm minimum value 480 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 35
350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 120 MPa
KV impact Room Minimum average value 80 J

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall consist of test ingots attached to the part or ingots cast separately and attached
to the part (1) prior to heat treatment, except if the sample is subjected to simulated stress-
relieving heat treatment.
The samples shall be of sufficient size to ensure that the necessary number of test specimens may
be taken for the tests prescribed and for any retests required.
The smallest dimension of the cross-section of these test ingots must be representative of the
minimum thickness of the wall of the part (excluding hubs) but not less than 28 mm. For parts
whose maximum wall thickness is less than 28 mm, the smallest dimension of the section of the
sample may be less than 28 mm, but must be greater than 14 mm.
Test specimen axes shall be located along the sample axes.
Samples shall be taken subsequent to heat treatment for mechanical properties.
(1) For this type of part, it is not necessary to weld test ingots to the part prior to heat treatment. However, all
precautions should be taken to ensure that the test ingots which represent the lot of parts undergo heat treatment
with said parts.

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
Mechanical strength shall be determined either by part or by lot. A lot is defined as comprising
parts from the same heat of steel which were subjected to solution heat treatment from the same
furnace charge.
A lot shall be restricted to:
- 10 items or 3000 kg for parts weighing more than 50 kg,
- 30 items or 1500 kg for parts weighing 50 kg or less.
The number and content of tests are given in table III.

M 3000 / 314  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3405

TABLE III

TEST NUMBER OF SPECIMENS

NAME OF TEST
TEMPERATURE PER TYPE OF TEST

Tension Room 1

1
Tension 350°C (only for the reactor
coolant pump)

3 specimens taken
KV impact (1) Room
end to end
(1) The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient
temperature is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the material
manufacturer.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall
be recorded:
- ultimate tensile strength Rm, in MPa,
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen.
If the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, it shall be rejected.

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens
The shape and dimensions of these specimens shall be as specified in MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 315

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3405

b) Test method
Tests shall be performed at room temperature in accordance with MC 1000.

c) Results
The mean value for a series of three specimens shall meet the specified value in table II. An
individual value may be less than the required value on condition it is not below 70% of
the latter.
If the conditions defined above are not fulfilled, three additional specimens shall be taken next
to the specimen that produced the unsatisfactory result and tested.
The part and/or lot can be accepted after the test performed on the second series of three
specimens, if the following conditions are simultaneously satisfied:
- the mean value of the six tests shall be greater than or equal to the minimum specified value,
- no more than two individual values out of the six shall be less than the minimum specified
value,
- only one individual value out of the six shall be less than 70% of the specified value.
If this is not the case, the part or lot shall be rejected.

4.4 RETREATMENT
A part rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test coupons shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in paragraph 4.2. The
tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than one retreatment shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

The final liquid penetrant examination of surface defects shall be performed after all heat
treatment has been completed.

EXAMINATION CONDITIONS
Sand shall be carefully removed from the parts, which shall then be trimmed to eliminate risers
and vent scrap, parting lines and runners. If a blowpipe or carbon arc process is used, mechanical
machining or grinding of the surfaces affected shall be performed to a depth of at least 3 mm.
Parts shall be subjected to a general visual examination in accordance with MC 7100.
During machining, all surfaces shall be examined to ensure that the metal is sound.

M 3000 / 316  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3405

Parts shall be sound and free from defects such as scale, cracks, porosities, sand inclusions, or
other injurious defects.
Liquid penetrant examination shall be performed, in accordance with MC 4000.

5.1 DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

Defined in annex 1 according to the different part categories and zones shown in annexes 2 and 3.

5.2 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS

Any defect with one dimension of 2 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.

5.3 EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Defined in annex 1 according to the different part categories.

6 RADIOGRAPHIC VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION

Unless otherwise indicated, examination shall be performed subsequent to heat treatment.
Examination procedures shall comply with the requirements of MC 3200.

6.1 ZONES EXAMINED

Defined in annex 1 according to the different part categories and zones shown in annexes 2 and 3.

6.2 DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The length of the zone examined on weld edges shall be measured from the final profil and shall
be equal to at least 3 times the thickness of the wall. There is no requirement for this length to
exceed 75 mm.

6.3 CRITERIA
Whatever the severity level, defects such as cracks, chaplets and chill remnants shall be
unacceptable.
The applicable acceptance criteria specified by standard NF EN 12681, Annex A, are defined in
annex 1 according to the different part categories.
Special case of castings, with wall thickness lower or equal to 25.4 mm, made by the lost
wax process:
Table IV, gives the applicable criteria and reference radiographs as defined in ASTM E 192
standard, as a function of severity levels mentioned above.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 317

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3405

M 3000 / 318  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3405

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

7.1 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITHOUT REPAIR WELDING
Defects detected by surface aspect examination or liquid penetrant examination may be eliminated
by grinding or by carbon arc gouging followed by grinding to a depth of at least 3 mm, provided
the thickness of the ground areas remains within the tolerances specified on the drawing and that
the resulting cavities are not injurious to the areas around them.
Where this is not the case, the requirements of paragraph 7.2 shall apply.
Overheating of the ground surface must be avoided during grinding.
Cavities must blend smoothly into surrounding areas.
Cavities shall be subjected to liquid penetrant examination in accordance with the procedures and
criteria described in paragraph 5 of this specification.

7.2 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITH REPAIR WELDING

7.2.1 Removal of defects
Areas whose defects do not meet the acceptability criteria defined in paragraphs 5 and 6 shall be
excavated. Excavation cavities shall be subjected to liquid penetrant examination.
The procedures and criteria to be applied are those described in paragraph 5 of this specification.
Where doubt exists as to whether a radiographically detected defect has been completely removed
by excavation, particularly if there are two defects, one below the other, in the same cross-section,
a new radiographic examination may be made of the excavated area. (The stipulations of MC 3200
are not then required).
Excavation shall continue until surface defects which are unacceptable for finished parts, have
been eliminated as defined in paragraph 5.
If an excavation is located in an area for which liquid penetrant or radiographic examination is not
stipulated in paragraphs 5 and 6, the acceptability criteria to be applied to cavity inspection shall
be those of paragraph 5 concerning category C impellers.

7.2.2 Repair welding

Repairs shall be made by welding in accordance with the requirements of SECTION IV. The grade
of deposited metal shall be the same as that of the base metal.

7.2.3 Heat treatment after repair welding

A solution heat treatment shall not be required subsequent to repair.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 319

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3405

7.3 EXAMINATION OF WELD REPAIRS

The following non-destructive examinations shall be made on completion of weld repairs:

A - LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION OF ALL ZONES REPAIRED

Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 5 of this
specification.
In the case of repairs made in an area for which the liquid penetrant or radiographic examination is
not stipulated in paragraphs 5 and 6, the acceptability criteria to be applied shall be those of
paragraph 5 concerning category C impellers.

B - RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION OF MAJOR REPAIRS

The terms "major" and "minor" excavation cavities are defined in annexes 4 and 5 of
this specification.
Cavities are classified according to depth or surface area.
Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraph 6
of this specification. If repairs are performed in an area for which volumetric examination is not
specified in paragraph 6 above, the major repairs shall be radiographically examined except if the
area is not easily accessible for radiography, as defined in MC 3240. The criteria to be adopted are
those of severity level 3. Radiographs shall be examined in accordance with MC 3250.
A chart giving the exact size and location of major repairs shall be drawn up.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions shall be checked against the procurement drawings with regard to both the profile
of the part as-delivered by the foundry and the profile of the finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. These values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall identify the marking methods used, in accordance with B, C and D 1300.
Samples delivered with the part shall be marked in accordance with the requirements of the
purchase order.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

M 3000 / 320  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3405

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (in the case of retreatment, this includes recordings
of all heat treatments),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- charts of major repairs,
- for all repairs by welding (major and minor):
. production weld data sheets,
. welding procedure data sheets and filler materials acceptance reports quoted in production
weld data sheets,
- dimensional checks,
- electrode acceptance certificate.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 321

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3405

ANNEX 1

PUMP INTERNALS CLASSIFICATION: EXAMINATION TO BE PERFORMED

M 3000 / 322  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3405

ANNEX 1

PUMP INTERNALS CLASSIFICATION: EXAMINATION TO BE PERFORMED

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 323

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3405

ANNEX 2

IMPELLERS

TEST AREA 1 = Outlet vane TEST AREA 4 = Vane-to-shroud radius

TEST AREA 2 = Inlet vane TEST AREA 5 = Hub

TEST AREA 3 = Leaktight seal bearing surface TEST AREA 6 = Channels

M 3000 / 324  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3405

ANNEX 3

DIFFUSERS

TEST AREA 1 = return channels TEST AREA 4 = Outlet vane

TEST AREA 2 = Seal contact surface TEST AREA 5 = Diffuser channels

TEST AREA 3 = Inlet vane) TEST AREA 6 = Channels

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 325

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3405

ANNEX 4

M 3000 / 326  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3405

ANNEX 5

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
SURFACE TO BE MACHINED

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 327

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3405

ANNEX 5 (cont.)

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
UNMACHINED SURFACE

M 3000 / 328  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3406

M 3406
PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CENTRIFUGALLY CAST CHROMIUM NICKEL

AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC STAINLESS STEEL PIPES
(CONTAINING NO MOLYBDENUM) FOR PWR
REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM PIPING

0 SCOPE
This specification covers centrifugally cast weldable chromium nickel austenitic-ferritic stainless
steel pipes (containing no molybdenum) for PWR reactor coolant system piping.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL AND PHYSICO-CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I below.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
The product analysis shall be performed on a sample taken from a test ring at a depth representative
of the internal skin of the finished pipe. Only the carbon, chromium, nickel, molybdenum, nitrogen
and cobalt contents shall be determined. These analyses shall be performed in compliance with
MC 1000. If a more complete material analysis is performed, it should only show the usual residual
contents for elements other than those specified in table I.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 329

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3406

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE Z3 CN 20-09 M

ELEMENT LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSES (%)

Max. Carbon ladle 0.038 - product 0.040

Max. Manganese 1.50
Max. Phosphorus 0.030
Max. Sulphur 0.015
Max. Silicon 1.50
Chromium 19.00 to 21.00
Nickel 8.00 to 11.00
Cobalt Max. 0.20
Cobalt preferred max. 0.10
Max. Copper 1.00
Note : Residual nitrogen and molybdenum content shall be determined for
information purposes.

2.3 CALCULATION OF FERRITE CONTENT

The ferrite content, evaluated using Schaeffler's diagram given in MC 1000, excluding nitrogen,
should be between 12 and 20% (preferred value: 15 to 18%). This evaluation is performed on the
ladle analysis. A second evaluation shall be made using the part analysis. It shall be given for
information purposes. For information purposes, the Supplier shall measure the ferrite content
according to MC 1340 at both ends of the tube, in the zones from which mechanical test specimens
are taken.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the Supplier shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- identification of centrifugal casting method,
- pipe procurement drawing with positions of test samples on the parts,
- heat treatment conditions,
- drawing with dimensions of test specimens on rings.

The various heat treatment, sampling, non-destructive testing shall be presented in chronological
order.

M 3000 / 330  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3406

PROTOTYPE PART
The manufacturing method shall be tested using a prototype part produced in accordance with the
requirements of M 160 and the following special requirements:
- in addition to the radiographic examination stipulated in M 160, the entire part shall be subjected
to ultrasonic examination,
- for radiographic examination, severity level 1 is adopted for the entire part.

3.2 CENTRIFUGAL CASTING

The pipes shall be made by horizontal centrifugal casting in metal moulds.

3.3 MACHINING
Pipes shall be machined as indicated on the dimensioned procurement table.

Surface roughness values are given in SECTION III.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Pipes shall be delivered in the solution heat treated condition. The solution heat treatment
temperature shall be between 1050°C and 1150°C. Temperatures are measured using thermocouples
in contact with the pipes. Their locations along the pipe shall be given in the manufacturing
programme. If, after heat treatment, the part does not exhibit the required characteristics, it may be
retreated (see paragraph 4.4).
The pipes shall be subjected to solution heat treatment by total immersion in water.

3.5 STRUCTURE
Examinations shall be performed on the test ring.

3.5.1 Macrography
A macrographic examination of a transverse section of the entire thickness of the part shall be made.
The length of the section photographed shall be equal to at least twice the thickness of the
finished pipe.

3.5.2 Micrography
A micrographic examination (X 100) shall be performed at a depth representative of a quarter
thickness from the internal skin of the finished pipe. This shall be to illustrate the ferrite distribution
and the effectiveness of the heat treatment.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 331

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3406

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.
TABLE II

NAME TEST
PROPERTIES REQUIRED VALUE
OF TEST TEMPERATURE

Tensile Room Rp0.2 minimum value 210 MPa

Rm minimum value 480 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 35 %

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 125 MPa

Rm minimum value 320 MPa

KV impact (1) Room Minimum average value 80 J*

* Value raised to 100 J for class 1 equipment
(1) The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is certified
greater than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer

4.2 SAMPLING
Samples shall consist of rings taken from each end of the pipe after it has been subjected to solution
heat treatment.
The position of each sample shall be marked in relation to the side from which the steel is poured.
Samples shall be of sufficient size to provide enough test specimens for all tests and retests.
In the solution heat treated condition, the axis of the test specimens should be located at a quarter
thickness from the inner shell, with the useful section located at a distance from the end which
should be at least once the thickness of the tube. All the specimens should be taken in the tangential
direction.
For each rings, test specimens taken from one end shall be placed at 180° to those taken from the
other end.
The size of samples and orientation of specimens in these samples shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
The number of tests, orientation of test specimens and test temperatures are given in table III.

M 3000 / 332  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3406

TABLE III

NUMBER OF
TEST POSITION ORIENTATION
TEST SPECIMENS PER
TEMPERATURE OF SPECIMEN OF SAMPLE
TYPE OF TEST
Room One quarter Tangential 1 at each end 180°
thickness from apart
inner surface
Tensile
350°C One quarter Tangential 1 at each end 180°
thickness from apart
inner surface
One quarter 3 samples taken from
KV impact (1) Room thickness from Tangential adjacent locations at
inner surface each end 180° apart
(1) The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is certified greater
than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II. If this is not the case and the test
specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the usefulness of the product) or if
unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the specimen or a testing machine
malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen.
If the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 333

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3406

B - KV IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen
The shape and size of the samples shall be as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
Tests shall be performed at room temperature in accordance with MC 1000.

c) Results
The mean value for a series of three specimens shall meet the specified value in table II. An
individual value may be less than the required value on condition it is not below 70% of the
latter.
If the conditions defined above are not fulfilled, three additional specimens shall be taken next to
the specimen that produced the unsatisfactory result and tested.
The part and/or lot can be accepted after the test performed on the second series of three
specimens, if the following conditions are simultaneously satisfied:
- the mean value of the six tests shall be greater than or equal to the minimum specified value,
- no more than two individual values out of the six shall be less than the minimum specified
value,
- only one individual value out of the six shall be less than 70% of the specified value.
If this is not the case, the part or lot shall be rejected.

4.4 RETREATMENT
A part rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test coupons shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in paragraph 4.2. The
tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than one retreatment shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Parts shall be sound and free from tears, porosities, sand inclusions, or other injurious defects.
Surface roughness shall be determined in accordance with MC 7200. Surface roughness (Ra) shall
not be greater than 6.3 m.

M 3000 / 334  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3406

5.1 VISUAL EXAMINATION

All surfaces of the part at the final stage shall be subjected to a visual examination in accordance
with MC 7100.
A last examination shall be performed at the final stage prior to delivery.
Surface defects with dimensions less than 2 mm may be considered as negligible provided this is
confirmed by liquid penetrant examination set forth in paragraph 5.2.
Other defects disclosed by liquid penetrant examination shall be removed by grinding in accordance
with requirements of paragraph 7.

5.2 LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION

Liquid penetrant examination shall be performed on the complete pipes in the as-delivered final
condition, in accordance with MC 4000.
Any defect with one dimension greater than 2 mm shall be considered a recordable condition.
The following are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 5 mm,
- three or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge),
- five or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm, whose greater dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.
Defect which produce unacceptable indications shall be removed by grinding in accordance with
requirements of paragraph 7.

5.3 REJECTION
Should unacceptable defects remain after grinding to the minimum thickness tolerance, the tube
shall be discarded.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
6.1 RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION
Pipes shall be subjected to 100% radiographic examination. The examination procedures shall be as
stipulated in MC 3200.
The degrees of examination shall be specified in the manufacturing programme.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 335

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3406

EXAMINATION CRITERIA
The acceptance criteria of defects are given by standard NF EN 12681, Annex A.
Defects such as shrinkage cavities and cracks shall be unacceptable. Acceptance of type A, B and C
defects shall be evaluated by referring to the severity level 1 standard radiographs for the
entire pipe.

6.2 ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION

An ultrasonic examination, whose results cannot on their own lead to rejection of the part, is
performed in order to:
- check the permeability of each pipe to ultrasonic waves,
- record the presence of indications.

6.2.1 General examination conditions

a) Degree of examination
Paragraph MC 2141 shall be applied. However, surface roughness shall not exceed 6.3 µm ,
expressed in Ra, in accordance with L.C.A. * requirements.

b) Examination method
The pipes shall be examined with longitudinal waves, using the reflection method.

* L.C.A.: Laboratoire Central d'Armement.

6.2.2 Equipment
a) Ultrasonic pulse generator and display unit
Paragraph MC 2131 shall apply.

b) Probes
Two types of probe shall be used:
- conventional, heavily damped longitudinal wave straight-beam probe, type PANAMETRICS
V 604 (2.25 MHz, dia 25 mm) or equivalent.
- longitudinal wave angle-beam twin probes, type Vinçotte V 45 LSE 85 (1 MHz, two 20 mm2
piezoelectric elements, refraction angle: 45°), or equivalent.

c) Coupling medium
The coupling medium used shall be oil or water and glycerol. The parts shall be cleaned
immediately after the examination in order to remove all traces of the coupling medium.

M 3000 / 336  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3406

d) Reference blocks
The reference blocks shall be made from pipe discard of the same material and at the same
treatment stage as the pipe to be examined.
The size of the reference block and reflectors used for calibration prior to examination along a
pipe generatrix are shown in figure 1.
The reference block used for circular examination of the pipe shall be made in the same way as
the block in figure 1. The reference holes shall be oriented in the longitudinal direction of
the block.

6.2.3 Examination procedure

a) Power and gain adjustment

Paragraph MC 2143 shall apply. Adjustments shall be made using the generatrices of the
cylindrical holes in the reference blocks described in paragraph 6.2.2.
For each type of probe, power and gain adjustment shall be made to obtain the distance
amplitude curve (DAC), as stipulated in MC 2143-1. For large diameter pipes (> 1000 mm), it is
possible that the probe shoes may not be able to be shaped to fit the contact surface to the pipe to
be examined, in which case only the reference block for axial examination shall be used. If the
probe shoes can be adapted to the surface, both reference blocks shall be used.

b) Degree of examination
The surfaces to be examined using the longitudinal wave angle-beam twin probe shall be as
follows:
- 300 mm of each finished pipe nozzle,
- two generatrices of each pipe.

c) Examination procedure
The scanning rate shall not exceed 100 mm/s. Using the longitudinal wave angle-beam twin
probe, the scan shall be axial and circumferential (2 directions for each of these two
probe types).

6.2.4 Evaluation of indications

a) Evaluation of background noise
Background noise (multiple echoes close to each other on the screen) shall be evaluated on the
basis of its maximum amplitude on the distance-amplitude curve shown as a DAC %.

b) Evaluation of individual indications

Any indication whose amplitude is > 50% of DAC and which is distinct from the background
noise (clear, separate echo) shall be considered an individual indication.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 337

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3406

Each individual indication shall be evaluated in terms of:

- its amplitude (% of DAC),
- its position,
- its dimensions, as determined using the method of dropping to - 6 dB in relation to maximum
amplitude.
All indications characterized by longitudinal wave angle-beam probe shall be subjected to
further examination using a conventional straight probe as defined in paragraph 6.2.2.

6.2.5 Examination criteria

Any indication whose amplitude is greater than 50% of the distance-amplitude curve shall be
evaluated and recorded.
Any zone with background noise > 50% of the distance-amplitude curve shall be recorded.

6.2.6 Examination report

The examination report shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements of MC 2160.

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Defects detected by visual examination or liquid penetrant examination may be eliminated by
grinding to within the required thickness tolerances.
Overheating of the ground surface must be avoided during grinding.
Cavities shall blend smoothly into surrounding areas.
The cavity shall be subjected to liquid penetrant examination. The procedure and examination
criteria shall be those given in paragraph 5.2 of this specification.
No centrifugally cast pipe shall be repaired by welding. Such a repair may be envisaged, by request
of the Supplier to the Contractor, only if it is justified by exceptional circumstances and
accompanied by the welding procedure studied on a case-to-case basis and leading to the necessity
of a solution heat treatment.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
8.1 REQUIRED VALUES
External diameter, pipe thickness and pipe length tolerances shall be indicated on the
reference table.

M 3000 / 338  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3406

8.2 DIMENSIONAL CHECK

The main dimensions shall be recorded and must be within tolerances.
Maximum allowable deviation from true straightness shall be 2 mm/m.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the indication and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle ad product analyses,
- calculation of ferrite content,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional checks.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- supplier's particulars,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 339

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3406

FIGURE 1

REFERENCE BLOCK

M 3000 / 340  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3407

M 3407
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

NON-PRESSURE-RETAINING CATEGORY A, B AND C

AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC STAINLESS STEEL CAST
INTERNAL PARTS FOR CLASS 3 PUMPS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers non-pressure-retaining austenitic-ferritic stainless steel cast internal parts
for class 3 pumps whose maximum in-service temperature is less than 250°C.
These parts are divided into three categories: A, B and C, in accordance with the requirements of
chapter D 2000.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL AND PHYSICO-CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I below.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. This may be performed on a small ingot or on a pellet adjoining the part or assembly
or on metal discarded from mechanical test specimens. These analyses shall be performed in
compliance with MC 1000.
A product analysis verification per lot analysis shall be verified.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 341

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3407

If a more complete material analysis is performed, it should only show the usual residual contents
for elements other than those specified in table I.
TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE Z6 CNDU 20-08 M

ELEMENT LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSES (%)

Max. Carbon 0.060

Max. Silicon 1.50
Max. Manganese 1.50
Max. Sulphur 0.020
Max. Phosphorus 0.030
Chromium 19.00 à 23.00
Nickel 7.00 à 9.00
Molybdenum 2.00 à 3.00
Copper 1.00 à 2.00
Nitrogen 0.200
Cobalt (1)

(1) Cobalt content shall be as required in the equipment specification or other

relevant contractual documents in compliance with subchapter D 2400.

2.3 CALCULATION OF FERRITE CONTENT

The ferrite content shall be calculated for information purposes according to two methods:
- on the basis of the chemical ladle analysis and the combined use of the ESPY formulae and the
SCHAEFFLER diagram given in annex 6.
- on the basis of analyses of the ferrite content conducted in compliance with the provisions of
MC 1340 and performed on a small ingot at the same location as the samples taken for
mechanical tests.

2.4 CALCULATION OF THE PITTING RESISTANCE EQUIVALENT

The pitting resistance equivalent value is calculated using the following formula:
PRE = Cr % + 3.3 Mo % + 16 N %
The chromium, molybdenum and nitrogen contents, expressed as percentages, are taken from the
chemical product analysis.
The pitting resistance equivalent value shall be greater than 30.

2.5 INTERGRANULAR CORROSION TEST

An intergranular corrosion test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000 using treatment A
(heating at 675°C ± 10°C for 10 minutes then cooling by submersion in water).

M 3000 / 342  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3407

If the carbon content measured during the ladle analysis and the product analysis does not exceed
0.035%, this test can be considered as being for information purposes only (1).
If the result of the intergranular corrosion test is not satisfactory, i.e. the carbon content is greater
than 0.035%, the heat of steel shall be rejected.
The intergranular corrosion test result shall be considered satisfactory if during sound testing the test
specimen gives a clear metallic sound, and provided no cracks or tears are detected during the
bending test. In case of doubt, the absence of intergranular corrosion shall be confirmed by
micrographic examination.
(1) However, if the test specimen gives a muffled sound during the sound test and cracks during the bending test, it
shall be analysed by a testing laboratory appointed by the Manufacturer in order to shed light on the problem.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the foundry shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- identification of casting method,
- part procurement drawing with positions of test samples on the part, if these are attached or
adjacent to the part,
- heat treatment conditions,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling, non-destructive testing and repair welding operations shall be
presented in chronological order.

PROTOTYPE PART
The manufacturing method shall be tested using a prototype part produced in accordance with the
requirements of M 160.
This prototype part shall only be required for class A and B1 impellers as defined in annex 1.
The radiographic examination, as stipulated by M 160, should be executed as per MC 3200 with the
criteria defined in annex 1.

3.2 CASTING
The choice of casting method shall be left to the foundry. This method shall be identified in the
manufacturing programme.

3.3 MACHINING
Parts shall be machined as indicated on the procurement drawing.
Surface roughness shall be such that the results of non-destructive tests are significantly accurate.
These surface roughness values are given in SECTION III.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 343

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3407

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Parts shall be delivered in the solution heat treated condition.
The austenizing conditions prior to solution heat treatment temperature shall be:
- nominal temperature target during holding: above 1120°C
- homogenisation of the part between 1010° and 1040°C before solution heat treatment is possible.
Maximum permissible deviation from nominal holding temperatures for the entire charge shall
be ± 20°C.
The parts shall be subjected to solution heat treatment by total immersion in water.
If, after heat treatment, the lot does not exhibit the required characteristics, it may be retreated
(see paragraph 4.4).
Records with details on actual temperatures and holding times shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II below.
TABLE II

NAME TEST
PROPERTIES REQUIRED VALUE
OF TEST TEMPERATURE

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 320 MPa

Rm minimum value 600 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20%

KV impact Room Minimum average value 80 J

Minimum individual value (1) 55 J

HBShardness For information

(1) No more than one result below the minimum average value may be accepted per series of three tests.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall consist of test ingots attached to the part or ingots cast separately and attached to
the part (1) prior to heat treatment for mechanical properties.

(1)
For this type of part, it is not necessary to weld test ingots to the part prior to heat treatment. However, all
precautions should be taken to ensure that the test ingots which represent the batch of parts undergo heat treatment
with said parts.
M 3000 / 344  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3407

The samples shall be of sufficient size to ensure that the necessary number of test specimens may be
taken for the tests prescribed and for any retests required. The smallest dimension of the cross-
section of these test ingots must be representative of the minimum thickness of the wall of the part
(excluding hubs) but not less than 28 mm. For parts whose maximum wall thickness is less than
28 mm, the smallest dimension of the section of the sample may be less than 28 mm, but must be
greater than 14 mm.
Test specimen axes shall be located along the sample axes.
Test specimens shall be taken from a sample which has been subjected to all the heat treatments to
which the part or lot of parts was subjected.

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
Mechanical strength shall be determined either by part or by batch. A batch is defined as comprising
parts from the same heat of steel which were subjected to solution heat treatment from the same
furnace charge.
A batch shall be restricted to:
- 10 items or 3000 kg for parts weighing more than 50 kg,
- 30 items or 1500 kg for parts weighing 50 kg or less.
The number and content of tests are given in table III.
TABLE III

TEST NUMBER OF SPECIMENS

NAME OF TEST
TEMPERATURE PER TYPE OF TEST
Tension Room 1
KV impact Room 3
HBS hardness -

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimen
Test specimen shall have a circular section. Its normal diameter shall be 10 mm and its
dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 345

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3407

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
fitness for use of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

d) Retests
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, it shall be rejected (see para. 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens
The test specimens shall be taken side by side. The shape and dimensions of these specimens
shall be as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
Tests shall be performed at room temperature in accordance with MC 1000.

c) Results
Results shall meet the requirements defined in table II.
If one of the above requirements is not met, the parts shall be rejected (see para. 4.4).

d) Retests
However, if the test results are unsatisfactory, solely on account of one individual value being
lower that the guaranteed minimum, the other requirements being satisfied (satisfactory average,
at most one result lower than the guaranteed average), retests conducted as follows are
authorised: two set of three test specimens sampled close to those which were defective and
tested under the same conditions. The results for both sets of three test specimens shall be
satisfactory in accordance with para. 4.1, otherwise the part shall be rejected.

4.4 RETREATMENT
A part rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated (solution heat treatment). Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.

M 3000 / 346  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3407

In such cases, test coupons shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in para. 4.2. The tests
performed shall be the same as those described in para. 4.3.
No more than one retreatment shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

The final liquid penetrant examination of surface defects shall be performed after all heat treatment
has been completed.

EXAMINATION CONDITIONS
Sand and burrs shall be carefully removed from the parts, which shall then be trimmed to eliminate
risers and vent scrap, parting lines and runners. If a blowpipe or carbon arc process is used,
mechanical machining or grinding of the surfaces affected shall be performed to a depth of at
least 3 mm.
Parts shall be subjected to a general visual examination in accordance with MC 7100.
During the various machining and manufacturing stages, all surfaces shall be examined to ensure
that the metal is sound.
Parts shall be sound and free from defects such as scale, cracks, porosities, sand inclusions, or other
injurious defects.
Liquid penetrant examination shall be performed, in accordance with MC 4000.

5.1 DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

Defined in annex 1 according to the different part categories and zones shown in annexes 2 and 3.

5.2 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS

Any defect with one dimension of 2 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.

5.3 EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Defined in annex 1 according to the different part categories.

6 RADIOGRAPHIC VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION

Unless otherwise indicated, examination shall be performed subsequent to heat treatment.
Examination procedures shall comply with the requirements of MC 3200.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 347

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3407

6.1 ZONES EXAMINED

Defined in annex 1 according to the different part categories and zones shown in annexes 2 and 3.

6.2 DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The length of the zone examined on weld edges shall be measured from the final profile and shall be
equal to at least 3 times the thickness of the wall. There is no requirement for this length to
exceed 75 mm.

6.3 CRITERIA
Whatever the severity level, defects such as cracks, chaplets and chill remnants shall be
unacceptable.
The applicable acceptance criteria specified by standard NF EN 12681, Annex A, are defined in
annex 1 according to the different part categories.

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

7.1 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITHOUT REPAIR WELDING
Defects detected by surface examination or magnetic particle examination may be eliminated by
grinding provided the thickness of the ground areas remains within the tolerances specified on the
drawing and that the resulting cavities are not injurious to the areas around them. Where this is not
the case, the requirements of paragraph 7.2 shall apply.
Overheating of the ground surface must be avoided during grinding.
Cavities must blend smoothly into surrounding areas.
Cavities shall be subjected to liquid penetrant examination in accordance with the procedures and
criteria described in paragraph 5 of this specification.

7.2 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITH REPAIR

7.2.1 Removal of defects
Areas whose defects do not meet the acceptability criteria defined in paragraphs 5 and 6 of this
specification shall be excavated. Excavation cavities shall be subjected to liquid penetrant
examination.
The procedures and criteria to be applied are those described in paragraph 5 of this specification.
Where doubt exists as to whether a radiographically detected defect has been completely removed
by excavation, particularly if there are two defects, one below the other, in the same cross-section, a
new radiographic examination of the excavated area is recommended. (The stipulations of MC 3200
are not then required).
Excavation shall continue until surface defects which are unacceptable given the criteria imposed
for finished parts, have been eliminated as defined in paragraph 5.

M 3000 / 348  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3407

If an excavation is located in an area for which liquid penetrant or radiographic examination is not
stipulated in paragraphs 5 and 6, the acceptability criteria to be applied to cavity inspection shall be
those of paragraph 5 concerning category C impellers.

7.2.2 Repair
Repair is performed by welding. The grade of deposited metal is 21 Cr - 8 Ni or with a slightly
higher alloy content. The foundry shall describe the exact procedure used for the repair in a file
prepared in compliance with the requirements of SECTION IV. Insofar as the choice of filler
material is justified by its resistance to localised corrosion, the requirements of SECTION IV
relating to the mechanical properties of the deposited metal may be modified by the following
provisions:
- the elongation at fracture shall be at least 25%,
- the tensile strength shall be at least 900 MPa,
- the individual values for energy absorbed by breakage KV on V-notch test specimens shall be
greater than 55 J (deposited metal and heat affected zone).

7.2.3 Heat treatment after repair

A solution heat treatment shall not be required subsequent to repair.

7.3 EXAMINATION OF REPAIRED ZONES

The following non-destructive examinations shall be made on completion of weld repairs:

A - LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION OF ALL REPAIRED ZONES

Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 5 of this
specification.
In the case of repairs made in an zone for which the liquid penetrant or radiographic examination is
not stipulated in paragraphs 5 and 6, the acceptability criteria to be applied shall be those of
paragraph 5 concerning category C impellers.

B - RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION OF MAJOR REPAIRS

The terms "major" and "minor" excavation cavities are defined in annexes 4 and 5 of
this specification.
Excavation cavities are classified according to depth or surface area.
Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraph 6 of
this specification. If repairs are performed in an area for which volumetric examination is not
specified in paragraph 6 above, the major repairs shall be radiographically examined except if the
area is not easily accessible for radiography, as defined in MC 3240. The criteria to be adopted are
those of severity level 3. Radiographs shall be examined in accordance with MC 3250.
A chart giving the exact size and location of major repairs shall be drawn up.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 349

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3407

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions shall be checked against the procurement drawings with regard to both the profile
of the part as-delivered by the foundry and the profile of the finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. These values shall be within the tolerances given on
the drawing.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall identify the marking methods used, in accordance with B, C and D 1300.
Samples delivered with the part shall be marked in accordance with the requirements of the
purchase order.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- intergranular corrosion test,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (in the case of retreatment, this includes recordings of
all heat treatments),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- charts of major repairs,
- for all repairs by welding (major and minor):
. production weld data sheets,
. welding procedure data sheets and filler materials acceptance reports quoted in production
weld data sheets,
- dimensional checks,
- electrode acceptance certificate.

M 3000 / 350  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3407

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 351

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3407

ANNEX 1

PUMP INTERNALS CLASSIFICATION: EXAMINATION TO BE PERFORMED

M 3000 / 352  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3407

ANNEX 1

PUMP INTERNALS CLASSIFICATION: EXAMINATION TO BE PERFORMED

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 353

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3407

ANNEX 2

IMPELLERS

TEST AREA 1 = Outlet vane TEST AREA 4 = Vane-to-shroud radius

TEST AREA 2 = Inlet vane TEST AREA 5 = Hub

TEST AREA 3 = Leaktight seal bearing surface TEST AREA 6 = Channels

M 3000 / 354  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3407

ANNEX 3

DIFFUSERS

TEST AREA 1 = return channels TEST AREA 4 = Outlet vane

TEST AREA 2 = Seal contact surface TEST AREA 5 = Diffuser channels

TEST AREA 3 = Inlet vane) TEST AREA 6 = Channels

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 355

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3407

ANNEX 4

M 3000 / 356  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3407

ANNEX 5

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
SURFACE TO BE MACHINED

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 357

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3407

ANNEX 5 (cont.)

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
UNMACHINED SURFACE

M 3000 / 358  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3407

CHROMIUM NICKEL EQUIVALENTS / EPSY FORMULA

SCHAEFFLER DIAGRAM
ANNEX 6

Equivalent nickel: % Ni + 30 % C + 0.87 + 0.33 % Cu + 30 (% N – 0.045)

 n° 137-2012 M 3000 / 359

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 3407

M 3000 / 360  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4102

M 4102
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

FORGED OR ROLLED CLASS 1, 2 AND 3

NICKEL-CHROMIUM-IRON ALLOY PARTS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers the procurement of forged or rolled class 1, 2 and 3 nickel-chromium-iron
parts with a unit weight not higher than 5 t and not covered by an individual specification.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made with an electric furnace. It may be remelted by electroslag or vacuum arc
remelting.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analysis shall satisfy the requirements
of table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis of a sample taken at the time of casting or from a
sample taken from the ingot in the case of electroslag or vacuum arc remelting. He shall also supply
a product analysis for class 1 bars.
These analyses shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
Cobalt content requirements shall be stipulated in the equipment specification or other relevant
contractual documents, in accordance with subchapters B 2400, C 2400 and D 2400.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 1
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4102

TABLE I

AFNOR
NC 15 FeTNbA (1) NC 15 Fe (1) NC 19 FeNb NC 30 Fe
GRADE

ELEMENT LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSES (%)

Carbon 0.080 max. 0.10 max. (2) 0.080 max. 0.010 - 0.040
Max. Silicon 0.50 0.50 0.35 0.50
Max. Manganese 1.00 1.00 0.35 0.50
Max. Phosphorus – 0.015 0.015 0.015
Max. Sulphur 0.010 0.010 0.015 0.010
Chromium 14.00 - 17.00 14.00 - 17.00 17.00 - 21.00 28.00 - 31.00
Nickel 70.00 min. 72.00 min. 50.00 - 55.00 58.00 min.
Molybdenum – – 2.80 - 3.30 –
Max. Copper 0.50 0.50 0.30 0.50
Titanium 2.25 - 2.75 0.50 max. 0.65 - 1.15 0.50 max.
Niobium + Tantalum 0.70 - 1.20 – 4.75 - 5.50 –
Iron 5.00 - 9.00 6.00 - 10.00 the rest 7.00 - 11.00
Aluminium 0.40 - 1.00 0.50 0.20 - 0.80 0.50 max.
Max. Boron – – 0.006 –

(1) For use in water or steam at an effective service temperature exceeding 250°C, the choice of this
grade shall take into account the risk of stress corrosion.
(2) 0.010 - 0.050: when specified in the equipment specification.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 ROLLING OR FORGING
There must be sufficient discard to eliminate shrinkage and the majority of segregations. The overall
ratio of reduction shall not in general be lower than 3.

3.2 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

3.2.1 GRADE NC 15 FeTNbA
The parts shall be delivered after solution heat treatment at a temperature of between 1080°C and
1100°C with air or more rapid cooling, followed by structural hardening treatment including a
minimum holding time of at least 20 hours at a temperature of 700°C ± 10°C, followed by
air cooling.

M 4000 / 2  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 4102

3.2.2 GRADE NC 15 Fe
The parts shall be delivered in the heat-treated condition: final treatment for mechanical properties
shall include heating at a temperature of between 950°C and 1150°C, followed by rapid cooling. If
the final forging or rolling temperature falls within the temperature limits specified for heat
treatment and provided that mechanical strength requirements are met, heat treatment in a furnace
shall not be required. In this case, the final forging or rolling temperature and the cooling conditions
shall be recorded.
Parts shall be subjected to heat treatment at 715°C ± 15°C for a period of at least 12 hours.

3.2.3 GRADE NC 19 FeNb

The bars shall be delivered after solution heat treatment at a minimum temperature of between
925°C and 1010°C with air or more rapid cooling, followed by structural hardening treatment
including a holding time of 8 hours minimum at 720°C ± 10°C, followed by cooling in the furnace
to 620°C ± 10°C with a 10 hours minimum holding period at this temperature, followed by air
cooling.

3.2.4 GRADE NC 30 Fe
The parts shall be delivered in the heat-treated condition: final treatment for mechanical properties
shall include heating at a temperature of between 1000°C and 1150°C, followed by rapid cooling. If
the final forging or rolling temperature falls within the temperature limits specified for that
treatment and provided that mechanical strength requirements are met, heat treatment in a furnace
shall not be required. In this case, the final forging or rolling temperature and the cooling conditions
shall be recorded.
Parts shall be subjected to heat treatment at 715°C ± 15°C for a period of at least 5 hours.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are given in table II.

 n° 140-2013 M 4000 / 3
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4102

TABLE II

TEST REQUIRED
TYPE OF TEST PROPERTIES
TEMPERATURE VALUE
NC 15 FeTNbA

Tensile Room Rp0.2 minimum value 655 MPa

Rm minimum value 1070 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20
Z % minimum value 20
250°C Rt0.002 minimum value 620 MPa

Brinell hardness Room Minimum value 280

NC 15 Fe

Tensile Room Rp0.2 minimum value 240 MPa

Rm minimum value 550 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 35
350°C Rt0.002 minimum value 190 MPa
Rm minimum value 497 MPa

KV impact (2) Room Minimum average value 100 J

NC 19 FeNb

Tensile Room Rp0.2 minimum value 1035 MPa

Rm minimum value 1275 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 12
Z % minimum value 15
250°C Rt0.002 minimum value 945MPa
Brinell hardness Room Minimum value 330
NC 30 Fe

Tensile Room Rp0.2 minimum value (1) 240 - 400 MPa

Rm minimum value 550 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 35
350°C Rt0.002 minimum value 180 MPa
Rm minimum value 497 MPa
KV impact (2) Room Minimum average value 100 J
(1) To obtain the required mechanical properties, bars to be used for the fabrication of steam
generator tube plugs may be drawn by a tension not exceeding 5%. When this is the case,
a tension test at room temperature shall be performed on each bar.
(2) Performed for class 1 equipment. The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation
value at ambient temperature is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the material
manufacturer.

M 4000 / 4  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4102

4.2 SAMPLING
Samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been subjected to heats treatments stipulated in
paragraph 3.2 and shall be appropriately marked.
Samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been subjected to heat treatment for mechanical
properties and shall be appropriately marked.

In the case of bars delivered in the solution-heat-treated condition, these tests shall be performed on
test specimens taken from samples on which the hardening treatment, as defined in paragraphs 3.2.1
and 3.2.2 or other if required by the equipment specification in accordance with 3.2.2 and 3.2.4,
are simulated.

The size of test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests ad
retests.

Sampling procedures are defined below.

SAMPLING MODES – SAMPLING CONDITIONS

Round bars or
equivalent Specimen for testing
(section)
Thermal buffer

Thermal buffer

Flat bars or
Specimen for test
équivalent
(section)

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 5
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4102

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
A hardness measurement shall be performed on each bar in the lot.
The number of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens and test temperatures are defined
in paragraph 4.2.
The KV impact test is performed only for diameters more than or equal to 15 mm or thicknesses
more than or equal to 12 mm.
Mechanical properties shall be determined by lot.
A tensile test at high temperature shall be performed when specified in the equipment specification
or other relevant contractual documents. This check is always performed for class 1 parts.

DEFINITION OF A LOT
A lot is defined as comprising geometrically identical parts from the same heat of steel subjected to
the same production cycle, from the same heat treatment charge and restricted to 5000 kg.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2 % offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another test
specimen.
If the results of this test are satisfactory, the part and/or the lot are accepted; if not, the following
paragraph applies.

M 4000 / 6  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4102

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the second test are
satisfactory, the part and/or lot is accepted; if not, it is rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - KV IMPACT TESTS
a) Test Specimens
The shape and dimensions of specimens are those defined in MC 1000.

b) Tests
The tests are performed at room temperature in compliance with MC 1000.

c) Results
The average value for a series of three specimens must comply with the value specified in table
II. An individual value can be lower than the specified value, provided that it is not lower than
70% of the latter.
If the conditions defined above are not met, it is necessary to take three more specimens on the
same specimen close to the test specimen which gave an unsatisfactory result, and to submit
them for testing.
The part and/or the lot can be accepted, if after the test on the second series of three test
specimens, the following conditions are all simultaneously met.
- the average value of the six tests must be equal to or higher than the specified minimum
value,
- at the most, two individual values out of six can be lower than the minimum specified value,
- only one individual value out of the six can be lower than 70% of the specified value.
If not, the part and/or the lot is/are rejected.

C - HARDNESS TESTS
The hardness tests are executed in compliance with MC 1000.

4.4 RETREATMENT
A lot rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test coupons shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in paragraph 4.2. The
series of tests to be performed shall be the same as that specified in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 7
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4102

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

All parts shall be subjected to visual examination. This may be supplemented by a liquid penetrant
examination as stipulated in MC 4000 if specified in the equipment specification.
The following criteria shall be considered recordable conditions:
- any defect with one dimension greater than 1 mm,
- the following indications shall be unacceptable:
. linear indications,
. non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
. three or more aligned indications less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge),
. 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest
dimensions shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the
indications being evaluated.
If the examinations described above reveal the presence of unacceptable indications, they may not
be accepted as-is and the requirements of paragraph 7 shall apply.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination is performed after solution heat treatment.

6.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe frequency shall usually be 2 MHz.

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-4 or with
paragraph 13.3 of standard NF EN 10308.
Part type is 1.

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-4 or with
paragraph 14 of standard NF EN 10308.

M 4000 / 8  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4102

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

STRAIGHT BEAM EXAMINATION
Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 2 in standard
NF EN 10228-4 or standard NF EN 10308.

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted tolerances of the part delivered
by the forging mill shall be acceptable.
Liquid penetrant examination shall be performed after grinding in accordance with MC 4000, in
order to ensure that the defect has completely disappeared.
Examination criteria shall be those defined in paragraph 5.
Neither the forging mill nor the rolling mill shall be authorised to make weld repairs.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
After heat treatment.
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings
with respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, as defined in B, C
and D 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses, where applicable,
- heat treatment certificate,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional checks.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 9
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4102

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with the required values.

M 4000 / 10  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4103

M 4103
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

HOT ROLLED NICKEL-CHROMIUM-IRON

ALLOY PLATES FOR CLASS 1,
2 AND 3 COMPONENTS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers hot rolled weldable nickel-chromium-iron alloy plates for class 1, 2 and 3
components, the thickness of which is restricted to 150 mm and which is not covered by an
individual specification.
It is not applicable to PWR pressure boundaries parts.
For operation in water or steam at an effective service temperature exceeding 250°C, the risk of
stress corrosion shall be taken into account.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It may be vacuum or electroslag remelted.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analysis, shall satisfy the requirements
of table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis of a sample taken at the time of casting, certified by the
mill manager or his duly accredited representative. In the case of metal remelted by vacuum or
electroslag remelting, this analysis shall be performed on the bottom end of a remelted ingot.
A product analysis is in general specified in the equipment specification. This analysis shall be
required for class 1 components.
Cobalt content requirements shall be stipulated in the equipment specification or other relevant
contractual documents, in accordance with sub-chapters B 2400, C 2400 and D 2400.
These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 11
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4103

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE NC 15 Fe
ELEMENT LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSES (%)

Maximum Carbon 0.10

Maximum Silicon 0.50
Maximum Manganese 1.00
Maximum Sulphur 0.010
Maximum Phosphorus 0.015
Chromium 14.00 - 17.00
Minimum Nickel 72.00
Iron 6.00 - 10.00
Maximum Copper 0.50
Maximum Aluminium + Titanium 0.60

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the Supplier shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
a) identification of melting process,
b) ingot weight and type,
c) top and bottom end discard percentages,
d) position of the plate in the ingot, in particular final rolling direction in relation to the ingot axis,
e) main rolling direction,
f) conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
g) position of acceptance test samples on the plate,
h) drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

If thickness is less than 80 mm, points b), c) and d) of the manufacturing programme shall not
be required.

M 4000 / 12  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4103

3.2 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The plates shall be delivered in the heat treated condition. Final heat treatment for mechanical
properties shall consist of heating at between 705°C and 1150°C, followed by rapid cooling.
If the final rolling temperature falls within the temperature limits specified for heat treatment and
provided that mechanical strength requirements are met, heat treatment in a furnace shall not be
required. In this case, the final rolling temperature and the cooling conditions shall be recorded.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are given in table II.
TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE VALUE

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 240 MPa

Rm minimum value 550 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 35

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 190 MPa

Rm minimum value 497 MPa

KV Impact(1) Room Minimum average value 100 J

(1) The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is
certified greater than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from the plate as-delivered by the rolling mill (after solution heat
treatment). They shall be appropriately marked and shall show the final rolling direction.
The size of test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
Test specimens shall be taken halfway between the plate edge and its axis. Test specimens shall
always be taken at a distance from the edge of the sample greater than the thickness of the plate. The
longitudinal axis of the test specimens shall be perpendicular to the final rolling direction.
The longitudinal axis of the specimens for tension tests and KV impact tests shall be located at mid-
thickness for plates of thickness less than or equal to 30 mm and at quarter-thickness for plates of
thickness greater than 30 mm.
Impact test specimen notch roots shall be perpendicular to the rolling skin.
For thicknesses less than or equal to 12 mm, the impact test shall not be performed

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 13
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4103

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
For each rolled sheet or strip, the following tests shall be performed:
- one series of tests at the end corresponding to the top of the ingot for sheets or strips weighing
3000 kg or less,
- two series of tests, one at each end, for sheets or strips weighing more than 3000 kg.
The number of tests to be performed and test temperatures are given in table III.
TABLE III

POSITION OF TEST SPECIMEN NUMBER

NAME TEST
THICK- TOP BOTTOM OF TEST
OF TEMPERA- WEIGHT
NESS SPECI-
TEST TURE mid- quarter mid- quarter MENS
thickness thickness thickness thickness
 30 mm 1 – – – 1
 3000 kg
> 30 mm – 1 – – 1
Room
 30 mm 1 – 1 – 2
> 3000 kg
> 30 mm – 1 – 1 2
Tension(1)
 30 mm – – 1 – 1
 3000 kg
> 30 mm – – – 1 1
350°C
 30 mm – – 1 – 1
> 3000 kg
> 30 mm – – – 1 1
 30 mm 1 – 1 – 1
 3000 kg
KV > 30 mm – 1 – 1 1
Room
Impact(2)  30 mm 1 – 1 – 6
> 3000 kg
> 30 mm – 1 – 1 6
(1) The tension test at 350°C shall only be performed when the tensile strength at this temperature is used to
determine the design of the part. The equipment specification shall stipulate whether the test is required.
(2) The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is certified greater than or
equal to 45% by the material manufacturer.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.
For thicknesses less than 20 mm, the test specimen with a circular section may be replaced by a
specimen with a rectangular section, in accordance with MC 1000.

M 4000 / 14  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4103

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - KV IMPACT TESTS
a) Test Specimens
The shape and dimensions of specimens are those defined in MC 1000.

b) Tests
The tests are performed at room temperature in compliance with MC 1000.

c) Results
The average value for a series of three specimens must comply with the value specified in table
II. An individual value can be lower than the specified value, provided that it is not lower than
70% of the latter.
If the conditions defined above are not met, it is necessary to take three more specimens on the
same specimen close to the test specimen which gave an unsatisfactory result, and to submit
them for testing.
The plate can be accepted, if after the test on the second series of three test specimens, the
following conditions are all simultaneously met :
- the average value of the six tests must be equal to or higher than the specified minimum
value,
- at the most, two individual values out of six can be lower than the minimum specified value,
- only one individual value out of the six can be lower than 70% of the specified value.
If not, the plate is rejected.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 15
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4103

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test coupons shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in paragraph 4.2. The
test performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than one retreatment shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

All surfaces of the plates shall be subjected to a visual examination at the final stage in accordance
with MC 7100. Their surfaces shall be plane, uniform and free from buckles, blowholes, tears,
cracks, blisters and inclusions.
After cutting to as-delivered dimensions, the edges shall be visually examined in accordance with
MC 7100. There shall be no cleavage or lamination.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Ultrasonic examination is performed in accordance with MC 2400 which stipulates the conditions of
application of Standard NF EN 10307.
- For class 1 component plates: the scanning plan and the criteria are those of levels S3 and E4 of
Standard NF EN 10307.
In addition, as stipulated in paragraph 9.2.2 of standard, a test identical to the one performed on
plate edges shall be performed in the weld areas.
- For class 2 component plates: the examination shall only be carried out for parts at least 30 mm
thick, in accordance with the scanning plan and the levels S2 and E3 criteria given in Standard
NF EN 10307.
- For class 3 component plates: ultrasonic testing is not required.

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

7.1 REMOVAL BY GRINDING
The Supplier may remove surface defects by grinding, provided that:
- the remaining thickness is within the tolerances specified by the drawing,
- the cavity blends in smoothly with the surrounding surface,
- after removal, the surface is subjected to liquid penetrant examination in accordance with
MC 4000.

7.2 REPAIR WELDING

As a general rule, the rolling mill shall not be authorized to perform repair welding.

M 4000 / 16  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4103

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions of the plates shall comply with those specified on the drawing given in the purchase
order.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B,
C and D 1300.
Samples delivered with the part shall be marked in accordance with the provisions of the purchase
order.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses for class 1 component plates,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data for class 1 component plates,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and plate reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 17
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4103

M 4000 / 18  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4104

M 4104

PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

GRADE NC 15 Fe TNb A NICKEL-CHROMIUM-IRON
ALLOY ROLLED BARS USED FOR THE FABRICATION
OF BOLTING MATERIAL FOR INTERNALS
SUPPORT PINS AND BOLTING

0 SCOPE
This specification covers the procurement of grade Ni-Cr-Fe NC 15 Fe TNb A nickel-chromium
alloy rolled bars of diameter  60 mm used for the fabrication of bolting material for internal
support pins and bolting.
This specification should be used in conjunction with specification M 5140 dealing with acceptance
of finished products.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric arc or vacuum induction furnace. This is followed by
vacuum or electroslag remelting.

2 CHEMICAL AND PHYSICO-CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I below.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. He shall also supply a product analysis. This analysis may be performed on metal
discard from mechanical tests. The ladle analysis requirements shall also apply to the product
analysis. These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 19
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4104

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE NC 15 Fe TNb A

ELEMENT LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSES (%)

Max. Carbon 0.080

Max. Manganese 1.00
Max. Silicon 0.50
Max. Sulphur 0.010
Max. Phosphorus 0.010
Min. Nickel 70.00
Chromium 14.00 to 17.00
Max. Copper 0.30
Titanium 2.25 to 2.75
Niobium + Tantalum 0.70 to 1.20
Iron 5.00 to 9.00
Aluminium 0.40 to 1.00
Max. Cobalt 0.20
Boron for information
Zirconium for information

2.3 EXAMINATION OF GRAIN SIZE

The grain size number (see MC 1000) of the micrographic structure shall be at least 2 and at most 7
(maximum preferred deviation 3 on the same bar). Examination of the grain size number shall be
performed on each bar on small plates sampled from one end after solution heat treatment and age
hardening as defined in paragraph 3.3.
The relevant micrographic photographs shall be attached to the report.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 ROLLING
The bars shall be rolled and descaled.
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation. A
record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of the Surveillance
Agents.
The same applies to the overall ratio of reduction which, calculated in accordance with M 380, shall
be 3 or more.

M 4000 / 20  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4104

3.2 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME

Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the Supplier shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- top and bottom end discard percentages,
- rolling operations,
- as-treated and as-delivered bar diameters,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples,
The various rolling, heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be
presented in chronological order.

Note: Salt bath heat treatment shall not be authorized.

3.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Bars to be used for the fabrication of pins shall be delivered after having been subjected to solution
heat treatment at a temperature between 1080°C and 1100°C followed by water cooling, and age
hardening including a 20 hours minimum holding period at a temperature of 700°C ± 10°C followed
by air cooling.
Bars to be used for the fabrication of internal bolting may be delivered, either in the solution heat
treated condition defined in the preceding paragraph or after having been subjected, subsequent to
solution heat treatment, to age hardening including a 20 hours minimum holding period at a
temperature of 700°C ± 10°C followed by air cooling.
The temperature ranges indicated include bar temperature deviations during hold.
Conditions for heat treatment shall be indicated in the manufacturing programme.
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

3.4 MACHINING
The bars shall be machined by turning or grinding, such that surface condition shall be suitable for
non-destructive examination. The surface condition is detailed in SECTION III for the examinations
concerned here. The surface condition shall be determined in accordance with MC 7200.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 21
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4104

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements for samples subjected to structural hardening defined in
paragraph 4.2 are given in table II below.
TABLE II

TEST REQUIRED
NAME OF TEST PROPERTIES
TEMPERATURE VALUE

Tension Room Rp 0.2 minimum value 655/900 MPa

Rm minimum value 1070 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 20
Z % minimum value 20
Brinell hardness:

- prior to age- Room Individual value < 325

(1)
hardening

- after age- Room Individual value 280-350

hardening

(1) For bars delivered in the solution heat treated condition.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall consist of bar prolongations which shall be cropped after delivery treatment. In
the case of bars delivered in the solution heat treated condition tests shall be performed on test
specimens taken from samples which have been subjected to the following age hardening treatment:
- holding for at least 20 h at between 700°C ± 10°C, followed by air cooling.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
Test specimens shall be cut longitudinally, such that their axis is coincident with that of the bar. The
test-pertinent area of the specimens shall be located at a distance from the end of the bar equal to
that of the diameter.

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Lot definition
A lot shall comprise bars of similar diameters, such as:
dia. max .
 1.1
dia. min .

from the same heat of steel, subjected to the same delivery heat treatment and from the same furnace
charge. The weight of a lot shall be restricted to 2000 kg.

M 4000 / 22  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4104

4.3.2 Number and content of tests

Each bar of the lot shall be subjected to hardness testing after delivery heat treatment.

Test prolongations shall be taken from 4% of the bars in each lot, with a minimum of two bars,
taking 2% of the bars with the highest hardness value and 2% of the bars with the lowest
hardness value.

A tension test at room temperature (1 test specimen) shall be performed on each prolongation.

4.3.3 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall have a circular section. Their normal diameter shall be 10 mm and their
dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall
be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2 % offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.

B - HARDNESS TEST
Hardness tests shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.
Bars to be used for the manufacture of internal support pins shall be subjected to Brinell hardness
tests at 3 points, at 120°, located 5 mm from the skin on the small plates intended for examination of
the grain size. Results shall satisfy the requirements of table II.

4.4 RETREATMENT
No retreatment shall be authorized.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 23
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4104

The parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks or other injurious defects.
A liquid penetrant examination as per MC 4000 shall be performed on the bars if doubt remains
after the visual examination. A liquid penetrant examination as per MC 4000 shall be performed on
all bars intended for the manufacture of pins, including the entire surface area, after machining to
the delivery diameters.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Recordable conditions are indications of 1 mm. The following are not acceptable:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more aligned indications less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge),
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2 whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.
Removal of indications is by discarding sections of the affected bars.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination is performed on the as-delivered condition.

6.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
Probe frequency shall usually be 2 MHz.

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-4 or with
paragraph 13.3 of standard NF EN 10308.
If the scanning cannot be performed by rotation it shall be performed on a grid layout in accordance
with paragraph 12.3 of standard NF EN 10228-4 or with paragraph 13.2 of standard NF EN 10308.
Part type is 1a.

M 4000 / 24  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4104

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-4 or with
paragraph 14 of standard NF EN 10308.

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 2 in standard
NF EN 10228-4 or standard NF EN 10308.

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within dimensional tolerances of the part shall
be acceptable. A liquid penetrant examination shall be performed after grinding, in accordance
with MC 4000.
No repair welding shall be authorized.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions and tolerances shall be those stipulated in the purchase order.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with G 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 25
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4104

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 4000 / 26  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4105

M 4105
PART PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

SEAMLESS NICKEL-CHROMIUM-IRON
ALLOY (NC 30 Fe) FOR PWR
STEAM GENERATOR TUBES BUNDLES

0 SCOPE
This specification covers the procurement of weldable seamless nickel-chromium-iron alloy
NC 30 Fe tubes for PWR steam generator tube bundles.
The tubes shall be delivered U-shaped, obtained by cold bending.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The alloy shall be elaborated in an electric furnace.
The metal shall be remelted by electroslag or vacuum arc remelting in order to optimize its
cleanliness as regard inclusions and its chemical homogeneity.
Other melting processes may be used, with Contractor approval, and provided that, as a minimum,
the same metallurgical quality is achieved.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as defined by ladle and product analyses, shall satisfy the requirements
of table I.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 27
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4105

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE NC 30 Fe
ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS AND PRODUCT ANALYSIS (%)

Carbon 0.010 - 0.030

Maximum Silicon 0.50
Maximum Manganese 0.50
Maximum Sulphur 0.010
Maximum Phosphorus 0.015
Minimum Nickel 58.00
Chromium 28.00 - 31.00
Iron 8.00 - 11.00
Maximum Copper 0.50
Maximum Cobalt 0.035 (1)
Maximum Titanium 0.50
Maximum Aluminium 0.50
Maximum Boron 0.0030
Maximum Niobium 0.10
Maximum Nitrogen 0.05
1) The mean cobalt content of all ladles constituting one tube bundle, weighted by the
number of tubes in each ladle, shall be lower than 0.018%.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

2.2.1 Ladle analysis
A ladle analysis shall be supplied of a sample taken at the time of casting or of a test ingot when the
metal is vacuum arc or electroslag remelted. This analysis shall be performed in compliance
with MC 1000.
The analysis report shall be certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited representative.

2.2.2 Product analysis

A product analysis shall be made for each heat of steel on a sample taken from a straight tube during
cutting to length. This analysis shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to the commencement of manufacturing operations, the tube Manufacturer shall draw up
manufacturing instructions giving:
- the nature of the parts,
- the method and type of melting process,

M 4000 / 28  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4105

- the preferred chemical analysis,

- the weight (and the type) of the ingot used,
- the (minimum) percentages of top and bottom discard,
- the various operations in chronological order:
. melting (remelting if applicable, with ingot characteristics),
. hot forging or rolling, descaling of bars,
. machining,
. drilling,
. extrusion,
. cold rolling or drawing,
. heat treatments,
. sampling of test specimens,
. finishing (dressing, bending, cutting, grinding, polishing, buffing (where applicable),
cleaning),
. non-destructive examinations,
. intermediate heat treatments, annealing and additional heat treatments,

- the sampling plan for all samples and test specimens,

- the cold bending procedure.

3.2 TUBE PROTOTYPE SERIES

Any new mass production of tubes shall be preceded by a representative prototype series. This
prototype series, manufactured in accordance with the requirements stated in chapter M 170,
specifying the non-destructive examination methods to be calibrated, as indicated in paragraph 6.3.
The requirements of chapter M 170 are modified by changes to the following paragraphs:
- M 170.4
The minimum quantity of tubes to be fabricated for a prototype series shall be one hundred.

- M 170.5
Not applicable (see paragraphe 3.1).

- M 170.7
If the Supplier decides to modify one of these parameters, he must inform the Contractor and
establish a new manufacturing programme which shall be used as the basis of a new prototype
series.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 29
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4105

Additional examinations shall also be performed on randomly taken samples, in order to check that
the precautions taken, in particular at the degreasing stage, and the choice of protective atmosphere
for the various heat treatments, prevents all pollution of the surfaces by carburization or nitriding
but does not result in decarburization which could be prejudicial to the tube and the equipment.
Tubes in this prototype series which meet specification requirements shall be considered fit for use.

3.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

In accordance with the instructions below, the tubes shall be delivered after they have been
subjected, in their straight condition, to annealing followed by additional heat treatment after
straightening, grinding of the outer surface and possibly shot-blasting of the inner surface.
Short radius bends shall also be subjected to stress-relieving heat treatment.

3.3.1 Annealing of straight tubes

After final cold rolling or drawing, the tubes shall be subjected to heat treatment in a continuous
furnace, in a protective atmosphere.
The nominal holding temperature and time shall be specified in the annex to the manufacturing
instructions mentioned in paragraph 3.1.
The minimum annealing temperature measured on the coldest tube shall be 1060°C: this
temperature shall be held for at least 1 minute; time of cooling down between 900°C and 500°C
shall be lower than 3 minutes.
The furnace temperature and the tube feed rate shall be continually recorded.

3.3.2 Straightening operations

The conditions of straightening operations performed after additional heat treatment shall be
adjusted so that the induced yield strength increase is lower than 80 MPa. The Supplier shall submit
to Contractor approval a straightening procedure, that defines the means and inspection process set-
up to comply with this criterion.

3.3.3 Additional heat treatment of straight tubes

Subsequent to straightening and grinding of external surfaces and any shot-blasting of internal
surfaces, straight tubes shall be subjected to additional heat treatment with a holding temperature of
715°C ± 15°C for at least 5 hours.
The thermal cycles involved shall be specified in the annex to the manufacturing instructions
mentioned in paragraph 3.1.
Treatment shall be performed in a vacuum or a protective atmosphere.
However, if it proves necessary to perform further straightening or machine grinding or shot-
blasting of the surfaces in order to remove inadvertent oxidation due to unsatisfactory additional
heat treatment, further additional heat treatment shall be performed in the same conditions as
described above.

M 4000 / 30  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4105

3.3.4 Stress-relieving heat treatment of short radius bend

Stress-relieving heat treatment at 715°C ± 15°C for 2 hours shall be performed on U-bends with a
bend radius less than 10 times the diameter of the tube.
This treatment shall be performed in a vacuum or in a protective atmosphere in order to avoid the
risk of surface oxidation.
The treatment procedure shall be specified in the annex to the manufacturing instructions mentioned
in paragraph 3.1.
Note: The total holding time at 700°C/730°C corresponding to the thermal cycles involved in the additional heat
treatment on straight tubes (see paragraph 3.3.3) and the stress-relieving heat treatment on bends (see
paragraph 3.3.4) shall not exceed 25 hours.

The heat treatments described in paragraphs 3.3.3 and 3.3.4 may be dispensed with if stipulated in
the equipment specification or other relevant contractual documents.

3.3.5 Adjustment of tubes after final heat treatment

Following additional heat treatment of straight pipes and tubes, the Supplier may subject their outer
surfaces to a process of automatic buffing.
The buffing shall not be performed unless the Supplier has obtained the Contractor's approval after
submitting supporting documentation to the Contractor including the following:
- determination of the residual surface stresses in the outer layer by X-ray diffraction (a residual
stress level less than or equal to 35 MPa under tension is acceptable without specific justification;
the Contractor’s approval is required for higher figures),
- checks to establish that there are no changes in the metallurgical properties of the tube, other than
those deliberately brought about by buffing of the surface area,
- checks to ensure that the high-gloss polishing does not have an adverse effect on the ability to
carry out Eddy current tests.
After any buffing of the external surface of straight tubes or after stress relief treatment for bends
with a short radius, only manual local grinding using abrasive paper with a grade of at least 400
shall be tolerated.
At the final verification stage, only minor, local adjustments (to radius geometry or to the linearity
of straight sections) shall be tolerated, and this on condition that the Manufacturer performs the
following validation tests:
- for short radius bends subjected to additional heat treatment after bending, the Manufacturer shall
perform tests on tubes of the same dimension in order to demonstrate that any residual stresses
induced are no greater than those observed for the shortest radius bend in tubes which are not
subjected to additional stress-relieving heat treatment after bending. Tests on grade
Z2 CND 17.12 tubes performed according to MC 1362 are acceptable,
- for bends which are not subjected to additional treatment after bending, the Manufacturer shall
perform tests on tubes of the same dimension in order to demonstrate that any residual stresses
induced remain within the limits of those produced by the bending process. Comparative
evaluations of the level of residual stress in grade Z2 CND 17.12 tubes performed according to
the method described in MC 1362 are acceptable.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 31
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4105

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
AND MICROGRAPHIC STRUCTURES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are given in table II.

TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE VALUE

Room Rp 0.2 275/375 MPa

Rm minimum value 630 MPa
Tensile A % (5d) minimum value 35
t
350°C R p 0.2 minimum value 215 MPa
Rm minimum value 533 MPa

4.1.1 Hardness test

The maximum Rockwell B hardness value shall be 92.

4.1.2 Microstructure
The micrographic structure grain size number as defined in MC 1000 shall be between 5 and 9.
Micrographic structure examination shall show carbides intergranular precipitation with a low
density of intragranular precipitates: examination method and criteria shall be defined at the
prototype series qualification stage.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from straight tubes subsequent to the additional heat treatment
operations mentioned in paragraph 3.3.3.

4.2.1 Lot composition

For mechanical tests, tubes shall be grouped into lots with a maximum weight of 2000 kg.
A lot shall comprise tubes:
- from the same heat of steel,
- produced in the same manufacturing cycle,
- subjected to the same annealing heat treatment run (see paragraph 3.3.1),
- subjected to one or several additional heat treatments (as per para 3.3.3) with a total holding time
comprised between 5 to 25 hours. Tubes subjected after the first additional heat treatment to
more than two alterations (trimming polishing, additional heat treatment) should be considered as
forming a new lot.

M 4000 / 32  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4105

4.3 TESTING OF TUBE SAMPLES

4.3.1 Number and content of tests
The following tests shall be performed for each lot on randomly selected tube prolongations.

TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE

A test specimen taken from a tube end, covering at least 1 % of the tubes.

TENSION TESTING AT HIGH TEMPERATURE

A test specimen shall be taken from the end of one tube per lot.
If several lots come from the same heat of steel and have followed the same manufacturing and heat
treatment cycle, the test shall only be performed on one tube for all of these lots.

HARDNESS TEST
One test at each end of the tube, covering at least 2% of the tubes.

FLARE TEST
One test at each end of the tube, covering at least 1 % of the tubes.

MICROSTRUCTURE
Measurement of grain size at one end of the tube, covering at least 1 % of the tubes.
Verification of microstructure (precipitation status) for one sample by lot of tubes.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimen
The test specimen shall comprise a section corresponding to the complete cross-section of the
tube.

b) Test method
The test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2 % offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 33
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4105

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in paragraph 4.1.1.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the tube) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen.
If the results of the second test are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
- Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective.
- If the results of the retests are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted: in not, it shall be
retreated for subsequent representation for acceptance.

B - HARDNESS TEST
A Rockwell B hardness test shall be performed on the internal surface of a section of the tube sawn
parallel to the axis of the tube.

RESULTS
The results shall satisfy the requirements of paragraph 4.1.1.
If this is not the case, the procedures given in paragraph 4.3.2.A. "Results" shall be followed.

C - FLARE TEST
a) Test specimen
The test specimen shall consist of a tube section 40 mm in length.

b) Test method
The flare test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000 using a frustrum-shaped mandrel
with an apex angle of 60°.

c) Results
The external diameter of the tube shall increase by 30 % but there shall be no cracks or tears on
the tube walls.
If this is not the case, the requirements of 4.3.2.A "Results" shall be followed.

D - MICROGRAPHIC STRUCTURE - GRAIN SIZE

Micrographic examination shall be performed on a transverse section of the tube.

M 4000 / 34  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4105

RESULTS
The grain size shall meet the requirements of paragraph 4.1.2.
If this is not the case, the requirements of 4.3.2.A "Results" shall be followed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION
Both straight and bent tubes shall be subjected to surface examination in order to detect defects
likely to affect their use.
Internal and external surfaces shall be clean, smooth and free from traces of oxidation or
carburization.
This surface examination shall be completed by an eddy current examination to check that there is
no superficial carburization according to the conditions described in paragraph 6.2.
Cleaning conditions are specified in paragraph 7.
Any slight variations in colour which appear subsequent to additional heat treatment of straight
tubes (see paragraph 3.3.3) or stress-relieving heat treatment of bent tubes (see paragraph 3.3.4)
shall be tolerated and compared with the standard samples.
External surfaces shall be visually checked in accordance with MC 7100 by comparison with the
standard samples. They shall be free from strings, tears, blisters, scratches and handling damage
within the requirement limits of the standard samples.
Minor defects may be removed under the conditions described in paragraph 7.
Surface roughness shall comply with the requirements of MC 7200.
External roughness (Ra) shall not exceed 1.2 µm and internal roughness (Ra) shall not exceed
0.8 µm . This shall be measured on samples taken from 1 % of the tubes in each lot.
Surface pickling of the finished tube shall not be allowed.

6 VOLUMETRIC AND SURFACE EXAMINATION

The entire length of each tube shall be subjected to ultrasonic and eddy current examination in the
straight condition (prior to bending).
This examination may be performed prior to the additional heat treatment mentioned in
paragraph 3.3.3.
If the tube ends cannot be properly examined, they shall be discarded. In this case, the Supplier must
specify the lengths which can be discarded. This may be done after bending.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 35
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4105

6.1 ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION

6.1.1 Examination procedure
The tubes shall be subjected to ultrasonic examination in accordance with MC 2500 for detection of
longitudinal and transverse defects.
The various signal data received during the examination shall be recorded.

6.1.2 Adjustment of the equipment

The Supplier shall draw up a specification, describing the equipment used and the examination
adjustments and procedure.
In particular, the equipment characteristics and performance, ultrasonic beam shape and size
(diameter, transmission frequency, angle of incidence, size of focal point), tube feed conditions
(pitch, rate of feed and rotation) shall be mentioned.

6.2 EDDY CURRENT EXAMINATION

6.2.1 Test procedure
The entire length of the tube shall be subjected to eddy current examination with an external coil
around the tube in accordance with MC 6000.
The various signal data received during the tests shall be recorded.

6.2.2 Adjustment of the equipment

The Supplier shall draw up a specification giving all relevant information on the equipment used,
the adjustment settings and the test procedures.

6.3 DEFECT CATALOGUE - REJECTION CRITERIA

The rejection criteria for defects considered as unacceptable are defined from a defect catalogue set
up by the Manufacturer on the basis of the prototype series of tubes mentioned in paragraph 3.2.
The signals produced by actual defects during ultrasonic and eddy current examinations are
compared with the signals generated by the master notches, so as to define factor K for the various
types of defects:
Rejection criterion
K 
Master defect signal

Only tubes which give a response lower than or equal to the rejection criterion in ultrasonic or eddy
current examination shall be accepted.

M 4000 / 36  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 4105

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

In general, parts of tubes which contain unacceptable defects detected either by visual examination
or non-destructive examinations, shall be discarded.
Welding repairs shall not be authorized.
However, minor surface repairs may be performed using mild abrasives (polishing with an abrasive
belt with a grain size of at least 120 for external surfaces, blasting for internal surfaces) within
dimensional tolerances and provided that these operations are performed prior to the additional heat
treatment mentioned in paragraph 3.3.3.
The Manufacturer shall seek the Contractor’s opinion before performing any minor internal repairs
affecting more than 5% of the tubes in a lot, and provide him with an analysis report detailing all the
problems met (nature of the indications, origin, etc.) and how they were dealt with.
Upon completion of these minor repairs, the tubes shall be subjected to visual and volumetric
examination as stipulated in paragraphs 5 and 6.
After additional heat treatment, localised defective areas may only be removed by manual local
grinding using abrasive paper with a grade of at least 400.

8 BACKGROUND NOISE CONTROL IN EDDY CURRENT

EXAMINATION OF STEAM GENERATOR TUBES
The purpose of background noise level control using eddy current is to verify the feasibility of
in-service examination of steam generator tubes.

8.1 EXAMINATION SCOPE AND MODE

Before bending, the whole length of all tubes shall be subjected to eddy current examination in
compliance with MC 6000 as modified by the provisions of the following paragraphs, in order to
determine the background noise level.
All signals obtained during this examination shall be recorded.

8.2 ADJUSTMENT OF THE EQUIPMENT

The Supplier shall draw up a specification giving all relevant information on the equipment used,
the adjustment settings and the test procedures.

8.3 REFERENCE TUBE

The diameter, nominal wall thickness, and metallurgical and surface conditions of the reference tube
shall be the same as for the tubes being examined. It shall include 4 through-wall holes 1 mm in
diameter at 90° to each other in a same plane perpendicular to tube. The distance between the holes
and ends shall be such that the recorded signals are separate and distinct, without any interference or
amplification.

8.4 REJECTION CRITERIA

The background noise level is measured with reference to module peak-to-peak amplitude of the
reference signal obtained on the 4 through-wall holes 1 mm in diameter.

 n° 144-2014 M 4000 / 37
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4105

The background noise of each tube, as measured using an internal axial probe and in conformance
with the requirements of in-service examination (1) shall yield a signal-to-noise ratio not
lower than 7.
A local variation of the background noise level shall also be acceptable if the signal-to-noise ratio in
this area is not lower than 6.
The Supplier can propose an other examination method than the internal axial probe method. The
eddy current alternative method set-up by the Supplier shall allow to determine the background
noise level and to establish the correlation with the rejection criteria described above.

9 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
Subsequent to bending, all tubes shall be subjected to hydrostatic testing with demineralized water,
at the pressure stipulated in the purchase order.
In the case of short radius bends, the test shall be performed after the stress-relieving heat treatment
mentioned in paragraph 3.3.4.
The pressure shall be recorded during the holding period, which shall not be less than 10 seconds.
No leaks shall be tolerated.

10 DIMENSIONS - TOLERANCES
Straight and cold bent U-tube dimensions and tolerances shall be specified in the purchase order.
The ends of each U-tube shall be cut cleanly and squarely.

______________
(1) . Coils operating differential mode
Examples:
- type 2.1.2 for 19.05 mm diameter tubes (two 2mm wide windings spaced 1mm apart)
- type 2.0,5.2 for 22.22 mm diameter tubes (two 2mm wide windings spaced 0.5mm apart )

. Basic frequency for the examination shall be chosen so as to obtain a 90±5 phase shift between an outer wall
circonferential groove 1 mm thick and 10% tube thickness deep on the one hand and an inner wall circonferential
groove with same thickness and depth on the other hand.
Typical frequencies are:
- 240 kHz for tubes 22.22 mm in diameter
- 280 kHz for tubes 19.05 mm in diameter

. Peak-to-peak amplitude adjustment of the reference signal shall allow an electronic signal-to-noise ratio of at
least 25dB.
Typical adjustments are:
- 1300 mV for tubes 22.22 mm in diameter
- 1700 mV for tubes 19.05 mm in diameter

M 4000 / 38  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4105

11 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
11.1 CHECKING STRAIGHT TUBES BEFORE BENDING
The thickness of each tube is checked continuously by ultrasounds and the results are recorded.

11.2 CHECKING BENT U-TUBES

For each bent tube:
- caliber check on the external diameter at both ends and at 3 other points along the tube (this
check may be carried out by continuous testing before bending),
- check on the bend radius, the length, the separation and straightness of the straight legs and the
uniformity of the bend.

For each tube of each of the 3 smallest bending radii:

- ultrasonic examination on minimum thickness of the bend at the extrados,
- check on ovality in the bent parts on several cross-sections selected and specified in the purchase
order.

For U-tubes with greater bend radii:

- check on the minimum thickness of the bend at the extrados and ovality in the bent part, on the
first bend made and then on at least 5 % of the rest spread regularly throughout the lot of each
bending run.
Note: If the Supplier does not manufacture the tubes as per the present specification, this check is carried out on at
least 20 % of the tubes of the first bundle.

12 MARKING
The Supplier shall identify the marking methods used in accordance with B 1300.

13 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

The tubes shall be cleaned in accordance with the procedure given in the manufacturing instructions.
The cleanliness of each tube shall be checked by wiping the external surfaces with a rag and by
passing a plug through bent tubes.
The ends of the tube shall then be blanked by plugs and the tube shall then be packaged so that the
internal and external surfaces are protected during transportation and storage.
Tubes shall be supported inside the cases so that there is no movement or contact between the tubes.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 39
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4105

A packing drawing giving the references of the tubes and their position inside the case shall be
attached to the outside of the case.
The tubes shall be protected from moisture during shipment by sea and shall not be stored outside.
The packaging shall be fully protected.

14 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (annealing treatment, additional heat treatment, stress-
relieving heat treatment),
- mechanical tests,
- grain size measurement,
- non-destructive examination,
- hydrostatic testing,
- dimensional check,
- cleanliness check.

These reports shall include:

- tube or lot reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 4000 / 40  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4106

M 4106
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

FORGED OR ROLLED
CLASS 1, 2 AND 3 NC 30 Fe
NICKEL-CHROMIUM-IRON ALLOY PARTS

(TO BE ISSUED LATER)

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 41
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4106

M 4000 / 42  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4107

M 4107
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

HOT ROLLED NC 30 Fe
NICKEL-CHROMIUM-IRON
ALLOY PLATES

0 SCOPE
This specification covers hot rolled NC 30 Fe alloy plate the thickness of which is restricted
to 100 mm.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It may be vacuum or electroslag remelted.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analysis, shall satisfy the requirements
of table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis of a sample taken at the time of casting, certified by the
mill manager or his duly accredited representative. In the case of metal remelted by vacuum or
electroslag remelting, this analysis shall be performed on the bottom end of a remelted ingot. He
shall also supply a product chemical analysis performed at the top and bottom of the parent plate.
These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 43
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4107

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE NC 30 Fe

ELEMENT LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSES (%)

Carbon 0.010 to 0.040

Maximum Silicon 0.50
Maximum Manganese 0.50
Maximum Sulphur 0.010
Maximum Phosphorus 0.015
Chromium 28.00 - 31.00
Minimum Nickel 58.00
Iron 8.00 - 11.00
Maximum Copper 0.50
Maximum Aluminium 0.50
Maximum Titanium 0.50
Maximum Cobalt 0.20
Cobalt preferred requirements less than 0.10

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the Supplier shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
a) identification of melting process,
b) ingot weight and type,
c) top and bottom end discard percentages,
d) position of the plate in the ingot, in particular final rolling direction in relation to the ingot axis,
e) main rolling direction,
f) conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment,
g) position of acceptance test samples on the plate,
h) drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

M 4000 / 44  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4107

3.2 HEAT TREATMENT

3.2.1 Heat treatment for mechanical properties
The mechanical properties may be obtained either:
- by adjusting the temperature at the end of rolling and the cooling conditions (the temperature at
the end of rolling shall be as high as possible: greater than 970°C on the skin). The temperature
at the end of rolling and the cooling conditions shall be recorded.
- by performing heat treatment after rolling at a temperature greater than 1000°C. The temperature
shall be adjusted to obtain the mechanical properties required.

3.2.2 Additional heat treatment

The plates shall be subjected to heat treatment at 715°C±15°C for a minimum of 5 hours.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are given in table II.
TABLE II

NAME TEST
PROPERTIES REQUIRED VALUE
OF TEST TEMPERATURE

Room Rp0.2 240 to 400 MPa

Rm minimum value 550 MPa
Tensile A % (5d) minimum value 35

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 180 MPa

Rm minimum value 497 MPa

KV impact(1) Room Minimum average value 100 J

(1) Performed for class 1 equipment. The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at
ambient temperature is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from the plate as-delivered by the rolling mill (after additional heat
treatment). They shall be appropriately marked and shall show the final rolling direction.
The size of test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 45
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4107

Test specimens shall be taken halfway between the plate edge and its axis. Test specimens shall
always be taken at a distance from the edge of the sample greater than the thickness of the plate. The
longitudinal axis of the test specimens shall be perpendicular to the final rolling direction.
The longitudinal axis of the tensile test specimens and the KV impact test specimens is located at
mid-thickness for plates whose thickness is less than or equal to 30 mm or at quarter thickness for
plates whose thickness is greater than 30 mm.
The notch axis of the KV impact test specimens is perpendicular to the rolled skin.
For thicknesses less than or equal to 12 mm, the KV impact test is not performed.

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
For each rolled sheet or strip, the following tests shall be performed:
- one series of tests at the end corresponding to the top of the ingot for sheets or strips weighing
3000 kg or less,
- two series of tests, one at each end, for sheets or strips weighing more than 3000 kg.
- examination of the micrographic structure on the skin and in the thickness, top end (1/2 thickness
for T > 30 mm, 1/4 thickness for T  30 mm).
The number of tests to be performed and test temperatures are given in table III.
TABLE III

POSITION OF TEST SPECIMEN

NUMBER
NAME TEST
THICK- TOP BOTTOM OF TEST
OF TEMPERA- WEIGHT
NESS SPECI-
TEST TURE mid- quarter mid- quarter MENS
thickness thickness thickness thickness
 30 mm 1 – – – 1
 3000 kg
> 30 mm – 1 – – 1
Room
 30 mm 1 – 1 – 2
> 3000 kg
> 30 mm – 1 – 1 2
Tensile
 30 mm – – 1 – 1
 3000 kg
> 30 mm – – – 1 1
350°C
 30 mm – – 1 – 1
> 3000 kg
> 30 mm – – – 1 1
 30 mm 1 – – – 3
 3000 kg
KV > 30 mm – 1 – – 3
Room
impact(1)  30 mm 1 – 1 – 6
> 3000 kg
> 30 mm – 1 – 1 6
(1) Performed for class 1 equipment. The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient
temperature is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer.

M 4000 / 46  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4107

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.
For thicknesses less than 20 mm, the test specimen with a circular section may be replaced by a
specimen with a rectangular section, in accordance with MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- proof strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - KV IMPACT TESTS
a) Test Specimens
The shape and dimensions of specimens are those defined in MC 1000.

b) Tests
The tests are performed at ambient temperature in compliance with MC 1000.

c) Results
The average value for a series of three specimens must comply with the value specified in table
II. An individual value can be lower than the specified value, provided that it is not lower than
70% of the latter.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 47
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4107

If the conditions defined above are not met, it is necessary to take three more specimens on the
same specimen close to the test specimen which gave an unsatisfactory result, and to submit
them for testing.
The part can be accepted, if after the test on the second series of three test specimens, the
following conditions are all simultaneously met.
- the average value of the six tests must be equal to or higher than the specified minimum
value,
- at the most, two individual values out of six can be lower than the minimum specified value,
- one individual value out of the six can be lower than 70% of the specified value.
If not, the part and/or the lot is/are rejected.

C - MICROGRAPHIC STRUCTURE - GRAIN SIZE

The micrographic examination is performed on a transverse cross-section. The grain size (see
MC 1000) is notified for information purposes. Examination of the microstructure shall display a
mainly intergranular precipitation of carbides with little or no intragranular precipitation.

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test coupons shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in paragraph 4.2. The
test performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than one retreatment shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

All surfaces of the part at the final stage shall be subjected to a visual examination in accordance
with MC 7100.
Their surfaces shall be plane, uniform and free from buckles, blowholes, tears, cracks, blisters and
inclusions.
After cutting to as-delivered dimensions, the edges shall be visually examined in accordance with
MC 7200. There shall be no cleavage or lamination.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Ultrasonic examination is performed in accordance with MC 2400 which stipulates the conditions of
application of Standard NF EN 10307. The scanning plan and the criteria are those of classes S3 and
E4 of Standard NF EN 10307.

M 4000 / 48  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4107

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

7.1 REMOVAL BY GRINDING
The Supplier may remove surface defects by grinding, provided that:
- the remaining thickness is within the tolerances specified by the drawing,
- the cavity blends in smoothly with the surrounding surface,
- after removal, the surface is subjected to liquid penetrant examination in accordance with
MC 4000.

7.2 REPAIR BY WELDING

As a general rule, the rolling mill shall not be authorized to perform repair welding.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions of the plates shall comply with those specified on the drawing given in the purchase
order.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
Samples delivered with the part shall be marked in accordance with the provisions of the
purchase order.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product chemical analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data or end of rolling conditions; in the event of
retreatment, all treatments shall be notified.
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check,
- micrographic examination.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 49
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4107

These reports shall include:

- heat number and plate reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 4000 / 50  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4108

M 4108
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

HOT EXTRUDED NC 30 Fe
NICKEL-CHROMIUM-IRON
ALLOY TUBES

0 SCOPE
This specification covers hot extruded NC 30 Fe alloy tubes.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It may be vacuum or electroslag remelted.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analysis, shall satisfy the requirements
of table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis of a sample taken at the time of casting, certified by the
mill manager or his duly accredited representative. In the case of metal remelted by vacuum or
electroslag remelting, this analysis shall be performed on the bottom end of a remelted ingot. He
shall also supply a product chemical analysis.
These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 51
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 4108

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE NC 30 Fe
ELEMENT LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSES (%)

Carbon 0.010 to 0.040

Maximum Silicon 0.50
Maximum Manganese 0.50
Maximum Sulphur 0.010
Maximum Phosphorus 0.015
Chromium 28.00 - 31.00
Minimum Nickel 58.00
Iron 8.00 - 11.00
Maximum Copper 0.50
Maximum Aluminium 0.50
Maximum Titanium 0.50
Maximum Cobalt 0.20
Cobalt preferred requirements less than 0.10

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the Supplier shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
a) identification of melting process,
b) ingot weight and type,
c) top and bottom end discard percentages,
d) the various stages of hot working,
e) conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment,
f) position of acceptance test samples on the tube,
g) drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

3.2 HOT WORKING

The tubes are produced by hot extrusion of rounds and/or billets from an ingot with sufficient top
and bottom discarding.
The global ratio of reduction shall be greater than 3.

M 4000 / 52  n° 140-2013
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4108

3.3 HEAT TREATMENT

The final heat treatment for mechanical properties shall include heating at a temperature between
1000°C and 1150°C followed by rapid cooling. If the temperature at the end of working is within
the temperature limits and provided the required mechanical properties are obtained, heat treatment
in a furnace is not required. In this case, the temperature at the end of working and the cooling
conditions shall be recorded.
Parts shall be subjected to additional heat treatment at 715°C±15°C for a minimum of 5 hours.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are given in table II.
TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE VALUE
Tensile Room Rp0.2 240 to 400 MPa
Rm minimum value 550 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 35

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 180 MPa

Rm minimum value 497 MPa

Brinell hardness Room - For information

KV impact (1) Room Minimum average value 100 J

(1) Performed for class 1 equipment. The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at
ambient temperature is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken or cut from the end of the tube after the latter has been subjected to the
additional treatment. They shall be appropriately marked.
The size of test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
The centreline of the tensile and KV impact test specimens is parallel to the axis of the part and at
mid-thickness.
The notch axis of the impact test specimens is perpendicular to the rolled skin.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 53
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4108

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
A hardness measurement is made on one tube from each batch.
The mechanical properties are determined per batch.

The following are performed on each batch:

- 1 tension test at room temperature on 2 tubes from the batch,
- 1 tension test at 350°,

- 1 KV impact test at room temperature for class 1 equipment. The impact test may be waived if
the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the
material manufacturer
- 1 examination of the micrographic structure.

A batch is defined as being composed of tubes:

- from the same heat,
- of the same diameter,
- of the same thickness,
- subjected to the same manufacturing cycle,
- forming part of the same furnace charge or the same campaign of heat treatment for mechanical
properties.
A batch is limited to 50 lengths of manufacturing with a maximum of 200 metres.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.
Where the thickness of the tube does not allow obtaining circular section test specimens of
10 mm diameter, the tension test is performed on strips cut from the sleeve or sections of tube in
compliance with MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- proof strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture.

M 4000 / 54  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4108

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part and/or the lot are accepted; if not, they are rejected (see paragraph 4.4)

B - KV IMPACT TESTS
a) Test Specimens
The shape and dimensions of specimens are those defined in MC 1000.

b) Tests
The tests are performed at room temperature in compliance with MC 1000.

c) Results
The average value for a series of three specimens must comply with the value specified in table
II. An individual value can be lower than the specified value, provided that it is not lower than
70% of the latter.
If the conditions defined above are not met, it is necessary to take three more specimens on the
same specimen close to the test specimen which gave an unsatisfactory result, and to submit
them for testing.
The part and/or the lot can be accepted, if after the test on the second series of three test
specimens, the following conditions are all simultaneously met.
- the average value of the six tests must be equal to or higher than the specified minimum
value,
- at the most, two individual values out of six can be lower than the minimum specified value,
- only one individual value out of the six can be lower than 70% of the specified value.
If not, the part and/or the lot is/are rejected.

C - HARDNESS TESTS
The hardness tests shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 55
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4108

D - MICROGRAPHIC STRUCTURE - GRAIN SIZE

The micrographic examination is performed on a transverse cross-section. The grain size (see
MC 1000) is notified for information purposes. Examination of the microstructure shall display a
mainly intergranular precipitation of carbides with little or no intragranular precipitation.

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts and/or lots rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may
be retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report
In such cases, test coupons shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in paragraph 4.2. The
test performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

5.1 VISUAL EXAMINATION
All surfaces of the part which are accessible at the final stage shall be subjected to a visual
examination in accordance with MC 7100. Surfaces shall be sound, and free from injurious defects.

5.2 LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION

After final machining, liquid penetrant examination of the external surfaces and weld edges of the
tubes is performed.
The examination methods are given in MC 4000.
Indications with one dimension exceeding 1 mm shall be taken into account.

The following are unacceptable:

- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension exceeding 3 mm,
- three or more aligned indications less than 3 mm apart, edge to edge,

- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2 whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications.

M 4000 / 56  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4108

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
6.1 METHOD
The methods for ultrasonic examination are defined in MC 2500.
The surface condition shall conform to MC 2100.
The examination is performed using transverse waves with detection of longitudinal and transverse
defects.

6.2 STAGE AND EXTENT OF EXAMINATION

Ultrasonic examination is performed on the entire volume of the part after final machining to the
delivery profile.
Ends which are imperfectly examined on the automatic test bench are either discarded or examined
manually over at least 100 mm. The manual examination method shall be at least as sensitive as the
automated method; the reference part allowing adjusting sensitivity shall be the same as that used
for the automated examination.

6.3 CRITERIA
Only defects with a back echo lower than the echo produced by the reference tube notches defined
in MC 2534 shall be accepted.

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

In general, parts of sleeves presenting unacceptable defects detected by visual or non-destructive
examinations are discarded.
Surface defects may be removed by grinding provided that the remaining thickness is greater than
the minimum thickness and subject to taking the necessary precautions during grinding (avoiding
excessive heating, using iron-free corundum grinding wheels).
After grinding, the repaired area is subjected to liquid penetrant examination (see para. 5.2).
Any repair by welding is prohibited.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions of the parts shall comply with those specified on the drawing given in the purchase
order.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 57
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4108

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
Samples delivered with the part shall be marked in accordance with the provisions of the purchase
order.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product chemical analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data or end of rolling conditions; in the event of
retreatment, all treatments shall be notified.
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check,
- micrographic examination.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and tube reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 4000 / 58  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4109

M 4109
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

HOT ROLLED OR EXTRUDED NC 30 Fe

NICKEL-CHROMIUM-IRON
ALLOY BARS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers hot rolled or extruded NC 30 Fe alloy bars.
Hot rolled bars shall be used in the fabrication of steam generator tube plugs.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace. It may be vacuum or electroslag remelted.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product chemical analysis, shall satisfy the
requirements of table I.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis of a sample taken at the time of casting, certified by the
mill manager or his duly accredited representative. In the case of metal remelted by vacuum or
electroslag remelting, this analysis shall be performed on the bottom end of a remelted ingot. He
shall also supply a product chemical analysis.
These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 59
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4109

TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE NC 30 Fe

ELEMENT LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSES (%)

Carbon 0.010 to 0.040

Maximum Silicon 0.50
Maximum Manganese 0.50
Maximum Sulphur 0.010
Maximum Phosphorus 0.015
Chromium 28.00 - 31.00
Minimum Nickel 58.00
Iron 8.00 - 11.00
Maximum Copper 0.50
Maximum Aluminium 0.50
Maximum Titanium 0.50
Maximum Cobalt 0.20
Cobalt preferred requirements less than 0.10

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the Supplier shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
a) identification of melting process,
b) ingot weight and type,
c) top and bottom end discard percentages,
d) the various stages of hot working,
e) conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment,
f) position of acceptance test samples on the part,
g) drawing with position of test specimens on samples.

The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

3.2 HOT WORKING

The parts are produced by hot rolled or extrusion of rounds and/or billets from an ingot with
sufficient top and bottom discarding.
The global ratio of reduction shall be greater than 3.

M 4000 / 60  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4109

3.3 HEAT TREATMENT

The final heat treatment for mechanical properties shall include heating at a temperature between
1000°C and 1150°C followed by rapid cooling. If the temperature at the end of working is within
the temperature limits and provided the required mechanical properties are obtained, heat treatment
in a furnace is not required. In this case, the temperature at the end of working and the cooling
conditions shall be recorded.
Parts shall be subjected to additional heat treatment at 715°C±15°C for a minimum of 5 hours.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are given in table II.
TABLE II

NAME TEST REQUIRED

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE VALUE
Tensile (1) Room Rp0.2 240 to 400 MPa
Rm minimum value 550 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 35

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 180 MPa

Rm minimum value 497 MPa

KV impact (2) Room Minimum average value 100 J

BRINELL hardness Room - For information

(1) To obtain the required mechanical properties, bars to be used for the fabrication of steam
generator tube plugs may be drawn by a tension not exceeding 5%. When this is the case, a
tension test at room temperature shall be performed on each bar.
(2) Performed for class 1 equipment. The impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at
ambient temperature is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken or cut from the end of the bar after the latter has been subjected to the
additional heat treatment. They shall be appropriately marked. Samples shall be taken after
discarding the ends of bars in compliance with the qualification file.
The size of test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
The axis of the KV impact and tensile test specimens is parallel to the axis of the part at mid-radius.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 61
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4109

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
A hardness measurement is made on one bar from each batch.
The mechanical properties are determined per batch.

The following are performed on each batch;

- 1 tension test at room temperature,
- 1 tension test at 350°,
- 1 KV impact test at room temperature for class 1 equipment. The impact test may be waived if
the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the
material manufacturer
- 1 examination of the micrographic structure.

A batch is defined as being composed of bars:

- from the same heat,
- of the same diameter,
- of the same thickness,
- subjected to the same manufacturing cycle,
- forming part of the same furnace charge or the same campaign of heat treatment for mechanical
properties.
A batch is limited to 5000 kg.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- proof strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture.

M 4000 / 62  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4109

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part and/or the lot are accepted; if not, they are rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - KV IMPACT BENDING TESTS

a) Test Specimens
The shape and dimensions of specimens are those defined in MC 1000.

b) Tests
The tests are performed at ambient temperature in compliance with MC 1000.

c) Results
The average value for a series of three specimens must comply with the value specified in
table II. An individual value can be lower than the specified value, provided that it is not lower
than 70% of the latter.
If the conditions defined above are not met, it is necessary to take three more specimens on the
same specimen close to the test specimen which gave an unsatisfactory result, and to submit
them for testing.
The part and/or the lot can be accepted, if after the test on the second series of three test
specimens, the following conditions are all simultaneously met.
- the average value of the six tests must be equal to or higher than the specified minimum
value,
- at the most, two individual values out of six can be lower than the minimum specified value,
- only one individual value out of the six can be lower than 70% of the specified value.
If not, the part and/or the lot is/are rejected.

C - HARDNESS TESTS
The hardness tests shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 63
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4109

D - MICROGRAPHIC STRUCTURE - GRAIN SIZE

The micrographic examination is performed on a transverse cross-section of the part. The grain size
index (see MC 1000) shall be between 4 and 7 (preferred value 5 to 7).
Examination of the microstructure shall display a mainly intergranular precipitation of carbides with
little or no intragranular precipitation.

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts and/or lots rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may
be retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test coupons shall be taken in the same conditions as specified in paragraph 4.2. The
test performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

5.1 VISUAL EXAMINATION
All surfaces of the part at the final stage shall be subjected to a visual examination in accordance
with MC 7100. Surfaces shall be sound, and free from injurious defects.

5.2 LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION

After final machining, liquid penetrant examination of the part with its delivery profile is performed.
The examination methods are given in MC 4000.
Indications with one dimension exceeding 1 mm shall be taken into account.
The following are unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension exceeding 3 mm,
- three or more aligned indications less than 3 mm apart, edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2 whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance
with MC 2300.

M 4000 / 64  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4109

6.1 STAGE OF EXAMINATION

The examination is performed after solution heat treatment.

6.2 METHOD
The examination methods are described in MC 2300.
The probe frequency normally used is 2 MHz.

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND EXTENT OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-4 or with
paragraph 13.3 of standard NF EN 10308.
Parts type is 1.

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-4 or with
paragraph 14 of standard NF EN 10308.

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND CRITERIA

The recordable conditions and the acceptance criteria are those of quality class 2 of the thickness
≤ 75 mm in standard NF EN 10228-4 or standard NF EN 10308.

7 REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE AREAS

In general, parts of bars presenting unacceptable defects detected by visual or non-destructive
examinations are discarded.
Surface defects may be removed by grinding provided that the remaining thickness is greater than
the minimum thickness and subject to taking the necessary precautions during grinding (avoiding
excessive heating, using iron-free corundum grinding wheels).
After grinding, the repaired area is subjected to liquid penetrant examination (see para. 5.2).
Any repair by welding is prohibited.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions of the parts shall comply with those specified on the drawing given in the purchase
order.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 65
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4109

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B 1300.
Samples delivered with the part shall be marked in accordance with the provisions of the purchase
order.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product chemical analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data or end of rolling conditions; in the event of
retreatment, all treatments shall be notified.
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check,
- micrographic examination.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and plate reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 4000 / 66  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4301

M 4301
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CLASS 3 COPPER-ALUMINIUM CASTINGS

FOR PWR AUXILIARY SYSTEM
PUMPS AND VALVES

0 SCOPE
This specification covers copper-aluminium cast parts, such as pump castings, heads and impellers
for PWR pump systems, and valve parts.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The metal shall be made using a crucible furnace or an electric furnace or by any other technically
equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I.
TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE Cu A 10 Fe5 Ni5

ELEMENT LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSIS (%)

Aluminium 8.2 to 10.5

Iron 3 to 6
Nickel 4 to 6.5
Maximum Manganese 2
Copper Remainder
Maximum Zinc  0.3
Maximum Silicium  0.09
 (1)
Maximum Tin  0.1
Maximum Lead  0.05

(1) These four elements together shall not exceed 0.5.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 67
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4301

In addition, the following condition shall be met:

Ni
A  8.2 
2

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The foundry shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. The foundry shall also supply an analysis on one part per lot.
This analysis may be performed on metal discard from mechanical test specimens. Only those
elements mentioned in table I shall be analyzed.
These analyses shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.

2.3 STRUCTURE
The exact proportions of the various alloy elements and the cooling rate of the casting shall be such
that the transformation from the ß phase to the decomposition ( + KIII) shall at least have initiated.
The ß phase shall be partially decomposed into eutectoid  + KIII aggregate.

2.4 STRUCTURAL EXAMINATION

A micrographic examination shall be performed on each lot as defined in paragraph 4.3.1 in order to
check the structure as defined in paragraph 2.3 above. This examination may be performed on
mechanical test specimens.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the foundry shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identificaiton of melting process,
- identification of casting method,
- part procurement drawing with positions of any samples which are integrally attached or adjacent
to the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various, sampling, non-destructive examination and repair welding operations shall be
presented in chronological order.

PROTOTYPE PART
The manufacturing method shall be tested using a prototype part produced in accordance with the
requirements of M 160.
This prototype part shall not be required for pump internals (impellers, diffusers, etc.) or valve
internals (disks, etc.).

M 4000 / 68  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4301

The criteria to be adopted for radiographic examination shall be those corresponding to the
reference radiographs of ASTM standard E.272, severity level 3.

3.2 CASTING
The choice of casting method shall be left to the foundry. This method shall be identified in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

3.3 MACHINING
Parts shall be machined as indicated on the procurement drawing.
Surface roughness of the areas to be tested shall be such that the results of non-destructive
examinations are significantly accurate. These surface roughness values are given in SECTION III.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Parts shall be delivered in the rough-cast condition.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

TABLE II

TEST REQUIRED
NAME OF TEST PROPERTIES
TEMPERATURE VALUE

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 240 MPa

Rm minimum value 630 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 12
2 Rm + 10A minimum value 1400

KU impact Room for information

Brinell hardness for information

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall consist of annexes attached to the part or of separate or adjacent test ingots. The
smallest dimension of the test ingot cross-section shall be representative of the maximum thickness
of the part wall excluding flanges, but shall not be less than 28 mm.
The samples shall be taken so that the axes of the test specimens are located at least one quarter of
the maximum thickness of the part from the part from the skins, at a minimum distance of 14 mm
and a maximum distance of 60 mm.
The samples shall be of sufficient size to ensure that the necessary number of test specimens may be
taken for the tests prescribed and for any retests required.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 69
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4301

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
The mechanical properties shall be determined by lot. A lot is defined as comprising parts from the
same heat of steel. A lot shall be restricted to 800 kg. For impellers and valve parts weighing more
than 500 kg and for pump casings, each part shall constitute a lot.
The number and content of tests is given in table III.
As with the test samples, each part of the lot shall be subjected to a Brinell hardness test, in order to
ensure that the mechanical properties recorded are truly representative.
TABLE III

NUMBER OF
CONDITION OF TEST
NAME OF TEST SPECIMENS PER
SAMPLE TEMPERATURE
TYPE OF TEST

Tension as-cast Room 1

KU impact as-cast + 20°C 2
Brinell hardness as-cast Room –

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2 % offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen.
If the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

M 4000 / 70  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4301

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens and test method
KU impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Two test specimens shall be broken for each test series.

b) Results
These values shall be recorded for information purposes.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
Sand shall be carefully removed from the parts, which shall then be trimmed to eliminate risers and
vent scrap, parting lines and runners. Parts shall then be subjected to a complete visual examination
in accordance with MC 7100.
Surfaces shall be carefully examined during all stages of manufacture and machining to ensure that
the metal is sound.
Parts shall be sound and free from defects such as scale, cracks, porosities, sand inclusions, or other
injurious defects.

SURFACE ROUGHNESS
The hydraulic channels shall be in the rough-cast condition and shall have a surface roughness of at
least 6.3 µm . The other surfaces left in rough-cast condition shall have a roughness of at least
12.5 µm . If the surface roughness of certain areas is greater than the above values, grinding shall be
performed in order to obtain the required roughness, although it is not necessary to remove entirely
all foundry marks. Zones repaired by welding shall be ground in order to obtain a surface roughness
of at least 3.2 µm . Liquid penetrant examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 4000.
Shot-blasting and sand-blasting operations shall not be authorized prior to this examination.

5.1 DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The surfaces to be subjected to liquid penetrant examination are as follows:

5.1.1 Rough-cast impellers

On surfaces 3 and 4 as shown in annex 1, when they are accessible.

5.1.2 Pump casing

On the seal lip.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 71
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4301

5.1.3 Valve body

On the sealing surfaces.

5.1.4 Other parts

Liquid penetrant examination shall not be required.

5.2 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any defect with one dimension of 2 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.

All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired.

5.2.1 Impellers
Parts shall fall into two categories, B and C, in accordance with C and D 2000.
a) Category B
- Linear indications whose greatest dimension exceeds:
. 3 mm for wall thicknesses of 16 mm or less,
. 5 mm for wall thicknesses of 16 mm or more.
- 3 or more aligned indications less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge).
- 10 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2 whose greatest
dimension shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the
indications being evaluated.
- Rounded indications with one dimension greater than:
. 3 mm for wall thicknesses of 16 mm or less,
. 5 mm for wall thicknesses greater than 16 mm.

b) Category C
- Linear indications whose greatest dimension exceeds 5 mm.
- Aligned indications less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge).
- 10 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest
dimension shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the
indications being evaluated.
- Rounded indications with one dimension greater than 5 mm.

M 4000 / 72  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4301

5.2.2 Other parts

- Linear indications whose greatest dimension exceeds 5 mm.
- Aligned indications less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge).
- 10 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.
- Rounded indications with one dimension greater than 5 mm.

6 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

6.1 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITHOUT REPAIR WELDING
Defects detected by surface examination or magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination may
be eliminated by grinding, provided the thickness of the ground areas remains within the tolerances
specified on the drawing and that the resulting cavities are not injurious to the areas around them.
Where this is not the case, the requirements of paragraph 6.2 shall apply.
Overheating of the ground surface must be avoided during grinding:
- cavities must blend in smoothly with surrounding areas,
- cavities shall be subjected to liquid penetrant examination in accordance with the procedures and
criteria described in paragraph 5.2 of this specification.

6.2 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITH REPAIR WELDING

6.2.1 Removal of defects
Areas whose defects do not meet the acceptability criteria defined in paragraphs 5 and 6 shall be
excavated by grinding.
Excavation cavities shall be subjected to liquid penetrant examination in accordance with the
procedures and criteria described in paragraph 5 of this specification.

EXAMINATION CRITERIA
All indications shall be recorded. The following indications shall be unacceptable:
- indications whose greatest dimension exceeds 3 mm,
- more than 2 indications per 4 cm2 of surface area.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 73
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4301

6.2.2 Repair welding

Repair shall be made by welding using rods (graphite electrode process) or possibly drawn copper-
aluminium wire (TIG process) whose chemical composition shall meet the following requirements:
- aluminium 8.4 - 9.6%
- iron  2%
- nickel 2 - 4%
- manganese  1.5%
- zinc  0.3% (1)
- silicon  0.09% (1)
- tin  0.1% (1)
- lead  0.05% (1)
In addition, the following condition shall be met:
Ni
A  8.2 
2
The foundry shall give precise details of repair procedures in a document drawn up in accordance
with the requirements of SECTION IV, taking into account the following particulars for the
realisation of the different tests and for the results to be obtained:
- lines of hardness measurements and toughness tests are not required,
- bend test specimen thickness shall be decreased to 3 mm. In case of face or root bend tests, the
specimens are removed from the skin. The bend test is done using a mandrel of diameter D = 52
mm and rollers spaced at distance P = 60 mm from one another.
The test shall show that there is no evidence of cracks and that isolated hot tears, open porosity
and inclusions are no more than 1.5 mm long,
- results of longitudinal tensile test of weld metal shall show values higher than the following
values:
Rm : 550 MPa

Rp0.2 : 240 MPa

A% (5d) : 18
- transverse weld ultimate tensile strength shall not be lower than 550 MPa,
- during metallographic examinations, micrographic examinations (minimal magnification of 300)
shall allow to verify that no microcracks exist and to make sure that transformation from the 
phase to  + KIII has at least been initiated.  phase shall partially be decomposed into  + KIII
aggregates showing eutectoid aspect.

__________________
(1) The sum of these four elements shall not exceed 0.5%.

M 4000 / 74  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4301

6.2.3 Heat treatment after repair welding

Heat treatment shall not be required after repair welding.

6.3 EXAMINATION OF WELD REPAIRS

Liquid penetrant examination shall be performed on all repair areas.
Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 5 of this
specification.
Charts showing the exact location and dimensions of major repairs shall be prepared.
The terms "major" and "minor" excavation cavities are defined in annexes 2 and 3 of this
specification.

7 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensional characteristics of parts after final machining shall comply with the procurement
drawing.

8 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with D 1300.

9 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

10 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- mechanical tests,
- charts of major repairs,
- for all repairs by welding (major and minor):
. production weld data sheets,
. welding procedure data sheets and filler materials acceptance reports quoted in production
weld data sheets.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 75
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4301

- dimensional checks.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 4000 / 76  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4301

ANNEX 1

TEST AREA 1 = Outlet vane TEST AREA 4 = Vane-to-shroud radius

TEST AREA 2 = Inlet vane TEST AREA 5 = Hub

TEST AREA 3 = Leaktight seal bearing surface TEST AREA 6 = Channels

AREAS TO BE EXAMINED BY LIQUID

PENETRANT EXAMINATION

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 77
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4301

ANNEX 2

M 4000 / 78  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4301

ANNEX 3

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
SURFACE TO BE MACHINED

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 79
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4301

ANNEXE 3 (cont.)

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
UNMACHINED SURFACE

M 4000 / 80  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4401

M 4401
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

TITANIUM PLATE FOR USE

IN THE FABRICATION OF CLASS 3
HEAT EXCHANGER PLATES

0 SCOPE
This specification covers titanium plate of maximum thickness 1.5 mm, intended for use in the
fabrication of exchange surfaces and formed by deep dishing for class 3 plate type heat exchanger.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The choice of melting process shall be left to the producer. It shall be indicated in the manufacturing
programme.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and plate analysis, shall satisfy the requirements
of table I.
TABLE I

ELEMENT LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSES (%)

Maximum carbon 0.05

Maximum iron 0.06
Maximum nitrogen 0.03
Maximum oxygen 0.10
Maximum hydrogen 0.013
Titanium remainder

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 81
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4401

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.
The chemical analysis shall be performed on one plate sample per lot, as specified in
paragraph 4.3.1. This analysis shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to the commencement of manufacturing operations, the Supplier shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include:
- identification of titanium melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- identification of principal hot and cold working operations,
- conditions for final heat treatment for mechanical properties,
- type of surface treatment used,
- position of acceptance test samples on the plate,
- drawing with position of test specimens on these samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

3.2 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The plates shall be heat treated. They shall be subjected to annealing, the procedures for which shall
be given in the manufacturing programme.
The plates shall be blasted at the as-delivered condition stage. However, in case of vacuum type
final heat treatment, blasting may be performed at an earlier stage.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are given in table II.

M 4000 / 82  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4401

TABLE II

TEST REQUIRED
NAME OF TEST PROPERTIES
TEMPERATURE VALUE
Tension Room Rp0.2 190-310 MPa
Rm 290-415 MPa
R p 0, 2
ratio, maximum value 0.75
Rm
A % (5D) minimum value 30
Vickers hardness HV5 Room Maximum value 150
Bending to 105° Room no cracks
Dishing with clamped Room Minimum deflection value 10 mm
test specimen edges

4.2 SAMPLING
Samples shall be taken (or cut) after the plate has undergone heat treatment subsequent to cold
rolling. They shall be appropriately marked and shall show the final rolling direction.
The size of samples shall be such that they can provide enough specimens for all tests and retests.
The longitudinal axis of tension test specimens shall be perpendicular to the rolling direction.
The longitudinal axis of half the bend test specimens shall be perpendicular to the rolling direction
and parallel to this direction for the other half (see table III).

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Definition of a lot
A lot is defined as comprising plates, sheets or strips of the same thickness, from the same heat,
subjected to the same processing cycle, from the same furnace charge or the same heat treatment
run. A lot shall be restricted to 3000 kg.

4.3.2 Number and content of tests

One series of tests shall be performed for each lot. The number of tests to be performed is given in
table III.

4.3.3 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall satisfy the requirements of MC 1211 B.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 83
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4401

TABLE III

NUMBER OF
ORIENTATION TEST
NAME OF TEST SPECIMENS PER
OF SAMPLE TEMPERATURE
TYPE OF TEST

Tension Perpendicular to Room 2

rolling direction

Bend Perpendicular to Room 2

rolling direction

Bend Parallel to rolling Room 2

direction

HV5 hardness

Dishing with clamped Room 2

test specimen edges

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected.

B - BEND TEST
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the requirements of MC 1262.

M 4000 / 84  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4401

b) Test method
The bend test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1262, in the following way:
- each face of the product shall be tested twice. One test sample shall be taken perpendicular to
the rolling direction and the other parallel to it,
- mandrel diameter shall be twice the thickness of the product being tested,
- the bend angle shall be 105°. The test shall be continued to 180° for information purposes.

c) Results
The results obtained shall meet the requirements of table II.

C - DISHING TEST WITH CLAMPED TEST SPECIMEN EDGES

a) Test specimen
Test specimens shall comply with the requirements of MC 1265.

b) Test method
The dishing test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1265.

c) Results
The results obtained shall satisfy the requirements of table II.

4.3.4 Determination of grain size

The grain size shall be determined in accordance with MC 1331.

RESULT
With enlargement of 100, the grain size number shall be between 4 and 8.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

The plates shall be visually examined. Their surfaces shall be plane, uniform and free from buckles,
blowholes, tears, cracks, blisters and inclusions.

6 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

No repairs shall be authorized.

 n° 137-2012 M 4000 / 85
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 4401

7 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions of the plates, sheets or strips shall comply with those indicated on the procurement
drawing or in the purchase order.

8 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in accordance with B,
C and D 1300.
Samples delivered with the part shall be marked in accordance with the stipulations of the purchase
order.

9 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORT

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

10 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and plate, sheet or strip reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 4000 / 86  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

M 5110
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

ROLLED OR FORGED BARS FOR

BOLTING, VALVE STEMS AND OTHER PARTS
FOR CLASS 1, 2 AND 3

0 SCOPE
This specification covers the procurement of rolled or forged bars intended in particular for the
manufacture of bolting and valve stems of class 1, 2, 3, and of parts listed in tables B, C and D 2200
referring to this PPS and not covered by a specific procurement specification
The following are detailed in annexes I and II:
- the scope of application of the steel grades used,
- the examinations to be performed on the bars according to class and diameter.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The recommended melting processes shall be given in the technical specifications for each grade,
appended to this specification.
However, the steelmaker may adopt a different melting process. In this case, this process shall be
indicated in the acceptance report.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements of the technical specifications for each grade appended to this specification.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. Verification of the product analysis is usually stipulated in the purchase order. It is
mandatory for class 1 materials. These analyses shall be performed in accordance with requirements
of chapter MC 1000. The product analysis may be performed on metal discard from mechanical
test specimens.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 1
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 ROLLING OR FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.

3.2 MACHINING
3.2.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Bar diameters shall correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered diameter. These diameters
shall be given in the acceptance report.

3.2.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The bars shall be machined in accordance with the requirements of the drawings. Surface condition
shall be suitable for non-destructive testing, as detailed in SECTION III for the examinations
concerned here. The surface condition shall be determined in accordance with MC 7200.

3.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Bars shall be delivered in the as-treated condition.
They may exceptionally be delivered in a condition other than that in which they are to be used. In
this case, the bar Supplier must prove that the stipulated final heat treatment properties have been
obtained.
The treatment applied shall be that indicated in the technical specifications for each grade.
If the lot is to be retreated, the new heat treatment shall satisfy the same requirements.

WORK HARDENING
Austenitic stainless steels may be work hardened after solution heat treatment in order to obtain the
required mechanical properties. The work hardening ratio and the manufacturing process shall be
stated by the Supplier after assessment of any additional requirements contained in the procurement
specification or other contractual documents.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in the technical specifications for each grade appended
to this specification.

M 5000 / 2  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

4.2 SAMPLING
4.2.1 Definition of a lot
The term "lot" applies to bars of similar cross-sections (as defined below) from the same heat,
subjected to the same manufacturing cycle and heat treated in the same furnace load if a batch
furnace is used or subjected to the same series of heat treatments.
dia. max
 1.1
dia. min

e max S max
 1.1 and  1.25
e min S min

4.2.2 Brinell hardness tests

Hardness tests shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. A hardness indentation shall be
made on each bar of the lot.
Firstly, these tests provide an indication of the homogeneity of both the bars and the lot, and
secondly they allow prolongations for tests to be selected.
a) Case of bars delivered in the as-treated condition.
The values obtained shall meet the requirements stipulated in paragraph 4.1.

b) Case of bars delivered in the as-manufactured condition or which shall be subjected to

subsequent heat treatment modifying their mechanical properties.
The values obtained on samples subjected to simulated heat treatment shall meet the
requirements stipulated in paragraph 4.1.

4.2.3 Test prolongations

Test samples shall be taken from prolongations of bars. They shall be cropped after all heat
treatment have been completed.
Prolongations shall be taken:
- for non-work hardened bars:
. from 4% of the bars and at least two bars, taking 2% of the bars with the highest hardness
value in the lot and 2% of the bars with the lowest hardness value. One hardness test shall be
made on each bar,
- for work hardened austenitic stainless bars:
. on each bar, if cold working is performed bar by bar,
. on one bar of the lot, if the lot is taken from a crown which is rolled, unrolled and cold
worked in a single pass.
The size of test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 3
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

4.2.4 Sampling
Test specimens shall be taken as follows:
- the test specimen centreline shall be parallel to the bar centreline, and it shall be located at a
distance from the skin such as defined below:
. for diameters  25 mm, along the centreline of the bar,
. for diameters < 25  50 mm, at 12.5 mm from the skin,
. for diameters > 50 mm, at mid-radius,

- the test pertinent area of the test specimens shall be at a distance from the end of the bar not
smaller than the diameter of the bar.
For bars delivered in the as-treated condition, tests shall be performed on specimens taken from
samples which were not subjected to heat treatment after sampling.
For bars delivered in the as-manufactured condition or which must be subjected, during working, to
heat treatments which modify their mechanical properties, tests shall be performed on samples
subjected to simulated heat treatment.

4.3 TESTING OF SAMPLES

4.3.1 Number and content of tests
A series of mechanical tests shall be performed on each sample as defined in annex II

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture for class 1 bars.

M 5000 / 4  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in the technical specifications for each grade.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction the test shall be repeated using another specimen.
If the results of the second test are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective.
If the results of the retests are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected
and the requirements of paragraph 4.4 "Retreatment" shall apply.

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and method
Impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of these
specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
A test comprises the fracture of three test specimens.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage values given in the annexes must be fulfilled.
1) Retest procedures for unalloyed, alloyed steels and martensitic stainless steels
The lot shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements. However, where the
only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the required minimum
value, retests may be performed in accordance with the following procedure:
- two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall be tested at the
same temperature as the first set,
- if results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do not comply with the
requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the lot shall be rejected, and the requirements of
paragraph 4.4 "Retreatment" shall apply.
2) Retest procedures for austenitic stainless steels
If the conditions defined above are not fulfilled, three additional specimens shall be taken next
to the specimen that produced the unsatisfactory result and tested.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 5
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

The part and/or lot can be accepted after the test performed on the second series of three
specimens, if the following conditions are simultaneously satisfied:
- the mean value of the six tests shall be greater than or equal to the minimum specified
value,
- no more than two individual values out of the six shall be less than the minimum specified
value,
- only one individual value out of the six shall be less than 70% of the specified value.
If this is not the case, the part or lot shall be rejected.

4.4 RETREATMENT
Lots rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, the requirements for taking test specimens are those defined in paragraph 4.2, and the
tests shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

5.1 VISUAL EXAMINATION
Bar surfaces shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of production and machining to check
the soundness of the metal.
This examination shall be performed during both descaling and final machining of the bars.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects.
If, on surface examination, a part is found to have defects, it cannot be accepted as-is, and the
requirements of paragraph 7 of this specification shall apply.

5.2 LIQUID PENETRANT OR MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION

Class 1 and 2 bars with diameters of 25 mm or more: one of the two examinations shall be
performed.
If these tests are performed on a finished part, they do not have to be performed on bars. The extent
and severity of examinations on finished parts are defined in specification M 5140.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any indication with a dimension greater than 1 mm shall be taken into consideration.

M 5000 / 6  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

5.2.1 Liquid penetrant examination

Liquid penetrant examination procedures shall be in accordance with MC 4000.
The entire surface shall be examined after final machining.
The following shall not be acceptable:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications in a line separated by less than 3 mm (edge to edge),
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

5.2.2 Magnetic particle examination

Magnetic particle examination procedures shall be as defined in MC 5140.
Particular care should be taken to avoid overheating during examination of alloy steel or high
carbon content steel when magnetizing is obtained by the electric current flow technique.
The following shall not be acceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two separate indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.
If the above-mentioned examinations detect defects which exceed the limits described, they cannot
be accepted as-is and the instructions of paragraph 7 shall apply.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Ultrasonic examination shall be performed on class 1 and 2 bars with a diameter of 50 mm or more
in accordance with MC 2300.

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed on the as-delivered part.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 7
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 5110

6.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
The probe frequency and diameter shall be chosen according to the structure of the material to be
examined and shall comply with the requirements of MC 2100.

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the bars shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
The examination shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 13.3 of standard NF EN 10308 or
with paragraph 12.4 of the following:
- standard NF EN 10228-3 in the case of ferritic and martensitic steels or
- standard NF EN 10228-4 in the case of austenitic and austenitic-ferritic steels.
If the examination cannot be performed by rotation it shall be performed on a grid layout as per
paragraph 12.3 of standards NF EN 10228-3 or 4 or as per paragraph 13.2 of standard
NF EN 10308.
The part type is 1a.

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3 and 4
or with paragraph 14 of standard NF EN 10308.

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are:
- those of quality class 3 in standard NF EN 10228-3 or of standard NF EN 10308 in the case of
ferritic and martensitic steels,
- those of quality class 2 standard NF EN 10228-4 or of standard NF EN 10308 in the case of
austenitic and austenitic-ferritic steels.

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

The mill manager or steelmaker may eliminate surface faults by grinding as long as tolerance
requirements are met on the as-delivered parts. The excavation cavity shall blend smoothly into the
adjacent surface.
After grinding, magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examinations shall be performed in accordance
with the requirements of MC 5000 or MC 4000.
Applicable criteria shall be those given in paragraph 5.2.

M 5000 / 8  n° 140-2013
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings.
The values shall be within the tolerances given on the drawings.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B,
C and D 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- heat treatment certificate stating the diameter of the bars treated temperature and time of
treatment performed,
- work hardening ratio, where applicable,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examination,
- dimensional checks.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 9
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 5110

ANNEX I

I - Bolting, valve stems and control rod drive mechanisms

Table A1

Steel grades to be used

DESCRIPTION BOLTING MATERIALS (6)

Valves and Steam CRDM

Valve
fittings, Thermo generator (rod
GRADE stems
Pressurizers sleeves
pumps couple (6)
No.2 and 3 seal coupling)
piping, column housing for
etc primary pumps

XC steels as per
Carbon steel
NF EN 10083-2 (1) (5) X
Steels as per
NF EN 10083-3 (5)
X
NF EN 10269 + A1 (5)
Alloy steel (2) X
and grades
42 Cr Mo 4
X
42 CD V4 X
X12 Cr 13 (1) X X (4)
Martensitic X12 CrNi 13 X X (4)
stainless steel X
X6 CrNiMo 16-4 (3) X X
Non-work Z6 CN 18.10 X
hardened Z5 CN 18.10 X X
austenitic Z6 CND 17.12 X X
steels Z5 CND 17.12 X
Work-hardened Z6 CN 18.10 X X
austenitic Z5 CN 18.10 X X
stainless Z6 CND 17.12 X X
steels Z5 CND 17.12 X X
Special brand
stainless steels

- Martensitic X12 CrNiMoV 12-3 (1) X X

steels
- Age-hardened  X6 CrNiCu 17 - 04 (3) X X

martensitic  X6 CrNiCuMo 15 - 04 (3) X X
steels  X5 CrNiCuMo 15 - 06 (3)
 X X

- Age-hardened
austenitic X6 NiCrTiMoVB 25-15-2 X X X
steels

M 5000 / 10  n° 144-2014
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

Table A1 (cont.)

(1) This grade is to be used only for class 2 and 3 components, in accordance with required energy absorbed by
breakage values.
(2) The use of these in water or steam at service temperatures in excess of 150°C shall take into consideration the
risk of stress corrosion.
(3) Grade X5 CrNiCuMo 15.06 is recommended for prolonged use at service temperatures in excess of 250°C. The
use of grades X6 CrNiMo 16.4, X6 CrNiCu 17.04, X6 CrNiCuMo 15.04 under the same conditions shall take
into consideration the risk of embrittlement in service and shall not be envisaged unless a justification report is
sent for approval to the Manufacturer.
(4) Selection of these grades shall take into consideration the risk of corrosion due to pitting.
(5) Steel groups selected in accordance with NF EN 10027-2:
. NF EN 10083-2 : groupes 11 et 12
. NF EN 10083-3 : groupes 58, 65, 67, 70, 72 et 81
. NF EN 10269 + A1 : groupes 56, 73 et 77
(6) For parts with a pressure resistant role, more stringent criteria than those set forth in this specification may be
prescribed by the Manufacturer in accordance with the applicable regulations.
Note: "Service temperature" is defined as being the temperature of the surface of the part as evaluated by circulation
or measured under nominal usage conditions of the system.

II - Other parts in accordance with tables B, C and D 2200 (valves, stop valves, etc.)
The technical data sheets for each useable grade are attached in the appendices. Restrictions of use
(notes (1) to (5) of table A1) are applicable.
For parts with a pressure resistant role, more stringent criteria than those set forth in this
specification may be prescribed by the Manufacturer in accordance with the applicable regulations.

For each grade, the following annexes stipulate:

- the melting process,
- chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analysis,
- heat treatment,
- mechanical properties of treated bars

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 11
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

ANNEX II
EXAMINATIONS PERFORMED ON BARS
FOR BOLTING AND RODS ACCORDING
TO CLASS AND DIAMETERS

dia. < 15  dia. 25  dia. dia. 

EXAMINATIONS CLASS
15 mm < 25 mm < 50 mm 50 mm
Dimensional    
Ladle analysis    
Product analysis    
Heat treatment certificate    
Hardness 1    
Tension (1)    
Impact (3)   
Liquid penetrant or MPT  
Ultrasonic 
Dimensional    
Ladle analysis    
Product analysis (2) (2) (2) (2)
Heat treatment certificate    
Hardness 2    
Tension (1)    
Impact (3)   
Liquid penetrant or MPT  
Ultrasonic 
Dimensional    
Ladle analysis    
Product analysis (2) (2) (2) (2)
Heat treatment certificate    
Hardness 3    
Tension (1)    
Impact (3)   
Liquid penetrant or MPT
Ultrasonic

(1) Tension at high temperature, if stipulated in the equipment specification or other relevant contractual
document.

(2) Checking of the product chemical analysis is normally stipulated in the purchase order.

(3) For austenitic stainless steels, the impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient
temperature is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer.

M 5000 / 12  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

ANNEX III

CARBON STEELS

STEELS according to standard NF EN 10083-2

1) Melting process
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or by any other equivalent process.

2) Chemical requirements
According to standard NF EN 10083-2

3) Heat treatment
According to standard NF EN 10083-2. However, heat treatments different from those given
in this standard may be suggested to take account of the energy absorbed by breakage
requirements to be obtained.

4) Mechanical properties

NAME TEST
PROPERTIES REQUIRED
OFTEST TEMPERATURE VALUE
Tension Room Rpo,2 minimum value According to
Rm NF EN 10083-2

A% (5d) minimum value 14 (1)

KV impact 0 Minimum average value 40 J

(1) Or, for class 2 bars, A % ≥ 12 and Z ≥ 45 %

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 13
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

ANNEX IV

ALLOY STEELS
A - STEELS according to standard NF EN 10083-3 or NF EN 10269 + A1
1) Melting process
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or by the basic oxygen process or by any other
equivalent process.

2) Chemical requirements
According to standard NF EN 10083-3 or NF EN 10269 + A1

3) Heat treatment
According to standard NF EN 10083-3 or NF EN 10269 + A1. However, heat treatments
different from those given in this standard may be suggested to take account of the energy
absorbed by breakage requirements to be obtained.

4) Mechanical properties

NAME TEST REQUIRED

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE VALUE

Tension Room Rpo.2 minimum value According to

NF EN 10083-3
Rm or
NF EN 10269 + A1

A% (5d) minimum value 14 (1)

Minimum average value 60 J

KV impact (2) 0 Lateral expansion  0.64 mm

KV impact (3) 0 Minimum average value 40 J

(1) Or, for class 1 and 2 bars, A % ≥ 12 and Z ≥ 45 %

(2) For class 1 bars
(3) For class 2 and 3 bars

B - CHROMIUM-MOLYBDENUM STEELS - Grade 42 Cr Mo 4

1) Melting process
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or by the basic oxygen process or by any other
equivalent process.

M 5000 / 14  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

2) Chemical requirements

AFNOR GRADE 42 CrMo 4

ELEMENT
LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSIS (%)

C 0.38 - 0.48
Mn 0.75 - 1.00
Max. P 0.025
Max. S 0.015
Si 0.10 - 0.40
Cr 0.80 - 1.15
Mo 0.15 - 0.30

3) Heat treatment
- Slow cooling after forging or rolling,
- Austenitizing,
- Water or oil quenching,
- Tempering at a minimum temperature of T  600°C.

4) Mechanical properties

TEST REQUIRED VALUE

NAME
TEMPERA- PROPERTIES
OF TEST 65 < dia.  105 < dia. 
TURE dia.  65 mm
105 mm 180 mm

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 720 MPa 650 MPa 520 MPa
Rm 860 - 1060 MPa 790 - 990 MPa 690 - 890 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 14 14 16
Z % minimum value(1) 50 50 50

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 570 MPa 520 MPa 410 MPa

KV 0°C Minimum average value 60 J 60 J 60 J

impact(1) Lateral expansion  0.64 mm  0.64 mm  0.64 mm

KV 0°C Minimum average value 40 J 40 J 40 J

impact(2)

Hardness Room HB Brinell 248-352 248-352 248-352

(1) For class 1 bars

(2) For class 2 and 3 bars.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 15
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

C - CHROMIUM-MOLYBDENUM-VANADIUM STEELS - AFNOR Standard 42 CDV 4

1) Melting process
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or by the basic oxygen process or by any
other equivalent process.

2) Chemical requirements

AFNOR GRADE 42 CDV 4

ELEMENT
LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSIS (%)
C 0.36 - 0.44
Mn 0.45 - 0.70
Max. P 0.025 (1)
Max. S 0.015 (1)
Si 0.20 - 0.35
Cr 0.80 - 1.15
Mo 0.50 - 0.65
V 0.25 - 0.35
(1) For class 2 and 3, the maximum guaranteed values may be extended to 0.030%.

3) Heat treatment
- Slow cooling after forging or rolling,
- Austenitizing,
- Water or oil quenching,
- Tempering at a minimum temperature of T  650°C.

4) Mechanical properties

TEST REQUIRED VALUE

NAME
TEMPERA- PROPERTIES
OF TEST 65 < dia.  105 < dia. 
TURE dia.  65 mm
105 mm 180 mm
Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 722 MPa 655 MPa 585 MPa
Rm 865 - 1065 MPa 790 - 990 MPa 690 - 890 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 14 14 16
Z % minimum value(1) 50 50 50

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 620 MPa 570 MPa 510 MPa

KV 0°C Minimum average value 60 J 60 J 60 J

impact(1) Lateral expansion  0.64 mm  0.64 mm  0.64 mm

KV 0°C Minimum average value 40 J 40 J 40 J

impact (2)

Hardness Room HB Brinell 248-352 248-352 248-352

(1)For class 1 bars

(2)For class 2 and 3 bars.

M 5000 / 16  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

ANNEX V
MARTENSITIC STAINLESS STEELS
A - GRADE X12 Cr 13 - X12 CrNi 13
1) Melting process
The steel shall most often be made using an electric arc or induction furnace, or by any other
technically equivalent process. This grade may be melted or remelted in a vacuum.

2) Chemical requirements

GRADE
ELEMENT X12 Cr 13 X12 CrNi 13
LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSIS (%)

Carbon 0.08 - 0.15 0.08 - 0.15

Max. Manganese 1.00 1.00
Max. Phosphorus 0.030 0.030
Max. Sulphur 0.030 0.020
Max. Silicon 1.00 1.00
Chromium 11.50 - 13.50 11.50 - 13.50
_
Nickel 0.50 - 1.00
_
Max. Molybdenum 0.60

3) Heat treatment
- Slow cooling after forging or rolling.
- Austenitizing.
- Water or oil quenching.
- Tempering at a minimum temperature of T  600°C.

4) Mechanical properties

REQUIRED VALUE
NAME TEST dia  100 mm
PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE
X12 Cr 13 X12 CrNi 13
Tension Room Rp0,2 minimum value 590 MPa 590 MPa
Rm 760 - 960 MPa 760 - 960 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 15 15
Z % minimum value (1) 50 50

350°C Rtp0,2 minimum value 490 MPa 490 MPa

KV Impact 0°C Minimum average value 40 J 60 J

Hardness Room HB Brinell 228 - 285 228 - 285

(1) For class 1 bars

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 17
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

B - GRADE X6 CrNiMo 16-04

1) Melting process
Using an electric arc or induction furnace. It may be melted or remelted in a vacuum or by any
other technically equivalent process.

2) Chemical requirements
Ladle and product chemical analysis is given in the table bellow:

GRADE X6 CrNiMo 16-04

ELEMENT
LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSIS (%)

Max. Carbon 0.07

Max. Silicon 1.00
Max. Manganese 1.50
Max. Phosphorus (1) 0.025
Max. Sulphur (1) 0.020
Chromium 15.00 – 17.00
Nickel 3.50 – 5.00
Molybdenum 0.70 – 1.50
(1) For part analysis, the maximum guaranteed value is increased by 0.005%.

3) Heat treatment
- Austenitizing at 1020-1060°C.
- Oil quenching.
- Tempering at a minimum temperature of T  580°C.

4) Mechanical properties

NAME TEST
PROPERTIES REQUIRED VALUE
OF TEST TEMPERATURE

Tension Room Rp0,2 minimum value 700 MPa

Rm 900 - 1050 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 16
Z % minimum value (1) 45

350°C Rtp0,2 minimum value 585 MPa

KV Impact 0°C Minimum average value 60 J

(1) For class 1 bars

Mechanical properties are specified for diameter less than or equal to 250 mm

M 5000 / 18  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

ANNEX VI

AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEELS (NON-WORK-HARDENED)

GRADE Z6 CN 18.10 AND Z5 CN 18.10, Z6 CND 17.12 AND Z5 CND 17.12
1) Melting process
The steel shall usually be made using an electric arc or induction furnace or by any other
technically equivalent process. This grade may be melted or remelted in a vacuum or by any
other process giving equivalent properties.

2) Chemical requirements

GRADE
ELEMENT Z6 CN 18-10 Z5 CN 18-10 Z6 CND 17.12 Z5 CND 17.12
LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSIS (%)

Max. C 0.080 0.060 0.080 0.070

Max. Mn 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
Max. P (1) 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
Max. S (1) 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015
Max. Si 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
Ni 8.00 - 12.00 9.00 - 12.00 10.00 - 14.00 10.00 - 14.00
Cr 17.00 - 20.00 17.00 - 20.00 16.00 - 19.00 16.00 - 19.00
Mo – – 2.00 - 2.50 2.00 - 2.50
Max. Cu – 1.00 – 1.00

(1) For part analysis, the maximum guaranteed value is increased by 0.005%.

3) Heat treatment
- Solution heat treatment at between 1050 and 1150°C.

4) Mechanical properties

NAME TEST REQUIRED

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE VALUE

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 210 MPa

Rm minimum value 520 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 45
Z % minimum value (1) 50
350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value grade not contain-ing Mo : 125 MPa
grade containing Mo : 130 MPa

Hardness Room HB Brinell 126-192

(1) For class 1 bars

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 19
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

ANNEX VII

WORK HARDENED AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEELS

GRADE Z6 CN 18.10 AND Z5 CN 18.10, Z6 CND 17.12 AND Z5 CND 17.12

1) Melting process
The steel shall usually be made using an electric arc or induction furnace or by any other
technically equivalent process. This grade may be melted, or remelted in a vacuum or by any
other process giving equivalent properties.

2) Chemical requirements

GRADE
ELEMENT Z6 CN 18-10 Z5 CN 18-10 Z6 CND 17.12 Z5 CND 17.12
LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSIS (%)

Max. C 0.080 0.060 0.080 0.070

Max. Mn 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
Max. P (1) 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
Max. S (1) 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015
Max. Si 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
Ni 8.00 - 12.00 9.00 - 12.00 10.00 - 14.00 10.00 - 14.00
Cr 17.00 - 20.00 17.00 - 20.00 16.00 - 19.00 16.00 - 19.00
Mo – – 2.00 - 2.50 2.00 - 2.50
(1) For part analysis, the maximum guaranteed value is increased by 0.005%.

3) Heat treatment
- Solution heat treatment at between 1050 and 1150°C.

M 5000 / 20  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 21
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

ANNEX VIII

SPECIAL BRAND STAINLESS STEELS

A - GRADE X12 CrNiMoV 12-3: MARTENSITIC

1) Melting process
The steel shall usually be made using an electric arc or induction furnace, or any other
technically equivalent process. This grade may be melted or remelted in a vacuum.

2) Chemical requirements
Ladle and product chemical analysis is given in the table bellow:

GRADE X12 CrNiMoV 12-3

ELEMENT
LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSIS (%)

Max. Carbon 0.08 – 0.15

Max. Silicon 0.35
Max. Manganese 0.50 – 0.90
Max. Phosphorus (1) 0.025
Max. Sulphur (1) 0.015
Chromium 11.00 – 12.50
Nickel 2.00 – 3.00
Molybdenum 1.50 – 2.00
Vanadium 0.25 – 0.40
Nitrogen 0.020 – 0.040
(1) For part analysis, the maximum guaranteed value is increased by 0.005%.

3) Heat treatment
- Slow cooling after forging or rolling.
- Austenitizing.
- Air or oil quenching.
- Tempering at minimum temperature of T  650°C.

4) Mechanical properties

NAME TEST REQUIRED

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE VALUE
Tension Room Rp0,2 minimum value 700 MPa
Rm 850 - 1050 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 15

350°C Rtp0,2 minimum value 570 MPa

KV Impact 0°C Minimum average value 40 J

Mechanical properties are specified for diameter less than or equal to 250 mm and for a in service
temperature less than or equal to 350°C

M 5000 / 22  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 5110

B - GRADE X6 CrNiCu 17-04, X6 CrNiCuMo 15-04 AND X5 CrNiCuMo 15-06:

AGE HARDENED MARTENSITIC
1) Melting process
The steel shall be made using an electric arc or induction furnace. It may be remelted vacuum or
electroslag remelting.

2) Chemical requirements
Ladle and product chemical analysis is given in the table bellow:
GRADE
ELEMENT X6 CrNiCu 17-04 X6 CrNiCuMo 15-04 X5 CrNiCuMo 15-06
LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSIS (%)
Max. Carbon 0.07 0.07 0.05
Max. Silicon 1.00 1.00 1.00
Max. Manganese 1.00 1.00 1.00
Max. Phosphorus 0.025(1) 0.025(1) 0.020(1) - 0.008*(2)
Max. Sulphur (2) 0.020 0.020 0.005
Chromium 15.50 - 17.50 13.50 - 15.50 14.00 - 16.00
Molybdenum - 1.20 - 2.00 0.5 - 1.0
Nickel 3.00 - 5.00 3.00 - 5.00 6.00 - 7.00
Copper 3.00 - 5.00 3.00 - 5.00 1.25 - 1. 75
Niobium 0.15 - 0.45 - 8x%C
(1) For part analysis, the maximum guaranteed value is increased by 0.005%.
(2) For part analysis, the maximum guaranteed value is increased by 0.003%.

* For components subject to prolonged use at service temperatures in excess of 330°C

3 a) Heat treatment of grades X6 CrNiCu 17-04 and X6 CrNiCuMo 15-04

- Austenitizing 1020 - 1060°C.
- Air or oil cooling to 30°C or less.
- Hardening treatment according to class properties required:
. preferred temperature between 595°C and 620°C,
. maximum permitted variation from preferred temperature: ± 10°C,
. holding time: 4 hours minimum,
. air cooling.

3 b) Heat treatment of grade X5 CrNiCuMo 15-06

- Austenitizing 1020 - 1060°C.
- Water quenching.
- Hardening treatment :
. preferred temperature between 595°C and 610°C,
. maximum permitted variation from preferred temperature: ± 5°C,
. holding time: 4 hours minimum,
. air cooling or more rapid.

 n° 140-2013 M 5000 / 23
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

4 a) Mechanical properties common to X6 CrNiCu 17-04 and X6 CrNiCuMo 15-04

REQUIRED VALUE dia  200 mm

TEST AFTER After age hardening treatment

NAME
TEMPE- PROPERTIES IMMER-
OF TEST Bolting
RATURE SION IN Valve rods
materia
SOLU-
TION (3) Grade A Grade A Grade B

Tension 20 Rp0.2 minimum value 790 MPa 790 MPa 720 MPa
Rm minimum value 960 MPa 960 MPa 930 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 14 14 16
Z % minimum value(1) 45 35 35

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 630 MPa 630 MPa 580 MPa

KV impact Minimum average value 60 J 60 J 60 J

(1) 0°C
Lateral expansion  0.64 mm

KV impact 0°C Minimum average value 40 J 40 J 40 J

(2)
max.
max .value
valeur 38 HRC – – –
Rockwell min. individual
20 dia. 10 mm  min . valeur – 32 HRC 32 HRC 28 HRC
hardness
value
 individual

 max.
max .value
valeur 363 HB – – –
Brinell 20  min. individual – 302 HB 302 HB 277 HB
dia. 10 mm  min . valeur
hardness
 value
 individual

(1) Class 1 bars

(2) Class 2 and 3 bars
(3) For bars delivered in the solution heat treated condition

4 b) Mechanical properties of grade X5 CrNiCuMo 15-06

NAME TEST REQUIRED VALUE

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE dia  150 mm
20 °C Rp0.2 minimum value 790 MPa
Rm 960 - 1080 MPa
Tension A % minimum 16
Z % minimum 50
350°C Rtp0.2 minimum 630 MPa

KV impact - 80°C Minimum average value 60 J

Rockwell
20 Minimum individual value 30 HRC
hardness
Brinell 20 Minimum individual value 292 HB
hardness

M 5000 / 24  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

C - GRADE X6 NiCrTiMoVB 25-15-2: AGE HARDENED AUSTENITIC

1) Melting process
The steel shall be made using an electric arc or induction furnace. It may be remelted by vacuum
or electroslag remelting.

2) Chemical requirements
Ladle and product chemical analysis is given in the table bellow:

GRADE X6 NiCrTiMoVB 25-15-2

ELEMENT
LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSIS (%)

Carbon 0.03 – 0.08

Max. Silicon 1.00
Manganese 1.00 – 2.00
Max. Phosphorus (1) 0.025
Max. Sulphur (1) 0.015
Max. total Aluminium 0.35
Boron 0.001 – 0.010
Chromium 13.50 – 16.00
Molybdenum 1.00 – 1.50
Nickel 24.00 – 27.00
Vanadium 0.10 – 0.50
Titanium 1.90 – 2.30
(1) For part analysis, the maximum guaranteed value is increased by 0.005%.

3) Heat treatment
- strain softening: 980°C ± 15°C holding time 1 hour minimum,
- oil or water quenching,
- hardening treatment: 725°C ± 10°C holding time 16 hours minimum,
- air cooling.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 25
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5110

4) Mechanical properties

NAME TEST REQUIRED

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE VALUE
Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 600 MPa
Rm minimum value 900 – 1200 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 15
Z % minimum value (1) 35

350°C Rtp0.2 minimum value 555 MPa

KV impact Room Minimum individual value (2) 50 J

Hardness Room HB Brinell 248-341

(1) For class 1 bars

(2) An individual value may be less than the required value on condition it is not below 70% of
the latter

M 5000 / 26  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5120

M 5120
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

ROLLED OR FORGED BARS FOR THE MANUFACTURE

OF CLASS 1, 2 AND 3 NUTS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers the procurement of rolled or forged bars for the manufacture of class 1, 2
and 3 nuts not covered by a specific procurement specification.
Bars for the manufacture of steam generator and pressurizer nuts and washers shall be made from
C 45 E, C 45 R unalloyed steel or 42 Cr Mo 4 alloy steel.
Bars for the manufacture of nuts and washers other than for pump casings and No.1 seal housing
shall be made from 42 Cr Mo 4 alloy steel.
Annex I specifies examinations performed on bars according to class and diameter.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The recommended melting process shall be given in the technical specifications for each grade and
are appended to this specification.
However, the steelmaker may adopt a different melting process. In this case, this process shall be
indicated in the acceptance report.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements of the technical specifications for each grade and are appended to this specification.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 27
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5120

A verification of product chemical analysis is usually stipulated in the purchase order. It is

mandatory for class 1 products.
These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.
Product analysis may be performed on metal discard from mechanical test specimens.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 FORGING OR ROLLING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination shrinkage cavities and most segregation.

3.2 MACHINING
3.2.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Bar diameters shall correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered diameter. These diameters
shall be given in the acceptance report.

3.2.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The bars shall be machined in accordance with the requirements of the drawings. Surface condition
shall be suitable for non-destructive testing, as detailed in SECTION III for the examinations
concerned here. The surface condition shall be determined in accordance with MC 7200.

3.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Bars shall be delivered in the as-treated condition.
They may exceptionally be delivered in a condition other than that in which they are to be used. In
this case, the bar Supplier must prove that the stipulated final heat treatment properties have been
obtained.
The treatment applied shall be that indicated in the technical specifications for each grade.
If the lot is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the new heat treatment shall satisfy the same
requirements.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in the technical specifications for each grade appended
to this specification.

M 5000 / 28  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5120

4.2 SAMPLING
4.2.1 Definition of a lot
The term "lot" applies to bars of similar cross-sections (as defined below) from the same heat,
subjected to the same manufacturing cycle and heat treated in the same furnace load if a batch
furnace is used or subjected to the same series of heat treatments.
dia. max
 1.1
dia. min

e max S max
 1.1 and  1.25
e min S min

4.2.2 Brinell hardness tests

Hardness tests shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. A hardness indentation shall be
made on each bar of the lot.
Firstly, these tests provide an indication of the homogeneity of both the bars and the lot, and
secondly they allow prolongations for tests to be selected.
Moreover, the values obtained shall meet the requirements stipulated in paragraph 4.1.

4.2.3 Test prolongations

Over-lengths for tests shall be taken from two bars in the lot which have respectively the highest
hardness value and the lowest hardness value.
The size of test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests and
retests.
They shall be cropped after all heat treatments have been completed.

4.2.4 Sampling
Test specimens shall be taken as follows.
The test specimen centreline shall be parallel to the bar centreline, and it shall be located at a
distance from the skin such as defined below:
- for diameter  25 mm, along the centreline of the bar,
- for diameters < 25  50 mm, at 12.5 mm from the skin,
- for diameters > 50 mm, at mid-radius.
The test-pertinent area of the test specimens shall be at a distance from the end of the bar not smaller
than the diameter of the bar.
For bars delivered in the as-treated condition, tests shall be performed on specimens taken from
samples which were not subjected to heat treatment after sampling.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 29
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5120

For bars delivered in the as-manufactured condition or which must be subjected, during working, to
heat treatments which modify their mechanical properties, tests shall be performed on samples
subjected to simulated heat treatment.

4.3 TESTING OF SAMPLES

4.3.1 Number and content of tests
The mechanical tests defined in annex I shall be performed on each sample taken (§ 4.2.3).

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall have a circular section. Their normal diameter shall be 10 mm and their
dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
The results obtained shall meet the requirements given in the technical specifications for
each grade.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen.
If the results of the second test are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective.
If the results of the retests are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected
and the requirements of paragraph 4.4 "Retreatment" shall apply.

M 5000 / 30  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5120

B - IMPACT BENDING TESTS

a) Test specimens and testing
The test specimens shall be taken side by side. The shape and the dimensions of the test
specimens and the test conditions are those defined in MC 1000.
One test includes the rupture-testing of three test specimens.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage values specified in the annexes must be complied with.
1) Retesting conditions for alloyed and unalloyed steels and martensitic stainless steel.
If one of the conditions is not met, the lot shall be rejected. However, if the results of the tests
are not satisfactory, due only to the fact that one individual value is less than the guaranteed
minimum value, retests are authorized in accordance with the following conditions:
- two series of test specimens, sampled from near the series of test specimens which
produced insufficient results, shall be tested at the same temperature as the first series,
- each of the two series of test specimens shall produce satisfactory results under the
conditions of § 4.1, otherwise the lot is rejected and the requirements of § 4.4: Rework, are
applicable.

4.4 RETREATMENT
Lots rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, the requirements for taking test specimens are those defined in paragraph 4.2, and the
tests shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

5.1 VISUAL EXAMINATION
Surfaces of bars shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of production and machining to
check the soundness of the metal.
This examination shall be performed during both descaling and final machining of the bars.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks or other injurious defects.
If, on surface examination, a part is found to have defects, it cannot be accepted as is, and the
requirements of paragraph 6 of this specification shall apply.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 31
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5120

5.2 LIQUID PENETRANT OR MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION

Class 1 and 2 bars with a diameter greater or equal to 25 mm: one of the two tests shall be
performed.
In the case where these examinations are prescribed on the finished part, they cannot be performed
on bars. The extent and severity of the examinations on the finished part are then prescribed in
specification M 5140.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Indications with one dimension greater than 1 mm shall be considered.

5.2.1 Liquid penetrant examination

Liquid penetrant examination procedures shall be in accordance with MC 4140.
The entire surface shall be examined after final machining.
The following shall not be acceptable:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications in a line separated by less than 3 mm (edge to edge),
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications
being evaluated.

5.2.2 Magnetic particle examination

Magnetic particle examination procedures shall be as defined in MC 5140.
Particular care should be taken to avoid overheating during examination of alloy or high carbon
content steels. When magnetizing is obtained by the electric current flow technique.
The following shall not be acceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two separate indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.
If the above-mentioned examinations detect defects which exceed the limits described, they cannot
be accepted as-is and the instructions of paragraph 6 shall apply.

M 5000 / 32  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5120

6 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

The mill manager or steelmaker may eliminate surface faults by grinding as long as tolerance
requirements are met on the as-delivered parts. The excavation cavity shall blend smoothly into the
adjacent surface.
After grinding, magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examinations shall be performed in accordance
with the requirements of MC 5000 or MC 4000.
Applicable criteria shall be those given in paragraph 5.2.

7 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings.
The values shall be within the tolerances given on the drawings.

8 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B,
C and D 1300.

9 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

10 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- heat treatment certificate stating the diameter of the bars treated, temperature and time of
treatment performed,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examination,
- dimensional check.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 33
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5120

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 5000 / 34  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5120

ANNEX I

SUMMARY OF EXAMINATION PERFORMED ON BARS FOR THE

MANUFACTURE OF NUTS ACCORDING TO CLASS AND DIAMETERS

EXAMINATION dia. < 25 mm dia  25 mm

Dimensional  
Ladle analysis  
Product analysis  
Heat treatment certif.  
1
Hardness  
Tension  
Impact (2) (3)  
Liquid penetrant or MPT 
Dimensional  
Ladle analysis  
Product analysis (1) (1)

Tension  
2
Impact (2) (3)  
Heat treatment certif.  
Hardness  
Liquid penetrant or MPT

Dimensional  
Ladle analysis  
Product analysis (1) (1)

Tension 3  
Impact (2) (3)  
Heat treatment certif.  
Hardness  
(1) checking of the product chemical analysis is normally stipulated in the purchase order.
(2) For dia.  15 mm bars.

(3) For austenitic stainless steels, the impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at
ambient temperature is certified greater than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 35
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5120

ANNEX II

CARBON STEEL
C 45 E or C 45 R grade steels as per Standard NF EN 10083-2
1) Melting process
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, or any other technically equivalent process.

2) Chemical requirements
As per Standard NF EN 10083-2.

3) Heat treatment
As per Standard NF EN 10083-2.

4) Mechanical properties of bars

NAME TEST REQUIRED

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE VALUE

Tension (1) Room Rp0.2 minimum value According to

Rm NF EN 10083-2

A % (5d) minimum value 14 (1)

Impact 0 Minimum average value 40 J

(1) Or, for class 1 and 2 bars, A %  12 and Z  45 %

M 5000 / 36  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5120

ANNEX III

ALLOY STEELS
Chromium-Molybdenum steels - Grade 42 Cr Mo 4
1) Melting process
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace, or any other technically equivalent process.

2) Chemical requirements

AFNOR GRADE 42 Cr Mo 4
ELEMENT
LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSIS (%)

C 0.38 - 048
Mn 0.75 - 1.00
Max. P. 0.025
Max. S 0.015
Si 0.10 - 0.40
Cr 0.80 - 1.15
Mo 0.15 - 0.30

3) Heat treatment
- slow cooling after forging or rolling,
- austenitizing,
- quenching,
- tempering at a minimum temperature of T  600°C.

4) Mechanical properties

TEST REQUIRED VALUE

NAME
TEMPERA- PROPERTIES 65 < dia. 105 < dia.
OF TEST dia. 65 mm
TURE 105 mm 180 mm
Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 720 MPa 650 MPa 520 MPa

Rm 860 - 1060 MPa 790 - 990 MPa 690 - 890 MPa

A % (5d) minimum 14 14 16
value

Hardness Room Brinell hardness 248-352 248-352 248-352

Impact 0 Minimum average 40 J 40 J 40 J

value

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 37
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5120

ANNEX IV

MARTENSITIC STAINLESS STEEL

Grade X12 Cr 13
1) Melting process

The steel shall usually be made using an electric arc or induction furnace, or by any other
technically equivalent process. This grade may be remelted in a vacuum.

2) Chemical requirements
Ladle and product chemical analysis is given in the table bellow:

GRADE X12 Cr 13
ELEMENT
LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSIS (%)

Carbon 0.08 – 0.15

Max. Silicon 1.00
Max. Manganese 1.00
Max. Phosphorus (1) 0.030
Max. Sulphur (1) 0.030
Chromium 11.50 – 13.50
(1) For part analysis, the maximum guaranteed value is increased by 0.005%.

3) Heat treatment
- austenitizing,
- air or oil quenching,
- tempering at a temperature  600°C.

4) Mechanical properties

NAME TEST REQUIRED

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE VALUE
Tension Room Rp0.2 590 MPa
Rm 760 – 960 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 15

Hardness Room Brinell hardness number 228-285

or
Rockwell hardness number 20-30
Impact 0 Minimum average value 40 J

M 5000 / 38  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5120

ANNEX V

AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEELS

AFNOR GRADE Z6 CN 18.10 AND Z5 CN 18.10, Z6 CND 17.12 AND Z5 CND 17.12
1) Melting process
The steel shall usually be made using an electric arc or induction furnace or by any other
technically equivalent process. This grade may be melted or remelted in a vacuum or by any
other process giving equivalent properties.

2) Chemical requirements

AFNOR GRADE
ELEMENT Z6 CN 18-10 Z5 CN 18-10 Z6 CND 17.12 Z5 CND 17.12
LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSIS (%)

Max. C 0.080 0.060 0.080 0.070

Max. Mn 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
Max. P (1) 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
Max. S (1) 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015
Max. Si 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
Ni 8.00 - 12.00 9.00 - 12.00 10.00 - 14.00 10.00 - 14.00
Cr 17.00 - 20.00 17.00 - 20.00 16.00 - 19.00 16.00 - 19.00
Mo – – 2.00 - 2.50 2.00 - 2.50
Max. Cu – 1.00 – 1.00
(1) For part analysis, the maximum guaranteed value is increased by 0.005%.

3) Heat treatment
- Solution heat treatment at between 1050°C and 1150°C.

4) Mechanical properties

NAME TEST REQUIRED

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE VALUE

Tension (1) Room Rp0,2 minimum value 210 MPa

Rm minimum value 520 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 45

Hardness Room Brinell hardness 126-192

(1) For class 1 bars

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 39
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5120

M 5000 / 40  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5130

M 5130
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CARBON STEEL PLATE CLAD WITH AUSTENITIC

STAINLESS STEEL USED FOR THE MANUFACTURE
OF CLASS 2 AND 3 COMPONENTS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers clad carbon steel plate. Its range of application is as stipulated in AFNOR
Standard NF A 36-250.

1 GENERAL AND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

The requirements of this standard shall be followed in full, unless modified hereinafter for the
following paragraphs:

Para 3.1.1 Base steel

This paragraph shall not apply. After cladding, the base steel shall meet the requirements given in
product procurement specification M 1131. Moreover, basic grade steel satisfy the energy absorbed
by breakage values measured at - 20°C. Before cladding, no test shall be required.

Para 3.1.2 Cladding metal

This paragraph shall not apply. After cladding, the cladding steel shall meet the requirements of
product procurement specification M 3307. Only austenitic stainless steels not subject to
intergranular corrosion shall be used. Prior to cladding, only analysis of the chemical composition
shall be required.

Para 3.2 DELIVERY CONDITION

In the case of clad plate for use in a hot environment, the requirements of product procurement
specification M 5131, paragraph 2.2 shall be met.
The surface of the base steel shall be descaled.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 41
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5130

Para 3.3 DEFECTS

Should the lack of cladding adhesion exceed the limits set in paragraph 3.3, it may be repaired by
welding in accordance with the requirements of SECTION IV "WELDING".

Para 4 ACCEPTANCE
The plates shall be delivered with an inspection document, the indications of which correspond at
least to those required in a certificate according to standard NF EN 10204.

Para 4.1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS

Para 4.1.1 A product analysis shall be performed on the base steel. It shall satisfy the
requirements of M 1131.

Para 4.1.2 Only the carbon content of the cladding metal shall be analyzed on a sample taken in
accordance with AFNOR Standard NF A 36-250. The result obtained shall meet the requirements of
M 3307 for the grade in question.

Para 4.2 MECHANICAL TESTS

Paragraph 4.2.1.1 and 4.2.1.3 are to be replaced by the following text:
Mechanical tests shall be performed after completion of the heat treatment for mechanical properties
and simulated stress-relieving heat treatment cycle. Tension and impact tests shall be performed on
samples taken from the base metal in accordance with all conditions stipulated by M 1131.

Para 4.2.2 Examination of cladding adhesion

Cladding adhesion shall be examined both locally and overall. The overall examination shall be
performed in accordance with the requirements of MC 2700.
Examination criteria shall conform to those of AFNOR Standard NF A 36-250.
However, along the periphery of the theoretical contour of each part as defined in the purchase
order, examination criteria shall be as follows:
- no lack of adhesion or detached area with one dimension greater than 30 mm shall be acceptable,
- a lack of adhesion (or detachment of 30 mm or less in more than three places along the most
densely defective metre) shall be unacceptable.

Para 4.2.3 Intergranular corrosion test

The intergranular corrosion test shall be performed under the conditions stipulated in product
procurement specification M 3307.

M 5000 / 42  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5130

Para 4.2.4 Ultrasonic examination of the internal soundness of the base steel
The base steel shall be subjected to ultrasonic examination in accordance with the requirements of
product procurement specification M 1131.

OTHER EXAMINATIONS
VISUAL EXAMINATION
Plate surfaces shall be visually examined in accordance with the requirements of product
procurement specifications M 1131 and M 3307. Edges shall also be examined and shall show no
cleavage or lamination and no lack of adhesion or detachment of the cladding.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 43
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5130

M 5000 / 44  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5131

M 5131
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

DISHED HEADS MANUFACTURED

FROM CLASS 2 CLAD PLATE

0 SCOPE
This specification covers dished heads manufactured from clad plate which are not covered by an
individual procurement specification.

1 BASE PRODUCT
Plate used for the manufacture of dished parts shall be procured as per product procurement
specification M 5130: "clad plate".
Plate can however be delivered untreated. In this case, the mechanical characteristics shall be
checked on test specimens taken from test coupons as stated in paragraph 4.2, and subjected to
separate heat treatment for mechanical properties followed by stress-relieving heat treatment, or heat
treatment for mechanical properties in accordance with M 122.

2 MANUFACTURE
2.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the Manufacturer shall draw up a
manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- position of dished part in the plate, more specifically, ingot centreline and final rolling directions
shall be marked on the part and on the test samples (see paragraph 4.2),
- forming process identification,
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of the test specimens on samples.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 45
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5131

The various heating, dishing, possible machining, heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive
testing operations shall be presented in chronological order.
The forming shop must prove, by means of the required test results, that the selected manufacturing
process allows the guaranteed dimensional characteristics and mechanical properties to be obtained.

2.2 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

After forming, the dished part shall undergo regenerative heat treatment if the plate is delivered in
the treated, undished condition. This treatment is mostly identical to the heat treatment for
mechanical properties defined in product procurement specification M 1131. If the plate is delivered
in the untreated, undished condition, the head shall be subjected to heat treatment for mechanical
properties in accordance with the requirements of product procurement specification M 1131.

3 LOT COMPOSITION
A lot shall be composed of dished parts manufactured from the same original plate, subjected to the
same manufacturing cycle and forming part of the same furnace charge or heat treatment run.
The lot, however, shall be restricted to heads of similar dimensions, as defined below:

e max
 1.1 and same strain value to within 10 %
e min

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Required values for mechanical properties are identical to those indicated in product procurement
specification M 5130.

4.2 SAMPLING
The test samples shall be taken from coupons left attached to the part during cutting, and which have
undergone the same regenerative heat treatment or heat treatment for mechanical properties, as
indicated in paragraph 2.2, or, if this proves impossible, they shall be taken from coupons cut from
the base plate before dishing. In this case, the coupons must undergo all dishing heat cycling along
with the part, then they must be welded to the dished part before it is subjected to regenerative heat
treatment or heat treatment for mechanical properties.
The coupons shall be appropriately marked and, more particularly, the direction of final rolling shall
be indicated.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.

M 5000 / 46  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5131

No test specimen shall be taken closer to the sample or coupon edges than a distance equal to the
plate thickness. In order to fulfill this condition, the forming shop can protect the edges by means of
a thermal buffer welded over the entire sample or coupon thickness.
Sampling shall be identical to or as close as possible to that described in product procurement
specification M 5130.

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

(application of para. M 122)
Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Number and content of tests

For each lot, a series of tests identical to that described in product procurement specification M 5130
shall be performed.

4.3.2 Test procedure

Test procedure is identical to that defined in product procurement specification M 5130.

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts or lots rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or several mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, the test specimens shall be sampled as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests to be
performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than a total of two retreatments by the rolling mill and the forming shop shall be
authorized.

4.5 TEST TO BE PERFORMED ON SAMPLES SUBJECTED

TO SIMULATED STRESS-RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT
Acceptance shall take into account the heat treatments undergone by the part during manufacture. If
the Supplier does not request application of paragraph M 122, acceptance of the part shall be subject
to the provisions of this paragraph. In this case, tests in the as-delivered condition shall not be
performed.

4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment

This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 47
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5131

4.5.2 Testing
The number of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens and test temperatures shall be
identical to those required for the tests performed in the as-delivered condition.
Tests shall be performed on a sample taken in accordance with paragraph 4.2. The samples shall be
separately subjected to the simulated stress-relieving heat treatment defined in paragraph 4.5.1 in a
laboratory furnace. The conditions and the results to be obtained shall be identical to those required
for samples not subjected to normalizing heat treatment (see paragraph 4.3).

5 CLADDING ADHESION
Cladding adhesion shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of M 5130.

6 TEST COUPON
The procedures specified in M 370 shall apply.

7 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

The dished part shall be visually examined. Its surface shall be smooth, free of scratches, laps,
cracks, blisters, inclusions or any other injurious defects. On the edges there must be no cleavage or
lamination, nor any lack of adhesion or detachment of the cladding.
If the above examination reveals the presence of unacceptable defects, the part cannot be accepted
as-is and the instructions of paragraph 9 of this specification shall apply.

8 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 5130.
Acceptance criteria shall be identical to those given in M 5130.
If this examination reveals the presence of unacceptable defects, the part cannot be accepted as-is
and the instructions of paragraph 9 of this specification shall apply.

9 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within the dimensional tolerances of the part
shall be accepted.
Cladding adhesion defects exceeding the limits set in specification M 5130 may be repaired by
welding in accordance with the instructions of SECTION IV WELDING.

M 5000 / 48  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5131

10 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions shall be checked against the requirements of the procurement drawings.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. These values shall be within the tolerances of the
procurement drawing.

11 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with C 1300.
Samples delivered with the part shall be marked in accordance with the provisions of the purchase
order.
In addition, the rolling direction shall be marked.

12 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

13 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (in the case of retreatment this includes recordings of
all heat treatments),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- chart showing location of defects,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 49
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5131

M 5000 / 50  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 5140

M 5140
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CLASS 1, 2 AND 3 STUDS, SCREWS, THREADED

RODS AND NUTS FOR COMPONENTS OF
PRESSURIZED WATER REACTORS

0 SCOPE
This specification complements the procurement specifications for bars; it covers the procurement
of studs, screws, threaded rods and nuts for components of pressurized water reactors.

1 MANUFACTURE
1.1 MANUFACTURE
The products shall be obtained from bars with a diameter as close as possible to the diameter of the
finished product.
- For studs to be used in reactor pressure vessels, steam generators, pressurizers and coolant
pumps, and for screws intended for coolant pumps and internals, the threads shall be obtained by
rolling if the threading procedure is not specified in the equipment specification or other relevant
contractual documents.
- For internal equipment screws, head upsetting shall not be authorized and Allen screws shall be
made using electro-erosion or by an electrochemical process.
- For other materials, threads may be obtained either by rolling or by machining, rolling
nonetheless being preferred. Screw heads may be formed by hot or cold forging or by machining.

1.2 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME

For class 1 and 2 parts, prior to the commencement of manufacturing operations, the Manufacturer
shall draw up a manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- diameter and delivery condition of the bars used,

 n° 144-2014 M 5000 / 51
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 5140

- identification of manufacturing process,

- conditions for heat treatment,
- the various heat treatment, forging, machining or rolling and non-destructive examination
operations shall be presented in chronological order.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analysis on the bar, shall comply with
paragraph 2 of specifications M 2311, M 2312, M 3308, M 5110, and M 5120.

3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The products shall be delivered in the as-treated condition.
There are three possible cases:
1) General: this treatment shall be performed on the bar prior to manufacture and manufacture
requires no hot forming operations.
2) Parts subjected to hot forming: heat treatment for mechanical properties shall be performed on
the parts after the forming operation.
3) Hardened grades: heat treatment producing the mechanical properties required may be performed
after manufacture.

For cases 2 and 3, heat treatment procedures shall be given in the manufacturing programme.

Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

If the lot is to be retreated (see paragraph 4.4), the new heat treatment shall also satisfy the same
requirements.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
For screws, studs and nuts, verification of mechanical properties shall not be required if the bars are
delivered as-treated and if no heat treatment is performed after manufacture. This check shall then
be performed on the bar.
In other cases, the requirements of paragraphs 4.1 to 4.4 shall apply.

4.1 REQUIRED VALUES

If heat treatment is performed after manufacture, mechanical tests shall be performed by the
Supplier. The values to be obtained shall comply with those given for the grade used in the bar
procurement specifications.

M 5000 / 52  n° 144-2014
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5140

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall consist either of finished parts or of billets taken from bars belonging to the same
lot and which have undergone the same heat treatment in the same furnace charge as the parts.
Test specimen sampling conditions shall be as follows:
The axis of test specimens shall be parallel to the sample axis and located at a distance from the skin
as shown below:
- for diameters  25 mm, along the bar axis,
- for 25 < diameters  50 mm, at 12.5 mm from the skin,
- for diameters > 50 mm, at mid-radius.
The test-pertinent area of test specimens shall be located at a distance from the end of the bar at least
equal to the bar diameter.

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
A lot shall comprise all the parts of the same type produced using the same manufacturing process,
with the same nominal diameter, from the same heat of steel and subjected to the same heat
treatment in the same furnace charge. The number of parts in the lot shall be mentioned in the test
report.

a) Number of tests per lot

To check the homogeneity of the lot, a hardness test shall be performed on each part of the lot.
Deviation of 30 HB is generally accepted.
The number of tests per lot, which depends on the number of parts is defined below:

NUMBER OF NUMBER OF
PARTS PER LOT TEST SERIES

 500 2
> 500 4

These series of tests shall be performed as follows:

- in the case of acceptance of finished parts: 1 or 2 series on parts with the lowest hardness
values and 1 or 2 series on the parts with the highest hardness values,
- in the case of acceptance of 2 or 4 billets randomly selected from the lot of bars used in
manufacture and subjected to the same heat treatment in the same furnace charge as the parts:
one hardness measurement shall be made on these billets prior to testing. The result shall fall
within the hardness range of the lot of parts.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 53
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 5140

b) Series of tests to be performed

– In addition to the hardness test of each part, each series of tests shall also comprise the
following:
- 1 tensile test at room temperature,
- 1 tensile test at 300°C or at 350 °C if the design temperature is high enough for the tensile
strength values to determine the dimensions of the part.
- 1 impact test for products of diameter of 15 mm or more,
. KV test at room temperature (3 specimens) for austenitic stainless steel parts. The
impact test may be waived if the A% elongation value at ambient temperature is
certified greater than or equal to 45% by the material manufacturer.
. KV test at 0°C (3 specimens) for carbon steel parts, low-alloy parts and martensitic
stainless steel parts.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements of the bar procurement specifications for each
grade.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen.
If the results of the second test are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

M 5000 / 54  n° 144-2014
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5140

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective.
If the results of the retests are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected
and the requirements of paragraph 4.4 "Retreatment" shall apply.

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimen and test method
Test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of these
specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000 for tests at 0 °C and at room
temperature.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage values given in the bar procurement specifications for each
grade must be fulfilled.
1) Retest procedures for unalloyed, alloyed steels and martensitic stainless steels
The lot shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements. However, where the
only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the required minimum
value, retests may be performed in accordance with the following procedure:
- two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall be tested at the
same temperature as the first set,
- if results for either of the two sets of test specimens are not satisfactory, the lot shall be
rejected, and the requirements of paragraph 4.4 "Retreatment" shall apply.
2) Retest procedures for austenitic stainless steels
If the conditions defined above are not fulfilled, three additional specimens shall be taken next
to the specimen that produced the unsatisfactory result and tested.
The part and/or lot can be accepted after the test performed on the second series of three
specimens, if the following conditions are simultaneously satisfied:
- the mean value of the six tests shall be greater than or equal to the minimum specified
value,
- no more than two individual values out of the six shall be less than the minimum specified
value,
- only one individual value out of the six shall be less than 70% of the specified value.
If this is not the case, the part or lot shall be rejected.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 55
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5140

4.4 RETREATMENT
Lots rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report. In such cases, test specimens
shall be taken under the same conditions as specified in paragraph 4.2.
No more than one retreatment shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

5.1 VISUAL EXAMINATION
Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of production to check the soundness of the
metal.
The visual examination of the whole surface shall be performed on all finished parts, in accordance
with MC 7100.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects.
Surface roughness shall comply with that specified in the procurement drawing. If, on surface
examination, a part is found to have defects, it shall be rejected.

5.2 MAGNETIC PARTICLE AND LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATIONS

a) For non-hot formed nuts other than pressure vessel and coolant pump casing nuts, liquid
penetrant or magnetic particle examination shall not be required.

b) For pressure vessel nuts, liquid penetrant examination shall be performed at the rough-machined
stage, prior to threading.

c) For coolant pump casing nuts, magnetic particle examination shall be performed at the rough-
machined stage prior to threading.

d) All bolting material for internals shall be subjected to liquid penetrant examination at the end of
manufacturing operations, whatever the nominal diameter.

e) For other parts, either of the two methods shall be used, in accordance with the following
conditions:
- class 1 and 2 parts of nominal diameter less than 25 mm, examination shall not be required,
- class 1 and 2 parts of nominal diameter 25 mm or more, examination shall be required if it has
not already been performed on the original bar or if the part has been hot formed,
- class 3 parts, examination shall be required for hot formed parts with diameters of 25 mm or
more. If the parts are heat treated, this examination shall be performed after heat treatment. If
not, then examination may be performed on the rough-machined part prior to threading.

M 5000 / 56  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum M 5140

5.2.1 Liquid penetrant examination

Liquid penetrant examination procedures are specified in MC 4000.
The examination shall be performed on the entire surface after threading and any heat treatment, but
before any surface treatment.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
The following indications shall be considered unacceptable conditions:
- linear indications,
- rounded indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge.

5.2.2 Magnetic particle examination

Requirements for magnetic particle examination are given in MC 5140.
Particular care should be taken to avoid overheating when examining alloy steel or high carbon
content steel when magnetizing is obtained by using electric current flow technique.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
The following indications shall be considered unacceptable:
- linear indications whose greatest dimension is larger than one third of the nominal diameter or
8 mm, whichever is smaller,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.

Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than twice
the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the
sum of the lengths of the two indications, plus the distance between them.
- Whenever linear indications are detected, a liquid penetrant examination shall confirm that they
do not correspond to a defect appearing at the surface, otherwise the part shall be rejected.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Ultrasonic examination of the part shall not be required. This examination shall in all cases be
performed on the bar in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 6 of procurement
specifications M 2311, M 2312, M 3308 and M 5110.

 n° 144-2014 M 5000 / 57
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5140

7 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only skin defects in the non-threaded parts may be removed.
These defects may be smoothed out with a grinder or soft emery cloth, provided that the location
repaired remains within the dimensional tolerances as shown on the procurement drawings.
When grinding, care should be taken to avoid overheating which could locally alter the structure.
Threaded parts shall not be repaired.
After repairs, a liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination shall be performed in accordance
with the procedures given in paragraph 5.2.

8 DIMENSIONAL AND PROFILE CHECK

Class 1 parts shall be checked one by one, except for bolting material for internal and auxiliary
equipment which, like class 2 and 3 parts, shall be checked by the random sampling method defined
below:

NUMBER OF PARTS NUMBER OF

MANUFACTURED PARTS CHECKED*

Under 100 10
100 to 500 50
500 to 2500 100
Over 2500 200
* Parts wich are checked must be representative of the initial
intermediate and end phases of manufacture.

Internal equipment bolting material must be checked using a profile projector. For other parts, the
profile shall be checked in the following way:
- either by profile projector,
- or by "GO - NOT GO" calipers.
The stem to head crotch radius and the thread root radius examined with the profile projector shall
be within the tolerances given on the procurement drawing.
The following shall be unacceptable:
- defective transition zones,
- offset,
- tool marks on the thread root or stem to head crotch radius.
If, during random sampling, the number of unsatisfactory parts exceeds 10% of the parts examined
(with a minimum of 1), all parts from the same manufacturing cycle shall be examined.
The dimensions shall be examined in accordance with the instructions of the procurement drawing.

M 5000 / 58  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5140

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B,
C and D 1300.

10 SURFACE TREATMENTS
Surface treatment of carbon steel orlow alloy steel bolting material shall be as defined in F 5200 if
required by the equipment specification or other relevant contractual documents.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 59
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5140

M 5000 / 60  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5150

M 5150
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

ROLLED OR FORGED BARS FOR THE MANUFACTURE

OF CLASS S1 AND S2 SHAFTS, TIE-RODS
AND SUPPORT BOLTS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers rolled or forged bars for the manufacture of class S1 and S2 shafts, tie-rods
and support bolts, not covered by a specific procurement specification.
Bars for the manufacture of studs and ball bushing joints for primary pump supports and steam
generator shall be made from 40 NCD 7-03 alloy steel.
Annex I specifies examinations performed on bars according to classes and diameters.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The recommended melting processes are given in the specifications for each grade and appended to
this specification.
However, the steelmaker may adopt a different melting process. In this case, the process used should
be indicated in the acceptance report.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition as determined by ladle and product analysis, shall comply with the
requirements of the technical specification for each grade appended to this specification.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 61
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5150

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. A verification of product chemical analysis is usually stipulated in the purchase
order. This analysis shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of MC 1000. Product
analyses may be performed on metal discard from mechanical test specimens.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 ROLLING OR FORGING
Sufficient metal shall be discarded to eliminate shrinkage and the majority of segregations.

3.2 MACHINING
3.2.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Bar diameter shall correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered diameter. These diameters
shall be given in the acceptance report.

3.2.2 After final heat treatment

The bars shall be machined in accordance with the requirements of the drawings. Surface condition
shall be suitable for non-destructive examination of the surface, as detailed in SECTION III for the
examinations concerned here. The surface condition shall be determined in accordance
with MC 7200.

3.3 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The bars shall be delivered in the heat-treated condition.
They may exceptionally be delivered in a condition other than that in which they are to be used. In
this case, the bar Supplier must prove that the stipulated final heat treatment properties have
been obtained.
A certificate indicating the heat treatment temperature and holding time shall be drawn up.
If the lot is to be retreated, the new heat treatment shall satisfy the same requirements.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in the technical specifications for each grade appended
to this specification.

M 5000 / 62  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5150

4.2 SAMPLING
4.2.1 Definition of a lot
The term "lot" applies to bars of similar cross-sections (as defined below) from the same heat,
subjected to the same manufacturing cycle and heat treated in the same furnace load if a batch
furnace is used or subjected to the same series of heat treatments.
dia. max
 1.1
dia. min

e max S max
 1.1 and  1.25
e min S min

4.2.2 Hardness tests

Hardness tests shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. A hardness indentation shall be
made on each bar of the lot.
Firstly, these tests provide an indication of the homogeneity of both the bars and the lot, and
secondly they allow prolongations for tests to be selected.
Moreover, the values obtained shall meet the requirements stipulated in paragraph 4.1.

4.2.3 Test prolongations

Test samples shall consist of bar excess lengths and shall be discarded after all heat treatment has
been performed.
Prolongations shall be taken from 4% of the bars with a minimum of two bars, taking 2% of the bars
which present the lowest hardness of the lot and 2% of the bars which present the highest hardness
of the lot, a hardness measurement being performed on each bar.
The size of test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests and
retests.
In the case of bars for nuts and washers, hardness tests alone shall be performed.

4.2.4 Sampling
Sampling procedures are as follows:
- the axis of the test specimens shall be parallel to the bar axis and located at the following
distances from the skin:
. for dia.  25 mm, along the axis of the bar,
. for 25 < dia.  50 mm, 12.5 mm from the skin,
. for dia. > 50 mm, at mid-radius.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 63
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5150

- the test-pertinent area of the specimens shall be located at a distance from the end of the bar at
least equal to the diameter of the bar.
For bars delivered in the heat-treated condition, the tests are performed on specimens taken from
samples which have not been subjected to heat treatment after sampling.
For bars delivered in the as-manufactured condition, or which, during working, will be subjected to
heat treatment, modifying their mechanical properties, the tests shall be performed on test specimens
taken from samples which have been subjected to simulated heat treatment for mechanical
properties.

4.3 TESTING OF SAMPLES

4.3.1 Number and content of tests
The following series of mechanical tests shall be performed on each sample (4.2.3):
- a tension test at room temperature (one test specimen),
- a KV impact test at 0°C (three test specimens) for bars with a diameter of  25 mm.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall have a circular section. Their normal diameter shall be 10 mm and their
dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in the technical data sheets for each grade.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another test
specimen.
If the results of the second test are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.

M 5000 / 64  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5150

Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory specimens shall be taken close to those which
were defective.
If the results of the second test are satisfactory, the lot is acceptable; if not, it is rejected and the
requirements of paragraph 4.4: Retreatment, shall apply.

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens and test method
Test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of these
specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements or the technical specifications must be fulfilled.
The lot shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements. However, where the
only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the required minimum value,
retests may be performed in accordance with the following procedure:
- two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall be tested at the
same temperature as the first set,
- if results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do not comply with the
requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the lot shall be rejected, and the requirements of
paragraph 4.4 "Retreatment" shall apply.

4.4 RETREATMENT
A lot rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, the requirements for taking test specimens are those defined in paragraph 4.2, and the
tests shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

5.1 VISUAL EXAMINATION
Bar surfaces shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of production and machining to check
the soundness of the metal.
The visual examination is performed both during cleaning and during final machining of the bars.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 65
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5150

Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks or other injurious defects.
If the visual examination reveals the presence of defects on the part, the part may not be accepted
as-is, and the requirements of chapter 7 of this specification shall be applied .

5.2 LIQUID PENETRANT OR MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION

Class S1 bar with a diameter greater or equal to 25 mm:
one of the two tests shall be performed. In the case where these examinations are prescribed on the
finished part, they shall not be performed on bars. The extent and severity of the examinations on
the finished part are then prescribed in specification M 5140.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Indications with one dimension greater than 1 mm shall be considered.

5.2.1 Liquid penetrant examination

The performance procedures for liquid penetrant examinations are defined in MC 4000.
The entire surface of the part shall be examined after final machining.
The following shall not be acceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart (edge to edge),
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications
being evaluated.

5.2.2 Magnetic particle examination

The magnetic particle examination procedures are defined in MC 5140.
Particular care should be taken to avoid overheating when examining alloy steel or high carbon
content steel when magnetizing is obtained by using the electric current flow technique.
The following shall not be acceptable:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
15 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.

M 5000 / 66  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5150

Two separate indications shall be considered as one if the distance is less than twice the length of
whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be equal to the sum of the
lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.
If the examinations described above reveal the presence of unacceptable indications, they may not
be accepted as-is and the requirements of paragraph 7 shall apply.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Ultrasonic examination shall be performed on class S1 bars of diameter  50 mm in conformance
with MC 2300.

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed on the as-delivered part.

6.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
The probe frequency and diameter shall be chosen according to the structure of the material to be
examined and shall comply with the requirements of MC 2100.

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3 or with
paragraph 13.3 of standard NF EN 10308.
If the scanning cannot be performed by rotation it shall be performed on a grid layout in accordance
with paragraph 12.3 of standard NF EN 10228-3 or with paragraph 13.2 of standard NF EN 10308.
Part type is 1a.

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3 or with
paragraph 14 of standard NF EN 10308.

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of quality class 3 in standard
NF EN 10228-3 or standard NF EN 10308.

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

The mill manager or steelmaker may eliminate surface defects by grinding as long as tolerance
requirements are met on the as-delivered parts. The excavation cavity shall blend smoothly into the
adjacent surface.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 67
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5150

After grinding, magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examinations shall be performed in accordance
with the requirements of MC 5000 or MC 4000.
Applicable criteria shall be those given in paragraph 5.2.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings.
The values found shall be within the tolerances given on the drawings.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, as defined in H 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- heat treatment certificate specifying the diameter of the bars treated, temperature and time of
treatment performed,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examination,
- dimensional checks.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with the required values.

M 5000 / 68  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5150

ANNEX I

SUMMARY OF EXAMINATION PERFORMED ON BARS

ACCORDING TO CLASS AND DIAMETERS

BOLTS - SHAFTS
NUTS
TIE-RODS
CONTROLES NIVEAUX
dia. < 25  dia. dia.  dia. < dia. 
25 mm < 50 mm 50 mm 25 mm 25 mm
Dimensional     
Ladle analysis     
Product analysis (1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
Heat treatment cert.     
Hardness S1     
Tension   
Energy absorbed by breakage  
Liquid pen. or Magn.   
Ultrasonic 
Dimensional     
Ladle analysis     
Product analysis (1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
Heat treatment cert.     
Hardness S2     
Tension   
Energy absorbed by breakage  
Liquid pen. or Magn.
Ultrasonic

(1)Checking of the product chemical analysis is normally stipulated in the purchase order.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 69
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5150

ANNEX II

CARBON STEELS
STEELS ACCORDING TO STANDARD NF EN 10083-2
1) Melting process
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or by any other technically equivalent process.

2) Chemical requirements
According to standard NF EN 10083-2.

3) Heat treatment
According to standard NF EN 10083-2. However, heat treatment different from that specified in
this standard may be proposed, to take account of the energy absorbed by breakage
characteristics to be obtained.

4) Mechanical properties

NAME TEST REQUIRED

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE VALUE

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value

Rm minimum value According to
A % (5d) minimum value NF EN 10083-2

KV impact (1) 0°C Minimum individual value 40 J

KV impact (2) 0°C Minimum individual value 28 J

Hardness Room Brinell hardness According to

NF EN 10083-2

(1) For class S1 bars

(2) For class S2 bars

M 5000 / 70  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5150

ANNEX III

ALLOY STEELS
A - STEEL GRADES ACCORDING TO STANDARD NF EN 10083-3
1) Melting process
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or by the basic oxygen process or by any other
technically equivalent process.

2) Chemical requirements
According to standard NF EN 10083-3.

3) Heat treatment
According to standard NF EN 10083-3. However, heat treatment different from that specified in
this standard may be proposed, to take account of the energy absorbed by breakage
characteristics to be obtained.

4) Mechanical properties

NAME TEST REQUIRED

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE VALUE

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value

According to
Rm minimum value
NF EN 10083-3
A % (5d) minimum value

KV impact (1) 0°C Minimum individual value 40 J

KV impact (2) 0°C Minimum individual value 28 J

(1) For class S1 bars

(2) For class S2 bars

B - Ni-Cr-Mo STEELS - AFNOR STANDARD 30 NCD 16

1) Melting process
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or by any other technically equivalent process.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 71
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5150

2) Composition chimique

AFNOR GRADE 30 NCD 16

ELEMENT
LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSIS

Carbon 0.26 - 0.33

Manganese 0.20 - 0.60
Maximum Phosphorus 0.025
Maximum Sulphur 0.020
Silicon 0.10 - 0.40
Nickel 3.30 - 4.30
Chromium 1.20 - 1.50
Molybdenum 0.30 - 0.60

3) Heat treatment
- Austenizing.
- Oil quenching.
- Tempering at a minimum temperature T  550°C.

4) Mechanical properties

NAME TEST REQUIRED VALUE

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE
40 <dia  100 mm 100 <dia  160 mm

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 930 MPa 880 MPa

Rm 1130-1320 MPa 1080-1270 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 10 10

KV 0°C Minimum individual value 40 J 40 J

impact (1)

KV 0°C Minimum individual value 28 J 28 J

impact (2)

(1) For class S1 bars

(2) For class S2 bars

M 5000 / 72  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 5150

C - Ni-Cr-Mo STEELS - AFNOR STANDARD 40 NCD 7-03

1) Melting process
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or any other technically equivalent process.

2) Chemical requirements

AFNOR GRADE 40 NCD 7- 03

ELEMENT
LADLE ANALYSIS (%) PRODUCT ANALYSIS (%)

Carbon 0.37 - 0.44 0.35 - 0.46

Manganese 0.70 - 0.90 0.66 - 0.94
Maximum Phosphorus 0.025 0.030
Maximum Sulphur 0.025 0.030
Maximum Silicon 0.35 0.35
Nickel 1.65 - 2.00 1.60 - 2.05
Chromium 0.70 - 0.95 0.65 - 1.00
Molybdenum 0.30 - 0.40 0.28 - 0.42
Maximum Copper 0.20 0.20

3) Heat treatment
- Austenizing at 820 - 885°C
- Quenching
- Tempering at a minimum temperature of T  455°C

4) Mechanical properties

REQUIRED VALUE
NAME TEST
PROPERTIES BARS FOR USE IN PINS FOR BALL
OF TEST TEMPERATURE
MAKING STUDS BUSHING JOINTS

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 1035 MPa 900 MPa

Rm minimum value 1140 MPa 1000 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 10 12

KV 0°C Minimum individual value 40 J 40 J

impact

Hardness Room HB Brinell 331 to 429 302 to 388

 n° 140-2013 M 5000 / 73
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5150

M 5000 / 74  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5160

M 5160
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

BEARING CHROMIUM STEEL BARS FOR USE

IN MAKING BALL BUSHING JOINTS FOR
STEAM GENERATOR AND REACTOR
COOLANT PUMP SNUBBERS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers bearing chromium steel bars for use in making ball bushing joints for class
S1 steam generator and reactor coolant pump snubbers.

1 GENERAL AND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

Grades used shall be as defined in Standard NF EN ISO 683-17 (Heat-treated steels, alloy steels and
free-cutting steels - Part 17: ball and roller bearing steels) but limited to chromium and chromium-
molybdenum steels.
The requirements of this standard shall be applied in full and shall be supplemented as follows:
Para. 5.1.2 Oil or salt bath quenching, followed if necessary, by stabilizing heat treatment under
conditions which provide a ROCKWELL C hardness value of 54 to 60 on the part.
Hardness tests shall be performed on each part.
Annex A.1 and A.2 Grain size and carbide alignment shall be verified by micrographic
examination, performed on one part per lot. Standards NF EN ISO 643 and NF A 05-150 may be
used as an alternative to the ISO Standards mentioned.
Annex A.3 Microscopic non-metallic inclusion content shall be checked on one part per lot.
Any equivalent French or European standard may be used as an alternative to the given
ISO standard.
The criteria selected for core hardened steels are given in table B1.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 75
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5160

The term lot applies to parts of the same diameter, manufactured from the same heat of steel which
have undergone the same manufacturing cycle and have been treated in the same furnace charge.

§6 INSPECTION, TESTS AND PRODUCT CONFORMITY

6.1.3 At each delivery, the issue of an inspection document is required, the indications of which
correspond at least to those required in the type 3.1 specific inspection certificate according
to standard NF EN 10204.

M 5000 / 76  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5170

M 5170
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

ALLOY FORGINGS OR DROP FORGINGS FOR USE IN

REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM SUPPORTS: REACTOR
SUPPORT PADS UPPER CLEVIS INSERTS FOR
REACTOR COOLANT PUMP SUPPORTS, SNUBBER
COMPONENTS FOR STEAM GENERATOR AND
REACTOR COOLANT PUMP SUPPORTS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers:
1) Chromium-molybdenum or nickel-chromium molybdenum alloy steel castings for use in the
fabrication of steam generator and reactor coolant pump snubbers.
2) Manganese-nickel-molybdenum alloy steel forgings for use in reactor support pads and nickel-
chromium-molybdenum alloy forgings for upper clevis inserts for coolant pump support
columns.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The recommended melting processes for each grade of steel are given in the technical data sheets
appended to this specification.
However, the steelmaker may use a different melting process. If so, the process shall be described in
the manufacturing programme.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given for each grade of steel in the technical data sheets appended to this specification.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 77
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5170

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. He shall also provide a product analysis. This analysis may be performed on metal
discard from mechanical test specimens.
These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations for class S1 parts, the forging mill shall draw
up a manufacturing programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- ingot weight and type,
- dimensional sketch of the part for each phase of forging, and partial and overall reduction ratios
determined in accordance with M 380,
- drawings of the part as-forged, profiles for heat treatment, non-destructive examination and
delivery,
- conditions for intermediate heat treatments and for final heat treatment (for mechanical
properties),
- position of acceptance test samples on the part,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling and non-destructive examination operations shall be presented
in chronological order.

3.2 FORGING
There shall be sufficient discard to ensure elimination of shrinkage cavities and most segregation.
A record of ingot weight and discard percentages shall be kept at the disposal of Surveillance
Agents.
Overall ratio of reduction calculated in accordance with M 380 shall be greater than 3.

3.3 MACHINING
3.3.1 Before heat treatment for mechanical properties
Before heat treatment for mechanical properties, the profile of the rough-machined part shall
correspond as closely as possible to the as-delivered profile. These profiles shall be given in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

M 5000 / 78  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5170

3.3.2 After heat treatment for mechanical properties

The part shall be machined to its as-delivered profile prior to final ultrasonic examination.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

The part shall be delivered in the as-treated condition.
Treatment conditions shall be those indicated in the technical data sheets for each grade of steel.
For class S1 parts, records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
For class S2 parts, only a furnace record indicating temperature and holding time shall be required.
Where a lot is to be retreated, the additional heat treatment shall also meet the above requirements.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical properties requirements for each grade of steel are given in the technical data sheets
appended to this specification.

4.2 SAMPLING
4.2.1 Forgings
Test samples shall be taken from one part per lot and shall be integral with the part.
Samples shall be taken (or cut) after the part has been heat treated for mechanical properties; they
shall be clearly identified and the direction of maximum extension shall be indicated.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide enough test specimens for all tests
and retests.
Specimens shall be cut in such a way that their axes are oriented:
- parallel to the direction of forging, for tension tests,
- perpendicular to the direction of forging, for impact tests.
The sample from which the specimens are taken shall be located 20 mm from one skin and 40 mm
from any other treated surface.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 79
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5170

When it is not possible to position the test coupons as indicated above, particularly when the parts
are not thick enough (< 40 mm), the longitudinal axis of the test specimens shall be located at
midthickness, and test-pertinent areas shall be located at a distance equal to at least one thickness
from any other surface.
These surfaces represent the surface of the part during heat treatment for mechanical properties.
The axes of impact test notches shall be perpendicular to the main surface.
A drawing showing the positions of samples on the part and a dimensional drawing showing the
positions of specimens on the sample shall be appended to the manufacturing programme
(see paragraph 3.1).
In the case of reactor support pads, a sample shall be taken from a prolongation attached to the
bottom end of the billet section.

4.2.2 Drop forgings

Mechanical test samples shall be cut from one part per lot. The position of test specimens on the part
shall be indicated in the manufacturing programme.
Where specified in the equipment specification or other relevant contractual documents, test
samples may be taken from a separate billet section per lot or from several parts, if necessary.
The forging ratio of the billet section shall be representative of the forging ratio of the drop forging.
Billet sections shall remain attached to the parts and shall undergo the same heat treatment cycles in
the same furnace charge.

4.3 TESTING OF REPRESENTATIVE AS-DELIVERED PART SAMPLES

Tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which were not subjected to heat
treatment after sampling.

4.3.1 Definition of a lot

The term lot applies to all parts of the same size, manufactured from the same heat of steel which
have undergone the same manufacturing cycles and have been heat treated in the same furnace
charge.
The weight of a lot shall be restricted to 3000 kg.
Additionally
- for normalized parts weighing more than 1000 kg, the lot shall consist of a single part,
- for quenched and tempered parts weighing more than 500 kg, the lot shall consist of a single part.
However, for upper clevis inserts, a lot may consist of two parts.

M 5000 / 80  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5170

4.3.2 Number and content of tests

The series of tests to be performed, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are shown
in table I.
A tensile test at high temperature as indicated in table I shall be performed for reactor support pads.

4.3.3 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tensile test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in the technical data sheet for each grade
of steel.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, for each
unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test specimens shall be taken close to those
which were defective. If the results of the retests are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not,
it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 81
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5170

M 5000 / 82  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5170

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements given in the technical data sheets must be met.
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure:
- two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall be tested at the
same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do
not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the lot shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

C - HARDNESS TESTS
One test, performed in accordance with MC 1000, shall be performed on each part cast from type
18 CD4 or 18 NCD6 steel and on the reference billet section for each lot.
Hardness values for the billet section shall be within the range of hardness values required
for the lot.

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report. In such cases, test specimens
shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2. The tests performed shall be the same as those described in
paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.5 TESTING OF SAMPLES SUBJECTED TO SIMULATED

STRESS-RELIEVING TREATMENT
These tests shall be performed only on representative samples of reactor support pads made from
type 16 MND5 steel.
A lot shall consist of a maximum of 4 parts.

4.5.1 Simulated stress-relieving heat treatment

This treatment shall be performed according to the requirements of M 151.
Nominal holding temperature shall be 600 °C.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 83
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5170

4.5.2 Tests
The number of tests, orientation of test specimens, and test temperatures are given in table I.
Simulated stress-relieving treatment as described in paragraph 4.5.1 shall be carried out on separate
samples in a laboratory furnace. Conditions are identical to those given in paragraph 4.3.3 and the
required results for tension tests and KV impact tests at 0°C shall be specified in the technical data
sheets for each grade of steel.

5 NO SUBJECT

6 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

6.1 VISUAL EXAMINATION
Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of production and machining to check the
soundness of the metal.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects.

6.2 LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION

After final machining, parts shall be subjected to liquid penetrant examination.
This examination shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of MC 4000.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Any defect with one dimension of 1 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.
All defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 3 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more indications within an area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension shall not exceed
20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being evaluated.
When the examination described above indicates the presence of unacceptable defects on the part,
the instructions given in paragraph 8 of this specification shall apply.

7 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed using the ultrasonic process in accordance with
MC 2300.

M 5000 / 84  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5170

7.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed when the profile of the part permits satisfactory test
performance. It shall be performed in the following order of preference:
- after final machining,
- after heat treatment for mechanical properties, whether followed by machining or not.
However, in the case of parts which cannot be examined in the as-treated condition, due to the
geometry of the part, this examination may be performed at an intermediate stage, as far advanced in
the manufacturing process as possible.

7.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in paragraph MC 2300.
Probe frequency shall normally be 4 MHz.

7.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3.
Part type is 1 or 4.

7.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3.

7.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are those of standard NF EN 10228-3 for
parts:
- type 1: quality class 3,
- type 4: quality class 2.

8 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
The forging mill shall not be authorized to make weld repairs.
After repairs, a liquid penetrant examination shall be performed. The criteria for this examination
are given in paragraph 6.2.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 85
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5170

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
AFTER HEAT TREATMENT
Dimensions shall be checked in accordance with the requirements of the procurement drawings with
respect to both the profile of the part delivered by the forging mill and the profile of the
finished part.
The main dimensions shall be recorded. The values shall be within the tolerances given on the
drawing.

10 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with H 4320.
The samples delivered with the part shall be marked in compliance with the requirements specified
in the purchase order.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data (for parts which have been retreated this includes
recordings of all heat treatments),
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 5000 / 86  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5170

ANNEX I

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EACH GRADE OF STEEL

DESCRIPTION GRADE APPLICATION

Chromium-molybdenum 18 CD4 Snubber components

steel

Nickel-chromium- 18 NCD6
molybdenum steel

Manganese nickel- 16 MND5 Reactor support pads

molybdenum steel

Nickel-chromium- 20 NCD12 Upper clevis inserts for

molybdenum steel reactor coolant pump
support column

For each grade, the following shall be specified:

- melting process,
- ladle and product analysis requirements,
- heat treatment conditions,
- mechanical properties of as-treated parts.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 87
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5170

ANNEX II

CHROMIUM-MOLYBDENUM OR
NICKEL-CHROMIUM-MOLYBDENUM STEEL

AFNOR GRADE 18 CD4

AFNOR GRADE 18 NCD6
1) Melting process
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or any other technically equivalent process.

2) Chemical requirements

AFNOR GRADE 18 CD4 AFNOR GRADE 18 NCD6

ELEMENT LADLE AND PRODUCT LADLE AND PRODUCT
ANALYSES (%) ANALYSES (%)

C 0.16 - 0.22 0.14 - 0.20

Mn 0.60 - 1.10 0.60 - 0.90
Si 0.10 - 0.40 0.10 - 0.40
Cr 0.85 - 1.30 0.85 - 1.15
Mo 0.15 - 0.30 0.15 - 0.30
Ni – 1.20 - 1.60
Max. S 0.035 0.035
Max. P 0.035 0.035

3) Heat treatment
- Austenitizing at a suitable temperature. Quenching in water.
- Tempering at  600°C.

4) Mechanical properties of as-treated parts

NAME TEST REQUIRED

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE VALUE

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 470 MPa

Rm 660-860 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 16

KV impact 0°C Minimum average value 40 J

Minimum individual value 28 J

Brinell hardness Room 188-263

M 5000 / 88  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5170

ANNEX III

MANGANESE-NICKEL-MOLYBDENUM STEEL

AFNOR GRADE 16 MND5

1) Melting process
The steel shall be made by the electric furnace process, killed using aluminium and vacuum
degassed.

2) Chemical requirements

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS (%) PRODUCT ANALYSIS (%)

Max. C 0.200 0.220

Mn 1.20 - 1.50 1.12 - 1.58
Max. P 0.015 0.020
Max. S 0.015 0.020
Si 0.15 - 0.35 0.11 - 0.39
Ni 0.40 - 0.80 0.37 - 0.83
Mo 0.45 - 0.60 0.40 - 0.65
Max. V 0.03 0.03
Max. Cu 0.20 0.20
Max. Co 0.03 0.03
Max. Cr 0.25 0.30

3) Heat treatment
- Austenitizing at a temperature between 850°C and 900°C.
- Quenching in water.
- Tempering at  630°C.

4) Mechanical properties of as-treated parts (HTMP + SSRHT) SSRHT as specified in

paragraph 4.5.1.

NAME TEST REQUIRED

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE VALUE
Rp0.2 minimum value for information (345 MPa)
Tension Room
Rm for information
A % (5d) minimum value for information

Rtp0.2 minimum value 340 MPa

200°C
Rm minimum value 440 MPa
A % (5d) for information

Minimum average value 40 J

KV impact 0°C
Minimum individual value 28 J

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 89
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5170

ANNEX IV

NICKEL-CHROMIUM-MOLYBDENUM STEEL

AFNOR GRADE 20 NCD 12

1) Melting process
The steel shall be made by the electric furnace process, killed using aluminium and vacuum
degassed.

2) Chemical requirements

ELEMENT LADLE ANALYSIS (%) PRODUCT ANALYSIS (%)

Max. C 0.23 0.23

Mn 0.20 - 0.40 0.16 - 0.44
Max. P 0.020 0.020
Max. S 0.020 0.020
Max. Si 0.30 0.32
Ni 2.75 - 3.90 2.68 - 3.97
Cr 1.50 - 2.00 1.44 - 2.06
Mo 0.40 - 0.60 0.36 - 0.64
Max. V 0.03 0.05

3) Heat treatment
- Austenitizing at a suitable temperature.
- Quenching in water.
- Tempering at  600°C.

4) Mechanical properties of as-treated parts

NAME TEST REQUIRED

PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE VALUE

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 585 MPa

Rm 725-895 MPa
A % (5d) minimum value 18

KV impact 0°C Minimum average value 40 J

Minimum individual value 28 J

M 5000 / 90  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5180

M 5180
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

TYPE 12 MDV 6 STEEL CASTINGS FOR USE IN

THE FABRICATION OF STEAM GENERATOR
AND REACTOR COOLANT PUMP SUPPORTS,
PLATES AND CLEVISES, AND CLAMPS
FOR MAIN STEAM LINE SUPPORTS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers manganese-molybdenum-vanadium alloy steel castings of 400 mm or less
in thickness for use in the fabrication of:
- lower clevis inserts and clevises for steam generator and reactor coolant pump supports and
upper clevis inserts for steam generator supports,
- plates, clevises and clamps for main steam line supports.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using an electric furnace or any other technically equivalent process.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given in table I below:

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. The foundry shall also provide a product analysis on one part per lot.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 91
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5180

This analysis may be performed on metal discard from mechanical test specimens.
These analyses shall be performed in accordance with MC 1000.
TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE 12 MDV 6

ELEMENT LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSIS (%)

Max. Carbon 0.15

Max. Silicon 0.60
Manganese 1.20 - 1.70
Max. Sulphur (1) 0.020
Max. Phosphorus (1) 0.025
Molybdenum 0.20 - 0.40
Vanadium 0.05 - 0.10

(1) For part analysis, the maximum guaranteed value is increased by 0.005%.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the foundry shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,

- identification of casting process,

- part drawing showing the position of any samples which are integrally attached to the part,
- heat treatment conditions,
- drawing showing positions of test specimens on samples.
The various heat treatment, sampling, non-destructive examination and weld repair procedures shall
be presented in chronological order.

PROTOTYPE PART
The manufacturing method shall be tested using a prototype part produced in accordance
with M 160.
Parts classified S1 in group 1 according to H 1411 shall meet the RCC-M requirements of class 2,
and the parts otherwise classified shall meet the requirements of class 3.

M 5000 / 92  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5180

3.2 CASTING
The choice of casting method shall be left to the foundry. This method shall be identified in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

3.3 MACHINING
Parts shall be machined as indicated on the procurement drawing.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Parts shall be delivered in the as-treated condition.
Heat treatment for mechanical properties shall consist of quenching or normalizing followed by
tempering. Austenitizing temperatures prior to quenching and tempering temperatures shall be set
by the foundry in order to fulfil the requirements given in paragraph 4 of this specification. Heat
treatment conditions shall be specified in the manufacturing programme.
If, after heat treatment, the parts do not exhibit the required characteristics, they may be retreated
(see paragraph 4.4).
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II below.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall be taken from ingots integral with the part or ingots cast separately
supplemented, where required, by a certain number of parts if specified in the equipment
specification or other relevant contractual documents.
Samples shall be attached to parts and subjected to the same heat treatment cycles in the same run.
The size of test samples shall be such that they can provide enough specimens for all tests and
retests.
Samples are parallelepipedal in shape with the following dimensions: e  2e  2e, where e
represents the maximum thickness of the most loaded section. The section shall be shown on the
drawing attached to the purchase order. Specimen axes shall be located at a distance from the skins
equal to at least one quarter of e with a minimum distance of 20 mm and a maximum of 60 mm.
The size of samples used and the drawing indicating specimen positions shall be included in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 93
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5180

M 5000 / 94  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5180

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
All parts of a lot shall come from the same heat of steel which have undergone the same
manufacturing and heat treatment cycles or have been heat treated in the same furnace charge. The
weight of a lot shall be restricted to 6000 kg.
The number and content of tests to be performed, per lot, on an ingot integral with the part or cast
separately and, where required, on the part itself are given in the following table:

NUMBER OF
CONDITION TEST
MEASURE TEST SPECIMENS PER
OF SAMPLE TEMPERATURE
TYPE OF TEST

Tension HTMP + SSRHT Room 1

Ingot Tension (1) HTMP + SSRHT 300°C 1
KV impact HTMP + SSRHT 0°C 3
Tension (2) HTMP + SSRHT Room 1
Part
KV impact (2) HTMP + SSRHT 0°C 3

(1) Tension test at 300°C on main steam line supports.

(2) If specified on the equipment specification or other relevant contractual documents.

HTMP Heat treatment for mechanical properties.

SSRHT Simulated stress relieving heat treatment.

Test specimens shall be taken after the sample has been subjected to the followig stress-relieving
heat treatment at a temperature less than or equal to tempering temperature less 25°C. This
treatment shall follow the requirements of M 151.

4.3.2 Test procedure

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE AND AT HIGH TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall comply with the dimensions as specified in MC 1000.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000. The following values shall be
recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture, if specified in the equipment specification or other
relevant contractual documents.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 95
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5180

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted: if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted: if not, it shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series. Absorbed energy values shall be
recorded. Tests shall be performed at 0 °C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at 0 °C given in table II must be met.
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure:
- two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall be tested at the
same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do
not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1, the lot shall be rejected
(see paragraph 4.4).

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory result for one or more mechanical tests may be retreated.
Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2.
The tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

M 5000 / 96  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5180

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Sand shall be carefully removed from the parts, which shall then be carefully trimmed to eliminate
risers and vent scrap, parting lines and runners.
Surface condition shall be determined in accordance with MC 7200.

5.1 VISUAL EXAMINATION

Parts shall be subjected to a comprehensive visual examination in accordance with MC 7100.
Surfaces shall be thoroughly examined at the machining stage to check the soundness of the metal.
A final visual examination shall be performed at the final stage before delivery.

RESULTS
Parts shall be free from scale, tears, shrinkage cavities, sand inclusions or other injurious defects.

5.2 MAGNETIC PARTICLE OR LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION

All accessible surfaces of the part shall be subjected to magnetic particle or liquid penetrant
examination after all heat treatment and final machining operations have been completed.
Test procedures shall be as specified in MC 5000 for magnetic particle examination and MC 4000
for liquid penetrant examination.
The various phases of examination are specified in the manufacturing programme. Where no clear
interpretation of results is possible, a more comprehensive examination shall be conducted.

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

a) Magnetic particle examination
Any defect with one dimension of 2 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition. All
defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 5 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending over more than
20 mm if they are from 3 to 6 mm apart.
Two adjacent indications shall be considered as one if the distance between them is less than
twice the length of whichever is the smaller. The cumulative length of this indication shall be
equal to the sum of the lengths of the two indications plus the distance between them.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 97
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5180

b) Liquid penetrant examination

Any defect with one dimension of 2 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition. All
defects which produce the following indications shall be located and eliminated or repaired:
- linear indications,
- non-linear indications with one dimension greater than 5 mm,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 10 or more indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension shall
not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavorable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.
When liquid penetrant examination is performed on O-ring bearing surfaces, any indication with
one dimension greater than 0.3 mm shall be considered a recordable condition. All defects which
produce the following indications shall be detected and repaired:
- indications with one dimension greater than 1 mm.
No aligned or grouped indications corresponding to the definitions given above shall be
acceptable.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Unless otherwise indicated in the equipment specification, this examination shall be performed after
final heat treatment.

6.1 RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION

Where radiographic examination is required for a connecting weld to another part, weld edges shall
be radiographically examined in accordance with MC 3200. This examination shall be specified in
the equipment specification or other relevant contractual documents.

ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
Defects such as hot tears, cracks, chaplet and internal chill remnants shall be unacceptable.
Acceptance criteria correspond to severity level 1 criteria, as specified in standard NF EN 12681,
Annex A.

6.2 ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION

Where possible, the entire volume of the part shall be subjected to ultrasonic examination.
The method used is the single probe longitudinal wave reflection method, in accordance with
MC 2200. Where there is any doubt as to the interpretation of results, a supplementary radiographic
examination shall be performed.

M 5000 / 98  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5180

RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

The following shall be considered as recordable conditions:
- any indication with a reduction in back echo amplitude > 18 dB.
Where there is no clear interpretation as to the causes of reduction in these areas, they shall be
considered suspect and subjected to radiographic examination.
Ultrasonic examination criteria shall be as follows:
- severity level 1 for thicknesses less than or equal to 50 mm,
- severity level 2 for thicknesses over 50 and less than or equal to 100 mm,
- severity level 3 for thicknesses over 100 and less than or equal to 200 mm,
- severity level 4 for thicknesses over 200 mm.

The following indications shall be unacceptable:

- any area producing indications whose amplitude exceeds the reference curve and one of whose
dimensions exceeds the values given in the table below:

SEVERITY SURFACE AREA LARGEST DIMENSION

LEVEL (mm2) (min)

1 500 40
2 1000 50
3 2000 60
4 3000 80

Whatever the thickness examined, severity level 1 criteria shall apply to the first 25 mm:
- discontinuities with a distance amplitude variation equal to or greater than half of the thickness
examined or 25 mm, whichever is the smaller,
- two or more indications located in the same plane, whose amplitude exceeds the reference curve
and which are separated by a distance less than the greatest dimension of the larger of the two
defects, if they extend over an area greater than that given for each level in the table above.

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

7.1 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITHOUT REPAIR WELDING
Defects detected by surface examination by magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination may
be eliminated by grinding, provided the thickness of the ground areas remains within the tolerances
specified on the drawing and that the resulting cavities are not injurious to the areas around them.
Where this is not the case, the requirements of paragraph 7.2 shall apply.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 99
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5180

Overheating of the ground surface must be avoided during removal:

- cavities must blend smoothly into surrounding areas,
- cavities shall be subjected to magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination in accordance
with the procedures and criteria described in paragraph 5.2 of this specification.

7.2 REMOVAL OF DEFECTS WITH REPAIR WELDING

7.2.1 Removal of defects
Areas whose defects do not meet the acceptability criteria defined in paragraphs 5.1, 5.2, and 6 shall
be excavated by grinding or chipping or carbon arc cutting plus grinding (in the case of carbon arc
cutting, the part is preheated to a temperature of about 100°C).
Excavation cavities shall be subjected to magnetic particle examination in accordance with the
procedures and criteria described in paragraph 5.2 of this specification. Where doubt exists as to
whether a radiographically detected defect has been completely removed by excavation, particularly
if there are two defects, one below the other, in the same cross-section, it is recommended that a
new radiographic examination be made of the excavated area (in which case the requirements of
paragraph MC 3200 no longer have to be met).
Excavation shall continue until surface defects which are unacceptable for finished parts have been
eliminated.

7.2.2 Repair welding

Repairs shall be made by welding in accordance with the requirements of H 4000.

7.2.3 Stress-relieving heat treatment

On completion of weld repairs, the part shall be subjected to a stress-relieving heat treatment
entailing:
- holding temperature less than or equal to the tempering temperature for heat treatment for
mechanical properties, less 25°C.
Minimum holding time depends on the size of the repairs, but shall never be less than three hours.
The number of stress-relieving treatments shall be such that their total duration does not
exceed 20 hours.

7.3 EXAMINATION OF WELD REPAIRS

The following non-destructive examinations shall be made on completion of weld repairs:
A - MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION OF ALL AREAS REPAIRED
- Visual examination.
- Magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination. The procedures and criteria of these
examinations shall satisfy the requirements of paragraph 5 of this specification.

M 5000 / 100  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5180

B - RADIOGRAPHIC OR ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF MAJOR REPAIRS

The term "major" and "minor" excavation cavities are defined in annexes I and II.
The same type of volumetric examination which enabled detection of defects shall be repeated on
major repairs.
Examination procedures and criteria shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraph 6 of
this specification.
Cavities are classified according to depth or surface area.
A chart showing the exact locations and dimensions of defects shall be drawn up.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensional characteristics of the parts, after final machining, shall comply with the values
indicated on the procurement drawing attached to the order.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with H 4320.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data:
. for parts which have been retreated this includes recordings of all heat treatments,
- major repair chart,

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 101

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5180

- for all repairs by welding (major and minor):

. production weld data sheets,
. welding procedure data sheets and filler materials acceptance reports quoted in production
weld data sheets,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional checks
- heat treatment conditions (temperature range and holding times).

These reports include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 5000 / 102  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5180

ANNEX 1

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 103

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5180

ANNEX 2

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
SURFACE TO BE MACHINED

M 5000 / 104  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5180

ANNEX 2 (cont.)

EXCAVATION CAVITIES
UNMACHINED SURFACE

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 105

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5180

M 5000 / 106  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 5190

M 5190
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

HOT OR COLD FORMED SPRINGS FOR

CLASS 1, 2 AND 3 SAFETY VALVES

0 SCOPE
This specification covers hot or cold formed springs for class 1, 2 and 3 safety valves.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The recommended melting process shall be given in the data sheets for each grade, appended to this
specification. The melting process used shall be mentioned on the acceptance report.

2 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
2.1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
Chemical composition, as determined by ladle and product analyses, shall comply with the
requirements given on the data sheets appended for each grade.

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. He shall also supply a product analysis for class 1 springs. These analyses shall be
performed in compliance with MC 1000. This latter analysis may be made on metal discard from
mechanical test specimens.

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURE OF BARS AND WIRES
The bar rolling and wire drawing conditions are left to the discretion of the rolling or drawing mill.
The surface condition must correspond to a roughness allowing significant results to be obtained
from non-destructive examination. The surface conditions shall be determined in accordance
with MC 7200.

 n° 140-2013 M 5000 / 107

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5190

3.2 WINDING
Bar winding is performed hot, whereas wires are generally wound cold.

3.3 HEAT TREATMENT

For hot-wound springs, the heat treatment for mechanical properties is performed after winding and
preliminary cooling.
For cold-wound springs the tempering or solution heat treatment operation is performed on wire
before any work hardening and winding. The hardening or dimensional stabilization heat treatment is
performed after winding.
The treatment applied shall be that specified in the technical data sheets, for each grade.
For class 1 springs, records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
For class 2 and 3 springs, only a certificate mentioning the temperature, the duration of the treatment
and the cooling method is required.
If the lot is to be retreated, the new heat treatment shall comply with the same requirements.

3.4 MACHINING OF SPRINGS

Hot-wound springs shall be subjected to shot-blasting after heat treatment. The two ends of the
spring shall be ground or machined so that a sealing of at least 270° is obtained.

3.5 PRELIMINARY FORMING

Subsequent to the heat treatment for mechanical properties, the springs shall be compressed in order
to develop residual stresses in them such as to favour free length stabilization. The springs shall thus
be subjected to solid length compression at least three times. The blocking load shall not exceed
1.5 times the allowable solid length compression design load.
Any deviation from perpendicularity of the faces in relation to the centreline shall not exceed 1°.
Any deviation from parallelism between the two faces shall not exceed 1°30'.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF BARS OR WIRES
4.1.1 Required values
The mechanical properties values to be obtained are given in the technical data sheets for each grade
appended, and supplemented in the purchase order if necessary.

M 5000 / 108  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5190

4.1.2 Sampling
Test samples shall consist of prolongations taken from bars or wires.
The size of the test samples shall be such that they can provide sufficient test specimens for all tests
and retests.
The sampling conditions shall be as follows:
- the axis of the test specimen shall be parallel to the wire or bar axis and located at a distance from
the skin as shown below,
. diameter not exceeding 25 mm: on the centreline,
. diameter of between 25 and 50 mm: 12.5 mm from the skin,
. diameter greater than 50 mm: mid-radius.
- the test-pertinent area of the test specimens shall be located at a distance from the end of the bar
equal to or no less than the diameter of the bar.

4.1.3 Testing
For products intended for manufacture of hot wound springs or springs cold wound followed by
hardening heat treatment, the tests shall be performed on specimens taken from samples which have
been subjected to the reference heat treatment specified in the annex.
In all other cases, the tests shall be performed on specimens taken from wires which have been
subjected to the complete heat treatment cycle and possibly strain hardened.

4.1.3.1 Series of tests

The lot shall comprise bars of wire of the same diameter, from the same heat of steel, and subjected
to the same manufacturing cycle and the same heat treatments, in the same furnace charge.
a) Test prolongations
The prolongations shall be taken from 4% of the bars, with a minimum of 2 bars. In the case of
wires, the tests shall be performed on one prolongation per spool.

b) Number and content of tests

The following mechanical tests shall be performed:
- 1 tension test at room temperature (1 test specimen),
- 1 impact test on class 1 bars of diameter 15 mm or more and class 2 and 3 bars of diameter
25 mm or more if so requested by the technical data sheet for each grade,
- 1 hardness test.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 109

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5190

4.1.3.2 Test procedure (does not concern annex III)

A - TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens
Test specimens shall have a circular section. Their normal diameter shall be 10 mm and their
dimensions as specified in MC 1000. Where applicable, the requirements of standard
NF EN ISO 6892-1 Annex C shall be used for wires.

b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset, in MPa,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements stipulated in the data sheets for each grade.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unsatisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen.
If the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be take close to those which were defective.
If the results of the retests are satisfactory, the lot shall be accepted; if not, it shall be rejected
and the requirements of paragraph 4.1.4 "Retreatment" shall apply.

B - IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens and test method
Impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of these
specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements stipulated in the technical data sheets must be
fulfilled.

M 5000 / 110  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5190

If one of the conditions is not met, the lot shall be rejected. However, where the only
unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the required minimum value and
all other requirements have been met, retests may be performed in accordance with the following
procedure:
- two sets of test specimens taken close to the defective specimens shall be tested at the same
temperature as the first set,
- if results for either of the two sets of three test specimens do not comply with the
requirements given in paragraph 4.1.1, the lot shall be rejected and the requirements of
paragraph 4.1.4 "Retreatment" shall apply.

C - HARDNESS TEST
The hardness tests shall be performed on the surface of the product in accordance with the
requirements of MC 1000. One hardness test shall be performed per lot.

4.1.4 Retreatment
Lots rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be retreated.
Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.1.2. The choice of test
prolongations shall be as stipulated in paragraph 4.1.3.
No more than two retreatments shall be allowed.

4.2 SPRING CHARACTERISTICS

4.2.1 Individual tests
The stiffness and residual deformation shall be checked for each spring in accordance with the
conditions specified in the purchase order.

4.2.2 Test per heat treatment lot

In the case of hot wound springs subjected to heat treatment for mechanical properties after winding,
a test sample shall undergo the same heat treatment as undergone by the lot of springs and in the
same furnace.
This sample shall, where possible, be firmly attached to one of the springs in the lot.
A lot shall comprise the springs from the same lot of bars and subjected to the same manufacturing
cycle and the same heat treatment for mechanical properties in the same furnace charge.
The tests performed in accordance with the appended technical data sheets shall be: decarburization
measurement, structural examination and line of hardness measurements.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 111

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5190

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

5.1 VISUAL EXAMINATION
Surfaces of class 1, 2 and 3 part shall be thoroughly examined during all phases of manufacturing to
check the soundness of the metal.
Parts shall be sound and free of strings, tears, nicks, or other injurious defects. The surface condition
shall comply with the requirements of the procurement drawings.
If the visual examination reveals the presence of unacceptable defects, the part may not be accepted
as-is and the requirements of paragraph 7 shall apply.

5.2 LIQUID PENETRANT OR MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION

One of these two examinations shall be performed on a finished spring.

5.2.1 Liquid penetrant examination

Liquid penetrant examination procedures are defined in MC 4140.
The examination shall concern the entire surface.

EXAMINATION CRITERIA
The following indications shall be unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- 3 or more indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,
- 5 or more grouped indications within a rectangular area of 100 cm2, whose greatest dimension
shall not exceed 20 cm, taken in the most unfavourable location relative to the indications being
evaluated.

5.2.2 Magnetic particle examination

The magnetic particle examination procedures are defined in MC 5140.
Special precautions shall be taken to avoid overheating when examining alloy or high carbon steels,
when magnetization is by the electric current flow technique.

EXAMINATION CRITERIA
The following indications shall be unacceptable:
- linear indications,
- 3 or more rounded indications aligned less than 3 mm apart edge to edge, or extending over more
than 15 mm if their distance edge to edge is between 3 and 6 mm.

M 5000 / 112  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5190

If the liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examinations reveal the presence of unacceptable defects,
the part may not be accepted as-is, and the requirements of paragraph 7 shall apply.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed by the ultrasonic process on bars for class 1 and 2
springs of diameters  50 mm in accordance with MC 2300.

6.1 TIME OF EXAMINATION

This examination shall be performed on as-delivered part (prior to winding).

6.2 PROCEDURES
Ultrasonic examination procedures are specified in MC 2300.
The probe frequency and diameter shall be chosen according to the structure of the material to be
examined and shall comply with the requirements of MC 2100.

6.3 SCANNING PLAN AND DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

The entire volume of the part shall be subjected to volumetric examination.
Scanning shall be performed in accordance with paragraph 12.4 of standard NF EN 10228-3 or 4, or
with paragraph 13.3 of standard NF EN 10308.
If the scanning cannot be performed by rotation it shall be performed on a grid layout in accordance
with paragraph 12.3 of standard NF EN 10228-3 or 4, or with paragraph 13.2 of standard
NF EN 10308.
Part type is 1a.

6.4 EVALUATION OF INDICATIONS

Indications shall be evaluated in accordance with paragraph 13 of standard NF EN 10228-3 and 4,
or with paragraph 14 of standard NF EN 10308.

6.5 RECORDABLE CONDITIONS AND EXAMINATION CRITERIA

Recordable indication ranges and acceptability limits are:
- those of quality class 3 in standard NF EN 10228-3 or of standard NF EN 10308 in the case of
martensitic steels,
- those of quality class 2 standard NF EN 10228-4 or of standard NF EN 10308 in the case of
austenitic steels and Nickel base alloy.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 113

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5190

7 REMOVAL AND REPAIR OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Only defects which may be removed by grinding to within permitted part tolerances shall be
acceptable.
No weld repairs shall be allowed.

8 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensions of the bars or wires and springs shall be checked in accordance with the
requirements of the procurement drawings.
The springs technical characteristics are defined in conformance with the requirements of standard
NF EN ISO 2162-2.
The values shall be within the tolerances given on the drawings.
For springs, the seating, the perpendicularity in relation to the centreline and the parallelism of the
ends shall in particular be checked.

9 MARKING
The Supplier shall specify the identification and marking methods used, in compliance with B,
C and D 1300.

10 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

Requirements shall be specified in the purchase order.

11 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle analysis (and product analysis for class 1 springs),
- heat treatment certificate (with evaluation of recorded heat treatment data for class 1 springs),
- mechanical tests on bars and springs,

M 5000 / 114  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5190

- micrographic examination and check of decarburization, where applicable,

- non-destructive examinations,
- dimensional check.

These reports shall include:

- heat numbers and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 115

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5190

ANNEX I

ALLOY STEELS - GRADES 45 SiCrMo 6, 50 SiCrMo 6, 51 CrV 4, 51 CrMoV 4

SUMMARY OF PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS

1) Melting process
The steel shall be melted in an electric furnace or by any other technically equivalent process.

2) Chemical composition

% ON LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSIS

ELEMENT
45 SiCrMo 6 50 SiCrMo 6 51 CrV 4 51 CrMoV 4

C 0.42 - 0.50 0.46 - 0.54 0.47 - 0.55 0.48 - 0.56

Mn 0.50 - 0.80 0.70 - 1.10 0.70 -1.00 0.70 - 1.10
Si 1.30 - 1.70 1.40 - 1.80 0.10 - 0.40 0.15 - 0.40
Max. P 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025
Max. S 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025
Cr 0.50 - 0.75 0.80 - 1.10 0.85 - 1.15 0.90 - 1.20
Mo 0.20 - 0.30 0.20 - 0.35 - 0.15 - 0.25
V - - 0.10 - 0.20 0.07 - 0.20

The allowable variations for the product analysis are defined in Table 4 of standard
NF EN 10083-3.

3) Winding
Winding shall be performed at between 850°C and 920°C followed by annealing (between
650°C and 700°C) or slow cooling in still air.

4) Reference heat treatment

Austenitizing at a temperature of:
- 880°C ± 10°C for 45 SiCrMo 6.
- 890°C ± 10°C for 50 SiCrMo 6.
- 850°C ± 10°C for 51 CrV 4,
- 860°C ± 10°C for 51 CrMoV 4.
Oil quenching.
Tempering at:
- 450°C ± 20°C for 45 SiCrMo 6 and 50 SiCrMo 6,
- 500°C ± 20°C for 51 CrV 4 and 51 CrMoV 4.

M 5000 / 116  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5190

5) Mechanical properties of bars

REQUIRED VALUES
NAME TEST
PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE
45 SiCrMo 6 50 SiCrMo 6 51 CrV 4 51 CrMoV 4

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum 1400 MPa 1420 MPa 1125 MPa 1300 MPa
value

Rm 1550 - 1800 1650 - 1900 1320 - 1570 1450 - 1700

MPa MPa MPa MPa

A % (5d) 6 6 7 8

KU 20° C Individual 10 J 10 J 10 J 15 J
impact minimum value

6) Decarburization - Structural examination

Decarburization shall never be total.
For partial decarburization measured in accordance with standard NF EN ISO 3887, the
maximum depths of the decarburized areas shall not exceed 1% of the diameter of the bar with a
minimum of 0.10 mm and a maximum of 0.50 mm.
Micrographic examination should allow both the effectiveness of the shot-blasting and the core
quench structure to be checked.

7) Line of hardness measurements

The Rockwell C hardness measurements shall be made along two mutually perpendicular
diameters from the core to the skin.

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 117

RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum M 5190

ANNEX II

NICKEL-CHROMIUM-IRON ALLOYS NC 15 FeNbA and NC 19 FeNbDT

1) Melting process
The metal shall be melted in an electric vacuum furnace or by any other technically equivalent
process.

2) Chemical composition

NC 15 FeTNbA NC 19 FeNbDT
ELEMENTS IN %
LADLE AND PRODUCT LADLE AND PRODUCT

Max. Carbon 0.080 0.080

Max. Silicon 0.50 0.35
Max. Manganese 1.00 0.35
Max. Phosphorus - 0.015
Max. Sulphur 0.010 0.015
Nickel 70.00 min 50.00 to 55.00
Chromium 14.00 to 17.00 17.00 to 21.00
Iron 5.00 to 9.00 the rest
Max. Copper 0.50 0.30
Titanium 2.25 to 2.75 0.65 to 1.15
Niobium + Tantalum 0.70 to 1.20 4.75 to 5.50
Aluminium 0.40 to 1.00 0.20 to 0.80
Molybdenum - 2.80 to 3.30
B Max. Boron - 0.006

3) Reference heat treatment

NC 15 FeTNbA NC 19 FeNbDT

SOLUTION HEAT 1080 °C to 1100 °C 920 °C to 1010 °C

TREATMENT rapid cooling rapid cooling

Non-strain
STRAIN-HARDENING 15 to 20 % 50 to 65 % Non-strain-hardened
hardened

700 °C 730 °C 650 °C 720 °C ± 10 °C

± 10 °C ± 10 °C ± 10 °C
STRUCTURAL
Min. holding time 8 h.
HARDENING
20 hours 16 hours 4 hours Slow cooling to 620°C± 10°C so
minimum minimum minimum that minimum total treatment time
is 18 hours, air cooling.

M 5000 / 118  n° 140-2013

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5190

4) Mechanical properties

REQUIRED VALUE
TEST NC 15 FeTNbA NC 19 FeNbDT
TYPE OF MECHANICAL
TEMPE-
TEST PROPERTIES Strain- Strain-
RATURE Non-strain- Non-strain-
hardened hardened
hardened hardened
15 - 20 % 50 - 60 %

TENSION Room Rp 0.2 min. 655 MPa 1030 MPa

Rm min. 1070 MPa 1270 MPa

A % (5d) min. 20 % 12 %

BRINELL Room 280 to 350 330 HB min

HARDNESS

 n° 137-2012 M 5000 / 119

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 5190

ANNEX III

STRAIN-HARDENED AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEELS

GRADES X 5 CrNi 18.10 - X 10 CrNi 18.08 - X 5 CrNiMo 17.12-2 -

X 6 CrNiTi 18.10 AS PER NF EN 10088-3

1) Melting process
The steel shall be melted in an electric arc or induction furnace or by any other technically
equivalent process.

2) Chemical composition
As per NF EN 10088-3.

3) Heat treatment
- Of bars or wires before strain-hardening: as per NF EN 10088-3.
- Of springs after winding: dimensional stabilization at a temperature of between 300°C and
450°C inclusive for at least 1 hour.

4) Mechanical properties
The mechanical properties to be respected are defined by the spring Supplier according to the
diameter of the wires.

M 5000 / 120  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 6201

M 6201
PRODUCT PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATION

CLASS 2 AND 3 TYPE EN-GJS 350-22 U-RT AND

FGS Ni 20 Cr 2 UNALLOYED AND ALLOYED
DUCTILE IRON CASTINGS

0 SCOPE
This specification covers class 3 pressure-retaining castings such as unalloyed
EN-GJS 350-22 U-RT ductile iron and austenitic Ni 20 Cr 2 ductile iron pump castings, and
non-pressure retaining castings (classes 2 and 3) such as unalloyed EN-GJS 350-22 U-RT ductile
iron pump tail-pieces.

1 MELTING PROCESS
The steel shall be made using a cupola or electric furnace.

2 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 REQUIRED VALUES
2.1.1 Unalloyed cast iron
Chemical composition shall be chosen by the foundry on the basis of the technique used.

2.1.2 Austenitic alloy cast iron

Chemical composition shall be in compliance with the requirements specified in table I.

 n° 137-2012 M 6000 / 1
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 6201

2.2 CHEMICAL ANALYSES

The steelmaker shall supply a ladle analysis certified by the mill manager or his duly accredited
representative. Should a more complete material analysis be performed, it should only reveal the
usual residual contents for the grade in question. If a product analysis is performed, it may be
performed on metal discard from mechanical test specimens. These analyses shall be performed in
compliance with MC 1000.
TABLE I

AFNOR GRADE FGS Ni 20 Cr 2

ELEMENT LADLE AND PRODUCT ANALYSES (%)

Maximum Carbon 3.0

Silicon 1.5 - 3.0
Manganese 0.7 - 1.25
Maximum Phosphorus 0.08
Maximum Copper 0.5
Nickel 18.0 - 22.0
Chromium 1.0 - 2.5

3 MANUFACTURE
3.1 MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME
Prior to commencement of manufacturing operations, the foundry shall draw up a manufacturing
programme which shall include the following:
- identification of melting process,
- identification of casting method,
- part procurement drawing with positions of any samples which are integrally attached or adjacent
to the part,
- heat treatment conditions,
- drawing with position of test specimens on samples,
- hydrostatic testing procedures,
- the various heat treatment, sampling, non-destructive testing and repair welding operations shall
be presented in chronological order.

PROTOTYPE PART
The manufacturing method shall be tested using a prototype part produced in accordance with the
requirements of M 160 subject to the following provisions:
- for these types of part, examination of the entire volume of the part is not required. The
radiographic examination shall be limited to the characteristic zones defined by the Manufacturer
and the foundry with regard to the stresses to which the part is exposed, the casting method and
the zones to be subjected to deep machining.

M 6000 / 2  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 6201

When correct radiographic examination of the whole of these zones has not been possible, or when
this examination does not allow to conclude that the prototype part is sound, a macrographic cross-
section examination shall be performed. The corresponding cutting plane shall be indicated in the
manufacturing programme.

3.2 CASTING
The choice of casting method shall be left to the foundry. This method shall be identified in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

3.3 MACHINING
Parts shall be machined as indicated on the procurement drawing.

3.4 DELIVERY CONDITION - HEAT TREATMENT

Parts shall be delivered in the as-treated, stabilized condition. Heat treatment conditions shall be left
to the choice of the foundry and shall be such as to obtain the properties required under paragraph 4
of this specification. These treatment conditions shall be specified in the manufacturing
programme (1).
Maximum permissible deviation from specified holding temperatures for the entire charge shall be
± 20°C. If, after heat treatment, the parts do not exhibit the required characteristics, they may be
retreated (see paragraph 4.4).
Records shall be evaluated by the Supplier.
(1) The term "conditions" refers to: heating rate, holding temperature, holding time and cooling rate.

4 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
4.1 REQUIRED VALUES
Mechanical strength requirements are shown in table II.

4.2 SAMPLING
Test samples shall consist of annexes adjacent to the part or from separate or adjacent test ingots.
For parts weighing more than 750 kg, tests shall be adjacent or integrally attached to the part
For parts weighing more than 750 kg or less, tests shall be cast separately.

 n° 137-2012 M 6000 / 3
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 6201

The size of samples shall be such as to provide enough specimens for all tests and retests. The
smallest dimension of the test ingot cross section shall be representative of the maximum thickness
of the part wall (excluding flanges). Samples shall comply with the requirements of annexes 1 and 2.
The type of ingot used and the drawing giving the position of test specimens in the ingots shall be
given in the manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).
TABLE II

REQUIRED VALUE
NAME TEST
PROPERTIES
OF TEST TEMPERATURE EN-GJS- FGS
350-22 U-RT Ni 20 Cr 2

Tension Room Rp0.2 minimum value 220 MPa 210 MPa

Rm minimum value 350 MPa 370 MPa
A % 5d minimum value 22 7

KV impact + 20°C Average value 17 J 17 J

Minimum individual value 14 J 14 J

Hardness Room Brinell hardness < 160 140-200

4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Number and content of tests
The number and content of the series of tests to be performed on each lot is given in table III.

DEFINITION OF A LOT
A lot is defined as comprising parts from the same heat of steel, from the same spheriodization
charge and from the same heat treatment charge. A lot shall be restricted to 2000 kg.
Parts weighing more than 750 kg shall in themselves form a lot. For parts weighing 750 kg or less,
tests may be performed on the lot.
TABLE III

NUMBER
NAME CONDITION TEST
OF SPECIMENS
OF TEST OF SAMPLE TEMPERATURE
PER TYPE OF TEST

Tension HTMP + SHT Room 1

KV impact HTMP + SHT + 20°C 3

Hardness HTMP + SHT Room –

- HTMP : Heat treatment for mechanical properties
- SHT : Stabilizing heat treatment.

M 6000 / 4  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 6201

4.3.2 Test procedure

A -TENSION TESTING AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
a) Test specimens


Test specimens shall be proportional Lo  5.65 So  with a diameter of 14 mm.
b) Test method
The tension test shall be performed in compliance with MC 1000.
The following values shall be recorded:
- yield strength at 0.2% offset,
- ultimate tensile strength, in MPa,
- percentage elongation after fracture,
- percentage reduction of area after fracture.

c) Results
Results obtained shall meet the requirements given in table II.
If this is not the case and the test specimen has a physical defect (which does not affect the
usefulness of the product) or if unstisfactory test results are due to incorrect mounting of the
specimen or a testing machine malfunction, the test shall be repeated using another specimen. If
the results of the second test are satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not, the following
paragraph shall apply.
Where unsatisfactory results cannot be attributed to any of the above-mentioned causes, two
retests may be performed for each unsatisfactory result obtained. The second set of test
specimens shall be taken close to those which were defective. If the results of the retests are
satisfactory, the part shall be accepted; if not the part shall be rejected (see paragraph 4.4).

B -IMPACT TESTS
a) Test specimens and test method
KV impact test specimens shall be taken from adjacent locations. The shape and dimensions of
these specimens and test conditions shall be as specified in MC 1000. Use of a swinging
pendulum capable of providing about 49 Joules ± 2 Joules is however recommended.
Three test specimens shall be broken for each test series. Test temperature shall be + 20 °C.

b) Results
The energy absorbed by breakage requirements at 20 °C shown in table II must be fulfiled.

 n° 137-2012 M 6000 / 5
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 6201

c) Retests
The part shall be rejected if it fails to meet any one of these requirements (see paragraph 4.4).
However, where the only unsatisfactory result is an individual value which is lower than the
required minimum value and all other requirements have been met (satisfactory average, no
more than one result lower than the required value), retests may be performed in accordance with
the following procedure: two sets of three test specimens taken close to the defective specimens
shall be tested at the same temperature as the first set. If results for either of the two sets of three
test specimens do not comply with the requirements given in paragraph 4.1 the part shall be
rejected (see paragraph 4.4)

4.4 RETREATMENT
Parts rejected on the basis of unsatisfactory results for one or more mechanical tests may be
retreated. Retreatment conditions shall be described in the test report.
In such cases, test specimens shall be as specified in paragraph 4.2.
The tests performed shall be the same as those described in paragraph 4.3.
No more than one retreatment shall be allowed.

5 SURFACE EXAMINATION - SURFACE DEFECTS

Final examination for surface defects shall be performed after all heat treatment has been completed.

EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
Sand shall be carefully removed from the parts, which shall then be trimmed to eliminate risers and
vent scrap, parting lines and runners. Parts shall then be subjected to a complete visual examination
in accordance with MC 7100.
Surfaces shall be carefully examined during all stages of manufacture and machining to ensure that
the metal is sound.
Parts shall be sound and free from defects such as scale, cracks, porosities, sand inclusion, or other
injurious defects.

A liquid penetrant examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 4000, on all pressure
retaining machined areas of class 2 parts.

EXAMINATION CRITERIA
Any defect with one dimension of 2 mm or more shall be considered a recordable condition.

M 6000 / 6  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 6201

In any case, defects evaluated according to AFNOR standard NF EN 1371-1 and giving the
following indications shall be located and eliminated:
- linear indications not conforming to LP2 criterion,
- non linear indications, either isolated or in line, not conforming to SP3 and AP2 criteria.

6 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
Volumetric examination shall be performed:
- for unalloyed castings, either by radiographic or ultrasonic examination,
- for alloy austenitic castings, by radiographic examination.
Unless otherwise indicated, all examinations shall be performed after the part has been heat-treated.
Radiographic examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 3200.
Ultrasonic examination shall be performed in accordance with MC 2200.

6.1 ZONES EXAMINED

The zones to be examined shall be selected after the final part drawing has been drafted and the
prototype parts have been examinated.

6.2 DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

For pump casings, zone 1 (cutwater tip), as shown in the diagrams in annex 3, shall be examined.
Zone 1 shall be examined for a length of at least 100 mm from the end to the cutwater tip.
For pump tail-pieces, the flange on the oil jack side shall be radiographically examined and the ribs
ultrasonically examined.

6.3 EXAMINATION CRITERIA

6.3.1 Radiographic examination
For all severity levels, the following defects shall be unacceptable: cracks, chapelets, chill remnants.

The applicable acceptance criteria specified by the "Bureau de Normalisation des Industries de la
Fonderie"* in its Recommendation Technique No. 330 shall be those of severity level 3.
Bureau of Standards for French Foundries.

* Bureau of Standards for French Foundries

 n° 137-2012 M 6000 / 7
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 6201

6.3.2 Ultrasonic examination

- All indications with an amplitude of at least 25% of the distance-amplitude curve shall be
recorded.
- Indications greater than 75% of the distance-amplitude curve shall be unacceptable.

7 OTHER EXAMINATIONS
7.1 STRUCTURAL EXAMINATION
This examination shall be performed on the test ingot defined in paragraph 4.2 of this specification
or on an impact test specimen taken from this ingot, in accordance with the requirements of standard
NF EN ISO 945.
Spheroidization of graphite, defined in accordance with NF EN ISO 945, shall be:
- types V and VI: 90% minimum,
- types I, II and III: 2% maximum,
- the remainder of the graphite shall be type IV.

7.2 HYDROSTATIC TESTING

Parts shall be hydrostatically tested. Test procedures and conditions shall be specified in the
manufacturing programme (see paragraph 3.1).

8 REMOVAL OF UNACCEPTABLE AREAS

Repair welding shall not be authorized. Under exceptional circumstances, this operation may be
authorized by the Contractor on presentation of a data package prepared by the Supplier and the
Manufacturer.
Defects detected by surface examination or liquid penetrant examination may be eliminated by
grinding, provided the thickness of the ground areas remains within the tolerances specified on the
drawing and that the resulting cavities are not injurious to the areas around them.
Overheating of the ground surface must be avoided during grinding:
- cavities must blend smoothly into surrounding areas,
- cavities shall be subjected to liquid penetrant examination in accordance with the procedures and
criteria described in paragraph 5 of this specification.

9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The dimensional characteristics of parts after final machining shall comply with the procurement
drawing.

M 6000 / 8  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 6201

10 MARKING
It must be possible to identify the parts during all stages of manufacture.
Markings shall contain the following information:
- foundry mark,
- heat number,
- procurement specification number,
- serial number.

11 CLEANLINESS - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

11.1 PACKAGING
Packaging shall be such that:
- the products are protected from the effects of the weather (humidity, vapour, etc.),
- during handing, storage and transport, the protective coatings and/or final surfaces of the
products shall be conserved.
Packaging shall be marked on the outside and labelled in such a way that the following may be
identified easily and clearly:
- the purchase order,
- the contents: nature of product, quantity, weight.

11.2 TRANSPORTATION
The Supplier shall be responsible for checking that the means of transport and loading are indeed
suitable for the material to be transported.
Apart from respecting the relevant regulations for each means of transport used, the Supplier shall
also take all steps to ensure that the material arrives undamaged, either by impact or contamination.

12 TEST REPORTS
The following reports shall be drawn up by the Supplier after each individual test and, in any case,
prior to delivery of the part:
- ladle and product analyses,
- evaluation of recorded heat treatment data,
- mechanical tests,
- non-destructive examinations,

 n° 137-2012 M 6000 / 9
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 6201

- dimensional checks,
- heat treatment (temperature ranges and holding times).

These reports shall include:

- heat number and part reference number,
- Supplier's particulars,
- purchase order number,
- name of the inspection agency, where applicable,
- test and retest results together with required values.

M 6000 / 10  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 6201

ANNEX 1

TEST SAMPLE ADJACENT OR INTEGRALLY ATTACHED

TO THE PART

The position of the test samples adjacent or integrally attached to the part shall take the shape of the
cast part and filling method into account to avoid negative consequences on the adjacent metal
properties.
Test sample shape and dimensions shall be in conformance with the requirements of figure 1.
Test samples shall not be separated from the cast parts until heat treatments are completed.

Max. casting wall a* b* c*

TYPE h* L t*
thickness t* min. min. min.
I t  60 40 30 20 40 to 60 (1) (1)

II 60 < t  200 70 52.5 35 70 to 105(1) (1)

(1) Lt and h shall be chosen such that the test samples can be machined.
* Dimensions are expressed in mm.

Figure 1

 n° 137-2012 M 6000 / 11
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 6201

ANNEX 2

SEPARATELY CAST TEST SAMPLES

Test samples shall be cast in separate sand moulds from the same ladle of metal as the castings
themselves and be subjected to representative spheroidizing and inoculation treatments.
The test sample shall comply with the requirements of either Figure 1 or Figure 2, at the Supplier's
discretion.
Samples shall not be extracted from their mould at a temperature higher than that of the castings.
If graphite spheroidizing is performed using the in-mould method, the samples may be cast:
- either side by side with the castings using a common filler system,
- or separately in a test sample mould, using the same treatment method as that used to obtain the
castings.
Test samples shall be subject to the same heat treatments as the castings they represent.
Specimens shall be machined from test samples as per Figure 1 or Figure 2 (cross-hatched areas).

Dimensions Type
(mm) I(1) IIa IIb III IV
u 12.5 25 25 50 75
v 40 55 90 90 125
x (2) 30 40 40 or 50 60 65
y(1) 80 100 100 150 165
z (2) Depends on length of specimen
(1) For information purposes only.
(2) The value of z and x shall be such that the specimens can be machined

The thickness of the sand mould around the specimens shall be:
- Min. 40 mm for types I, IIa and IIb,
- Min. 80 mm for types IV
Figure 1

M 6000 / 12  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 6201

ANNEX 2 (continuation)

Dimensions Type
(mm) I II III IV
u 12.5 25 50 75
v 40 55 100 125
x (2) 25 40 50 65
y(1) 135 140 150 175
z (2) Depends on length of specimen
(1) For information purposes only.
(2) The value of z and x shall be such that the specimens can be machined

The thickness of the sand mould around the specimens shall be:
- Min. 40 mm for types I and II,
- Min. 80 mm for types IV

Figure 2

 n° 137-2012 M 6000 / 13
RCC-M - 2012 Edition M 6201

ANNEX 3

PUMP CASINGS

M 6000 / 14  n° 137-2012